JP2021074120A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game in a game machine capable of variably displaying identification information simultaneously by plural pattern display devices.SOLUTION: A game machine can start variation display of one identification information by one identification information display device during variation display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means from among first identification information display means and second identification information display means, and does not start variation display of one identification information based on one determination result corresponding to one identification information display means when timing for completing variation display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means overlaps with timing for starting variation display of one identification information by one identification information display means, and when the other determination result corresponding to the other identification information display means is identification for shifting to a special game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 196

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine called a pachinko gaming machine is known, and this pachinko gaming machine generally includes a gaming area in which a gaming ball launched on a gaming board can roll, and a starting area provided in this gaming area. , A symbol display device and a variable display control means for controlling the symbol display device are provided. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition such as that the gaming ball has passed through the starting area (winning of the starting opening of the gaming ball) is satisfied, the variable display control means controls the symbol display device to control the symbol display device. Identification information (for example, a special symbol described later) is displayed in a variable manner on the display area. Then, when the identification information finally derived and displayed on the display area of the symbol display device has a predetermined combination (specific display mode), the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player (so-called "big hit"). ”).

Further, conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine provided with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and provided with a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-150303

By the way, in recent years, pachinko gaming machines having a function of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time are required to enhance the interest of the game for such a function.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to play a game for such a function in a gaming machine having a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time. It is to provide technology that can enhance the interest of the game.

With the establishment of the first start condition as an opportunity, the first determination means for determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state advantageous to the player,
Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the first identification information display means for variablely displaying the first identification information, and the first identification information display means.
With the establishment of the second start condition as an opportunity, a second determination means for determining whether or not to shift the player to the advantageous special gaming state, and
A second identification information display means for variablely displaying the second identification information based on the determination result by the second determination means is provided.
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
In the specific case, the predetermined control flag is turned on so as not to start the variable display of the other identification information, and when the special gaming state executed based on the determination result of the one end is completed. , The predetermined control flag is turned off, and the variation display of the other identification information based on the determination result of the other is started.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, in a gaming machine having a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for such a function.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the selector provided in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the microprocessor in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram of various registers which a main CPU has in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the main control circuit in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the security mode of the main control circuit in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state between the bonus state and the non-bonus state of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section, the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination, etc. in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination, etc. in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the hit request flag storage area, and the winning operation flag storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the carry-over combination storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game state flag storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation stop button storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the pressing order storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the symbol code storage area in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, lottery number, and winning combination number in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, lottery number, and winning combination number in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the non-advantageous section in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in a normal advantageous section in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the line battle state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of various tables referred to in the line battle state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the ending effect performed in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between each game state, internal winning combination, and navigation data in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on (reset interrupt) processing executed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game return processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change confirmation processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change command generation storage process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the communication data storage process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the communication data pointer update process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the (external) processing at the time of power failure in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the checksum generation process (non-standard) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sum check process (non-standard) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sum check process (non-standard) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal insertion process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal insertion check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal insertion check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the error processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random number value acquisition processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol setting process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the compressed data storage process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order storage process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code acquisition process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the logical product operation processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order acquisition process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order acquisition process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning search process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the illegal hit check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning check, medal payout processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal payout number check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT check processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt process executed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the communication data transmission processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the WDT setting process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 7-segment LED drive processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 7-segment display data generation processing in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the timer update process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the example of the operation at the time of power-on of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the example of the operation at the time of inserting a medal of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 1) of the gametability of a gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 1) of the gametability of a gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 2) of the playability of a gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 3) of the playability of a gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 4) of the gametability of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 5) of the gametability of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 6) of the gametability of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 6) of the gametability of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows another example of the limiter of the advantageous section of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the control method of the number limiter of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the adjustment hitting method of the number limiter of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section of the gaming machine in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (gaming specification). It is a figure for demonstrating each mode in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of various tables in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of various tables in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination, etc. in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating each limit process in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a flowchart which shows the example of the cherry winning sound determination processing in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the mode suggestion effect (the 1) in one detailed example of another example (the 6) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the mode suggestion effect (the 2) in one detailed example of another example (the 6) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the mode suggestion effect (the 2) in one detailed example of another example (the 6) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the music production in pseudo-bonus in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of playability (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the state suggestion effect in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating another control example of a stable state and a rough wave state in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section of the gaming machine in another example (7) of game playability (gaming specification). It is a figure for demonstrating each game state in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the condition device which is established corresponding to the internal winning combination in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the condition device which is established corresponding to the internal winning combination in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the condition device which is established corresponding to the internal winning combination in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the condition device which is established corresponding to the internal winning combination in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in another example (the 7) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in another example (the 7) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in another example (the 7) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in another example (the 7) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence table (the 1) of the internal winning combination, push order, display combination, etc. in another example (7) of game playability (gaming specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence table (the 2) of the internal winning combination, the push order, the display combination, etc. in another example (7) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the sub-flag table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the pseudo-bonus in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the game mode lottery table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the stone level initial value lottery table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect mode of the stone displayed on the display device 11 in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stone level promotion lottery processing in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stone level promotion lottery processing in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the stone level promotion lottery table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the production mode of the stone level promotion lottery in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the stone point lottery table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the reward judge lottery table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the production mode in the stone level lottery and the reward judge lottery in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the high-probability transition lottery table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the high-accuracy game number lottery table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery table (rare role) in AT in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery table (in ultra-high accuracy) in AT in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the ultra-high probability transition lottery table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows the outline of the flow of the game during AT in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example which displayed the flow of the game in AT in another example (7) of game playability (game specification) on a display device. It is a figure which shows the outline of the flow of the game during AT in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example which displayed the flow of the game in AT in another example (7) of game playability (game specification) on a display device. It is a figure which shows the outline of the high probability transition in AT and the effect mode in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the addition icon effect lottery table in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the return procedure suggestion in another example (7) of game playability (game specification). It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure when the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention is connected to a test machine. The gaming machine of the second embodiment of the present invention is connected to a first interface board for a testing machine (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “IF1”) and a second interface board for a testing machine (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “IF2”). It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the case. It is a figure which shows the signal input to each terminal of the connector CN6 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal output from each terminal of the connector CN7 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal input to each terminal of the connector CN5 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal output from each terminal of the connector CN4 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal input to each terminal of the connector CN9 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal output from each terminal of the connector CN8 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal which is input / output from each terminal of the connector CN11 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal which is input / output from each terminal of the connector CN10 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal input to each terminal of the connector CN12 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal output from each terminal of the connector CN13 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal output from each terminal of the connector CN14 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal output from each terminal of the connector CN1 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal output from each terminal of the connector CN2 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal input to each terminal of the connector CN3 of IF1 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal output from each terminal of the connector CN1 of IF2 connected to the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the 1st structure of the main control board and IF1 at the time of the test of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the 2nd structure of the main control board and IF1 at the time of the test of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the cabinet side relay board, IF1 and a reel relay terminal board at the time of the test of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the door relay terminal board, IF1 and a main control board at the time of the test of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control board and IF2 at the time of the test of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the ON timing of the input request lamp signal of the gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st OFF timing of the turn-in request lamp signal of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd OFF timing of the turn-in request lamp signal of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the ON timing of the signal in the accessory continuous operation device which concerns on the type 1 special accessory of the gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the OFF timing of the signal in the accessory continuous operation device which concerns on the type 1 special accessory of the gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the ON timing of the signal in the accessory continuous operation device which concerns on the type 2 special accessory of the gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the OFF timing of the signal in the accessory continuous operation device which concerns on the type 2 special accessory of the gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the ON timing of the signal in the ordinary character of the gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the OFF timing of the signal in a normal accessory of the gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the ON timing of the signal in the type 1 / type 2 special accessory of the gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the OFF timing of the signal in the type 1 / type 2 special accessory of the gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern table which can be used in 3rd Embodiment. It is an external perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is an external perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram of various registers which the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention has. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the main control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the variation display of each special symbol at the time of simultaneous variation function operation in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol work area table in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol relation definition data table in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol work area table in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol relation definition data table in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the 1st special symbol work area table in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the external masqueradable interrupt processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting control processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st normal game pre-processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd normal game pre-processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal state monitoring process in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal state monitoring preprocessing in the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 1) which shows an example of the main control main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the main control main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 3) which shows an example of the main control main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 4) which shows an example of the main control main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the weight processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial setting process at startup in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting operation preprocessing in the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power failure process in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol-related timer update process in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation start processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game standby processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol variation end processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the special symbol variation end processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the end processing per special symbol in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation start processing in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game standby processing in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol fall determination processing in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol effect mode management process in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table, the special symbol variation pattern selection table group, and the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table used in another example of the effect variation table selection method. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game state setting process in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation end processing in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game state management process in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the end processing per special symbol in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal input to each terminal of the connector CN1 of the test relay terminal board connected to the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal input to each terminal of the connector CN5 of the test relay terminal board connected to the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal output from each terminal of the connector CN2 of the test relay terminal board connected to the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal output from each terminal of the connector CN3 of the test relay terminal board connected to the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the signal output from each terminal of the connector CN4 of the test relay terminal board connected to the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the schematic structure of the test relay terminal board connected to the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control circuit, the payout / launch control circuit, and the test relay terminal board at the time of the test of the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the filter provided in the test relay terminal board connected to the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control circuit and the test relay terminal board at the time of the test of the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the test relay terminal board connected to the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows various signals when the special electric accessory is operated by the 1st special symbol in the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows various signals when a special electric accessory is operated by a start port in the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows various signals when the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are operated by the special symbol in the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows various signals when the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are operated by passing through the specific area in the grand prize opening in the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. In the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment of the present invention, various signals when the condition device is operated by a special symbol and the accessory continuous operation device is operated by winning or passing through a winning opening other than the large winning opening or a specific gate. It is a timing chart which shows. In the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the condition device is activated by passing through a specific area in the large winning opening, and the accessory is continuously operated by winning or passing through a winning opening other than the large winning opening or a specific gate. It is a timing chart which shows various signals when a device operates. It is a timing chart which shows various signals when the ordinary electric accessory is operated by the ordinary symbol in the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows various signals at the time of a test in the case where the ordinary electric accessory operates by passing through the winning opening or the gate related to the ordinary electric accessory in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment of the present invention.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine having a bonus operation function, an AT function, and an ART function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium. In addition, the game medium may be referred to as "game value" or "game value".

When a medal is inserted into the pachislot machine by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined in advance. The types of symbol combinations are those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "missing". Such things are provided. In the following, the role related to the payout of medals will be referred to as a "small role", and the role related to the operation of the replay (replay) will be referred to as a "replay role". In addition, the role related to the operation of the bonus (bonus game) is also referred to as a "bonus role". In addition, a winning combination (that is, a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established) may be simply called a "winning combination", and the internal winning combination is a "winning combination", a "predetermined result", or Sometimes referred to as "derivation tolerance". Further, the internal lottery means may be referred to as a "combination determining means", a "winning combination determining means", a "predetermining means", or a "derivating allowable condition determining means".

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. The operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever shape such as a start lever, and any operation means may be used as long as the player can perform the start operation. .. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to a button shape such as a stop button, and any operation means may be used as long as the player can perform the stop operation. ..

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols to the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. Further, the reel stop control means uses a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line. The symbol displayed when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be referred to as "stop display" or "display result". Further, displaying a symbol on the effective line when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be expressed as "derivation of stop display" or "derivation of display result".

Further, the reel stop control means automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the reels rotate, even if the player does not perform the stop operation. Stop control may be performed. In this case, the reels are stopped without the player's stop operation, so even if one of the internal winning combinations is decided, the combination of symbols related to any winning is effective. It is desirable to stop the rotation of the reel so that it is not displayed along the line.

When all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped in this way, the winning determination means is such that the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line is related to winning (or other predetermined one). Determine if there is any. That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols related to the winning (or other predetermined combination of symbols) is established. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, the displayed combination of symbols is a combination of symbols related to winning (or other predetermined one) by the winning determination means (that is, a combination of symbols related to winning (or a combination of other predetermined symbols). ) Is established), a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player, or various controls are performed with that as an opportunity. In pachislot, the above series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

The winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line corresponds to any combination of symbols among a plurality of predetermined combinations of symbols. It may be present, or it may be determined whether or not it corresponds to the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means. That is, in the former, it may be determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols related to winning, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately stops and controls the stop, the prevention of the occurrence of erroneous winning can be sufficiently ensured, so that the control burden related to the detection of erroneous winning can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to winning is a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted, so that if an erroneous winning occurs due to a reel defect or the like, the erroneous winning is performed. Can be detected, so that security can be improved.

Further, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, various effects are produced by displaying an image by a display device, outputting light by various lamps, outputting sound by a speaker, or a combination of these. Is done.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for production is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later. Further, when the main control circuit described later determines the effect content, the effect content determining means may be one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, for example, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) is a game. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body (game machine main body) 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet (housing) 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door (front door) 2b to which an opening of the cabinet 2a can be opened and closed.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means, display row) are provided side by side in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (main reel) is also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (rotation direction of the reel). In addition, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R may be expressed as "design display means", "variable display means", "variable display" and the like. Further, as these components, the symbol display area 4 described later may be included. Further, the "design" may be any information that can be visually identified by the player, and may be expressed as "identification information" in that sense.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a waist panel 12, and a pedestal portion 13. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachislot machine 1. The cabinet 2a can be simply referred to as a "box body", and the front door 2b can be simply referred to as a "door" or a "front door". Further, since the cabinet 2a functions as a frame body for supporting or fixing the front door 2b, it may be expressed as a "support body", a "support frame", or a "fixed frame". Further, the front door 2b may be composed of a plurality of door members. For example, it may be composed of an upper door member attached to the upper side of the opening of the cabinet 2a and a lower door member attached to the lower side of the opening of the cabinet 2a, or may be configured when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine. The inner door member attached to the opening side of the cabinet 2a and the outer door member attached to the front side of the gaming machine may be used.

The front panel 10 is provided on the upper part of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is composed of a frame-shaped member having an opening 10a. The opening 10a of the front panel 10 is closed by the display device cover 30, and the display device cover 30 is arranged to face the display device 11 which will be described later and is arranged inside the cabinet 2a.

The display device cover 30 is made of a black translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 described later through the display device cover 30. Further, in the present embodiment, by forming the display device cover 30 with a black translucent synthetic resin, the entry of external light into the cabinet 2a is suppressed, and the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 is suppressed. Is clearly visible.

A lamp group 21 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, the lamps 21a and 21b provided on the upper part of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side. Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is composed of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like (see LED group 85 in FIG. 6 described later), and lights are turned on and off in a pattern corresponding to the effect content.

The waist panel 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the door body 9. The waist panel 12 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source (LED included in the LED group 85 described later) that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

The pedestal portion 13 is provided between the front panel 10 and the waist panel 12. The pedestal portion 13 has a symbol display area 4, various devices to be operated by the player (medal insertion slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, 3 stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, settlement button (not shown), etc.) are provided.

The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position on the player side of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the three reels. A predetermined area in 3L, 3C, and 3R can be visually recognized. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the symbol display area 4 can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

The reel display window 4 is arranged continuously among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped. It is configured so that one symbol is displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, one symbol is provided in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 (three in total). ) Is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, the design is displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns).

Then, in the present embodiment, within the frame of the reel display window 4, the line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R, and the left reel 3L. The upper area, the upper area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R (top line), the lower area of the left reel 3L, the lower area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower area of the right reel 3R. The line connecting the reels (bottom line) is defined (specified) as an effective line for determining whether or not a prize is won. The effective line may also be referred to as a "winning line" or a "judgment line".

In the present embodiment, for example, a line connecting the lower region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R (cross-up line), and the left reel 3L. A line (cross-down line) connecting the upper region, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the lower region of the right reel 3R may be further defined as an effective line. Further, in the present embodiment, the effective lines are the above-mentioned three lines (or may be five lines as described here), but the number of the lines can be increased or decreased as appropriate. For example, only one center line may be an effective line, or only two lines, a top line and a bottom line, may be effective lines. Further, when defining an effective line, it is possible to define as an effective line instead of each line in which the above-mentioned symbols are arranged in a straight line, or at the same time, a line in which the symbols are not arranged in a straight line is defined as an effective line. That is, if the line passes through (the area of) any one of the symbols in each row (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, right reel 3R), one or a plurality of lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines are connected. It can be set as a valid line.

For example, a line (irregular line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the lower region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R may be defined as an effective line. That is, in the present embodiment, since the symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns in the frame of the reel display window 4, it is possible to define 27 effective lines. , At least one of them may be defined as a valid line.

The reel display window 4 is formed by the opening of the frame member 31 provided in the pedestal portion 13. Further, a pedestal region having a substantially horizontal plane is provided below the frame member 31 that defines the reel display window 4. When viewed from the player side, the medal insertion slot 14 is provided on the right side of the pedestal area, and the MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided on the left side.

The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 14 are used in one game up to a preset predetermined number (for example, 3), and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. (So-called credit function (game medium storage means)).

The MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided to determine the number of medals to be used for one game from the medals deposited inside the cabinet 2a. Inside the MAX bet button 15a, a bet button LED (not shown) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided. In addition, the settlement button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

When the player presses the MAX bet button 15a, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button 15b is pressed once. When the 1-bet button 15b is operated three times, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

In the following, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, the operation of the 1-bet button 15b, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 14 (operations of inserting medals to perform a game) are all referred to as "insertion operations".

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are also referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, an information display 6 is provided at substantially the center of the pedestal region on the substantially horizontal plane below the reel display window 4. The information display 6 is covered with a transparent window cover (not shown).

The information display 6 is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the number of medals to be paid out to the player (hereinafter referred to as "the number of medals to be paid out") as a privilege. For digitally displaying (notifying) information such as (hereinafter referred to as "7-segment LED") and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as "credit number") to the player. A 2-digit 7-segment LED is provided. In the present embodiment, the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the occurrence of an error and the error type to the player. Is also used. Therefore, when an error occurs, the display mode of the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is switched from the display mode of the number of medals to be paid out to the display mode of the information of the error type.

Further, the information display 6 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation necessary for displaying the symbol combination according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. ing. The instruction monitor (instruction display) is composed of, for example, a two-digit 7-segment LED. Then, the instruction monitor notifies the player of the necessary stop operation information by turning on, blinking, or turning off the two-digit 7-segment LED in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the stop operation information to be notified. To do.

The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified here is, for example, in the case of notifying the push order "1st (performing the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)". When the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order "2nd (perform the first stop operation on the middle reel 3C)" is notified, the numerical value "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order is displayed. When notifying "3rd (performing the first stop operation on the right reel 3R)", the numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor. The mode of notifying the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor (navigation data determined on the main side described later) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45 and the like described later.

Further, the information display 6 is a state display (not shown) for notifying that the information display 6 is an advantageous section advantageous for the player (including a “normal advantageous section” and an “advantageous section” described later; see FIG. 14 described later). Is provided. The status display is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED. As a general rule, the status indicator lights up at a predetermined timing during the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section (for example, any timing from the start of the game to the end of the game), and the advantageous section continues. While it is on, the lighting continues. Then, when the advantageous section ends, the lighting ends and the lights go out. As a result, all the players are notified that the advantageous section that is advantageous to the player starts, that the advantageous section is in the advantageous section, and that the advantageous section ends, so that the fairness of the game is ensured. ..

As shown in FIG. 6 described later, the information display 6 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the game operation display board 81, and the display operation of the information display 6 is mainly performed. It is controlled by the main control circuit 90 described later in the control board 71. Further, the control method of the various 7-segment LEDs described above is dynamic lighting control.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, another means controlled by the sub-control board 72 is used to notify the information of the stop operation. Specifically, the information on the stop operation is notified by the display device 11 described later, which is composed of the projector mechanism 211 and the display unit 212 (see FIGS. 3 and 6 described later) described later.

When such a configuration is applied, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be different from each other. That is, the instruction monitor may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, the numerical value "1" in the instruction monitor. Even if is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said that the notification is direct). On the other hand, in the notification on the sub side (sub control board side) by other means such as the display device 11 described later, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, the instruction monitor displays a numerical value "1" that uniquely corresponds to the push order to be notified, but other means (for example, the display device 11 or the like) display the left reel 3L. The instruction information for performing the first stop operation may be directly notified to the user.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 having such a configuration, it is possible to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination not only by the control of the sub control board 72 but also by the control of the main control board 71. In addition, the presence or absence of notification of such stop operation information can be controlled according to the gaming state. For example, it is possible that the stop operation information is not notified in the game state (normal state) in the normal section described later, and the stop operation information can be notified in each game state in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section described later. it can.

Further, a sub display device 18 is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub-display device 18 is provided so as to stand substantially perpendicular to the pedestal region of the pedestal portion 13 in a substantially horizontal plane in the front portion of the door body 9. The sub-display device 18 is composed of a liquid crystal display and an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various information.

Further, a touch sensor 19 is provided on the display surface of the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 6 described later). The touch sensor 19 operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives an operation of a player, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of enabling the display of the sub-display device 18 to be switched according to the player's operation (touch input information output from the touch sensor 19) received via the touch sensor 19. Has. The sub display device 18 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 19.

At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout outlet 24, a medal tray 25, two speaker holes 20L, 20R, and the like are provided. The medal payout outlet 24 guides the medals discharged by driving the hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. Further, sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the production are output from the two speaker holes 20L and 20R.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet 2a, FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the internal structure on the back surface side of the front door 2b, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the internal structure on the back surface side of the front door 2b, which will be described later. It is a figure which shows the structure of a selector 66.

As shown in FIG. 3, the cabinet 2a has a top plate 27a, a bottom plate 27b, left and right side plates 27c and 27d, and a back plate 27e. A display device 11 is arranged in the upper part of the cabinet 2a.

The display device 11 has a projector mechanism 211 and a box-shaped projected member 212a on which the image light projected from the projector mechanism 211 is projected, and displays an image by projection mapping. Specifically, the display device 11 generates image light based on the position (projection distance, angle, etc.) and shape of the projected member 212a, which is a three-dimensional object, and the image light is emitted by the projector mechanism 211 to the projected member. It is projected on the surface of 212a. By providing such an effect function, it is possible to perform an advanced and powerful effect. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, another projected member having a curved display surface is provided on the back side of the box-shaped projected member 212a, and one of the projected members is provided depending on the gaming state. , Used as a screen on which video light is projected. Therefore, the inside of the cabinet 2a is also provided with a function (not shown) for switching the projected member according to the gaming state. The display device 11 may use various other display devices (for example, a liquid crystal display device) as long as it is a device capable of displaying an image for the player.

A medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device) 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged in the lower part of the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 27b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds, for example, 50, or when the settlement button is pressed and the settlement of medals is executed. Then, the medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. Further, the medal auxiliary storage 52 is detachably attached to the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (power supply means) (see FIG. 6 described later). The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 27c. The power supply device 53 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the sub power supply device (not shown) into the DC voltage power required by each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

Further, above the power supply device 53 in the cabinet 2a, a sub-control board case 57 for accommodating the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) is arranged. A sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 to be described later) described later is mounted on the sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57. The sub-control circuit 200 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described later.

The sub-relay board 61 is arranged above the sub-control board case 57 in the cabinet 2a. The sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and the main control board 71, which will be described later, is mounted. Further, the sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and the boards arranged around the sub-control board 72, various device units (units), and the like is mounted.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a cabinet-side relay board 44 (see FIG. 6 described later) is arranged in the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (see FIG. 6 described later), and a medal payout count switch (not shown). It is a relay board on which the wiring for connecting the above is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 4, a middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the front door 2b on the back surface side, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 2) is attached so as to be openable and closable from the back side. Although not shown in FIG. 4, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41, and the main control is on the side of the middle door 41 opposite to the reel display window 4 side. A main control board case 55 in which the board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later) is housed is attached. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 90 (see FIGS. 7 and 8 described later) described later. The main control circuit 90 (main control means) is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot machine 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and determining whether or not there is a prize. .. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the main control circuit 90 also controls processing related to determination regarding AT or ART, display processing of navigation information on an instruction monitor, transmission processing of various test signals, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 90 will be described later.

Speakers 65L and 65R are arranged below the middle door 41 on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The speakers 65L and 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 20L and 20R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are arranged above the speaker 65R. The selector 66 is a device that detects medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14, and also is a device that selects whether or not the inserted medals are appropriate medals, and is selected as an appropriate medal. In that case, the medal is guided to the hopper device 51 side and driven so as to be housed in the hopper device 51, and if it is selected as not a proper medal, the medal is moved to the medal payout outlet 24 side. Is guided and driven so that the medal is discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. That is, the selector 66 is also a device that distributes the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 to the hopper device 51 side or the medal payout outlet 24 side.

As shown in FIG. 5, the selector 66 includes a base 803 on which a medal rail (medal passage) 802 through which medals pass is formed, and a select plate that guides the inserted medals to the hopper device 51 side or the medal payout outlet 24 side. 804, a medal pusher 805 that pushes the inserted medal to the medal payout outlet 24 side when the inserted medal is not an appropriate medal, and an upstream medal sensor (first) that detects the inserted medal on the upstream side of the medal rail 802. It includes a medal sensor) 806 and a downstream medal sensor (second medal sensor) 807 that detects the inserted medal on the downstream side of the medal rail 802.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 5, the selector 66 has a medal guide (which forms a medal flow path from the selector 66 to the hopper device 51 when the medal is guided to the hopper device 51 side by the select plate 804. (Not shown) and a cancel chute (not shown) that forms a medal flow path from the selector 66 to the medal payout outlet 24 when the medal is placed on the medal payout outlet 24 side by the select plate 804 can be attached and detached. It is attached.

The select plate 804 is driven by a solenoid (not shown) included in the selector 66. The select plate 804 moves to a guide position that guides the passing medal to the hopper device 51 side when the solenoid is driven, but does not guide the passing medal to the hopper device 51 side when the solenoid is not driven. Move to the discharge position (that is, guide to the medal payout outlet 24 side). Specifically, when the solenoid is driven, the select plate 804 moves in the rearward direction of the pachi-slot 1 to guide the upper part of the medal, while when the solenoid is not driven, the select plate 804 is the pachi-slot 1. It is designed not to move forward and guide above the medal. The medal guide method using the select plate 804 is not limited to this, and for example, the guide position and the discharge position can be moved by using a mechanism that can move the pachislot 1 in the vertical direction. You may. That is, the select plate 804 has a guide position that does not prevent the passing medal from moving to the hopper device 51 side on the medal rail 802 by a solenoid or other drive source, and the passing medal moves to the hopper device 51 side. Any mechanism can be adopted as long as it is a mechanism that prevents the movement from being performed and enables the transfer to the discharge position that guides the medal payout outlet 24 side.

For example, when the select plate 804 is moved to the guide position, the medal pusher 805 operates so as not to protrude in the rearward direction of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the select plate 804 is not moved to the guide position (discharge position). In the case of (moving to), it operates so as to protrude in the rearward direction of the pachislot machine 1. That is, when the medal pusher 805 is in a position where it does not protrude in the rearward direction of the pachislot 1, it becomes a guide position for guiding the passing medal toward the hopper device 51, and when it is in a position where it protrudes in the rearward direction of the pachislot 1. It is a discharge position that does not guide the passing medal to the hopper device 51 side (that is, guides it to the medal payout outlet 24 side).

The upstream medal sensor 806 and the downstream medal sensor 807 constitute a game medium detecting means for detecting that a medal has passed. Each medal sensor is composed of, for example, a pair or a plurality of pairs of light emitting elements and a reflective sensor composed of a light receiving element, irradiates the medal with light from the light emitting element, and emits the reflected light reflected from the medal. When the light receiving element receives light, the passage of the medal is detected. The configuration of the sensor can be changed as appropriate, and for example, a transmissive sensor or the like can be adopted. Further, the passage of medals may be detected only by the downstream medal sensor 807 without providing the upstream medal sensor 806. Further, specific control based on the detection result (medal sensor input state) of each medal sensor will be described later.

The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged diagonally to the lower left of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is arranged on the back surface of the front door 2b, which is a region opened and closed by the middle door 41 and below the reel display window 4 (FIG. 4 described later). 6). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub relay board 61, a selector 66, a game operation display board 81, a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and the like. This is a relay board on which wiring for connecting each of the second interface boards 302 for a testing machine is mounted. Examples of the various buttons and switches include the MAX bet button 15a, the 1-bet button 15b, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, the BET switch 77 described later, the start switch 79, and the like.

<Control system provided by pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 54 (setting switch), and a cabinet-side relay board 44 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, a reset switch 76, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 44. Since the configuration of the hopper device 51 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The setting key type switch 54 is provided in the main control board case 55. The setting key type switch 54 is used when changing the setting value (setting 1 to setting 6) of the pachi-slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1. The set value indicates the degree of the player's advantage in the game, and usually, the lower the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 1), the lower the degree of the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage of the player. In the present embodiment, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the bonus combination described later, and the degree of the player's advantage can be changed. The higher the set value, the higher the AT or ART described later. It is also possible to change the degree of advantage of the player by increasing the winning probability of the lottery.

The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the main control board 71, the external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the medal auxiliary storage switch 75, the reset switch 76, and the power supply device 53 is mounted. Is. The external centralized terminal plate 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52, and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals. The reset switch 76 is used, for example, when changing the setting of the pachislot machine 1.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b and a power supply switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1. The power supply board 53b is connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44, and is also connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, and a settlement switch 78, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, an auxiliary relay board 61, a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and a second interface board 302 for a testing machine. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub-relay board 61 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The BET switch 77 (throwing operation detecting means) detects that the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b is pressed by the player. The checkout switch 78 detects that the checkout button (not shown) has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel and a circuit for displaying the stoptable main reel by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch (not shown). The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display (7-segment display) 6 and the LED 82. The LED 82 has, for example, three LEDs (hereinafter, "first LED" to "1st LED") for displaying the number of medals inserted, which are lit according to the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as "the number of inserted medals"). An LED that lights a mark indicating that medals can be inserted, a mark indicating the start of a game, a mark for replaying a game, etc., based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81 (referred to as "third LED"). Etc. are included. In the first LED to the third LED (display means), when one medal is inserted, the first LED lights up, and when two medals are inserted, the first and second LEDs light up, and three medals (game). When the number of startable medals is turned on, the first LED to the third LED are turned on. Since the information display 6 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Both the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine are relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the testing machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot 1 (test firing test). Since these relay boards are not mounted on the Pachislot 1 as a release product for sale, the main control circuit 90 of the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the testing machine. Various electronic components required for connecting to the second interface board 302 for use are also not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling a main operation related to a game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and is determined by, for example, a main control board 71. The test signal and the like related to the pushed order navigation are output via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub-relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a speaker group 84, an LED group 85, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63, a touch sensor 19, and a display unit 212 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61. Since the touch sensor 19 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The speaker group 84 includes speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED group 85 includes a lamp group 21 provided on the front panel 10, a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel of the lumbar panel 12 from the back side, and the like. The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 stores the open / close history information of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 200) when the middle door 41 is opened. The display unit 212 includes, for example, a projected member 212a constituting the display device 11 and another projected member having a curved display surface provided on the back side of the projected member 212a.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 86 and a liquid crystal relay board 87 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub-control board case 57 together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, image (video) for production, audio (speaker group 84), light (LED group 85), and communication data. .. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72, the projector mechanism 211 constituting the display device 11, and the sub-display device 18. Since the projector mechanism 211 and the sub-display device 18 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 90 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 90 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 90 functions as a game control unit that controls game operations, and includes a microprocessor 91, a clock pulse generation circuit 92, a power management circuit 93, a switching regulator 94 (power supply means), and a role ratio monitor (power supply means). (Not shown).

The microprocessor 91 is a microprocessor with a security function for a gaming machine. The microprocessor 91 of the present embodiment is provided with various instruction codes (hereinafter, referred to as "main CPU 101 dedicated instruction codes") specific to the microprocessor 91 that can be specified in the program. In the present embodiment, the processing efficiency and the reduction of the program capacity are realized by using the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101. The internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 8 described later, and the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101 provided in the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail in various processes executed by the main control circuit described later. To do.

The clock pulse generation circuit 92 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the microprocessor 91. The microprocessor 91 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power supply management circuit 93 manages fluctuations in the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 53b (see FIG. 6). Then, the power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal to the "XSRST" terminal of the microprocessor 91, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the starting voltage value (10V) from 0V). When a power failure occurs (when the power supply voltage falls below the power failure voltage value (10.5V) from 12V), the power failure detection signal is output to the "XINT" terminal of the microprocessor 91. That is, the power management circuit 93 is a means (starting means) for outputting a reset signal (starting signal) to the microprocessor 91 when the power is turned on, and a power failure detection signal (power failure signal) to the microprocessor 91 when a power failure occurs. Also serves as a means for outputting (power failure means).

The switching regulator 94 is a DC / DC conversion circuit, generates a DC drive voltage (power supply voltage of DC 5 V) of the microprocessor 91, and outputs the generated DC drive voltage to the “VCC” terminal of the microprocessor 91.

The combination monitor (not shown) is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and the calculation circuit 107 described later calculates a predetermined ratio with respect to the total result related to the game information aggregated by the main CPU 101 described later. , The result of the ratio calculation is displayed as the ratio information. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of ratio calculations are performed, and the combination ratio monitor sequentially displays a plurality of types of ratio information based on the results.

In the upper two digits of the role ratio monitor, "abbreviation" which is the type information indicating the type of the ratio information is displayed, and in the lower two digits, the "ratio" which is the ratio information corresponding to the type information is displayed. It is supposed to be displayed. For example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "U" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "7U"). (When is displayed), the ART function that occupies the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) is activated (that is, a stop operation that is advantageous for the player) as ratio information in the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor. The ratio of the number of games (advantageous section ratio) (of the advantageous section in which the procedure of) was notified is displayed. Specifically, when the effective section ratio is 10%, "1" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "0" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed. The advantageous section ratio may display the ratio of the number of games in which the AT function and the ART function are activated.

Further, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "Y" is displayed. (When "6Y" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor, as ratio information, the combination of the characters in the number of game media paid out during the specific total number of games (6000 times) is continuous. An actuating device (BB in the present embodiment; if a bonus continuous actuating device (MB) for continuously operating a second-class special accessory (CB) is mounted, the same applies hereinafter). The ratio of the number of game media to be paid out by operating (medium-time continuous combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time continuous combination ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "9" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "Y" is displayed. (When "7Y" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor, as ratio information, all the roles in the number of game media paid out during the specific total number of games (6000 times). A thing (BB in this embodiment. In addition to the above-mentioned MB, when the above-mentioned first-class special accessory (RB) is mounted alone, the above-mentioned second-class special accessory (CB) is alone. If it is installed, if a normal accessory (SB) is installed, all of them are included. The same shall apply hereinafter) and the ratio of the number of game media paid out (medium-time accessory ratio) ) Is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time bonus ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "9" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "A" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "Abbreviation" (When "6A" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor, as ratio information, the combination of the characters in the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) is continuous. The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the operating device (total consecutive combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the total joint combination ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "5" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "A" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "Abbreviation" (When "7A" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor, as ratio information, all the combinations in the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times). The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the object (total accessory ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the total accessory ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "5" in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the main control circuit 90 directly includes the combination monitor is described as an example, but the display content of the combination monitor is controlled by the main control circuit 90. It is sufficient if the display content can be recognized when necessary (for example, when the main control board case 55 is visually recognized), and a configuration that the main control circuit 90 does not directly provide can be adopted. For example, the combination monitor may be connected to the game operation display board 81, and the main control circuit 90 may control the display contents via the game operation display board 81. Further, in this case, the role ratio monitor is also used as the information display 6, the LED 82, or the instruction monitor (instruction display), and one or more of them are used to display the predetermined ratio information. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the predetermined ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the advantageous section ratio, the medium-time continuous combination ratio, the medium-time bonus ratio, the total consecutive combination ratio, and the total bonus ratio are given as examples. As described above, ratio information other than these may be displayed. For example, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the ART function to the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total advantageous section acquisition ratio). , The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the ART function to the number of game media paid out during a specific total number of games (6000 times) (medium time advantageous section acquisition ratio) , The ratio of the number of games in which the character continuous operation device is activated (the ratio of the middle-time continuous combination section) to the specific total number of games (6000 times), and the ratio of the specific total number of games (6000 times). The ratio of the number of games in which all the bonuses are activated (medium-time bonus section ratio), and the ratio of the number of games in which the continuous bonus activator is activated to the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total continuous combination section) The ratio), the ratio of the number of games in which all the bonuses are operated (total bonus section ratio), etc., among the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) can also be displayed by performing the predetermined ratio calculation.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the parameter (denominator) of the predetermined ratio information displayed on the combination ratio monitor, the predetermined total number of games is set to "175,000 times" and the specific total number of games is set to "6000 times". However, the predetermined total number of games and the specific total number of games are not limited to this. For example, as the parameter (denominator) for calculating a part or all of the various ratios described above, the predetermined total number of games may be set to "17,500 times" and the specific total number of games may be set to "3000 times". .. However, various types of gaming machines are installed and operated in game stores, and the optimum number of games for ratio calculation may differ. Therefore, the number of each game for calculating the various ratios described above is described above. It is not limited to the one that has been used, but can be changed as appropriate. In this case, the number of games that can be the parameter (denominator) and the number of children (numerator) for calculating a part or all of the various ratios can be arbitrarily set on the game store side. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the ART function is not included in all the accessories targeted in the medium-time bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio, but the operation of the ART function is a bonus. It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the medium-time bonus and the total bonus ratio by regarding the operation of. It goes without saying that even if the information is other than the above, as long as it is useful information, the two values can be aggregated to perform the ratio calculation, and the result of the ratio calculation can be displayed as the ratio information. Absent. Further, in the description of the role ratio monitor, the part described as "the operation of the ART function" may include "the operation of the AT function" or may be excluded.

<Microprocessor>
Next, the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the microprocessor 91.

The microprocessor 91 includes a main CPU 101 (arithmetic processing unit), a main ROM 102 (first storage unit), a main RAM 103 (second storage unit), an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, and the like. It has an arithmetic circuit 107, a random number circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, a first serial communication circuit 114, and a second serial communication circuit 115. Each of these parts constituting the microprocessor 91 is connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the clock pulse generated by the clock circuit 105 to perform control related to the overall game operation. Here, reel stop control will be described as an example of the control operation of the main CPU 101.

The main CPU 101 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (main reel) after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 101 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each reel and interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion due to rotation of each main reel. It is detected by the provided reel position detection unit (not shown).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (main reel) will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 103. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 103 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control program. The internal configuration (memory map) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 11 described later.

The external bus interface 104 is for electrically connecting the microprocessor 91 to an external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, reels and the like) provided outside the microprocessor 91 are connected. It is an interface circuit. The clock circuit 105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), and a clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from the clock pulse generation circuit 92 is transmitted by another component (for example, a timer circuit 113). Convert to a clock pulse signal of the frequency used. The clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

The reset controller 106 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) and the WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power supply management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. For example, when executing a "MUL" instruction on a program, the arithmetic circuit 107 executes a multiplication process based on the "MUL" instruction.

The random number circuit 110 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Although not shown, the random number circuit 110 obtains a random number register 0 for obtaining a 2-byte hard-latch random number, a random number register 1 for obtaining a 2-byte soft-latch random number, and a 1-byte soft-latch random number. It is composed of random number registers 2 to 7. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from the random numbers in a predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random number value for internal lottery. The parallel port 111 is a signal port (memory map I / O) input / output between the microprocessor 91 and various circuits (for example, power management circuit 93, etc.) provided outside the microprocessor 91. .. The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112. The start switch 79 is also connected to any of the input ports of PI0 to PI4 of the parallel port 111, and latches from the parallel port 111 to the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 at the timing (on-edge) when the start switch 79 is turned on. A signal is output. Then, in the random number circuit 110, the random number register 0 is latched by the input of the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired.

The interrupt controller 112 interrupts processing by the main CPU 101 based on a power failure detection signal input from the power management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a timeout signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a cycle of 1.1172 ms. Controls the execution timing of. When a power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 sends an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 101. Output to. The main CPU 101 has an input port check process, a reel control process, a communication data transmission process, a 7-segment LED drive process, and a timer based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to a timeout signal from the timer circuit 113. Various interrupt processing such as update processing (see FIG. 79 described later) is performed.

The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (a clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a divider (not shown)) ( Count the elapsed time). Then, the timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data (various control commands (commands)) are transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72. The second serial communication circuit 115 is a circuit that controls the serial transmission operation when data is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

<Sub-control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-control means) mounted on the sub-control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 200 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 200 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 90, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub-control circuit 200 functions as an effect control unit that controls the effect operation, and basically includes a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 202, a rendering processor 203, a drawing RAM 204, and a driver 205.

The sub CPU 201 is connected to the ROM cartridge board 86. The driver 205 is connected to the liquid crystal relay board 87. That is, the driver 205 is connected to the projector mechanism 211 and the sub display device 18 via the liquid crystal relay board 87.

The sub CPU 201 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM cartridge board 86 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 201 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, the main board communication task for controlling the communication with the main control circuit 90 and the effect registration for extracting the random value for the effect and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Contains various programs for executing tasks. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task that controls the display of an image by the display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task that controls the output of light by a light source such as the LED group 85, and a sound by the speaker group 84. It also includes various programs for executing voice control tasks and the like that control the output of the LED.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like.

The sub RAM 202 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as a sub flag (internal winning combination) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

The sub CPU 201, the rendering processor 203, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 204, and the driver 205 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and /. Alternatively, it is displayed on the sub display device 18. The display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and the sub-display device 18 are individually controlled by the sub-control board 72.

Further, the sub CPU 201 causes the speaker group 84 to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 201 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<Various registers of the main CPU>
Next, various registers included in the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 10 is a schematic configuration diagram of various registers included in the main CPU 101.

As the main register, the main CPU 101 includes an accumulator A (hereinafter referred to as "A register"), a flag register F (flag register), a general-purpose register B (hereinafter referred to as "B register"), and a general-purpose register C (hereinafter referred to as "B register"). General-purpose register D (hereinafter referred to as "D register"), general-purpose register E (hereinafter referred to as "E register"), general-purpose register H (hereinafter referred to as "H register"), and general-purpose register L (hereinafter referred to as "H register"). , "L register"). Further, as sub-registers, the main CPU 101 includes an accumulator A', a flag register F', a general-purpose register B', a general-purpose register C', a general-purpose register D', a general-purpose register E', a general-purpose register H', and a general-purpose register L'. As a general-purpose register. Each register is composed of 1-byte registers.

Further, in the present embodiment, the B register and the C register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as “BC register”), and the D register and the E register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as “DE register”). Further, in the present embodiment, the H register and the L register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as “HL register”).

As shown in FIG. 10, predetermined flag information indicating the result of arithmetic processing and the like is set in each bit of the flag registers F and F'. For example, bit 6 (D6) is set with data (zero flag) indicating whether or not the calculation result is "0" in the calculation result determination process. Specifically, when the calculation result is "0", the data "1" is set in the bit 6, and when the calculation result is not "0", the data "0" is set in the bit 6. Then, in the calculation result determination process, the main CPU 101 makes a determination (YES / NO) with reference to the bit 6 data “0” / “1”.

Further, the main CPU 101 has an expansion register Q (hereinafter, referred to as “Q register”). The Q register is composed of a 1-byte register. In this embodiment, as described in various processing flows described later, various main CPU 101 dedicated instruction codes for specifying an address using this Q register are provided in the program, and the instruction code of this instruction code is provided. By using it, processing efficiency is improved and the capacity of the main ROM 102 is reduced. In various main CPU 101 dedicated instruction codes that specify an address using the Q register, the address data (address value) on the upper side of the address is stored in the Q register. Immediately after the reset of the main CPU 101, "F0H" is set in the Q register as an initial value. Further, in the "LDQ, n (8-bit data)" instruction using the Q register, the value of the Q register is changed by setting arbitrary 1-byte data in "n" and executing the instruction. Can be done.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes an interrupt page address register I and a memory refresh register R composed of 1-byte registers, and an index register IX and an index register IY composed of 2-byte registers. , The stack pointer SP and the program counter PC are provided as dedicated registers.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as “memory maps”) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11A to 11C. 11A is a diagram showing a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a memory map of the main ROM 102, and FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a memory map of the main RAM 103.

In the memory map of the entire memory included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), as shown in FIG. 11A, from the head (0000H) side of the address, the memory area of the main ROM 102, the memory area of the main RAM 103, the built-in register area, and so on. The XCS decoding areas are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order with an unused area in between.

In the memory map of the main ROM 102, as shown in FIG. 11B, the program area, the data area, the non-standard area, the trademark recording area, the program management area, and the security setting area are displayed from the head (0000H) side of the address of the main ROM 102. In order, they are arranged at predetermined addresses.

In the program area, control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored. In the data area, various data used by the main CPU 101 (for example, a data table such as an internal lottery table, and various types for the sub-control circuit 200 in various control processes related to the playability of the game performed by the player). Data for transmitting control commands (commands), etc.) are stored. That is, the game ROM area (game storage area) composed of the program area and the data area is necessary for the control process (process related to the game property) related to the game playability of the game actually performed by the player at the game store. Various programs and various data are stored.

Further, in the non-standard area, control programs and data of various processes (processes that do not affect the playability) that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored. For example, programs and data used in the pachislot 1 certification test (test firing test), control programs and data used in checksum generation processing when power is cut off, thumb check processing when power is restored, and fraud countermeasure programs. And the data required for it are stored in the non-standard area.

Further, in the program management area and the security setting area, various settings and management information related to the execution of the control program or the security function are stored. For example, setting and management information of the start address and end address (that is, data range) of the control program stored in the program area, setting and management information of the number of addresses of the RAM area that can be read, WDT reset setting and management information, Interrupt setting and management information, read permission / non-permission setting and management information of the control program stored in the program area, setting and management information related to activation and update method of the random number circuit 110, and security mode setting described later. And management information and the like are stored in the program management area and the security setting area. In the present embodiment, other settings and management information not related to the security function are stored in the program management area, and settings and management information related to the security function are stored in the security setting area. For example, these settings and management information may be stored as a single management area.

In the memory map of the main RAM 103, as shown in FIG. 11C, the game RAM area (predetermined storage area, game temporary storage area) and the non-standard RAM area (non-standard temporary) from the head (F000H) side of the address of the main RAM 103. Storage areas) are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order.

The game RAM area is provided with a work area and a stack area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program related to the game playability performed by the player. .. Then, each of the various data is stored in the work area of a predetermined address in the game RAM area.

Further, the non-standard RAM area is provided with a non-standard work area that is a work area for various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player, and a non-standard stack. In the present embodiment, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player, such as a thumb check process, are executed using this non-standard RAM area.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are used for the game in the main ROM 102. It is stored in a non-standard ROM area (non-standard storage area) located at an address different from the ROM area. In addition, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by such a player are performed in the main RAM 103 using an out-of-specification RAM area arranged at an address different from the game RAM area. ..

In such a configuration of the main ROM 102, programs and data unnecessary for the game itself actually played by the player are arranged in the ROM area (non-standard ROM area) where the program or the like cannot be arranged according to the conventional rules. can do. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the gaming ROM area.

<Security mode>
Next, a security mode, which is a part of the security function of the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the security mode.

The security mode is, for example, an operating state in which the microprocessor 91 operates when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on and a reset signal is input from the power management circuit 93. During this security mode, the startup of the main CPU 101 is delayed for a period corresponding to the setting stored in the security setting area (that is, the main CPU 101 starts execution of the process at power-on (see FIG. 46 described later). Delay that). By starting the main CPU 101 through this security mode, the security of the microprocessor 91 is ensured, and the time required for the start control at the time of turning on the power is secured to stably start the main CPU 101.

In the present embodiment, for example, the reset controller 106 can delay the startup of the main CPU 101 by delaying the reset signal input when the power is turned on for a predetermined period, and the interrupt controller 112 can delay the startup of the main CPU 101. It is also possible to delay the startup of the main CPU 101 by delaying the interrupt permission of the reset interrupt process (see FIG. 46 described later) at the time of turning on the power for a predetermined period. It is also possible for each controller to work together to delay the startup of the main CPU 101. Further, for example, a delay circuit may be provided in the microprocessor 91 (or in the reset controller 106 or the interrupt controller 112), and the delay circuit may delay the startup of the main CPU 101. That is, the configuration (security unit) that executes the security function in the microprocessor 91 can be appropriately modified and applied according to the specifications.

As shown in FIG. 12, the delay period in the security mode can be set to a fixed extension time (fixed period) and a random extension time (variable period). In the present embodiment, for example, by selecting and setting one of the modes 1 to 8 in which different fixed extension times are associated with each other, one fixed extension from a plurality of fixed extension times is set. The time can be set, and by selecting and setting one of the modes 1 to 4 in which different random extension time ranges are associated with each other, a plurality of random extension time ranges can be set. It is possible to set a range of one random extension time from the inside.

For example, when "mode 4" is selected as the fixed extension time and "mode 4" is selected as the random extension time, and these settings are stored in the security setting area, the microprocessor 91 turns on the power of the pachislot 1. When the reset signal is input from the power management circuit 93, first, the start-up of the main CPU 101 is delayed for about 4 seconds (4000 ms) as the fixed extension time, and then the random extension time is in the range of 0 to 500 ms. One extension time is randomly selected to delay the startup of the main CPU 101 for the selected time.

The range of the fixed extension time and the random extension time can be set as appropriate, but in the present embodiment, the range of the random extension time is set from the viewpoint of shortening the time until the setting can be changed when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned on. It is desirable to set "mode 1" in which the random extension time is always "0".

<Transition flow of game state>
Next, various gaming states managed by the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment and their transition flows will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. Note that FIG. 13 is a transition flow diagram of the basic gaming state of the pachislot machine 1, and FIG. 14 is a diagram in which the presence or absence of the notification (AT / ART) function is taken into consideration (that is, the gaming section is a normal section). It is a transition flow diagram of the game state (distinguished from the advantageous section).

[Basic game state transition flow]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as "BB") is provided as a type of bonus game. The BB is a continuous accessory actuating device for a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) called a first-class special accessory, and continuously operates the RB.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 manages the gaming state based on the presence or absence of winning / operating (winning) of the bonus combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the main control circuit 90 wins / operates (wins) a bonus combination (internal winning combination of the names "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3", and "F_BB4" described later). ) Is present or absent, and three types of gaming states called "bonus non-winning state", "inter-flag state", and "bonus state" are managed.

The bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not winning and the bonus is not activated (winning), and the bonus state is a state in which the bonus is activated. Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus combination is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is won. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, a state in which the bonus combination is won and the bonus is not activated.

Whether or not the bonus combination is won is managed based on the data stored in the hit request flag storage area (see FIG. 25 described later) and the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 26 described later) provided in the main RAM 103. Will be done. Further, whether or not the bonus is activated (winning) is managed based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) provided in the main RAM 103.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, in the gaming state in which the bonus is not activated (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state), the types of internal winning combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. Six types of states from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "RT0 state" to "RT5 state", respectively) are provided. The RT1 state and the RT4 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT5 state is the gaming state in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is medium. It is a game state that becomes. Further, the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT3 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high. In the present embodiment, the RT state in the bonus non-winning state is any of the RT0 state to the RT4 state, and the RT state in the inter-flag state is the RT5 state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 is based on the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay and the winning probability thereof in the gaming state (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state) in which the bonus is not activated. It also manages six types of states, RT0 state to RT5 state.

The RT0 state to the RT5 state are managed based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, flags indicating six RT states of the RT0 state flag to the RT5 state flag are provided, and the RT state is managed by managing the on / off states of these flags by the main RAM 103. Is managed. Then, the main control circuit 90 specifies the RT state corresponding to the RT state flag that is in the ON state as the current RT state. The RT0 state flag may not be provided, and when all the RT state flags are off, the main control circuit 90 may specify that the current RT state is the RT0 state.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the bonus non-winning state (RT0 to RT4 state), the bonus combination (the internal winning combination of the names "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3", and "F_BB4" described later) is determined as the internal winning combination. When this is done (“bonus winning” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state (RT5 state). Further, when the bonus combination is won in the inter-flag state (“bonus is established” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

Here, as the bonus state, a BB1 gaming state (BB1 state), a BB2 gaming state (BB2 state), a BB3 gaming state (BB3 state), and a BB4 gaming state (BB4 state) are provided. The main control circuit 90 turns on the BB1 state flag, the BB2 state flag, the BB3 state flag, and the BB4 state flag stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later), which will be described later, as in the RT state. / Manage bonus status according to off status. Further, as will be described later, since the RB game state (RB state) is always in the BB1 to BB4 states, the RB is also stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later), which will be described later. It is managed according to the on / off status of the status flag.

In the bonus non-winning state, the name "F_BB1" described later is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the inter-flag state, when the corresponding symbol combination "C_red same color BB" is displayed on the effective line, the main control circuit 90 Shifts the game state from the inter-flag state to the BB1 state. In the BB1 state, it is always in the RB state, and when the specified number of medals "240" or more are paid out in the BB1 state, the BB1 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, when the name "F_BB2" described later is determined as the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination "C_blue same color BB" is displayed on the effective line in the inter-flag state, the main control is performed. The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB2 state. In the BB2 state, it is always in the RB state, and when the specified number of medals "240" or more are paid out in the BB2 state, the BB2 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, when the name "F_BB3" described later is determined as the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination "C_red different color BB" is displayed on the effective line in the inter-flag state, the main control is performed. The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB3 state. In the BB3 state, it is always in the RB state, and when more than the specified number of medals "165" are paid out in the BB3 state, the BB3 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, when the name "F_BB4" described later is determined as the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination "C_blue different color BB" is displayed on the effective line in the inter-flag state, the main control is performed. The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB4 state. In the BB4 state, it is always in the RB state, and when more than the specified number of medals "165" are paid out in the BB4 state, the BB4 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

In the RT4 state, when the combination of symbols described later "R_RT1 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT1 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT4 state to the RT1 state. To migrate to. Further, in the RT4 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the effective line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT4 state. It shifts to the RT3 state.

In the RT1 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT1 state to the RT3 state. To migrate to. Further, in the RT1 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT0 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line ("RT0 transition lip is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT1 state. It shifts to the RT0 state.

In the RT0 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT0 state to the RT3 state. To migrate to. Further, in the RT0 state, when the combination of symbols described later "R_RT1 transition" is displayed on the effective line or the combination of symbols described later "S_RT1 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line (in FIG. 13, in FIG. 13). “RT1 transition RT1 transition lip is established”), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 state to the RT1 state. Further, in the RT0 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT2 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line ("RT2 transition lip is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT0 state. Shift to RT2 state. If the set value is changed, or if an initialization condition such as "RAM error" described later is satisfied (in FIG. 13, "setting change / initialization condition is satisfied"), the game state is set as the initial state. Is in the RT0 state.

In the RT2 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT2 state to the RT3 state. To migrate to. Further, in the RT2 state, when the combination of symbols described later "R_RT1 transition" is displayed on the effective line or the combination of symbols described later "S_RT1 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line (in FIG. 13, in FIG. 13). “RT1 transition RT1 transition lip is established”), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 state to the RT1 state.

In the RT3 state, when a game is played for a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, "8" game, that is, during eight games) ("8 game digestion" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit. 90 shifts the game state from the RT3 state to the RT0 state. The period during which the RT3 state continues can be set as appropriate. Further, the period during which the RT3 state continues may not be specified. In this case, in the RT3 state, the internal winning combination in which the combination of symbols described later “S_RT0 transition lip” can be displayed on the effective line may be determined with a predetermined probability.

[Transition flow of game state considering whether or not the notification (AT / ART) function is activated]
In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) determines whether or not a function (AT / ART function) for notifying a stop operation advantageous to the player is activated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only the above-mentioned bonus non-winning state, inter-flag state, and bonus state, but also the activated / non-activated state of the AT / ART function is managed as a gaming state. In the present embodiment, the game section in which the AT function is operating is referred to as a "normal advantageous section", and the game section in which the ART function is operating is referred to as an "advantageous section". The section of the game in which none of them is operating is referred to as a "non-advantageous section" or a "normal section".

Further, in the present embodiment, when a bonus state is set in an advantageous section (including "normal advantageous section" and "advantageous section"), the bonus state is considered to be a series of advantageous game sections for the player, and the bonus state is advantageous. The number of games included in the section and forcibly ending the advantageous section (continuation is restricted) is counted as well as the period during which the above-mentioned status indicator continues to light (notification period during the advantageous section). (Regulatory monitoring period) (in this embodiment, "1500" games). However, as will be described later, when a bonus state is reached in the "non-advantageous section", the bonus state may shift to the "normal advantageous section" or the "advantageous section" after the end of the bonus state. The condition shall be included in the period described above. In addition, when the bonus state is reached in the non-advantageous section, the player does not shift to the "normal advantageous section" or the "advantageous section" after the end of the bonus state (when the "non-advantageous section" continues). Assuming that it is not a section of a series of advantageous games, the bonus state is not included in the advantageous section, and the bonus state is not included in the above-mentioned period. However, since the bonus state itself is an advantageous gaming state for the player, the bonus state is always an advantageous section regardless of whether or not it is a "normal advantageous section" or an "advantageous section" before and after that. It can also be included and included in the period described above.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the main control circuit 90 has a "normal state" as a gaming state in a non-advantageous section (normal section) and a "high accuracy 1 state" as a gaming state in a normal advantageous section. ~ "High accuracy 4 state" and "precursor state", "line battle ready state", "line battle state", "right acquisition lottery preparation state", "right acquisition lottery state", "right" as the game state of the advantageous section It manages the "acquisition state", "ending preparation state", "ending 1 state", and "ending 2 state".

(Game state of non-advantageous section (normal section))
The normal state, which is a gaming state in a non-advantageous section (normal section), is a gaming state (non-AT / non-ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player. When it is determined to shift to the normal advantageous section in the normal state (“normal advantageous section transition winning” in FIG. 14), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state to the normal advantageous section according to the determination trigger. Move to one of the gaming states. The details of the flow of the game in the normal state will be described later with reference to FIG. 33 described later.

In the present embodiment, in the bonus non-winning state in the normal state, when a specific combination other than the bonus combination (see FIG. 33 described later) is won, any of the game states in the normal advantageous section (other than the high probability 4 state). It is usually advantageous to win an internal winning combination (other than "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including a bonus combination in which the same winning probability is set between each set value. If it is decided to shift to the high-probability 4 state of the section, and if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state based on the bonus combination, the line battle state of the advantageous section is entered. When it is decided that it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, the high probability 4 state of the normal advantageous section is continued for a predetermined period (32 games).

In addition, in the bonus non-winning state in the normal state, when the internal winning combination ("F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including the bonus combination in which different winning probabilities are set between the set values is won, it is normal. It is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and after the end of the bonus state based on the bonus combination, the normal state of the non-advantageous section continues. Further, in the inter-flag state in the normal state, no matter which combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not determined to shift to the normal advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal state of the non-advantageous section is changed to the gaming state of any of the normal advantageous sections, the above-mentioned notification period during the advantageous section is started (that is, the lighting of the state indicator is started). The above-mentioned regulatory monitoring period is started (that is, the counting of the number of games of "1500", which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections, is started).

(Normally advantageous section game state)
Each gaming state in the normal advantageous section is a gaming state (AT) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state. In each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section (including the case where it has already been decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal state), the normal advantageous section has ended. In the case (in FIG. 14, “normal advantage section end advantageous section transition winning”), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to any of the advantageous section gaming states according to the determination trigger. In addition, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, when it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section and the normal advantageous section ends (in FIG. 14, "normal advantageous section end advantageous section transition non-winning"". ), The main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to the normal state of the non-advantageous section. The details of the flow of the game in each game state of the normal advantageous section will be described later with reference to FIG. 34 described later.

In each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 has a small push order (“F_upper left bell 1”, “F_upper left bell 2”, “F_upper middle bell 1”, “F_upper middle” described later). Bell 2 ”,“ F_Upper Right / Left Bell 1 ”,“ F_Upper Right / Left Bell 2 ”,“ F_Upper Right Middle Bell 1 ”,“ F_Upper Right Middle Bell 2 ”,“ F_Middle Left Bell 1 ”,“ F_Middle Left "Bell 2", "F_Middle Right Middle Bell 1", "F_Middle Middle Bell 2", "F_Middle Right Left Bell 1", "F_Middle Right Left Bell 2", "F_Middle Right Middle Bell 1", "F_Middle Right Middle Bell 1" Bell 2 ”,“ F_Lower middle bell 1 ”,“ F_Lower middle bell 2 ”,“ F_Lower right / left bell 1 ”,“ F_Lower right / left bell 2 ”,“ F_Lower right middle bell 1 ”,“ F_Lower right middle bell 1 ” When any of the internal winning combinations of "Bell 2") is determined as the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not to notify the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and it is decided to notify the information. , Information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player (that is, information on the stop operation in which the player can obtain the most medals) is notified (see FIG. 45 described later).

Further, in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 replays in the push order (“F_RT0 medium replay 1” to “F_RT0 medium replay 6”, “F_RT1 medium replay 1” to “F_RT1 medium replay 6” described later. , "Internal winning combination of" F_RT2 medium replay 1 "to" F_RT2 medium replay 3 ") is determined as an internal winning combination, and whether or not to notify the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is determined. Is not performed, and the information on the stop operation advantageous to the player (that is, the information on the stop operation capable of shifting to the RT state advantageous to the player or maintaining the advantageous RT state) is not notified (described later). (See FIG. 45). In this sense, the RT function does not operate (except when the push order is accidentally answered correctly), and only the AT function operates (AT game state).

Here, in the present embodiment, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, when the RT3 state or the RT5 state (that is, the state between eight games or between the flags after the RT3 transition to be described later is displayed). ), The push order notification of the push order small winning combination is usually performed until the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, when the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed only once. Therefore, even in the game state of the same normal advantageous section, if the RT state is different, the number of times the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed also changes, so that the profit of the player based on the push order also changes. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state is reached in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section (more specifically, when the bonus combination is won during the normal advantageous section), the bonus state is set in the normal state. As in the case (more specifically, when winning a bonus combination during a non-advantageous section), in the bonus state, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player (that is, the player can obtain the most medals). Information on possible stop operations) is not notified (see FIG. 45 described later). Specifically, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when any of the push order small winning combinations in the bonus state (internal winning combinations of "F_JAC1_1" to "F_JAC1_6" described later) is determined as the internal winning combination. Does not decide whether or not to notify.

In the present embodiment, in the bonus non-winning state of each game state in the normal advantageous section, when a specific combination other than the bonus combination (see FIG. 34 described later) is won, the game is played even between the game states in the normal advantageous section. The state shift is performed, and the period (number of games) in which the normally advantageous section continues also fluctuates. In addition, when winning a bonus combination, if it has not already been decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is advantageous. If it is decided to shift to the line battle state of the section and it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, the high accuracy 4 state of the normal advantageous section will continue.

Here, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, the bonus combination is other than the internal winning combination ("F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including the bonus combination in which the same winning probability is set between each set value. ), But also the internal winning combination ("F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including the bonus combination in which different winning probabilities are set between each set value. Even if the winning is based on the above, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. That is, in the normal advantageous section, when the bonus combination is won, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination including the bonus combination having a setting difference in the winning probability is determined as a common process in the normal advantageous section, Whether or not to shift to an advantageous section is decided. In this sense as well, each gaming state in the normally advantageous section is a more advantageous gaming state than the gaming state in the non-advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section is in the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period (that is, the state indicator is lit) and also in the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period (that is, in the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period). The number of games is being counted as "1500", which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections). However, when the normal advantageous section ends without shifting to the advantageous section, the above-mentioned notification period during the advantageous section ends (that is, the status indicator is turned off and then turned off), and the above-mentioned The regulated monitoring period is terminated (that is, the counting of the number of games of "1500", which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections, is terminated, and the counting result is initialized (cleared)).

(Game state of advantageous section)
Each game state in the advantageous section is a game state (ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and is a game advantageous to the player as compared with each game state in the normal state and the normal advantageous section. It is in a state. In each gaming state of the advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 basically performs a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when either the push order small combination or the push order replay described above is determined as the internal winning combination. Information (that is, information on a stop operation in which the player can obtain the most medals, shift to the RT state advantageous to the player, or maintain the advantageous RT state) is notified (described later). (See FIG. 45). In this sense, the ART function is activated (ART gaming state). In each gaming state of the advantageous section, when the advantageous section ends without extension (continuation) (including the case where the advantageous section described later is forcibly ended) (“End of advantageous section” in FIG. 14). , The main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to the normal state of the non-advantageous section.

Here, in each gaming state of the advantageous section, as a result of the push order notification of the push order small winning combination and the push order replay described above, the RT2 state corresponds (maintains) as the basic RT state. ing. In addition, except for the RT4 state after the end of the bonus state, the RT3 state based on the display of the RT3 transition described later, and the RT0 state after the end of the RT3 state, each game state in the normal advantageous section is changed to each game state in the advantageous section. In the case of transition, in most cases, the RT state in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section corresponds to the RT1 state. Therefore, the line battle preparation state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state, and the ending preparation state, which are the game states of the advantageous section, may shift to the line battle state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the ending 1 state or the ending 2 state, respectively. When it is determined and the RT state is not the RT2 state, it is positioned as a preparatory state for raising the RT state to the RT2 state.

The main control circuit 90 basically changes the game state to the line battle state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the right acquisition lottery state when the RT state shifts to the RT2 state in the line battle preparation state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state, and the ending preparation state, respectively. And shift to the ending 1 state or the ending 2 state. The details of the flow of the game in each game state of the advantageous section will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 44 described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a bonus state is reached in each gaming state of the advantageous section (more specifically, when a bonus combination is won during the advantageous section), the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section are defined. Unlike this, in the bonus state, information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player (that is, information on the stop operation that allows the player to obtain the most medals) is notified (see FIG. 45 described later). Specifically, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when any of the push order small winning combinations in the bonus state (internal winning combinations of "F_JAC1_1" to "F_JAC1_6" described later) is determined as the internal winning combination. Is always notified. Therefore, when the bonus state is set in the advantageous section, the profit given to the player is larger than when the bonus state is set in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. In this sense as well, each gaming state in the advantageous section is a more advantageous gaming state than each gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, each gaming state of the advantageous section is in the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period (that is, the status indicator is lit) and also in the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period (that is, a series). The number of games is being counted as "1500", which is the upper limit for the advantageous game section to continue. If the number of games played during the advantageous section (including during the bonus state) does not reach the upper limit of "1500" times and the advantageous section ends, the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period ends (that is,). Along with the end of the status indicator lighting and extinguishing, the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period ends (that is, the count of the number of games of "1500" which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections is counted. It is finished and the counting result is initialized (cleared)). In addition, when the number of games played in the advantageous section (including in the bonus state) reaches the upper limit of "1500" times, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (in the case of the bonus state, only the bonus state is available). In this case as well, the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period ends (that is, the status indicator is turned off and then turned off), and the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period is ended (that is, , The counting of the number of games of "1500" times, which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections, is completed, and the counting result is initialized (cleared)).

In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated based on the number of games played in the advantageous section (including in the bonus state) reaches the upper limit of "1500" times, for example, the advantageous section Even if it is decided to continue each of the gaming states in (given the right to continue), or if the remaining number of games in each gaming state in the advantageous section remains, they are After all are initialized (cleared), it shifts to the normal state of the non-advantageous section. Further, if the advantageous section is forcibly terminated while the bonus state of the advantageous section is in progress, the push order notification of the above-mentioned push order small winning combination in the bonus state is also immediately terminated. .. However, in this case, as an exception, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination described above may be performed until the bonus state ends. Further, the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period is not limited to "1500", and the value can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, basically, the number of games (the number of games) is the period during which each gaming state corresponding to the above-mentioned normal advantageous section and the advantageous section continues, or the period during which each gaming state is extended (continuing period). ), But the method of managing the period of each game state is not limited to this. For example, among the above-mentioned normal advantageous sections and each gaming state corresponding to the advantageous section, the period of one or more gaming states, the number of medals paid out during that period, and the number of medals inserted from the period can be determined. It may be managed by the reduced difference number (net increase number), or it is managed by the number of notifications (the number of notifications) that affect the payout of medals (that is, the notification when the above-mentioned push order small winning combination is won). You may.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 22. The various data tables used in the various lottery performed in each game state related to the game property described with reference to FIG. 14 will be described later together with the description of each game property.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 15). (Refer to the symbol code table of)) and stipulate the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, in the order of proceeding in the reel rotation direction (direction from the symbol position "19" in FIG. 15 toward the symbol position "0") with the symbol position "0" as a reference, " "0" to "19" are assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

That is, by referring to the values of the symbol counters (“0” to “19”) and the symbol arrangement table, they are displayed in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of symbol. In this embodiment, the symbols are "red 7", "blue 7", "BAR", "cherry 1", "cherry 2", "bell", "watermelon", "replay", and "blank". Nine kinds of symbols are used.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the symbol "red 7" (symbol code 1), and the symbol "blue 7" (symbol code 2) is assigned. "00000010" is assigned as the data. The symbol "BAR" (symbol code 3) is assigned "00000011" as data, the symbol "cherry 1" (symbol code 4) is assigned "00000100" as data, and the symbol "cherry 2" (symbol 2) is assigned. "000000101" is assigned to the code 5) as data.

"00000011" is assigned as data to the symbol "bell" (symbol code 6). The symbol "watermelon" (symbol code 7) is assigned "00000011" as data, the symbol "replay" (symbol code 8) is assigned "00001000" as data, and the symbol "blank" (symbol code 9) is assigned. ) Is assigned "000001001" as data.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18. 16 and 17 are internal lottery tables referred to in each of the RT0 state to the RT5 state. Further, FIG. 18 is an internal lottery table referred to in the bonus state.

The internal lottery table is provided for each game state (see FIG. 13), and defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the lottery value when each internal winning combination is determined. The lottery value is defined for each set value (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the internal winning such as a preset bonus combination or small combination. This setting is changed, for example, by using the reset switch 76 and the setting key type switch 54 (see FIG. 7).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 sets a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) corresponding to each internal winning combination. Add in sequence at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, when the lottery result exceeds 65535 in the predetermined internal winning combination, it is determined that the internal winning combination has won. In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, an example in which the lottery value is added to the extracted random number value to perform the lottery has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery value is subtracted from the random number value. It may be determined whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than "0" (whether or not the lottery result is underflowed), and the winning / non-winning of the internal lottery may be determined.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the internal lottery combination will be determined. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by "the lottery value specified in each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

In the internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 state to the RT5 state, as shown in FIG. 16, basically, the type and winning probability of the replay combination determined as the internal winning combination according to the type of the RT state. Changes. For example, the replay combination related to the names "F_RT0 medium replay 1 (No. 40)" to "F_RT0 medium replay 6 (No. 45)" is not determined as an internal winning combination except in the RT0 state, and is internally in the RT0 state. Determined as a winning role.

In FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 38" is an internal winning combination in which the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination are overlapped. For example, in "F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (No. 1)", the bonus combination "F_BB1" and the replay combination "F_confirmed lip" are duplicated and won, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination "F_BB1" is "BB01". (See FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) and the combination of symbols "REP01" to "REP09" (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) corresponding to the replay combination "F_fixed lip" are allowed to be derived (winning). Is allowed) It is an internal bonus.

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 39" to "No. 60" is an internal winning combination that the replay combination wins. For example, in "F_maintenance lip (No. 40)", the replay combination "F_maintenance lip" is won, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination "F_maintenance lip" is "REP02" (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later). ) Is allowed to be derived (winning is allowed).

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 98" is an internal winning combination that the small combination wins. For example, in "F_chance eye A1 (No. 61)", the small role "F_chance eye A1" wins, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the small role "F_chance eye A1" is "NML14", "NML22", " It is an internal winning combination that allows the derivation of "NML26" and "NML30" (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) (winning is permitted).

Although not shown, when "F_chance eye A1 (No. 61)" to "F_chance eye B4 (No. 68)" are determined as internal winning combinations, "HZR01" (described later) will be described later. The derivation of FIGS. 19 to 22) is also permitted (stop display is permitted). Here, "HZR01" is not a combination of symbols related to winning, but a part of a combination of symbols that are out of order, but as a combination of symbols that shifts the gaming state from another RT state to the RT3 state (RT3 transition). It is a specified combination of symbols, and basically, derivation is not allowed except when any one of the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68" is determined. Therefore, it can be said that "HZR01" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68".

Similarly, when "F_upper left bell 1 (No. 77)" to "F_lower right middle bell 2 (No. 98)" are determined as internal winning combinations, "NZR02" (described later) will be described later. Derivation of 19 to 22) is also permitted (stop display is permitted). Here, "HZR02" is not a combination of symbols related to winning, but a part of a combination of symbols that are out of order, but as a combination of symbols that shifts the gaming state from another RT state to the RT1 state (RT1 transition). It is a specified combination of symbols, and basically, derivation is not allowed except when any one of the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 77" to "No. 98" is determined. Therefore, it can be said that "NZR02" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 77" to "No. 98".

In the present embodiment, the bonus combination is not further determined in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), that is, in the state in which the bonus combination has already been determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination. Therefore, in the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, "0" is set for the lottery value of the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 38" in the inter-flag state (RT5 state). ing. However, "No. 2" to "No. 10" and "No. 12" so that the winning probability of the small winning combination does not fluctuate between the flag-to-flag state (RT5 state) and the bonus non-winning state (RT0 to RT4 state). The lottery value related to the small winning combination assigned in the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 38" is "No. 61" to "No. 68", "No. 68" in the inter-flag state (RT5 state). It is added to the lottery value of the internal winning combination indicated by "72" and "No. 73". That is, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68", "No. 72" and "No. 73" does not have a high winning probability in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), but is a bonus. The probability is the same between the gaming states other than the states.

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, "No. 0" indicates "off" in which derivation of any of the specified combinations of symbols (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) is not permitted. The higher the "out of place" assignment (lottery value), the more disadvantageous the player is. In the RT0 state and the RT2 state, "off" is not determined. Further, in the RT5 state, the probability that "off" is determined is described as "22289/65536", but in reality, one of the bonus combinations has already been determined as the internal winning combination (carried over). In that sense, there is no case where "off" is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the internal lottery table when the set value is "1" (setting 1) is described as an example, but "No. 21", "No. 30", and "No." For the internal winning combination other than the internal winning combination shown in ".39" and "No. 74", a common lottery value is set among the set values. That is, they have the same winning probability. On the other hand, with respect to the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21", "No. 30", "No. 39" and "No. 74", between each set value (or a predetermined set value and a specific set value). Between), different lottery values are set. That is, the winning probabilities are different (see (* 1), (* 2) and (* 3) in FIGS. 16 and 17).

Specifically, for example, in the internal winning combinations shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30", when the set value is "1", the lottery value of "22" is set respectively, whereas the lottery value is set. When the set value is "6", a lottery value of "77" is set respectively (that is, as the set value becomes higher, the lottery is performed in the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30". The value is increasing by "11"). Although not shown, in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), as the lottery value set for the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30" increases, "No. 21" and "No. 30" are shown. The lottery value set for the internal winning combination shown in "No. 72" also increases.

Further, for example, in the internal winning combination shown in "No. 74", the set values are "2", "4" and "6" as compared with the case where the set values are "1", "3" and "5". In the case, the lottery value is set to be relatively high, and the lottery value is set to increase as the set value becomes higher.

Further, for example, in the internal winning combination shown in "No. 39", the set values are "2", "4" and "6" as compared with the case where the set values are "1", "3" and "5". In the case, the lottery value is set to be relatively low, and the lottery value is set to decrease as the set value becomes higher. This is to adjust the increase in the lottery value of the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21", "No. 30" and "No. 74". Therefore, for example, in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, the probability that "off" is determined does not change and "0" is maintained. It should be noted that these are examples in which the winning probabilities of specific internal winning combinations differ between the set values.

In FIG. 18, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 7" is an internal winning combination in which a small winning combination is won, and when the winning combination is won, the corresponding symbol shown in FIG. 18 is used. Derivation of combinations is allowed (winning is allowed). In the present embodiment, the replay combination is not determined as the internal winning combination in the RB state (that is, the BB1 to BB4 states), but one of the replay combinations shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 Alternatively, a plurality of replay combinations may be determined as internal winning combinations.

[Design combination table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, a symbol combination table that defines a combination of symbols related to winning or the like in the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, a symbol combination table is provided as an example of data for defining a combination of a plurality of symbols in advance, but the combination of symbols displayed on the main control circuit 90 side is identified. If possible, the data can be specified by other methods. For example, a combination of symbol codes may be defined so that the combination of symbols displayed by the combination can be identified.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the symbol combination table prescribes combinations of a plurality of symbols, and data indicating the types of combinations of these symbols is defined as a display combination (winning operation flag). There is. Further, the symbol combination table is composed of 9 bytes of data so as to correspond to the hit request flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25 described later), and the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30 described later). At the same time, data indicating a different display combination (winning operation flag) is specified for each bit of each storage area.

In addition, in FIGS. 19 to 22, there is a place where "/" is added in the specified combination of symbols, but this constitutes the combination of the symbols in any of the indicated symbols. Show that. For example, the combination of "HZR01" is a combination of symbols in which the symbol on the left reel is "cherry 1", the symbol on the middle reel is "cherry 1", and the symbol on the right reel is "cherry 1" (that is, "cherry 1-"). Cherry 1-Cherry 1 ”) and a combination of symbols whose left reel symbol is“ Cherry 2 ”, middle reel symbol is“ Cherry 1 ”, and right reel symbol is“ Cherry 1 ”(ie,“ Cherry 2- It shows that "Cherry 1-Cherry 1") and is a combination of corresponding symbols.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "HZR01" is a combination of symbols that are out of order, but when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the RT state is changed from another RT state to the RT3 state. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination (“RT3 transition”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "HZR02" is a combination of symbols that are out of order, but when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the RT state is changed from another RT state to the RT1 state. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination (“RT1 transition”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "BB01", "BB02", "BB03" and "BB04" are combinations of symbols related to the bonus combination, and when each combination of symbols is displayed on the display valid line. , Activate the corresponding bonus state.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP01" to "REP06" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is performed. Activate. The combination of the symbols of "REP01" can be referred to as "parallel lip" or "straight line lip", and the combination of symbols of "REP02" can be referred to as "normal lip", and the symbol of "REP03". The combination of symbols can be referred to as "hit lip", the combination of symbols of "REP04" can be referred to as "special lip", and the combination of symbols of "REP05" can be referred to as "fake lip". , The combination of the symbols of "REP06" can be referred to as "BAR matching lip".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP07" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is activated and the RT state is changed to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols for shifting from a state (for example, RT1 state) to an RT0 state (“RT0 transition lip”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP08" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is activated and the RT state is changed to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols for shifting from a state (for example, RT0 state and RT2 state) to an RT1 state (“RT1 transition lip”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP09" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is activated and the RT state is changed to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols for shifting from a state (for example, RT0 state) to an RT2 state (“RT2 transition lip”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML01" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, eight medals are paid out. The combination of the "NML01" symbols can be referred to as the "bell" symbol combination.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML02" to "NML13" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, one sheet is displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML02" to "NML13" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "batting order combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML14" to "NML30" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, one sheet is displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML14" to "NML30" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "chance combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML31" to "NML33" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, five cards are displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML31" to "NML33" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "special role".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML34" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, eight medals are paid out. The combination of the symbols of "NML34" can be referred to as the combination of the symbols of the "cross down bell".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML35" is a combination of symbols related to a small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, five medals are paid out. The combination of the symbols of "NML35" can be referred to as the combination of the symbols of "watermelon".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML36" and "NML37" are a combination of symbols related to a small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, eight pieces are displayed. The medal will be paid out. The combination of the symbols of "NML36" and "NML37" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "JACA".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML38" to "NML40" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, two sheets are displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML38" to "NML40" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "JACB".

In this embodiment, an example is described in which data indicating one display combination (winning operation flag) includes data to which a combination of a plurality of symbols is assigned, but one display combination (winning). It is also possible to configure the data so that only one symbol combination is assigned to the data indicating the operation flag).

[Correspondence between internal winning combination, stop operation order (batting order), display combination, etc.]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination, and the like will be described.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a combination in which the symbol combinations displayed are different according to the player's stop operation order (pushing order), that is, a so-called “pushing order combination” (for example, the above-mentioned “pushing order small combination” or “pushing order”) "Sequential replay") is provided. Since the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided, there are a maximum of six stop operation orders (pushing order).

In FIGS. 23 and 24, the stop operation order (push order) is indicated as "left, middle, right" as "batting order 1", and the stop operation order (push order) is "left, right, middle". "Batting order 2" indicates that the order is "Batting order 2", and the stop operation order (pushing order) is indicated as "middle, left, right" as "Batting order 3", and the stop operation order (pushing order) is The order of "middle, right, left" is indicated as "batting order 4", and the stop operation order (pushing order) is indicated as "right, left, middle" as "batting order 5", and the stop operation is performed. The order (pushing order) is "right, middle, left", which is indicated as "batting order 6".

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, "F_fixed lip" is won regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation when it is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the pushing order combination. "Special lip" is established. In addition, depending on the timing of the stop operation, any of the other winning replay combinations may be established.

Here, "regardless of the timing of the stop operation" means that the effective lines are the "center line", the "top line", and the "bottom line", and the maximum number of sliding pieces is "4". It means that the corresponding symbols are arranged so that they can be stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, they are arranged within the range of 5 symbols). Is what you do. For example, in the left reel 3L, the symbol of "cherry 1" is stopped and displayed at a position where the symbol is not stopped and displayed within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol positions "10" to "12" are in the middle stage. (When it is done), but if the stop operation is performed at that point, the symbol of "Cherry 2" is placed at the symbol position "13" so that the symbol of "Cherry 2" can be stopped and displayed. ing. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is determined, for example, the symbols "cherry 1" and "cherry 2" are allowed to be stopped and displayed as the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination. As a result, even if the corresponding symbol can be stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces as a whole, the combination of the symbols is "regardless of the timing of the stop operation". It can be said that it holds. Hereinafter, the same applies to other display combinations (winning operation flags) and the like. However, in the push order combination, since the combination of symbols that are preferentially stopped and controlled based on the stop operation order changes, even if the symbols are arranged as described above, the type of stop operation order Depending on the situation, the symbol may not be stopped and displayed on the valid line.

When "F_maintenance lip" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, one of the winning "normal rips" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. To do.

"F_RT0 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 2", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 2", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 4" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 4", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 4", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 6", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT1 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip). When the stop operation order is "batting order 5" and "batting order 6", the stop control is performed so that the "fake lip" is stopped preferentially over the other "maintenance lip". That is, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, the "fake lip" is established, and if the timing of the stop operation is not the appropriate timing, another "maintenance lip" is established. This also applies to "F_RT1 medium replay 2" and "F_RT1 medium replay 3".

"F_RT1 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 2", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 2", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 4" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 4", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 4", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 6", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

In the present embodiment, when the "RT0 transition lip" is established, the "RT1 transition lip" may be established at the same time. In this case, the main control circuit 90 determines that the "RT0 transition lip" is established as "RT1". Judgment is prioritized over the establishment of "Transition Lip". That is, when the "RT0 transition lip" and the "RT1 transition lip" are established at the same time, it is determined that the "RT0 transition lip" is established and the RT state is shifted to the RT0 state, and the "RT1 transition lip" is established. I do not judge.

"F_RT2 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2", regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Instead, a replay combination other than the winning "RT1 transition lip" (for example, "normal lip") is established, the RT state does not shift to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT2 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4", regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Instead, a replay combination other than the winning "RT1 transition lip" (for example, "normal lip") is established, the RT state does not shift to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT2 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" and "batting order 6", regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Instead, a replay combination other than the winning "RT1 transition lip" (for example, "normal lip") is established, the RT state does not shift to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and "batting order 6", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

When "F_upper lip" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, "parallel lip" is established at the top line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel).

When "F_middle lip 1" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, a "parallel lip" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is,). The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel).

"F_Middle-stage lip 2" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" to "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, "F_middle stage lip 2" is " If "middle rip" is established, the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, "fake clip" is established and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. If not, the "middle rip" is established. In addition, since the game state is not changed regardless of which replay combination is established, "F_middle stage lip 2" is a push order combination, but the player's profit does not change depending on the stop operation order. It is a role.

"F_Middle-stage lip 3" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination, "F_middle stage lip 3" is "regardless of the timing of the stop operation. If the "middle rip" is established, the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2", and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, the "BAR aligned rip" is established and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. If the timing is not right, the "middle rip" is established. In addition, since the game state is not changed regardless of which replay combination is established, "F_middle stage lip 3" is a push order combination, but the player's profit does not change depending on the stop operation order. It is a role.

When "F_lower lip" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, "parallel lip" is established at the bottom line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel).

When "F_hit lip" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, the "hit lip" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle row of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, but it is established so that it is not displayed in the middle row on the right reel 3R).

"F_JAC1_1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

Since "bell" and "JACA" are a combination of symbols in which eight medals are paid out, if they are established at the same time as described above, "8 + 8 = 16" medals are originally paid out. However, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of medals that can be paid out in one game is set as "15", and even if more than 15 medals are won, 15 medals are paid. I try to put it out. This also applies to "F_JAC1_2" to "F_JAC1_6".

"F_JAC1_2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 2", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 2", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_4" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 4", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 4", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 6", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the RB state, when the push order is correct (when the stop operation is performed in the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player), the "bell" and the "JACA" are duplicated and won a prize. By doing so, 15 medals are paid out, but it is not limited to this, for example, the number of medals to be paid out of "JACA" is set as "15", and if the pushing order is correct, the winning is won. If any of the existing "JACA" is established, 15 medals may be paid out.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the RB state, when the push order is not correct (when the stop operation is not performed in the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player), a plurality of "JACBs" are duplicated. By winning a prize, 6 medals (2 x 3 lines) are paid out, but it is not limited to this, for example, the number of "JACB" medals to be paid out is set as "6", and the pushing order is set. If the answer is not correct, six medals may be paid out if any of the winning "JACB" is established.

"F_JAC2" is not a push order combination, but when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, it is either a "bell" or a winning "JACA" regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. Is established and 15 medals are paid out. Similarly, for example, the number of medals to be paid out for "JACA" is set to "15", and if any of the winning "JACA" is established, 15 medals will be paid out. It may be.

When "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" are determined as internal winning combinations instead of pushing order, the timing of the stop operation is If the timing is appropriate, the "chance role" will be missed and the "RT3 transition" will be displayed on the valid line. In this case, there is no medal payout, but there is a possibility that the RT state will shift to the RT3 state, so it is advantageous for the player to perform a stop operation that misses the "chance role" and displays the "RT3 transition". Is likely to be. Here, in that sense, it is explained that it is the timing of the "appropriate" stop operation that the "chance role" is missed. On the other hand, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one of the winning "chance roles" will be established and one medal will be paid out, but the RT state will not shift to the RT3 state. ..

Here, when any one of "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. Whether or not the timing is correct is determined based on, for example, the timing of the stop operation at the time of the third stop operation. Specifically, 3/4 of the timings of all the stop operations at the time of the third stop operation are set as appropriate timings, and when the stop operation is performed at the timings, the "RT3 transition" is set. When it is established and the stop operation is performed at the remaining 1/4 timing, the "chance combination" is established because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate. As a general rule, the timing of such a stop operation is such that at least a part is different between "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4". Includes what is. Therefore, the appropriate timing can be changed depending on which internal winning combination is won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game related to the stop operation.

In the present embodiment, when "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" are determined as internal winning combinations, it depends on the timing of the stop operation. Therefore, it is assumed that the "RT3 transition" or "chance role" is established, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, the "RT3 transition" is established, and when the stop operation is not performed in the correct push order, the "chance combination" is established. May be good. Further, the "RT3 transition" may be established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. In this case, the "RT3 transition" may be defined as a combination of symbols for which medals are paid out (for example, one medal is paid out).

"F_weak rare combination A" and "F_weak rare combination B" are won regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined instead of the pushing order combination. One of the "chance roles" is established and one medal is paid out. As with "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4", the "chance role" may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation. You may do so. In this case, the "RT3 transition" may not be displayed. In the present embodiment, when any of "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" is won, the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. There are cases where "chance role" is displayed, and cases where "F_weak rare role A" or "F_weak rare role B" is won and "chance role" is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to change the expectation of the bonus combination duplication winning and the expectation of the transition to RT3 depending on the internal winning combination and the stop operation mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2" are determined not as push order but as internal winning combination, "watermelon" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. One medal will be paid out. It should be noted that the “watermelon” may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation.

When the "F_fixed combination" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, all the winning "special combination" are established (that is, regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation). , "S_Special role 1", "C_Special role 2" and "S_Special role 3" are displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 15 medals are paid out. For example, even if the number of medals to be paid out for the "special role" is set to "15" and one of the winning "special roles" is established, 15 medals will be paid out. Good.

When the "F_special bell" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, the "crossdown bell" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing, and eight medals are awarded. It will be paid out.

When the "F_upper common bell" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, the "bell" is established at the top line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel (the "upper bell"), and eight medals are paid out.

When the "F_middle stage common bell" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, the "bell" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the middle of each reel (the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out.

In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is determined, the "bell" is established at the bottom line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, the "bell" symbol is each reel. (It becomes the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line on the lower row), and eight medals are paid out. For example, the internal winning combination of "F_lower common bell" is not provided, but the inside of this "F_lower common bell" It is also possible to provide a winning combination so that the winning combination can be won with a predetermined probability in a gaming state other than the bonus state.

"F_upper left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_upper middle bell 1" and "F_upper middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_upper right / left bell 1" and "F_upper right / left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_upper right middle bell 1" and "F_upper right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

In the present embodiment, "F_upper stage" in which "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" (that is, the first stop on the left) are correct answers as the "upper stage bell" when the pressing order is correct. "Left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2" and "F_upper middle bell 1" and "F_upper middle bell 2" where "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" (that is, the first stop in the middle) are correct answers. "F_Upper right and left bell 1" and "F_Upper right and left bell 2" where "Batting order 5" is the correct answer, and "F_Upper right middle bell 1" and "F_Upper right middle bell 1" where "Batting order 6" is the correct answer. 2 ”and are provided. That is, it is stipulated that the correct push order is 4 (4 choices) out of the maximum 6 push orders (6 choices), but this is the correct push order in the push order small winning combination. This is an example of the order, and the correct push order pattern (number of choices) is not limited to this.

For example, the correct push order may be specified to be 6 ways (6 choices) or 3 ways (3 choices). In the case of 3 ways (3 choices), the left 1st stop ("Batting order 1" and "Batting order 2"), the middle 1st stop ("Batting order 3" and "Batting order 4"), and the right 1st stop ("Batting order 3" and "Batting order 4") The internal winning combination related to the "upper bell" may be configured so that either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6") is the correct pushing order. The same applies to the internal winning combination related to the above-mentioned "RT0 transition lip" to "RT2 transition lip", the internal winning combination related to the "middle stage bell" and the internal winning combination related to the "lower stage bell" shown below. That is, in the push order combination, the correct push order pattern (number of choices) can be appropriately set, and the pattern (number of choices) is not limited to that described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

"F_middle left bell 1" and "F_middle left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel as the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_Middle-stage middle bell 1" and "F_Middle-stage middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel as the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_middle right / left bell 1" and "F_middle right / left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_middle right middle bell 1" and "F_middle right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel as the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_lower middle bell 1" and "F_lower middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" that is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_lower right / left bell 1" and "F_lower right / left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" that is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_lower right middle bell 1" and "F_lower right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

In the present embodiment, any one of "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, and the stop operation is performed in the correct push order. If not, whether or not the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is determined based on, for example, the timing of the stop operation at the time of the third stop operation. Specifically, half of the timing of all stop operations during the third stop operation is set as an appropriate timing, and if the stop operation is performed at that timing, the winning operation is ". When any of the "batting order combinations" is established and the stop operation is performed at the remaining 1/2 timing, the "RT1 transition" is established because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, when any one of "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_upper right middle bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination and is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), Regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and 8 medals. Medal will be paid out. Further, when any one of "F_middle left bell 1" to "F_middle right middle bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination and is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the stop operation order and the stop operation order and Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel as the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out. .. Further, when any one of "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination and is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the stop operation order and the stop operation order and Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" that is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. ..

That is, in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the push order small combination is no longer the push order combination (the push order combination does not matter). However, it is not always necessary to configure in this way, and even in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), as described above, a combination of symbols in which eight medals are paid out if the batting order is correct (“upper row”). "Bell", "Middle bell" or "Lower bell") is stopped and displayed, and if the push order is not the correct answer, one medal will be paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the omission may occur. In this case, even if the "RT1 transition" is displayed, the gaming state does not shift to the RT1 state, so the "RT1 transition" may not be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination or the small combination and the bonus combination are determined as the internal winning combination (including the case where the bonus combination is carried over), the replay combination or the small combination is more than the bonus combination. Although the stop control for preferentially establishing the bonus combination is performed, the stop control for preferentially establishing the bonus combination may be performed over the replay combination or the small combination.

Here, the reel stop control (method for determining the stop symbol position) in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. In the present embodiment, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the reel stop control is performed so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped within 190 msec. Specifically, any one of the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value corresponds to the obtained value. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel stops (hereinafter, referred to as "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position where the rotation of the reel is started (hereinafter, referred to as "stop start position").

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from the time when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch until the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the corresponding reel of the reel display window 4 in the period from the detection of the stop operation by the stop switch to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch.

With reference to a stop table (not shown), the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the scheduled stop position of the reel. In the present embodiment, when an appropriate number of sliding pieces exists based on the number of sliding pieces acquired based on the stop table (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”), a pull-in priority table (not shown) is referred to. And change the number of sliding pieces. Then, the sliding piece number determination data is referred to for determining the search order when comparing the priorities of each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position four ahead, which is the maximum number of sliding pieces.

In the reel stop control of the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table (not shown). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces based on the priority, the number of sliding pieces is changed to the appropriate number. That is, in the present embodiment, the more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the symbol combination that allows the stop display by the internal winning combination, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired by the stop table.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30.

[Hit request flag storage area and winning operation flag storage area]
First, with reference to FIG. 25, the configuration of the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area) and the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area) will be described. In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area (flag data storage area, winning flag data storage area) and the winning operation flag storage area (winning flag data storage area) have the same configuration.

In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area is composed of the hit request storage areas 1 to 9 each represented by 1 byte of data, and the winning operation flag storage area is each represented by 1 byte of data. It is composed of storage areas 1 to 9. The data stored in each storage area of the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area is only the 1-byte data in the "data" column in FIG. 25, but in FIG. 25, for convenience of explanation, each data is stored. "Combination" indicating the symbol combination of each reel associated with the bit of the storage area (in the figure, the symbol of the left reel 3L, the symbol of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol of the right reel 3R are described in this order), and the symbol thereof. The contents (see FIGS. 19 to 22) are also described.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the hit request flag storage areas 1 to 9, it indicates that the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit has won the internal winning. Further, when "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the winning operation storage areas 1 to 9, it indicates that the display combination (winning operation flag) corresponding to the predetermined bit has won a prize. That is, when "1" is stored in the predetermined bit, it indicates that various symbol combinations of the internal winning combinations corresponding to the predetermined bit are displayed on the effective line.

The hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area include those in which a combination of a plurality of symbols is assigned to one bit (flag) in each storage area, as described above. , One symbol combination may be assigned to one bit (flag) in each storage area.

[Carryover storage area]
Next, the configuration of the carry-over combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the carry-over combination storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area.

As a result of the internal lottery, when the internal winning combination "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" or "F_BB4" is determined, the internal winning combination (BB combination) is stored in the carry-over combination storage area as a carry-over combination. .. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line. Further, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the winning request storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 27. The game state flag storage area is composed of a 2-byte data storage area. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit in the game state flag storage area.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area, it indicates that the operation of the bonus state or RT state corresponding to the predetermined bit is being performed. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, it indicates that the game state is the BB1 state. Further, for example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 2, it indicates that the game state is the RT3 state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 28. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area, and stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The press order storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area, and stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte.

In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left, middle, right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, each of the symbol code storage areas is composed of symbol code storage areas 1 to 9 represented by 1 byte of data. The symbol code storage area has the same configuration as the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25).

In the symbol code storage area, "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the combination of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination (winning operation flag) is stored in the symbol code storage areas 1 to 9.

[Relationship between internal winning combination, lottery number, and winning combination number]
In the various game states related to the game playability described above, various data tables are referred to in various lottery by the main control circuit 90, but as a parameter used at this time, in this embodiment, not only the internal winning combination but also the internal winning combination is supported. Each parameter with a different name (hereinafter referred to as "lottery number") is also used. The lottery numbers are grouped by grouping the internal winning roles that play the same role (whether the winning combination is a lottery target, the winning probability, etc.) and assigning the same lottery number in various lottery related to playability by the main control circuit 90. It is information for making it identifiable. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination (for example, for each of "No. 0" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17), and the lottery number. Since various data tables may be provided for each, the amount of data can be compressed, and it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the game ROM area.

Further, in the present embodiment, with respect to the internal winning combination, each parameter (hereinafter, referred to as “winning combination number”) having another name for identifying the internal winning combination in the unit game of this time is also used on the sub-control circuit 200 side. The winning combination number is a grouping of at least a part of the internal winning combination according to the gaming state (more specifically, whether it is a non-advantageous section or a normal advantageous section and an advantageous section). This is information for making the group recognizable by assigning the same winning combination number. As a result, in the present embodiment, unique information for identifying each internal winning combination (for example, for each of "No. 0" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) is provided. Since it is not necessary to transmit to the sub-control circuit 200 side, the amount of data can be compressed, the control load can be reduced, and appropriate information can be transmitted according to the gaming state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number will be described. 31 and 32 are diagrams showing an example of the basic correspondence between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number.

As shown in FIG. 31, the internal winning combination (including the bonus combination) in which the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination are won at the same time ("No. 1" to "No. 38" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is The lottery number "13" is assigned to the indicated internal winning combination), except for "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2", which have different winning probabilities between the set values. Further, a lottery number "0" is assigned to "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2".

In the present embodiment, the non-advantageous section (“normal” in FIGS. 31 and 32; the same applies hereinafter) and the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section (“advantageous” in FIGS. 31 and 32; the same applies hereinafter) are used. Although the lottery numbers are not different in the above, for example, when different lottery or processing is performed between "normal" and "advantageous", different lottery numbers can be assigned between "normal" and "advantageous". For example, in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" are won, ART lottery is not performed and it is not decided to shift to the normal advantageous section, but in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, it is not decided. , "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" are also drawn in the same way as the internal winning combination including other bonus combinations. Therefore, in "normal", the lottery number is assigned as described above. , In "advantage", a common lottery number "13" may be assigned.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31, in the internal winning combination including the bonus combination, the winning combination numbers "28" to "41" are assigned according to the type of the winning combination and the type of the replay combination or the small winning combination. One of the winning bonus numbers is assigned. As a result, on the sub-control circuit 200 side, it is possible to execute different effects depending on the type of the winning bonus combination and the type of the winning replay combination or small combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the internal winning combination of the replay or the small winning combination (internal winning combination indicated by "No. 39" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and "No." shown in FIG. 18 A lottery number of any one of "0" to "12" is assigned to each of the internal winning combinations indicated by ".1" to "No. 7").

Here, for example, "F_RT0 medium replay 1" to "F_RT0 medium replay 6" and "F_RT2 medium" that win in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, which are game states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high. The same lottery number "1" is assigned to "Replay 1" to "F_RT2 Medium Replay 3". Further, for example, in the RT state other than the RT5 state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT3 state, and "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye B4" which shift from the non-advantageous section to the normal advantageous section. Is assigned the same lottery number "6".

Further, for example, the same lottery number "10" is assigned to "F_upper common bell" and "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_upper right middle bell 2" where the same "upper bell" may be displayed. The same lottery number "11" is assigned to "F_middle-tier common bell" and "F_middle-tier left bell 1" to "F_middle-tier right middle-tier bell 2" that are assigned and may display the same "middle-tier bell". The same lottery number "12" is assigned to "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2", which may display the same "lower bell".

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the internal winning combination of the replay or the small winning combination (internal winning combination indicated by "No. 39" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and "No." shown in FIG. 18 For the internal winning combination indicated by ".1" to "No. 7"), any winning combination number of "0" to "27" is assigned in "normal" or "advantageous", respectively.

Here, focusing on the winning combination numbers assigned to "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2", the same winning combination number "22" is assigned to each in "normal". On the other hand, in "advantage", the winning combination number "23" is assigned to "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_upper right middle bell 2", and "F_middle left bell 1" to "F_middle right middle bell 2" are assigned. The difference is that the winning combination number "24" is assigned to "2", and the winning combination number "25" is assigned to "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2".

That is, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section (see FIG. 35 described later), when these internal winning combinations are won, the “bell” symbols are lined up in the middle of each reel (“middle bell”). When the "bell" symbol is lined up on the upper row of each reel (when the "upper bell" is established), and when the "bell" symbol is lined up on the lower row of each reel ("lower bell") The number of medals paid out is the same in both cases), but the degree of continuation of the line battle state may fluctuate. , "F_Upper Left Bell 1"-"F_Upper Right Middle Bell 2", "F_Middle Left Bell 1"-"F_Middle Right Middle Bell 2", "F_Lower Middle Bell 1"-"F_Lower Right Middle Bell 1" By assigning different winning numbers to "Bell 2", there is a possibility that the "Bell" symbols will be lined up on any effective line before the stop display (before the stop operation) of the symbols on the sub-control circuit 200 side. In the line battle state, it is possible to perform a production with a different degree of expectation based on the receipt of this winning combination number. An example of the effect in the line battle state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41 described later.

From the same point of view, for example, "F_upper lip", "F_middle lip 1" to "F_middle lip 3", and "F_lower lip" are assigned the same winning combination number in "normal". , In "advantage", different winning combination numbers may be assigned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 sets the winning combination number as the information regarding the internal winning combination in the communication parameter of the start command, and is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200, which will be described later. Information corresponding to navigation data (see FIG. 45 described later) is set in the communication parameter of the start command (or may be another command), and is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. However, the mode in which the sub-control circuit 200 side transmits information that can recognize the internal winning combination or the navigation data is not limited to this.

For example, for "F_RT0 medium replay 1" to "F_RT0 medium replay 6", the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. You may. Further, regarding "F_RT1 medium replay 1" to "F_RT1 medium replay 6", the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. You may. Further, regarding "F_RT2 medium replay 1" to "F_RT2 medium replay 3", the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. You may. That is, regarding the push order replay, in each game state (advantageous section) in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, the winning combination number is transmitted as information that can identify the internal winning combination, which is advantageous to the player. In each gaming state (non-advantageous section and normal advantageous section) in which the information of the stop operation cannot be notified, the winning combination number may be transmitted as information that the internal winning combination cannot be specified.

This also applies to the push order small role. In this case, the same winning combination number may be assigned in the non-advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers may be assigned in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section. Then, regarding the assignment of the winning combination number in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, for example, which effective line the symbol of "bell" may be displayed on, and the type of stop operation advantageous to the player The winning combination number may be further subdivided and assigned so that both can be identified.

In this way, for example, in each game state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified of the push order small combination and the push order replay, the winning combination number is transmitted as information that can identify the internal winning combination. In each game state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player cannot be notified, if the winning combination number is transmitted as information that the internal winning combination cannot be specified, the navigation data described later (FIG. 45 described later). It may not be necessary to transmit the information corresponding to (see) to the sub-control circuit 200. In this case, the process of transmitting the information corresponding to the navigation data (see FIG. 45 described later) to the sub-control circuit 200, which will be described later, can be omitted, and the control load can be reduced.

In FIG. 32, as an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number, the presence or absence of the winning combination (carry-over) of the bonus combination is not considered, but the bonus combination is carried over. The correspondence between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number may be changed depending on whether or not the winning combination is used. For example, in the inter-flag state, various lottery related to game playability is basically not performed. Therefore, in the inter-flag state, all the lottery numbers may be assigned to "0".

<Playability in non-advantageous section (normal state)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the flow of the game in the non-advantageous section (normal state) will be described. Note that FIG. 33 shows an outline of the gaming state that is transitioned when each internal winning combination shown in the figure is won in the normal state.

(At the time of winning the role of weak rare)
If a weak rare role ("F_weak rare role A" and "F_weak rare role B") is won in a non-advantageous section and a bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 has a high probability of 1 in the game state. Along with shifting to the state (normal advantageous section), the "9" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, during at least nine games from the next game, the state is controlled to a high accuracy 1 state from the next game.

(At the time of chance)
When the chance eye ("F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4") is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state. , The main CPU 101 shifts the game state to the high accuracy 2 state (normal advantageous section), and sets the "9" game in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, the high accuracy 2 state is controlled from the next game to at least 9 games.

At this time, as a result of the player's stop operation, the "RT3 transition" is displayed and the RT state shifts to the RT3 state, and the "RT3 transition" is not displayed and the RT state does not shift to the RT3 state ( That is, there is a case where the RT state other than the RT3 state continues). In each case, there is no change in shifting to the high accuracy 2 state, but it is advantageous for the player that the RT state is the RT3 state. This point will be described in detail later.

The chance eye is an internal winning combination that can be won in duplicate with the bonus combination, but if the winning combination is duplicated in the bonus combination, the processing related to the bonus combination (see "When winning the bonus combination" described later). ) Is prioritized, so the control to shift to the high accuracy 2 state is not performed.

(At the time of winning 1 watermelon)
When the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”) is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 performs the ART lottery. Specifically, for example, with a probability of 8/256, it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section via the main precursor state of the normal advantageous section (that is, the ART winning is determined), 248 /. With a probability of 256, it is usually decided to shift to the high probability 3 state of the advantageous section, but not to shift to the advantageous section (that is, to determine the ART non-winning). In this case, it may be possible to further determine, with a predetermined probability, to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section via the present precursor state of the normal advantageous section.

In both cases when the ART winning is determined and when the ART non-win is determined, the main CPU 101 determines the game period (precursor period) of the normally advantageous section to be transferred based on the watermelon 1 winning. Lottery is done. Specifically, for example, the precursor period of any one of the precursor period "9" to "16" games is determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the precursor period "9" game is determined, the "9" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section, and when the precursor period "16" game is determined, the game period of the normal advantageous section is determined. The "16" game is set in. In this case, the number of one game may be determined with different probabilities depending on whether the transition destination is in the present precursor state or the high-accuracy 3 state. For example, in the case of shifting to the present precursor state, the lottery probability can be set so that a relatively long precursor period can be easily determined as compared with the case of shifting to the high probability 3 state.

In this way, when the watermelon 1 is won, if the ART winning is determined, it is controlled to the main precursor state of the normal advantageous section during at least the number of games determined by the precursor period lottery from the next game, and the present precursor state. After the end of, it is controlled to the ending preparation state of the advantageous section (see FIG. 34 described later). Further, if the ART non-winning is determined, it is controlled to the high accuracy 3 state of the normal advantageous section during at least the number of games determined by the lottery during the precursory period from the next game.

(At the time of winning the bonus role)
When the bonus combination ("F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" and "F_BB4") is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 performs the ART lottery. If "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" having different winning probabilities is determined as the internal winning combination, the ART lottery is not performed. That is, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, the state between the flags of the non-advantageous section (normal state) is reached without shifting to each gaming state of the normal advantageous section. After that, the non-advantageous section (normal state) becomes a bonus state, and when the bonus state ends, the non-advantageous section (normal state) returns to the bonus non-winning state.

In the ART lottery at the time of winning the bonus role, specifically, for example, with a probability of 64/256, after the end of the bonus state, the player shifts to the line battle state of the advantageous section via the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section. Decide (that is, determine the ART winning), and with a probability of 192/256, decide to shift to the high probability 4 state of the normal advantageous section, but not to shift to the advantageous section (that is, determine the ART non-winning). To do). In this case, it may be possible to further determine, with a predetermined probability, to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section via the ending preparation state of the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state.

In either case, when the ART winning is determined and when the ART non-winning is determined, the main CPU 101 first shifts the gaming state to the high-accuracy 4 state (normally advantageous section). As a result, it is controlled to the high accuracy 4 state from the next game. The period during which the high-accuracy 4 state continues in the inter-flag state may be until the transition from the inter-flag state to the bonus state (until the carried-over bonus combination is established), or after the high-accuracy 4 state is established. It may be between "9" games (that is, the same as in the high-accuracy 1 state and the high-accuracy 2 state). Further, when the ART winning is determined, the inter-flag state may be shifted to the present precursor state (normally advantageous section) instead of the high accuracy 4 state. Further, in the inter-flag state, since various lottery as the high-accuracy 4 state is not actually performed, this inter-flag state is usually an advantageous section, but the high-accuracy 1 to high-accuracy 4 state and this precursor. It may be defined as a state different from the state (for example, "normal advantageous state between flags"), and when a bonus combination is won, the state may be shifted to the normal advantageous state between flags (normal advantageous section).

Then, after the bonus state is reached, when the bonus state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section if the ART winning is determined, and if the ART non-winning is determined. , The high accuracy 4 state of the normal advantageous section is continued, and the "32" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, it is controlled to the high accuracy 4 state for at least 32 games after the end of the bonus.

<Playability during normal advantageous section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the flow of the game during the normal advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 34 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the normal advantageous section. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, the high accuracy 1 state that is transferred based on winning the weak rare role, and the high accuracy that is transferred based on winning the chance. It has been decided to shift to 2 states, 3 high-accuracy states that are transferred based on winning the watermelon 1, 4 high-accuracy states that are transferred based on winning the bonus combination, and an advantageous section (ART). Has this precursory state.

First, the main CPU 101 is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state) or the bonus state, and is in the bonus non-winning state and is in the present precursor state (that is, when it has already been determined to shift to the advantageous section). ), The ART transition possible state lottery is performed for each unit game. In this ART shiftable state lottery, it is determined whether or not the state is determined to shift to the advantageous section (ART shiftable state) when the bonus combination is won in the normal advantageous section. In this ART transitionable state lottery, if it is decided to be in the ART transitionable state (if the ART transitionable state lottery is won) and the bonus combination is won, it is based on the bonus combination. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, and it is not decided to make it into the ART shiftable state (when the ART shiftable state lottery is not won), when the bonus combination is won Is determined not to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state based on the bonus combination, and to continue the normal advantageous section (more specifically, the high probability 4 state).

In the ART transitionable state lottery, specifically, for example, in the case of the high accuracy 1 state and the high accuracy 2 state, the ART transitionable state is set with a probability of 64/256 (the ART transitionable state is won). , 192/256, the ART transitionable state is not set (the ART transitionable state is not won). Further, for example, in the case of the high accuracy 3 state and the high accuracy 4 state, the ART transitionable state is set with a probability of 128/256 (winning to the ART transitionable state), and the ART transition is performed with a probability of 128/256. Do not set the possible state (not win the ART transitionable state). The winning probability of the ART transitionable state is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the winning probability to increase in the order of high accuracy 1 state, high accuracy 2 state, high accuracy 3 state, and high accuracy 4 state, or simply, the winning probability is different in each gaming state. It can also be set to.

In addition, the ART transitionable state lottery is performed for each unit game, but once the ART transitionable state is set in the normal advantageous section, the lottery is performed until the normal advantageous section ends. It is also possible to maintain the ART transitional state. In this case, once the ART shiftable state is set, it is not necessary to perform the ART shiftable state lottery until the end of the normal advantageous section thereafter. On the other hand, in the case of performing each unit game, at the start of the unit game, before determining whether or not the bonus combination has been won, first, whether or not the unit game is in the ART transitionable state is determined. The lottery may be performed, and then it may be determined whether or not the bonus combination has been won in the unit game.

Further, in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" having different winning probabilities is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. However, in the normal advantageous section, even if "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, if it is in the ART transitionable state, it is based on the bonus combination. It is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs control processing such as transition between states. In this inter-state transition control process, the transition control of each game state in the normal advantageous section is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the game period of the normal advantageous section is reset according to a predetermined condition. Do. The details of the control process such as transition between states will be described in detail below.

(At the time of chance)
When the chance eye ("F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4") is won when the section is usually advantageous and the bonus is not won. If the current state is the high-accuracy 1 state or the high-accuracy 2 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, the main CPU 101 sets the high-accuracy 2 state and plays a "9" game during the game period of the normal advantageous section. Reset. For example, if a player wins a chance when playing five games in a high-accuracy 1 state (9 games), the "9" game is reset, which is substantially a normal advantageous section. The game period will be extended by 5 games.

Further, if the current state is the high accuracy 3 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, the "9" game is reset during the game period of the normal advantageous section. In addition, if the current state is the high accuracy 4 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, and the number of remaining games in the game period of the current normal advantageous section is 8 games or less, the game period of the normal advantageous section is changed to " 9 ”Reset the game. That is, the game period of the normal advantageous section is appropriately extended based on the winning of the chance.

In the above, when the RT state is the RT3 state, the game period of the normal advantageous section is not reset even if the player wins the chance. In the RT3 state, the winning probability of the replay combination that is advantageous to the player is set. Although it is a game state that has been played, it is basically a game state that lasts only for 8 games, and as will be described later, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section, as in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), Since the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed without limitation, the end of the normal advantageous section and the end of the RT3 state are linked, and the player's expectation for the bonus winning combination even in the RT3 state. This is so as not to impair the feeling.

However, when the normal advantageous section is in the RT3 state, the game period of the normal advantageous section is set so that the end of the normal advantageous section is always one game later than the end of the RT3 state. That is, the game period of the normally advantageous section is set to be at least longer than the game period (8 games) in the RT3 state. In the present embodiment, the lighting of the status indicator is started when the normal advantageous section is started, and when the normal advantageous section is changed to the advantageous section, the lighting is continued, while the normal advantageous section is changed to the advantageous section. If not, the lighting usually ends when the advantageous section ends.

Therefore, for example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section or the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, when the same expectation effect (the effect of making the player expect the bonus winning combination or the ART winning) is performed, the normal advantageous section and RT3 If the game ends in the same state as the state, the state indicator may end lighting during the execution of the expectation effect. In this case, the player will be recognized as non-winning before the result is finally notified by the expectation effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section and the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the same expectation effect is executed for eight games, and the expectation effect is finally achieved in the eighth game. Although we are trying to notify the correctness of the game, we usually continue the advantageous section for one game after that so that the game cannot be recognized depending on the lighting mode of the status indicator, and the player's interest is maintained. Is possible.

Further, in the normal advantageous section, even when the RT3 state ends, the remaining period (for example, between one game) is still the normal advantageous section, so it is usually advantageous depending on the type of the internal winning combination here. Since the section may be extended, for example, even if it is notified that the bonus role has not been won in the expectation production, the player usually wishes to extend the advantageous section and continues the game. I think. In this sense as well, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player.

The expected feeling effect that can be executed may be, for example, a continuous effect by the image displayed on the display device 11, or a continuous effect performed by another effect device (for example, the speaker group 84 or the LED group 85). There may be. Further, it is not always necessary to be a continuous production, and any production may be used as long as it is performed to raise the expectation of the player. For example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section or the predetermined number of times (for example, the eighth game) of the game in the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the success or failure of the game may be notified. In this case, the number of games in which the predetermined number of games is played may be arbitrarily determined within the range not exceeding 8 games, or by lottery.

Further, regardless of the RT state, the above-mentioned expectation effect may be performed in the present precursor state of the normal advantageous section. In this case, the period during which the expectation effect can be executed may be the same as the RT3 state or the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, or may be executed over a longer period.

In addition, when the current state is the present precursor state and the RT state shifts to the RT3 state (that is, when the "RT3 transition" is displayed), the "8" game is played during the game period of the normal advantageous section. Reset. In this case, when the normal advantageous section ends, the section shifts to the advantageous section. Therefore, by completely linking the end of the RT3 state and the end of the normal advantageous section, the advantageous section that is more advantageous to the player (without leaving the normal advantageous section) Priority is given to the transition to. Further, in this case, if the above-mentioned expectation effect has already been performed, the expectation effect may be performed as it is until the end, or a new expectation effect may be performed again for eight games. You may be asked. Further, the expectation effect may be extended based on the shift of the RT state to the RT3 state.

(At the time of winning 1 watermelon)
When the watermelon 1 ("F_watermelon 1") is won in the normal advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 must be in the present precursor state (that is, the ART winning state has not been determined yet). B), ART lottery will be conducted in the same way as for non-advantageous sections.

Then, if the current state is one of the high-accuracy 1 to high-accuracy 3 states, the RT state is the RT3 state, and the ART non-winning state, the main CPU 101 sets the high-accuracy 3 state. Normally, the game period of the advantageous section is not reset. In addition, if the current state is one of the high-accuracy 1 to high-accuracy 4 states, the RT state is the RT3 state, and the ART is won, this precursor state is set and the number of remaining games in the RT3 state is set. Reset the number of games in the normal advantageous section to the game period.

Further, if the current state is the high accuracy 1 or high accuracy 2 state, the RT state is not the RT3 state, and the ART non-winning state, the high accuracy 3 state is set, and the above-mentioned precursor period lottery is performed again. Determine the game period of the normally advantageous section to be set. Further, if the current state is one of the high accuracy 1 to high accuracy 4 states and the RT state is not the RT3 state but the ART winning state, this precursor state is set, and the high accuracy 1 state and high accuracy state are set. In the case of 2 states or 4 high accuracy states, the game period of the normal advantageous section to be reset is determined by performing the above-mentioned precursor period lottery again. In addition, in the case of the high accuracy 3 state, the game period of the normal advantageous section is not reset.

(At the time of winning the bonus role)
When the bonus combination ("F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" and "F_BB4") is won in the normal advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 has the current normal advantageous section ART. If it is not in the transitionable state, the high-accuracy 4 state is set, and the "32" game is reset in the game period of the normal advantageous section in the high-accuracy 4 state after the end of the bonus state. If the current normal advantageous section is in the ART transitionable state, the present precursor state is set, and the "0" game is reset to the game period of the normal advantageous section in the present precursor state after the end of the bonus state (that is,). Immediately after the end of the bonus state, shift to the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section).

When the push order small winning combination is won in the normal advantageous section, the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state, the main CPU 101 notifies the pushing order of the pushing order small winning combination. Specifically, on the instruction monitor, a numerical value corresponding to the navigation data is displayed, and a command including information corresponding to the navigation data is transmitted so that the push order notification can be performed on the sub-control circuit 200 side.

Here, in the present embodiment, if the RT state is the RT3 state or the RT5 state, the push order notification is performed every time the push order small winning combination is won, while the RT state is the RT3 until the end of the normal advantageous section. Except for the state and the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed only once during the normal advantageous section. When the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the upper limit of the push order notification is not limited to one, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be "twice" or "three times".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the RT state is the RT3 state, the push order notification is performed every time the push order small winning combination is won until the end of the normal advantageous section. After the RT3 state is reached and eight games are digested, the RT3 state ends, but the usually advantageous section may continue. In this case, once the RT3 state is reached, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination may be continued until the end of the normal advantageous section even after the end of the RT3 state, or the RT3 state may be continued. The push order notification of the push order small winning combination may be terminated in conjunction with the end of, and only the normal advantageous section may be continued. That is, the push order notification can be performed only during the period when the RT state is the RT3 state.

Further, for example, when the RT state is not the RT3 state, the transition to the normal advantageous section may occur, and the RT state may become the RT3 state in the normal advantageous section. In this case, if the push order notification has already been performed once, the upper limit number of times may be valid even in the subsequent RT3 state so that the push order notification is not performed, or the upper limit number of times in the subsequent RT3 state. May be disabled so that the push order notification is performed. Further, in this case, if the push order notification has not been performed even once, the push order notification may be performed only once by validating the upper limit number of times even in the subsequent RT3 state. In the RT3 state of, the upper limit number of times may be invalidated so that the push order notification is performed. The same applies to the case where the RT state shifts to the normal advantageous section when the RT state is not the RT5 state, and the RT state becomes the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section.

Assuming that the upper limit of the push order notification is once when the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the RT state becomes the RT3 state or when the push order notification is performed twice or more in the normal advantageous section. It is confirmed that it is in the RT5 state. In the present embodiment, since the chance eye can be won at the same time as the bonus combination, for example, in the non-advantageous section, the chance eye is won and the RT3 transition is not displayed and the normal advantageous section is entered. If so, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the bonus combination is won (that is, whether or not the RT5 state is the inter-flag state) when the first push order notification is performed. When the second push order notification is performed, it is confirmed that the player is not in the RT3 state, and as a result, it is possible to recognize that the bonus combination has been won.

On the other hand, for example, when the RT3 transition is displayed and the transition is made to the normal advantageous section, whether or not the bonus combination is won in the number of push order notifications (that is, whether the RT5 state is the inter-flag state). Whether or not it is difficult to recognize, for example, it is possible to recognize that the bonus role is won by the final production content of the above-mentioned expectation effect.

That is, the RT3 state has a high probability of winning the replay combination, and is, for example, a gaming state in which the RT state does not change even if the RT1 transition or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, and if it is a normal advantageous section, the number of times is increased. Since the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed without limit, it is possible to advance the game in the normal advantageous section more advantageously than playing the game in the normal advantageous section in other RT states, but on the other hand, it is normal. In the advantageous section, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the player has won the bonus role.

In the present embodiment, when a bonus combination is won during an advantageous section and a bonus state based on the bonus combination is activated, information (pushing order) of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified in the bonus state. On the other hand, if the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination is activated, the stop operation advantageous to the player is performed in the bonus state. Information (pushing order) is not notified. This is the same even when the bonus combination is won when the ART transition is possible in the normal advantageous section. In this case, although the section shifts to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, the information (pushing order) of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified during the bonus state. The specific content of the push order notification will be described later with reference to FIG. 45 described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 24, when the push order small winning combination is won in the inter-flag state, the "upper bell" and the "middle stage" are different from the bonus non-winning state regardless of the stop operation order. "Bell" or "lower bell" is established and eight medals are paid out, but even on this premise, the normal advantageous section ends in the inter-flag state (RT5 state) of the normal advantageous section. Until, the push order notification similar to the bonus non-winning state is made. That is, in the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the same push order notification as in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section is sent at the time of winning the push order combination, regardless of whether or not the profit actually given by the push order fluctuates. It is supposed to be done. As described above, this is done from the viewpoint of making it difficult to recognize whether or not the bonus role is won, and trying to maintain the expectation.

As described above, when the push order small winning combination is won in the inter-flag state, the number of medals to be paid out can be changed according to the stop operation order as in the bonus non-winning state. In this case, in the normal inter-flag state (RT5 state) of the advantageous section, there is a high possibility that the profit given by the push order notification will increase, so is the bonus combination won? Not only can you raise the expectation of whether or not, but you can also raise the expectation of the benefits to be granted.

Further, when it is a normal advantageous section and the bonus is not won, the main CPU 101 updates the game period of the normal advantageous section for each unit game. Specifically, the number of games played during the normal advantageous section is subtracted by "1", and then whether or not the normal advantageous section game period is exhausted (that is, whether the subtraction result is "0"). To judge. In updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, the number of games is added by "1" for each unit game, and then whether or not the addition result reaches the number of games of the game period of the normal advantageous section. It may be determined whether or not the game period of the normally advantageous section has been exhausted by the determination of.

As a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, if the game period of the normal advantageous section is not digested (“period undigested” in FIG. 34), the normal advantageous section is continued and the bonus of the normal advantageous section is not won. The game in the state will be repeated.

In addition, as a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted and it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, "period digestion ART non-winning" ”), The normal advantageous section is terminated, and the non-advantageous section is shifted to the bonus non-winning state.

As a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, even if the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is not performed even once in the normal advantageous section ( That is, if the push order small combination is not won), the normal advantageous section may be continued until the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed once. In this way, it is possible not only to guarantee that the player obtains the minimum profit in the usually advantageous section, but also, for example, until the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed after the period is exhausted. , If it becomes possible to shift to ART and win a bonus role, it will be possible to shift to an advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, so that the gameplay will be more diverse and the interest of the game will be improved. Can be done.

In addition, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted as a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, and it is decided to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, "period". In the "digestion line battle win"), the normal advantageous section is terminated, and the line battle preparation state (bonus non-win state) of the advantageous section is entered. In addition, since the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state, in the present embodiment, before shifting to the line battle state of the advantageous section, the line battle preparation state is shifted as a preparation period until the transition to the RT2 state. However, if the RT2 state is accidentally reached at the end of the normally advantageous section, the line battle state may be directly shifted to the line battle state without going through the line battle preparation state. Further, since both the RT0 state and the RT2 state are game states in which the winning probability of the replay combination is the highest (see FIGS. 16 and 17), the RT0 state is accidentally set to the RT0 state when the normal advantageous section ends. If so (or if the RT3 state has ended and the RT0 state has been entered), the line battle ready state may be directly shifted to the line battle state.

In addition, as a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted and it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, "period". In the digestion ending 1 winning state), the normal advantageous section is ended, and the ending preparation state (bonus non-winning state) of the advantageous section is shifted. It should be noted that, when the advantageous section usually ends, the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, before shifting to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section, until the transition to the RT2 state is performed. As a preparation period, we try to shift to the ending preparation state, but if it happens to be in the RT2 state at the end of the advantageous section, we will shift directly to the ending 1 state without going through the ending preparation state. You may. Further, since both the RT0 state and the RT2 state are game states in which the winning probability of the replay combination is the highest (see FIGS. 16 and 17), the RT0 state is accidentally set to the RT0 state when the normal advantageous section ends. If (or, if the RT3 state has been completed and the RT0 state has been entered), the ending 1 state may be directly shifted without going through the ending preparation state.

<Summary of playability in non-advantageous sections and normal advantageous sections>
In the following, the main parts of the playability in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section (including some of the playability in the advantageous section) will be briefly described.

(1) The "chance eye" can be determined as an internal winning role at the same time as the bonus role. (2) When the "chance eye" is won, the RT state becomes the RT5 state if the bonus combination is also determined as the internal winning combination at the same time. In this case, if it is a non-advantageous section, it shifts to a normal advantageous section (for example, "high probability 4 state" or "normal advantageous state between flags").
(3) (3) When the "chance" is won, the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination at the same time, and the "RT3 transition" is based on the fact that the stop operation is performed in a specific mode. Is displayed, the RT state becomes the RT3 state. In this case, regardless of whether or not the "RT3 transition" is displayed, if it is a non-advantageous section, it is shifted to a normal advantageous section (for example, "high accuracy 2 state").
(4) The normal advantageous section (for example, "high probability 2 state") that has been transferred by winning the "chance eye" is at least a longer period (for example, 9 games) than the period during which the RT3 state continues (for example, between 8 games). (Between games), it is possible to continue.

(5) When the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination is completed, if the ART winning is determined, the player shifts to the advantageous section (for example, "line battle ready state").
(6) When a bonus combination is won in a non-advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, if the ART winning is not determined (if the ART non-winning is determined), a specific period (for example, if the ART non-winning is determined) (Between 32 games), shift to a normal advantageous section (for example, "high accuracy 4 state"). (7) If a bonus combination is won in a non-advantageous section, and if the bonus combination is a bonus combination in which the winning probabilities are the same among a plurality of set values, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART). However, in the case of a bonus combination in which the winning probabilities differ among a plurality of set values, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART).
(8) When a bonus combination is won in a normal advantageous section, the bonus combination is a bonus combination having the same winning probability among a plurality of set values, and a bonus combination having a different winning probability among a plurality of set values. In any case, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART).

(9) When the RT state is the RT3 state in the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed until the end of the normal advantageous section.
(10) When the RT state is the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed until the end of the normal advantageous section.
(11) In the normal advantageous section, when the RT state is not the RT3 state or the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed only a predetermined number of times (for example, once).
(12) When a bonus combination is won in an advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed in the bonus state based on the bonus combination, but when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. , In the bonus state based on the bonus combination, the push order notification of the push order small combination is not performed regardless of whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "chance eye" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to control the normal advantageous section for at least 9 games, and when the ART winning combination is determined, the advantageous section. It is possible to shift the RT state to the RT3 state when the "RT3 transition" is displayed, and when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT state is changed to RT5. It is possible to change to a state. In addition, it is possible to determine the "chance eye" and the bonus role as the internal winning role at the same time. Then, in the case of the RT3 state and the RT5 state, which are usually advantageous sections, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player is notified about the push order small winning combination.

As a result, in the normal advantageous section, the possibility that the number of medals to be awarded will increase as compared with the non-advantageous section will increase, and the expectation of whether or not to transition to the bonus state will also increase, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the normally advantageous section can be continued (9 games) is set to be longer than the period during which the RT3 state can be continued (8 games).

As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation regardless of whether or not a specific game state (RT3 state) ends, so that the interest in the transition of the state that is advantageous to the player can be further improved. Can be planned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "chance eye" is a case where the "RT3 transition eye" is displayed when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, an appropriate timing) and is not performed in the specific mode. In the case of an internal winning combination in which "RT3 transition" is not displayed, and the normal advantageous section is in the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the player is advantageous for the push order small combination until the normal advantageous section ends. When the procedure of the stop operation is notified and it is not in the RT3 state and the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player for the push order small combination is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, once). Is to be notified.

As a result, when the "chance eye" is won, the degree of advantage and content of the normal advantageous section are determined by whether or not the bonus combination is also determined as the internal winning combination and whether or not the "RT3 transition" is displayed. Since it can be changed, it is possible to further improve the interest in the transition of the state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state based on the winning bonus combination in the non-advantageous section ends, if the ART winning is determined, the game is shifted to the advantageous section, and if the ART winning is not determined. Is designed to shift to a normal advantageous section (for example, high accuracy 4 state) for a specific period (for example, between 32 games).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game is in any of the normally advantageous sections, either a bonus combination having the same winning probability among the plurality of set values or a bonus combination having a different winning probability among the plurality of set values. Even if you win the prize, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, but if it is a non-advantageous section, it is advantageous if you win a bonus combination with different winning probabilities among multiple set values. It is not decided whether or not to shift to the section.

As a result, the transition of the subsequent game state (game section) can be made more diverse depending on the game state and its type when the bonus combination is won, so that the interest regarding the transition of the state that is more advantageous to the player is further enjoyed. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, it is possible to notify the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the push order small combination, and even when the push order is controlled to the bonus state in the advantageous section, the push order is small. It is possible to notify the player of the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player for the combination, but when the bonus state is controlled in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player for the push order small combination is performed. It is not possible to notify.

As a result, it is possible to provide a normal advantageous section, which is a game section in which the expectation of shifting to the advantageous section is increased and the possibility that the number of medals to be awarded increases is also increased. It is possible to improve the interest, and even if such a game section is provided, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessive, and the player's gambling spirit is excessively fueled. It is also possible to suppress being struck.

<Playability during line battle>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 41, the flow of the game during the line battle state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 35 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the line battle state of the advantageous section. Further, FIG. 36 shows an example of various data tables stored in the main ROM 102, which are various tables referred to at least in the line battle preparation state and the line battle state in the advantageous section. Further, FIGS. 37 to 41 show a display example of the display device 11 in order to explain an mode in which the degree of continuation of whether or not the line battle state is continued varies. In the present embodiment, the line battle state has an interval state, a battle state, and a continuous lottery state. Further, in the present embodiment, the line battle state is basically a gaming state in which the line battle state is transferred via the line battle preparation state.

(Preparing for line battle)
When the ART winning is determined based on winning the bonus combination in the non-advantageous section or the normal advantageous section, the main CPU 101 shifts to the line battle preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends. .. In addition, in the line battle preparation state and the line battle state of the advantageous section, the bonus combination is won, and when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, the line battle preparation state is entered (that is, the line battle state is restored). ). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the line battle ready state is maintained until the RT state shifts to the RT2 state.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. When the RT3 state is entered, the line battle preparation state may be terminated and the line battle state may be entered.

Further, as described above, for example, in a non-advantageous section or a normal advantageous section, when an ART lottery is performed based on winning a specific combination other than a bonus combination (for example, "watermelon 1"), the winning result. When it is possible to decide to shift to the line battle state, when the normal advantageous section ends, the line battle ready state is shifted. Also in this case, the line battle ready state is maintained until the RT state shifts to the RT2 state.

However, for example, when the RT state is the RT0 state, even though the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is performed, the stop operation is performed without following the push order notification. As a result, when "RT1 transition" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the line battle state may be shifted even if the RT state is not the RT2 state. .. The same applies to the right acquisition lottery preparation state and the ending preparation state. That is, when a push order error occurs in each preparation state, the game state may be shifted to the corresponding gaming state even if the RT state is not the RT2 state.

In the line battle preparation state, an enemy selection table lottery, an ally selection table lottery, and an ally acquisition lottery are performed. It should be noted that the lottery related to these playability is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the line battle preparation state. In addition, the lottery related to these game characteristics can be performed even in each game state of the normal advantageous section. In this case, when the normal advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, the lottery result in the normal advantageous section is reflected in the line battle state, and when the normal advantageous section does not shift to the advantageous section, the lottery in the normal advantageous section is reflected. The result may be discarded (cleared).

In the enemy selection table lottery, an enemy selection table for selecting information corresponding to the enemy character to be battled in the battle state described later is determined. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the enemy selection table lottery table shown in FIG. 36A, and selects any of the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 based on the number of enemy defeats and the lottery value. Here, the number of times the enemy is defeated is the number of times the enemy HP becomes "0" in the battle state described later and is transferred to the right acquisition state, and the number of times the line battle state is determined to continue in the continuous lottery state described later. As the cumulative number of times (that is, the number of times the line battle state has continued), the number of times stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 103 is shown.

In the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 36A, each information is assigned so that the continuation degree of the line battle state can be changed according to the number of times the enemy is defeated. In the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 36A, "low" indicates that the player's degree of advantage with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state is relatively low, and "medium" indicates the degree of continuation of the line battle state. Indicates that the player's degree of advantage is medium, and "high" indicates that the player's degree of advantage is high with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the present embodiment, as information corresponding to the enemy character to be battled, "A" (enemy character A), "B" (enemy character B), "C" (enemy character C), and "D" ( Enemy character D) is set, and one of them is determined in the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the degree of expectation that the line battle state will continue in the order of "A", "B", "C", and "D" is gradually increased. That is, the degree of advantage of the player is gradually increased in the order of "A", "B", "C", and "D".

Then, in the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, if the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "low", the enemy character (for example, "A") having a relatively low degree of advantage of the player is determined. Enemy characters that are easy to play and have a relatively high degree of advantage for the player (for example, "D") are difficult to determine, and if the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "high", the player's It is difficult to determine an enemy character with a relatively low degree of advantage (for example, "A"), and it is easy to determine an enemy character with a relatively high degree of advantage of a player (for example, "D"). If the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "medium", the probability is between them. In this way, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the ally selection table lottery, the ally selection table for selecting the information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle advantageously in the battle state described later is determined. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the ally selection table lottery table shown in FIG. 36B, and selects any of the ally selection tables 1 to 8 based on the number of enemy defeats and the lottery value. Since the number of times the enemy has been defeated has already been explained, the explanation here will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, as information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle advantageously, "1" (friend character 1), "2" (friend character 2), "3" (friend character 3), and "4". "(Friend character 4) is set, and it is determined whether or not one or more ally characters are given in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the higher the number of assigned ally characters, the higher the expectation that the line battle state will continue. That is, the greater the number of ally characters given, the higher the degree of advantage of the player.

Then, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "extremely low", the ally character is rarely given, and the information indicated by the determined ally selection table. If is "low", it is difficult to assign a ally character, and even if it is assigned, it is one, and if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "medium", the ally character is likely to be assigned. However, it is difficult to assign a plurality of ally characters, and if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "high", the ally character is likely to be assigned, and a plurality of ally characters are likely to be assigned. In this way, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the ally acquisition lottery, it is determined in advance whether or not to grant the right to acquire the ally character, in addition to the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. Whether or not the main CPU 101 acquires a ally character with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2) based on winning a specific role (for example, "chance eye" or "watermelon 1"). decide. The table referred to in the ally acquisition lottery is not shown.

Here, if it is decided to grant the right as a result of the ally acquisition lottery, the number of the ally character that was not given as a result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle described later at the time of entering the battle state is the most. A small numbered ally character is given. For example, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, when the ally character "2" is given, if the right is acquired, the ally character "1" will be further given. That is, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, it is determined whether or not the ally character is given including the specific ally character type, whereas in the ally acquisition lottery, at least one of the ally characters is given. It is decided whether or not to decide.

In addition, the right decided to be granted as a result of the ally acquisition lottery basically disappears when the subsequent battle state ends, and in order to obtain the right again, it is necessary to win the ally acquisition lottery again. .. In this sense, the right may be said to be a "limited right" different from the "permanent right" described later.

(Interval state)
As described above, when the line battle preparation state is completed, the main CPU 101 first shifts to the interval state at the start of the line battle state. The interval state is a state in which the game continues for three games, and when the game period in the interval state elapses three games, the battle state is entered. In the interval state, the above-mentioned ally acquisition lottery is performed.

When the interval state ends, the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle and the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle are performed.

In the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, based on the enemy selection table (any of 1 to 8) determined as a result of the above-mentioned enemy selection table lottery, information on the degree of expectation according to the current number of enemy defeats ("low" ~ Any of "high") is referred to, and information (any of "A" to "D") corresponding to the enemy character to be battled is determined. The table referred to in the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle is not shown.

In the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, based on the ally selection table (any of 1 to 8) determined as a result of the above-mentioned ally selection table lottery, information on the degree of expectation according to the current number of enemy defeats ("extremely low"" ~ (Any of "high") is referred to, and the information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle in an advantageous manner is determined. In the lottery by ally type at the time of entering the battle, for example, "1" wins, "2" wins, "3" wins, "4" wins, "1.2" While it can be decided that multiple ally characters will be granted, such as "winning", ... "winning" 1 to 4 ", etc., as a permanent right (or limited right) described later," If "1" is given and "winning for" 1 "" is determined, the lottery result is discarded (not reflected). Also, in this case, if "winning for" 1 and 2 "" is determined, only the part of "winning for" 1 "" is discarded (not reflected), and "winning for" 2 "". The part of is reflected. Therefore, if no other right is granted in the ally acquisition lottery, the ally characters in this case are "1" and "2". In addition, the table referred to in the lottery by ally type at the time of entering the battle is not shown.

Also, when the interval state ends, the initial value "32" is set for the enemy HP and the ally HP. Then, the enemy type is set according to the result of the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, and as a result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, the existence of the limited right granted based on the result of the ally acquisition lottery, and the permanence described later. The ally type is set according to the presence or absence of the permanent right granted based on the result of the right acquisition lottery.

(Battle state)
As described above, when the interval state ends, the main CPU 101 then shifts to the battle state during the line battle state. The battle state is a state that continues for at least 31 games, and during this period, if the ally side attacks, the enemy HP decreases by the damage of the attack, and if the enemy side attacks, the damage of the attack ally It has the playability of reducing HP. Then, if the enemy HP becomes "0" or less before the end of the battle state, it shifts to the right acquisition lottery state, and if the enemy HP does not become "0" or less before the end of the battle state, it shifts to the right acquisition lottery state. , Shift to the continuous lottery state described later.

In the battle state, when the "weak rare role" or the "chance eye" is won, the winning game is not included in the count target of the game period in the battle state. That is, the game period in the battle state is extended by the number of times the "weak rare role" or "chance eye" is won. Also, in the battle state, if the "chance eye" is won and the "RT3 transition eye" is displayed and the RT state becomes the RT3 state, the game period of the battle state is counted during the eight games in the RT3 state. Is not included in. That is, the game period in the battle state is extended by the number of games in which the RT3 state continues.

In the battle state, a counter lottery at the time of hitting rip, a damage lottery at the counter, a defense lottery at the time of hitting rip, a damage lottery at the time of hitting rip, and a damage lottery at the time of hitting rip can be performed. It should be noted that the lottery related to these playability is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the battle state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41, the relationship between the lottery related to various playability performed in the battle state and the information corresponding to the ally character will be described.

FIG. 37 shows the case where there is no ally in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) (that is, when none of "1" to "4" is given as the information corresponding to the ally character). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device 11.

First, the display device 11 displays the current "status" of the player's own self-character ("self" in FIGS. 37 to 41) corresponding to the player himself / herself as the basic display content during the battle state. At the same time, the enemy character on the enemy side determined as a result of the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle described above (“enemy A” in FIGS. 37 to 41. In this case, it is assumed that the enemy type “A” is selected). Shows the current "status" of.

The status is information corresponding to the remaining numerical range of the ally HP and the enemy HP set at the time of entering the battle state, and in this embodiment, the remaining numerical range is "32 to" for each of the ally HP and the enemy HP. When "25", the status "normal" is set, when the remaining numerical range is "24 to 17", when the status "small damage" is set, and when the remaining numerical range is "16 to 9". , When the status "Medium damage" is set and the remaining numerical range is "8 to 1", the status "Wreck" is set and when the remaining numerical range is "0" or less, the status "Destroy" Is set. In addition, the status "defeat" may be set for the enemy HP, but the status "defeat" may not be set for the ally HP, and when the remaining numerical range of the ally HP is "1" or less, The ally HP is fixed at "1" and cannot be subtracted below it.

Then, the display device 11 displays "Middle line attack effective" when there is no ally. This is related to the change in the degree of continuation of the line battle state only in the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) when none of the ally characters “1” to “4” is assigned in the battle state. It means that it functions as a judgment line.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of no ally, when the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed is determined. When it is done), it becomes an attack on the ally side, and while the damage lottery described later is performed, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell". (The internal winning combination that can be displayed is not determined), and if you win the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip"), it will be an attack on the enemy side, and the damage lottery described later will not be performed, and the shot rip described later will not be performed. When damage is drawn, lottery is done.

FIG. 38 shows the display device 11 in the case of acquiring the ally "1" (that is, when "1" is given as the information corresponding to the ally character) in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of. Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description here is omitted.

When the ally "1" is acquired, the display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective" and "upper line attack effective". This is because when the ally character "1" is assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41) are line battles. It means that it functions as a judgment line regarding fluctuations in the degree of continuation of the state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring the ally "1", when the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed as an internal winning. When the winning combination is determined) and when the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is displayed (that is, when the internal winning combination in which the "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is determined) Will be an attack on the ally side, and while the damage lottery described later will be performed, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" will not be displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell" may be displayed. The internal winning combination is not determined), the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is not determined), and " When it hits the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip"), it becomes an attack on the enemy side, and the damage lottery described later is not performed, but the damage lottery at the time of the shot rip described later is performed.

In FIG. 39, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state), when allies "1" and "2" are acquired (that is, "1" and "2" are added as information corresponding to the ally characters. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device (11). Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description here is omitted.

The display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", and "lower line attack effective" when allies "1" and "2" are acquired. This means that when the ally characters "1" and "2" are assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41). ), And the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) means that the line battle state functions as a determination line regarding a change in the degree of continuation.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring allies "1" and "2", when the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed. When the internal winning combination that can be played is determined), when the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display the "upper lip" or "upper bell" is determined. When the above-mentioned "lower lip" or "lower bell" is displayed (that is, when the internal winning combination in which the "lower lip" or "lower bell" can be displayed is determined), the ally side While the damage lottery described later is performed, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed. (Not), the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the above-mentioned "lower lip" Or, when the "lower bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "lower bell" or the "lower bell" can be displayed is not determined) and the "hit lip" ("F_hit lip") is won. Is an attack on the enemy side, and the damage lottery described later is not performed, but the damage lottery at the time of the impact rip described later is performed.

In FIG. 40, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state), in the case of acquiring allies "1" to "3" (that is, "1" to "3" are given as information corresponding to the ally character. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device (11). Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description here is omitted.

The display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", "lower line attack effective", and "counter available" when allies "1" to "3" are acquired. This means that when the ally characters "1" to "3" are assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41). ) And the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state, and when the “hit lip” (“F_hit lip”) is hit. This means that the counter lottery at the time of hitting and the damage lottery at the time of the counter, which will be described later, can be performed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring allies "1" to "3", in the case of acquiring allies "1" and "2", the damage lottery described later and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip described later are performed. Is the same, but in addition to that, the above-mentioned "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the above-mentioned The "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display the "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not determined), and the above-mentioned "lower lip" or "lower bell" Is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display the "lower rip" or "lower bell" is not determined), and when the "hit rip" ("F_hit rip") is hit, the hit rip described later Before the time damage lottery is performed, a counter attack is performed at the time of hitting to decide whether or not to activate the counter attack, and if this is won, it will be an attack on the ally side, and the counter time damage lottery described later will be performed. Is performed, and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip, which will be described later, is not performed.

In FIG. 41, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state), when allies "1" to "4" are acquired (that is, "1" to "4" are given as information corresponding to the ally characters. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device (11). Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description here is omitted.

The display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", "lower line attack effective", "counter available", and "defense available" when allies "1" to "4" are acquired. doing. This means that when the ally characters "1" to "4" are assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41). ) And the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state, and when the “hit lip” (“F_hit lip”) is hit. It means that the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip and the damage lottery at the time of counter can be performed, and even if the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip described later is not won, the defense lottery at the time of hitting rip described later can be performed. ing.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring allies "1" to "4", in the case of acquiring allies "1" and "2", the damage lottery described later, the damage lottery at the time of the impact rip described later, and the impact described below. The mode in which the counter lottery at the time of rip and the damage lottery at the time of counter are performed is the same, but in addition, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell". The internal winning combination that can display "" is not determined), the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display "upper lip" or "upper bell" is determined. (Not), the above-mentioned "lower lip" or "lower bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "lower lip" or "lower bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the "hit lip" (" In the case of hitting "F_Bombed Lip"), a counter lottery at the time of hitting rip is performed to determine whether or not to activate a counter attack before the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip described later is performed, and this is won. If you do not do so, a defense lottery will be performed at the time of hitting rip, and if you win this, it will be an attack on the enemy side, but the defense will be successful and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip will not be performed. ..

In the present embodiment, the damage lottery described later is performed only when the "replay" symbol and the "bell" symbol are actually aligned on the line set as the determination line. If the "bell" symbols are not actually aligned due to a player's push order error even though the push order notification has been made, the damage lottery described later may not be performed. , If the internal winning combination that the "replay" symbol or "bell" symbol can be aligned (can be displayed) on the line set as the judgment line is determined, the "replay" symbol or "bell" is actually used. The damage lottery described later may be performed regardless of whether or not the symbols of "" are aligned. Any of these methods can be adopted. When the latter method is adopted, the "judgment line" is no longer the line in which the "judgment" itself is actually performed, but it has the meaning of making it possible to notify the player, for example, that the damage lottery will be performed. As it becomes a thing, it still has an important meaning for the player.

Further, in FIGS. 37 to 41, an example in which the ally characters "1" to "4" increase in order is described. However, depending on the result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, for example, " It may be given only "2", only "3", only "4", or "2" and "3", "3" and "4". Therefore, in the following, the functions of the information "1" to "4" corresponding to the ally character will be briefly described again.

When the information "1" corresponding to the ally character is set, in addition to the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41), the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41) is in a line battle state. It comes to function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of.

When the information "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, in addition to the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41), the bottom line ("DL3" in FIGS. 39 to 41) is in a line battle state. It comes to function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of.

When the information "3" corresponding to the ally character is set, even if the ally HP is reduced due to the attack on the enemy side, the enemy HP is reduced due to the attack on the ally side. Will come to be.

When the information "4" corresponding to the ally character is set, the ally HP may not be reduced even if the ally HP is originally reduced due to the attack on the enemy side.

Here, regardless of whether the information "1" or "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). When the winning combination numbers "7", "8", or "24" are transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 blinks, for example, the part displayed as "middle line attack effective" on the display device 11. Perform processing such as making it appear or highlighting it. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the ally side expect to attack.

Further, when the information "1" corresponding to the ally character is set, the winning combination number "6" is set from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). Or, when "23" is transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 performs processing such as blinking or highlighting the portion displayed as "upper line attack effective" on the display device 11, for example. I do. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the ally side expect to attack.

Further, when the information "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the winning combination number "10" is set from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). Alternatively, when "25" is transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 blinks or highlights the portion displayed as "lower line attack effective" on the display device 11, for example. Is processed. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the ally side expect to attack.

However, the mode of production that makes the ally side expect to attack is not limited to this. For example, it may be an effect performed by another effect device (for example, a speaker group 84 or an LED group 85). Further, even when the winning combination number of the internal winning combination that is not in the above-mentioned correspondence relationship is transmitted, one of the above-mentioned effects may be performed with a predetermined probability.

The types and functions of information corresponding to the ally character are not limited to those described above. For example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "5") is set, the damage dealt determined in the damage dealt lottery described later increases (for example, the determined damage dealt is doubled). ) May be provided. Further, for example, when the information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "6") is set, the damage received in the damage damage lottery at the time of hitting rip, which will be described later, is reduced (for example, the determined damage received). May be halved).

Further, the line that functions as the determination line is not limited to the effective line. For example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character is set, even if the line is different from the effective line, it may be set as a special line and this special line may be made to function as a determination line. Specifically, for example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "5") is set, the cross-down line functions as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state in addition to the center line. You may try to do it. Further, for example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "6") is set, in addition to the center line, the cross-up line functions as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state. You may.

In such a case, the symbols displayed on the actual effective line are not the "Replay" symbol alignment or the "Bell" symbol alignment, but the symbols displayed on such a special line are the "Replay" symbols. If it is configured so that the symbols of "" or "bell" are aligned, the player can recognize that the degree of advantage fluctuates in the same way as the effective lines, regardless of the actual number of effective lines. However, it is possible to provide the same playability. From this point of view, the judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state does not necessarily include the effective line. For example, when the effective line is one line of the cross-up line, the line battle The determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the state may be composed of a maximum of three lines of a center line, a top line, and a bottom line. That is, it is also possible to configure the judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state only from the special line different from the effective line.

Further, when defining the determination line, similarly to the above-mentioned effective line, it is possible to define as an effective line instead of each line in which the symbols are aligned, or at the same time, a line in which the symbols are not aligned in a straight line. .. That is, if the line passes through (the area of) any one of the symbols in each row (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, right reel 3R), one or a plurality of lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines are connected. It can be set as a judgment line.

For example, a line connecting the upper region of the left reel 3L, the lower region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R (irregular line at V) may be defined as the determination line. That is, in the present embodiment, since the symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns in the frame of the reel display window 4, it is possible to define 27 kinds of determination lines. , At least one of them may be defined as a determination line.

Here, the explanation of the battle state is returned to again. As described above, when the information "3" corresponding to the ally character is set, when the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip") is won, the counter lottery at the time of the hit rip is performed. In the counter-lottery at the time of hitting, the main CPU 101 determines with a predetermined probability whether to activate the counter attack (winning) or not to activate the counter-attack (non-winning). The table referred to in the counter lottery at the time of hitting is not shown.

If the counter lottery at the time of hitting is won, the damage damage lottery at the time of the counter is subsequently performed. In the counter damage lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the counter damage lottery table shown in FIG. 36C, and determines the value of any one of the damages given based on the lottery value. When the value of the damage dealt is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the enemy HP, and the value of the enemy HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the enemy is updated as appropriate. Further, in this case, the damage lottery is not performed at the time of the impact rip.

On the other hand, when the counter lottery at the time of hitting is not won, the information "4" corresponding to the ally character is set, and the information "3" corresponding to the ally character is not set, but " If "4" is set, a defensive lottery will be performed when the ball is hit. In the counter lottery at the time of hitting, the main CPU 101 determines with a predetermined probability whether to activate the defense (winning) or not to activate the defense (non-winning). In addition, the table referred to in the defense lottery at the time of hitting is not shown.

If you win the defensive lottery at the time of hitting rip, the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip will not be performed. On the other hand, if the defensive lottery at the time of hitting rip is not won, the information "4" corresponding to the ally character is not set but "3" is set, and the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip is won. If not, or if the information "3" and "4" corresponding to the ally character are not set and the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip") is hit, the hit rip is received. Damage lottery is done.

In the damage-damaged lottery at the time of hitting rip, the main CPU 101 refers to the damage-damaged lottery table at the time of hitting rip shown in FIG. 36D, and determines one of the damaged values based on the enemy type and the lottery value. .. When the value of the damage received is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the ally HP, and the value of the ally HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the ally is updated as appropriate.

When the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the ally character are not set, and the internal winning combination that can display the "middle lip" or "middle bell" is determined, and the watermelon (in this case). , "F_watermelon 1" or "F_watermelon 2" may be included. The same shall apply hereinafter in this section), a damage lottery will be drawn. It is said.

When the information "1" corresponding to the ally character is set, the internal winning combination in which the "middle rip" or "middle bell" or the "upper rip" or "upper bell" can be displayed has been determined. In case, and when the watermelon is decided as the internal winning combination, the damage lottery is performed.

When the information "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the internal winning combination in which the "middle rip" or "middle bell" or the "lower rip" or "lower bell" can be displayed has been determined. In case, and when the watermelon is decided as the internal winning combination, the damage lottery is performed.

When the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the ally character are set, "middle rip" or "middle bell", "upper rip" or "upper bell", or "lower rip" or "lower rip" or " When the internal winning combination in which the "lower bell" can be displayed is determined, and when the watermelon is determined as the internal winning combination, a damage lottery is performed.

In the damage-damaged lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the damage-damaged lottery table shown in FIG. 36E, and determines any one of the damage-damaged values based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value. When the value of the damage dealt is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the enemy HP, and the value of the enemy HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the enemy is updated as appropriate.

Here, focusing on the RT state, the line battle state of the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state, but when the "RT3 transition" is displayed, it can also be the RT3 state. Referring to FIG. 16, in the RT2 state, the lottery value of "F_middle rip 1" is "5000", the lottery value of "F_upper rip" and "F_lower rip" is "2450", and "F_shot". While the lottery value of "rip" is "8970", in the RT3 state, the lottery value of "F_middle rip 2" is "32768" and the lottery value of "F_shot lip" is "0".

That is, if it is possible to shift to the RT3 state in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) of the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not the information "1" or "2" corresponding to the ally character is set. Instead, as a result of determining the internal winning combination that can display the "middle rip" with a high probability, it is possible to make the damage lottery performed with a high probability, and the internal winning combination that can display the "hit rip" can be displayed. As a result of not being determined, it is possible to prevent the damage lottery from being performed when the ball is hit. Therefore, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) of the advantageous section, the RT3 state is the most advantageous RT state.

In the battle state, if the enemy HP becomes "0" or less (that is, "defeat" as the status) before the battle state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right-granting lottery state of the advantageous section from the next game. In addition, if the enemy HP is not "0" or less and the game period in the battle state has not ended, the battle state is continued. In addition, when the enemy HP is not "0" or less and the game period in the battle state ends, the game shifts to the continuous lottery state in the line battle state from the next game.

In the present embodiment, when the "hit rip" ("F_hit rip") is hit, the counter lottery at the time of the hit rip, the defense lottery at the time of the hit rip, and the damage lottery at the time of the hit rip are performed. The lottery method in the battle state is not limited to this. For example, if an internal winning role (excluding "weak rare role", "chance eye", and bonus role) that is not subject to the damage lottery is decided, "shot lip" ("F_shot lip") ), The counter lottery at the time of the hit rip, the defense lottery at the time of the hit rip, and the damage lottery at the time of the hit rip may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip") is hit, the combination of the "shot rip" symbols is displayed on the center line. For example, a plurality of hit rips are displayed. Configured as a different internal winning combination, or configured as a push-order replay with the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip"), and the combination of the "shot rip" symbols is displayed on the top line according to the stop operation procedure. , Or may be displayed on the bottom line. In this case, if the top line or the bottom line is the judgment line, the counter lottery at the time of the hit rip, the defense lottery at the time of the hit rip, and the damage lottery at the time of the hit rip may be performed. The lottery may not be held. Also, if the top line or bottom line is the judgment line, the stop operation procedure may be notified so that the combination of the "shot lip" symbols is not displayed on the top line or bottom line. Good.

(Continuous lottery state)
As described above, when the enemy HP is not "0" or less and the game period in the battle state ends, the main CPU 101 then shifts to the continuous lottery state in the line battle state. The continuous lottery state is a state in which it continues for 4 games or 7 games, and finally, if it is decided to shift from the line battle state to the right acquisition lottery state, it shifts to the right acquisition lottery state. If it is decided to continue the line battle state, the line battle state is shifted to the interval state in the line battle state again, and if none of these decisions are made, the line battle state ends ( That is, the advantageous section ends), and the normal state of the non-advantageous section is entered.

In the continuous lottery state, continuous lottery and continuous lottery result rewriting lottery can be performed according to the enemy type and the damage state. It should be noted that the lottery related to these playability is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the continuous lottery state.

First, the main CPU 101 performs continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state when shifting from the battle state to the continuous lottery state. In the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state, the main CPU 101 refers to the continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 36F, and determines the enemy type, the damage state (that is, synonymous with the above-mentioned "status"), the lottery value, and the lottery value. Based on the above, the game period in the continuous lottery state is 4 games, but it is not decided whether to shift to the right acquisition lottery state or to continue the line battle state (“4G defeat”), and the game period in the continuous lottery state. Is 7 games, but it is not decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state or to continue the line battle state ("7G defeat"), the game period of the continuous lottery state is 4 games, and the line battle state is changed. It is decided to continue ("4G continuation"), the game period in the continuous lottery state is 7 games, and it is decided to continue the line battle state ("7G continuation"), the continuous lottery state The game period is 4 games and it is decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state (“4G promotion”), and the game period in the continuous lottery state is 7 games and it is possible to shift to the right acquisition lottery state. One of the things to be decided (“7G promotion”) is decided.

In addition, in the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state, at least the lottery result (“4G continuation”, “7G continuation”, “4G promotion”, and “7G promotion” described above) in which the advantageous section is not completed is determined. As a general rule, the probability increases in the order of enemy type "A", "B", "C", "D", and ally status is "wreck", "medium damage", "small damage". The order of "break" and "normal" is increased, and the enemy status is increased in the order of "normal", "small damage", "medium damage", and "wreck". That is, the three parameters of the enemy type, the ally status, and the enemy status are referred to, and whether or not the advantageous section continues is determined.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the battle state is entered, the information corresponding to which enemy character is set, how the ally status changes during the battle state, and which enemy status is during the battle state. It is possible to change the degree of continuation of the line battle state depending on how it changes. In addition, when changing the ally status and the enemy status, the type of information corresponding to the ally character (for example, the number of judgment lines) is important, and the degree of continuation of the line battle state is advantageous to the player. The probability of fluctuating the game or fluctuating it to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player also fluctuates.

In the continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 36F, when the ally status is "wreck" and the enemy status is "wreck", it is exceptionally determined that at least the lottery result in which the advantageous section is not completed is determined. It has become. In this way, when the ally status is a specific status and the enemy status is a specific status, contrary to the above-mentioned principle, the probability that the advantageous section continues is increased or the probability that the advantageous section continues is decreased. You can also do it.

Further, when the main CPU 101 shifts from the battle state to the continuous lottery state, the lottery result of the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state is the lottery result at which the advantageous section ends (the above-mentioned "4G defeat" and "4G defeat" and ". In the case of "7G defeat"), the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed in the continuous lottery state. Specifically, in the continuous lottery state, when the "chance eye" or the bonus combination is won, for example, if "4G defeat" is determined as the lottery result of the continuous lottery, it is rewritten to "4G continuation", for example. If "7G defeat" has been decided, rewrite it as "7G continuation". Further, when a watermelon (in this case, only "F_watermelon 1" or "F_watermelon 2" may be included) is won, a continuous lottery is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). Decide to rewrite the lottery result of. When it is decided to rewrite the lottery result of the continuous lottery, the lottery result of the continuous lottery is appropriately rewritten in the same manner as described above.

In the present embodiment, after the continuous lottery is performed according to the enemy type and the damage state, the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed, but the lottery method in the continuous lottery state is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous lottery state, first, a continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed (that is, a lottery is performed for each game to determine whether or not to continue the line battle state based on the internal winning combination), and the lottery is performed. If it is not decided to continue the line battle state as a result of, when the continuous lottery state ends, the continuous lottery may be performed according to the enemy type and the damage state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section, whether one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether it is an effective line) is used as a determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous section. When it is possible to determine and the "replay" or "bell" symbols are displayed side by side on the determined judgment line in the battle state during the line battle state, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section is set to the degree advantageous to the player. It is possible to make it fluctuate, and in the continuous lottery state during the line battle state, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the advantageous section based on the degree of continuation of the determined advantageous section.

As a result, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section can be changed according to the determination result of the determination line, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the continuation of the advantageous state for the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the battle state during the line battle state, when, for example, a combination of symbols of "shot lip" is displayed on the determined determination line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to change it to a certain degree.

As a result, it is possible to increase the tension during the advantageous section (for example, during the battle state during the line battle state), the game during the advantageous section does not become monotonous, and the interest regarding the continuation of the advantageous state for the player is It can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift the RT state in the line battle state of the advantageous section to the RT2 state, and when the "RT3 transition" is displayed, the RT state in the line battle state of the advantageous section is displayed. Can be transferred to the RT3 state, and a specific internal winning combination (for example, "F_middle rip 1" and "F_middle rip 1") in which a combination of symbols of "middle rip" can be displayed on the determined judgment line The probability of determining any of the "rip 2") is higher in the RT3 state than in the RT2 state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the RT2 state, it is possible to determine a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, "F_shot lip") in which the combination of the symbols of the "shot lip" can be displayed, and in the RT3 state, this predetermined value. It is not possible to determine the internal winning combination of.

As a result, during the advantageous section (for example, during the battle state during the line battle state), the degree of the player's advantage further varies depending on which RT state is in the game. It is possible to make the game more versatile and to improve the interest in continuing the state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the stop operation is performed in "batting order 1", "F_upper left bell 1" and "batting order 1" in which a combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the top line When the stop operation is performed with, "F_middle left bell 1" where the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the center line, and when the stop operation is performed with "batting order 3", at the top line "F_Upper middle bell 1" that displays the combination of "bell" symbols and "F_" that displays the combination of "bell" symbols on the center line when the stop operation is performed in "batting order 3" "Middle middle bell 1" can be determined at least as an internal winning combination, and as shown in FIG. 32, for example, "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_upper middle bell 1" is determined in the advantageous section. In that case, "23" is transmitted as the winning combination number, and when "F_middle left bell 1" or "F_middle middle bell 1" is determined, "24" is transmitted as the winning combination number. It has become. Then, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute different effects according to the transmitted winning combination number.

As a result, for example, when the player has a playability in which the degree of advantage of the player varies depending on the line on which the symbol is displayed, such as the line battle state of the advantageous section, the effect related to the combination of the displayed symbols. Therefore, it is possible to perform a more appropriate effect without increasing the control load.

<Right acquisition lottery state and playability during the right acquisition state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the flow of the game during the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 42 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state.

(Right acquisition lottery preparation status)
The main CPU 101 wins a bonus combination in the right acquisition lottery preparation state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the right acquisition state of the advantageous section, and shifts to the right acquisition lottery preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends. (That is, return to these states). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the right acquisition lottery preparation state is maintained until the RT state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT2 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT2 state, if the bonus role is the right acquisition state, the right acquisition state is entered, and if the bonus role is the right acquisition lottery state, the right acquisition lottery state is entered. Let me.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. When the state shifts to the RT3 state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state is terminated, and when returning to the right acquisition state, the right acquisition state is returned, and when returning to the right acquisition lottery state, the right acquisition lottery state is set. It may be restored.

(Right acquisition lottery state)
As described above, when the right acquisition lottery preparation state is completed and when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right acquisition lottery state. The right acquisition lottery state is in a state of continuing for 20 games, and of course, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified during this period. And even if it does not shift to the right acquisition state, it returns to the line battle state. Therefore, this right acquisition lottery state is a game state in which the game period of the advantageous section can be extended by itself. In the right acquisition state, the right acquisition state transition lottery is performed.

In the right acquisition state transition lottery, for example, in the right acquisition state lottery, the main CPU 101 may be only the "chance eye" or the watermelon (in this case, "F_watermelon 1" or includes "F_watermelon 2". If you win, it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state from the next game. In addition, when a common bell (“F_upper common bell” and “F_middle common bell”) is won, it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state from the next game with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4). Even if it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state, the transition to the right acquisition state may occur when the game period (20 games) in the right acquisition lottery state ends. In addition, when it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state, the precursor period is determined within the range of the remaining number of games in the game period in the right acquisition lottery state, and when this precursor period elapses, the transition to the right acquisition state is performed. You may do so. In addition, when shifting from the right acquisition lottery state to the right acquisition state, if the number of remaining games in the game period in the right acquisition lottery state occurs, the remaining number of games is added to the game period in the right acquisition state. Alternatively, it may be added to the game period in the right acquisition lottery state next time (when the right acquisition state returns to the right acquisition lottery state).

(Right acquisition status)
As described above, when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition state in the right acquisition lottery state, and when returning from the right acquisition lottery preparation state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right acquisition state. The right acquisition state is a state in which it continues for 10 games, and of course, information on a stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified during this period. Then, regardless of whether or not the permanent right is acquired, the right acquisition lottery state is returned. Therefore, this right acquisition state is a game state in which the game period of the advantageous section can be extended by itself. In the right acquisition state, a permanent right acquisition lottery is performed.

In the permanent right acquisition lottery, it is decided in advance whether or not to grant the right to permanently acquire the ally character (until the end of the advantageous section), in addition to the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. The right. The main CPU 101 decides to grant a permanent right, for example, when a bonus combination is won in the right acquisition state. In addition, for example, based on winning a specific combination (for example, "watermelon 1"), it may be decided to grant a permanent right with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4).

Here, if it is decided to grant the permanent right as a result of the permanent right lottery, each time the battle state is entered, the number of the ally character that was not given as a result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle is the highest. A small numbered ally character is given. For example, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, when the ally character "2" is given, if the permanent right is acquired, the ally character "1" will be further given. The function of the perpetual right granted is not limited to this. For example, if it is decided to grant the perpetual right as a result of the perpetual right lottery, the number of the ally character to which the perpetual right is not granted is fixedly assigned to the lowest number. You may. For example, when the perpetual right is first granted, the ally character "1" is granted as the right content of this perpetual right, and when the perpetual right is granted next, the ally character "2" is granted as the right content of this perpetual right. May be given.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the permanent right is granted in the right acquisition state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned limited right is granted in the right acquisition state. It may be decided whether or not to do so. In this case, for example, a lottery similar to the above-mentioned ally acquisition lottery may be performed, or the above-mentioned limited right is provided so that the probability of granting the limited right is higher than that of the above-mentioned ally acquisition lottery. It may be decided whether or not it is granted. Further, for example, in the right acquisition state, whether or not the above-mentioned limited right is granted is determined for each unit game with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10) regardless of the internal winning combination. May be good. If a permanent right or a limited right is granted at an opportunity other than the bonus winning combination, a plurality of rights can be acquired in the right acquisition state.

In this case, as described above, for example, when two rights are granted (when the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the ally character are set), the upper limit number of judgment lines is set in the battle state. (DL1 to DL3) will be set. In addition, for example, when three rights are granted (when the information "1" to "3" corresponding to the ally character is set), in addition to this, the counter may be activated in the battle state. Will be. In addition, for example, when four rights are granted (when information "1" to "4" corresponding to the ally character is set), in addition to this, defense may be activated in the battle state. Will be. Here, for example, when five or more rights are granted in the right acquisition state, the rights for more than four may be carried over to the next battle state or destroyed (cleared). It may be done. Further, for example, when five or more rights are granted in the right acquisition state, it may be determined that the advantageous section will always continue in the continuous lottery state after the end of the next battle state.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not a permanent right is granted so that the line battle state of the advantageous section can be advanced advantageously (information corresponding to the ally character can be set) in the right acquisition state. However, the content of rights that can be granted in the state of acquisition of rights is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous lottery state of the line battle state, the continuation right that the line battle state is forcibly continued regardless of the lottery result (that is, the right to extend the advantageous section. "Stock" or "number of sets" It may be decided whether or not the right acquisition lottery state is granted, or the right acquisition lottery state is forcibly continued regardless of the lottery result in the right acquisition lottery state. It may be determined whether or not the right to continue (that is, the right to extend the advantageous section, sometimes referred to as "stock", "number of sets", etc.) is granted. That is, in the right acquisition state, the content of the right that can be granted can be appropriately set as long as it brings benefits to the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section, whether one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether it is an effective line) is used as a determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous section. It is possible to make a decision, and the result of the decision varies depending on whether or not the right has been granted in the state of acquisition of the right. That is, it is possible to determine the determination line based on the rights granted in the right acquisition state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the right of the upper limit number or more of the judgment line is granted in the right acquisition state, first, the judgment line of the upper limit number is determined by using the right of the upper limit number. Then, in the battle state during the line battle state, for example, when the combination of the symbols of "shot lip" is displayed on the determined determination line, if the granted right does not remain, the advantageous section is continued. If the degree is changed to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player and the granted right remains, it is possible not to change the degree of continuation of the advantageous section to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the perpetual right is granted, a plurality of determination lines are always determined, and when the perpetual right is not granted, one or more determination lines are determined. One of the lines is determined as the judgment line.

As a result, the role of each gaming state in the advantageous section can be diversified, and the degree of continuation of the advantageous section can be varied in various ways. be able to.

<Playability during ending 1 state and ending 2 state>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the flow of the game during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 43 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state. Further, FIG. 44 shows an outline of the ending effect performed during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state.

(Preparing for ending)
The main CPU 101 wins a bonus combination in the ending preparation state, the ending 1 state, and the ending 2 state of the advantageous section, and shifts to the ending preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends (that is, these). To return to the state of). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the ending state is maintained until the RT state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT2 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT2 state, if the bonus combination is in the ending 1 state, the process shifts to the ending 1 state, and if the bonus combination is won in the ending 2 state, the process shifts to the ending 2 state.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. When the state shifts to the RT3 state, the ending preparation state is terminated, and when returning to the ending 1 state, the ending 1 state is returned, and when returning to the ending 2 state, the ending 2 state is returned. You may.

Further, when the main CPU 101 is determined to shift to the ending 1 state in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, for example, by the ART lottery at the time of winning the watermelon 1, the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted. At that time, it shifts to the ending ready state (that is, waits for the transition to the ending 1 state until it shifts to the RT2 state).

(Ending 1 state)
As described above, when the ending preparation state is completed and the process shifts (returns) to the ending 1 state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the ending 1 state. The ending 1 state is a state in which it continues for 100 games, and during this time, of course, information on a stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified. Then, when the ending 1 state is completed, the line battle state is entered. It is the same as the line battle state in that it is in the gaming state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section transitioning from the normal advantageous section, but the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the line battle state. In the ending 1 state, a permanent right acquisition lottery is performed in the same manner as in the right acquisition state.

As with the lottery in the right acquisition state, in the ending 1 state, it may be determined whether or not the above-mentioned limited right is granted, or the continuation right for extending the advantageous section is granted. It may be decided whether or not it is done.

Further, for example, in the ending 1 state, if the bonus combination is won, the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, and the game returns to the ending 1 state via the ending preparation state, the game period of 100 games is repeated. It may be counted from the beginning, or it may be counted by taking over the game period in the game that won the bonus role. In the latter case, for example, the bonus combination is won in the 10th game (90 games remaining) in the ending 1 state, the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, and the player returns to the ending 1 state via the ending preparation state. In that case, the game period of the ending 1 state may be 90 games.

Further, the game period in the bonus state may be included in the game period in the ending 1 state. For example, in the 10th game (90 games remaining) in the ending 1 state, the bonus combination is won, the game period of the bonus state based on the bonus combination is 17 games, the bonus state ends, and the ending preparation state is passed. When the game is returned to the ending 1 state, the game period of the ending 1 state may be 73 games.

(Ending 2 state)
When the number of games played in the advantageous section is "1200" or more and the interval state of the line battle state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the ending 2 state. The ending 2 state is a state in which it continues for 131 games, and during this time, of course, information on a stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified. Then, when the ending 2 state ends, the advantageous section itself also ends, and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section.

In this case, when the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period reaches "1200" times (or more times, for example, "1369" times), the game may be shifted to the ending 2 state. Good. Further, in this case, even when there are other gaming states in the advantageous section, the transition from these gaming states to the ending 2 state may be performed. Further, the mode of counting the game period in the ending 2 state is the same as the mode of counting the game period in the ending 1 state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the ending 2 state ends, the advantageous section itself ends, and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the ending 2 state ends, if the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period has not yet reached "1500" times, the line battle state may be shifted again. Alternatively, the ending 2 state may be continued until the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times.

(Ending production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, an ending effect that can be performed in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state will be described.

As the phrase indicates, the ending effect is basically an effect that suggests that the advantageous section will be terminated soon when the period controlled by the advantageous section becomes "1200" times or more. It has become. Further, considering the probability that the period controlled in the advantageous section is "1200" times or more, the probability of being executed is lower than that of other effects, which is a special effect.

The ending production is configured as, for example, a series of story productions consisting of episodes 1 to 8 and the final episode, and as the game period in the ending 2 state progresses, the content of the story also progresses. There is. As described above, in the case where the ending 2 state is configured to be sustainable from the period when the ending 2 state is controlled to the advantageous section is "1200" times until the regulation monitoring period is "1500" times. The content of the story may be advanced according to the game period until the regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times.

Here, in the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state when the advantageous section is started, the ending 1 state is started even though the advantageous section has just started. The ending effect is executed inside.

However, in the ending 1 state, a part of the above-mentioned series of story productions is executed, and not all of them are executed. Specifically, the first to eighth episodes of the first to eighth episodes and the final episodes are executed, but the final episode is not executed. In this case as well, as in the ending 2 state, basically, the content of the story progresses as the game period in the ending 1 state progresses.

A specific example in which a part of the above-mentioned series of story effects is executed in the ending 1 state will be described with reference to FIG. 44. For example, in the ending preparation state, an introduction effect of the ending effect is performed. Then, when the ending 1 state is started (ART start), the ending effect is started, and the story progresses in sequence, such as the first episode, the second episode, the eighth episode, and so on. Then, when the eighth episode is completed, a character such as "continue" is displayed on the display device 11, indicating that the story is not completed.

On the other hand, in the ending 2 state, when the ending 2 state is started (advantageous section ≥ 1200 interval state ends), the ending effect is started, and the first episode, the second episode, ... The story goes on. Then, when the eighth episode is completed, the story of the final episode is developed next, and when the story of the final episode is completed, a character such as "THE END" is displayed on the display device 11, indicating that the story is completed. ..

It should be noted that the above-mentioned production content of the ending effect shows an example of the production content of the ending effect that can be executed over a plurality of games, and the production content of the ending effect is not limited to this. Any production content may be used as long as it is a production content that is valuable to the player.

For example, if there is an animation or character used as a motif of pachislot 1, in the ending effect in the ending 2 state, a special image of the animation or a special image of the character that cannot normally be seen is displayed on the display device 11. It should be. In this case, in the ending effect in the ending 1 state, the contents of these images are made shorter than the ending effect in the ending 2 state (for example, summarized, halfway through, or as a separate content) and displayed on the display device 11. It should be. However, instead of or in combination with these, each ending effect can be performed according to the music and sound output from the speaker group 84 and the light emitting mode by the LED group 85.

In addition, the ending effect may be such that the content of the effect progresses regardless of the number of remaining games. For example, the time required for a unit game is tentatively set to "6 seconds" (this value is arbitrary), and the ending effect in the ending 2 state is set as a series of "6 seconds x 131 games = 786 seconds". This series of effects is started at the timing controlled to the ending 2 state, and the ending effect in the ending 1 state is a part of the series of effects of "6 seconds x 100 games = 600 seconds". It is also possible to start a part of this series of effects at the timing controlled to the ending 1 state. In this way, it is not necessary to advance the ending effect according to the number of games, so that the control burden related to the effect can be reduced. Further, in this case, when the execution of the above-mentioned series of effects is completed at a timing before the end of the advantageous section, the screen at the end is displayed as it is until the end of the advantageous section. Alternatively, the series of effects described above may be started again from the beginning (or from the middle) (that is, may be executed in a loop). Further, in this case, if the advantageous section ends at a timing before the execution of the above-mentioned series of effects is completed, the above-mentioned series of effects may be forcibly ended even in the middle of the process. However, the series of effects described above may be executed to the end.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, in the advantageous section, until the game period in the advantageous section becomes "1200" times (or until the ending 1 state is entered). , It is decided to continue the advantageous section (for example, it is decided to continue the line battle state in the continuous lottery state of the line battle state, or the right acquisition lottery state ends and then shifts to the interval state. ) Every time, the display device 11 executes a suggestion effect that suggests a guideline for the period controlled in the advantageous section.

Specifically, for example, a progress bar or a map divided into 12 squares is displayed in a predetermined area in the display device 11, and 1 square is displayed every time 100 games are played during the game period in the advantageous section. Suggestion effects such as making the display mode different one by one are executed. In this way, it becomes possible to grasp the approximate number of game periods in the advantageous section. In addition, for example, a section such as a progress bar or a map may be set to 15 squares, and the degree of digestion during the regulation monitoring period may be displayed. Further, these are examples of the display contents of the suggestion effect, and the display contents are not limited to this. For example, the actual number of games played during the game period in the advantageous section may be displayed.

Further, the suggestion effect may be displayed only during the first game in the interval state, or may be displayed during the interval state (between three games). Further, it may be displayed only in the line battle state where the advantageous section may end, or it may be always displayed in each game state in the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ending 2 state is reached, the ending effect (special effect) can be executed, and when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the ending 1 is performed. When it is decided to shift to the state, it is possible to execute a part of the ending effect (special effect) in the ending 1 state.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the special effect, which is a part of the special effect that can be executed at the end of the game in a state advantageous to the player, satisfies a predetermined execution condition. , It can be executed in the early stage of the game in a state favorable to the player. As a result, the player will play the game while wanting to see all the special effects, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased and the interest of the effects can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the regulation monitoring period becomes "1500" times, which is advantageous from the time when the ending 2 state is reached to the end of the advantageous section after 131 games have passed, or from the time when the ending 2 state is reached. It is possible to execute the ending effect (special effect) until the end of the section. As a result, even when the acquisition of the game medium is restricted, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, each time it is determined to continue the advantageous section, the advantageous section is controlled until the game period in the advantageous section reaches "1200" times or the transition to the ending 1 state. It is possible to carry out a suggestion effect that suggests a guideline for the period of time. As a result, the player can generally grasp the time when the execution of the special effect is started and the time when the advantageous section ends, so that it is possible to provide the player with appropriate information while enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

(Other examples of ending control)
In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section reaches, for example, 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section, the limit process for ending the advantageous section is executed even if the number of remaining games remains, but the stage where it is confirmed that the limit process will be performed in the future. (For example, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes equal to or higher than the specified value), the main control board 71 sets the ball ejection state to "ending" (for example, ending 2 state). Transition. On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 does not immediately shift the effect state on the sub side to the "ending" even when the ball ejection state is shifted to the "ending" on the main side, and is predetermined. The production state is shifted to "ending" when the conditions are used. In particular, the details of the control in which the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the “ending” will be described below. In the present embodiment, the advantageous section may include a "normal advantageous section" or the like, but in this example, the "advantageous section" and the "ART" will be described as being in exactly the same gaming state.

In this example, a main side counter that counts on the main (main control board 71) side and a sub side counter that counts on the sub (main control board 71) side are provided in relation to the advantageous section. The main control board 71 uses the first counter to count the number of games elapsed during the advantageous section (the number of digested games), and uses the second counter to continue the advantageous section for a period (the number of remaining games). ) Is counted. When the value of the first counter reaches "1500", the main control board 71 performs limit processing, ends the advantageous section regardless of the value of the second counter, and the value of the first counter becomes "1500". If the value of the second counter reaches "0" before reaching, the advantageous section ends.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 uses the third counter to count the number of games elapsed during the advantageous section (the number of digested games), and uses the fourth counter to continue the advantageous section for a period of time (the number of games that have been digested). The period of notification to the player (number of games remaining) is counted, and the game during the period (number of games remaining) during which the advantageous section can be continued using the fifth counter. The unreported period (the number of unreported games (= the number of hidden additional games)) is counted for the person. When the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of hidden additional games, the number of notified games is added and the number of unreported games is subtracted by the number of notified games.

Since the number of digested games counted in both the main and sub is basically the same, the value of the first counter on the main side and the value of the third counter on the sub side are the same (note that the advantageous section). If "ART" and "ART" do not match, the limit processing is not performed on the sub side, so there is no need to count the number of digested games in the advantageous section on the sub side, and the number of digested games in "ART" should be counted. Therefore, the values of both counters do not completely match, but they are not related to the control described below).

Further, on the sub side, since the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that are kept unreported are individually counted, the value of the second counter on the main side and the fourth counter on the sub side are counted individually. Also, the value of the second counter on the main side and the value of the fifth counter on the sub side do not match. However, since the sum of the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that are kept unreported matches the number of remaining games counted on the main side, the value of the second counter on the main side and the sub The sum of the value of the 4th counter and the value of the 5th counter on the side are the same.

The main control board 71 controls the transition to the "ending" based on the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. For example, as a result of adding the number of games, the advantageous section When the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games exceeds the specified value, the payout state is shifted to "ending".

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 "ends (that is, the total value excluding the number of unreported games) of the sub-side effect state according to the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section. END) ”. Here, the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the "ending" by referring to, for example, a sub_ending transition lottery table (not shown).

For example, the sub_ending transition lottery table defines the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games as a reference item, and the lottery result of whether or not to shift to the "ending" for each total value (non-winning, non-winning, The lottery value information for the winning) is specified. According to such a sub_ending transition lottery table, for example, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games is "1000 to 1199G", there is a probability of 24576/32768 to the "ending". The transition lottery is not won, and the transition lottery to the "ending" is won with a probability of 8192/32768.

Further, for example, the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the “ending” with a higher probability as the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section increases. Then, when the effect state is shifted to the "ending", the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect stage to the dedicated "ending stage" and maintains the effect stage at the "ending stage" until the advantageous section ends. If the ball ejection state has not shifted to the "ending" on the main side, it is not necessary to perform a lottery to shift to the "ending" on the sub side, so that the sub control board 72 is in the ball ejection state on the main side. Only when the game shifts to the "ending" (that is, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified value in the counter managed by the main side), the sub-side production A lottery may be performed as to whether or not to shift the state to the "ending".

By shifting to the dedicated production stage at the time of shifting to the "ending" in this way, the player can know in advance that the limit processing will be performed. Since it is confirmed that the limit processing will be performed after the transition to the "ending stage", there is no point in performing an additional notification effect on the number of games. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 does not perform the additional notification effect after shifting to the "ending stage".

In addition, the transition to the "ending stage" is performed with a higher probability as the total value on the sub side (excluding the number of unreported games) increases while the total value on the main side has reached the specified value or more. Therefore, the probability of transition to the "ending stage" is higher as the number of additional games held unannounced (number of unannounced games) is smaller, and the greater the number of additional games held unannounced. It has a low probability.

In addition, after shifting to the "ending stage", as a general rule, the production of the "ending stage" is continued until the end of the advantageous section, the production of the "ending stage" is ended in the game in which the advantageous section ends, and the game ends. At the time or at the start of the next game, the stage shifts to the production stage corresponding to the normal section.

Also, during the stay of the "ending stage", it is desirable to maintain the "ending stage" because even if the bonus is activated, the limit processing will still be performed in the near future. Here, in a game immediately before the end of the advantageous section (for example, a game in which the value of the first counter is "1499"), a predetermined number of games such as BB1 to BB4 are applied to the bonus required for digestion, and the bonus is activated. In this case, the first counter reaches "1500" during the operation of the bonus, the limit processing is performed, and the advantageous section ends. At this time, if the "ending stage" is terminated and the stage is shifted to another production stage (the production stage corresponding to the normal section or the production stage during the bonus operation) even though the bonus operation is in a state where the number of balls is increased. , May give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, when the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing during the operation of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 continues the production stage with the "ending stage" until the end of the bonus, and at the end of the bonus (of the advantageous section). It is also possible to shift to the production stage corresponding to the normal section (by performing end notification, immersive prevention display, etc.).

Further, even when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination immediately before the limit processing is activated such that the value of the first counter is "1498" to "1500" and is carried over without winning, the sub-control board 72 It is preferable to perform the delay processing of the end of the ending state in which the "ending stage" is continued, the bonus combination being carried over wins a prize, and the end of the activated bonus is waited for to end the "ending stage". In this case, the sub-control board 72 is used because the "ending stage" is temporarily continued even if the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing and the push order and the like are not notified (normal section). It is preferable that the "ending stage" in such a non-advantageous section has a different effect from the "ending stage" in the advantageous section to clearly indicate to the player that the machine is not out of order. In addition, the sub-control board 72 wins a bonus role in a game in which a bonus role can be won in the "ending stage" of the non-advantageous section (a game that does not win a role that hinders the winning of the bonus role such as replay). It is also possible to inform the player of the situation in an easy-to-understand manner by notifying the player that the "ending stage" will end after the end of the bonus and the notification that the instruction function has ended. Further, when the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing during the bonus operation, or when there is a high possibility that the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation, the sub-control board 72 is different from the other bonus operating. The effect (for example, an effect that congratulates a large amount of acquisition or an effect that includes some advantageous information such as setting suggestion information) may be performed at the start, operation, or end of the bonus.

Further, when the advantageous section ends, the main control board 71 performs a game operation (for example, an operation of inserting a medal for the next game or an operation of automatically reinserting or starting by operating a re-game) for a predetermined time after all reels are stopped. Etc.) may not be accepted, and freeze processing may be performed at the end of the advantageous section. At this time, the sub-control board 72 uses the freeze time at the end of the advantageous section to display information on the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section, the number of digested games, or the number of sets. In addition, the entanglement prevention display may be displayed in accordance with these. Further, as described above, when the end of the advantageous section by the limit processing occurs during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 causes a freeze at the end of the advantageous section by the limit processing so as not to hinder the digestion of the bonus. Instead, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section may be performed at the end of the bonus. In addition, regardless of the end of the advantageous section, the predetermined time at the end of the bonus is for the purpose of securing time for displaying information about the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section at the end of the bonus. If the freeze of the advantageous section occurs during the bonus operation, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section is not performed at the end of the advantageous section or at the end of the bonus, and the main control board 71 Only the freeze at the end of the bonus may be performed at the end of the bonus, and during the freeze at the end of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 may display information on an advantageous section, a display for preventing entanglement, and the like. By suppressing the occurrence of multiple delays in the game due to freeze, it is possible to prevent the tempo of the game from becoming worse. The contents described so far may be applied even when the advantageous section ends during the bonus operation due to the limit processing of another example described later, and the specification designer may apply the above depending on the type of limiter to be activated. Whether the process is applied or not can be arbitrarily decided in consideration of the flow of the production and the like.

(Variable limiter)
Up to this point, the conditions for executing the limit processing for ending the advantageous section have been described on the premise that the execution conditions for the limit processing are constant, for example, when the advantageous section reaches 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section. However, the execution condition of the limit processing by the main control board 71 does not necessarily have to be constant, and it is sufficiently excessive gambling if the advantageous section is not continued beyond at least the upper limit value (for example, 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section). Can exert the effect of suppressing. Therefore, when the first counter (the number of digested games) satisfies the predetermined end condition, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section before the first counter (the number of digested games) exceeds the upper limit value. The limit processing to be terminated may be performed.

For example, in a set number management type pachislot where "ART" is fixed at 50G per set, the timing is halfway for the number of games in one set due to the period of "normal advantageous section" and the bonus during "ART". For example, the "ART" of this set may end at 1480G), which is the remaining 20G up to the upper limit. In such a case, the next set of "ART" cannot be performed for all one set (50G), and limit processing is performed in the middle of the set. Even though the next set of "ART" has started, the player may be dissatisfied if it is forcibly terminated immediately. Therefore, although the main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section at the end of the "ART" of this set, which is well separated, although it is before reaching the upper limit value. As a result, the advantageous section (“ART”) always ends at a well-separated timing, so that the possibility that the player feels dissatisfied can be reduced.

Further, depending on the pachislot machine, it is conceivable to perform a predetermined ending control when performing the limit processing, and therefore, a case of performing such an ending control will also be described. For example, in a set number management type pachislot where "ART" is fixed at 50G per set, the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games from the start of the advantageous section is in the range of 1400 to 1450G (with a predetermined end condition). When the setting range) is reached, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section (“ART”) of 50G as one set for the ending regardless of the number of remaining undigested sets, and one set for the ending is set. The limit processing may be executed on the assumption that the predetermined end condition is satisfied at the time of end, and the advantageous section may be ended. That is, the limit processing is reserved at the time of 1400 to 1450 G from the start of the advantageous section, and is executed from 1450 to 1500 G. By allowing a certain amount of range in the execution timing of the limit processing in this way, it is possible to appropriately suppress gambling while preventing the advantageous section from ending at an unnatural timing and giving the player a sense of discomfort. .. In addition, even if the number of games per set of "ART" is fixed, the timing at which one set for the ending is decided is due to the addition of bonus activation and additional specialization state that is different from the basic set. Since it is not always exactly 1400 games, which is a multiple of 50, it is preferable to have a range in the setting range of the predetermined end condition (the period during which the limit processing can be reserved).

As will be described later, the limit processing can be performed not only based on the number of games but also based on the difference number of medals acquired by the player during the advantageous section and the number of occurrences of navigation (number limiter, payout number limiter, which will be described later). Navi count limiter). The above description of the variable limiter is applicable regardless of the type of limit processing. That is, the main control board 71 is not limited to the case where the limit processing execution timing reaches the limiter activation threshold value (upper limit value) when the limit processing activation counter (game number counter, payout number counter, navigation number counter, etc.) reaches the limiter activation threshold value (upper limit value). When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the limit process may be performed before the limiter activation threshold value is reached. The predetermined end condition is arbitrary, but as an example, if the "ART" of the next set is started in the set number management type "ART", the limiter is activated in the middle of the "ART" of the next set. It can be adopted that it is predicted that the game will be done (in Pachislot, the amount of increase in medals per game in "ART" and the winning probability of each role can be grasped from the design specifications. Even when the number limiter, the payout number limiter, or the navigation number limiter described later is used, it can be predicted that the limiter will be activated in the middle of the "ART" of the next set).

The technical ideas on this point can be summarized as follows.
The second numerical value (the number of remaining games that can be continued in the advantageous section, the number of differences, the number of navigations), which indicates the remaining period during which a specific game state (advantageous section) can be continued, reaches the end threshold (0 games remaining, 0 cards, 0 times). When it reaches, the specific game state is terminated, and at least the first numerical value (number of digested games, etc.) counted by the counting means is a predetermined end condition (for example, advantageous section 1500 game digestion in which limit processing is executed). Alternatively, if a range is allowed for the execution timing of the limit processing as in the modified example, the value of the second numerical value is the end if any of the set number of games from 1450 to 1500 is reached, etc.). A specific state ending means (main control board 71) that terminates the specific gaming state even when the threshold value has not been reached.
In addition, although the specific state termination means is described collectively for both the process of ending the advantageous section based on the fact that the right of the advantageous section becomes zero such as "ART" and the case of ending the advantageous section by the limit process. , It may be provided as a separate process in the program.

In the present embodiment, in the lottery using the various data tables (including those not shown) described so far (including the lottery not particularly described as the lottery using the table), the random number circuit 110 The random number values for lottery (random number values for production) extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 255) are sequentially subtracted by the specified lottery values by the random number registers 2 to 7, and the result of the subtraction is negative. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). That is, the winning / non-winning is determined by subtracting the lottery value from the lottery random number value, but the lottery method is not limited to this, and the lottery value is added to the extracted lottery random number value, and the addition result is It may be determined whether or not it exceeds 256 (whether or not a so-called "digit overflow" has occurred), and the winning / non-winning may be determined.

<Notification function controlled by the main side>
In the conventional pachislot machine, the sub (sub-control board 72) side controls whether or not to notify the player of advantageous stop operation information (pushing order, etc.). However, since the presence or absence of this notification affects the profit of the player (so-called ball ejection), in recent years, it has been required to control the profit of the player on the main (main control board 71) side. .. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the information display 6 controlled on the main side is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying the information of the stop operation, and is controlled by the main side. A function for notifying (instructing) information on the reel stop operation is provided.

Here, FIG. 45 shows the correspondence between each game state controlled on the main side, the internal winning combination, and the navigation data in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment. The navigation data "1" to "6" shown in FIG. 45 represent the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor and the notification contents of the stop operation information. Further, the navigation data "0" shown in FIG. 45 indicates that the stop operation information is not notified. Further, in FIG. 45, only the push order small winning combination and the push order replay are described. However, the navigation data is basically "0" for the internal winning combination other than the pushing order small winning combination and the pushing order replay.

In each gaming state of the non-advantageous section, the navigation data "0" is set and the stop operation information is not notified regardless of which internal winning combination shown in FIG. 45 is determined. When the navigation data "0" is set, in the present embodiment, none of the numerical values is displayed on the instruction monitor, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the numerical value of "0" is displayed on the instruction monitor. You may do so. Further, when the navigation data "0" is set, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to this is not transmitted to the sub side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to this is transmitted to the sub side. You may try to do it.

Navi data "1" is set when the internal winning combination of either "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_middle left bell 1" is determined in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state of the normal advantageous section. To. The navigation data "1" corresponds to "batting order 1". Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_upper left bell 2" or "F_middle left bell 2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set. The navigation data "2" corresponds to "batting order 2".

Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper middle bell 1", "F_middle middle bell 1", and "F_lower middle bell 1" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set. The navigation data "3" corresponds to "batting order 3". Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper middle bell 2", "F_middle middle bell 2", and "F_lower middle bell 2" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set. The navigation data "4" corresponds to "batting order 4".

In addition, "F_upper right / left bell 1", "F_upper right / left bell 2", "F_middle right / left bell 1", "F_middle right / left bell 2", "F_lower right / left bell 1", and "F_lower right / left bell 2". If any of the internal winning combinations of, is determined, the navigation data "5" is set. The navigation data "5" corresponds to "batting order 5". In addition, "F_upper right middle bell 1", "F_upper right middle bell 2", "F_middle right middle bell 1", "F_middle right middle bell 2", "F_lower right middle bell 1", and "F_ If any of the internal winning combinations of "lower right middle bell 2" is determined, and if any of the internal winning combinations is determined, the navigation data "6" is set. The navigation data "6" corresponds to "batting order 6".

In the present embodiment, for example, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2" is determined, if it is "batting order 1" or "batting order 2", Since the batting order is correct, the navigation data can be used as common navigation data. However, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the internal winning combination, a maximum of 6 selections of push order can be set for the small combination of push order, but this is set as a 4-choice push order. If the internal winning combination is determined for "F_upper left bell 1", the navigation data "1" is set, and the internal winning combination is determined for "F_upper left bell 2" so as not to cause a sense of discomfort. In that case, the navigation data "2" is set. The same applies to other push order small roles.

Further, when the internal winning combination of any of the push order replays is determined in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state in the normal advantageous section, the navigation data "0" is set. That is, the push order notification of the push order replay is not performed in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state of the normal advantageous section, when the internal winning combination of any of the pushing order small winning combination is determined, the navigation data "0" is set. That is, in the bonus state of the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is not performed.

When the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 1" or "F_RT1 medium replay 1" is determined in each game state of the advantageous section, the navigation data "1" is set. The navigation data "1" corresponds to "batting order 1". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 medium replay 1" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "1" is set by the lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "1" is also determined. 1 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "1" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_1" is determined, the navigation data "1" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 2" or "F_RT1 medium replay 2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set. The navigation data "2" corresponds to "batting order 2". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 medium replay 1" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "2" is set by the lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "2" is also determined. 2 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "2" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 3" or "F_RT1 medium replay 3" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set. The navigation data "3" corresponds to "batting order 3". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 Medium Replay 2" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "3" is set by the lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "3" is also determined. 3 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "3" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_3" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 4" or "F_RT1 medium replay 4" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set. The navigation data "4" corresponds to "batting order 4". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 Medium Replay 2" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "4" is set by the lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "4" is also determined. 4 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "4" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_4" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 5" or "F_RT1 medium replay 5" is determined, the navigation data "5" is set. The navigation data "5" corresponds to "batting order 5". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 medium replay 3" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "5" is set by the lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "5" is also determined. 5 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "5" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_5" is determined, the navigation data "5" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 6" or "F_RT1 medium replay 6" is determined, the navigation data "6" is set. The navigation data "6" corresponds to "batting order 6". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 Medium Replay 3" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "6" is set by the lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "6" is also determined. 6 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "6" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_6" is determined, the navigation data "6" is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main (main control board 71) side notifies the information of the reel stop operation by displaying the numerical values of "1" to "6" on the instruction monitor. Further, the numerical values of "1" to "6" displayed on the instruction monitor uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each.

Although the numerical values "1" to "6" notified on the main side (instruction monitor) uniquely correspond to the content of the stop operation to be notified, all players are clear based on the numerical values. It is not always possible to grasp the content of the notification. For example, it may not be possible for some players to grasp the content of the notification simply by displaying the numerical value "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information related to the stop operation of the stop button is notified on the sub side as well as the notification on the main side. Specifically, the display device 11 (projector mechanism 211 and display unit 212) controlled on the sub side is used to notify the information related to the stop operation under the control of the sub side.

For example, when notifying the push order "middle, left, right" (batting order 3), the numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the middle reel 3C in the display screen of the display device 11 is displayed on the sub side. The numerical value "1" is displayed above the left reel 3L, the numerical value "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L, and the numerical value "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R. Notify that the order is "right".

The timing of notification on the main side can be set to any timing as long as it is at least the period of one game in which notification is performed. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the player's start operation is detected (accepted), the main side may be notified at the start of reel rotation, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The main side may be notified at the timing when any of the stop operations is detected. On the other hand, the timing of performing the notification on the sub side is preferably at least a timing before the first stop operation. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game of notifying the information of the stop operation in the advantageous section, after the internal lottery process (see S204 of FIG. 56 described later), the reel stop control process (see FIG. 56 described later). S213) is started, a command including this navigation data (or information corresponding thereto) is transmitted from the main (main control board 71) side to the sub (sub control board 72) side. It should be. In this case, the existing command (for example, the start command or the reel rotation start command) may include the parameter of the navigation data (or the information corresponding thereto), or the navigation data (or the equivalent thereof). You may send a dedicated command to send the information to be sent. This makes it possible to notify the stop operation information on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display device 11 on the sub side.

Further, as another method, in the game of notifying the information of the stop operation in the advantageous section, as described above, the winning combination number may be transmitted from the main side to the sub side as information that can identify the internal winning combination. Good. According to this method, the sub side can specify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player without sending the information corresponding to the navigation data, so that the amount of data to be transmitted can be reduced.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 84, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 90 by using the program will be described.

[Processing when power is turned on (reset interrupt)]
First, the power-on (reset interrupt) processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing when the power is turned on (reset interrupt). In the power-on (reset interrupt) processing shown in FIG. 46, when the power management circuit 93 detects that the supply of the power supply voltage to the microprocessor 91 has started, the reset signal is sent to the microprocessor 91. It is output to the "XSRST" terminal, and after undergoing a delay operation by the security mode, it is executed based on the interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (S1). In this process, the main CPU 101 initially sets the timer circuit 113. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the frequency division ratio in the timer prescaler register (not shown), sets the timer control register (not shown) to interrupt enable, etc., and sets the timer counter (not shown). Set the initial count value.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1) between the main control circuit 90 and the sub-control circuit 200, and the second serial communication circuit 115 (SCU2) for the second interface board. Initialization processing is performed (S2). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process of the random number circuit 110 (RDG) (S3). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a write test of the main RAM 103 (S4).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed as a result of the writing test (S5).

In S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has not been performed normally (when the determination in S5 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described later. On the other hand, in S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed (when the determination in S5 is YES), the main CPU 101 is in the state of the timer control register (not shown) of the timer circuit 113. (S6).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process based on the acquired state of the timer control register (S7). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not 1.1172 ms has elapsed from the start of the timer count based on the acquired state of the timer control register.

In the present embodiment, when the timer time 1.1172 ms is set by the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 in S2, the count process of the CPU built-in timer is started. After that, the status of the timer circuit 113 can be acquired by reading the information of the timer control register (not shown). Then, in the present embodiment, a bit (discrimination bit) capable of discriminating (seeing) whether or not the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process (whether or not it is the timer interrupt state) in the timer control register. ) Is provided.

Therefore, in the process of S6, the main CPU 101 reads the information of the timer control register (not shown), and in the process of S7, the main CPU 101 is in the ON / OFF state of the discrimination bit in the timer control register (not shown). By referring to "1" / "0"), it is determined whether or not the current state is the timing at which the interrupt process occurs. When 1.1172 ms has elapsed from the start of counting by the timer circuit 113 (if the count value of the timer circuit 113 is 0), the discrimination bit is turned on.

In S7, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not the timing at which the interrupt process occurs (when the determination in S7 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S6 and repeats the processes after S6.

On the other hand, in S7, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process (when the determination in S7 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the command transmission start timer (S8). The command transmission start timer is a timer for managing the activation delay period (see FIG. 85 described later) described later, and the period from the setting of the command transmission start timer to becoming 0 is the main control circuit 90 (see FIG. 85 described later). Command data is not transmitted from the main control board 71) to the sub control circuit 200 (sub control board 72) (see FIG. 80 described later). As a result, when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the time required for the startup control of the sub CPU 201 (the time until the command can be received) is secured. That is, by setting the command transmission start timer, the transmission of communication data (command data) by the communication data transmission process is delayed for a period corresponding to the timer. In the present embodiment, in S8, "21801" (21801 x 1.1172 ms = about 24.3561 seconds) is set as the value of the command transmission start timer. However, the value of the command transmission start timer can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the sub-control circuit 200 mounted at the same time.

The command transmission start timer is a software timer allocated in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 in 2 bytes, and is arranged at an address that is not erased by the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a thumb check process (non-standard) (S9). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a thumb check process of the main RAM 103, and this process is performed in an unspecified work area (see FIG. 11C) in the main RAM 103. Further, the program used in this thumb check process is stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 11B). The details of the thumb check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55 described later.

After the process of S9, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (S10).

In S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (when the determination in S10 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S15 described later. On the other hand, in S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S10 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the thumb check based on the result of the thumb check process in S9. It is determined whether or not the result is normal (S11).

In S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the thumb check determination result is not normal (when the determination in S11 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described later. On the other hand, in S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the thumb check determination result is normal (when the determination in S11 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the game return process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of returning the game state to the state before the power failure detection. The details of the game return process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47 described later.

When the determination in S5 or S11 is NO, the main CPU 101 displays the character string "88" indicating the occurrence of an error on the information display 6 (7-segment LED display) (S13). After that, the main CPU 101 repeats the WDT clearing process (S14).

Here, returning to the process of S10 again, if S10 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change confirmation process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a setting change command generation / storage process at the start of the setting change. The details of the setting change confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the time of RAM abnormality or at the start of setting change" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and the game starts from the start address. Erase (clear) the information up to the final address of the RAM area for use. Then, after the processing of S16, the main CPU 101 starts the main processing described later (see FIG. 56 described later).

[Game return processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the game return processing performed in S12 during the power-on (reset interrupt) processing (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game return process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer (SP) at the time of power failure (S21). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the command transmission start timer has counted up (S22). In S22, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has not counted up (when the determination in S22 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S22.

On the other hand, in S22, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has counted up (when the determination in S22 is YES), the main CPU 101 has the on-edge data before the input port interrupt processing and the current Clear (off) the set on-edge data (S23). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the backup data of the output port from the output port backup storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and sets the backup data in the output port (S24). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data of the input port and saves the data in the data storage area (input port storage area 1 and input port storage area 2) of the input port at present and before the interrupt processing (S25). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the rotating cylinder control data storage area (S26). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of reels to be checked (“3” in this embodiment) (S27).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires reel control management information (data related to fluctuation control of the display column when a power failure occurs) of a predetermined reel based on the address of the set rotation cylinder control data storage area (S28). The reel control management information (variation control management information in the display column) is information related to the control state (rotation status) of each reel, and is backed up and saved in the event of a power failure.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel control management information is information corresponding to the rotation status during reel acceleration, constant speed waiting, or constant speed (S29).

In S29, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition of S29 is not satisfied (when the determination in S29 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S32 described later. On the other hand, in S29, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition of S29 is satisfied (YES in S29), the main CPU 101 clears the spinning control data (reel control management information) (S30). By this process, after returning to the game, the rotation control of the reel is started from the acceleration process. Next, the main CPU 101 sets the reel operation timing value (execution start timing “1” of the rotation cylinder control data) (S31). When "1" is set for the reel operation timing, the excitation change timing is set in the reel control process (see S903 in FIG. 79 described later), so that the main CPU 101 accelerates the reel rotation control. Start from.

After the processing of S31 or when the determination in S29 is NO, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reels (S32). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the number of reels after subtraction is "0" (S33).

In S33, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of reels after subtraction is not "0" (when the determination in S33 is NO), the main CPU 101 changes the reel to be checked and shifts the processing to the processing of S28. Return and repeat the processing after S28.

On the other hand, in S33, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of reels after subtraction is "0" (when the determination in S33 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the RAM initialization process (S34). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the time of power recovery" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and the final address of the game RAM area is set from the start address. Delete (clear) the information up to the address.

Next, the main CPU 101 restores the data of all the registers saved at the time of power failure detection to all the registers (S35). Then, after the process of S35, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process and returns the process to the process at the time of power failure detection.

In the present embodiment, the game return process is performed as described above. In the game return processing of the present embodiment, as described above, the input / output state of each port at the time of power failure is secured at the time of power recovery, and when the reel is rotating at the time of power failure, reel control management at power recovery The processing necessary for starting the re-rotation of the reel by acquiring the information is also performed (see the processing of S26 to S33). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reel re-rotation control can be stably performed even when the reel is recovered from the electric power failure during the rotation of the cylinder, and the player is not discomforted.

[Setting change confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting change confirmation process performed in S15 during the power-on (reset interrupt) process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting change confirmation process. If the setting key type switch 54 is turned on (that is, in the case of "setting confirmation" to confirm the current setting value) after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, this setting change confirmation is performed from S44 described later. The process may be started.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process of an unspecified RAM area in the main RAM 103 (S41). Next, the main CPU 101 performs one interrupt wait process (S42). In this process, when the command transmission start timer is counting up, a non-operation command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process (see FIG. 80) described later. If the command transmission start timer does not count up, no command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. Therefore, if the command transmission start timer does not count up, this process is omitted. You may.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S43). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the time of RAM abnormality or at the start of setting change" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and the game starts from the start address. Erase (clear) the information up to the final address of the RAM area for use.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (S44). The setting key (not shown) inserted into the setting key type switch 54 is an operation key for setting the setting value (settings 1 to 6) of the pachislot machine 1, and is set when the setting key is turned on. The key type switch 54 is turned on.

In S44, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S44 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the setting change confirmation process and turns on the power (reset interrupt). ) Move to the process of S16 of the time process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, in S44, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (when the determination in S44 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S45). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the setting change start or setting confirmation start information (005H: first value) in the L register, and performs the generation and storage process of the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (S46). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 generates setting change command data (first command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 at the start of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, and generates the command data. It is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the setting change command generation and storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 described later. Further, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) saved in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the error count relay to the ON state (S47). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display setting process of the set value (S48). By this process, the current set value can be displayed on the 7-segment LED in the information display 6.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change or the setting confirmation has been performed (S49). In S49, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has not been changed (the setting has been confirmed) (when the determination in S49 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S54 described later.

On the other hand, in S49, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has been changed (the setting has not been confirmed) (when the determination in S49 is YES), is the reset switch 76 turned on in the main CPU 101? Whether or not it is determined (S50).

In S50, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reset switch 76 is in the ON state (when the determination in S50 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the set value (S51). That is, each time the reset switch 76 is operated, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the set value within the range of "1" to "6". After the processing of S51, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S48, and repeats the processing after S48. On the other hand, in S50, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reset switch 76 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S50 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is in the ON state (S52). ..

When the main CPU 101 determines in S52 that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process in S48 and repeats the processes after S48. On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 79 is in the ON state (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 101 is set in the set value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Store the value (S53).

When the determination in S49 is NO or after the processing in S53, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state (S54).

In S54, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the off state (when the determination in S54 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S54. On the other hand, in S54, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state (when the determination in S54 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. (S55).

In S55, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has not been changed (the setting has been confirmed) (when the determination in S55 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S57 described later. On the other hand, in S55, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has been changed (the setting has not been confirmed) (when the determination in S55 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the RAM initialization process (S56). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses an address (next address of the setting value storage area) in the gaming RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C, which is not shown, as the start address of the initialization start. It is set and the information from the start address to the final address of the game RAM area is erased (cleared).

After processing S56 or when S55 determines NO, the main CPU 101 sets the setting change end or setting confirmation end information (004H: second value) in the L register, and sets the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end). ) Is generated and stored (S57). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates setting change command data (second command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 at the end of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, and generates the command data. It is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the setting change command generation and storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 described later. Further, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) saved in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. Then, after the processing of S57, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change confirmation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S16 of the power-on (reset interrupt) processing (see FIG. 46).

[Setting change command generation and storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the setting change command generation and storage process performed in S46 and S57 during the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. Note that FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure for generating and storing the setting change command.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the information of the set values (1 to 6) in the E register (S61). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT state information in the C register (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the command type information (02H) of the setting change command in the A register (S63).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data storage process (S64). In this process, the main CPU 101 has the information set in each register in S61 to S63 and the information set in the L register in S46 or S58 (see FIG. 48) (setting change start / setting change end / setting status). Setting change command data is generated by using (setting confirmation start / setting confirmation end), and the generated command data is saved in the communication data storage area. The details of the communication data storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50 described later.

After the process of S64, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change command generation and storage process. When the setting change command generation and storage process performed in S46 during the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) is terminated, the main CPU 101 performs the process after the process of S64 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48). Move to the process of S47. Further, when ending the setting change command generation and storage process performed in S57 during the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48), the main CPU 101 ends the setting change command generation and storage process after the process of S64, and also sets the settings. The change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) is also completed.

[Communication data storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, for example, the communication data storage process performed in S64 during the setting change command generation / storage process (see FIG. 49) will be described. The communication data storage process is executed not only when the setting change command is generated but also when other commands are generated. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure of communication data storage processing.

First, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the A register as communication command type data in the communication data temporary storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S71). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the H register and the L register in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 as parameters 1 and 2 of the communication command, respectively (S72).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the D register and the E register as the parameters 3 and 4 of the communication command in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 (S73). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the B register and the C register as the data of the parameter 5 of the communication command and the RT state, respectively, in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 (S74).

Next, the main CPU 101 generates BCC data (sum value) of the communication command from the data values set in the A register to the L register (S75). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the generated BCC data in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 (S76).

After the processing of S76, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a free space in the communication data storage area in the main RAM 103 (S77). In this embodiment, a maximum of nine command data can be stored in the communication data storage area.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S77 that there is no free space in the communication data storage area (when the determination in S77 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data storage process and, for example, sets change command generation and storage process (when the communication data storage area is determined to be NO). (See FIG. 49) also ends.

On the other hand, in S77, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a vacancy in the communication data storage area (when the determination in S77 is YES), the main CPU 101 is stored in the communication data temporary storage area by the above-mentioned processes S71 to S76. Each of the data is stored (registered) in the communication data storage area as communication data (command data) (S78).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the communication data pointer update process (S79). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly updates the communication data pointer indicating the storage address of the communication data in the communication data storage area. The details of the communication data pointer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51 described later.

Then, after the process of S79, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data storage process and, for example, the setting change command generation and storage process (see FIG. 49).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when creating one packet (8 bytes) of communication data (command data), various parameters are transferred from the register and stored in the communication data temporary storage area (communication buffer). In such a command data creation method, the data stored in each register at the time of command generation is stored as it is in the communication data temporary storage area as various parameters of the command data. Therefore, when command data including unused parameters is created, the value of the unused parameters becomes an indefinite value each time it is created. This makes it difficult to analyze communication data and suppresses fraudulent acts such as goto, and since it is not necessary to add unnecessary goto countermeasure processing, the program of the main control circuit 90 by adding the goto countermeasure processing. The pressure on the capacity can be suppressed.

[Communication data pointer update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the communication data pointer update process performed in S79 during the communication data storage process (see FIG. 50) will be described. Note that FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the communication data pointer update process.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the currently set communication data pointer (S81).

Next, the main CPU 101 adds and updates the value of the communication data pointer by one packet (8 bytes) (S82). In this process, when the value of the updated communication data pointer is equal to or greater than the upper limit size of the communication data storage area, the main CPU 101 sets the updated communication data pointer value to "0". This invalidates all the command data stored in the communication data storage area (makes it the same state as the discarded state).

In the present embodiment, the amount of data (1 packet) transmitted in one transmission operation is 8 bytes. That is, in the present embodiment, one command data can be transmitted by one transmission operation. Further, in the present embodiment, since a maximum of nine command data can be stored in the communication data storage area, the upper limit size of the communication data storage area is 72 bytes (= 8 bytes × 9). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the range of the communication data pointer is set to "0" to "71", and in the process of S82, the value of the communication data pointer after the update (when the communication data pointer is updated by +8) is "71 (when the communication data pointer is updated by +8). If the value exceeds "upper limit value)", set the updated communication data pointer value to "0" (return the communication data storage destination address to the start address) and store the communication data. Disable all command data stored in the area (make it the same as the discarded state). If the value of the communication data pointer is set to "0", the next time the command data is stored in the communication data storage area, it is stored from the start address of the communication data storage area, so it is stored before that. The command data will be overwritten with new command data. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to initialize (clear) the communication data storage area when the value of the communication data pointer exceeds "71 (upper limit value)".

Then, after the process of S82, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data pointer update process and also ends the communication data storage process (see FIG. 50).

[Processing at the time of power failure (external)]
Next, the power failure (external) processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a procedure of (external) processing at the time of power failure. In the power interruption (external) process shown in FIG. 52, when the power supply management circuit 93 detects a decrease in the power supply voltage (power interruption) supplied to the microprocessor 91, the power interruption detection signal is transmitted to the microprocessor 91. Is output to the "XINT" terminal of the above, and is executed based on the interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the data set in all the registers (S91). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data set in the power failure detection port (S92).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection port is in the ON state (S93).

In S93, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption detection port is not in the ON state (when the determination in S93 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the interrupt processing permission (S94). Then, after the processing of S94, the main CPU 101 ends the (external) processing at the time of power failure. It should be noted that these processes performed when S93 is a NO determination correspond to the process of countermeasures against momentary power failure that occurs when the power supply management circuit 93 momentarily detects a power failure or the like.

On the other hand, in S93, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection port is in the ON state (when the determination in S93 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets that the medal cannot be inserted and sets the stop of the hopper device 51. (S95).

Next, the main CPU 101 saves the currently set value of the stack pointer (SP) in the stack area of the game RAM area in the main RAM 103 (S96).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a checksum generation process of the main RAM 103 (S97). This process is performed in the non-standard work area (see FIG. 11C) in the main RAM 103. Further, the program used in this checksum generation process is stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 11B). The details of the checksum generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets access prohibition to the main RAM 103 (S98). Then, after the processing of S98, the infinite loop processing is performed until the power supply is stopped (until the power supply voltage reaches a voltage at which the main CPU 101 cannot operate).

[Checksum generation process (non-standard)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the checksum generation process performed in S97 during the power failure (external) process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum generation process.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the current stack pointer (SP) value (the address in use of the stack area of the game RAM area) in the non-standard stack area of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103 (S101). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the non-standard stack area in the stack pointer (S102). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address value (F0H) on the upper side of the RAM address (address of the non-standard stack area) in the Q register (S103). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the power failure occurrence flag (S104).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer with the calculation start address of the sum value in the game RAM area, and sets the sum calculation counter with the value obtained by dividing the number of bytes of the sum value calculation target storage area by "2". Set (S105). The sum calculation counter is a counter for determining the end trigger of the sum value calculation, and is provided in the main RAM 103. Then, when the sum calculation counter set in S105 becomes "0", the sum value calculation process of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 is terminated.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the HL register to 0 (sets the value “0”) (S106). By this process, the initial value "0" of the sum value is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes an instruction code called a "POP instruction" and stores data (stored value) in an area of 2 bytes from the address of the storage area of the main RAM 103 set in the stack pointer (SP) in the DE register. Read (S107).

When the "POP" instruction is executed, the data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the lower register of the pair register and specified by the stack pointer. The data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the address where the updated address is updated by 1 is loaded into the register on the upper side of the pair register. When the "POP" instruction is executed, an address update process for 2 bytes (a process of adding "2" to the address) is performed on the address set in the stack pointer (SP).

Therefore, in the processing of S107, the data (memory contents) stored at the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the E register and saved at the address specified by the stack pointer plus "1". The data (memory contents) is loaded into the D register.

After the process of S107, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation process (S108). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the value stored in the DE register to the value stored in the HL register, and stores the added value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S109). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S110).

In S110, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S110 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S107 and repeats the processes after S107. That is, the processes of S107 to S110 are repeated until the sum value calculation process of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 is completed.

On the other hand, in S110, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S110 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the DE register in the non-standard RAM area in the main RAM 103. The calculation start address of the sum value is set, and the non-standard sum count value is set in the sum calculation counter (S111). The non-standard sum count value is the number of bytes in the non-standard storage area. Therefore, when the sum calculation counter set in S111 becomes "0", the sum value calculation process of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103, that is, the sum value calculation process of the entire main RAM 103 is completed.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data (stored value) of one byte of the area from the address of the non-standard RAM area set in the DE register into the A register (S112).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation process (S113). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the value stored in the A register to the value stored in the HL register, and stores the added value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address stored in the DE register and subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S114). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S115).

In S115, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S115 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing in S112 and repeats the processing after S112. That is, the processes of S112 to S115 are repeated until the process of adding the sum value of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103 to the sum value of the gaming RAM area is completed.

On the other hand, in S115, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S115 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the value stored in the HL register when a power failure occurs. As the sum value of, it is stored in the sum value storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S116). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the stack pointer (SP) saved in the non-standard stack area in S101 in the stack pointer (S117). Then, after the processing of S117, the main CPU 101 ends the checksum generation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S98 at the time of power failure (external) processing (see FIG. 52).

[Sum check processing (non-standard)]
Next, the thumb check process performed in S9 during the power-on processing (see FIG. 46) will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. 54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the thumb check process.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the current stack pointer (SP) value in the non-standard stack area (S121). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the sum value storage area in the stack pointer, and sets the value obtained by dividing the number of bytes of the sum value calculation target storage area by "2" in the sum calculation counter (S122). The sum calculation counter set here is a counter for determining the end trigger of the sum value calculation (sum value subtraction process), and is provided in the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a sum value (checksum) from the sum value storage area (S123). By this process, the checksum (initial value before subtraction) generated when the power failure occurs is stored in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the "POP" instruction and reads the data (stored value) of the area of 2 bytes from the address of the storage area of the main RAM 103 set in the stack pointer (SP) into the DE register (S124). .. At this time, by executing the "POP" instruction, the data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the E register, and the address specified by the stack pointer is used. 1 The data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the updated address is loaded into the D register. Further, when the "POP" instruction is executed, an address update process for 2 bytes (a process of adding 2 addresses) is performed on the address set in the stack pointer (SP).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation (subtraction) process (S125). Specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value stored in the DE register from the value stored in the HL register (initial value of the sum value or the sum value after the previous subtraction process), and the subtraction is performed. Store the value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S126). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S127).

In S127, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S127 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S124, and repeats the processing after S124. That is, the processes of S124 to S127 are repeated until the subtraction process of the sum value is completed over the entire area of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103.

On the other hand, in S127, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S127 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the DE register in the non-standard RAM area in the main RAM 103. The calculation start address of the sum value is set, and the non-standard sum count value is set in the sum calculation counter (S128). The non-standard sum count value is the number of bytes in the non-standard RAM area.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data (stored value) of one byte of the area from the address of the non-standard RAM area set in the DE register into the A register (S129).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation (subtraction) process (S130). Specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value stored in the A register from the value stored in the HL register, and stores the subtracted value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address stored in the DE register and subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S131). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S132).

In S132, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S132 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S129, and repeats the processing after S129. That is, the processes of S129 to S132 are repeated until the subtraction process of the sum value is completed over the entire area of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103.

On the other hand, in S132, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S132 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets "sum error" in the determination result of the thumb check process. (S133). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the calculated sum value is “0” (S134).

In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the state (1/0) of the zero flag (bit 6) of the flag register F to determine whether or not the sum value is “0”. In the present embodiment, the sum value becomes "0" when the value of the sum calculation counter set in S128 becomes "0", that is, when the subtraction process of the sum value is completed over the entire area of the main RAM 103. If, "1" is set in the zero flag of the flag register F, and "0" is set in the zero flag of the flag register F if the sum value is not "0". Therefore, if "1 (on state)" is set in the zero flag of the flag register F at the time of processing S134, the main CPU 101 determines that the sum value is "0".

In S134, when the main CPU 101 determines that the calculated sum value is not "0" (when the determination in S134 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S139 described later. On the other hand, in S134, when the main CPU 101 determines that the calculated sum value is "0" (when the determination in S134 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets "power failure" in the determination result (S135). ).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the power failure occurrence flag (S136). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure generation flag is in the state without power failure (off state) (S137).

In S137, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption occurrence flag is in the state of no power interruption (when the determination in S137 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S139 described later. On the other hand, in S137, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption occurrence flag is not in the state without power interruption (when the determination in S137 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets "normal" in the determination result (S138).

After the processing of S138, if S134 is a NO determination or S137 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 saves the determination result in the thumb check determination result and clears (offs) the power failure occurrence flag (S139). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the stack pointer (SP) saved in the non-standard stack area in S121 to the stack pointer (S140). Then, after the processing of S140, the main CPU 101 ends the thumb check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S10 of the power-on processing (see FIG. 46).

[Main processing of pachislot under the control of the main CPU]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the main process (main operation process) of the pachi-slot machine 1 executed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described. Note that FIG. 56 is a flowchart (hereinafter referred to as a main flow) showing the procedure of the main process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S201). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the end of one game" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and from the start address, the game RAM area Delete (clear) the information up to the final address. The storage area in this range is, for example, a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S202). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an input check process for each medal sensor (see FIG. 5), a start switch 79, and the like. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value acquisition process (S203). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses a random number value for internal winning combination lottery (0 to 65535: a value of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes a hard latch random number) and a random number value for production used in various lottery related to playability (0 to 65535: a random number value for production used in various lottery related to game playability). 0 to 65535: the value of the random number register 1 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes the soft latch random number, 0 to 255: the value of each of the random number registers 2 to 7 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes the soft latch random number), etc. The random number value is stored in the random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the random number value acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S204). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process by lottery based on the random number value (hard latch random number) extracted in S203. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol setting process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 101, for example, generates an internal winning combination from the hit request flag status (flag status information), expands the hit request flag data, and stores the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area. And so on. The details of the symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation / storage process (S206). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The start command is configured to include parameters (winning combination number, etc.) for specifying the internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the second interface board control process (S207). The second interface board control process is executed in the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process for outputting, for example, a test signal related to the push order navigation determined by the main control board 71 via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state-based control process (S208). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs at the start of the game among the various controls in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, and each gaming state of the advantageous section described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44. Performs various processes to perform various controls that need to be performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S209). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires the pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, and the stop table number based on the internal winning combination and the game state. And the process of storing "3" in the stop button non-operation counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start process (S210). In this process, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 79 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Controlled, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. Each reel is then accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, after which it is controlled to maintain that constant speed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S211). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The reel rotation start command is configured to include a parameter indicating that the reel rotation start operation has been started.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S212). In this process, the main CPU 101 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S213). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the rotation stop of the corresponding reel based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a winning search process (S214). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the data in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and sets the number of medals to be paid out based on the determination result. The details of the winning search process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an illegal hit check process (S215). In this process, the main CPU 101 synthesizes a hit request flag (internal winning combination) and a winning operation flag (display combination), and determines whether or not there is an illegal hit error based on the combination result. The details of the illegal hit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later. Further, as long as each reel is stopped without causing an erroneous winning by the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72 described later), this illegal hit check process can be omitted from the viewpoint of reducing the control load.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a winning check / medal payout process (S216). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of generating a winning operation command. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 drives the hopper device 51 and updates the number of credits based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S214, and performs the medal payout process. The details of the winning check / medal payout process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a BB check process (S217). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state. The details of the BB check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an RT check process (S218). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs RT state transition control based on the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the effective line. The details of the RT check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a state-based control process at the end of the game (S219). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs at the end of the game among the various controls in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, and each gaming state of the advantageous section described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44. Performs various processes to perform various controls that need to be performed. Then, after the processing of S219 (after the end of one game), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S201.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S202 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. 57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the procedure of medal reception / start check processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (whether or not there is an automatic insertion request) (S221). In this process, when the automatic insertion medal counter is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 determines that there is an automatic insertion request. Further, the automatic insertion medal counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the replay is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion medal counter.

In S221, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S225 described later.

On the other hand, in S221, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (when the determination in S221 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion process (S222). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process, an LED lighting control process for the number of medals inserted, and the like. The details of the medal insertion process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value of the automatic insertion medal counter (S223). In this process, the main CPU 101 may subtract the value of the automatic insertion medal counter at a time (for example, "3") or may subtract "1" at a time. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the automatically inserted medal counter after subtraction is "0" (S224).

In S224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (when the determination in S224 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S222 and repeats the processes after S222.

On the other hand, in S224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (when S224 is a YES determination), or when S221 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 is used for medal auxiliary storage. The storage switch check process is performed (S225). In this process, the main CPU 101 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals based on the on / off state of the medal auxiliary storage switch 75.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion state check process (S226). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal can be inserted based on the result of the medal insertion state check process (S227).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S227 that the medal cannot be inserted (when the determination in S227 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S231 described later.

On the other hand, in S227, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal insertion is possible (when the determination in S227 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion check process (S228). In this process, the main CPU 101 credits the medal, for example, based on the medal sensor input state, a process of determining whether or not the medal has passed normally, and when the number of medals inserted exceeds a specified number. Perform processing and so on. The details of the medal insertion check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal insertion or credit is possible based on the result of the medal insertion check process (S229).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S229 that the medal can be inserted or credited (when the determination in S229 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S231 described later. On the other hand, in S229, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal cannot be inserted or credited (when the determination in S229 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S230). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven (the solenoid that has been excited is demagnetized), and the select plate 804 shifts from the guide position to the discharge position, so that the inserted medal is released. It will be discharged from the medal payout outlet 24.

After the processing of S230, if S227 is a NO determination or S229 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current number of inserted medals is the playable start number (S231). In the present embodiment, the number of cards that can be started is 3 regardless of the game state (that is, the game can be started only when 3 cards are inserted).

In S231, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current number of inserted medals is the number of playable start numbers (when the determination in S231 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S234 described later. On the other hand, in S231, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current number of inserted medals is not the playable start number (when the determination in S231 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a medal inserted (S232). ).

In S232, when the main CPU 101 determines that a medal has been inserted (when the determination in S232 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226. On the other hand, in S232, when the main CPU 101 determines that no medal has been inserted (NO in S232), the main CPU 101 performs the setting change confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 48 (S233). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change command generation / storage process at the start of setting confirmation. This makes it possible to check the set values and hall menus (various history data (errors, power failure history, etc.)) regardless of whether the game state is a bonus state (special prize operating state). Cheating can be suppressed. In the setting change confirmation process performed in S233, even if the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state, a setting change command (setting confirmation start) including at least information on the current setting value is generated and stored. Therefore, the command data may be stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Thereby, it may be possible to check whether or not the set value is appropriate (whether or not it is within the range of settings 1 to 6) for each game.

After the processing of S233 or when the determination in S231 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is in the ON state (S234).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S234 that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S234 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226.

On the other hand, in S234, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 79 is in the ON state (when the determination in S234 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S235). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven (the solenoid that has been excited is demagnetized), and the select plate 804 shifts from the guide position to the discharge position, so that the inserted medal is released. It will be discharged from the medal payout outlet 24.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a timer value (“72” in this embodiment) in the medal monitoring timer (S236). The medal monitoring timer is a timer for monitoring the period until the excited solenoid is degaussed (that is, the period until the select plate 804 moves from the guide position to the ejection position) in the selector 66. (See FIG. 86 described later), for example, when the period until the excited solenoid completes degaussing is 80 ms, a timer value for measuring at least a longer period (“about 80.44 ms”). Is set. That is, the medal monitoring timer actually operates after the start lever 16 is operated (the start switch 79 is turned on) and the control for prohibiting medal acceptance is started when the number of medals that can be played is inserted. Monitor a specific period of time before the acceptance of medals is (physically) banned. As a result, when a medal is inserted in the specific period in combination with the start lever ON flag described later, the medal insertion check 2 process described later, etc., the medal is accidentally swallowed (that is, the medal is inserted). However, it is prevented from being housed in the hopper device 51 without being counted). The value of the medal monitoring timer can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the selector 66 (mainly the solenoid). Further, as long as the prevention of swallowing of medals is guaranteed, the period until the excited solenoid is completely degaussed can be set to a period shorter than the period until the demagnetization is completed.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the start lever ON flag to the ON state (S237). The start lever ON flag is information for identifying whether or not the start lever 16 has been operated (the start switch 79 has been turned on) when medals corresponding to the number of playable start medals have been inserted. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion check 2 process (S238). In this process, the main CPU 101 basically performs the same process as the medal insertion check process. The details of the medal insertion check process and the medal insertion check 2 process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever ON flag is in the OFF state (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start lever ON flag is in the OFF state (when the determination in S239 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226.

On the other hand, in S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start lever ON flag is not in the off state (that is, is in the ON state) (when the determination in S239 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the medal monitoring timer to "0". It is determined whether or not there is (S240). In S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal monitoring timer is not "0" (that is, "1" or more) (when the determination in S240 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S238, and after S238. Repeat the process of.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S240 that the medal monitoring timer is "0" (when the determination in S240 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance / start check process and performs the process in the main flow (when the medal monitoring timer is determined to be YES). (See FIG. 56).

[Medal insertion process]
Next, referring to FIG. 59, the medal insertion performed in S222 during the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) and S265 during the medal insertion check process (see FIGS. 60 and 61) described later. The processing will be described. Note that FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the medal insertion process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the medal counter (S241). The medal counter is a counter for counting the number of inserted medals, and is provided in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process (S242). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. That is, the medal insertion command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 each time one medal is inserted. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 turns off the first to third LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals included in the LED 82 (see FIG. 6) (S243). Next, the main CPU 101 calculates LED lighting data (lighting control data) corresponding to the number of inserted medals based on the number of inserted medals (value of the medal counter) (S244). In this process, for example, when the number of inserted medals is one, the LED lighting data for lighting only the first LED for displaying the number of inserted medals is calculated, and for example, when the number of inserted medals is three. LED lighting data for lighting all of the first to third LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals is calculated. The method for calculating the LED lighting data will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 101 uses the calculated LED lighting data to light the corresponding LED for displaying the number of inserted medals (S245). Then, after the process of S245, the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion process, and performs the process in S223 of the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) or the medal insertion check process (FIGS. 60 and 61) described later. (See) to S253.

[Medal insertion check process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the medal insertion check process and the medal acceptance / start check process (FIGS. 57 and 58) performed in S228 during the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58). The medal insertion check 2 process performed in S238 in (see) will be described. 60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the medal insertion check process. The medal insertion check 2 process starts from S253 of the medal insertion check process, and the processes of S253 to S268 are the same as those in the medal insertion check process. The procedure of the input check process will be described.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game is being replayed (S251).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S251 that the replay is in progress (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process, and performs the medal acceptance / start check process (FIGS. 57 and 57). (Refer to 58), move to S229.

On the other hand, in S251, when the main CPU 101 determines that the replay is not in progress (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 101 permits medal acceptance (S252). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is driven (the solenoid that has been degaussed is excited), and the select plate 804 shifts from the ejection position to the guide position, so that the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 14. The medals that have been won are counted and accommodated in the hopper device 51.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a bet button check process (S253). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet button (MAX bet button 15a or 1-bet button 15b) has been operated based on the ON / OFF state of the BET switch 77. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the betting operation is completed based on the result of the betting button check processing in S253 (S254).

In S254, when the main CPU 101 determines that the betting operation is completed (when the determination in S254 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process (or the medal insertion check 2 process), and accepts the medal. The process moves to S229 of the start check process (see 57 and 58) (or S239 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)).

On the other hand, in S254, when the main CPU 101 determines that the betting operation has not been completed (when the determination in S254 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state (game medium reception state) at the time of the current processing. Acquires the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (S255). The medal sensor input state is information indicating the passing status of the medal received in the medal insertion slot 14 in the selector 66, and is generated based on the detection result of each medal sensor (see FIG. 5) of the selector 66.

In the present embodiment, the medal sensor input state is represented by 1-byte (8-bit) data, and the detection result of the first medal sensor 806 on the upstream side provided at the exit of the selector 66 in the direction of passing the medal is obtained. It corresponds to the information of bit 0 (“0” or “1”), and the detection result of the second medal sensor 807 on the downstream side corresponds to the information of bit 1 (“0” or “1”). When the passage of the medal is detected by the first medal sensor, "1" is set in bit 0, and when the passage of the medal is detected by the second medal sensor, "1" is set in bit 1. Will be done. Therefore, the medal sensor input state "0000000000B" indicates the state before or after passing the medal (at the time of passing), and the medal sensor input state "00000001B" indicates the state at the start of passing the medal, and the medal sensor input state "0000000000B". "00000011B" indicates a state in which the medal is passing, and the medal sensor input state "00000010B" indicates a state immediately before the completion of passing the medal.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing has changed from the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (S256).

In S256, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing has not changed from the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (when the determination in S256 is NO), the main CPU 101 is described in S262, which will be described later. Perform processing.

On the other hand, in S256, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing has changed from the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (when the determination in S256 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the start lever ON flag. If is on, the start lever ON flag is set to the off state (S257). That is, in this process, the main CPU 101 inserts medals in a specific period from when the start operation is performed and the control for prohibiting medal acceptance is started until the medal acceptance is actually (physically) prohibited. When it is detected, a process of invalidating the start operation is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 generates a normal value (normal change value) of the medal sensor input state obtained at the current processing by arithmetic processing based on the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (S258).

In this process, when the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous process is "0000000000B" (when both the first and second medal sensors have not detected medals), it is regarded as a normal change value of the medal sensor input state. When "00000001B" (when the first medal sensor detects medals and the second medal sensor does not detect medals) is generated and the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing is "00000001B", the medal sensor "00000011B" (when both the first and second medal sensors are medal detection) is generated as a normal change value of the input state. Further, in this process, when the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous process is "00000011B", the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is "00000010B" (the first medal sensor has not detected a medal, and the second (When the medal sensor is medal detection) is generated, and when the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing is "00000010B", the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is "0000000000B" (first and second medals). If both sensors do not detect medals) is generated.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (S259). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not a medal retrograde error has occurred, and if the determination condition of S259 is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines that a medal retrograde error has occurred.

In S259, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is not the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (when the determination in S259 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the processing of S263 described later. Do.

On the other hand, in S259, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (when the determination in S259 is YES), the main CPU 101 is at the time of the current processing. It is determined whether or not the medal sensor input state of the above is the state at the time of passing the medal (“00000000B”) (S260). In S260, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current process is the state at the time of passing the medal (when the determination in S260 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S264 described later.

In S260, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is not the state at the time of passing the medal (when the determination in S260 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the medal passing check timer (S261). The time set in the medal passage check timer in this process can be set to any time as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the medal has passed the selector 66. Further, the timer value set in this process may be changed according to, for example, the medal sensor input state at the time of the current process.

After the processing of S261 or when the determination of S256 is NO, the main CPU 101 indicates whether the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is the medal passing state (“000000011B”) and the medal passing check timer is stopped. (S262). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not a medal passing error (inserted medal passing time error) has occurred, and if the determination condition of S262 is satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

In S262, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination condition of S262 is not satisfied (when the determination in S262 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S253 and repeats the processes after S253.

On the other hand, in S262, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination condition of S262 is satisfied (when S262 is a YES determination), or when S259 is a NO determination, that is, a medal passing error or a medal retrograde error has occurred. If it is determined, the main CPU 101 performs error processing (S263). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs various processes when an error occurs, such as an error command generation and storage process. The details of error handling will be described later with reference to FIG. 62 described later. Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S253, and repeats the processing after S253.

Here, returning to the process of S260 again, if S260 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a specified number of medals (three medals in this embodiment) have already been inserted (S264). ..

In S264, when the main CPU 101 determines that the specified number of medals have not been inserted (when the determination in S264 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion process described with reference to FIG. 59 (S265). Then, after the processing of S265, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S253, and repeats the processing after S253.

On the other hand, in S264, when the main CPU 101 determines that a specified number of medals have already been inserted (when the determination in S264 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the credit counter (S266). ). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process (S267). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of credits of the medal is the upper limit value (50 in the present embodiment) based on the value of the credit counter (S268).

In S268, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits of medals is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S268 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S253 and repeats the processes after S253. On the other hand, in S268, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits of medals is the upper limit value (when the determination in S268 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process (or medal insertion check 2 process). , The process is transferred to S229 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) (or S239 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)).

[Error handling]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, for example, the error processing performed in S263 during the medal insertion check processing (see FIGS. 60 and 61) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an error handling procedure.

First, the main CPU 101 turns off the medal solenoid (S271). Specifically, the main CPU 101 stops driving the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the medal payout number display data (S272). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error table setting process (S273).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires an error factor (S274). The error factor acquired in this process changes according to the process in which the error process currently being processed is read. The error factors targeted in this embodiment include "hopper empty error", "hopper jam error", "inserted medal passing count error", "inserted medal passing check error", and "inserted medal passing check error". "Insert medal passing time error", "Insert medal retrograde error", "Insert medal auxiliary storage full error", "Illegal hit error" are specified. For example, when the error process is read after the process of S259 during the medal insertion check process, the "inserted medal retrograde error (Cr)" is acquired as an error factor in this process. Further, for example, when the error process is read after the process of S262 during the medal insertion check process, the "inserted medal passing time error (CE)" is acquired as an error factor in this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires error display data from the error table and the error cause (S275). For example, when the error factor is "insertion medal retrograde error (Cr)", the 1-byte data "001001110B" is used as the error display data to be output to the upper digit 7-segment LED among the 2-digit 7-segment LEDs in this process. Is acquired, and 1-byte data “000001001B” is acquired as error display data to be output to the lower digit 7-segment LED. In this case, the two characters "Cr" are displayed as error information on the two-digit 7-segment LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error command (generation) generation and storage process (S276). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of an error command when an error occurs, which is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The error command when an error occurs stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The error command when an error occurs includes a parameter indicating the occurrence of the error.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a standby process for an interrupt time (1.1172 ms) (S277). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the error has been cleared (S278).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S278 that the error has not been cleared (when the determination in S278 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process in S277 and repeats the processes after S277.

On the other hand, in S278, when the main CPU 101 determines that the error has been cleared (when the determination in S278 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the error factor clearing process (S279). This process is performed in a non-standard work area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a restoration process of the payout number display data of the medals saved in S272 (S280).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error command (release) generation and storage process (S281). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of an error command at the time of error cancellation to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The error command at the time of error cancellation stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The error command at the time of error cancellation includes a parameter indicating error cancellation. Then, after the processing of S281, the main CPU 101 ends the error processing, and shifts the processing to, for example, S253 during the medal insertion check processing (see FIGS. 60 and 61). In the error release, the generated error factor is released, and the error state is released by pressing the reset switch 76.

[Random value acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the random number value acquisition process performed in S203 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number value acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires a hard latch random number (0 to 65535) of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit, and uses the acquired random number value as a random number value for internal winning combination lottery, and uses a random number value storage area (non-standard) in the main RAM 103. It is stored in (shown) (S291).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a set process of the soft latch random number acquisition register for generating the soft latch random numbers (0 to 65535 or 0 to 255) of the random number registers 1 to 7 of the random number circuit (S292). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the acquisition number (for example, 7) of the soft latch random numbers (S293). The number of acquisitions can be appropriately increased or decreased according to the number of lottery that can be performed in one game.

Next, the main CPU 101 collectively acquires the number of acquired soft latch random numbers, and stores the acquired number of soft latch random numbers in the random number value storage area (S294). At this time, the soft latch random numbers (effect random number values) acquired from the random number registers 1 to 7 of the random number circuit 110 are hard latch random numbers (hard latch random numbers) acquired from the random number register 0 of the random number circuit in the random number value storage area. It is saved in an area different from the area where the internal winning combination lottery random number value) is stored. Then, after the processing of S294, the main CPU 101 ends the random number value acquisition processing, and shifts the processing to S204 of the main flow (see FIG. 56). In this embodiment, in order to store one 2-byte random number (random number value for internal winning combination lottery) and six 1-byte random numbers (random number value for production), an 8-byte storage area is provided in the main RAM 103. It is allocated as a random number storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, the soft latch random number of the 2-byte random number is not used.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the internal lottery process performed in S204 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a set value / medal insertion number check process (S301). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the set value (any of 1 to 6) of the current game and the number of inserted medals (3 in the present embodiment).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the internal lottery table for general games (see the internal lottery table in the “RT0” state shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) and the number of lottery (98 times in this embodiment) (S302). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RB is in operation (S303). When the main CPU 101 determines in S303 that the RB is not in operation (when the determination in S303 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S305 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S303 that the RB is in operation (when the determination in S303 is YES), the main CPU 101 has an internal lottery table for RB (see the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 18) and The number of lottery (7 times in this embodiment) is set (S304). In this process, the internal lottery table and the number of lottery for general games set in S302 are overwritten by the internal lottery table and the number of lottery for RB.

After the processing of S304 or when the determination in S303 is NO, the main CPU 101 acquires the determination data (data related to the address) of the lottery target combination from the set internal lottery table, and updates the lottery table address (S305).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data is RT state-specific data (S306). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired lottery target combination is an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to the RT state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address defined in the currently acquired lottery target combination determination data is an address in the lottery value selection table (not shown) for each RT state. ..

In S306, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not the RT state-specific data (when the determination in S306 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S308 described later. On the other hand, in S306, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is the data for each RT state (when the determination in S306 is YES), the main CPU 101 selects data from the RT state lottery value selection table based on the determination data. Is acquired, and the acquired selection data is set in the determination data (S307).

After the processing of S307 or when the determination in S306 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data of the lottery target combination is the data for each setting (S308). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired lottery target combination is an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to the set value. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address defined in the currently acquired lottery target combination determination data is an address in the internal lottery value table (not shown) for each setting.

In S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not the setting-specific data (when the determination in S308 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S310 described later. On the other hand, in S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is the data for each setting (when the determination in S308 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds the set value data (any of 0 to 5) to the determination data. Then, the added value is set in the determination data (S309). The set value data added to the determination data in this process is the data associated with the set value, but the set value data "0" to "5" are not the values of the set value itself, but are "0" to "5", respectively. It is the data corresponding to "setting 1" to "setting 6".

After the processing of S309 or when the determination in S308 is NO, the main CPU 101 calculates the address of the area in which the lottery value of the lottery target combination is stored based on the set determination data (address data), and sets the address to the lottery value. The stored lottery value is acquired (S310).

For example, in the case of an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to both the RT state and the set value, the lottery value is referred to both the RT state lottery value selection table and the internal lottery value table for each setting. Is obtained. That is, for example, in an internal lottery table for a general game state (see FIGS. 16 and 17), an internal winning combination (for example, "F_maintenance lip") in which the lottery value fluctuates when the RT state is different based on the RT0 state. For the internal winning combination (for example, "F_maintenance lip"), the lottery value is changed according to the game state (RT1 to RT5 state), and the lottery value is changed when the set value is different. The lottery value is changed according to the set value (settings 1 to 6).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value (any of 0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery stored in the random number storage area (S311).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery execution process (S312). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the random number value acquired in S311 to the lottery value acquired in S310, and sets the addition result as the lottery result (winning / non-winning of the lottery target combination). In this lottery execution process, when the sum of the lottery value and the random number value exceeds 65535 (overflow), it is determined that the lottery target combination has been won (the lottery target combination has been determined as the internal winning combination). To.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores a value obtained by adding the lottery value to the random number value (random number value after the lottery execution) as a new random number value in the random number storage area (S313). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lottery execution process has won (whether or not an overflow has occurred) (S314).

In S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning is won in the lottery execution process (when the determination in S314 is YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the internal lottery table and refers to the winning request flag status (corresponding to the winning internal winning combination). For example, the special prize winning number (that is, information that can identify the type of the winning bonus combination) and the small winning combination winning number (that is, the winning small winning combination or replay combination) corresponding to "No." in FIGS. 16 to 18 The value of (information that can identify the type)) is acquired (S315). Then, after the processing of S315, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the lottery has not been won in the lottery execution process (when the determination in S314 is NO), the main CPU 101 updates the lottery target combination to the next combination in the internal lottery table, and draws the lottery. The number of times is subtracted by 1 (S316). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of lottery after subtraction is "0" (S317).

In S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of lottery after subtraction is not "0" (when the determination in S317 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S305 and repeats the processes after S305.

On the other hand, in S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of lottery after subtraction is "0" (when the determination in S317 is YES), that is, when the internal winning combination is "missing", the main CPU 101 determines. Set the loss status (S318). The "missing status" corresponds to the winning request flag status in which both the special prize winning number and the small winning combination winning number are "0". Then, after the processing of S318, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Design setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the symbol setting process performed in S205 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 extracts a special prize winning number and a small winning combination winning number based on the winning request flag status acquired by the internal lottery process, and extracts the extracted special winning winning number and the small winning combination winning number in the main RAM 103. It is stored in the winning number storage area (not shown) (S321).

In the present embodiment, the special prize winning numbers "1" to "4" are associated with the internal winning combinations "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" and "F_BB4", respectively. In addition, the small winning combination "1" to "23" are associated with the internal winning combination "F_confirmed lip" to "F_shot lip" (see FIG. 23), and the small winning combination numbers "24" to "23" are associated with each other. Internal winning combinations "F_chance eye A1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" are associated with "61" (see FIG. 24), and small winning combinations "62" to "68" are associated with each other. Internal winning combinations "F_JAC1_1" to "F_JAC2" are associated with each other (see FIG. 23). Then, the value of the winning request flag status is composed of a value obtained by multiplying the special prize number indicating these values by the value of the special prize winning number and adding the small winning combination winning number. Therefore, in the process of S321, in order to extract the special prize winning number and the small winning combination winning number from the value of the winning request flag status, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 divides the value of the winning request flag status by the special prize number. This is an example of data compression for identifying the internal winning combination, and other data structures can be appropriately adopted as long as the special prize winning number and the small winning combination can be extracted.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has won based on the extracted small winning combination winning number (S322). In this process, if the small winning combination winning number is any of 1 to 68, the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has won, and if the small winning combination winning number is 0, , The main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) did not win.

In S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has not been won (when the determination in S322 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S331 described later. On the other hand, in S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has won (when the determination in S322 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the small winning combination winning number as the initial value of the subtraction result (when it is determined that S322 is YES). S323).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a hit request flag table (not shown) (S324). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the subtraction result and updates the subtraction result (S325). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the subtraction result is less than "0" (S326).

In S326, when the main CPU 101 determines that the subtraction result is not less than "0" (when the determination in S326 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the bit number calculation process (S327). In the bit number calculation process of S327, the number of blocks in the storage area of the hit request flag data corresponding to the small winning combination winning number specified in the hit request flag table is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a bit number calculation process (S328). In the bit number calculation process of S328, the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in the block unit specified in the hit request flag table is calculated.

The above-mentioned processes of S325 to S328 are repeated as many times as the number of small winning combination winning numbers. When the processing of S325 to S328 is repeated a plurality of times, the number of blocks acquired in the bit number calculation processing of S327 and S328 and the number of bytes of the hit request flag data for each block are stored in another storage area. Will be done. Further, the number of blocks obtained by the above-mentioned processing of S325 to S328 and the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in the block unit are information (on-bit information) for designating the storage destination of the hit request flag data.

Here, returning to the processing of S326 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S326 that the subtraction result is less than "0" (when the determination in S326 is YES), the main CPU 101 is in the hit request flag storage area ( The internal winning combination storage area) is set (S329). At this time, the main CPU 101 checks (updates) the hit request flag based on the number of blocks obtained by the above-mentioned processes of S325 to S328 and the number of bytes (on-bit information) of the hit request flag data for each block. Set only the storage area. Specifically, the address of the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated) is stored in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a compressed data storage process (S330). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (expanding) the hit request flag data to a predetermined storage area in the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated). The details of the compressed data storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 described later.

After the processing of S330 or when the determination in S322 is NO, the main CPU 101 refers to the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 26) and determines whether or not there is a carry-over combination (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a carry-over combination (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S334 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S331 that there is no carry-over combination (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the bonus combination (BB1 to BB4) based on the special prize winning number extracted in the process of S321. ) Wins or not (S332).

In S332, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination has not been won (when the determination in S332 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting process and shifts the process to S206 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Transfer.

On the other hand, in S332, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination has been won (when the determination in S332 is YES), the main CPU 101 stores the winning special prize winning number in the carry-over combination storage area (S333).

After the processing of S333 or when the determination in S331 is NO, the main CPU 101 sets the special prize winning number in the winning number storage area (not shown), sets the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area, and sets the RT state to RT5. Set to the state (S334). Then, after the processing of S334, the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting processing and shifts the processing to S206 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Compressed data storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, for example, the compressed data processing performed in S330 during the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the compressed data storage process.

The compressed data storage process shown in FIG. 66 is executed not only in S330 during the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65) but also in S649 during the symbol code acquisition process (see FIG. 68 described later) described later. In the compressed data storage process executed in S330 during the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65), the flag data to be processed is the hit request flag data (flag data related to the winning combination), but the symbol code acquisition process described later In the compressed data storage process executed in S649 (see FIG. 68 described later), the flag data to be processed is the winning operation flag data (flag data related to the winning combination). Then, both processes are the same except that the types of flag data to be processed are different.

Therefore, in the flowchart of FIG. 66, the flag data to be processed is referred to as “process target flag data”, and the flag table to be processed is referred to as “process target flag table”. In addition, in accordance with this description, in the following description of the compressed data storage process, the winning request flag data or the winning operation flag data is referred to as "processing target flag data", and the winning request flag table or the symbol-corresponding winning operation table described later is used. (Not shown) is referred to as a "process target flag table".

First, the main CPU 101 sets the storage destination check bit (S341). In this process, the storage destination check bit is stored in a register other than the A register.

The storage destination check bit is 1-byte data for designating a block that is a storage destination (transfer destination) of the processing target flag data. In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area are both composed of two blocks (blocks of storage areas 1 to 8 and blocks of storage area 9). Then, for example, when the internal winning combination "F_JAC1-1" is determined, the number of blocks of the storage destination becomes "2". Therefore, in the processing of S341, "00000011B" is set as the storage destination check bit. The bit 0 value (1/0) of this 1-byte data corresponds to the presence or absence of a storage destination in the blocks of the storage areas 1 to 8, and the bit 1 value (1/0) corresponds to the block of the storage area 9. Corresponds to the presence or absence of the storage destination in.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the transfer counter in byte units to "8" (S342). In the present embodiment, since the number of bytes of at least one block is "8", "8" is set as the initial value of the transfer counter.

Next, the value of the transfer instruction bit is extracted from the storage destination check bit (S343). The transfer instruction bit corresponds to the data of bit 0 in the storage destination check bit, and in the processing of S343, the storage destination check bit stored in the 1-byte register is shifted to the right once (for 1 bit). As a result, the transfer instruction bit is extracted. Specifically, when the 1-byte register (register other than the A register) in which the storage destination check bit is stored is shifted to the right once, the data stored in bits 7 to 1 are changed to bits 6 to 0, respectively. As it moves, the data of bit 0 before the shift is output. Then, the data output by this shift process becomes the value of the transfer instruction bit.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a transfer instruction based on the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit (S344). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction when the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit is “1”. For example, when "00000011B" is set as the storage destination check bit, the transfer is performed in the first (corresponding to the first block of the storage area) and the second (corresponding to the second block of the storage area) determination process of S344. It will be judged that there is an instruction.

In S344, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no transfer instruction (when the determination in S344 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S354 described later.

On the other hand, in S344, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction (when the determination in S344 is YES), the main CPU 101 acquires byte unit storage destination designation information from the processing target flag table (S345). In this process, as byte-by-byte storage destination specification information, the transfer destination is stored at the start address of the area in which the flag data of the processing target combination (winning combination or winning combination) in the processing target flag table is stored. Byte data is retrieved.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) of the address to be referred to in the process target flag table (S346). Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets an address that specifies the head storage area of the block that is the storage (transfer) destination of the processing target flag data as the initial address. For example, in the processing of the first block, the address of the storage area 1 is set as the initial address in the processing of S346, and in the processing of the second block, the address of the storage area 9 is set as the initial address in the processing of S346. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the transfer instruction bit from the byte unit storage destination designation information (S347). The transfer instruction bit referred to here corresponds to bit 0 of the byte unit storage destination specification information, and in the processing of S347, the byte unit storage destination specification information stored in the 1-byte register is shifted to the right once. Extracts the value of the transfer instruction bit (outputs bit 0 data).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a transfer instruction based on the value of the transfer instruction bit extracted in the process of S347 (S348). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction when the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit is “1”. For example, when "00000001B" is set as the byte unit storage destination designation information, the bit 1 data "1" is processed in S347 of the first time (storage area 1 of the first block or storage area 9 of the second block). Is output as the value of the transfer instruction bit, and it is determined that there is a transfer instruction. However, in the second to eighth processes of S347, it is determined that there is no transfer instruction.

In S348, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no transfer instruction (when the determination in S348 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S351 described later.

On the other hand, in S348, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction (when the determination in S348 is YES), the main CPU 101 is the processing target flag stored in the address in the currently set processing target flag table. The data (winning request flag data or winning operation flag data) is transferred (copied) to the designated storage area (S349).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) of the address to be referred to in the process target flag table (S350).

After the processing of S350 or when the determination in S348 is NO, the main CPU 101 performs an address update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) that specifies a storage area to be a storage destination of the processing target flag data (S351). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the transfer counter (S352).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the transfer counter is "0" (S353). In S353, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the transfer counter is not "0" (when the determination in S353 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S347 and repeats the processing after S347.

On the other hand, in S353, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the transfer counter is "0" (when the determination in S353 is YES), does the main CPU 101 have a transfer instruction target remaining in the current storage destination check bit? Whether or not it is determined (S354). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a bit in which "1" is stored remains in the storage destination check bit at the time of the current process. Then, when the bit in which "1" is stored remains in the storage destination check bit, that is, when the block to be processed exists, the main CPU 101 gives a transfer instruction to the current storage destination check bit. Determine that the target remains.

In S354, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transfer instruction target remains in the current storage destination check bit (when the determination in S354 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S342, and the process after S342. repeat. On the other hand, in S354, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transfer instruction target does not remain in the current storage destination check bit (when the determination in S354 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the compressed data storage process and performs the process. For example, it is moved to S331 in the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65).

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S212 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pull-in priority storage process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets "3" to the number of search reels (S621). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S622). In this process, a pull-in priority table (not shown) is selected based on the internal winning combination and the operation stop button.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage area selection process (S623). In this process, the pull-in priority data storage area of the reel to be searched is selected. Next, the main CPU 101 sets "20" as the number of symbol checks (number of times) (S624).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol code acquisition process (S625). In this process, the symbol code is acquired by referring to the winning operation flag storage area and the symbol code storage area corresponding to the number of symbol checks. The details of the symbol code acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product calculation process (S626). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation flag data generation process. The details of the logical product calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S627). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the bit is set to "1" in the winning operation flag (winning combination) storage area (see FIG. 25), and the bit is set to "1" in the hit request flag storage area. The attraction priority data is acquired by referring to the attraction priority table (not shown) for the winning combination. The details of the pull-in priority acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S628). At this time, the attraction priority data is stored in the attraction priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other.

The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of main reel. In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "19" of the corresponding main reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to this attraction priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the stop table.

The content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority. By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol having the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. If there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the pull-in priority storage area (S629). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a pull-in priority data storage area for the next check symbol. Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks (S630). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S631).

In S631, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of symbol checks is not "0" (when the determination in S631 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S625 and repeats the processes after S625. On the other hand, in S631, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of symbol checks is "0" (when the determination in S631 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a search target reel change process (S632).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of search reels (S633). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of search reels is "0", that is, whether or not the above-mentioned series of processes has been performed on all the main reels (S634).

In S634, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of search reels is not "0" (when the determination in S634 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S622 and repeats the processes after S622. On the other hand, in S634, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of search reels is "0" (when the determination in S634 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the attraction priority storage process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. 56), move to S213.

[Design code acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the symbol code acquisition process performed in S625 during the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol code acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 clears the winning operation flag storage area (S641). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets "0" in all the storage areas in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the first reel symbol arrangement table (not shown) (S642).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped (S643).

In S643, when the main CPU 101 determines that the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped (when the determination in S643 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S647 described later. On the other hand, in S643, when the main CPU 101 determines that the first reel (left reel 3L) is not stopped (when the determination in S643 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the second reel symbol arrangement table (not shown). (S644). In this process, the first reel symbol arrangement table set in the process of S642 is overwritten by the second reel symbol arrangement table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second reel (middle reel 3C) is stopped (S645).

In S645, when the main CPU 101 determines that the second reel (middle reel 3C) is stopped (when the determination in S645 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S647 described later. On the other hand, in S645, when the main CPU 101 determines that the second reel (middle reel 3C) is not stopped (when the determination in S645 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the third reel symbol arrangement table (not shown). (S646). In this process, the second reel symbol arrangement table set in the process of S644 is overwritten by the third reel symbol arrangement table.

After the processing of S646, or when the determination of S643 or S645 is YES, the main CPU 101 performs the symbol check processing at the time of executing the stop operation on the reel to be stopped controlled, and corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the symbol acquired by the symbol check processing. Acquire the winning operation table (not shown) (S647). The symbol-corresponding winning operation table is a table for identifying the type of winning combination (symbol combination) that can be won if the corresponding symbol stops on the effective line in the reel to be stopped and controlled.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the winning operation flag storage area (S648). Next, the main CPU 101 performs the compressed data storage process described with reference to FIG. 66 (S649). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (expanding) the winning operation flag data stored in the symbol-corresponding winning operation table to the corresponding storage area in the winning operation flag storage area.

For example, when the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped and the symbol located on the effective line during the stop operation is "blank", the symbol combinations (combinations) that can be won are FIGS. 19 to 22. As shown in, "S_XD lip", "S_bar lip 2", "S_RT1 transition lip", and "S_special combination 1".

After the processing of S649, the main CPU 101 sets the winning operation flag storage area updated by the compressed data storage processing, sets the symbol code storage area, and sets the data length of the winning operation flag storage area (9 bytes in this embodiment). Is set (S650). Then, after the processing of S650, the main CPU 101 ends the symbol code acquisition processing, and shifts the processing to S626 of the pull-in priority storage processing (see FIG. 67).

[Logical product operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, for example, the logical product calculation process performed in S626 during the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the logical product calculation process. The logical product calculation process shown in FIG. 69 is performed not only in S626 in the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) but also in S686 in the attraction priority acquisition process (see FIGS. 70 and 71 described later). Is also executed.

In the logical product calculation process executed in S626 during the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 67), the two data to be ANDed are stored in the winning operation flag set in S650 during the symbol code acquisition process described above. It is the data of the area and the data of the symbol code storage area. The former data corresponds to the "logical product destination data" described later, and the latter data corresponds to the "logical product source data" described later. Further, in this case, the number of bytes "9" of the data length (9 bytes) set in S650 during the above-mentioned symbol code acquisition process corresponds to the "number of logical products" described later.

On the other hand, in the logical product calculation process executed in S686 in the pull-in priority acquisition process described later (see FIGS. 70 and 71 described later), the two data to be logically ANDed are stored in the hit (pull-in) request flag storage area. Data and data of the winning operation flag storage area. The former data corresponds to the "logical product destination data" described later, and the latter data corresponds to the "logical product source data" described later. Further, in this case, the number of bytes "1" of the data length (1 byte) of the RT operation combination display flag described later corresponds to the "logical product number" described later.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires the logical product source data (for example, the data of the symbol code storage area) (S661). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product operation of the logical product source data and the logical product destination data (for example, data in the winning operation flag storage area), and saves the calculation result as the logical product destination data (S662).

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the logical product source data to be acquired (S663). Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the logical product destination data to be referred to (S664).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of logical products (S665). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of logical products is "0" (S666).

In S666, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of logical products is not "0" (when the determination in S666 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S661 and repeats the processes after S661. On the other hand, in S666, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of logical products is "0" (when the determination in S666 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the logical product calculation process and stores the process, for example, in the pull-in priority order. The process moves to S627 of the process (see FIG. 67).

[Pull-in priority acquisition process]
Next, the attraction priority acquisition process performed in S627 during the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. 70 and 71 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the attraction priority acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is time to check the right reel 3R (specific display column) (S671).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S671 that it is not the time to check the right reel 3R (when the determination in S671 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S674 described later. On the other hand, in S671, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is time to check the right reel 3R (when the determination in S671 is YES), the main CPU 101 "ANY combination" in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination. It is determined whether or not (a combination of predetermined symbols) is included (S672). The "ANY combination" here means a combination in which the winning is confirmed regardless of at least the stop symbol of the right reel 3R (at least the winning combination in which the stop symbol of the right reel 3R is an arbitrary symbol). However, in this embodiment, the "ANY role" is not defined.

In S672, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination does not include the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S672 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S674 described later. On the other hand, in S672, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination includes the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S672 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines that the "ANY combination" in the winning operation flag storage area. The storage area corresponding to the "combination" is masked (S673). Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "1" in the bit corresponding to the "ANY combination" in the winning operation flag storage area. In addition, when "ANY combination" is not specified in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination, the processing of S671 to S673 may be unnecessary. Further, when the "ANY combination" defines the stop symbol of the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C as an arbitrary symbol, the processing of S672 and S673 is performed even when the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C is checked. It may be performed (the same applies to the processes of S681 to S683 described later).

After the processing of S673, or when S671 or S672 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) by adding "1" to the address of the last storage area. Is set, the stop prohibition data is set, and the winning operation flag data length (data length of the winning operation flag storage area: 9 bytes in this embodiment) is set (S674). Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the stock button operation counter and the stop button operation state (S675). The stop button operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation is detected. Further, the operation state of the stop button is acquired by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 28).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the address of the set winning operation flag storage area by 1 (S676). Next, the main CPU 101 generates hit request flag data from the set winning operation flag storage area and the corresponding hit request flag storage area (see FIG. 25), and based on the generated hit request flag data. Generate a prohibited winning operating position (S677).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop operation position is the prohibited winning operation position (S678).

In S678, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation position is not the prohibited winning operation position (when the determination in S678 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S678, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation position is the prohibited winning operation position (when the determination in S678 is YES), the value of the stop button operation counter of the main CPU 101 is the value of the third stop. Whether or not it is determined (S679).

In S679, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is the value of the third stop (when the determination in S679 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S705 described later. On the other hand, in S679, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is not the value of the third stop (when the determination in S679 is NO), the value of the stop button operation counter of the main CPU 101 is the second stop. It is determined whether or not it is a value (S680).

In S680, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is not the value of the second stop (when the determination in S680 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S680, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is the value of the second stop (when the determination in S680 is YES), whether or not the main CPU 101 is after the right reel 3R is stopped. (S681).

In S681, when the main CPU 101 determines that the right reel 3R has been stopped (YES in S681), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S681, when the main CPU 101 determines that the right reel 3R has not been stopped (when the determination in S681 is NO), the main CPU 101 has a flag that the hit request flag may be interfered with by the "ANY combination". It is determined whether or not (whether or not "ANY combination" is not included in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination) (S682).

In S682, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag is not a flag that may be interfered with by the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S682 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S682, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag is a flag that may be interfered with by the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S682 is NO), the main CPU 101 currently checks "ANY". It is determined whether or not it is time to check the hit request flag including the "combination" (S683).

In S683, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is the time to check the hit request flag including the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S683 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S705 described later.

On the other hand, in S683, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is not at the time of checking the hit request flag including "ANY combination" (when S683 is NO determination), when S678 or S680 is NO determination, or S681. Alternatively, when the determination in S682 is YES, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the winning operation flag data length (S684). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning operation flag data length is “0” (S685).

In S685, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data length is not "0" (when the determination in S685 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S676 and repeats the processing after S676.

On the other hand, in S685, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data length is "0" (when the determination in S685 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a stop control pull-in request flag setting process (S686). .. In this process, for example, the main CPU 101 performs the logical product operation process described with reference to FIG. 69. In the logical product operation process executed in the process of S686, as described above, the data of the hit (pull-in) request flag storage area is set in the "logical product destination data", and the data of the winning operation flag storage area is set. It is set in the "logical product source data", and the number of bytes "1" of the data length (1 byte) of the RT operation combination display flag is set in the "logical product count". The RT operation combination display flag is a storage area in which the symbol combination related to the RT transition is defined in the winning operation flag storage area, and in the present embodiment, it is only the storage area 1 as shown in FIG. 25.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the pull-in priority table address storage area and acquires the pull-in priority table (S687). In this process, the initial value "1 (001H)" of the pull-in priority data is set at the currently set address, and one of the pull-in priority tables is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data in the pull-in priority table stored at the currently set address is the end code (000H) (S688).

In S688, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the pull-in priority table stored at the currently set address is the end code (when the determination in S688 is YES), the main CPU 101 uses S705, which will be described later. Process. On the other hand, in S688, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the pull-in priority table stored at the currently set address is not the end code (when the determination in S688 is NO), the main CPU 101 operates the winning operation. The flag storage area is set (S689).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the attraction priority data based on the attraction priority table stored in the currently set address (S690). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the block counter of the pull-in priority table (S691).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of checks of the attraction priority table, and adds 1 (+1 update) to the address of the attraction priority table to be referred to (S692).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires check data based on the updated address of the pull-in priority table, and extracts check bits from the check data (S693).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the extracted check bit is “1” (S694).

In S694, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the extracted check bit is not "1" (when the determination in S694 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S699 described later. On the other hand, in S694, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the extracted check bit is "1" (when the determination in S694 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the pull-in priority table to be referred to. (+1 update), and based on the updated address, the determination data is acquired from the pull-in priority table (S695).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired winning operation flag data is the determination target based on the determination data acquired in S695 (S696). In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the currently acquired winning operation flag data with the determination data, determines whether or not the former corresponds to the latter, and the former corresponds to the latter. In that case, it is determined that the currently acquired winning operation flag data is the determination target.

In S696, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data is not the determination target (when the determination in S696 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S699 described later. On the other hand, in S696, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data is the determination target (when the determination in S696 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the attraction priority data (S697). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates (overwrites) the currently set attraction priority data with the attraction priority data associated with the determination data acquired in S697.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the check data (S698). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the check data by one bit to the right (direction from bit 7 to bit 0). In this process, "0" is set in the bit 7 of the check data after the shift.

After the processing of S698, or when S694 or S696 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a bit to be checked (a bit in which "1" is set) in the check data (S699).

In S699, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no bit to be checked in the check data (when the determination in S699 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S702 described later. On the other hand, in S699, when the main CPU 101 determines that the check data has a bit to be checked (when the determination in S699 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the winning operation flag storage area to be checked (+1 update). ), And the number of checks is subtracted by 1 (S700).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S701). When the main CPU 101 determines in S701 that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S701 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S698 and repeats the processes after S698.

On the other hand, in S701, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S701 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the number of checks in the address of the winning operation flag storage area currently referred to. In addition, the address of the winning operation flag storage area is updated, and the value of the block counter is decremented by 1 (S702). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the block counter is "0" (S703).

In S703, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the block counter is not "0" (when the determination in S703 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S692 and repeats the processes after S692.

On the other hand, in S703, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the block counter is "0" (when the determination in S703 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the pull-in priority table to be referred to (+1 update). ) (S704). Then, after the processing of S704, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S688, and repeats the processing after S688.

Here, returning to the processing of S679, S683 or S688 again, if S679, S683 or S688 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 uses the attraction order data set at this time as the final attraction priority data. Set (S705). If S679 or S683 is YES, the main CPU 101 sets "0 (00H)" as the final pull-in priority data. In this case, since the end code is assigned to the pull-in priority data "0 (00H)", no pull-in data (stop prohibition) is set. Then, after the processing of S705, the main CPU 101 ends the attraction priority acquisition process, and shifts the process to S628 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the reel stop control process performed in S213 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop enable signal OFF process (S711). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs the port output process of the reel stop enable signal OFF data. Further, this process is performed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (whether or not the speed has reached a "constant speed") (S712). In S712, when the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speeds of all reels are not "constant speed" (when the determination in S712 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S712.

On the other hand, in S712, when the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached "constant speed" (when the determination in S712 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop enable signal ON process (S713). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs the port output process of the reel stop enable signal ON data. Further, this process is performed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S714).

In S714, when the main CPU 101 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (when the determination in S714 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S713 and repeats the processes after S713. On the other hand, in S714, when the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S714 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 28), and the stop button is not yet pressed. The value of the operation counter is subtracted by 1 (S715).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S716). Further, in this process, the address (start address) set process of the rotation cylinder control data storage area in which the reel control management information of the search target reel is stored is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop enable signal OFF process (S717). Similar to S711, this process is performed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 103 based on the value of the symbol counter (S718).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop selection process (S719). Although detailed description is omitted, in this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting the number of sliding pieces.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines a scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S719, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 103 (S720). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the addition result as the stop scheduled position.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the symbol code storage process (S721). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the scheduled stop position is stored in the symbol code storage area. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (third stop) (S722). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (third stop) based on the value of the stop button non-operation counter, and the value of the stop button non-operation counter is set. When it is "0", it is determined that the reel to be controlled is the reel at the final stop.

In S722, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reel to be controlled is not the reel of the final stop (when the determination in S722 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the control change process (S723). In this process, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position. Next, the main CPU 101 performs the attraction priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 67 (S724).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a stop interval remaining time standby process (S725). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a standby process until a preset predetermined reel stop interval time elapses. Then, after the processing of S725, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S711, and repeats the processing after S711.

Here, returning to the process of S722 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S722 that the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (when the determination in S722 is YES), the main CPU 101 excites all the reels. Determines whether or not is in the stopped state (S726). In S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all reels is not in the stopped state (when the determination in S726 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S726.

On the other hand, in S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all reels is in the stopped state (when the determination in S726 is YES), the main CPU 101 keeps the stop button operated for the third stop in the ON state. It is determined whether or not (the stop button is not released) (S727). In S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop button operated by the third stop operation remains in the ON state (when the determination in S727 is YES), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S727. On the other hand, in S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop button operated by the third stop operation is not in the ON state (when the determination in S727 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process. Move to S214 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Prize search process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the winning search process performed in S214 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning search process.

First, the main CPU 101 transfers and stores the data of each storage area stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) to the corresponding storage area of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) (S761). .. Then, at the end of this processing, the address at the end of the winning operation flag storage area is set in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the payout number data table (not shown) that defines the payout number (see FIGS. 19 to 22) of the winning combination (symbol combination) in the HL register (S762). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of payout number tables (for example, "4" in this embodiment) as the initial value of the winning search counter, and sets the initial value in the B register (S763).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the number of medals to be paid out (in this embodiment, any one of 1, 2, 5, and 8) in the C register based on the address set in the HL register. , The determination target data is set in the A register, and "2" is added (+2 update) to the address set in the HL register (S764). In the payout number data table, the data of the payout number of medals is defined as, for example, "payout number (1, 2, 5 or 8) * 2 + 0". Further, in the following, the data "0" in the data "number of medals to be paid out (1, 2, 5 or 8) * 2 + 0" set in the C register will be referred to as a "judgment bit". This determination bit is information indicating whether or not the block is the determination target block of the winning search.

Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the determination bit from the data of the number of medals to be paid out set in the C register (S765). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the block is a determination target block based on the value of the extracted determination bit (S766). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the block is a determination target block when the value of the extracted determination bit is "1". In the present embodiment, regardless of the number of medals to be paid out, the value of the determination bit is always defined as "0", so that the processing of S766 is always a NO determination.

In S766, when the main CPU 101 determines that the block is not the determination target block (when the determination in S766 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S768 described later. On the other hand, in S766, when the main CPU 101 determines that the block is the determination target block (when the determination in S766 is YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register (-). 1 update) (S767).

After the processing of S767 or when the determination in S766 is NO, the main CPU 101 extracts the data of the storage area specified by the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register as the determination data (S768).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result is a prize based on the determination target data set in the A register in S764 and the determination data extracted in S768 (S769). In this process, if the determination target data set in the A register in S764 is the same as the determination data extracted in S768, the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result is a prize.

In S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the determination is not a prize (when the determination in S769 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S776 described later. On the other hand, in S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the determination is a winning result (when the determination in S769 is YES), the main CPU 101 has three current games (a game in which the number of medals bet is three). ) (S770).

In S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is a three-card game (when the determination in S770 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S772 described later. On the other hand, in S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is not a three-card game (when the determination in S770 is NO), the main CPU 101 pays out a two-card game (a game in which the number of medals bet is two). The number of sheets is set in the C register (S771). In this embodiment, since there is no two-card game, the processing of S770 and S771 becomes unnecessary.

After the processing of S771 or when the determination in S770 is YES, the main CPU 101 updates the number of payouts (S772). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the number of medals to be paid out set in the C register to the current value of the winning number counter, and sets the added value to the number of payouts.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the number of payouts is less than the maximum number of payouts "15" (S773).

In S773, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of payouts is less than the maximum number of payouts "15" (when the determination in S773 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S775 described later. On the other hand, in S773, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of payouts is not less than the maximum number of payouts "15" (when the determination in S773 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the maximum number of payouts "15" to the number of payouts. (S774).

After the processing of S774 or when the determination in S773 is YES, the main CPU 101 stores the payout number in the winning number counter (S775).

After the processing of S775 or when the determination in S769 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is another prize (S776). In S776, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is another prize (when the determination in S776 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S769 and repeats the processes after S769.

On the other hand, in S7776, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no other prize (when the determination in S776 is NO), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (updates -1) the value of the prize search counter (S777). Note that, for example, when there is only one valid line, a plurality of small winning combinations will not be won in duplicate, so the determination process of S776 will always be a NO determination.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning search counter is "0" (S778).

In S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning search counter is not "0" (when the determination in S778 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S764 and repeats the processing after S764. On the other hand, in S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning search counter is "0" (when the determination in S778 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning search process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. 56) Move to the process of S215 in.

[Illegal hit check processing]
Next, the illegal hit check process performed in S215 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. Note that FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the illegal hit check process. An illegal hit is a special prize winning number and a small winning combination winning number (internal winning combination) that are drawn by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 64) and stored in the winning number storage area by the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65). Based on this, it is a term indicating that the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are stopped on the effective line with a combination of symbols that cannot be established (symbol combination is not established).

First, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) (S781). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the size of the winning operation flag storage area (the number of bytes, “9” in the present embodiment) to the value of the check counter (S782).

Next, the main CPU 101 is based on the address of the winning operation flag storage area currently set, and the internal winning combination stored in the storage area in the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area) corresponding to the address. Data (hit request flag data) is acquired (S783). Next, the main CPU 101 synthesizes the winning combination data (winning operation flag data) stored in the address of the currently set winning operation flag storage area and the internal winning combination data (winning request flag data) ( S784).

In this synthesis process, the main CPU 101 first obtains the exclusive OR of the winning combination data (winning operation flag data) and the internal winning combination data (winning request flag data). Next, the main CPU 101 obtains the logical product of the calculated exclusive OR calculation result and the winning combination data (winning operation flag data), and uses the calculated logical product as the synthesis result. If no illegal hit error has occurred, the value of this synthesis result will be "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an illegal hit error has occurred based on the result of the synthesis process of S784 (S785).

In S785, when the main CPU 101 determines that an illegal hit error has not occurred (NO in S785), the main CPU 101 updates the address of the winning operation flag storage area to be referred to by +1 (S786). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the check counter (S787). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the check counter is "0" (S788).

In S788, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the check counter is not "0" (when the determination in S788 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S783 and repeats the processes after S783. On the other hand, in S788, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the check counter is "0" (when the determination in S788 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the illegal hit check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. 56) Move to the process of S216 in.

Here, returning to the processing of S785 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S785 that an illegal hit error has occurred (when the determination in S785 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the error processing described with reference to FIG. 62. (S789). By this process, the two-digit 7-segment LED (both for displaying the number of payouts and for displaying the error) included in the information display 6 is used to display the two characters "EE" indicating the occurrence of an illegal hit error as error information. Error display data is output. The state in which the illegal hit error occurs (error state) is released by pressing the reset switch 76 (see FIG. 6).

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the winning number counter and the data of the hit request flag storage area (S790). Then, after the processing of S790, the main CPU 101 ends the illegal hit check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, the configuration of the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area) is the same as that of the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area). The winning request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area arranged in the main RAM 103 at the time of combining the combination of the storage area combination and the internal winning combination can have the same configuration. Therefore, the calculation result of S784 in the illegal hit check process of the present embodiment (the result of synthesizing the data of the winning combination and the data of the internal winning combination) is simply a logical product of the data of the winning combination and the data of the internal winning combination. It is obtained by executing (for example, executing with the "AND" instruction). As a result, in the present embodiment, the illegal hit check process can be made more efficient and simplified, the free space of the main control program can be secured (increased), and the increased free space can be used for playability. It becomes possible to increase.

[Prize check / medal payout process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the winning check / medal payout process performed in S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning check / medal payout processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation command generation process (S801). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates type data and various communication parameters included in the winning operation command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. The winning operation command is configured to include a parameter for specifying a winning operation flag (display combination) and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the communication data storage process described with reference to FIG. 50 (S802). By this process, the winning operation command data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The winning operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is "0" (S803). In S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is "0" (when the determination in S803 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout process, and performs the process in the main flow (when the winning check / medal payout process is completed). (Refer to FIG. 56), the process proceeds to S217.

On the other hand, in S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S803 is NO), the main CPU 101 has the maximum number of medals credited (stored). In the embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number is 50 or more (S804).

In S804, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits for medals is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (when the determination in S804 is NO), the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the credit counter (updates +1) (upgrading +1). S805). The added value of the credit counter is displayed by a 2-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the number of stored sheets included in the information display 6. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout number check process (S806). The details of the medal payout number check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the payout of medals has been completed (S807). In S807, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal payout has been completed (when the determination in S807 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout process, and the process is in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of S217.

On the other hand, in S807, when the main CPU 101 determines that the payout of medals has not been completed (when the determination in S807 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a payout interval standby process (S808). In this process, the main CPU 101 waits until the preset medal payout interval time (60.33 msec in this embodiment: 54 cycles of the interrupt process (1.1172 msec cycle) described later with reference to FIG. 79) elapses. Wait. Then, after the processing of S808, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S803, and repeats the processing after S803.

Here, returning to the process of S804 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S804 that the number of credits for medals is equal to or greater than the upper limit (50) (when the determination in S804 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines. The medal payout process is performed (S809). By this process, the medals that are not stored as the number of credits are paid out. In the process of S809, the processes of S806 to 806 may be repeated every time one medal is paid out until the payout of medals is completed. Then, after the processing of S809, the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Check process for paying out medals]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the medal payout number check process performed in S806 during the winning check / medal payout process (see FIG. 75) will be described. Note that FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the medal payout number check process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the medal OUT counter (S811). The medal OUT counter is a counter for counting the number of times the medal is paid out. Next, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the payout number counter (S812). The payout number counter is a counter for counting the payout number of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a payout number 7SEG display process (S813). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a control process of displaying the value of the payout number counter by a 2-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the payout number included in the information display 6.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process of the winning combination end number counter (S814). In addition, the bonus combination wins a prize in the counter for the number of end-of-roles (combinations "C_red same color BB", "C_blue same color BB", "C_red different color BB" or "C_blue different color BB" are available). Then, when the bonus game starts, the number of payouts that can be paid out in the bonus game is set (see Fig. 77 below), the remaining number of medals to be paid out during the bonus game is counted, and the end of the bonus game is completed. It is a counter for making a judgment (see S822 of FIG. 77 described later). In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the value of the combination end number counter with the lower limit value “0”, and if the value of the combination end number counter is larger than the lower limit value “0”, the combination end number counter. The value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (updated by -1), and when the value of the winning combination end number counter is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the value of the winning combination ending number counter is held at "0". The number of payouts set in the combination end number counter is not the number actually paid out to the player. For example, 240 pieces are set in the combination end number counter and the combination end number counter is 240. If 15 medals are paid out in this state, the actual number of medals to be paid out will be 255. The number of counters for the end of the combination is set to "0" after 240 sheets are paid out, and thereafter, the lower limit of the value of the counter for the number of end of the combination is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the value of the winning number counter by 1 (S815).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a credit information command generation process (S816). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates type data and various communication parameters included in the credit information command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. The credit information command is configured to include a parameter for specifying the number of credits for medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the communication data storage process described with reference to FIG. 50 (S817). By this process, the credit information command data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. Then, after the process of S817, the main CPU 101 ends the medal payout number check process, and shifts the process to the process of S807 during the winning check / medal payout process (see FIG. 75).

[BB check process]
Next, the BB check process performed in S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 77. Note that FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the BB check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state (S821). In S821, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is not the bonus state (when the determination in S821 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S831 described later.

On the other hand, in S821, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is the bonus state (when the determination in S821 is YES), is the main CPU 101 having a value of "0" or less for the number of consecutive end sheets? Whether or not it is determined (S822). In S822, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning combination end number counter is not "0" or less (when the determination in S822 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the BB check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 56) Move to the process of S218 in.

On the other hand, in S822, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning combination end number counter is "0" or less (when the determination in S822 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the bonus end processing (S823). In this process, the main CPU 101 clears various information in the bonus state. Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT4 state flag to the ON state (S824). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the RT state after the end of the bonus state to the RT4 state. Then, after the processing of S824, the main CPU 101 ends the BB check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

Here, returning to the processing of S821 again, when S821 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 101 is used to combine the symbols related to the BB combination (combination "C_red same color BB", "C_blue same color BB", "C_red different color BB"". Or, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of "C_blue different color BB") is displayed (S825). In S825, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the BB combination is not displayed (when the determination in S825 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the BB check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move on to the processing of S218 inside.

On the other hand, in S825, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the BB combination is displayed (when the determination in S825 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the bonus operation time processing (S826). In this process, various processes necessary for starting the operation of the bonus, such as setting the bonus state in the game state of the next game, are performed. Next, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (the number of payouts that triggers the end of the bonus: "240" in BB1 and BB2, and "165" in BB3 and BB4) in the value of the combination end number counter (in this embodiment). S827). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT5 state flag to the off state (S828). In this process, the main CPU 101 clears the RT state before the start of the bonus state. Then, after the processing of S828, the main CPU 101 ends the BB check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[RT check processing]
Next, the RT check process performed in S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. Note that FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the RT check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S831). In S831, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is in the bonus state (when the determination in S831 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of S219 inside.

On the other hand, in S831, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is not in the bonus state (when the determination in S831 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the RT state is the RT5 state (inter-flag state). Is determined (S832). In S832, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is the RT5 state (when the determination in S832 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of.

On the other hand, in S832, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is not the RT5 state (when the determination in S832 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RT state is the RT3 state (S833). When the main CPU 101 determines in S833 that the RT state is not the RT3 state (when the determination in S833 is NO), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of S837.

On the other hand, in S833, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is the RT3 state (when the determination in S833 is YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the RT game number counter (S834). That is, the main CPU 101 manages the game period in the RT3 state. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RT game number counter has become 0 (S835). In S835, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S835 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of S219 inside.

On the other hand, in S835, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT game number counter has become 0 (when the determination in S835 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT0 state flag to the on state and turns the RT3 state flag off. Set (clear) to (S836). By this process, the RT state becomes the RT0 state. Then, after the processing of S836, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

In S833, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is not the RT3 state (when the determination in S833 is NO), has the main CPU 101 displayed a combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition (combination "S_RT3 transition")? Whether or not it is determined (S837). In S837, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition is displayed (when the determination in S837 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT3 state flag to the ON state and sets the RT game number counter to the RT game number counter. 8 is set (S838). In this case, the other RT status flags are set to the off status. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT3 state. Then, after the processing of S838, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S837, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition is not displayed (when the determination in S837 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition (combination "R_RT1"). It is determined whether or not the symbol combination of "transition eye") is displayed (S839). In S839, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition is not displayed (when the determination in S839 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition lip (combination "S_RT1 transition lip"). It is determined whether or not the symbol combination) is displayed (S840).

In S839, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the RT1 transition is displayed (when the determination in S839 is YES), and in S840, the main CPU 101 displays the symbol combination related to the RT1 transition lip. When it is determined (S840 is a YES determination), the main CPU 101 sets the RT1 state flag to the ON state (S841). In this case, the other RT status flags are set to the off status. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT1 state. Then, after the processing of S841, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S840, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition lip is not displayed (when the determination in S840 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip (combination "S_RT2"). It is determined whether or not the "combination of symbols of the transition lip") is displayed (S842). In S842, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip is displayed (when the determination in S842 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT2 state flag to the ON state (S843). In this case, the other RT status flags are set to the off status. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT2 state. Then, after the processing of S843, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S842, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip is not displayed (when the determination in S842 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT0 transition lip (combination "S_RT0"). It is determined whether or not the "combination of symbols of the transition lip") is displayed (S844). In S844, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT0 transition lip is displayed (when the determination in S844 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT0 state flag to the ON state (S845). In this case, the other RT status flags are set to the off status. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT0 state. Then, after the processing of S845, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). On the other hand, in S844, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT0 transition lip is not displayed (when the determination in S844 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in the main flow (when the RT check process is completed). (Refer to FIG. 56), the process proceeds to S219.

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the interrupt process performed by the main CPU 101 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the interrupt process. The interrupt process repeatedly executed at a cycle of 1.1172 msec is generated based on the output timing of the timeout signal of the timer circuit 113 set in the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (see S2 in FIG. 46). This is a process executed when an interrupt request signal from the interrupt controller 112 is input to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S901). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S902). In this process, various switches such as a start switch 79 and a stop switch connected via an external bus interface 104, index sensors (not shown) provided on each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, etc. The signals input from various sensors are checked. In the present embodiment, these various switches and various sensors pass through the cabinet side relay board 44, the door relay terminal plate 68, the reel relay terminal plate 74, etc., and the input port IC (non-existent) via the external bus interface 104. It is connected to the input terminal of the input IC connected to the output terminal (shown in the figure). Further, in the main RAM 103, an input port storage area (not shown) for the main CPU 101 to store the state of the input port IC (simply referred to as "input port" in this embodiment) connected to the external bus interface 104. ) Is assigned. Here, the input port storage area includes, for example, an input port storage area 1 for storing the current state of the input port and an input port storage area 2 for storing the state of the input port before the interrupt processing. Consists of. Then, in this process, the main CPU 101 first stores various information stored in the input port storage area 1 in the input port storage area 2, and then stores various information read from the input port in the input port storage area 1. To do. The connection configuration of various switches and various sensors and the configuration of the input port storage area are not limited to those described above. That is, the configuration may be such that the main CPU 101 can recognize the on / off states of various switches and various sensors.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S903). In this process, the main CPU 101 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. Drive and control three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 101 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 101 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window) of the corresponding reel. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data transmission process (S904). In this process, various commands stored in the communication data storage area are mainly transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 via the first serial communication circuit 114 (see FIG. 8) of the main control circuit 90. The details of the communication data transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a insertion medal passage check process (S905). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the inserted medal has passed the selector 66 based on the detection result (medal sensor input state) of each medal sensor (see FIG. 5).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment LED drive process (S906). In this process, the main CPU 101 drives and controls various 7-segment LEDs included in the information display 6, and displays, for example, the number of medals paid out, the number of credits, the stop button pressing order data, and the like. The details of the 7-segment LED drive process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process (S907). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a count (subtraction) process of various set timers. The details of the timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error detection process (S908). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a door open / close check process (S909). In the door open / close check process, the main CPU 101 checks the open / closed state of the front door 2b (see FIG. 2) by checking the on (door closed) / off (door open) state of the door open / close monitoring switch 67.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a test firing test signal control process (S910). In this process, control process is performed when various test signals are output to the testing machine via the second interface boat or the like. Further, this process is executed using the non-standard work area (see FIG. 11C) of the main RAM 103. In the present embodiment, this process is also performed at a time other than the test firing test (after the pachislot machine 1 is installed in the game store), but at this time, the main control board 71 passes through the second interface boat or the like. Since it is not connected to the testing machine, various test signals are generated but not output.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a register reset process (S911). Then, after the processing of S912, the main CPU 101 ends the interrupt processing.

[Communication data transmission processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the communication data transmission process performed in S904 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the communication data transmission process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs the WDT setting process (S961). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restarting the WDT in the reset controller 106 and the like. The details of the WDT setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the command transmission start timer has counted up (S962). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission of communication data is being delayed. In S962, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has not counted up (when the determination in S962 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission process and interrupts the process (FIG. 79). (See) Move to the process of S905 in.

On the other hand, in S962, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has counted up (when the determination in S962 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the communication data has been transmitted (S963). .. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the data stored in the command status register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1), and if the data indicating the completion of transmission is stored, the communication data. Determines that the transmission is completed, and if the data indicating the transmission completion is not stored, it is determined that the communication data has not been transmitted.

In S963, when the main CPU 101 determines that the communication data has not been transmitted (NO in S963), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission process and interrupts the process (see FIG. 79). Move to the processing of S905 inside. On the other hand, in S963, when the main CPU 101 determines that the communication data has been transmitted (YES in S963), the main CPU 101 performs the communication data acquisition process (S964). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring communication data (command data) from the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (S965). In S965, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (when the determination in S965 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S969 described later.

On the other hand, in S965, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (when the determination in S965 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the non-operation command data in each register (S966). ). The non-operation command data is information related to the player's game operation (for example, input operation, start operation, stop operation, etc. as an operation for advancing the game) (for example, these operations have been performed). Each parameter is set so as not to include the information indicating the above, or, for example, the information indicating the internal winning combination determined based on the start operation). Note that each parameter of the non-operation command data includes, for example, a parameter indicating the on / off state of each switch in the pachislot 1 and a parameter indicating the on / off state of each sensor (for example, the input port storage area 1). And the information stored in the input port storage area 2) may be set. As a result, the possibility of malfunction or failure of these switches and sensors may be determined on the sub-control circuit 200 side.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data storage process (see FIG. 50) (S967). That is, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing the non-operation command data generated in S966 in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data acquisition process (S968). That is, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring non-operation command data stored in the communication data storage area in S967.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at least no operation command is transmitted for each interrupt process (see FIG. 79) even when there is no communication data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized communication data from being transmitted from the outside due to the absence of communication data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. From this point of view, the non-operation command data does not include information related to the player's game operation, but the content of each parameter to be set is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. Is.

After the processing of S968 or when the determination in S965 is YES, the main CPU 101 sets the buffer size for one packet in the transmission counter (S969). In the present embodiment, since the transmission data for one packet is 8 bytes, the buffer size for one packet is also composed of 8 bytes. Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of communication data (command data) are stored in the communication data storage area, they are transmitted in the order in which they are stored (first in the oldest storage) (FIFO format). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires transmission data from the communication buffer and sets it in the transmission data register (S970). Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the transmission data in the transmission data register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1) in 1-byte units. As a result, the set transmission data is transferred to the transmission shift register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1), and is transmitted one packet at a time.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates (+1) the address of the communication buffer (S971). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the transmission counter (S972). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission counter is "0" (S973). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission of the transmission data for one packet is completed. In S973, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transmission counter is not "0" (when the determination in S973 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S970 and repeats the processing after S970.

On the other hand, in S973, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transmission counter is "0" (when the determination in S973 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a communication data pointer update process (see, for example, FIG. 51) (S974). ). Then, after the processing of S974, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S905 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

[WDT setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the WDT setting process performed in S961 during the communication data transmission process (see FIG. 80) will be described. Note that FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the WDT setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the WDT clear register (not shown) in the WDT in the reset controller 106 (S981). Next, the main CPU 101 sets clear data (for example, "55H") at the set address (S982). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the restart data (for example, "AAH") at the set address (S983).

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the command transmission start timer with its lower limit value "0", and if the command transmission start timer is larger than the lower limit value "0", the command transmission start timer is subtracted by 1 (-1 update). If the command transmission start timer is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the command transmission start timer is held at "0" (S984). Then, after the processing of S984, the main CPU 101 ends the WDT setting processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S962 of the communication data transmission processing (see FIG. 80).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the WDT reset setting and management information (WDT permission / prohibition, reference clock, timeout time (for example, 419.4 ms), etc.) are stored in the program management area, and S982 and By performing the process of S983, the set timeout time is remeasured. When a reset signal is output due to a timeout and the main CPU 101 is restarted, the checksum generation process (FIG. 52) is performed because the system is restarted without executing the power failure (external) process (see FIG. 52). The sum value calculated by 53) is not stored in the main RAM 103 (sum value storage area). Therefore, in this case, the thumb check determination result in the power-on processing (see S11 in FIG. 46) is not normal (that is, as "RAM abnormality"), and an error occurs in the information display 6 (7-segment LED display). The character string "88" indicating the occurrence is displayed.

[7-segment LED drive processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the 7-segment LED drive process performed in S906 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 7-segment LED drive process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the interrupt counter (S921). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number (S922).

In S922, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the interrupt counter is not an odd number (when the determination in S922 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment LED drive process and interrupts the process (see FIG. 79). ) Moves to the processing of S907. That is, in the present embodiment, the 7-segment LED drive process is performed every two interruption cycles. In the present embodiment, an example of executing the 7-segment LED drive process when the value of the interrupt counter is even has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED drive process is not limited to this when the value of the interrupt counter is odd. The LED drive process may be executed, or the execution timing of the 7-segment LED drive process may be determined by using the quotient or the remainder when the value of the interrupt counter is divided by an arbitrary integer.

On the other hand, in S922, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number (when the determination in S922 is YES), the main CPU 101 acquires navigation data from the navigation data storage area (S923). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the push order display data storage area for storing the push order display data output to each cathode of the 7-segment LED (S924).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display data generation process (S925). In this process, the main CPU 101 creates push order display data (7-segment display data) based on the navigation data, and stores the generated push order display data in the push order display data storage area. The details of the 7-segment display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the credit counter (S926). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the credit display data storage area for storing the credit display data output to each cathode of the 7-segment LED (S927).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display data generation process (S928). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates credit display data (7-segment display data) based on the value of the credit counter, and stores the generated credit display data in the credit display data storage area. The details of the 7-segment display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the 7-segment common counter storage area for storing the value of the 7-segment common counter described later (S929). Next, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the 7-segment common counter (S930). In this process, when the updated 7-segment common counter value becomes "8", the main CPU 101 sets the 7-segment common counter value to "0". In the present embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is dynamically controlled, the value of the 7-segment common counter is updated every 8 times.

Next, the main CPU 101 creates common selection data based on the value of the 7-segment common counter, and addresses the target cathode data storage area (push order display data storage area or target storage area in the credit display data storage area). Is set (S931). Next, the main CPU 101 outputs clear data to the cathode of the 7-segment LED (S932). This process is performed in order to eliminate the influence of the afterimage by temporarily turning off the 7-segment LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires and sets 7-segment cathode output data from the target cathode data storage area (S933). Next, the main CPU 101 generates 7-segment common output data from the 7-segment common backup data and the common selection data (S934).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the 7-segment common output data and the 7-segment cathode output data in the 7-segment common backup data and the 7-segment cathode backup data, respectively (S935). Next, the main CPU 101 outputs 7-segment cathode output data and 7-segment common output data (S936). Then, after the processing of S936, the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment LED drive processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S907 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

[7-segment display data generation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S925 and S928 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82) will be described. Note that FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 7-segment display data generation process.

The "display data" described later generated by the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S925 during the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82) corresponds to the push order display data, and the 7-segment LED drive process (FIG. 82). The "display data" described later generated in the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S928 in (see 82) corresponds to the credit display data.

First, the main CPU 101 divides the display data set in the cathode data storage area by "10", acquires the quotient value of the division result as the display data of the upper digit of the 2-digit 7-segment LED, and divides the data. The remaining value of the result is acquired as the display data of the lower digit (S941). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to display the upper digit based on the acquired display data of the upper digit (S942).

In S942, when the main CPU 101 determines that the upper digit display is to be performed (when the determination in S942 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S944 described later. On the other hand, in S942, when the main CPU 101 determines that the upper digit is not displayed (when the determination in S942 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets no display of the upper digit (S943).

After the processing of S943 or when the determination in S942 is YES, the main CPU 101 refers to the 7-segment cathode table (not shown) and acquires the display data of the upper digit (S944). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the acquired high-order digit display data in the high-order digit display data storage area (not shown) (S945).

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the 7-segment cathode table (not shown) and acquires the display data of the lower digits (S946). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the acquired low-order digit display data in the low-order digit display data storage area (not shown) (S947).

Then, after the processing of S947, the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment display data generation processing. At this time, if the executed 7-segment display data generation process is the process of S925 during the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), the main CPU 101 changes the process to the process of S926 during the 7-segment LED drive process. Transfer. On the other hand, when the executed 7-segment display data generation process is the process of S928 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to the process of S929 in the 7-segment LED drive process. ..

[Timer update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the timer update process performed in S907 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer update process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the update start address of the 2-byte timer storage area (not shown) in the HL register, and sets the number of 2-byte timers in the B register (S951). The 2-byte timer storage area is used to manage a time of 286 ms (256 × 1.1172 ms) or more (that is, a timer value exceeding 1 byte).

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the number of 2-byte timers with the lower limit value "0", and if the number of 2-byte timers is larger than the lower limit value "0", subtracts 1 from the number of 2-byte timers (updates -1). When the number of 2-byte timers is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the number of 2-byte timers is held at "0" (S952). Further, in the process of S952, the main CPU 101 subtracts 2 (-2 updates) the update start address of the 2-byte timer storage area set in the HL register. Note that, for example, since the command transmission start timer also has a 2-byte timer, the update may be performed in this process (see FIG. 81).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register by 1 (S953). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (S954).

In S954, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register is not "0" (when the determination in S954 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S952, and after S952. Repeat the process.

On the other hand, in S954, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (when the determination in S954 is YES), the main CPU 101 stores the 1-byte timer in the HL register. The update start address of is set, and the number of 1-byte timers is set in the B register (S955). The 1-byte timer storage area is used to manage the time less than 286 ms (256 × 1.1172 ms) (that is, the timer value not exceeding 1 byte). For example, the medal monitoring timer is updated as a 1-byte timer.

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the number of 1-byte timers with the lower limit value “0”, and if the number of 1-byte timers is larger than the lower limit value “0”, the number of 1-byte timers is subtracted by 1 (-1 update). However, when the number of 1-byte timers is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the number of 1-byte timers is held at "0" (S956). Further, in the process of S956, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (-1 update) the update start address of the 1-byte timer storage area set in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register by 1 (S957). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (S958).

In S958, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is not "0" (when the determination in S958 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S956, and after S956. Repeat the process.

On the other hand, in S958, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (when the determination in S958 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs an electromagnetic counter control process (S959). ). In this process, an output control process is performed when a signal indicating IN / OUT of the medal is output to the external centralized terminal plate 47. Then, after the processing of S959, the main CPU 101 ends the timer update processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S908 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

<Explanation of operation when the power is turned on>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the operation of the pachi-slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power is turned on.

In FIG. 85, “Main CPU” indicates the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90), and “SubCPU” indicates the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

Further, in FIG. 85, the operating state "security mode" of the "Main CPU" indicates the state of being in the above-mentioned security mode, and the operating state "startup delay period" of the "Main CPU" is described above after the end of the security mode. Indicates the period until the command transmission start timer is set and the set command transmission start timer becomes "0" (that is, the period during which the setting can be changed but the transmission of communication data is delayed). The operation state "normal operation period" of the "Main CPU" indicates a state in which the delay in the transmission of the communication data has ended and the communication data can be transmitted to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

Further, in FIG. 85, the operating state "initialization" of the "SubCPU" is the initialization (boot) process (hardware boot time, BIOS (driver) initialization, kernel) when the power of the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200) is turned on. (OS) booting, etc.) indicates a state (that is, a state in which communication data transmitted from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90) cannot be received), and the operating state "normal operating period" of the "SubCPU" is It shows a state in which the initialization (startup) process at the time of turning on the power is completed and the communication data transmitted from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90) can be received.

Further, in FIG. 85, in "setting operation A", the setting change is started in the "startup delay period" (for example, the power of the pachislot 1 is turned on while the setting key type switch 54 is on), and then "normally". The operation when the setting change is completed in the "operation period" is shown, and the "transmission mode A" is the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change in the case of the "setting operation A". Indicates the transmission timing of the command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2). Further, in the "Main CPU setting change process" under the "transmission mode A", the setting change command is the communication of the main RAM 103 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) by the main CPU 101 in the case of the "transmission mode A". The timing of storage (registration) in the data storage area (see also the setting change command generation storage process in FIG. 49 and the communication data storage process in FIG. 50) is shown.

Further, in FIG. 85, in the "setting operation B", the setting change is started in the "startup delay period" (for example, the power of the pachislot 1 is turned on while the setting key type switch 54 is on), and then the "setting operation B" is described. The operation when the setting change is completed in the "startup delay period" is shown, and the "transmission mode B" is the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting in the case of the "setting operation B". Indicates the transmission timing of the change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2). Further, in the "Main CPU setting change process" under the "transmission mode B", the setting change command is the communication of the main RAM 103 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) by the main CPU 101 in the case of the "transmission mode B". The timing of storage (registration) in the data storage area (see also the setting change command generation storage process in FIG. 49 and the communication data storage process in FIG. 50) is shown.

When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on and a reset signal is input, the operating state of the security mode is controlled by the security unit (not shown) of the microprocessor 91. In the security mode, the main CPU 101 is delayed in starting for a period corresponding to the setting stored in the security setting area. When the security mode ends, the main CPU 101 delays the transmission of communication data for a predetermined period of time. The main CPU 101 can change the setting even when the transmission of communication data is delayed.

Here, as shown in "setting operation A", when the setting change is started during the delay in the transmission of the communication data and the setting change is completed after the delay in the transmission of the communication data is completed, the main CPU 101 communicates. When the delay in data transmission ends, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and when the setting change is completed, the setting change command (setting) Change / setting confirmation completed) (COM2) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

On the other hand, as shown in "setting operation B", when the setting change is started during the delay in the transmission of the communication data and the setting change is completed during the delay in the transmission of the communication data, the main CPU 101 uses the communication data. When the transmission delay ends, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2) are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. .. That is, when the delay in transmitting the communication data ends, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2) are sent to the communication data storage area. If registered, these communication data are transmitted in the registered order.

As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by delaying the start-up of the main CPU 101 when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the main control circuit 90 can be started stably and the main CPU 101 is started. By delaying the transmission of the communication data after the delay is completed, the time required for starting the sub-control circuit 200 can be secured and the sub-control circuit 200 can be started stably.

Then, after the delay in starting the main CPU 101 is completed, the setting can be changed even before the delay in transmitting the communication data is completed. Therefore, for example, when opening a store in a game store, a pachislot machine is used. When the power of 1 is turned on (that is, when a reset signal is input accordingly), the setting can be changed in advance without waiting for the completion of starting the sub-control circuit 200, so that the setting can be changed at the time of turning on the power. It is possible to improve the work efficiency in.

Further, if the setting change is made before the delay of the transmission of the communication data ends, the communication data indicating these is registered at the start of the setting change or the end of the setting change, and the delay of the transmission of the communication data is delayed. Since these communication data are transmitted in the order in which they are registered when the data is completed, even if the settings are changed in advance without waiting for the completion of starting the sub-control circuit 200. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the information held between the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. Further, for example, even when the sub control circuit 200 is configured to determine fraudulent activity, error, or the like according to the order of communication data transmitted from the main control circuit 90, the result of such determination is obtained. It is possible to make an accurate judgment without affecting the above.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the communication data transmission process is performed, at least no operation command data is transmitted even if the communication data is not registered. For example, it is possible to prevent communication data from being transmitted from the outside by an unauthorized means such as illegally accessing the connection line between the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. Further, since the registration / transmission of the non-operation command data is not performed before the delay in the transmission of the communication data is completed, it is possible to reduce the control load when the power of the pachislot 1 is turned on. From the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent activity, the non-operation command data may not include information related to the player's game operation.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the delay period for starting the main CPU 101 is composed of a fixed period and a variable period, and these periods (or a range thereof) can be appropriately selected and set. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate delay time according to the specifications of the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. From the viewpoint of shortening the period until the setting can be changed, it is possible to set a predetermined period range (for example, "no setting" in the random extension period) in which 0 is always determined as the variable period. In that case, the range of the predetermined period may be set.

In this embodiment, an example in which the setting value setting operation (setting change operation) is possible during the period in which the transmission of communication data is delayed (“startup delay period”) after the end of the security mode will be described. However, the operations that can be executed during the period in which the transmission of communication data is delayed (“startup delay period”) are not limited to this. For example, the setting key type switch 54 is turned on during the period in which the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned on while the setting key type switch 54 is off and the transmission of communication data is delayed (“startup delay period”). In this case, the setting value confirmation operation (setting confirmation operation) may be enabled during the period. As a result, for example, when opening a game store, even if the setting is not changed but the current setting value is to be confirmed, the setting confirmation is performed in advance without waiting for the start completion of the sub-control circuit 200. Since this can be done, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the power is turned on.

<Explanation of operation when inserting medals>
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the operation of the pachi-slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention at the time of inserting medals will be described. FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the pachi-slot machine 1 when the medal is inserted.

In FIG. 86, the “start switch” indicates the start switch 79, and the “medal sensor” is the detection state of the upstream medal sensor (first medal sensor) 806 and the downstream medal sensor (second medal sensor) 807. (Medal sensor input state), the "medal acceptance signal" indicates that the on state ("ON") indicates that the medal acceptance is permitted (medal acceptance permission), and the off state ("OFF") indicates the medal. Indicates a state in which the reception of medals is prohibited (see FIGS. 57 and 58).

Further, in FIG. 86, the “solenoid” indicates the solenoid of the selector 66 (the drive source that shifts the select plate 804 to the guide position or the discharge position), and the “monitoring timer” indicates the medal monitoring timer (FIGS. 57 and FIG. (Refer to 58), the "operating state" is a state in the pachislot machine 1 that enables the progress of the game after the start operation ("during the game") and a state that does not allow the progress of the game after the start operation ("game wait"). "), And.

When the number of medals that can start the game (three in this embodiment) is inserted, the main CPU 101 can accept the start operation for the start lever 16. As shown in FIG. 86, in this state, if medals can be stored as the number of credits (if the number of credits is less than 50), until the start operation for the start lever 16 is performed (started by the start switch 79). Until the operation is detected), the state in which the medal acceptance is permitted (the state in which the medal acceptance signal is "ON") continues. Although not shown, in this state, if medals cannot be stored as the number of credits (if the number of credits is 50), the acceptance of medals is prohibited (the medal acceptance signal is "OFF". It has changed to the state).

The main CPU 101 is started by the start switch 79 (the first start on the left side in FIG. 86) in a state where the number of medals that can start the game (three in this embodiment) is inserted and the medals can be stored as the number of credits. When an operation (transition of the start switch 79 from "OFF" to "ON") is detected as "start operation A"), the medal acceptance is permitted (the medal acceptance signal is "ON"). It shifts from a certain state) to a state where medal acceptance is prohibited (a state where the medal acceptance signal is "OFF"), starts shifting the solenoid of the selector 66 to a demagnetized state, and monitors with a medal monitoring timer (a state). Measurement) is started. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned on.

When a medal is inserted (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the excited state to the degaussed state) during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the main CPU 101 inputs the medal sensor of each medal sensor. When it is determined that medals have been inserted based on the state), the inserted medals are counted by changing the solenoid of the selector 66, which was in the process of changing from the excited state to the degaussed state, to the excited state again. It is guided into the hopper device 51. Further, in this case, the "start operation A" is detected by the start switch 79, but based on the detection, the operation state is changed to the state in which the game can proceed after the start operation ("during the game"). Do not change. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned off. That is, in this case, "start operation A" is invalidated.

In the main CPU 101, when a medal is inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the transition from the excited state to the demagnetized state of the solenoid of the selector 66 is completed), the medal of each medal sensor is inserted. When it is determined that a medal has been inserted based on the sensor input status), the acceptance of medals is further permitted from the state in which the acceptance of medals is prohibited (the state in which the medal acceptance signal is "OFF"). It may be changed to a state (a state in which the medal reception signal is "ON").

After that, the main CPU 101 again presses the start operation 79 (in FIG. 86, the second start operation on the right side (transition of the start switch 79 from "OFF" to "ON") is referred to as "start operation B"). When is detected, the solenoid of the selector 66 is changed from the excited state to the degaussed state again, and monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is started again. At this time, the start lever ON flag described above is turned on again.

Then, when the main CPU 101 does not insert medals during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the excited state to the degaussed state), the main CPU 101 does not insert medals (of each medal sensor). When it is not determined that a medal has been inserted based on the medal sensor input state), the operating state is completed after the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is completed (that is, after the solenoid of the selector 66 has been transferred from the excited state to the degaussed state). Is changed to a state that enables the progress of the game after the start operation (“during the game”), and the game can be progressed (that is, after the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)). Executes the processing of).

Although not shown, the main CPU 101 detects the "start operation A" by the start switch 79 and is permitted to accept medals (the medal acceptance signal is "ON"). The reception of medals is prohibited (the medal reception signal is "OFF"), the solenoid of the selector 66 is changed to the demagnetized state, and monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is started. After that, if no medals are inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the transition from the excited state to the demagnetized state of the solenoid of the selector 66 is completed) (the medal sensor input state of each medal sensor). Even when it is not determined that a medal has been inserted based on the above), as in the case where "start operation B" is detected by the start switch 79, after the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is completed (that is, the solenoid of the selector 66 is excited). After the transition from the state to the demagnetized state is completed), the operating state is changed to a state that enables the progress of the game after the start operation (“during the game”), and the game can be progressed (that is, the medal reception). -The processing after the start check processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58) can be executed).

As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is started with the start operation of the player, for example, a medal monitoring timer for preventing the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals is provided. It is set. By this medal monitoring timer, in the selector 66, the inserted medals are discharged to the outside of the gaming machine from the state where the inserted medals are stored inside the gaming machine (the state where the select plate 804 is in the guide position due to the solenoid being excited). The time until the select plate 804 is physically transferred to the state (the state in which the select plate 804 is in the discharge position due to the solenoid being in the degaussed state) is secured.

If a medal is inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the start operation that is the basis of the medal is invalidated, and in the selector 66, the inserted medal is placed inside the gaming machine. Return to the stored state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals and appropriately process the inserted medals.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if a medal is inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the medal is counted, so that the inserted medal can be counted. It is possible to prevent omission of counting and to process the inserted medals more appropriately.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timer value of the medal monitoring timer (for example, “72”) is changed from the state in which the inserted medals are stored inside the game machine to the state in which the inserted medals are discharged to the outside of the game machine. Since the period until the physical transition (for example, 80 ms) or more (for example, "72" x 1.1172 ms) is set, the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals is surely prevented. Therefore, it becomes possible to process the inserted medals more appropriately. When the drive unit is a solenoid as in the present embodiment, such an effect becomes more remarkable.

<Other effects that can be performed in this embodiment>
Next, in addition to the above-described effects, an example of other effects that can be performed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91. In the following, as an example of other effects, it is explained that the bonus combination winning notification effect for notifying whether or not the bonus combination is won can be executed, but its use is as a bonus combination. It is not limited to the one that notifies whether or not the player has won.

For example, it may be executed to notify whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, or in the line battle state of the advantageous section, the advantageous section. May be performed to signal whether it has been decided to continue. Further, it may be executed to notify whether or not it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state in the right acquisition lottery state of the advantageous section, or in the right acquisition state of the advantageous section. It may be performed to inform whether it has been decided to grant the right. That is, it can be used as an effect executed to notify the player whether or not the privilege is given.

(Example of production of bonus role winning notification production (1))
First, with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88, an production example (No. 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect will be described. 87 and 88 show, for example, a bonus winning combination that can be displayed on the display device 11 with a predetermined probability when an internal winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus combination is determined. An production example (No. 1) of the notification effect is shown. In addition, FIG. 87 shows a display example when the bonus combination is not won (when the bonus combination is not won), and FIG. 88 shows a display example when the bonus combination is won (when the bonus combination is won). Is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, in the production example (No. 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an effect entitled "Spot the difference effect" is performed. This "spot the difference effect" is based on an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work, for example, when there is an original work such as a manga, animation, or game used as a motif of pachislot 1. It is an image that allows the player to search for any differences (that is, mistakes) with respect to the base image. In this case, the predetermined image may be an image as it is (that is, the same) as the original work, or the image of the original work is A / D converted, the approximation ratio is changed, and the resolution is changed. Or it may be a remastered (ie, approximate) image. Further, although the image is based on the original work to the last, it may be an image newly created for use in the production of pachislot 1.

The base image is not limited to the one described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, even if there is no original work (for example, when it is an original motif), an image that is the same as or similar to an image that can be displayed in other productions in pachislot 1 may be set. Further, for example, an image that is the same as or similar to the image printed in the booklet distributed at the amusement store may be set to explain the specifications of the pachislot machine 1. Further, for example, the base image does not have to be a still image, may be a moving image, or the still images may be sequentially displayed in a slide format.

In the upper part of FIG. 87, an image in which five characters are displayed is displayed together with the characters "All gathered!". The image is the same as the base image. Also, below the image, there is a message and cursor that urges you to point out the differences from the base image, such as "If there is a part that is different from the image you know, move the cursor to decide!" Is displayed.

At this time, the player moves the cursor to a desired position (performs a selection operation) by tracing a predetermined area on the display surface of the sub display device 18 provided with the touch sensor 19 with a finger, and the sub display is also performed. Touch the decision button (not shown) displayed on the display surface of the device 18 (perform the decision operation), and specify the part that you think is wrong.

The means for detecting various operations related to the effect such as the player's selection operation and determination operation is not limited to the sub display device 18. For example, when the display device 11 is a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, a touch sensor is provided in at least a part of the display device 11 (for example, a place where the display in the upper part of FIG. 87 is performed). When the touch sensor detects the movement of the player's finger (when the selection operation is performed), the cursor is moved accordingly, and the enter button displayed at the place where the touch sensor is provided. When (not shown) is pressed (when a determination operation is performed), an effect of notifying the result may be performed accordingly. Further, for example, when a physical operation means (for example, a cross key and an effect button, a jog dial, etc.) capable of detecting various operations related to an effect such as a selection operation or a decision operation is provided, such a physical operation means. The selection operation and the decision operation may be detected by. That is, any means that can detect various operations related to the player's production can be applied.

Here, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 87, it is assumed that the player specifies the portion where the rightmost character is displayed. Then, since the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 87 does not differ from the base image, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 87, it is notified that the result of the error search in the "spot the difference effect" was a failure. The message "Out of place ~ sorry" is displayed.

On the other hand, in the upper part of FIG. 88, an image in which four characters are displayed is displayed together with the characters "All gathered!". The image is different from the base image in the portion where the rightmost character is not displayed. Also, at the bottom of the image, as in FIG. 87, it should be pointed out that there is a difference from the base image, such as "If there is a part different from the image you know, move the cursor to decide!" A message prompting you to do so and a cursor are displayed.

Here, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 88, it is assumed that the player specifies a portion in which the rightmost character is not displayed. In this case, since the designated part is different from the base image, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 88, the "spot the difference effect" for notifying that the result of the mistake search was successful is ". Along with the message "Hit ~", the message "Bonus confirmed!" Is displayed to notify that the bonus role has been won.

On the other hand, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 88, it is assumed that the player specifies the portion where the leftmost character is displayed. In this case, since the designated part is not a part different from the base image, as in the lower part of FIG. 87, the “missing” for notifying that the result of the error search in the “spot the difference effect” was a failure. The message "~ Sorry" is displayed, and even if you win the bonus role, you will not be notified that you have won the bonus role.

Note that the effect modes shown in FIGS. 87 and 88 show an example of the effect mode in the "spot the difference effect", and for example, the following effect mode can be adopted.

For example, the base image is based on a predetermined theme in the original work (for example, the first episode in the original work), and a plurality of (for example, five) images (for example, a digest image) are displayed in a slide format. Suppose it is a thing. Then, when the bonus combination is not won, the slide images are displayed in sequence as they are, and then each image of the slide is displayed in a thumbnail shape. On the other hand, when the bonus combination is won, slide images in which some of the slide images are different are displayed in sequence, and then each image of the slide is displayed in a thumbnail shape.

The player searches for whether each image displayed in the thumbnail form is based on a theme different from the predetermined theme (for example, the number of episodes different from the first episode in the original work), and determines. Perform a selection operation and a decision operation on an image that is thought to be an image with a theme different from that of. Then, when an image of a theme different from the predetermined theme is included and the player specifies the image, the result of the spot the difference in the "spot the difference effect" should be successful. Just do it. Specifically, for example, in the first episode in the original work, although only character A and character B appear, in the slide image displayed when the bonus role is won, the third and subsequent episodes in the original work are displayed. It suffices to include an image in which the character C that appears only in is displayed. In this way, for example, a player who is attached to the original work can perform the "spot the difference production" with particular feelings, so that it is possible to further improve the interest in the production.

Further, as described above, when displaying an image that is at least partially different from the base image in the "spot the difference effect", the part different from the base image does not have to be only one place, and a plurality of places may be different. .. In this case, for example, the number of different parts may differ depending on the type of winning bonus combination. For example, if there is one part different from the base image, there is a high possibility that it has won BB3 or BB4, and if there are multiple parts different from the base image, there is a possibility that it has won BB1 or BB2. It may be made higher. In this way, it is possible to suggest the type of bonus role that is won.

In addition, when notifying that the result of the spot the difference in the "spot the difference effect" was a failure, for example, a message such as "???" is displayed to clearly indicate that the result of the spot the difference was a failure. You may not do it.

In addition, multiple types of base images are provided. For example, when a "chance eye" is won, one of these multiple types of base images is determined, and then whether or not the bonus role is won. Depending on the situation, it may be decided whether to display the base image as it is, or to display it as an image having at least a part different part. Further, in this case, the difficulty level of finding a mistake may be different depending on the type of the base image to be determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition (for example, winning a bonus combination) that can be controlled to a bonus state advantageous to the player is satisfied, the predetermined advantageous condition If is satisfied, the first specific image (for example, an image that is partially different from the base image) is displayed, and if the predetermined advantageous conditions are not satisfied, the second specific image (for example, the base image) is displayed. (Same image as) can be displayed, and when the first specific image is displayed and the player performs an operation to specify a part different from the second specific image, a predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to display a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") Notifying that the advantageous condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied by a new production mode in which a predetermined operation of the player is involved, so that the interest in the transition of the advantageous state to the player can be improved. Can be planned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work used as a motif of the gaming machine. As a result, the player who is attached to the original work can easily recognize whether or not the predetermined advantageous conditions are satisfied, so that the motivation for playing can be increased and the interest in the production can be further enhanced.

(Example of production of bonus role winning notification production (Part 2))
Next, an production example (No. 2) of the bonus winning combination notification effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG. 89 shows, for example, a bonus combination winning notification effect that can be displayed on the display device 11 with a predetermined probability when an internal winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus combination is determined. The timing chart of the effect example (No. 2) is shown, and FIG. 90 shows a display example of the effect example (No. 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect. In addition, in the production example (No. 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an example in which the effect is executed by the display device 11 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other production devices (for example, the speaker group 84 and the like) The effect can also be executed by the LED group 85).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in the production example (No. 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an effect entitled "long press effect" is performed. In this "long-press effect", for example, when the stop operation in the third stop operation is long-pressed in the following manner, an effect different from the case where the long-press is not performed is performed. is there.

In the present embodiment, the operation means to be "long-pressed" is the stop button (either the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, or the right stop button 17R) in the third stop operation. It is not limited to. For example, it may be a stop button (one of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R) in the first stop operation, or a stop button (left stop button 17L, middle stop button 17C) in the second stop operation. And either of the right stop button 17R). Further, the stop button may be operated at a timing not directly related to the stop operation. That is, when any of the stop buttons is operated, the "long press effect" can be performed.

Further, for example, the operating means to be "long-pressed" may be a bet button (MAX bet button 15a or 1-bet button 15b) or a start lever 16. In this case, the bet button can be targeted for "long press" when it is operated at the timing of the medal insertion operation, and "long press" when it is operated at a timing different from the medal insertion operation timing. It can also be the target of "pushing". Further, in this case, the start lever 16 can be targeted for "long press" when it is operated at the timing of the start operation, and "long press" when it is operated at a timing different from the timing of the start operation. It can also be the target of.

Further, for example, the operation means to be "long-pressed" is not limited to the operation means for performing the above-mentioned operation related to the game, and may be the operation means for performing the operation related to the effect. For example, it may be a sub-display device 18 provided with a touch sensor 19, a display device 11 provided with a touch sensor at least in a part thereof described above, or a physical operating means described above.

As shown in FIG. 89, for example, when it is determined that the "long press effect" is executed, the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation, and the stop switch is turned on (on edge). When 3 seconds have passed (when pressed for a long time), "effect 1" is executed, and then when the stop button in the third stop operation is finished and the stop switch is in the off state (off edge), "Direction 2" is executed. That is, when the stop button in the third stop operation is pressed and held for a predetermined period (3 seconds), "effect 1" and "effect 2" are executed. When the stop switch is turned off (off-edge) during the execution of the "effect 1", the execution of the "effect 1" is terminated and the execution of the "effect 2" is started even in the middle of the process.

On the other hand, for example, when it is determined that the "long press effect" is executed, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, but the stop switch is in the on state (on edge). When the stop button in the third stop operation is finished and the stop switch is in the off state (off edge) (when pressed for a short time) before 3 seconds have elapsed, "Production 1" is not executed and "Production 1" is not executed. Only "Direction 2" is executed.

The effect pattern of the "long press effect" is not limited to the one described above. For example, when the press of the stop button in the third stop operation is started and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds (when pressed for a long time), "effect 1" followed by "effect 2". It may have an effect pattern to be executed. That is, when the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation and the stop switch is in the on state (on edge) for 3 seconds (when pressed for a long time), the stop switch is in the off state (off edge). Regardless of whether or not it becomes, it may have an effect pattern in which "effect 1" and "effect 2" are executed. Further, for example, when the press of the stop button in the third stop operation is started and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds (when pressed for a long time), only "effect 2" is executed. It may have an effect pattern.

Further, for example, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, but the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is completed before 3 seconds have elapsed in the state where the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge). Then, when the stop switch is in the off state (off-edge) (when pressed for a short time), it may have an effect pattern in which "effect 1" is executed and then "effect 2" is executed. That is, even before 3 seconds have passed with the stop switch in the on state (on-edge), if the stop switch is in the off state (off-edge), "effect 1" and "effect 2" are displayed. It may have an effect pattern to be executed. Further, for example, even before 3 seconds have passed in the state where the stop switch is in the on state (on edge), if the stop switch is in the off state (off edge), only "effect 1" is executed. It may have an effect pattern.

When having a plurality of effect patterns in this way, for example, one of the plurality of effect patterns is selected with a different selection probability depending on whether or not the bonus combination is won. It should be. Further, in such a case, even when the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds, the "effect 2" is already executed. If so, the "effect 1" may not be executed.

An example of the mode in which the “effect 1” and the “effect 2” shown in FIG. 89 are executed will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In addition, in FIG. 90, a display example of each of the long press and the short press when the bonus combination is won will be described.

First, when it is decided that the "long press effect" is executed, first, at least at a predetermined timing before the stop operation of the third stop operation is performed, for example, "hold down". A message is displayed, and an effect of urging that the stop button should be pressed and held during the stop operation of the third stop operation is executed.

After that, when the player keeps pressing the stop button for 3 seconds or more during the stop operation of the third stop operation, for example, "STEP 1" to "STEP 3" are sequentially displayed in "Production 1". Is executed. Then, when the player finishes pressing the stock button, for example, "effect 2" for notifying that the bonus combination is won is executed by displaying "WIN!". If the bonus combination has not been won, it may be notified in "Direction 2" that the bonus combination has not been won, for example, "LOSE" may be displayed. Further, in "Direction 1", for example, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus combination may be notified. In this case, for example, if the effect pattern is displayed up to "STEP1", the effect pattern is displayed up to "STEP2", and the effect pattern is displayed up to "STEP3", and the bonus combination is won. It is easy to select the effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 3", and if the bonus combination is not won, the effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 3" may be difficult to select. In this way, by pressing and holding it for a long time, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus role will be notified, so it is possible to further improve the interest in the production in which the content changes according to the operation of the player. Can be done.

On the other hand, if the player does not keep pressing the stop button for 3 seconds or more during the stop operation of the third stop operation, for example, the expectation degree of winning the bonus combination as described above is notified. "Production 1" is not executed, and only "Production 2" that notifies whether or not the bonus combination is won is executed.

Various methods can be adopted as the method for recognizing the pressing time of the stop button on the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). For example, in the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72), when the main CPU 101 transmits a reel stop command each time the stop switch detects that a valid stop button has been pressed, the sub CPU 201 has a number of positions. 3 When the reel stop command based on the press of the stop button of the stop operation is received, the time is started, and when the time is 3 seconds, "effect 1" is executed and the third stop operation is performed. When the pressing of the stop button of the above is completed and the winning operation command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is received, the "effect 2" may be executed. Further, whether or not the sub CPU 201 executes the "effect 1" and the "effect 2" based on the parameters indicating the on / off state of the stop switch included in the non-operation command transmitted from the main CPU 101. The execution timing may be controlled. In this way, in the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side), it is not necessary to time the pressing time of the stop button, so that the control load related to the effect of changing the content according to the operation of the player is reduced. be able to.

When the "long press effect" is controlled by the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side), for example, by the operation time for the touch panel or the physical operation means described above, the sub CPU 201 is independent. It is possible to time the time during which the operating means is operated and to control the content of the effect according to the timed result. Here, in the gaming machine as described in the present embodiment, the capacity is limited on the main control circuit 90 side, but there is generally no particular limitation on the sub control circuit 200 side, so at least If such an effect is controlled by the sub CPU 201, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

Further, the predetermined condition for controlling the execution of the "effect 2" is not limited to the completion of the operation on the operating means, and can be appropriately set. For example, it is possible to set a predetermined condition that an operation is performed on an operation means different from the target operation means, and when the number of operations on the target operation means is less than the predetermined number of times, "effect" When the production is generated in the order of "1" and "effect 2" and the number of operations to the target operating means reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined condition is satisfied and the "effect 1" is not generated and the "effect 1" is not generated. 2 ”may be generated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the operation of a specific operating means (for example, on-edge) is detected, the time measurement is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the start of the time measurement, " Control to execute "effect 1", and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an off-edge is detected), control to execute "effect 2" is performed before the predetermined time elapses from the start of timing. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible not to control the execution of the "effect 1".

As a result, even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of the specific operation means, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

(Example of production of bonus role winning notification production (3))
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect will be described. FIG. 90 shows, for example, a case where an internal winning combination (for example, “watermelon 2”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus combination is determined, and when a bonus combination is also won, a display device has a predetermined probability. A display example of a production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect that can be displayed in 11 is shown. In addition, in the production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an example in which the effect is executed by the display device 11 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other production devices (for example, the information display 6). , LED82, or an instruction monitor (instruction display)) can be used to execute the effect.

For example, the game value display unit (VL) shown in FIG. 91 may be displayed on the display device 11 in a predetermined area (payout number display unit) on which the number of payouts can be displayed when a small winning combination is established. , If it is an advantageous section, it may be displayed in a predetermined area (acquired number display unit) where the cumulative number of payouts in the advantageous section can be displayed, or an area different from the payout number display unit and the acquired number display unit. It may be displayed in a predetermined area of. Further, as described above, the 7-segment display such as the information display 6 controlled on the main control circuit 90 side should function as the game value display unit (VL) when the effect is executed. Just do it.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an effect entitled "Number ahead display effect" is performed. In this "number ahead display effect", for example, the number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (the number of medals to be acquired) is notified before the operation of the bonus state starts, so that the player wins the bonus role. It is a production that informs you that you have done it.

In the following, an example in which the value of the winning combination end number counter is displayed as the planned acquisition number to be notified in the "number of sheets ahead display effect" is described, but it is notified in the "number of sheets ahead display effect". The mode of the number of sheets to be acquired is not limited to this. For example, in the BB3 state or the BB4 state, the value of the winning combination end number counter is "165", but if all "15" medals are paid out in each game in the bonus state, the BB3 state Alternatively, in the BB4 state, "12 times" of games can be played, and the actual number of payouts is "180". Therefore, the actual number of payouts, "180", may be displayed as the number of scheduled acquisitions. Also, even in the BB3 state or the BB4 state, it is necessary to insert three medals to play the game. Therefore, if the value of the winning combination counter is "165", all the games are in the bonus state. If "15" medals are paid out, the net increase in the number of medals for each game is "15-3 = 12". Therefore, the cumulative total number of net additions is set to "12" x "11 times" = "132" according to the value of the counter for the number of end-of-roles, and this "132" is displayed as the number of planned acquisitions. You may do so. In addition, as described above, since the game can actually be played "12 times", the cumulative planned number of net increases can be "12" x "12 times" = "12 times" according to the number of times the game can actually be played. It is possible to set the number of "144" sheets and display the "144" sheets as the number of planned acquisitions.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the push order small winning combination is won in the BB1 to BB4 states, the medals to be paid out for each game depending on whether or not the pushing order is correct at the time of winning the pushing order small winning combination. The number of medals also fluctuates (“15” or “6”; see FIG. 23). In addition, when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, the push order notification is not performed in the bonus state based on the bonus combination, and when the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section, the bonus combination is obtained. In the bonus state based on, push order notification is performed.

Therefore, for example, when a bonus combination (for example, "F_BB3") is won in an advantageous section, the above-mentioned "144" cards ("180" cards when the number of inserted cards is not taken into consideration) is displayed as the planned number of acquisitions. However, the probability that "15" medals will be paid out when the bonus combination (for example, "F_BB3") is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section and the push order notification is not performed in the bonus state. If it is set to 50%, ("12 sheets" x "8 times" = 96 sheets) + ("3 sheets" x "8 times" = 24 sheets) = "120" sheets (when the number of inserted sheets is not considered) ("15 sheets" x "8 times" = 120 sheets) + ("6 sheets" x "8 times" = 48 sheets) = "168" sheets) may be displayed as the number of planned acquisitions. .. That is, the planned acquisition number notified in the "number-first display effect" may be the expected value of the payout number (or net increase number) in the bonus state.

As shown in FIG. 91, for example, when a predetermined internal winning combination including a bonus combination (for example, “F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2”) is determined, it is determined that the “number of sheets ahead display effect” is executed. If so, when the rotation of all reels is stopped (that is, after the third stop), the game value display unit (VL) displays the number of planned acquisitions "165". As a result, the player is notified that he / she has won the bonus combination (“F_BB3” or “F_BB4” in the example shown in FIG. 91). In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols related to the small combination and the replay combination is preferentially stopped and controlled over the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination. Therefore, basically, the game (bonus combination) that wins this bonus combination. In the winning game), the combination of symbols related to the small combination and the replay combination (“C_watermelon” in the example shown in FIG. 91) is displayed, and the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination (in the example shown in FIG. 91, “C_red”). Different color BB ") is not displayed. Of course, in the bonus combination winning game, it is possible to display the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, but in this case, the "number of sheets ahead display effect" may not be executed, and will be described later. As described above, the game value display unit (VL) displays the remaining number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (or the number of medals actually paid out). It can also be executed.

After that, until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed (until the bonus combination is established), the display of the number of planned acquisitions "165" in the game value display unit (VL) is continued. Then, even if the operation of the bonus state is started, the display of the planned number of acquisitions "165" in the game value display unit (VL) continues, for example, a combination of symbols related to the small winning combination in the bonus state (example shown in FIG. 91). Then, when "Bell + JACA: 15 sheets") is displayed (a prize is generated during the bonus state), the number of sheets displayed on the game value display unit (VL) is appropriately subtracted and updated to be displayed. That is, the game value display unit (VL) displays the planned number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state before the bonus state is started, and in the bonus state, the number of medals actually paid out. Depending on the situation, the remaining number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (or the number of medals actually paid out) is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a bonus combination is won, it may be decided to shift to an advantageous section. Therefore, for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section when winning a bonus combination, the number of cards to be acquired in this advantageous section (generally the expected value may be used. For example, the line battle state is average). 40 games will continue, and in the line battle state, if the average number of medals per game increases by one, "40") will be added (added) to the number of planned acquisitions in the bonus state, and the game will be played. It may be displayed on the value display unit (VL).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) is granted (for example, a bonus combination is won), the decision is made. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect to be notified (for example, "number of sheets ahead display effect"), and in this specific notification effect, a predetermined game value that can be acquired in an advantageous state generated based on the right decided to be granted. It is possible to display a value (for example, a value of a number counter for the number of consecutive ends as a planned number of acquisitions).

As a result, it is possible to perform a production that specifically informs the value of the right (winning content) obtained by the player, so that the interest related to the production can be enhanced and the interest related to the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined value is displayed in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is acquired in the advantageous state, the acquired value is obtained. The display of the predetermined value is updated based on the value of the game value.

As a result, a series of effects for notifying the value can be appropriately performed before and after the occurrence of the advantageous state, so that the interest in the effects can be further enhanced.

<Modification example, etc.>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine of the present invention according to the present embodiment have been described above, including their effects. However, the invention according to the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made as long as the gist of the invention according to the present embodiment is not deviated.

[Modification example]
In the present embodiment, at least in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2", which have different winning probabilities between the set values, are won, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined. It was not decided (ART lottery is not performed), but even if "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2", which have different winning probabilities between each set value, are won, between each set value. In the same way as other internal winning combinations including bonus winning combinations having the same winning probability in, it may be decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART lottery is performed). In this case, in the ART lottery, the probability that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section may be the same winning probability between each set value. That is, by defining a bonus combination that has a different winning probability between the set values, the probability that the transition to the advantageous section is determined may vary between the set values.

Further, in the present embodiment, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified even in the normally advantageous section, but the probability that the normal advantageous section is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined. Is given preferential treatment over the non-advantageous section, but it can also be configured as a section in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. In this case, if the state indicator is not turned on when the non-advantageous section is shifted to the normal advantageous section, the status indicator is turned on only when the transition is made to the advantageous section. Good.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, the normal advantageous section is the period during which the player's medals decrease as a whole (that is, the ball output rate is less than "1". The period) may be sufficient, and the advantageous section may be a period during which the player's medals increase as a whole (that is, a period during which the payout rate exceeds "1"). Further, even if there is a period in which the medals of some players decrease (for example, each of the above-mentioned preparation states) in the advantageous section, the period may be included in the advantageous section.

That is, when the game section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, the advantageous section raises the expectation of the player, but the increase in the number of balls is not expected to increase (for example, the "normal" of the present embodiment. It may be configured to include an "advantageous section") and an increasing section (for example, the "advantageous section" of the present embodiment) in which an increase in the number of balls actually can be expected.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the RT2 state during the advantageous section, even if the push order notification is performed, the player shifts (falls) to the RT1 state due to a push order error of the player. , The game period of the advantageous section is supposed to progress (update), but in this case, the game period of the advantageous section should not progress (renew) until it shifts (returns) to the RT2 state. You can also. Further, in this case, for example, a part of the number of games required from falling to the RT1 state to returning to the RT2 state (for example, a game required from falling to the RT1 state to returning to the RT2 state). If the number is 10 games, only 5 games of 1/2, or 2 games regardless of the number of games required from falling to the RT1 state to returning to the RT2 state) are the games in the advantageous section. The period may be advanced (renewed).

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the "chance eye" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not directly determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART lottery is not performed). However, the internal winning combination and conditions in which the ART lottery is performed can be appropriately modified and set. For example, if the "chance role" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the "chance role" is established, the ART lottery is not performed, and if the "chance role" is missed and the "RT3 transition" is established (this). In that case, ART lottery may be performed for (regardless of whether or not the state shifts to the RT3 state). That is, when a specific internal winning combination is won, the ART lottery may not be performed if a prize is generated, and the ART lottery may be performed if the prize is missed and no prize is generated.

In addition, for example, a small winning combination that pays out medals less than the number of inserted medals (for example, 3) is determined as an internal winning combination with a high probability, and in principle, a bonus combination is not established in the state between flags, and the game It is also possible to adopt a specification that allows the game to be performed with the basic game state as the state between flags. Further, in this case, the bonus state may be configured as a state in which the acquired medals are reduced or maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period is set to "1500 times", but the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period may be less than or more than that. May be good. In addition, the regulation monitoring period may be changed according to the situation of the game. For example, the regulation monitoring period is determined by the net increase (or payout number) of medals, and the net decrease (that is, the player inserts medals) at a predetermined pachislot machine 1 during a predetermined business day of the game store. However, if the number of medals (or simply the number of medals inserted) that is not returned to the player by the payout and is beneficial to the game store is "500", the medals corresponding to the predetermined regulatory monitoring period. It is also possible to add the "500" to the "1500" number of medals and prevent the advantageous section from being forcibly terminated until the "2000" medals are obtained in a series of advantageous sections.

[Other examples of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in this embodiment]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 99, another example of the playability (that is, the game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as the game state, a bonus state (special game state) in which the bonus is activated to be a game period advantageous to the player, and a game period in which the player is not in the bonus state are relatively disadvantageous to the player. It is explained that there is a non-bonus state (normal game state), and even in the non-bonus state, there are a plurality of RT states in which the winning probability of the replay role is different, so that the degree of advantage of the player is changed. (See FIG. 13). Further, in the present embodiment, as the game section, an advantageous section (advantageous state) that becomes a game section advantageous to the player by notifying the player of stop operation information, and a relatively advantageous section that is not the advantageous section. It has been described that there is a non-advantageous section (normal state) that is a disadvantageous game section for the player (see FIG. 14). Then, various modifications can be made to various conditions such as the game state and the start / continuation / end of the game section and their contents. Unless otherwise specified, in the other examples (No. 1 to No. 6) of the game playability (game specifications) shown below, the game state, the game section, the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols, etc. in the present embodiment are used. Game elements can be used as appropriate.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (1)]
First, with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93, another example (No. 1) of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification), and FIG. 93 is a diagram for conceptually explaining another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the expected value to give the game value in.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the player usually starts the game from the (A) non-advantageous section. (A) In the non-advantageous section, the amount of game value decreases because the player is not notified of the stop operation information. That is, the expected value (inclination value) of the game value given per unit game in the advantageous state becomes a negative value, and becomes a downward inclination.

In the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (A) the non-advantageous section shifts to (B) the advantageous section. (B) In the advantageous section, the amount of game value increases (at least does not decrease) due to the information of the stop operation being notified to the player. That is, the expected value (inclination value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes a positive value (at least not a negative value) and becomes an upslope (at least does not become a downslope). For convenience of explanation, in this example, the expected value of grant in the prepared state and the expected value of grant in the bonus state are not considered.

The expected value of grant can be calculated (designed) as follows. For example, if the push order (for example, 5 choices) is correct, 15 medals will be paid out, and if the push order (for example, 5 choices) is incorrect, no medals will be paid out. In the case of (32768/65536), if it is necessary to bet 3 medals in one game in principle, 30 medals are required in 10 games. And, in the case of (A) non-advantageous section, when the push order small role is won during 10 games, the push order is correct and 15 medals can be paid out is 1/10. Since it is (1/2 x 1/5), if the probability is correct, the amount of medals will be -15 (15-30) during 10 games, so the expected value of grant is 1 time. It will be "-1.5 sheets" per game. On the other hand, in the case of (B) advantageous section, if the information of the stop operation is notified for all the push order small wins and the player performs the stop operation according to the information, the push order small win is won during 10 games. Sometimes the correct answer is to push and receive 15 medals for payout, so if the probability is correct, the amount of medals will be +45 (75) during 10 games. Since it is -30), the expected value of grant is "+4.5 cards" per game. However, these are just examples for convenience of explanation, and it is also possible to calculate (design) the expected value of grant by taking into account the winning probability of the replay role and the winning probability of the bonus role (and the expected value of grant during the bonus state). Is.

In this example, in (B) advantageous section, the expected value (inclined value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value (expected value α) (B-1) advantageous section 1 Then, the expected value (inclined value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the second expected value (expected value β) different from the first expected value (expected value α) (B-2). ) Advantageous section 2 and (2) When the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, (B-1) Advantageous section 1 is shifted to (B-2) Advantageous section 2. In this example, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (A) the non-advantageous section is first shifted to (B-1) the advantageous section 1, and (B-1) the advantageous section 1 is (2). When the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, (B-2) shifts to the advantageous section 2, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (A) non-advantageous first. It is possible to shift from the section to (B-2) advantageous section 2 and shift to (B-1) advantageous section 2 when (2) expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied in (B-2) advantageous section 2. ..

Further, for example, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it may be determined whether to shift to (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2. , (1) Regarding the start condition of the advantageous section, (B-1) the start condition (1-1) of the advantageous section 1 and (B-2) the start condition (1-2) of the advantageous section 2 are determined respectively. (A) In the non-advantageous section, shift to (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2 depending on which start condition (1-1 or 1-2) is satisfied. It may be.

Then, in (B) advantageous section ((B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2), when the end condition of (3) advantageous section is satisfied, (B) advantageous section to (A) non-advantageous section Transition to the advantageous section (that is, the advantageous section ends). In this example, it is assumed that the transition control of (A) non-advantageous section and (B) advantageous section is performed in this way.

Here, in this example, the expected value α in the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is configured to be larger than the expected value β in the (B-2) advantageous section 2 (that is, (B-). 2) The expected value β in the advantageous section 2 is configured to be smaller than the expected value α in (B-1) advantageous section 1). Specifically, for example, when the above example is used, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, the probability (notification probability) that the stop operation information is notified at the time of winning the push order small winning combination is 100% (that is, that is). By setting (notification 5 times out of 5 wins), the expected value α is set to "+4.5 sheets", while in (B-2) advantageous section 2, information on the stop operation is provided when the push order small winning combination is won. By setting the probability of being notified (notification probability) to 40% (that is, notifying twice in five winnings), the expected value β is set to "+ -0 sheets".

The expected value α and the expected value β can be arbitrarily set. For example, if (B-1) advantageous section 1 is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than (A) non-advantageous section, the notification probability in advantageous section 1 is set to 1 to 100%. It can be set to any notification probability. Further, for example, (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than (A) non-advantageous section, and the notification probability is lower than that of (B-1) advantageous section 1. If so, the notification probability in the advantageous section 2 can be set to any notification probability from 1 to 100%.

Further, each of the notification probability in the advantageous section 1 and the notification probability in the advantageous section 2 may be a predetermined probability or may vary depending on the game value granting situation. For example, when the expected value α and the expected value β are set to “+3.0 sheets” and “+1.0 sheets”, respectively, (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 In each of the above, the expected value of grant is calculated for each predetermined number of games (for example, 10 times), and the calculated expected value of grant is a predetermined threshold (for example, plus or minus) than the expected value α and the expected value β, respectively. If the deviation exceeds 1), the notification probability is appropriately changed in the subsequent game, and in each period of (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. The final expected value to be given may be (approximate) the expected value α and the expected value β.

Further, the method of setting the expected value α and the expected value β is not limited to the above-mentioned method of varying the notification probability. For example, (B-1) advantageous section 1 is set to a state where the winning probability of the replay combination is high (high RT state), and (B-2) advantageous section 2 is set to a state where the winning probability of the replay combination is low (low RT state). By making the winning probability (winning probability) of the replay combination different, the expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α (in this case, the winning probability of the replay combination is added to the given expected value. In addition, the notification probability may or may not be changed). That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by controlling the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 to different RT states.

Further, for example, (B-1) the advantageous section 1 is set to a state in which the bonus (bonus state) is not difficult to operate, and (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is set to the state in which it is difficult to operate the bonus. By making the operating probability (winning probability) of the bonus different, the expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α (in this case, the expected value given is the operating probability of the bonus and the grant during the bonus state. The expected value is taken into account. Further, the notification probability may or may not be changed). That is, with respect to the operation of the bonus, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by controlling the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 in different control states. .. The state in which it is not difficult or difficult for the bonus to operate is the type of internal winning combination (including carry-over combination), the type of gaming state, the control content of stop control according to them, or the stop operation. It is possible to appropriately create the information by adding the notification contents of the above information in a complex manner (for an example, see the description of FIGS. 94 to 99 described later).

Further, for example, with respect to the push order small winning combination in the above example, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode, 15 medals are paid out, and the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the above predetermined mode. If this is done, six medals shall be paid out, and (B-1) when the push order small winning combination is won in the advantageous section 1, the information of the stop operation indicating the above-mentioned predetermined mode shall be notified. (B-2) When the push order small winning combination is won in the advantageous section 2, the information of the stop operation indicating the above specific mode is notified, and by making the number of payouts different, the expected value β is higher than the expected value α. May be set to be small (in this case, the notification probability may or may not be changed).

Further, for example, a plurality of types of push order small winning combination (for example, pushing order small winning combination A and pushing order small winning combination B) are provided, and the winning probability of pushing order small winning combination B is the winning probability of pushing order small winning combination A. It is set lower than the probability, and (B-1) When the push order small winning combination A wins in the advantageous section 1, the stop operation information is notified, while when the pushing order small winning combination B wins, the stop operation is performed. The information is not notified (although the information of the stop operation may be notified), and (B-2) When the push order small winning combination B is won in the advantageous section 2, the information of the stop operation is notified. , The expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α by not notifying the information of the stop operation when the push order small winning combination A is won. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by making the notification target combination different between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2. The winning probabilities of the push order small winning combination A and the pushing order small winning combination B are the same (or substantially the same), but the number of payouts at the time of the correct push order is different as 15 and 6 as described above. Then, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed.

Further, for example, the internal winning combination has a push order small combination (for example, 6 choices) and the push order replay (for example, 6 choices), and the game state has a high RT state and a low RT state. When the push order replay is won, if the push order is correct, the combination of symbols that shifts to the high RT state if it is in the low RT state and maintains the high RT state if it is in the high RT state is displayed. On the other hand, if the push order is incorrect, the low RT state is maintained if the push order is low, and the low RT state is entered if the push order is high (see, for example, FIG. -1) In the advantageous section 1, the correct push order is notified regardless of whether the push order small combination or the push order replay is won, so that the medals increase when the push order small combination is won. When the push order replay is won, the expected value α is set so as to shift to the high RT state or maintain the high RT state, and in (B-2) advantageous section 2, one of these is the correct answer. The expected value β may be set by not notifying the pressing order.

In this case, if (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in a state where the correct push order is notified for the push order small winning combination and the correct push order is not notified for the push order replay, the high RT is set. It is difficult to shift to the state or maintain the high RT state (the stay rate in the low RT state is high), but it is easy to increase the medals when winning the push order small role. Can be created. Further, when (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in a state in which the correct push order is notified for the push order replay and the correct push order is not notified for the push order small winning combination, the high RT state is set. Although it is easy to shift to or maintain a high RT state (the stay rate in the high RT state is high), it is difficult to increase the number of medals when winning a small winning combination. can do. That is, even if the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by different types of internal winning combinations to be notified between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. (In this case, the notification probability may or may not be changed). In (B-2) advantageous section 2, the expected value β is set by preventing the correct push order from being notified when either the push order small winning combination or the push order replay is won. You can also do it.

Further, for example, with respect to the push order small combination (for example, 6 choices), in the (B-1) advantageous section 1, at least the push order (that is, the correct push) is the correct answer for the first stop operation and the second stop operation. The expected value α is set by notifying (all of the order), and in (B-2) advantageous section 2, the push order that is the correct answer only for the first stop operation (that is, a part of the correct push order). ) May be notified to set the expected value β. Specifically, for example, when the first stop operation is "left", the second stop operation is "middle", and the third stop operation is "right", the push order is the correct answer. (B-1) In the case of advantageous section 1, the push order of "left → middle → right" is notified, and if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the number of medals can be increased with a 100% probability. (B-2) In the case of advantageous section 2, the push order of "left →? →?" Is notified, and even if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the remaining two choices must be answered correctly by the player himself. Therefore, there is only a 50% chance that the number of medals can be increased. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by making the notification content (selection number) of the stop operation information different between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2. (In this case, the notification probability may or may not be changed).

Further, for example, (B) the information of the stop operation is always notified in the advantageous section, and the expected value is "+ 10.0 sheets", which is a high net increase, but the duration of one time is relatively short (for example, between 8 games). ) It is configured as an increasing section (special advantageous section), and (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 are not notified of stop operation information (or are notified with a predetermined probability less than that of the special advantageous section). However, it is configured as an effect section (normally advantageous section) having different expected values for the transition to the special advantageous section, and can be mutually transferred between the special advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. To do. Then, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, a lottery for transition to the special advantageous section (AT lottery) is performed, and in the lottery, for example, it is determined that the lottery shifts to the special advantageous section with a probability of about 1/5. The transition probability is set so as to (win the AT lottery) (that is, the expected value α is set by the increase rate of the game medium in the increase section and the transfer probability to the increase section), while (B- 2) The AT lottery is also performed in the advantageous section 2, and in the lottery, for example, the transition probability is set so as to win the AT lottery with a probability of about 1/20 (that is, the increase of the game medium in the increase section). An expected value β smaller than the expected value α is set depending on the rate and the probability of transition to the increase interval).

That is, the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by making the transition probability to the increasing section (special advantageous section) different between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2. You may. The migration probability described above can be set as appropriate. Further, the AT lottery may not be performed in the (B-2) advantageous section 2, and in this case, in the (B-2) advantageous section 2, for example, there is a probability of (B-) of about 1/20. 1) Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section 1 is drawn, and when the lottery is won, (B-2) advantageous section 2 may be shifted to (B-1) advantageous section 1. Further, the conditions for shifting from (B-1) advantageous section 1 to (B-2) advantageous section 2 can be appropriately set. In this case, for example, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, the game is played for a predetermined period (for example, during 5 games) without winning the AT lottery, and the fall is performed when the AT lottery is not won. Winning a lottery, the number of consecutive transitions to the increasing section (special advantageous section) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), and the number of acquisitions in the increasing section (special advantageous section) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 400). It is possible to adopt the fact that it has become (more than one sheet). As described above, it is possible to further diversify the playability by the transition specifications between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2.

In this example, the expected value α is set (B-1) in the advantageous section 1 and the expected value β is set in the advantageous section 2 (B-2) as states in which different expected values are set. Although the description has been given by giving an example of having two states, there may be three or more states in which different expected values are set, and these states can be set as appropriate. For example, it may further have an advantageous section 3 in which the expected value γ is set (B-3). In this case, the expected value to be given can be set so that α ≧ γ ≧ β or α ≧ β ≧ γ. That is, (B-3) advantageous section 3 which is an intermediate expected value to be given is set between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2, or (B-2) advantageous section. By setting an advantageous section 3 whose expected value of grant is smaller than 2 (B-3) and gradually changing the expected value of grant each time the fluctuation condition is satisfied, the expected value of grant can be further subdivided. It may be possible to make adjustments.

(First aspect in another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification))
Subsequently, the first aspect of the game specification on the premise of another example (No. 1) of the game property (game specification) described above will be described. In this first aspect, for example, the expected value α is set to “+3.0 sheets” and the expected value β is set to “+2.0 sheets”. However, as described above, the expected value of grant can be set arbitrarily.

In this first aspect, in the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process shifts to (B-1) advantageous section 1. As for (1) the start condition of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the condition for determining the transition to ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type.

(B-1) After shifting to the advantageous section 1, the expected value of grant is the expected value α (for example, “+3”) for at least a predetermined period (a predetermined arbitrary game period can be set, for example, between 50 games). .0 sheets ") (B-1) Advantageous section 1 continues. Further, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section. As the conditions for determining the continuation of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the conditions for determining the continuation of ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type of.

(B-1) When the game of the above-mentioned predetermined period is performed in the advantageous section 1, if it is decided to continue the advantageous section, (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, and (B-2) ) Move to the advantageous section 2. (B-2) After shifting to the advantageous section 2, at least for a specific period (a predetermined arbitrary game period, for example, between 100 games), the expected value of grant is the expected value β (for example, "+2"). (0.0 sheets) ”) (B-2) Advantageous section 2 continues. In (B-2) advantageous section 2, it is not determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section. (B-2) When the game of the specific period is performed in the advantageous section 2, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and (A) the transition to the non-advantageous section occurs.

On the other hand, when the game of the above-mentioned predetermined period is performed in (B-1) advantageous section 1, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied even if it is not decided to continue the advantageous section, and (3) A) Shift to a non-advantageous section.

In addition, (B-1) when the game of the above-mentioned predetermined period is performed in the advantageous section 1, if it is decided to continue the advantageous section, (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied. In this case, the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is once shifted to the (A) non-advantageous section, and a predetermined waiting period (for example, an arbitrary precursor state between 4 to 32 games) has elapsed in the (A) non-advantageous section. After that, the (A) non-advantageous section may be shifted to (B-2) advantageous section 2 to continue the advantageous section.

Further, in this first aspect, (B-2) advantageous section 2 is assumed to continue for the above-mentioned specific period, but this specific period is not set as a predetermined arbitrary gaming period, for example, (B-1). The period until the expected value of grant becomes the expected value β (for example, “+2.0 sheets”) in the entire (B) advantageous section including the advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 may be set. That is, in the early stage (B-1) of the advantageous section, the expected value of grant is increased by the expected value α, and in the subsequent advantageous section (B-2), the expected value of grant is adjusted (smaller) by the expected value β. You may. In this case, the predetermined waiting period may be included in the entire advantageous section (B) or included in the entire advantageous section in order to adjust the given expected value according to the expected value β. It may not be possible.

Specifically, for example, when the game value as expected value α is given in the (B-1) advantageous section 1, the amount of the game value given in the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is 3 cards × 50 games. It becomes "150 sheets". After that, in (B-2) advantageous section 2, a certain standard (for example, 50 games as in the above predetermined period, longer games, shorter games, or actual game time may be used. In addition, other criteria can be adopted as appropriate), and (B) the notification probability is appropriately adjusted so that the expected value of the entire advantageous section becomes the expected value β. For example, when (B) the entire advantageous section is set to 100 games, the game value of "150 cards" is given in (B-1) advantageous section 1, so that the remaining advantageous section is (B-2) advantageous. In the section 2, the notification probability is adjusted so that the game value of "50 cards" is given between 50 games, and (B) the game value of "200 cards" may be given in the entire advantageous section. ..

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, a state in which the expected value of the game value is relatively high (expected value α is set) for a predetermined period after the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) is started. (B-1) It becomes possible to play a game in the advantageous section 1), and a state in which the expected value of the game value is relatively low (expected value β is set) for a specific period after the advantageous state is continued (expected value β). B-2) It is possible to play the game in the advantageous section 2). Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

In the gaming machine of the first aspect, it may not be decided to continue the advantageous state for a specific period ((B-2) advantageous section 2) after the advantageous state is continued. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately.

Further, in the gaming machine of the first aspect, even when it is decided to continue the advantageous state during the advantageous state, the advantageous state is temporarily terminated and after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, the advantageous state is reached. May be continued (restarted). In this way, not only can the ball output rate be managed more appropriately, but also the interest of the game can be improved with respect to whether or not the advantageous state continues.

(Second aspect in another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification))
Subsequently, a second aspect of the game specification premised on another example (No. 1) of the above-mentioned game property (game specification) will be described. In this second aspect, for example, the expected value α is set to “+7.5 sheets” and the expected value β is set to “+ −0 sheets”. However, as described above, the expected value of grant can be set arbitrarily.

In this second aspect, in the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process shifts to (B-1) the advantageous section 1. As for (1) the start condition of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the condition for determining the transition to ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type.

(B-1) After shifting to the advantageous section 1, the expected value of grant is the expected value α (for example, “+7”) for at least a predetermined period (a predetermined arbitrary game period can be set, for example, between 100 games). .5 sheets ”) (B-1) Advantageous section 1 continues. In addition, this predetermined period may be, for example, a period from the start of (B-1) advantageous section 1 until the given game value reaches (or exceeds) a predetermined amount (for example, 1000 sheets). (B-1) The period from the start of the advantageous section 1 to the time when the game time reaches (or exceeds) a predetermined time (for example, 0.25 hours) may be set.

(B-1) When the game of the above-mentioned predetermined period is performed in the advantageous section 1, (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, and (B-2) the process shifts to the advantageous section 2. (B-2) After shifting to the advantageous section 2, (3) the expected value of grant becomes the expected value β (for example, “+ -0 sheets”) until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (B-2) advantageous. Section 2 continues. In this second aspect, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is set to, for example, (B) the game is played for a specific period (for example, during 1500 games) after the advantageous section is started, or ( B) It can be determined that the game value given after the advantageous section is started has reached a specific amount (for example, a net increase of 3000 sheets) (such end processing of the advantageous section is the limit described above or described later. See processing). Further, even before the end condition determined in this way is satisfied (for example, before the limit processing is executed), the bonus combination is won (the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed and the bonus state is activated. ), Regardless of whether it is (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2, (B) advantageous section ends, and (B) advantageous section to (A) Move to a non-advantageous section. That is, it is one of the end conditions of (3) the advantageous section that the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination that enables the transition to the bonus state is displayed in (B) the advantageous section.

As for (3) the end condition of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the condition determined to end in ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type. Further, in (B-2) advantageous section 2, for example, until the end condition of (3) advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section ((B-2)) is set for each predetermined unit (for example, 50 games in one set). ) When it is decided whether or not to continue the advantageous section 2), and when it is decided to continue the advantageous section, when it is not decided to continue the advantageous section by a predetermined unit and to continue the advantageous section. (3) The advantageous section may be terminated even before the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. In this case, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, conditions for determining to continue ART) can be adopted as the conditions for determining to continue the advantageous section. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type of internal winning combination.

Further, in the second aspect, it is possible to execute the specific notification in the advantageous section (B) by using, for example, the display device 11. This specific notification is a notification effect for suggesting to the player that the bonus role has been won (carried over). However, in this second aspect, since the advantageous section ends when the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed, this specific notification causes (display the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination). Suggests information that allows the player to choose between ending the advantageous section or continuing the advantageous section (by avoiding displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination). It can be said that it is a notification effect for doing so. In addition, it may be a notification effect to suggest that it is possible to shift to the bonus state by simply displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, or the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. It may be a notification effect for suggesting that the advantageous section can be continued if the above is avoided.

For example, in this second aspect, in the (B) advantageous section, when the bonus combination is won (or carried over), the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be displayed. In the case of a game, the specific notification can be configured to be executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination is performed, when the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination are both won (or the bonus combination is won). If the replay combination or the small combination is won in duplicate when it is carried over), in principle, the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is not displayed. That is, "a game in which a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination can be displayed" is not such a situation, and if the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be used. It means that it is a game that can be displayed.

When the specific notification is configured to be executed as described above, the player can play the game period until (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, until the limit processing of the advantageous section is executed). Within the range of, the advantageous section can be continued by avoiding the transition to the bonus state. From this point of view, it is not always necessary to divide the (B) advantageous section into the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 (that is, the expected value of grant is the expected value α). And the expected value β do not need to be different), and (B) the expected value of grant in the advantageous section may be a constant expected value of grant (for example, “+1.5 sheets”).

Further, for example, in this second aspect, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, when the bonus combination is won (or carried over), (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied. Can be configured so that (2) the specific notification is executed when the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied. In this case, similarly to the above, in the game after the specific notification can be executed, when the specific notification is "a game in which a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be displayed", the specific notification is sent. It may be configured to be executed. In addition, if (2) the bonus combination is won in (B-2) advantageous section 2 after the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied and before (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, at this time, It can be configured to execute the specific notification. In this case, similarly to the above, in the game after the specific notification can be executed, when the specific notification is "a game in which a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be displayed", the specific notification is sent. It may be configured to be executed. Further, in the case of winning the bonus combination (or carrying over) in the advantageous section 1 (B-1) after the configuration in this way, "a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. If it is a "game that can be played", the specific notification may be configured to be executed.

When the specific notification is configured to be executed as described above, the player can play the game period until (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, until the limit processing of the advantageous section is executed). Within the range of, for example, in the game period of (B-1) advantageous section 1, the game value is dramatically increased by setting the expected value α, so that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. This is avoided and the advantageous section is continued. (B-2) In the game period of the advantageous section 2, the expected value β is set and the game value does not increase dramatically. It is also possible to display the combination of symbols to end the advantageous section, and in the subsequent game, select (1) to establish the start condition of the advantageous section again and (B-1) to shift to the advantageous section 1. You can do it, or you can choose to end the game as it is if you do not have time to spare. On the other hand, in the game period of (B-2) advantageous section 2, the game value does not increase dramatically by setting the expected value β, but it is more advantageous to the player than (A) the non-advantageous section. Since there is no change in the situation, in order to enjoy the game, it is possible to select to avoid displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination and to continue the advantageous section.

Further, in this second aspect, when the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed and (B) the advantageous section is terminated, it is possible to give a special privilege by using, for example, a display device 11. ing. Among the various benefits given to the player, this special benefit is a benefit that is not related to the addition of the game value (that is, does not affect the ball output rate). It should be noted that the special privilege is a privilege related to the addition of the game value (that is, it affects the ball output rate) (for example, the right to establish the transition condition of the advantageous section, or the information of the stop operation during the bonus state. It does not prevent the right to be notified, etc.), but from the viewpoint of optimizing gambling, it should be a privilege that is not related to the addition of game value (that is, does not affect the ball output rate). Is desirable.

Specific examples of the special privilege include, for example, the execution of a special effect (for example, the various ending effects and other premier effects described above) that are usually unlikely to be executed, and the special notification that informs the player of useful information (for example. For example, execution of suggestion notification of set values, expectation notification for each production content, history notification such as winning probability of bonus role and transition probability of advantageous section), information provided via the Internet using the player's mobile terminal. The points can be given on the provided service and the release of specific conditions can be mentioned.

When configured to have the above special benefits as described above, the player does not enjoy the direct benefits such as the addition of the game value, but the indirect benefits that are of great interest in enjoying the game. Since it can be enjoyed, the advantageous section can be set early, especially in a state where the game value does not increase dramatically due to the setting of the expected value β, as in (B-2) Advantageous section 2. It can also be given an incentive to terminate.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section), when a predetermined end condition ((3) end condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied, or a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It ends when it shifts to the special game state (bonus state) before. Then, in the advantageous state, when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is executed. Therefore, the player can continue the advantageous state by avoiding the transition to the special gaming state as long as it is within the specified predetermined end condition. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

Further, in the gaming machine of the second aspect, the predetermined termination condition is when a certain privilege is given (or is assumed to be given) to the player (for example, the limit processing described above or described later). May be terminated (by). In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the game is played from the start of the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) to the establishment of a specific fluctuation condition ((2) expected value fluctuation condition). It is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of value is relatively high (expected value α is set (B-1) advantageous section 1), and the advantageous state ends after a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Until this is done, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low (expected value β is set (B-2) advantageous section 2). Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the game is played from the start of the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) to the establishment of a specific fluctuation condition ((2) expected value fluctuation condition). It is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of value is relatively high (expected value α is set (B-1) advantageous section 1), and the advantageous state ends after a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Until this is done, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low (expected value β is set (B-2) advantageous section 2). Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Further, when the advantageous state ends with the transition to the special game state, it is possible to give special benefits not related to the addition of the game value. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. In addition, when the player shifts to the special gaming state and ends the advantageous state, a special privilege that is not granted when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is terminated is given, so that the player is in an advantageous state. Can also be given an incentive to terminate early. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

In the gaming machine of the second aspect, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and when it is possible to shift to the special gaming state, it indicates that fact. The specific notification may be executed. In this way, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to further maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine of the second aspect, the expected value of the game value given in the advantageous state is adjusted by the probability (notification probability) that the information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified during the advantageous state. You may. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (Part 2)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 94, another example (No. 2) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 2) of the game playability (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 94, in this example, there are a general gaming state (CZ state), (A) BB1 state, (B) BB2 state, and (C) BB3 state. The general gaming state (CZ state) is a gaming state in which the probability of winning the replay role is low and the transition to the advantageous section does not occur. In that it is possible to shift to the (B) BB2 state or the (C) BB3 state, it is positioned as a gaming state (chance zone. Special prize consecutive villa state) that is more advantageous than the (A) BB1 state. Further, the general gaming state (CZ state), the (B) BB2 state, and the (C) BB3 state are positioned as a series of increasing sections described later. In the general gaming state (CZ), as in the case of the (A) BB1 state, an advantageous section can be configured to occur for a specific period when a specific notification condition is satisfied.

In the general game state (CZ state), when BB1 (for example, BB1 and BB2 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (1) BB1 start condition is satisfied. Then, the game shifts from the general gaming state (CZ state) to the (A) BB1 state. As will be described later, this is positioned as a transition of the gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player. Further, in the general game state (CZ state), when BB2 (for example, BB3 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (3) BB2 start condition is satisfied. Then, the state shifts from the general gaming state (CZ state) to the (B) BB2 state. Further, in the general game state (CZ state), when BB3 (for example, BB4 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB3 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (5) BB3 start condition is satisfied. Then, the state shifts from the general gaming state (CZ state) to the (C) BB2 state. As will be described later, these are positioned as transitions of gaming states that are relatively advantageous to the player.

Here, in the general game state (CZ state), once the BB1 is won, the BB1 is carried over until the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (display of the combination of symbols related to BB1 is permitted). Since the BB1 permission state is continued), BB2 and BB3 are not won in the general game state (CZ state). Further, once the BB2 or BB3 is won in the general gaming state (CZ state), the BB2 or BB3 is carried over until the combination of symbols related to the BB2 or BB3 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (related to the BB2 or BB3). Since the BB2 permitted state or the BB3 permitted state in which the display of the combination of symbols is permitted continues), the BB1 is not won in the general game state (CZ state). That is, in the general gaming state (CZ state), if any of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won, the bonus state corresponding to the winning bonus combination ends and the general gaming state (CZ state) is not entered again. As long as it is configured not to win other bonus roles.

In this example, the combination of symbols related to BB2 is configured as a combination of symbols such as "red 7-red 7-red 7", and the combination of symbols related to BB3 is, for example, "blue 7-blue 7-blue". It is configured as a combination of symbols such as "7". Further, the combination of symbols related to BB1 is configured as a combination of symbols such as "red 7-red 7-cherry 1" and "blue 7-blue 7-cherry 1" (see FIG. 15). In this example, in the case of winning any of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) in the general gaming state (CZ state) after the configuration in this way, the winning notification suggesting that the bonus combination has been won is performed. You may be asked. Specifically, a display such as "Aim for 7!" May be displayed to indicate to the player that the "Red 7" symbol or the "Blue 7" symbol should be aimed. In this case, for example, when the player aims at the "Red 7" symbol and hits the BB2, the "Red 7" is aligned and the state shifts to the BB2 state, and the BB3 is won. In this case, "Red 7" is not aligned, and the combination of symbols related to BB1 is not displayed, and it is recognized that the winner is BB3. If the winner is BB1, the combination of symbols related to BB1 is recognized. Is displayed and the state shifts to the BB1 state. In this way, in the playability of this example, it is possible to further improve the interest in notification. Further, the above-mentioned winning notification may be performed unconditionally when any of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won in the general game state (CZ state), for example, the general game. When it is possible to generate an advantageous section in the state (CZ state), it may be performed only during the advantageous section.

The (A) BB1 state is composed of (A-1) BB1 in general, (A-2) BB1RB flags, and (A-3) BB1RB. In the (A) BB1 state, BB1 to BB3 are not newly drawn, and therefore, as long as the (A) BB1 state continues, the general gaming state (CZ state), (B) BB2 state, and (C) There is no transition to the BB3 state.

(A-1) In BB1 in general, the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is set to "0" (that is, the replay) is not drawn. To)) Set. In addition, the push order small winning combination (for example, 9 medals are paid out with 6 correct push order answers, 1 medal is paid out if the push order is incorrect but the stop operation timing is appropriate, and the stop operation timing is also with the push order incorrect answer (If it is inappropriate, no medal is paid out, etc.), RB for operating the RB state where the winning probability of any small winning combination is improved compared to the non-operating state, and (A) Whether or not the BB1 state is an advantageous section The advantageous section lottery winning combination for which the determination is made is set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability.

(A-2) Among the BB1RB flags, the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is "0" (that is, the replay) is not drawn. As)) set. In addition, the push order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery winning combination are set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. The basic configuration of the push order small combination (1/6 is the correct push order answer and 5/6 is the incorrect push order answer) is the same as in (A-1) BB1 general. In addition, since the RB has been carried over, it will not be newly drawn, but the winning state (permitted state) continues. Further, the winning probability of the replay combination may be the same or different between (A-1) BB1 general and (A-2) BB1RB flag.

(A-3) In BB1RB, the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is set to "0" (that is, the replay) is not drawn. )) Set. In addition, the push order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery winning combination are set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. The basic configuration of the push order small combination (1/6 is the correct push order answer and 5/6 is the incorrect push order answer) is the same as in (A-1) BB1 general. Further, in (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, the winning probabilities of the push order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery winning combination are the same. It may be present or it may be different. Alternatively, in (A-3) BB1RB, the push order small combination and the advantageous section lottery combination, which play the same roles, are won as internal winning combinations different from the push order small combination and the advantageous section lottery combination. You may do so. Further, the winning probability of the replay combination may be the same between (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, respectively. It may be different.

In the general gaming state (CZ state), when (1) BB1 start condition is satisfied, the process first shifts to (A-1) BB1 general. (A-1) In BB1 general, when the above RB is determined as an internal winning combination, it shifts between (A-2) BB1RB flags, and during (A-2) BB1RB flags, a symbol related to RB is used. Continues until the combination of is stopped and displayed on the valid line (the permission state in which the display of the combination of symbols related to RB is permitted continues). When the combination of symbols related to RB is stopped and displayed on the effective line between the (A-2) BB1RB flags, the process shifts to (A-3) BB1RB. (A-3) In BB1RB, the end condition of the RB state (for example, 8 or less arbitrary predetermined number of winnings, or 12 or less arbitrary predetermined number of games played) is satisfied. When it is established, it shifts to (A-1) BB1 general. It should be noted that, during the (A-2) BB1RB flag, the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination (RB) is performed, so that the combination of symbols related to the RB is on the effective line. It may be difficult to display the stop (or not to display the stop), and as a result, it may be difficult (or not) to move into (A-3) BB1RB.

In any of the states of (A-1) BB1 in general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, the number of medals to be paid out in the (A) BB1 state became the specified number. In the case (for example, when the number of cards exceeds 285), (2) the end condition of BB1 is satisfied, and (A) the state shifts from the BB1 state to the general gaming state (CZ state).

In any of the states of (A-1) BB1 in general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, if the winning combination is won in the advantageous section lottery, it is a non-advantageous section. Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined, and if it is an advantageous section, whether or not to extend the advantageous section is determined. In this case, for example, an advantageous section of 30 games is granted or extended by one winning. It should be noted that the opportunity for determining the granting or extension of the advantageous section and the period thereof are not limited to those described above. For example, depending on not only the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning the advantageous section lottery, but also the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning another internal winning combination, the result of the winning / failing lottery not based on the internal winning combination, etc. It may be possible to decide whether to grant or extend an advantageous section. Further, when the grant or extension of the advantageous section is decided, the duration of the advantageous section may be separately determined by lottery or the like. Further, (A) at an arbitrary timing before the BB1 state is started (for example, when the BB1 is won, or when the general game state (CZ state) after the BB1 is won and the advantageous section lottery is won). It may be possible to determine whether or not the entire period (or a part of the period) of the BB1 state is regarded as an advantageous section.

In any of the states of (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, if it is an advantageous section, for example, in the above-mentioned push order small combination. In the winning game, the information of the stop operation (which is the correct answer in the push order) is notified, and as a result of the stop operation being performed according to the notification, the advantageous section becomes an increase period in which the game value increases (or at least does not decrease). .. On the other hand, in the case of a non-advantageous section, for example, in the game winning the push order small winning combination, the information of the stop operation (which is the correct answer in the push order) is not notified, and as a result, the game value of the non-advantageous section decreases. It will be a period.

As described above, in this example, the (A) BB1 state does not end until the number of medals paid out in the BB1 state exceeds "285". Therefore, for example, the case where a replay combination or other small combination is won is not considered, and the case where one piece is paid out in the push order small combination is not considered, and the total winning probability of the push order small combination is not considered. When is set to about 1/2 (32768/65536), the number of payouts of 9 sheets required to end the (A) BB1 state is "32 times" (32 times x 9 sheets = 288 sheets), and the above push If the forward and small winning combination wins according to the probability, the shortest number of games that can end the (A) BB1 state is "64 times" (32 times ÷ 1/2). Therefore, when all of the (A) BB1 states are advantageous sections, if the game is played "64 times", the game value increases during the game period, and the (A) BB1 state is generally terminated at an early stage. It is possible to shift to the gaming state (CZ state). On the other hand, if (A) all of the BB1 states are non-advantageous sections, the probability that 9 cards will be paid out in the game in which the above-mentioned push order small winning combination is won is basically reduced to 1/6, so (A) The standard number of games that can end the BB1 state is "384 times" (64 times ÷ 1/6), and the game value also decreases during the game period.

The (B) BB2 state is composed of (B-1) BB2 in general, (B-2) BB2RB flags, and (B-3) BB2RB. In the (B) BB2 state, BB1 to BB3 are not newly drawn, and therefore, as long as the (B) BB2 state continues, the general gaming state (CZ state), (A) BB1 state, and (C) There is no transition to the BB3 state.

(B-1) In BB2 in general, the winning probability of the replay role is low (or the winning probability of the replay role is relatively high, but (B-2) BB2RB flag (Lower than) set. In addition, the push order small winning combination (for example, 9 medals are paid out when the push order is correct with 6 choices, 1 medal is paid out when the push order is incorrect but the stop operation timing is appropriate, and the stop operation timing is also when the push order is incorrect. If it is inappropriate, no medal is paid out, etc.), RB for activating the RB state in which the winning probability of any small winning combination is improved compared to the non-operating state, and (B) General game state (CZ state) after the end of the BB2 state. ), When the state shifts to the (A) BB1 state, the advantageous section lottery, etc., which determines whether or not the (A) BB1 state is set as the advantageous section, wins each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. Is set to.

(B-2) Among the BB2RB flags, the winning probability of the replay combination is set high. In addition, the push order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery winning combination are set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is different from (B-1) BB2 general, so that 9 cards will be paid out regardless of which push order the stop operation is performed (that is, incorrect answer). The control is changed (so that there is no push order). In addition, since the RB has been carried over, it will not be newly drawn, but the winning state (permitted state) continues.

(B-3) In BB2RB, the replay is set so as not to be drawn. Further, the push order small winning combination is set to win with a high probability, and the advantageous section lottery winning combination or the like is set to win with an arbitrary predetermined probability. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is different from (B-1) BB2 general, so that 9 cards will be paid out regardless of which push order the stop operation is performed (that is, incorrect answer). The control is changed (so that there is no push order). Alternatively, in (B-3) BB2RB, the RB small and medium-sized combination and the advantageous section lottery combination, which play the same roles, win the internal winning combination different from the pushing order small combination and the advantageous section lottery combination. It may be.

However, in the (B) BB2 state, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is set in (B-3) BB2RB so that the space between the (B-2) BB2RB flags is most advantageous, and (B-1) BB2. The same configuration as in general (1/6 is correct answer in push order) and 5/6 may be incorrect answer in push order). That is, in the (B) BB2 state, on the premise that the information of the stop operation is not notified, (B-1) BB2 in general and (B-3) BB2RB are set as relatively disadvantageous periods (decrease periods). (B-2) The period between the BB2RB flags may be configured as an advantageous period (increase period). In this way, in (B-1) BB2 in general, the RB is won at an early stage to shift between the (B-2) BB2RB flags, and then stopped so as not to shift to the (B-3) BB2RB. If the operation is performed (or by performing such stop control), the player can play the game in the most advantageous state, so that the playability in the state advantageous to the player can be further diversified. It is possible to improve the interest of the game without making it monotonous. In addition, by not increasing the gaming state, which is an increase period more than necessary, it is possible to simplify the ball ejection design and make the gambling property appropriate.

Further, as described above, in the (B) BB2 state, when the configuration is such that the space between the (B-2) BB2RB flags is the most advantageous, the game in which the RB wins, and the combination of the symbols related to the RB thereafter. In the game in which RB can be displayed, it may be notified that the RB has won or that the combination of symbols related to the RB can be displayed. With this notification, the player can perform a stop operation so as not to display the combination of symbols related to RB. In addition, the notification may simply indicate or suggest that the combination of symbols related to RB should not be displayed.

In this way, it is specified in a special gaming state in which a special combination (for example, BB, which is a continuous operation device for a first-class special accessory) is won and is operated by displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination. Corresponds to the first gaming state, which is a non-winning state of a combination (for example, RB, which is a first-class special bonus), the second gaming state, which is the winning state (carry-over state) of the specific combination, and the specific combination. It has a third gaming state (specific gaming state) that is activated by displaying a combination of symbols, and in the second gaming state, the stop control of a predetermined combination (for example, a push order small combination) is advantageous for the player. The specifications in which the control is changed and the second game state can be maintained by the player's stop operation or internal control are, of course, other game features (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example. It can also be applied to the bonus state (or other increase period (increase section)) described in the example. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the specifications of such a bonus state will be referred to as a "special bonus state".

In the general game state (CZ state), when the (3) BB2 start condition is satisfied, the process first shifts to (B-1) BB2 general. (B-1) In BB2 in general, when the above RB is determined as an internal winning combination, it shifts between (B-2) BB2RB flags, and during (B-2) BB2RB flags, a symbol related to RB is used. Continues until the combination of is stopped and displayed on the valid line (the permission state in which the display of the combination of symbols related to RB is permitted continues). (B-2) When the combination of symbols related to RB is stopped and displayed on the effective line between the BB2RB flags, the process shifts to (B-3) BB2RB. (B-3) In BB2RB, the end condition of the RB state (for example, 8 or less arbitrary predetermined number of winnings, or 12 or less arbitrary predetermined number of games played) is satisfied. When it is established, it shifts to (B-1) BB2 in general. It should be noted that, during the (B-2) BB2RB flag, the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination (RB) is performed, so that the combination of symbols related to the RB is on the effective line. It may be difficult to display the stop (or not to display the stop), and as a result, it may be difficult (or not) to move into (B-3) BB2RB.

In any of the states of (B-1) BB2 in general, (B-2) BB2RB flag, and (B-3) BB2RB, the number of medals to be paid out in the (B) BB2 state became the specified number. In the case (for example, when the number of cards exceeds 150), (4) the end condition of BB2 is satisfied, and (B) the state shifts from the BB2 state to the general gaming state (CZ state).

In this example, the winning RB in (A-1) BB1 general and the winning RB in (B-1) BB2 general are not described separately, but for example, (A-1). ) In BB1 general, the winning RB is set to "RB1" (the corresponding combination of symbols is "combination of symbols related to RB1", the corresponding RB state (A-3) is "RB1 state"), and (B-1). In BB2 in general, the winning RB is set to "RB2" (the corresponding combination of symbols is "combination of symbols related to RB2", the corresponding RB state (B-3) is "RB2 state"), and different RB combinations can be won. By configuring the above, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is the same as that of (A-1) BB1 general in the middle of the (A-2) BB1RB flag (“RB1 permission state”). (B-2) In the middle of the BB2RB flags (“RB2 permission state”), the basic configuration of the push order small combination may be configured to be different from that of (B-1) BB2 general.

During (B-2) BB2RB flags and (B-3) BB2RB, 9 cards are paid out regardless of which push order is used in the game winning the push order small winning combination. As a result of the above, the period is an increase period in which the game value increases (or at least does not decrease). On the other hand, in (B-1) BB2 in general, if the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the correct answer in the game that wins the push order small winning combination, 9 cards are paid out, but the push that is not the correct answer is made. If the stop operations are performed in order, nine cards will not be paid out, and as a result, the period will be a reduction period in which the game value will decrease. However, since the transition is made from (B-1) BB2 in general to (B-2) between the BB2RB flags with the winning of RB, (B) when looking at the entire BB2 state, the period is an increase period in which the game value increases. It is positioned as.

It should be noted that (B) the method of setting the entire BB2 state as a period (increase period) advantageous to the player is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, it is assumed that the RB state is always controlled from (3) the BB2 start condition is satisfied to (4) the BB2 end condition is satisfied, and in the RB state, the stop operation is performed in any pressing order. Even so, the RB small and medium-sized winning combination in which 9 (or more than 15) payouts occur may be configured to win with an extremely high probability. Alternatively, without changing the control of the basic configuration of the push order small combination, the push order is always controlled in an advantageous section from (3) the BB2 start condition is satisfied to (4) the BB2 end condition is satisfied. When a small winning combination is won, the increase period may be set by notifying the push order of the correct answer at least with a predetermined probability that the expected value of grant is positive.

In any of the states of (B-1) BB2 in general, (B-2) BB2RB flag, and (B-3) BB2RB, if the winning combination of the advantageous section lottery is won, (4) BB2 end condition. The right to win BB1 in the general gaming state (CZ state) in which is established and transferred, and (1) the right to set the BB1 state in which the BB1 start condition is established and transferred (A) the BB1 state as an advantageous section (for example, the number of sets, stock, etc.) ) Is given or not. In this case, with one win, for example, the right to set an advantageous section between 30 games is granted. The timing and period for which the grant of the right is decided are not limited to those described above. For example, depending on not only the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning the advantageous section lottery, but also the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning another internal winning combination, the result of the winning / failing lottery not based on the internal winning combination, etc. The grant of the right may be decided. Further, when the grant of the right is decided, the duration of the advantageous section may be separately decided by lottery or the like. Further, at an arbitrary timing (for example, when BB2 wins or when BB2 ends) between (3) when the BB2 start condition is satisfied and (4) when the BB2 end condition is satisfied, the BB1 state It may be possible to decide whether or not to grant the right to make the entire period (or a part of the period) advantageous.

The (C) BB3 state is composed of (C-1) BB3 in general, (C-2) BB3RB flags, and (C-3) BB3RB. If BB2 is replaced with BB3, the start conditions of (C-1) BB3 in general, (C-2) BB3RB flags, (C-3) BB3RB, and (5) BB3 can be changed to (B-). 1) BB2 in general, (B-2) between BB2RB flags, (B-3) in BB2RB, and (3) BB2 start conditions are the same, so the description here will be omitted. Further, (6) the end condition of BB2 is satisfied when (C) the number of medals to be paid out in the BB3 state reaches a specified number (for example, when it exceeds 60 medals).

Based on this premise, the flow of the game in this example will be described. In this example, since the (A) BB1 state, which is a non-advantageous section, is positioned as during a normal game that is not advantageous to the player, the player usually starts the game from the (A) BB1 state, which is a non-advantageous section. ..

In the (A) BB1 state, there is no transition to another gaming state until the end condition of (2) BB1 is satisfied. Here, if (A) the BB1 state is an advantageous section, the section functions as an increase period, so that not only the game value can be increased, but also the chances of receiving a payout increase, so that the section can be used earlier (A) 2) It is possible to satisfy the end condition of BB1 (that is, the game period until the transition to the general game state (CZ state) can be shortened). On the other hand, (A) if the BB1 state is a non-advantageous section, the section functions as a decrease period, so that the game value decreases, and the opportunity to receive the payout does not increase, so that (2) It is not possible to satisfy the end condition of BB1 (that is, the game period until the transition to the general game state (CZ state) cannot be shortened).

In the (A) BB1 state, when the end condition of (2) BB1 is satisfied, the state shifts to the general game state (CZ state). In the general gaming state (CZ state), if BB2 or BB3 can be won before winning BB1, the general gaming state (CZ state) → (B) BB2 state (or (C) BB3 state) → general gaming state It is configured as a state (a series of increasing sections) in which a bonus state advantageous to the player can be repeatedly operated, such as (CZ state) → (B) BB2 state (or (C) BB3 state) ... However, if the BB1 is won before the BB2 or BB3 is won, it becomes impossible to repeatedly operate the bonus state that is advantageous to the player, and the series of increase sections ends. In order to shift to a series of increasing sections again, it is necessary to end the (A) BB1 state, which is a decreasing period unless it becomes an advantageous section.

That is, in the (A) BB1 state, the player desires to shift to the advantageous section or continue the advantageous section, and if the player actually shifts to the advantageous section or continues the advantageous section, the game value is increased. It is possible to shorten the game period until the state shifts to the general game state (CZ state). Further, in the general gaming state (CZ state), if it is desired to win BB2 or BB3 before winning BB1, and if it is possible to actually win BB2 or BB3, (B) BB2 state or (C) ) The game value can be increased in the BB3 state. The same applies when these gaming states are completed and the game returns to the general gaming state (CZ state). In the case of the (B) BB2 state or the (C) BB3 state, it is desired that the right to make the (A) BB1 state an advantageous section is granted. In this example, for example, in the total probability of winning the bonus combination (BB1 to BB3), the winning probability of BB1 is about 50%, the winning probability of BB2 is about 25%, and the winning probability of BB3 is about 25%. Therefore, BB2 or BB3 does not always continue to win in the general gaming state (CZ state). However, if (A) the right to make the BB1 state an advantageous section is granted in advance, even if the BB1 is won before winning the BB2 or BB3, if the (A) BB1 state is in the increasing period, The game value is increased, and the game can be returned to the general game state (CZ state) at an early stage. In this example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by such playability.

According to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal gaming state (general gaming state (CZ state)), when the second special combination (BB2 or BB3) is won before the first special combination (BB1) is won, the first 2 The special gaming state ((B) BB2 state or (C) BB3 state) is shifted, and the second special gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if the first special role is won before the second special role is won, the state shifts to the first special game state ((A) BB1 state), and the stop operation is performed in the first special game state. When the operation information regarding the above is not notified (in the case of a non-advantageous section), the first special gaming state functions as a reduction period in which the gaming value decreases.

Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the player can continue the advantageous gaming period by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state without shifting to the first special gaming state, but the first special When the game state is changed, the player cannot continue the advantageous game period unless the first special game state is terminated and the normal game state is changed.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, when a specific notification condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section, or when it is determined that the right to be an advantageous section is granted. In the first special game state, the operation information regarding the stop operation in which a predetermined number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given when a predetermined combination (pushing order small combination) is won is notified. Become. Since the first special game state ends when a specified number (for example, more than 285 pieces) of game value is given, such information is notified to end the first special game state. You can advance the time. That is, depending on whether or not the operation information related to the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state, the period until the normal gaming state in which the transition to the second special gaming state can be achieved can be changed. Therefore, by making the period until the transition to the advantageous state variable, the playability can be made rich in variety.

In the gaming machine of this example, the period in which the operation information related to the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state may also function as an increase period. In this way, the interest of the game can be maintained even during the period until the state of transition to the advantageous state is reached.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, in the first special gaming state, it is possible to further shift to the first specific permission state (during the (A-2) BB1RB flag), and in the second special game state, the second specific permission is further permitted. It is possible to shift to the state (between (B-2) BB2RB flags or (C-2) between BB3RB flags), and in the first special game state, the stop operation is performed regardless of whether or not it is the first specific permission state. In the second special gaming state, the period in which the operation information related to the game is not notified may be made to function as the decrease period, and the period in which the second specific permission state is not notified may be made to function as the increase period. In this way, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (Part 3)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 95, another example (No. 3) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 3) of the game playability (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 95, in this example, there are a gaming state of (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state. The (A) RT0 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is lower than that of the (C) RT1 state, and it is possible to shift to either the (B) BB state or the (C) RT1 state. (A) In the RT0 state, when it is not controlled in the advantageous section, (A-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and when it is controlled in the advantageous section. Is an increasing period in which (A-2) becomes an advantageous section and the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the BB (bonus combination) is won, the BB is controlled between the BB flags (BB permission state) in which the BB is carried over until the combination of symbols related to the BB is stopped and displayed on the valid line. Between the BB flags, even if the bell spill, which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the state does not shift to the (C) RT1 state. In this example, the BB is duplicated with one of the small winning combinations (for example, a so-called rare winning combination with a relatively low winning probability, which may be a replay winning combination) so as not to win alone. In addition, in the present embodiment, the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination is performed, so that the combination of the symbols related to the BB is displayed in the game that wins the BB. BB will be carried over to the next game or later. Then, the combination of symbols related to BB is a stop operation in a game in which the internal lottery result is "missing" between the BB flags (that is, a game in which no other replay combination or small combination is won). It is possible to display (win a prize) when the timing is appropriate. In this example, (A) the probability of "loss" in the RT0 state is defined as about "1/12". However, as long as "loss" can occur, this "loss" probability can be any value. In addition, there may be a case where the BB wins alone, and in this case, it is assumed that the combination of the symbols related to the BB can be displayed in the game in which the BB wins.

(A) In the game where the BB flags are between in the RT0 state and the internal lottery result is "missing", when the combination of the symbols related to BB is displayed, (1) the BB start condition is satisfied, and (A) It shifts from the RT0 state to the (B) BB state. The (B) BB state is a gaming state that does not shift to the (C) RT1 state, and is a gaming state that is an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In addition, (B) the method of setting the BB state as the increase period is various methods described in this embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example, such as the above-mentioned "special bonus state". Can be adopted. (B) In the BB state, when a specified number of game values (for example, more than 140 cards) are given, the game value is given an upper limit, (2) the BB end condition is satisfied, and (B) from the BB state to (A). ) Shift to RT0 state.

(A) In the RT0 state, if (3) the bell spill is stopped and displayed on the valid line before the BB flag is reached (that is, between the BB non-flags), the (C) RT1 state is set. Transition. The bell spill is, for example, a combination of the same symbols as the "R_RT1 transition" in the present embodiment, and in the game in which the push order small winning combination is won, the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate. It is a combination of symbols displayed in the case. Therefore, if the (A) RT0 state is the (A-2) advantageous section, the correct push order is notified, and therefore, it is not displayed as long as the stop operation is performed according to the notification. A-1) In the normal case (non-advantageous section), the correct push order is not notified, so the possibility of being displayed is high. In this example, for example, if the winning probability of BB is about 1/20 (3276/65536), the total winning probability of the push order small winning combination is about 1/3 (21845/65536), which is higher than that. It should be designed to. As for the push order small combination, various specifications described in this embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted. For example, in the push order (for example, 6 choices). If the answer is correct, 9 cards will be paid out and the bell spilled eyes will not be displayed. If the answer is not correct in the pressing order, 1 sheet will be paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, and the bell spilled eyes will not be displayed and the stop operation will be performed. If the timing is not appropriate, 0 cards will be paid out, and a specification in which bell spills are displayed can be adopted.

The (C) RT1 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that of the (A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state does not occur. Even in the (C) RT1 state, as in the (A) RT0 state, if it is not controlled in the advantageous section, it becomes (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases. If it is controlled to an advantageous section, (C-2) it becomes an advantageous section and the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

Even in the (C) RT1 state, when the BB (bonus combination) is won, the control is performed between the BB flags (BB permission state) as in the (A) RT0 state. However, in the (C) RT1 state, the winning probability of the replay role is increased by the amount of the "loss" probability "1/12" in the (A) RT0 state, and the "loss" probability is "0". (That is, so that "loss" does not occur). Therefore, even if it is between the BB flags, there is no case where the combination of symbols related to BB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state. However, even if the "loss" occurs with an extremely low probability (for example, 1/8192) and the combination of symbols related to the BB can be displayed in the game in which the "loss" occurs between the BB flags. It is good (that is, the (C) RT1 state may be configured as a state in which it is more difficult to display the combination of symbols related to the BB than the (A) RT0 state).

If "loss" can be generated even in the (C) RT1 state, and if the combination of symbols related to BB cannot be displayed in the unit game in which the "loss" occurs, the state is changed to (B) BB. Since the transition cannot be made and the (C) RT1 state continues after the next game, if the stop operation is performed in a manner in which the combination of symbols related to BB cannot be displayed in the unit game in which the "loss" occurs, the game is played. The loss of the person becomes extremely large. Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a loss, in the unit game in which "loss" occurs in the (C) RT1 state, the combination of symbols related to BB is used between the start operation and the effective stop operation. An effect that suggests that the display is allowed, an effect that notifies that the combination of symbols related to BB should be aimed, a freeze effect that delays the start of rotation of each reel after the start operation, and the time required for the stop operation to be effective. It is desirable to make it possible to execute one or more effects such as a stop operation invalidation effect that takes a longer time than usual so that the player can easily display the combination of symbols related to the BB.

When (4) a specified number of games (for example, 500 games) are digested in the (C) RT1 state, the state shifts from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state. That is, when the (C) RT1 state ends and the BB flags are between, the combination of symbols related to BB can be displayed when "loss" occurs. Even when the state shifts from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state, there is a possibility that the state may fall to the (C) RT1 state again when the BB non-flag is not set. Therefore, in such a case, (A) the advantageous section is continued until the BB flag is reached in the RT0 state (that is, until the BB is won), and the player is relieved. You may do so.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is set, and when the normal game state ((A) RT0 state), the combination of special symbols (BB) (Combination of symbols related to) can be displayed to shift to the special gaming state ((B) BB state), while the specific gaming state ends in the specific gaming state ((C) RT1 state). Until then, it is not possible to display the combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. In addition, in the specific game state, when a specific combination (small combination of push order) is won in a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a specific symbol is not performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the correct answer is in the push order). Transition based on the combination of (bell spills) displayed. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the normal gaming state and the specific period (advantageous section) in the specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. If this is done, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state is performed without shifting to the specific gaming state. Not only is it possible to repeat (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value given when a specific role is won is increased. In addition, when the operation information related to a specific mode is notified in the specific game state, it is not possible to shift to the special game state until the specific game state is completed, but when the specific combination is won. The game value given to is increased. In addition, even if the operation information regarding a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during a specific period, the transition to the special gaming state may be repeated without shifting to the specific gaming state. ..

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, whether it is in a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state, whether it is a specific period in which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or whether it is specified in the specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information regarding the above-described aspect is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine of this example, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. By doing so, since the game value may increase even in the specific game state, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even in the specific game state in which the special game state does not occur.

(Modified example of this example)
In this example, it has a gaming state of (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state, and in (A) RT0 state, BB as a special role is a push order small combination as a specific role. If it wins earlier than that, it shifts to the (B) BB state without shifting to the (C) RT1 state, and by making it possible to repeat such a transition, a series of increase sections is created. It was possible to do. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, when the push order small combination as a specific combination is won before the BB as a special combination, if the player's stop operation is appropriate, the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state. However, if the player's stop operation is not appropriate, (C) the state shifts to the RT1 state, and a series of increasing sections is terminated. Then, in the (C) RT1 state, the transition to the (A) RT0 state is assumed unless a certain transition condition (in this example, digestion of a specified number of games) is satisfied. However, the method of starting, continuing, and ending such a series of increasing sections is considered to have room for further deformation, and will be described below.

In the modified example, it is the same as this example in that it has a gaming state of (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state, but it relates to MB (type 2 special character) as a specific combination. When the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the effective line by using the accessory continuous operation device), the state shifts to (D) MB state. The winning probability of BB is set to about 1/10 (6553/65536), and the winning probability of MB is also set to about the same. MB is a bonus role, and once it is won, it shall be carried over until the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed (between MB flags, MB permitted state). The MB always wins in duplicate with any special small role group among a plurality of special small role groups (for example, special small role groups 1 to 3), and does not win alone.

(A) In the RT0 state, when MB + special small winning combination group 1 wins more than once, the stop operation is a predetermined correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is in the second range below and the third third below. If it is performed in a mode that is a first range different from the range, or a mode in which a stop operation is performed at the left first stop, etc.), the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line, and ( D) Shift to the MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predefined correct mode, the combination of symbols related to MB is not displayed as a stop on the valid line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small winning combination (specific). (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB + special small winning combination group 2 wins in duplicate, the stop operation is a predetermined correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is in the above first range and the following third range. If it is performed in a mode that is a second range different from the range, or a mode in which the stop operation is performed at the middle first stop, etc.), the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line, and ( D) Shift to the MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predefined correct mode, the combination of symbols related to MB is not displayed as a stop on the valid line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small winning combination (specific). (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB + special small winning combination group 3 wins in duplicate, the stop operation is a predetermined correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is in the first range and the second. If it is performed in a mode that is a third range different from the range, or in a mode in which the stop operation is performed at the first right stop, the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line, and ( D) Shift to the MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predefined correct mode, the combination of symbols related to MB is not displayed as a stop on the valid line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small winning combination (specific). (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags.

In this modified example, when a plurality of MBs (for example, MB1, MB2, and MB3) are used as specific combinations and the combination of symbols related to any of the MBs is stopped and displayed on the valid line (D). It may be the one that shifts to the MB state. In this case, the total winning probability of MB may be set to be about the same as the winning probability of BB. In addition, MB1, MB2, and MB3 may always win the prize in duplicate with the special small role group, and may not win by themselves. Then, when the MB1 + special small winning combination wins in duplicate, the same control as in the MB + special small winning combination group 1 is performed, and when the MB2 + special small winning combination group wins in duplicate, the same as in the MB + special small winning combination group 2. Is controlled, and when the MB3 + special small winning combination wins in duplicate, the same control as in the MB + special small winning combination group 3 may be performed.

That is, in the (A) RT0 state, when the MB is won, if the mode of the stop operation is appropriate in the game winning the MB (for example, when the above three choices are answered correctly), the (D) MB state. Move to. (D) The MB state is, for example, a bonus state in which two medals are always paid out with a two-card bet, and when a specified number (more than two) of game value is given, the upper limit of the game value is given. Then, the MB end condition is satisfied, and the state shifts from the (D) MB state to the (A) RT0 state. Here, the (D) MB state itself is not an increase period in which the game value increases (however, it is not a decrease period but a non-increase / decrease period), but after the end, it shifts to the (A) RT0 state, so that (D) MB The transition to the state is positioned as the transition to the series of increase sections described above or the continuation of the series of increase sections.

On the other hand, in the (A) RT0 state, when the MB is won, if the mode of the stop operation is not appropriate in the game winning the MB (for example, when the above three choices are not answered correctly), (C) It shifts to the RT1 state. In this modification, the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags does not end until the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Then, (C) the probability of "loss" in the RT1 state is set to about "1/300". That is, in order to end the (C) RT1 state and shift to the (A) RT0 state, the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed in the game in which the "loss" occurs in the (C) RT1 state (D). ) It is necessary to shift to the MB state and (D) digest the game in the MB state. It should be noted that, when the above-mentioned special small combination group is won in the (C) RT1 state, it may be possible to display the combination of symbols related to MB even when the above-mentioned three choices are answered correctly.

(Flow of the game of the modified example of this example)
In this modification, since the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags is positioned as during a normal game that is not advantageous to the player, the player usually starts the game from the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags. To do.

In the (C) RT1 state, there is no transition to the (A) RT0 state without the transition to the (D) MB state. The player waits for the "loss" to occur before playing the game. If the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the game in which "loss" occurs, the state shifts to (D) MB state, and after the end of (D) MB state, the state shifts to (A) RT0 state.

(A) In the RT0 state, when a bonus combination is won, the probability that the bonus combination is BB is 1/2 (50%), and the probability that the bonus combination is MB is also 1/2 (50%). When the transition from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state and the first winning bonus combination is BB, a series of increase sections is started. After winning the BB, there is no winning in the MB (that is, without shifting to the (C) RT1 state), and when the combination of symbols related to the BB is displayed, (B) shifts to the BB state and (B) ) The game value can be increased in the BB state. The (B) BB state is configured as, for example, the above-mentioned "special bonus state". When (B) the BB state ends, it returns to the (A) RT0 state again, and if the BB can be won before winning the MB again with a probability of 50%, a series of increasing sections will continue. That is, the series of increase sections are game sections that can be looped (with a loop rate of 50%) with a probability of 50%. Note that this loop rate is an example, and can be set to an arbitrary value by appropriately changing the lottery value (winning probability) of the bonus combination.

In the (A) RT0 state, which is a series of increasing sections, if the MB is won before the BB is won, and if the combination of symbols related to the MB can be displayed in the game that is won in the MB, ( D) It is possible to return to the (A) RT0 state again through the transition to the MB state. In this case as well, a series of increasing intervals continues. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols related to the MB cannot be displayed in the game that wins the MB, the state shifts to (C) RT1 state. In this case, a series of increasing intervals ends.

Further, when the transition from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state and the first winning bonus combination is MB, a series of increase sections is not started. However, as described above, if the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the game that wins the MB, it may return to the (A) RT0 state again through the transition to the (D) MB state. it can. In this case, it may be possible to start a series of increasing sections in the returned (A) RT0 state. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols related to the MB cannot be displayed in the game that wins the MB, the state shifts to (C) RT1 state. In this case, it may not be possible to start a series of increasing intervals. In the above explanation, the start of a series of increase sections is when the bonus combination that is first won after shifting from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state is BB, but the (C) RT1 state The transition from (A) RT0 state to (A) RT0 state may be the start of a series of increase sections, or the first winning bonus combination from (C) RT1 state to (A) RT0 state is BB. The time when the combination of the symbols according to (B) shifts to the BB state may be set as the start of a series of increase sections.

(The first aspect of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, the first aspect of the advantageous section specification when the game property (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted will be described. The first aspect is a specification in which an advantageous section is not provided.

As described above, in the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, (A) RT0 state → (B) BB state → (A) RT0 state → (B) BB state ... Since a series of increasing sections can be created by repeating the A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state, even if the player is not notified of the stop operation information, the game has a high degree of fun. It is possible to do. Therefore, as in this first aspect, it is possible not to provide an advantageous section.

Also in this first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be given, and the RB is won in the (B) BB state. When this happens, a notice or suggestion to that effect can be made. On the other hand, when the MB is won in the (A) RT0 state and when the combination of the symbols related to the MB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state, at least the combination of the symbols related to the MB is displayed. It is desirable not to make such announcements or suggestions. Here, "notification or suggestion that a game method in which a combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed" means, for example, directly announcing or suggesting that a combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed. It is not limited to those that do, but include those that announce or suggest that the above-mentioned special small role group has won, or that the combination of symbols related to the winning special small role group has been won. This is because if the probability that the (C) RT1 state is substantially terminated by such a notification or suggestion is increased, the gambling property of the game may become excessively high. However, since the (C) RT1 state is not included in the series of increase sections at least, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state, "the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. An announcement or suggestion that the game method may be inferred may be made.

(Second aspect of advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, a second aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. The second aspect is the specification that the transition to the advantageous section is possible only in the (B) BB state.

As described above, in the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, the game value given can be changed according to the mode of the player's stop operation, such as the push order small combination in the (B) BB state. Since the internal winning combination can be determined, if (B) the player is notified of the stop operation information with the BB state as an advantageous section, the expected value of the game value given during the (B) BB state is determined. It can be maximized, which not only improves the interest of the player, but also contributes to ensuring the fairness of the game and making it easier to manage the payout rate. Therefore, as in this second aspect, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section only during the (B) BB state. In this case, the advantageous section may be started when the (B) BB state is started, and the advantageous section may be ended when the (B) BB state is finished.

In this second aspect as well, as in the first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. On the other hand, when the MB is won in the (A) RT0 state and when the combination of the symbols related to the MB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state, at least the combination of the symbols related to the MB is similar to the first aspect. It is desirable not to make any announcement or suggestion that the game method in which is displayed is presumed.

(Third aspect of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, a third aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. The third aspect is a specification capable of shifting to an advantageous section in the (A) RT0 state and the (C) RT1 state.

This third aspect is basically the same as that described in this example. In the (A) RT0 state, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, (A-1) normal (non-) normal (non). Shift from (advantageous section) to (A-2) advantageous section, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, shift from (A-2) advantageous section to (A-1) normal (non-advantageous section). Further, in the (C) RT1 state, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) is shifted to (C-2) advantageous section, and the advantageous section is changed. When the end condition is satisfied, the transition from (C-2) advantageous section to (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) is performed.

However, in this example, when the (A-2) advantageous section is reached in the (A) RT0 state, the push order that is the correct answer for the push order small winning combination is notified, so that the (C) RT1 is substantially. Information that can avoid the transition to the state is also notified, but in this third aspect, the information that can avoid the transition to the (C) RT1 state is not notified. That is, in the (A-2) advantageous section, when the push order small combination is won, the correct push order is notified, so that (A-1) more than the normal (non-advantageous section). Although the game value is given, when the MB is won, "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed is guessed" is not made, and the player makes the MB by himself / herself. If the combination of symbols can be displayed, (A) the RT0 state is maintained, but if the player cannot display the combination of symbols related to MB by himself / herself, (C). It is designed to shift to the RT1 state.

However, for example, when (A) RT0 state becomes (A-2) advantageous section and 50 games are given as the duration of the advantageous section, 10 games later (that is, the duration of the advantageous section remains 40 games). If the MB is won and the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state, the duration may be 40 games (C-2) to shift to the advantageous section. .. That is, the duration of the given advantageous section may be inherited from the (A) RT0 state to the (C) RT1 state, or from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state (note that in the latter case). The game period in the (D) MB state may or may not be included in the advantageous section).

Further, since the (A) RT0 state is a game period included in the series of increase sections, the (A) RT0 state does not provide the (A-2) advantageous section, and the game is not included in the series of increase sections. It is a period, and the (C-2) advantageous section may be provided only in the (C) RT1 state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. That is, in this third aspect, it is advantageous for the purpose of relieving the player who plays the game during the game period ((C) RT1 state), which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and preventing the deterioration of the interest of the game. A section ((C-2) advantageous section) may be provided.

In this third aspect as well, as in the first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. However, as in this third aspect, when the advantageous section is positioned as a game section that facilitates winning of the internal winning combination (for example, small combination) related to the winning, the BB is set in the (A) RT0 state. When there is a mode of stop operation (push order or timing of stop operation) that facilitates the display of the combination of symbols related to BB when winning, the stop operation is performed based on the advantageous section. Although it is not desirable that the mode is directly notified, such notification may be performed.

In this modification, the second aspect and the third aspect are described as different aspects, but an advantageous section aspect in which the second aspect and the third aspect are combined is adopted. You can also do it. In this case, if the (A) RT0 state that hits the BB is the (A-2) advantageous section, the stop operation information is notified even in the (B) BB state, and (A-1) the normal (non-advantageous section). ), The stop operation information may not be notified even in the (B) BB state. Further, in this case, in the (A-2) BB state shifted from the advantageous section, the duration of the advantageous section is sequentially updated as the game progresses (that is, the duration of the given advantageous section is changed. It may be set to decrease), or the duration of the advantageous section may not be updated (that is, the duration of the granted advantageous section may not decrease).

(Fourth aspect of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, a fourth aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. The fourth aspect is the specification that enables the transition to the advantageous section in the (A) RT0 state.

In this fourth aspect, contrary to the third aspect described above, in the case of (A) RT0 state and (A-2) advantageous section, when the MB is won, "the combination of symbols related to MB is By making a notification or suggestion that the displayed game method can be guessed, (C) information that can avoid the transition to the RT1 state is notified, but when the push order small role is won, the answer is correct. The push order is not notified. Further, in the case of (C) RT1 state and (C-2) advantageous section, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "a game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed. By making such a notification or suggestion, (A) information that enables the transition to the RT0 state is notified, but when the push order small combination is won, the correct push order is not notified. It is a thing.

In this fourth aspect, for example, the advantageous section may be provided with only the (A-2) advantageous section and not the (C-2) advantageous section. That is, the advantageous section is configured to have a function for continuing a series of increasing sections ((A) continuing the RT0 state) and (C) not having a function for ending the RT1 state. You may.

Further, in the fourth aspect, the advantageous section is managed by the number of times (the number of times of navigation) that "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed" is performed. It is preferable to do so. For example, (C) the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed in the RT1 state, (D) shifts to the MB state, (D) the MB state ends, and (A) shifts to the RT0 state. At an arbitrary timing, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the number of navigations to be given is determined. Then, in the shifted (A) RT0 state ((A-2) advantageous section), for the determined number of navigations, "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed". Should be done. However, in the (A) RT0 state, for example, the BB is won, the combination of the symbols related to the BB is displayed, the state shifts to the (B) BB state, the (B) BB state ends, and the (A) RT0 state ends. At any timing of the transition, it is decided whether or not to shift (extend) to the advantageous section, and if it is decided to shift (extend) to the advantageous section, the number of navigations to be given is determined. You may. Although the management based on the number of navigations has been described as preferable, it does not prevent the adoption of other management methods (for example, management based on the number of games).

In this fourth aspect as well, as in the first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. However, as in this fourth aspect, when the advantageous section is positioned as a game section that facilitates the continuation of a series of increasing sections, (A) when the BB is won in the RT0 state, the BB is involved. When there is a mode of stop operation (pushing order or timing of stop operation) that facilitates the display of a combination of symbols, the mode of the stop operation is directly notified based on the advantageous section. Although it is not desirable, such notification may be performed.

In this modification, the third aspect and the fourth aspect are described as different aspects, but an advantageous section aspect in which the third aspect and the fourth aspect are combined is adopted. You can also do it. In this case, in the case of (A-2) advantageous section, when the push order small winning combination is won, the correct push order is notified, so that (A-1) more than normal (non-advantageous section). When the game value is given and the MB is won, the transition to the (C) RT1 state is avoided by making a "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed is guessed". It suffices to be notified of possible information. In addition, in the case of (C-2) advantageous section, when the push order small winning combination is won, the correct push order is notified, so that (C-1) more games than normal (non-advantageous section). When the value is given and the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed" is performed, so that (A) RT0 Information that enables the transition to the state may be notified. As described above, even in the (C-2) advantageous section, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "a game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed. No announcement or suggestion may be made.

(Advantageous section limiter in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, the game property (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted, and as the advantageous section specification, at least the aspect of the advantageous section including the third aspect or the fourth aspect is included. The limit processing of the advantageous section when is adopted will be described.

In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing for too long, it is possible to perform the limit processing described above or described later. For example, if the "number of games limiter" is used, the advantageous section continues for "1500 games", and if the "number of games limiter" is used, if "2400" medals are won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is still in the advantageous section. Even if the number of games, the number of sets, the number of stocks, the number of navigations, the number of differences, etc. remain, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the limit process and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section.

However, according to the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, a series of increasing sections may continue even after the advantageous section ends due to the execution of such limit processing. That is, there is a problem that the significance of setting a certain restriction on the continuation of the advantageous section that is advantageous to the player may be lost due to the series of increasing sections. Therefore, in order to provide a gaming machine capable of limiting the advantageous section in consideration of the provision of a series of increasing sections, it is desirable to take the following measures.

For example, in the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, the advantageous section is started at the same time as the series of increasing sections is started, or before the series of increasing sections is started. As a specific example, if it is determined that a series of increasing intervals starts when the BB is hit in the (A) RT0 state, the same time as the (A) hitting the BB in the RT0 state, or (A) The advantageous section is started when the state shifts to the RT0 state. Further, as another specific example, when it is determined that a series of increasing intervals starts when the transition to the (A) RT0 state occurs, the same time as the transition to the (A) RT0 state, or the (D) MB state Start an advantageous section when shifting to. The start of the advantageous section here means the start of the advantageous section in terms of limit processing (control), and the actual duration of the advantageous section (number of games, number of sets, stock, etc.) at the start time is not necessarily the same. It does not mean that the number of navigations, the number of differences, etc.) is given. Therefore, regarding the duration of the advantageous section, for example, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example are adopted, and the duration is given (or extended) in each game state. It may be decided whether or not the item is correct or not, and it may be granted (or extended) according to the result of the decision. However, even at the time of the start, the decision on whether or not to grant (or extend) the duration of the advantageous section may be made.

Here, in the case of the "game number limiter", the upper limit of the number of games is, for example, "1500 games", but from this "1500", a bonus state (for example, (B) BB state. If there is a bonus state of, the expected number of games (average number of games) of which may continue for the longest number of games) is converted to the threshold value according to the loop rate (loop rate is converted to the number of games). The value multiplied by the multiplying factor (variable determined as the multiplication rate) is subtracted, and the value is calculated as the number of designated stop games (or specified in advance). For example, in the modified example of this example, when the expected number of games in the bonus state is "20 games" and the threshold value corresponding to the loop rate of 50% is "6", the number of instruction stop games is "1500 games-20 games". × 6 = 1380 games ”.

Here, in the case of the "number limiter", the upper limit of the number of acquired sheets is, for example, "2400 sheets", but from this "2400", a bonus state (for example, (B) BB state. If there is a bonus state, the expected number of medals (the one that may be awarded the most medals) is converted to the threshold value according to the loop rate (the loop rate is converted to the number of medals won). The value multiplied by (the variable determined as the multiplication rate) is subtracted, and it is calculated as the number of instructed stop acquisitions (or specified in advance). For example, in the modified example of this example, when the expected acquisition number of bonus states is "120" and the threshold value corresponding to the loop rate of 50% is "6", the instruction stop acquisition number is "2400-120". × 6 = 1680 sheets ”.

Then, when the limit processing is configured to be performed by the "game number limiter", when the advantageous section started at the above start time continues as it is and the number of games reaches the "1380 game" (number of instructed stop games). If the duration of the advantageous section remains (in terms of control), the advantageous section will continue, but in the subsequent games, the stop operation information will not be notified (that is, the instruction function will stop). ).

In addition, when the limit processing is configured to be performed by the "number limiter", when the advantageous section started at the above start time continues as it is and the acquired number reaches "1680 sheets" (instructed stop acquired number). If the duration of the advantageous section remains (in terms of control), the advantageous section will continue, but in the subsequent games, the stop operation information will not be notified (that is, the instruction function will stop). ..

In addition, it is a process after the instruction function is stopped based on the number of instruction stop games or the number of instruction stop acquisitions, but if a series of increase sections is completed before the limit process is executed, At the same time, or after the end, the advantageous section is terminated. As a specific example, when it is determined that a series of increasing sections wins the MB in the (A) RT0 state and ends when the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed and the transition to the (C) RT1 state is performed. , (C) The advantageous section is terminated at the same time as the transition to the RT1 state, or when the next game of the game transitioned to the (C) RT1 state is started. In addition, in the (A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state, since a series of increasing sections may still continue, it is at least (C) RT1 that the process of terminating the (controllably) advantageous section is performed. It is desirable to be in the state. However, this does not apply when the advantageous section is terminated by executing the limit processing. That is, in the (A) RT0 state and (B) BB state, when "1500 games" is reached in the case of "game number limiter", and when "2400 cards" is reached in the case of "number limiter". It may be possible to end the advantageous section by executing the limit process.

It should be noted that when the advantageous section continuously reaches the number of designated stop games or the number of designated stop acquisitions, the instruction function is stopped, which is substantially synonymous with the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, the above-mentioned "1500 games" of the "game number limiter" and "2400 cards" of the "number of number limiter" are defined as the regulation values of the gaming machines that can be installed in the game store, and are modified examples of this example. In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a series of increasing sections such as the game playability (game specifications) of, the number of instruction stop games or the number of instruction stop acquisitions is calculated from the regulation value as described above, and the calculated instruction stop is calculated. The value of the number of games and the number of times the instruction is stopped may be set in advance as the value of the "number of games limiter" or the "number of number limiter" so that the limit process is executed. That is, when there is a possibility that the increase period in which the game value increases due to the installation of a series of increase sections greatly exceeds the planned ball ejection design or the range of the predetermined regulation value, this protrusion Any method can be adopted as long as it is possible to regulate the advantageous section (advanced), taking into account the part that will be lost.

In addition, the technical concept regarding the game playability (game specification) described in the modified example of this example, the first to fourth aspects of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example, and the advantageous section limiter in the modified example of this example are described in the present invention. The game machine according to the modified example of the example is described as an example, and is not applied only to the game machine related to the modified example of this example. That is, it can be appropriately modified and applied to the gaming machines described in the present embodiment, this example, and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (4)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 96, another example (No. 4) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 4) of the game playability (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 96, in this example, (A) RT0 state, (B) RT1 state non-flag, (C) RT1 state MB flag, (D) RT2 state BB flag, (E) BB state, And (F) there is a gaming state in the MB state. The (A) RT0 state and the (E) BB state are positioned as the above-mentioned series of increasing sections.

In the (A) RT0 state, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least lower than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state, (B) between the RT1 state non-flags, (D) between the RT2 state BB flags, and ( F) It is a gaming state that can shift to the MB state. It should be noted that BB, MB, push order small role, bell spilled eyes, etc. are the same as those described in other examples (3) (including modified examples) of game playability (game specifications), so here. The explanation in is omitted. However, in this example, the MB wins in duplicate with any of the small wins or replay wins (for example, the rare win mentioned above) so as not to win alone, and in the game in which the MB wins, the combination of symbols related to the MB is used. In a game that is not displayed and the internal lottery result is "lost" between the MB flags, the symbol related to MB is always displayed regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (that is, the mode of the stop operation). The combination is configured to be displayed, but as described in the modified example of the other example (No. 3) of the game playability (game specification), the MB depends on the mode of the player's stop operation and the like. It can also be configured so that the combination of symbols related to MB may be displayed in the game won in.

(A) In the RT0 state, when it is not controlled in the advantageous section, (A-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and when it is controlled in the advantageous section. Is an increasing period in which (A-2) becomes an advantageous section and the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

In the (A) RT0 state, when (1) BB is won, the transition is made between the (D) RT2 state BB flags as the BB permitted state. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, when the MB is won, the state shifts between the MB flags as the MB permitted state, but the RT state does not change. Further, between the MB flags in the (A) RT0 state, even if the bell spill is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the transition is not made between the (C) RT1 state MB flags. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, the "loss" probability is set to be at least higher than that in the (B) (C) RT1 state (for example, "1/6"), so that the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Therefore, (4) it is easy to satisfy the MB start condition. Further, in (A) RT0 state, (5) Bell spills are effective before shifting between (D) RT2 state BB flags or before MB flags (that is, between non-flags). When the stop is displayed on the line, (C) shifts between the RT1 state non-flags.

During (B) RT1 state non-flag, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least higher than (A) RT0 state, (A) RT0 state, (C) RT1 state MB flag, and (D) RT2. State A gaming state that can be transferred between the BB flags. (B) If the RT1 state non-flag is not controlled in the advantageous section, (B-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and the game value is controlled in the advantageous section. If there is, (B-2) it becomes an advantageous section and it becomes an increase period in which the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

When (1) BB is won between (B) RT1 state non-flags, it shifts between (D) RT2 state BB flags as BB permitted state. Further, when (6) MB is won between (B) RT1 state non-flags, it shifts between (C) RT1 state MB flags as MB permitted state (RT state does not change). In this example, since the game in which the MB is won is configured so that the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed, the transition from the (B) RT1 state non-flag to the (F) MB state is not performed. However, as described above, it can be configured so that the (B) RT1 state non-flagged state may shift to the (F) MB state. It should be noted that (B) between the RT1 state non-flags and (C) between the RT1 state MB flags are basically the same RT state (RT1 state), regardless of which of the RT1 states (B) and (C). (9) When the number of games played in the RT1 state reaches the specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) (that is, when 1500 games are exhausted), the state shifts to (A) RT0 state. At this time, if it is between (B) RT1 state non-flags, it shifts between (A) RT0 state non-flags, and if it is between (C) RT1 state MB flags, it shifts between (A) RT0 state MB flags. ..

(C) Between the RT1 state MB flags, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least higher than that of the (A) RT0 state, and the game state can be changed to the (A) RT0 state and the (F) MB state. .. (C) If the RT1 state MB flag is not controlled in the advantageous section, (C-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and the game value is controlled in the advantageous section. If there is, (C-2) it becomes an advantageous section and it becomes an increase period in which the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

(C) Between the RT1 state MB flags, the "missing" probability is set to be at least extremely lower than that of the (A) RT0 state (for example, "1/8192"), so that the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Therefore, it is difficult to satisfy (7) MB start condition. Since (C) the RT1 state MB flag is in the MB permitted state, there is no case where a new MB is won or a BB is won.

Between the (D) RT2 state BB flags, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least lower than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state, and the game state can be shifted to the (E) BB state. (D) When the combination of symbols related to BB is displayed between the RT2 state BB flags, (2) the BB start condition is satisfied, and (E) the state shifts to the BB state. Further, since the "missing" probability is set to be at least higher than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state (for example, "1/12") between the (D) RT2 state BB flags, the symbol related to the BB The combination is displayed, and (2) it is easy to satisfy the BB start condition. Since the BB permission state is between (C) RT2 state BB flags, there is no case where a new BB is won or an MB is won.

(E) The BB state is, for example, a gaming state that is composed of the above-mentioned "special bonus state" and has an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. (E) In the BB state, when a specified number of game values (for example, more than 140 cards) are given, the game value is given an upper limit, (3) the BB end condition is satisfied, and (B) from the BB state to (A). ) Shift to RT0 state.

(F) The MB state is a game state that is configured as a normal bonus state and is an increase period in which the game value increases. In addition, as described in the modified example of the other example (No. 3) of the game playability (game specification), it can be configured as a non-increasing / decreasing period. In the (F) MB state, when a specified number of game values (for example, more than 13 cards) are given, the game value is given an upper limit, (8) the MB end condition is satisfied, and (A) the state shifts from the RT0 state. If it is, it shifts from (F) MB state to (A) RT0 state, and if it shifts from (C) RT1 state MB flag, it shifts from (F) MB state to (B) RT1 state non-flag. Move to.

That is, the (F) MB state does not change the RT state depending on its operation or termination (more specifically, the (B) (C) RT1 state operates through the (F) MB state). ing. Here, the (B) and (C) RT1 states do not end during the specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) after the start. Therefore, the operation or termination of the (F) MB state does not affect the specified number of games. However, the period during the (F) MB state may be included in the counting target of the specified number of games, or the counting of the specified number of games may be interrupted (not included).

The transition control between the (F) MB state and the (B) (C) RT1 state is not limited to that described above. For example, when the (F) MB state ends, even if it has shifted from between the (C) RT1 state MB flags, it may be shifted to the (A) RT0 state. That is, the RT1 state may be terminated when the MB state is activated or terminated. In this example, when shifting between (C) RT1 state MB flags, the specified number of games is exhausted and shifting between (A) RT0 state MB flags, (F) MB state is activated, and (A) RT0 Unless it shifts between the non-flags of the state, or (F) activates the MB state and (B) shifts between the RT1 state non-flags, and wins the BB there, it will not shift to a series of increasing sections. Therefore, when the (F) MB state ends, the frequency of the transition to the series of increasing sections can be increased by shifting between the non-flags of the (A) RT0 state. This may be appropriately selected according to the intended ball output rate and its contents.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when a special combination (BB) is won, it becomes a special permission state (BB permission state) and shifts to the second specific game state ((D) RT2 state), and the special symbol It is not difficult to display the combination (combination of symbols related to BB) and shift to the special game state ((E) BB state), but when the special role (MB) is won, the special permission state (MB permission) However, the game state does not shift, and if it is the first specific game state (between (C) RT1 state MB flags), a combination of special symbols (symbols related to MB) until the end of the first specific game state is completed. It is difficult to display the combination of) and shift to the special gaming state ((F) MB state), and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal gaming state ((A) RT0 state). In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination (small combination in push order) is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the correct answer is in the push order). Is not performed and the transition is made based on the fact that the combination of specific symbols (bell spilled eyes) is displayed. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the specific period (advantageous section) in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the operation information is stopped according to the notification. When the operation is performed, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special combination or the special role is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if a special role is won and a special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal game state via the special game state.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is set and the game shifts to the second specific game state ((D) RT2 state), which is special. It is not difficult to display the combination of symbols (combination of symbols related to BB) and shift to the special game state ((E) BB state), but when the special role (MB) is won, the special permission state ( MB permission state), but the game state does not shift, and if it is the first specific game state (between (C) RT1 state MB flags), a specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) are played and the first It is difficult to display the special symbol combination (combination of symbols related to MB) and shift to the special gaming state ((F) MB state) until the specific gaming state ends, and as a result, the normal gaming state ((A) ) It is difficult to shift to the RT0 state). In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination (small combination in push order) is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the correct answer is in the push order). Is not performed and the transition is made based on the fact that the combination of specific symbols (bell spilled eyes) is displayed. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the specific period (advantageous section) in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the operation information is stopped according to the notification. When the operation is performed, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special combination or the special role is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific gaming state, if a special combination is won and a special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal gaming state via the special gaming state until a predetermined number of games are played.

Under such playability, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is entered without shifting to the first specific gaming state. Not only will it be possible to repeat the transition (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value that will be given when a specific role is won will increase. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the first specific game state, for example, in the case of the special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although it is difficult, the game value given when winning a specific role will increase. Further, even if the operation information related to the specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during the specific period, the transition to the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is performed without shifting to the first specific gaming state. May be possible to repeat.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, whether it is in the normal gaming state or the first specific gaming state, in what order the special role, the special role or the specific combination wins in the normal gaming state, the first specific game. In what order the special role or special role wins in the state, whether or not it is a specific period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific mode in the first specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine of this example, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the first specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In this way, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even in the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made to.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 5)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 97, another example (No. 5) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 5) of the game playability (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 97, in this example, (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state), (B) BB1 state, (C) between BB1 flags, (D) between BB2 states, (E) between BB2 flags, ( There are F) BB3 state and (G) game state between BB3 flags. This example attempts to make the game playability different depending on whether or not the type of bonus combination won in the general gaming state (normal gaming state) and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning game in the bonus combination are displayed. is there.

The combination of symbols according to BB1 is configured in the same manner as, for example, "C_red same color BB" (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment. The combination of symbols according to BB2 is configured in the same manner as, for example, "C_blue same color BB" (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment. The combination of symbols according to BB3 is configured as, for example, "BAR-BAR-BAR" (see FIG. 15). At this time, the "red 7" symbol, the "blue 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are arranged at equal intervals (or substantially equal intervals) on at least one reel (which may be all reels). When the stop operation is performed on the reel, the timing at which the "red 7" symbol is displayed, the timing at which the "blue 7" symbol is displayed, and the timing at which the "BAR" symbol is displayed overlap. Configure not to. That is, the "blue 7" and "BAR" symbols may not be displayed when the "red 7" symbol is aimed at, and the "blue 7" symbol is aimed at and the "blue 7" symbol is pressed. The "Red 7" and "BAR" symbols are not displayed, and when the "BAR" symbol is aimed at and pressed, the "Red 7" and "Blue 7" symbols are not displayed. To do. The combination of symbols according to BB3 may be configured in the same manner as, for example, "C_red different color BB" or "C_blue different color BB" (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), for example, when a bonus combination (any of BB1 to BB3) can be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/45 in total), the winning bonus combination is BB1. A certain probability is "45%" (winning probability is "1/100"), and the probability that the winning bonus combination is BB2 is "45%" (winning probability is "1/100"), and the winning is won. The probability that the bonus combination is BB3 is "10%" (the winning probability is "1/450"). It should be noted that this bonus winning ratio shows an example, and BB1 to BB3 may be won with the same winning probability (winning ratio), or may be won at a ratio different from the above. Further, in (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state), BB1, BB2, and BB3 are configured not to win as duplication with other replay winning combination or small winning combination, but to win each independently. In addition, as long as the combination of the corresponding symbols can be displayed in the winning game, the winning may be configured to overlap with other small winning combinations.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), in any case, (1-1) BB1 is won, (2-1) BB2 is won, or (3-1) BB3 is won. A bonus winning notification will be given for the winning game. This bonus winning notification is configured as a predetermined notification that the fact that any one of BB1 to BB3 has been determined as the internal winning combination can be notified, but the type cannot be notified. In this predetermined notification, for example, it is notified that a character such as "big hit!" Is displayed or a WIN lamp is turned on to win a bonus role, but whether the BB1 is won or the BB2 is won. Or, it is not felt whether the player won the BB3.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), when (1-1) BB1 is won, the player succeeds in pressing the "Red 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB1 If the combination of symbols related to the above can be stopped and displayed on the valid line, (1-2) BB1 is established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is changed to (B) BB1 state. In the (B) BB1 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases, and when the specified number (for example, more than 140 cards) of the game value is given in the (B) BB1 state, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, (1-4) BB1 ends, and it shifts from (B) BB1 state to (A) general game state (non-bonus state).

On the other hand, if the player fails to press the "Red 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the combination of symbols related to BB1 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (1- 3) BB1 is not established, and the transition from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) to (C) BB1 flag.

In this example, as in the present embodiment and other examples, there is a push order small combination, which will be described as a 6-choice push order small combination 1-6. In normal stop control, if the push order small winning combination 1 is the correct answer in the left middle right and 9 cards are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the other push order is the incorrect answer in the push order and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. One piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout), and in the push order small winning combination 2, the right and left middle is the correct push order and 9 pieces are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the other push order is the wrong push order. If the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one sheet is paid out, if it is not appropriate, one sheet is missed (no payout), and in the push order small winning combination 3, the middle and left are the correct push order, and 9 sheets are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing, and other push orders. Is the wrong answer in the push order, and if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout). If the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one card will be paid out, if it is not appropriate, it will be missed (no payout), and the push order small winning combination 5 will stop with the correct push order in the middle right and left. 9 cards are paid out regardless of the operation timing, 1 card is paid out if the other push order is incorrect and the stop operation timing is appropriate, if not, it is missed (no payout), and the push order small winning combination 6 is on the right. If the middle left is the correct answer in the push order and 9 cards are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the other push order is the wrong answer in the push order and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, 1 sheet is paid out. Become.

Between the (C) BB1 flags, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is higher than that of the (A) general game state (non-bonus state), and the "loss" probability is set to, for example, about "1/4000". Similar to the other examples, in this example as well, the combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed only in the game in which (C) BB1 flags are "lost". If the combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed in the game that has become "lost", (1-2) BB1 is established, and the state shifts from between the (C) BB1 flags to the (B) BB1 state. Further, between the (C) BB1 flags, a bonus type notification is performed in which the winning bonus combination is BB1 (that is, the type of the bonus combination) is notified. This bonus type notification is configured as a specific notification for notifying that the BB1 has been won (display of a combination of symbols related to the BB1 is permitted) between the BB1 flags. In this specific notification, for example, it is possible to feel that the BB1 is won by displaying characters such as "Red 7 inside hitting" or turning on the lamp corresponding to "Red 7". ing. It should be noted that this specific notification can always be performed while (C) between the BB1 flags, or can be performed in a game in which a combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed between (C) BB1 flags. You can also make it happen.

Further, between the (C) BB1 flags, the stop control is changed for the push order small winning combination 1 to 6. Specifically, when the push order small winning combination 1, the pushing order small winning combination 3, and the pushing order small winning combination 5 are won, 9 cards are paid out regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (regardless of these factors). Therefore, if you win the push order small winning combination 2, the pushing order small winning combination 4, and the pushing order small winning combination 6, one card will be paid out regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (regardless of these factors). The stop control is changed to. Here, since the push order small winning combination 1 to 6 have the same winning probability, normal stop control is performed on the premise that the push order is not notified (A) General game. The return rate to the player is higher between the (C) BB1 flags than between the states (non-bonus state) and the (G) BB3 flags described later. In addition, even if (C) between the BB1 flags is configured as a reduction period (however, the reduction rate is low when viewed from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) and (G-1) non-advantageous section described later). Alternatively, it may be configured as an increase period (however, the rate of increase is low when viewed from the (G-2) advantageous section described later). In addition, the expected value of grant may be configured as a non-increase / decrease period. Further, although it has almost no effect on the expected value of grant, even between (C) BB1 flags, for example, between (C-1) non-advantageous section and (C-2) advantageous section according to a specific notification condition. The transition control may be performed with.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), when (2-1) BB2 is won, the player succeeds in pressing the "blue 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB2 If the combination of symbols related to the above can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (2-2) BB2 is established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is changed to (D) BB2 state. In the (D) BB2 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases, and when the specified number (for example, more than 140 cards) of the game value is given in the (D) BB2 state, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, (2-4) BB2 ends, and it shifts from (D) BB2 state to (A) general game state (non-bonus state).

On the other hand, if the player fails to press the "Blue 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the combination of symbols related to BB2 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (2- 3) BB2 is not established, and the transition from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) to (E) BB2 flag. If BB1 is replaced with BB2 and "red 7" is replaced with "blue 7" between (E) BB2 flags, it is basically the same as between (C) BB1 flags, so the description here is omitted. To do. The same applies to bonus type notification and the like.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), when (3-1) BB3 is won, the player succeeds in pressing the "BAR" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and the BB3 is reached. If the combination of the symbols can be stopped and displayed on the valid line, (3-2) BB3 is established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is changed to (F) BB3 state. In the (F) BB3 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases, and when the specified number (for example, more than 140) of the game value is given in the (F) BB3 state, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, (3-4) BB3 ends, and it shifts from (F) BB3 state to (A) general game state (non-bonus state). The (F) BB3 state can also be configured as a decrease period or a non-increase / decrease period.

On the other hand, if the player fails to press the "BAR" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the combination of symbols related to BB3 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (3-3). ) BB3 is not established, and (A) shifts from the general gaming state (non-bonus state) to (G) BB3 flag.

Between the (G) BB3 flags, the winning probability of the replay role is higher than that between the (C) BB1 flags and the (E) BB2 flags, and the "missing" probability is, for example, about "1/65536" or " It is set to "0". That is, between the (G) BB3 flags, the probability that the combination of symbols related to BB3 is displayed is extremely low, or the combination of symbols related to BB3 is not displayed. The setting of the "loss" probability is not limited to this, and may be set to the same degree as between (C) BB1 flags and (E) BB2 flags, or may be set to a higher probability than these. This may be appropriately selected according to the intended ball output rate and its contents. (G) Similarly, between the BB3 flags, the combination of symbols related to BB3 can be displayed only in the game in which "missing" occurs. If the combination of symbols related to BB3 can be displayed in the game that has become "lost", (3-2) BB3 is established, and the state shifts from between the (G) BB3 flags to the (F) BB3 state. Note that the bonus type notification is basically the same as between the (C) BB1 flags if "red 7" is replaced with "BAR", and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, between the (G) BB3 flags, the stop control is not changed for the push order small winning combination 1 to 6, and the normal stop control is used. Therefore, assuming that the push order is not notified, the return rate to the player is higher between the (C) BB1 flag and the (E) BB2 flag, but between the (G) BB3 flags. If it is not controlled in the advantageous section, it becomes (G-1) a non-advantageous section and the game value decreases, but if it is controlled in the advantageous section, it becomes (G-2) advantageous. It becomes an increase period in which the game value increases as a section, and in the (G-2) advantageous section, at least the push order that is the correct answer at the time of winning the push order small winning combination 1 to 6 is notified, and as a result, (C) between the BB1 flags. And (E) the return rate to the player is higher (the expected value of grant is higher) than between the BB2 flags. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

That is, if (1-1) BB1 is won and (1-2) BB1 is established, the game value is increased in the (B) BB1 state, and if (1-3) BB1 is not established, the game value is increased. (C) Between the BB1 flags, the game value gradually increases or gradually decreases. (C) Between the BB1 flags is configured to continue until (1-2) BB1 is established. In addition, if (2-1) BB2 is won and (2-2) BB2 is established, the game value is increased in the (D) BB2 state, and if (2-3) BB2 is not established, the game value is increased. (E) Between the BB2 flags, the game value gradually increases or gradually decreases. The space between the (E) BB2 flags is configured to continue until (2-2) BB2 is established.

In addition, if (3-1) BB3 is won and (3-2) BB3 is established, the game value is increased in the (F) BB3 state, and if (3-3) BB3 is not established, the game value is increased. Between the (G) BB3 flags, the game value sharply decreases in the (G-1) non-advantageous section, while the game value sharply increases in the (G-2) advantageous section. The (G) BB3 flags are configured to continue until (3-2) BB3 is established with an extremely low probability, or basically do not end once the transition is made. Since BB1 and BB2 have a higher winning probability than BB3, a sufficient period during which gambling can be suppressed can be secured. Further, usually, the former game property is provided at the beginning when it is installed in the game store, and it is highly possible that the latter game property is provided after a while. However, it is also possible to ensure that the game playability can be changed by the initialization operation as shown below.

For example, when there is a setting change operation (initialization operation for initializing the game state) between (C) BB1 flags, (E) BB2 flags, or (G) BB3 flags, a carry-over combination is performed. By clearing BB1, BB2, or BB3 as, (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is entered. That is, in the case of configuring not to end between the (G) BB3 flags, the BB3 as the carry-over combination is cleared based on the setting change operation, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state). ) May be used. However, when the setting change operation is performed, if (C) between the BB1 flags or (E) between the BB2 flags, BB1 or BB2 as the carry-over combination is cleared, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state). ), But if it is between (G) BB3 flags, BB3 as a carry-over combination may not be cleared and (A) it may not shift to the general gaming state (non-bonus state). Further, even if the setting change operation is performed, it is possible to configure so that none of BB1, BB2 or BB3 as the carry-over combination is cleared.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the first special combination (BB1) or the second special combination (BB3) is won, the game is the game, or the first special permission state (between the BB1 flags) or the second after the winning. If it is not a game in which another internal winning combination has not been determined (so-called lost) in the special permission state (between the BB3 flags), the first special symbol combination (combination of symbols related to BB1) or the second special symbol (Combination of symbols related to BB3) cannot be displayed. Further, in the first special permission state, when the first predetermined winning combination (small winning combination 1, 3, 5 in pushing order) is won, a predetermined number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given regardless of the pushing order, and the second When a predetermined combination (small combination 2, 4, 6 in push order) is won, a predetermined number of game values are not given regardless of the push order. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the push order is correct, and a predetermined number of games are given if the push order is incorrect. No value is given. Then, at least in the specific period of the second special permission state, it is possible to be controlled to the advantageous state ((G-2) advantageous section) in which the information of the player's stop operation is notified.

That is, if the first special combination is won and the combination of the first special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the first special permission state ends. The profit does not fluctuate, and while the player can receive a certain amount of profit, the profit does not increase dramatically, so even if it becomes advantageous, the amount of increase in the game value is shown. The slope value is relatively low. On the other hand, if the second special combination is won and the combination of the second special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the second special permission state ends. The profit will fluctuate depending on the situation, and the player may suffer more disadvantages than the first special permission state. On the other hand, if the profit is in an advantageous state, the profit will increase dramatically. The slope value indicating the amount of increase in value is relatively high. Therefore, by making the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in variation.

In the gaming machine of this example, the winning probability of the first special role is made higher than the winning probability of the second special role, and the probability that the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state is the second. The probability that the combination of the second special symbols can be displayed in the special permission state may be higher than the probability. That is, the first special permission state may be set to a state in which it is easier to shift and end than the second special permission state, and the second special permission state may be set to a state in which it is harder to shift and end than the first special permission state. In this way, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, the combination of the first special symbol related to the first special role and the combination of the second special symbol related to the second special role cannot be aimed at the same time when the player pushes the ball. It may be configured to be arranged at intervals. In this way, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this example, when the first special role or the second special role is won, the fact that one of them is won is notified, but the type is not notified (bonus winning notification), and the first In the 1 special permission state and the 2nd special permission state, the type may be notified (bonus type notification). In this way, it is possible to notify the information desired by the player while making the game playability more varied.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 6)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 6) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. 98 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example of game playability (game specification) (No. 6), and FIG. 99 is a diagram for conceptually explaining another example of game playability (game specification) (No. 6). It is a figure which showed an example of the internal lottery table used in.

As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, in this example, there are roughly classified into a general gaming state (normal gaming state) and a BB state, and in the general gaming state (normal gaming state), either BB1 or BB2 The state in which the bonus role of is not won is defined as (A) general game state (between non-flags), and the state in which BB1 is won (BB1 permitted state in which BB1 is carried over), and 3 cards The state in which the medals are bet (hanged) and the game is played is defined as (B) a three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, and a state in which BB2 is won (BB2 permitted state in which BB2 is carried over). Therefore, the state in which three medals are bet and the game is played is defined as (C) the state in which three BB2 flags are bet, and the BB1 is permitted, and two medals are bet and the game is played. The state is defined as (D) a two-card bet state between BB1 flags, and a state in which two medals are bet and a game is played in a BB2 permitted state is defined as (E) a two-card bet state between BB2 flags. .. Further, the bonus state in which the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line and started is defined as (F) BB1 state, and the combination of symbols related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the effective line and started. The bonus state is defined as the (G) BB2 state. That is, it is intended to make the game playability different according to the type of bonus combination that is won (winned) in the general game state (normal game state) and the number of bets (the number of times the game value is multiplied).

In the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 99, for convenience of explanation, each lottery value used in the (A) general game state (between non-flags) three-card bet state (see the column of “three-card bets between non-flags”). , (A) Each lottery value used in the 2-card bet state of the general game state (between non-flags) (see the column of "2-bet between non-flags"), (B) 3-bet state between BB1 flags and (C) ) In each lottery value used in the BB2 flag 3-bet state (see the column "3 flag-bet"), and (D) in the BB1 flag 2-bet state and (E) in the BB2 flag 2-bet state. Each lottery value used (see the column of "two bets between flags") is shown in each column, but this does not mean that the gaming state (RT state) is different. That is, the RT state can be controlled as a common RT state. However, it can also be controlled as another RT state. In addition, at least the internal winning combination that is the target of the advantageous section grant decision described later is assumed to be a common lottery value among the set values.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when a 3-card bet is made, the winning of BB1 is possible and the winning of BB2 is not possible (see the column of "3 bets between non-flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, in the case of two bets, the winning of BB2 is possible and the winning of BB1 is not possible (see the column of "two bets between non-flags" in FIG. 99). In this example, the player can start the game (perform a start operation) in either case of betting two medals or betting three medals. There is. Further, "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal slot 14 in order to use the bet, and the player operates the bet button to obtain two or three medals from the credit. It includes both medals for medals and medals for two or three medals are automatically hung by winning a replay role.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when a 3-card bet is won, the BB1 is won (the winning game may be carried over without displaying the combination of symbols related to the BB1). Shifts between the BB1 flags. (1-1) When a game is played with a three-card bet between the BB1 flags, (B) a three-card bet state between the BB1 flags is set (see the column of "three-card bet between flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when (2) a game is played with a two-card bet between the BB1 flags, (D) a two-card bet state between the BB1 flags is set (see the column of "two bets between flags" in FIG. 99).

(B) In the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed in the game that has become "lost" as described in the other examples (BB1 can be established). .. The "loss" probability can be set as appropriate, but it is assumed that it is set to, for example, about "1 / 8.5". In addition, the state is a BB1 permitted state, and BB1 does not win a new prize or win a BB2 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). Further, when the push order bell A (see the internal winning combination of Nos. "20" to "31" in FIG. 99) is won, if the push order is correct (the push order displayed by "abbreviation" respectively), 9 If the answer is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (“○”), then one sheet is paid out, and if the answer is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (“×”). ) 0 cards will be paid out. Further, when the push order bell B (see the internal winning combination of Nos. "21" to "43" in FIG. 99) is won, 9 cards are paid out regardless of the push order and the timing of the stop operation. That is, in the (B) 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the push order of the push order bell B does not matter, and if the advantageous section is not taken into consideration, the 3-card bet in the (A) general game state (non-flag). The return rate is higher than that of the state and the three-card bet state between the (C) BB2 flags, which is advantageous to the player.

In addition, (B) in the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, when the chance is won (see the internal winning combination of Nos. "7" to "16" in FIG. 99) (or the combination of symbols related to the chance is). When winning a strong bell (see No. "17" and "18" in FIG. 99) and a strong bell (see No. "17" and "18" in FIG. 99), a definite combination (No. "19" in FIG. 99). When winning the internal winning combination (see the internal winning combination), when winning the cherry (see the internal winning combination of No. "44" in FIG. 99), and when winning the watermelon (see the internal winning combination of No. "45" in FIG. 99). ), The advantageous section grant determination (advantageous section grant lottery) is made with the probability corresponding to the internal winning combination (100% probability for the fixed combination). When it is decided to be granted as a result of the advantageous section grant determination, for example, an advantageous section of 50 games per set is granted (if it is already in the advantageous section, it is extended by 50 games per set). It should be noted that the mode of imparting the advantageous section is an example, and various modes described in this embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

Further, in the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, when the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (1-2) BB1 is established and the state shifts to (F) BB1 state. (F) The BB1 state is, for example, a game state configured as a "special bonus state" and has an increasing period in which the game value increases, and is an arbitrary specified number (for example, as described in other examples). , 140 cards), (1-3) BB1 ends, and (F) BB1 state shifts to (A) general game state (between non-flags).

(D) In the two-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the number of bets is different from the game in which the BB1 wins, although it is between the BB1 flags. Cannot be displayed (BB1 cannot be established). In addition, the state is a BB1 permitted state, and BB1 does not win a new prize or win a BB2 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). That is, the state is configured as a gaming state in which neither a winning combination nor a prize is won. However, considering that it is between the BB1 flags, it is possible to configure the game so that the combination of the symbols related to the BB1 can be displayed in the game that has become "missing".

In addition, (D) in the state of betting two cards between the BB1 flags, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, two cards are paid out if the push order is correct, and the push order is incorrect and the answer is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate, one card will be paid out, and if the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one card will be paid out. However, for either or both of the push order bell A and the push order bell B, it is possible to configure the payout so that two cards are paid out regardless of the push order, and the expected value of grant is (B) 3 bets between the BB1 flags. It is also possible to reduce the lottery value as appropriate so as to be the same as the state, and then (B) pay out the same as the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags. It should be noted that (D) in the state of betting two cards between the BB1 flags, the above-mentioned advantageous section grant determination is not performed.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when a two-card bet is won, BB2 is won (the winning game may be carried over without displaying the combination of symbols related to BB2). Shifts between the BB2 flags. (2) When the game is played with a 3-card bet between the BB2 flags, (C) a 3-card bet state between the BB2 flags is set (see the column of "3-card bet between flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when (4-1) a game is played with a two-card bet between the BB2 flags, (E) a two-card bet state between the BB2 flags is set (see the column of "two bets between flags" in FIG. 99).

(C) In the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the number of bets is different from the game in which the BB2 wins, although it is between the BB2 flags. Cannot be displayed (BB2 cannot be established). In addition, the state is a BB2 permitted state, and BB2 does not win a new prize or win a BB1 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). That is, the state is configured as a gaming state in which neither a winning combination nor a prize is won. However, considering that it is between the BB2 flags, it is possible to configure the game so that the combination of the symbols related to the BB2 can be displayed in the game that has become "missing".

In addition, (C) in the state of betting 3 cards between the BB2 flags, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, 9 cards are paid out if the push order is correct, and the push order is incorrect and the answer is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate, one card will be paid out, and if the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one card will be paid out. That is, in the (C) three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the return rate is higher than in the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, because the push order of the push order bell B does not matter and the advantageous section is not taken into consideration. It is low and disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the (C) three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the advantageous section grant determination (advantageous section grant lottery) is performed as in the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags. Here, No. Focusing on "F_Rip B" of "4", (B) In the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the "normal rip" wins regardless of the mode of the stop operation, and the advantageous section grant decision is not made. (C) In the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the "chance eye" is won and the advantageous section grant decision is made regardless of the mode of the stop operation. That is, (C) in the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the internal winning combination of "F_lip B" is promoted (converted) to the internal winning combination of "chance eye", so there are many opportunities to determine the advantageous section grant. Therefore, when the advantageous section is taken into consideration, the probability of granting the advantageous section is higher than that of the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, which is advantageous to the player.

(E) In the two-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the combination of the symbols related to BB2 can be displayed in the game that has become "lost" as described in the other examples (BB2 can be established). .. The "loss" probability can be set as appropriate, but it is assumed that it is set to, for example, about "1 / 8.5". In addition, the state is a BB2 permitted state, and BB2 does not win a new prize or win a BB1 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win).

In addition, (E) in the state of betting two cards between the BB2 flags, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, two cards are paid out if the push order is correct, and the push order is incorrect and the answer is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate, one card will be paid out, and if the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one card will be paid out. However, for either or both of the push order bell A and the push order bell B, it is possible to configure the payout so that two cards are paid out regardless of the push order, and the expected value of grant is (C) 3 bets between the BB2 flags. It is also possible to reduce the lottery value as appropriate so that it becomes the same as the state, and then (C) pay out the same as the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags. In addition, (E) in the state of betting two cards between the BB2 flags, the above-mentioned advantageous section grant determination is not performed.

Further, in the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state, when the combination of symbols related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (4-2) BB2 is established and the state shifts to (G) BB2 state. (F) The BB2 state is, for example, a game state configured as a "special bonus state" and has an increasing period in which the game value increases, and is an arbitrary specified number (for example, as described in other examples). When the game value of (60 cards) is given, (4-3) BB1 ends, and the state shifts from the (G) BB2 state to the (A) general game state (between non-flags). The (F) BB2 state can also be configured as a non-increase / decrease period.

In this example, when (B) the 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags and (C) the 3-card bet state between the BB2 flags are compared, in the (B) 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the push order for the bell B is pushed. Is unquestioned, and since it is possible to shift to the (F) BB1 state, basically, the return rate (base value, ball output rate) is better in the (B) BB1 flag 3-card bet state. It is configured so that (may be good) is high. On the other hand, in the state of (C) three-card bet between BB2 flags, many chances of determining the advantageous section grant can be obtained, and the expected value of grant when the advantageous section is reached is also high. If the winning probability of the internal winning combination, the probability of determining the advantageous section grant at the time of winning the chance, and the duration of the advantageous section granted when the advantageous section grant decision is made are appropriately adjusted, the (C) BB2 flag It is also possible to configure the return rate in the 3-card bet state to be equal to or higher than the return rate in the 3-card bet state between (B) BB1 flags.

Further, in this example, comparing the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state and the (D) BB1 flag two-card bet state, the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state results in the (G) BB2 state. Basically, the return rate is higher in the two-card bet state between the (E) BB2 flags because the transition is possible. It should be noted that the return rate is high because the control is performed so that the push order of the push order bell B does not matter even in the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state as in the (B) BB1 flag three-card bet state. It may be configured to be.

When the player starts the game from (A) the general game state (between the non-flags), for example, the player can first select whether to make a 3-card bet or a 2-card bet. If you win BB1 as a 3-card bet and do not shift to the (F) BB1 state in the winning game, there is no merit in the (D) BB1 state 2-card bet state, so (B) with the 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags as it is. Advance the game. (B) Since the return rate is relatively high in the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, does the player shift to the (F) BB1 state and increase the game value without reducing the game value so rapidly? Alternatively, it is possible to select whether to increase the game value by taking the opportunity of determining the advantageous section grant and shifting to the advantageous section (as a result of notifying the correct push order for the push order bell A). In addition, in the state of (B) betting three cards between the BB1 flags, the game value does not increase so rapidly even if the section shifts to the advantageous section, as compared with the state of betting three cards between the (C) BB2 flags.

On the other hand, if the player wins BB2 as a two-card bet and does not shift to the (G) BB2 state in the winning game, the player either advances the game in the three-card bet state between the (C) BB2 flags, or (E) BB2. It is possible to select whether to proceed with the game in the state of betting two cards between the flags. (C) In the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the return rate is relatively low and the game value does not shift to the bonus state. When the probability of obtaining is increasing and the player shifts to an advantageous section (as a result of being notified of the correct push order for push order bell A and push order bell B), the game value can be rapidly increased. there is a possibility. In addition, in the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state, although the game value in a small role cannot be expected to increase, the return rate is relatively high, and the game value is increased by shifting to the (G) BB2 state. Can be increased. In this example, such playability (game specifications) can be provided.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the bet game value is the first amount (3 cards), the first special role (BB1) can be won, while the second special role (BB2) can be won. Not possible. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (two cards), the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination ("F_rip B") is won, the combination of specific symbols (chance eye) cannot be displayed in the first special permission state (between the BB1 flags), and the second special permission state (BB2) is not displayed. If it is (between flags), it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols. Then, when the bet game value is the first amount, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, an advantageous state (advantageous section) is given. It is possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous section (determination of granting an advantageous section), and when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the bet game value is the first quantity, the first special symbol combination (combination of symbols related to BB1) can be displayed, while the second special symbol is displayed. (Combination of symbols related to BB2) cannot be displayed. Further, when the bet game value is the second quantity, the combination of the second special symbols may be displayed, but the combination of the first special symbols may not be displayed.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, as a state in which the game is played, for example, in the first special permission state, the game is played with the first amount of the game value bet ((B) BB1 flag). (3 bets between 3 cards), 2nd special permission state, where the game is played with the first amount of game value bet ((C) 3 bets between BB2 flags), 1st special permission state There is a state in which a second amount of game value is bet and a game is played ((D) a state in which two cards are bet between BB1 flags), and a second special permission state in which a second amount of game value is bet. It is possible to create a plurality of states in which the game is played ((E) a two-card bet state between the BB2 flags).

Then, according to the gaming machine of this example, for example, in the second special permission state, the state in which the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played is set as the state in which the granting of the advantageous state is given preferential treatment. The state in which the game value of 2 is bet and the game is played is defined as the state in which the advantageous state is not given. That is, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player depending on which amount of the game value is bet and which special role is won in relation to the granting of the advantageous state. Therefore, by making the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in variation.

In the gaming machine of this example, when the first predetermined combination (pushing order bell A) is won, for example, a predetermined number (for example, 9) if the pushing order is correct, regardless of which state it is in. The game value of (sheets) is given, and if the push order is incorrect, a predetermined number of game values are not given, and if the second predetermined combination (push order bell B) is won, the first special permission state is set. In a state where the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played, for example, a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the push order, while in other states, the first predetermined amount is given. The same control as the combination may be performed. In this way, it is possible to make the state in which the first special permission state is bet and the game is played in the first amount of the game value a state in which the granting of the game value is given preferential treatment at the time of winning the predetermined combination. Therefore, the playability can be made more varied.

With reference to FIGS. 92 to 99, other examples of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment have been described above. The points that have been mainly described and that have been omitted or briefly explained can be applied by appropriately supplementing the configurations described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and the modified examples. .. It is also possible to combine a part or all of the configurations described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and the modified example to form the present invention.

[Another example of advantageous section limiter (number limiter)]
Subsequently, another example of the limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. So far, as a limiter for the advantageous section, a limiter using the number of games digested during the advantageous section (hereinafter, "game number limiter") has been described, but the type of limiter for the advantageous section is not limited to the game number limiter. Absent. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2400) or more. A limiter using the number of medals paid out during such an advantageous section is hereinafter referred to as a "number limiter".

FIG. 100A is a diagram showing an outline of the number limiter. In the figure, the vertical axis is the difference number (= payout number-insertion number), and is also referred to as a net increase number. The plus and minus of the difference number is the value seen from the player, and if the number of medals paid out to the player is larger than the number of medals inserted (plus on the player side), plus or vice versa. In the case of, it becomes negative. The horizontal axis is the number of games, and the more to the right, the more games have been digested from the start of the advantageous section. The number limiter starts at the time when the number of medals is the lowest so that the player does not win an extremely large number of medals at one time, and forcibly ends the advantageous section when a positive difference of 2400 medals is obtained. It is something that makes you.

In the figure, about 100 medals have decreased since the start of the advantageous section. This means that, for example, if the start of the advantageous section is the start of the above-mentioned normal advantageous section, the number of medals is reduced due to the game period or the preparation state during the above-mentioned advantageous section. The number of medals has continued to increase from the start of the advantageous section to -100, and finally the number of medals has increased to about +2300. At this point, from the player's point of view, at least 2400 medals are at hand. Therefore, the main control board 71 activates the number limiter to forcibly terminate the advantageous section. Thereby, gambling can be appropriately suppressed.

The main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter, or may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number limiter, and may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter and the number of games. The limit processing of the advantageous section may be performed by using both the limiter and the limiter. When both limiters are used, it is desirable that the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section when one of the limiter activation conditions is satisfied after the advantageous section starts. In this explanation, the number of games limiter is 1500 games and the number of game limiters is 2400, but this is an example, and a value smaller or more than this is adopted according to the game specifications to make the gambling appropriate. It may be controlled to.

Here, a case where both the game number limiter and the number number limiter are used will be described. More specifically, it is the slope value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section (ART, AT, etc.) (expected net increase per game, expected net increase including increase due to bonus operation) and the activation condition of the number of games limiter. The relationship between the number of games B and the difference number C, which is a condition for activating the number limiter, will be described.
In the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the slope value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section is "3" and the number of games B which is the activation condition of the number of games limiter is "100 games".

In the first specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) × B (100 games) = C (300 sheets)) in which the inclination value A × the number of games of the number of games limiter B = the difference number of sheets C of the number of sheets limiter is Conceivable. Such a specification is the most basic specification, and it is possible to stably control an advantageous section and appropriately suppress gambling.

In the second specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) × B (100 games) <C (400 sheets)) is that the inclination value A × the number of games in the limiter B <the difference number C in the number limiter. Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows in consideration of the case where the limiter is activated.

If more than 400 medals are paid out before 100 games are paid out, the number limiter is activated, and if 100 games are paid out before more than 400 medals are paid out, the number of games is played. The limiter is activated. If the number of bonuses is drawn more than the expected value, or if the push order role with a large net increase is drawn extremely more than the expected value, the number limiter is activated, and if the game progresses at a value close to the expected value, the number of games The limiter is more likely to be activated. Since the inclination value is "3", as a result, when the limiter is activated, the number of games limiter by reaching 100G is easier to activate than the number limiter, and the player's consciousness is the game rather than the difference number. It will lean toward the number.

That is, since the inclination value is "3", 400 medals are paid out in 133.3 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number of games limiter will be reached before that. Therefore, the ease of activation is as follows: game number limiter> number number limiter. If you do not want to worry about the activation of the number limiter due to the difference in the number of sheets, it is better to use such specifications. For example, in the case of a type in which the end condition (not the limiter) such as ending with a net increase of 100 sheets per set is managed by the difference number, if such a limiter specification is used, the frequency of activation of the limiter can be suppressed and the player can use it. The limiter can reduce the frequency with which the advantageous section is cut off, and can suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

In the third specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) x B (100 games)> C (200 sheets)) in which the inclination value A x the number of games in the limiter B> the difference number C in the number limiter is set. Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows in consideration of the case where the limiter is activated.

If more than 200 medals are paid out before 100 games are paid out, the number limiter will be activated, and if 100 games are paid out before more than 200 medals are paid out, the number of games will be played. The limiter is activated. Since the inclination value is "3", 200 medals will be paid out in about 66.6 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number limiter will be reached before 100 games are exhausted. Therefore, the ease of activation is such that the number of games limiter <the number of games limiter. If you don't want to worry about the activation of the number of games limiter due to the number of games, you can use this specification. For example, for a specification in which the net increase in the number of games per game is relatively low, such as 0.1 to 1, but the number of games continues for a long time, such a specification can suppress the activation frequency of the limiter, and the player can use the limiter. Therefore, the frequency with which the advantageous section is cut off can be reduced, and the decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

In any specification, the end condition of the advantageous section other than the limiter is more than the ratio of the end when the limiter is reached (for example, the ART continuability period (the number of ART games), the number of sets, the stock becomes zero, etc.). Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the right to digest the advantageous section is eliminated by activating the limiter as a ball ejection design in which the rate at which the advantageous section ends is high.

Next, the playability that can be realized when a plurality of limiters are provided will be described.

(Direction at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of limiter)
The sub-control board 72 may be able to execute different advantageous section end-time effects by using the display device 11 or the like when the number limiter is activated and when the game number limiter is activated. If each is a dedicated production, it will lead to a game motivation to see each production once. Further, the sub-control board 72 may have different distribution of the effect performed at the end of the advantageous section depending on the type of the limiter. For example, if the number limiter is used, the accuracy of setting suggestion may be higher than when the game number limiter is activated (the difference in coefficients for each setting is large, or it is easy to produce an effect in which a specific setting is fixed). By obtaining specific information such as setting suggestions or seeing a special effect, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that the advantageous section is cut off by the limiter. Further, the distribution of the effect performed at the end of the advantageous section may be set based on the above-mentioned limiter specifications. For example, in terms of specifications, it is easier for the player to determine the effect (for example, the accuracy of setting suggestion is high) that the sub-control board 72 is preferable to the case where the limiter that is difficult to activate is activated rather than the limiter that is easy to activate. May be good.

(Ending production according to the type of limiter)
Further, the sub-control board 72 has an ending effect A when the activation of the number limiter is concentrated, and an ending effect B when the activation of the number of games limiter is concentrated. There is no big difference in the rate of occurrence, but if at least one of them occurs more heavily, ending effect C (may be an effect with a branch to ending effect A or B), etc. It is also possible to provide an advantageous section end suggestion effect period (ending) before the limiter is activated so that the player does not feel uncomfortable due to sudden termination at the end of the advantageous section. In addition, "the situation where the number limiter is activated" means, for example, when the ART is managed based on information other than the difference number, the difference calculated from the difference number so far and the remaining ART period. The sum with the number of sheets (for example, "the number of remaining games x the inclination value" in the case of ART for managing the number of games) is set to the threshold value (for example, the difference number of sheets in which the number limiter is activated or a value slightly smaller than the difference number of sheets). It is when the number of sheets is reached, and when, for example, ART is managed based on the number of difference sheets, the sum of the number of sheets of difference so far and the number of remaining sheets reaches a threshold value. In addition, "the situation where the activation of the number of games limiter is concentrated" is calculated from the number of games that have passed so far and the remaining ART period, for example, when managing ART based on information other than the number of games. The sum with the number of games to be played (for example, "remaining difference number / gradient value" in the case of ART for managing the difference number) is slightly smaller than the threshold (for example, the number of games in which the number of games limiter is activated or the number of games concerned). (Small value) is reached, and for example, when ART is managed based on the number of games, the sum of the number of games that have passed so far and the number of remaining games reaches the threshold value.

(Notify or suggest the type of limiter activated on the history screen)
Further, the sub-control board 72 displays on the game history screen that the player can view on the menu screen about the type of the activated limiter or the effect generated corresponding to the limiter type (the type of the ending effect, etc.). Is also good. In this case, since a large number of balls have been obtained in the first place, it is possible to arouse the motivation to play that a high setting can be expected.

(Outputs an external signal according to the type of limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output an external signal of a type corresponding to the activated limiter so that the hall side can grasp which of the number limiter and the game number limiter is activated by a hall computer or the like. At this time, the main control board 71 may output an external signal for activating the limiter from different pins of the external terminal board. For example, in the case of the original ball ejection specification, the number of games limiter is mainly activated, and in the model where the number limiter is not activated so much, if the number limiter is activated frequently, some kind of goto action is performed or the game The hall clerk can detect the possibility of a connection error between the machine and the hall computer.

When the activation condition of the number limiter and the activation condition of the number of games limiter are satisfied in the same game, the main control board 71 may output one of the predetermined signals, or two types of signals may be output. It may be output in a predetermined order. When outputting in order, it is preferable to wait a predetermined time from the completion of the output of the signal to be output first to the output of the next signal so that the signal can be reliably received. Further, when the activation condition of the number limiter and the activation condition of the number of games limiter are satisfied in the same game, it is assumed that only one of the limit processing is performed and the other processing is not performed, and the main (main control board 71). In this case, the main control board 71 outputs an external signal according to the type of limiter performed.

(Outputs one external signal regardless of the type of limiter)
Further, if there is a margin in the capacity of the main (main control board 71) and the number of pins of the terminal board for external signal output, they may be different as described above, but the same external signal is used regardless of the type of limiter. May be output. The capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be saved.

(The same external signal is output at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output the same external signal at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter, so that the hall computer or the like can detect that the advantageous section has ended. In this case, the capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be further saved.

(Example of external signal output when the limiter is activated during bonus operation (output immediately))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal immediately after the game or the end of the game. By doing this, for example, even if the number of shots obtained exceeds the number of number limiters, it does not mean that the limiter function was inadequate, and the bonus was activated near the number limiter reached by chance to win the ball. Can be confirmed on the hall side.

(External signal output when the limiter is activated while the bonus is operating (at the end of the bonus))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal at the end of the bonus or immediately after the end. Such a specification may be used when it is desired to accurately grasp the end of the game state in which the number of balls is substantially increased.

(Production when the player misses a small role in a game that may activate the number limiter)
For example, in a three-card game where the number of remaining cards until the number limiter is activated is six, nine medals are paid out at the time of the correct answer. Regardless, if the player makes a mistake in the push order, the number limiter may be activated in the game by looking at the situation at the start of the game, and the production when the number limiter is activated may be started from the start of the game. .. In such a case, as a result of making a mistake in the pushing order, the number limiter is not activated, but the sub-control board 72 is scheduled to activate the number limiter that started from the start of the game (for example, the number limiter is scheduled to be activated). The effect) may be continuously executed as it is, or the effect may be temporarily terminated or interrupted by determining that the number limiter is not activated.

(Production when the limiter to be activated is changed by the operation of the player)
In addition, the type of limiter to be activated may differ due to a player's operation error or the like. For example, in a situation where the number of remaining games until the number limiter is activated is 6 and the number of remaining games until the number of games limiter is activated is 2 games, 9 medals are paid out at the time of correct answer in a 3-card game. This corresponds to the case where the order of pushing the correct answer is notified by winning the small role. In such a case, if the player performs the stop operation according to the notification, the number limiter is activated in the game, but if the player makes a mistake in the pressing order without following the notification, the game number limiter is activated in the next game. (In addition, there is a possibility that the number limiter will be activated in the next game, but here, it is assumed that the number of games limiter is activated with priority when multiple limiter activation conditions are satisfied).

In such a case, the sub-control board 72 starts the effect when the number limiter is activated in the game in which the push order small combination is won, and at an arbitrary timing of the transition in which the non-activation of the number limiter is confirmed (first stop operation ~ When all reels are stopped, switch to the effect when the number of games limiter is activated at any timing after the display of the missing or small number of symbol combinations is confirmed), or the effect does not correspond to the suggestion of any limiter activation. It is preferable to perform a process of returning once and control so as to avoid a contradiction between the limiter to be activated and the effect.

(During the bonus operation, delay of the end effect and extension of the ending effect due to the activation of the limiter inside)
Regarding the effects and controls related to the limit processing described so far, if the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation described above, the bonus ends the timing of the production according to the end of the advantageous section due to the limit processing. By using a method of delaying the time or until immediately after the end and extending the effect during the advantageous section such as the ending effect, the player's discomfort can be reduced.

[How to control the number limiter]
Subsequently, a method of controlling the number limiter will be described with reference to FIG. 101 (B). In the number limiter, the point where the absolute value of the medal has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section is set as the lowest point (starting point), and the plus amount from the latest lowest point is used as the difference number that triggers the activation of the number limiter. .. The figure shows an example in which the game progresses with the start of the advantageous section as the first game, the increase / decrease of medals is repeated in 1 to 8 games, and then the number of medals is increased to reach the number limiter (note that the batting order is reached). The small role is written as "batting order bell").

In the figure, the point where the absolute value of medals decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section is "-9", so the number limiter is activated at the timing when the difference is "+2391" in the N game. ing. The counter for the limiter is reset to 0 with the activation of the number limiter. After that, as a result of correctly answering in the order of pushing in the N + 2 game and aligning the bells, the difference number from the starting point exceeds "+2400 sheets", but the number limiter has already been activated and the advantageous section (ART) has ended. , It's only temporary and there is no problem.

In the figure, the absolute difference number from the start of the advantageous section at the end of the payout of the game is shown, but it is a value for explanation, and the corresponding counter does not need to be mounted on the gaming machine. Of course, the corresponding counter may be mounted and used to show the player the number of acquired cards.

Further, the starting point flag is information indicating that the current game situation is the lowest point after the start of the advantageous section. It may be recognized as the lowest point simply because the value of the counter (number counter) used for the limiter is 0 without having the starting point flag, but whether or not the difference number subtraction until the number limiter is activated has started. Is produced on the sub (sub control board 72) side, etc., by referring to the starting point flag that can be performed only by ON / OFF judgment, and producing the value of the number counter without transmitting it to the sub side (main control board). The processing load of 71) can be reduced. In that case, the sub side receives the information on the number of input and the number of payouts transmitted from the main and performs the same processing as the number counter on the sub side, and produces the status of the number counter (notification of the number of sheets until the number limiter is activated). Etc.) may be performed.

The lowest point (starting point) may be updated either when the value becomes the same as or less than the latest lowest point. At the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, the absolute difference number becomes "-3" and then increases once, and at the end of the fourth game, the absolute difference becomes "-3" again. Therefore, the main control board 71 sets the starting point flag again at the end of the fourth game. Actually, since the number of medals has decreased since then, the absolute difference number at the end of the eighth game after the start of the advantageous section is "-9", which is the starting point in the number limiter.

In the figure, the first lowest point is the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, but the time before the digestion of one game at the start of the advantageous section (when the absolute difference number is 0) is set. It is set as the first lowest point, the end of one game is the second lowest point, the time when it becomes minus 9 is the third lowest point, and when 2400 sheets are increased from the third lowest point, the number limiter is activated. May be. Further, in the figure, when the replay wins a prize, the number counter is updated with 0 inserted and 0 paid out. As a result, it is not necessary to update the difference number of sheets at the time of replay, and the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, it is also possible to pay out the number of inserted sheets at the time of winning the replay, and update the number counter with the number of inserted sheets being 3 in the next game. By doing so, the value of the number counter between the time when the replay wins and the time when the start operation of the next game is performed can be matched with the actual difference number behavior, and the value of the number counter can be changed to the actual increase / decrease number. It can be easily diverted to display the number of sheets for production.

The sub-control board 72 may notify the value of the number counter on the display device 11 (liquid crystal screen) or the like so that the player can grasp or suggest the remaining number of sheets until the number limiter is activated. Further, the sub-control board 72 does not directly display the remaining number of sheets until the number limiter is activated, and if the number of remaining sheets is 2000 or more until the number of sheets limiter is activated, the first production stage, if the remaining 1000 to 1999 sheets, the second production stage, and the remaining 999 sheets. If the number of sheets is less than the number of sheets, the production stage such as the background may be suggested to be different depending on the number of sheets range until the number of sheets limiter is activated, as in the third production stage.

Further, the main control board 71 may output the value of the number counter as an external signal so that it can be displayed on a data display for viewing game data installed on a hall computer, an upper part of a pachislot machine, or the like. It is preferable that the main control board 71 maintains the values of the starting point flag and the number counter without erasing even when the power is cut off. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may erase the values of the starting point flag and the number counter when the setting is changed.

[Adjustment method of number limiter]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 102 (C), an adjustment striking method of the number limiter will be described. In the specification of forcibly ending the advantageous section by using the number limiter, a method of activating the number limiter can be considered by adjusting the increase / decrease of medals immediately before the activation of the number limiter. For example, if the push order small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, "9" medals are paid out and the stop operation is performed in the incorrect push order. In the specification that the payout of medals is "0", 3 medals are required in one game, so if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order at the time of winning the push order, the number counter will be "+6 sheets" is set, and if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect pressing order when the push order combination is won, the number counter is set to "-3 sheets". Therefore, for example, when the push order is won three times, if the push order is incorrect twice and the correct answer is made once, the value of the number counter is maintained, and as a result, the number limiter is not activated.

By adjusting the number-of-sheet limiter in this way, it is possible to wait for the winning of the bonus while keeping the ART (advantageous section) immediately before the number-of-sheet limiter is activated. In the example shown in the figure, such an adjustment batting method starts from the M game, and the adjustment batting method is performed up to the X game that wins the BB (bonus). As a result, in the X + 10th game, +2512 medals, which exceeds +2400 in which the number limiter is activated, have been obtained (note that the small role (15) in BB is described as "BB medium bell". ).

In Pachislot 1, it is possible to obtain the maximum profit for the player by suggesting or notifying that it is advantageous to intentionally oppose the batting order notification (stop different from the batting order navigation). Operation) may be prompted. It should be noted that such an effect may be performed by the sub-control board 72 via the display device 11 or the like, or may be performed by the main control board 71.

If there are multiple types of bonus roles such as a mini bonus with a net increase of about 15 cards and a relatively high winning probability (15 cards in the bonus operation cannot be missed or difficult) and a bonus with a net increase of 120 cards, the number limiter The effect of recommending the above adjustment striking method may be performed on a line in which the remaining difference number until reaching is larger than the net increase number in the mini bonus. Further, as for the small winning combination other than the pushing order combination, the number of payouts may be easily adjusted (for example, the number of payouts is 3) without increasing the number of payouts exceeding 3. In this way, the fun of the game is enhanced by making the game playable so that the ball output rate can be improved by devising the way of hitting.

If you place importance on the disadvantages such as the complexity of the game being avoided by beginners, the number counter is not added by the actual net increase, but by the net increase when the game is played as instructed. You may do it. For example, in a three-card game, when a player wins a push order small winning combination in which nine medals are paid out at the time of a correct answer, the main control board 71 determines the operation mode of the player on the condition that the correct push order is notified. Regardless of the winning result, the number counter is set to +6. As such a specification, a specification that seals such an adjustment striking method may be used.

[Playability with specifications that block the adjustment method]
Next, the playability that can be realized by the specification that seals such an adjustment striking method will be described.

(No bonus installed)
In the first place, if the internal winning combination is composed only of a small role and a replay without installing a bonus role, the player does not have to ask the player for the above-mentioned complicated batting method, and the playability becomes easy to understand.

(Equipped with a bonus that does not increase or decrease or decreases)
In addition, as another specification example of suppressing the above-mentioned batting method, the bonus may be a non-increasing / decreasing bonus in which only a small winning combination in which the same number of coins is paid out during operation is won, and the bonus is thrown during operation. It may be a reduced bonus in which only small wins are paid out, which is less than the number of cards. In this case, the bonus may be performed during the bonus operation or during the bonus operation in the lottery of the advantageous section instead of increasing the medals, and although the advantageous processing is not performed, the player at the game store As long as a normal game is performed, the reel control hinders the winning of the bonus, and the bonus may be difficult to win.

(The net increase in the number of cards during bonus operation is 3 or less)
Assuming a three-card game, there is no payout at the time of bonus winning, so the difference in the bonus winning game is minus three. Assuming that the bonus ends in one game with three cards, the maximum number of winnings that can be generated during the bonus operation is 6 cards or less. By doing so, the difference number of sheets from the time when the bonus is activated to the end of the bonus does not become a positive value, so that the value of the number counter does not increase due to the bonus operation, and the above-mentioned complicated hitting The player does not have to do the law.

[Playability with specifications that allow adjustment batting]
Next, the playability that can be realized with the specifications that allow such an adjustment batting method will be described.

(Removing small roles during bonus operation or reducing the number of acquired cards)
In addition to the specifications that can be used for the above-mentioned striking method, if the number limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the number of bonuses obtained is intentionally reduced to end the bonus, and after the bonus, the above-mentioned striking method is used. It may be most advantageous to wait for the next bonus while extending the life of the advantageous section. Therefore, during the bonus operation, it is possible to drop a small winning combination in the pressing timing or pressing order, or to win a winning combination with a small number of payouts. In this case, it is desirable that the number of winnings with a small number of payouts is smaller than the number of coins inserted during the bonus operation. For example, when a specific point is pressed, 14 cards are paid out, and when other points are pressed, 15 cards are paid out. A certain effect can be achieved even if a role that allows fine adjustment such as being received is provided.

(Normal roles other than push order are only replays or roles less than the number of inputs)
For example, it is assumed that three cards are hung while the bonus is not operating. The number of small push order roles is 9, but other roles such as so-called watermelon, cherry, and bell without the concept of push order are configured as a replay role or a role with 3 or less payouts. By doing so, even if another small role is drawn in a situation where the number limiter operates with the net increase of the remaining few sheets, the number limiter does not operate and the difficulty of the strategy is reduced, making it easier to play.

(The player can intervene at the frequency of winning a specific number of cards (1-2 cards) when the stop operation is different from the navigation of the push order role.)
There is a specification that one sheet will be paid out or missed if the stop operation is different from the push order navigation. In this case, since the increase / decrease of the game occurs in two ways, minus 2 and minus 3, it is difficult to calculate and it may be confusing while playing. Compared to such specifications, when the number of sheets is fixed, such as when 1 or 2 sheets are always aligned when ignoring the navigation, the negative value when ignoring the navigation with the number of sheets at the last minute is fixed to, for example, minus 2. Therefore, it is easy to calculate, and the careless mistake that the player makes a mistake in the calculation and hits the part that should be ignored by the navigation one more time according to the navigation and takes the batting order bell is reduced.

It should be noted that a certain effect can be exhibited even if the sheet is generally stabilized, such as one sheet being paid out or being missed at a high frequency, not always. In addition, the number of payouts may be stable due to the pattern of ignoring navigation. For example, when the batting order navigation of "1, 2, 3" (left, middle, right is the correct batting order) occurs, the winning rate of 1 card is "middle 1st"> "right 1st", and 3 cards If you want to reduce it, you may choose the right first stop, and if you want to reduce the number of cards, you may choose the middle first stop. In addition, if you miss the second stop after the first stop is correct in the game, and if you stop in the order of "1.3.2", there is a higher probability than other navigation-ignored batting orders, or one card will always win. , It is good that the player can select how to reduce by batting order.

(Navigation mode changes when navigation should be ignored)
When it is optimal to play according to the navigation, the sub-control board 72 displays the push order in the first mode (blue numbers, etc.), and when it is optimal to play against the navigation, the sub-control board 72. Displays the push order in the second mode (red numbers, etc.).

(Changes depending on the situation or production that should be ignored in navigation)
The main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 may be different depending on the situation in which the BGM, the image, the lamp, or the like is followed by the navigation and the situation in which the navigation is against the navigation. It is desirable to be able to grasp in advance whether or not the situation should be against the navigation when the navigation occurs in the next game before the navigation occurs.

(Lock or reel freeze when navigation should be ignored)
The main control board 71 may be provided with a reel rotation start delay (freeze or reel action) or a temporary operation acceptance invalidation period of the stop button immediately after the lever is turned on or after the reel rotation is started. As a result, it is possible to alert the player and prevent a case where the advantageous section is accidentally ended. Further, it is desirable that the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 also alerts by audio or video.

[Another example of advantageous section limiter (payout number limiter)]
Here, in the above-mentioned number limiter, the difference number (= payout number-insertion number), that is, based on the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out to the player. , Limit processing is to be performed, but it is not limited to this. The main control board 71 may perform limit processing using the number of medals paid out to the player, and such a limiter is called a payout number limiter. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing for ending the advantageous section when a predetermined number of medals (for example, 2400 medals) are paid out during the advantageous section.

In the above-mentioned number limiter, the limit processing is performed based on the difference number obtained by subtracting the input number from the payout number, but in the payout number limiter, the payout number is referred to as it is without subtracting the input number from the payout number. When the number of payouts reaches the specified value, limit processing is performed. In such a payout limiter, the main control board 71 is an advantageous section (in this case, including, for example, the above-mentioned "normal advantageous section") or an increase section (that is, a game section in which medals actually increase. In this case, for example, for example. The payout number counter is initialized at the start of the above-mentioned "normal advantageous section"), and the payout number counter is updated every time a payout occurs due to a small winning combination. Then, when the value of the payout number counter reaches the specified value for performing the limit processing, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section, and also performs various processing and a limit processing for initializing the value related to the advantageous section.

Even in such a payout number limiter, the method of updating the payout number counter when the winning combination related to the replay is won is arbitrary, and it may be counted as 3 payouts, or it is counted as 0 payouts. However, it is desirable that the main control board 71 counts as 0 payouts when the winning combination related to the replay wins. By doing so, for example, in a 3BET game, there are cases where a three-card combination (a combination in which three medals are paid out when a prize is won) is won, and a case where a combination related to replay is won, and a payout number counter. Changes in the value of can be made different. That is, the number of payout counters does not advance when the combination related to the replay wins, compared to the case where the three-card combination wins, so that the player can feel a sense of profit, which is substantially the same. It is possible to make a difference in the value between the three-card combination, which is the value, and the combination related to the replay.

[Another example of advantageous section limiter (navigation number limiter)]
Further, as the type of the limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section, the navigation number limiter described below can also be used. When the navigation count limiter is used, the main control board 71 triggers the player to be notified (navigated) a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) during the advantageous section (that is, the number of navigations is a specified value). When the result is reached), the limit processing of the advantageous section is performed. Here, among the navigations performed to the player during the advantageous section such as ART, in addition to the navigation for increasing the medals during the advantageous section, the normal section is to maintain the medals or decrease the medals during the advantageous section. There is a navigation system to suppress it compared to the inside. The former navigation is, for example, in the 3BET game, when the correct answer is stopped (for example, when the push order is correct), more than 3 medals (for example, 9 medals) are paid out. It means to notify the mode of the stop operation, and the latter navigation is, for example, a navigation for maintaining the RT state at a high RT, three medals when the mode of the correct stop operation is in the 3BET game, or In the case of the correct answer stop operation mode, there are less than three medals, but in the case of the incorrect answer stop operation mode (for example, when the push order is incorrect), more medals are paid out. It means to notify the aspect of. The former role that is the target of navigation can be called an increasing role that increases medals during the advantageous section (ART) from that role. In pachislot, which of the plurality of roles should be used as an increasing role can be arbitrarily designed from the viewpoint of game specifications.

When the navigation number limiter is used, the main control board 71 counts the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the increasing combination, which is a condition for generating the limit processing by the navigation number limiter, while the non-increasing combination. The number of navigations performed at the time of winning may be excluded from the counting target of the number of navigations, and the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increasing role may also be included in the counting target of the number of navigations. May be good. By excluding the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increasing role from the count target, the number of medals has increased too much, as in the case where many non-increasing roles were accidentally established after the start of the advantageous section (ART). If this is not the case, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending due to an event unrelated to the purpose of the limiter, which is to suppress excessive ball ejection, and the player will not be dissatisfied.

In such a navigation count limiter, the main control board 71 initializes a navigation count counter (navigation counter), which is a condition for generating a limit process at the start of an advantageous section or an increase section, to generate a navigation to be counted. The value of the navigation count counter is updated each time. Then, when the value of the navigation count counter reaches the specified value for performing the limit processing, the main control board 71 terminates the advantageous section and performs various processing and limiting processing for initializing the value related to the advantageous section. In the various limiters described so far, the method of updating the counter may be an addition type or a subtraction type.

[Another example of limiter period]
Further, in the above description, an example in which a limiter such as a game number limiter, a number number limiter, a payout number limiter, and a navigation number limiter is used only in an advantageous section has been described, but such a limiter is not in the advantageous section. It can be adopted at any time. For example, if you accidentally continue to hit the advantageous section, medals will be paid out only for the maximum number of medals in each advantageous section, but as a result of multiple transitions to the advantageous section, the total Then, many medals may be paid out, which may incite excessive gambling. Therefore, apart from the limiter in the advantageous section, a value (for example, the payout rate and the difference number) indicating the increase status of the period (for example, the latest 6000 games) for the latest predetermined number of games is a predetermined predetermined value. A special limiter may be provided to end the advantageous section when the number exceeds (for example, 170% or +10000 sheets from the viewpoint of the player). According to such a special limiter, when the activation condition of the special limiter is satisfied during the advantageous section, the main control board 71 has just started the advantageous section, and the game number limiter and the number number limiter are completely activated. Even if the situation is not possible, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated.

In the control of the advantageous section on the main control board 71, the right regarding the advantageous section currently acquired (for example, the duration of ART (the number of ART games), the number of sets and stock, the number of gainable differences, etc.) is issued. When there is a risk that the special limiter will be activated with reference to the ball rate, the main control board 71 will reduce the occurrence rate of the addition before reaching the specified value, and the possibility of activating the special limiter will be increased. It may be controlled so that the right of the increase interval (ART) to be lowered or erased when the special limiter is activated is reduced.

Further, the predetermined period used for determining the activation of the special limiter based on the value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate or the difference number of medals) may be based on a value other than the number of games, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 10). Determine the predetermined period for activating the special limiter by using information such as time) and a predetermined number of inserted sheets (for example, 18,000 inserted sheets) that can determine that the player has played the game over a predetermined period. May be.

The configuration of a pachislot machine using such a special limiter is shown below.
It is a gaming machine that can be played using the gaming value.
The right to make the gaming state an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, an advantageous section in pachislot, an increasing section (AT, ART), a probabilistic state in pachinko, or a shortened time state) (pachislot). It may be the AT stock, the number of AT games, etc. in the pachinko machine, or it may be the right to shift to the probabilistic state, the time saving state, etc. in pachinko). When,
A game state control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the game state to the advantageous game state until the end condition is satisfied based on the right.
Advantageous gaming state continuation means for continuing the advantageous gaming state when there is the right (for example, the main control board 71 (the AT state may be continued when there is the number of AT stocks in the pachislot machine, etc., and the pachinko machine). It may be a continuation of the probability change state or the time saving state in)),
An increase status storage means (for example, a difference number used by the main control board 71 to determine the activation condition of the special limiter) for storing a value indicating an increase status of the game value from a predetermined unit game to the elapse of a predetermined period. Counter for monitoring the payout rate) and
A gaming machine including a special termination means (special limiter) for terminating the advantageous state even if the player has the right when the value of the increase status storage means reaches a predetermined predetermined value.

Further, the above-mentioned special limiter is not limited to the latest predetermined period, and may be, for example, a daily limiter, or both may be used in combination. The method by which the main control board 71 grasps the daily unit is arbitrary. As an example, when the main control board 71 is cut off for a predetermined time (a time value that can be distinguished from a temporary power failure during business hours such as 2 hours and 4 hours and can be presumed to be a power failure during closing due to the closing of business). Or, a value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, by resetting the information for the previous day) from the start point (starting point) of the day when the power is turned on after the power is turned off for a predetermined time or longer. The special limiter is controlled by monitoring the payout rate and the difference number. Further, the main control board 71 resets the information for the previous day from the starting point (that is, the information for the previous day) with the time when a predetermined time (1 hour or the like) or more has elapsed in the power-on state as the starting point (starting point) of the day. ), The special limiter may be controlled by monitoring a value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate or the difference number). In any case, the timekeeping method can be realized by mounting a timekeeping means such as an RTC on the main control board 71.

[Penalty for navigation mistakes]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 may be given a predetermined penalty when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player during the advantageous section. For example, in the case of a specification in which an additional lottery of ART is performed while waiting for a transition to a high RT such as during ART preparation (each preparation state described above), the transition to a high RT is avoided and the ART is being prepared. By stretching it, you can receive a lot of extra lottery during ART preparation. Therefore, the main control board 71 may not perform such an additional lottery of ART when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player. Since it is not possible to determine whether the error is an accidental error or an intentional error, for example, the main control board 71 changes the degree of penalty according to the number of stop operations that do not follow the notification. May be.

<Detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specifications)>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 121, a detailed example of another example (No. 6) of the game playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. Although other examples (No. 6) of game playability (game specifications) have already been described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99, this detailed example will describe an example more embodied as a gaming machine. Further, among the inventions described in this detailed example, those that do not require the specifications of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specifications) can be appropriately applied to other game playability (game specifications). Suppose there is. Further, in this detailed example, a line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R is defined as an effective line in the frame of the reel display window 4. To do.

[Playability of this detailed example]
First, the flow of the game in this detailed example will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 106. Note that FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section in the detailed example, and FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining each mode in the detailed example. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of various tables in this detailed example.

As shown in FIG. 103, in this detailed example, the state in which the player plays a game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section is further divided into an effect section (advantageous section / normal game) and an increasing section. (Advantageous section / pseudo bonus) is provided. The non-advantageous section is a gaming state (non-AT / non-ART) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. The production section is a gaming state (non-AT / non-ART) in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player, which is the same as the non-advantageous section, but will be described later. As such, it differs from the non-advantageous section in that the mode transition is performed.

That is, the non-advantageous section is defined as an initial state that is controlled when the game in the advantageous section is completed, when the setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are satisfied, or when the product is shipped from the factory. The effect section is a control state as a normal state in which the expected degree of increase section transition (granting) can be changed by mode transition or the like, and the player plays a normal game.

On the other hand, the increasing section is a gaming state (AT / ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, the increase section is a control state as an advantageous state in which the player can increase the game value. Both the production section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and are configured as a series of advantageous sections by shifting these sections to each other.

In this detailed example, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the non-advantageous section sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 108 described later) is determined in the non-advantageous section. Will be done. This is information set for the same purpose as the "lottery number" described in the present embodiment, and in the non-advantageous section, lottery using this non-advantageous section sub-flag is performed.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Ripbell" has internal winning roles of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2". "(No." 10 "to No." 33 "). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "weak che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "fixed combination" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_fixed cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Middle Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7"). It should be noted that the non-advantageous section can also be configured so that the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag can be determined as in the advantageous section. Further, these correspondences are not limited to those described above.

Further, in this detailed example, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined as the secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 108 described later) in the advantageous section. Will be done. Further, in the advantageous section, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the combination of the displayed symbols is determined. These are information set for the same purpose as the "lottery number" described in the present embodiment, and in the advantageous section, lottery is performed using these advantageous section winning sub-flags and advantageous section winning sub-flags.

The sub-flag "bell" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is any one of "F_bell 123A1" to "F_bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The sub-flag "weak che" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_cherry" (No. "5"). The sub-flag "watermelon" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"). The sub-flag "fixed combination" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_fixed cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach eye" (No. "8"). .. The sub-flag "middle che" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_middle cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag "Tsu Lip 1" at the time of winning the advantageous section is "Right" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). It is determined when the combination of the symbols of "rising rip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "rising rip to the right"). The sub-flag "Through Lip 2" at the time of winning the advantageous section is "parallel" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). It is determined when the combination of the symbols of "rip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "parallel lip").

Here, in this detailed example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_replay A" (No. "3"), the space between the 3BB flags (that is, "F_3BB" (No. "2") is In the state where it is determined as the internal winning combination and it is carried over), the combination of the symbols of "upward rising lip" is displayed, and the space between the 2BB flags (that is, "F_2BB" (No. "1") is the internal winning combination. (A state in which it is carried over) and between non-flags (that is, a state in which neither "F_2BB" (No. "1") nor "F_3BB" (No. "2") is carried over). In, the combination of "parallel lip" symbols is displayed.

Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Through Lip 1" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section between the 3BB flags, and between the 2BB flags and the non-flags. "Tsu Lip 2" is now determined as a sub-flag when winning an advantageous section. Then, in this detailed example, when the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section are different in this way, various lottery described later (for example, a pseudo bonus transition lottery using the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (c) or FIG. 106 ( The degree of advantage in the mode transition lottery) using the mode transition lottery table shown in f) is changed.

In this detailed example, for example, "F_replay A" (No. "3") is used as a role in which the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section changes depending on whether it is between the 3BB flags or between the 2BB flags. As explained by giving an example, the mode in which the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section changes is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is different depending on whether it is between the 3BB flags and the 2BB flags. Therefore, when winning such a combination, the game value may not be changed, the combination of displayed symbols may be different, and different sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"), the pressing position (timing of stop operation) is appropriate regardless of which flag is between. If there is, the combination of "watermelon" symbols will be displayed, and if the pressing position is not appropriate, a dropout will occur and the combination of "watermelon spills" symbols will be displayed. In this case, different advantageous section winning sub-flags may be determined depending on whether the winning is possible without the omission occurring or the omission occurs. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is "F_replay A" (No. "3"), the stop operation is a specific mode between the 3BB flags (in this specific mode, for example, the stop operation is defined in advance. If it is performed in the batting order (correct answer pressing order), the pressing position (timing of the stop operation) is appropriate, or a combination of these, any aspect may be used). The combination of "parallel rip" symbols is displayed, and if it is not performed in a specific mode, the combination of "right-up rip" symbols is displayed, which determines a different advantageous section winning sub-flag. You may do so. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

That is, in this detailed example, it is possible that the final stop display mode may differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination of these, and the specific combination is different. It is possible to apply all the modes in which different secondary information can be determined according to the stop display mode, whereby the degree of advantage can be changed.

Return to the description of the game playability of this detailed example. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (b) is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the non-advantageous section sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing, the transition destination mode and the like are determined according to the non-game section sub-flag. In this determination, when only the type of the mode when shifting to the advantageous section is determined (“start of advantageous section” in FIG. 103), not only the type of the mode but also the pseudo bonus may be shifted. There is a case where it is decided (in FIG. 103, "advantageous section start + pseudo bonus start"). However, in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to make the specifications so that it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus.

Here, each mode in this detailed example will be described with reference to FIG. 104. In this detailed example, the mode is control information (which may be paraphrased as a game state or a control state) for changing the degree of expectation of an increase section (pseudo-bonus) transition (grant) in an effect section (normal game). In the production section (normal game), according to this mode, it is decided whether or not there is a pseudo-bonus transition, the advantageous section is maintained, or the advantageous section is terminated and the transition to the non-advantageous section is determined. It has become.

The start mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (directing section), and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see the figure below). (See (c) of 105), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 106 described later). Although not shown, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games" in the start mode. The number of ceiling games is used to forcibly shift to the pseudo-bonus when the period during which the pseudo-bonus does not shift becomes a certain period. Therefore, the smaller the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous to the player, and the larger the number of ceiling games, the more disadvantageous to the player.

Normally, the A mode is the mode in which the player is most likely to stay and is relatively disadvantageous in playing the game, and the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low ((c) in FIG. 105 described later). (See), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 106 described later). In the normal A mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games". Further, in FIG. 104, "about 999G after the pseudo-bonus" means that after the end of the pseudo-bonus, the mode shifts to the end A mode or the end B mode described later, and 32 games without shifting to the pseudo-bonus in the mode. If this normal A mode is selected when the game is played and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section once and then shifts from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, the apparent number of ceiling games is "965 games" + end A. This is expressed because it is the game period "32 games" in the mode or the end B mode + the number of games required to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. Hereinafter, the same applies to the normal B mode, the heaven preparation mode, and the chance mode.

Normally, B mode is a mode that is relatively easy for the player to stay in playing a game and is relatively disadvantageous, but it is a mode that is more advantageous than normal A mode, and the degree of expectation to shift to a pseudo bonus is It is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 105 below), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 106 described later). In the normal A mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games".

In the heaven preparation mode, the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), but the number of ceiling games is set to "466 games", and when shifting to the pseudo bonus. After that, it is confirmed that the mode will shift to the heaven mode (see (f) in FIG. 106 described later), so that the mode is relatively advantageous in that sense.

In the chance mode, the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is set to "222 games", which is relatively advantageous in that sense. Mode. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 106 described later).

End A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay if you do not shift to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the transition to the pseudo bonus, and you expect to shift to the pseudo bonus. The degree is the lowest (see (c) of FIG. 105 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 106 described later). In the end A mode, when 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section.

The end B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than the end A mode because it is easy to stay when the pseudo bonus is changed and the heaven mode (including the heaven preparation mode) is not changed after the end. Since it is a mode, the expectation of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see the figure described later). 106 (see (f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, when 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section. The end A mode and the end B mode can also be collectively referred to as the "end mode".

The guarantee mode is a mode in which the player stays when the heaven C mode ends, and the expectation for shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games". Since it is set to, it is a relatively advantageous mode in that sense. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 106 described later). That is, when the heaven C mode ends, it is positioned as a mode for maintaining (guaranteeing) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time in order to prevent a decrease in interest due to it.

Heaven A mode is a mode in which a pseudo-bonus can be expected to be a so-called consecutive villa, and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32". It is a relatively advantageous mode that is set to "Game" and the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to a medium level. Although not shown in FIG. 104, for example, a setting difference may be provided for the ceiling mode loop rate. For example, when the set value is an odd number (1,3,5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2,4,6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. The lottery value can be set so that, or simply, the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate. The same applies to the heaven B mode and the heaven C mode, which will be described later, and a setting difference can be provided for the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which a pseudo-bonus can be expected to be a so-called consecutive villa, and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32". It is a relatively advantageous mode that is set to "game" and has a high probability that the ceiling mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate). That is, it is a mode that is even more advantageous than the heaven A mode in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which a pseudo-bonus can be expected to be a so-called consecutive villa, and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32". It is a relatively advantageous mode that is set to "game" and the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be quite high. That is, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, the mode is more advantageous than the heaven A mode and the heaven B mode. Heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as "heaven mode".

It should be noted that each of the above-mentioned modes is merely an example, and the mode configuration is not limited to this. It is possible to set a mode other than each of the above-mentioned modes, or it is possible not to set a part of each of the above-mentioned modes.

Further, up to this point, the non-advantageous section has been described as having a relatively lower advantage than the advantageous section, but the relationship between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the non-advantageous section, the transition rate to the increasing section is higher or the average number of games required to shift to the increasing section is shorter than when at least one or more modes are set in the advantageous section. It is also possible to make specifications such as squeezing, or specifications that make it easier for non-advantageous sections to be the most increasing sections. By doing so, an incentive to play the game is created even in a non-advantageous section such as after the setting is changed, which motivates the game to start even when the store is opened. Further, when 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo bonus, for example, even when the lighting of the advantageous section lamp described later is finished, it is not determined that the most disadvantageous state will be obtained, so that the game can be played even in such a case. It will be a motivation to continue. Further, up to this point, the effect section has been described as a gaming state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, but a disadvantageous mode as compared with the increase section (for example, the frequency of notification is reduced or the target of notification is targeted. If it is (such as changing the winning combination), it is possible to set the game state in which the information of the stop operation is notified.

Return to the description of the game playability of this detailed example. In the production section (normal game), first, for each game, a pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, during the game after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (c) is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing of, it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In addition, in (c) of FIG. 105, "non-winning" means not shifting to the pseudo-bonus, and "winning (this time game)" means shifting from this game to the pseudo-bonus. "Winning (next game)" means shifting from the next game to a pseudo bonus.

In this detailed example, when the "winning (this time game)" is decided, the game operation is performed at the start of the current game, and when the "winning (next game)" is decided, the game operation is performed at the start of the next game. The stop operation) is invalidated for a certain period of time, and during the invalid period, a reel effect (“red 7 aligned” effect) in which the “red 7” symbols are displayed in the symbol display area 4 is performed, and then a pseudo. If it is necessary to notify the information of the stop operation in the game in which the bonus is started and the "Red 7 Alignment" effect is performed, at least the invalid period ends and the game operation (stop operation) becomes effective. At times (or earlier), information on the stop operation is notified.

In the production section (normal game), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. As a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery described later will be performed. (At the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) will not be held.

In the production section (normal game), if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), for each game (more specifically, "F_replay A" or "F_replay") In the game that wins "B"), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, during the game (next time) after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (c) is referred to, the winning combination is determined, and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined according to the winning combination. At a predetermined timing (before the start of the game), it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

In the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (c), "passing lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, rather than when "passing lip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. In that case, the percentage of decisions to shift to a pseudo-bonus is higher. However, the mode in which "communication lip 2" is given preferential treatment over "communication lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, similar to the one already described in another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification), when "tsurip 2" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section, a pseudo bonus is given with a predetermined probability. However, if "tsurip 1" is determined as a sub-flag when winning an advantageous section, it may not be possible to determine the transition to a pseudo-bonus.

In the production section (normal game), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. As a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) described later is not performed.

In the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f), "passing lip 2" was determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, rather than when "passing lip 1" was determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. In the case, the rate at which it is decided to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is higher. However, the mode in which "communication lip 2" is given preferential treatment over "communication lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Through Lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, it may be decided to shift to the mode which is relatively advantageous to the player with a predetermined probability, but as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, " When the "passing lip 1" is determined, it may not be possible to decide to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

In the production section (normal game), if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the number of ceiling games is updated (addition method or subtraction method may be used), and the ceiling game. When the number reaches the number of ceiling games associated with the current mode, it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus. In this case, it is possible to make sure that the "winning (current game)" is decided, or it is possible to make sure that the "winning (next game)" is decided. In addition, any of these can be determined by lottery.

In the production section (normal game), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus due to the arrival of the number of ceiling games, a mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode.

The processing related to the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of subflag, and the rest are the same processing contents, so that the same lottery table and control flow Can be controlled using. In addition, the processing related to the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of subflag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow are used. Can be controlled.

In addition, if "winning (this time game)" is not provided as the type of winning of the pseudo-bonus, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section has already been determined at the timing when the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined. Since the number of ceiling games can also be updated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the pseudo-bonus transition processing at the time of reaching the ceiling can be performed together in one process. it can. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) can be collectively performed in one process.

Return to the description of the game playability of this detailed example. As described above, in the production section (normal game), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus and the pseudo bonus is started (“pseudo bonus start” in FIG. 103), the shift to the increase section (pseudo bonus). To do. Further, as described above, in the production section (normal game), when the game is controlled to the end A mode or the end B mode and the game of 32 games is digested without shifting to the pseudo bonus (in FIG. 103, "advantageous section". End (via end A / B) ”), shift to a non-advantageous section. Further, when the condition of the limit processing shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, is satisfied, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (“end of advantageous section (limit processing)” in FIG. 103), and as a result, Move to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a ceiling shortening lottery is performed when the pseudo-bonus is started. Specifically, the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (e) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the number of ceiling games after the end of the pseudo bonus according to the current mode. In FIG. 106 (e), "non-winning" means that the number of ceiling games is not shortened, and "winning (number of ceiling games = 0 update)" means that the number of ceiling games is not shortened, regardless of the mode after the pseudo bonus ends. , Means that the number of ceiling games to be set is set to "0" (shortened). The ceiling shortening lottery can be performed not only when the pseudo-bonus is started, but also every game during the pseudo-bonus.

If it is decided not to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling shortening lottery, and if you do not have the 1G consecutive stock described later when the pseudo bonus ends, the number of ceiling games according to the current mode Is set (in the case of the end A mode and the end B mode, the number of ceiling games "965 games" may be temporarily set, or the advantageous section ends and the game shifts to the advantageous section again via the non-advantageous section. It may be set at times), the pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus end” in FIG. 103), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game). On the other hand, if it is decided to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling shortening lottery, "0 games" is set as the number of ceiling games when the pseudo bonus ends. As a result, the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the number of ceiling games is reached, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game in which "fixed combination" or "middle che" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section). .. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In addition, the transition destination mode may be determined even when the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section other than the above is determined, but in this case, in principle, the mode which is relatively disadvantageous compared to the current mode shifts. In order not to be determined as the first mode, another mode transition lottery table having a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) may be referred to.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game that wins "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B"). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In this case, as in the case of the above, in principle, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) is a lottery value so that a mode relatively disadvantageous compared to the current mode is not determined as the transition destination mode. Another mode transition lottery table with a different value may be referenced.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), 1G continuous lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (d) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to generate the 1G consecutive lot according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section or the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Will be done. In addition, in (d) of FIG. 106, "non-winning" means that 1G series is not generated, and "winning (1G series + 1)" has one right to generate 1G series (1G series stock). It means that it is given (1G continuous stock counter is added by 1). It should be noted that the 1G series stock can be stocked (stored) in a plurality (up to 255 pieces) by the 1G series stock counter. Therefore, a plurality of 1G continuous stocks may be given in one pseudo bonus. Further, the 1G continuous lottery table can be configured so that a plurality of 1G continuous lottery can be given by one 1G continuous lottery.

When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G series stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G series stock), one 1G series stock is consumed (1G series stock counter becomes (1 is subtracted), and the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus according to the right of 1G continuous stock is started, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery is not performed. On the other hand, when the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is not 1 or more at the end of the pseudo bonus (that is, when the 1G consecutive stock is not held), or when the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery is not won, The number of ceiling games is set according to the current mode (in the case of the end A mode and the end B mode, the number of ceiling games "965 games" may be temporarily set, or the advantageous section ends and the game is not again. It may be set when the game shifts to the advantageous section via the advantageous section), the pseudo bonus ends (“pseudo bonus end” in FIG. 103), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game).

If you win the ceiling shortening lottery and also have 1G consecutive stock, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery will be prioritized, and after the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the 1G consecutive stock will be given. It may be executed, or the 1G continuous stock may be prioritized, and after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G continuous stock is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening may be executed. In the latter case, it is sufficient to separately store the information that can be carried over that there is a shortening of the ceiling.

In this detailed example, as an example of the configuration of the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a configuration in which a maximum of 275 cards can be obtained by continuing for "55 games" is given as an example, but the configuration of the pseudo-bonus is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo-bonus is configured as a "pseudo-BB (big bonus)", and a "pseudo-RB (regular bonus)", which is a pseudo-bonus that can be continued for "22 games" and can acquire up to 110 cards, is installed. You may do so. In this case, when it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus (grant the right) in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, when the ceiling is reached, and in the 1G continuous lottery, the type (for example, "pseudo-BB") is used. Or "pseudo RB") may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, 50% each). The value of the "pseudo RB" may be different from that of the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, the value is lower than that of the "pseudo BB"). Therefore, for example, the number of continuous games is "pseudo BB". It is the same as "BB", but by setting the bell navigation rate (notification probability that information on the stop operation is notified) to be low, it is possible to make a difference in the maximum number of sheets that can be acquired and make the values different. Further, when starting the "pseudo RB", a reel effect in which the "BAR" symbols are displayed in the symbol display area 4 or a reel effect in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. You can do it like this. Furthermore, the increase section is not limited to what is configured as a pseudo-bonus. For example, it can be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of continuous games (game period) can be changed.

Further, if the execution condition of the limit processing shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, is satisfied during the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (in FIG. 103, “end of advantageous section by limit processing””. ), As a result, it shifts to a non-advantageous section.

In this detailed example, the above-mentioned game flow is basically based on the premise that the game is played in a three-card bet state. Therefore, when the game is played in the state of two bets, various lottery using the above-mentioned (a) to (d) of FIG. 105 and (e) and (f) of FIG. 106 is not performed, and the ceiling. The number of games is not updated either. In addition, if two cards are bet during the pseudo-bonus, the duration of the pseudo-bonus does not progress. However, since the game value does not increase in the two-card bet state, the increase section does not occur during the pseudo-bonus in the two-card bet state. That is, whether this detailed example and another example (No. 6) of the game playability (game specification) described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99 are between the 2BB flags or between the 3BB flags. Although the specifications are different depending on the specifications, the three-card bet state is the state in which the normal game is played, and the player is always disadvantaged when the game is played in the two-card bet state. ..

Further, in this detailed example, the above-mentioned game flow is basically based on the premise that the game is performed in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when the game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), various lottery using (a) to (d) of FIG. 105 and (e) and (f) of FIG. 106 described above is performed. Also, the number of ceiling games is not updated. However, if the bonus state is reached during the pseudo-bonus, the duration of the pseudo-bonus will proceed. That is, this detailed example and another example (No. 6) of the game playability (game specification) described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99 can win a winning bonus combination or win a prize according to the number of bets. It is common in that the specifications are different by making the bonus combination (transferable bonus state) different, but it is different in that activating the bonus state may be disadvantageous to the player. There is.

(Invention 1 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in this detailed example, the ceiling shortening lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the ceiling shortened lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (e), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, the heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode, 1 While there is a probability of / 8 (32/256) to win the ceiling shortening lottery, in other modes, the ceiling shortening lottery is not won. That is, in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games", and in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is larger than that, the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games". The number of ceiling games is not reduced.

Even in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is larger than "32 games", the number of ceiling games has a lower probability (for example, 1/64) than in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games". May be determined to be shortened.

Further, the mode of reducing the number of ceiling games is not limited to the above. For example, if "32 games" is shortened to a predetermined number of games (0 to 31 games), the same effect can be exerted. Therefore, the number of games to be shortened when the ceiling shortening lottery is won is further determined. Alternatively, in the ceiling shortening lottery, the number of games to be shortened may be determined in advance.

Further, the opportunity for the ceiling shortening lottery to be performed is not limited to the above. For example, during the pseudo-bonus, a ceiling shortening lottery may be performed for each game. Also, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, a ceiling shortening lottery is performed for each game. It may be. In these cases, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section may be referred to to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

Further, as described above, in this detailed example, 1G continuous lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the 1G continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (d), the 1G continuous stock may be given regardless of the current mode. That is, regardless of whether or not the mode is such that the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be granted.

The mode of granting the right is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the 1G continuous lottery is prevented in consideration of the fact that the ceiling shortening lottery is performed, and the number of ceiling games is larger than "32 games". It is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high by performing the 1G continuous lottery at the time.

Further, the opportunity for the 1G continuous lottery to be performed is not limited to the above. For example, the 1G continuous lottery may be performed in the advantageous section (directing section) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G continuous stock stocked as a result may be digested in the next pseudo bonus.

Although not shown in FIGS. 103 to 106, in this detailed example, when the current mode is the heaven mode at the start of the pseudo-bonus or during the pseudo-bonus, there is a predetermined probability that the normal mode is not normal. During the special bonus, the effect is such that a different song is output or a character lamp is lit to indicate that it is in an advantageous state. Therefore, when the effect during the special bonus is executed, it can be expected that the ceiling shortening lottery will be executed. In addition, this special bonus effect may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, if the special bonus mid-effect is executed at the start of the pseudo-bonus, it is suggested that he is at least staying in heaven mode, and it is expected that he may have won the ceiling shortening lottery. You can feel it. Further, the effect during the special bonus may be executed with a predetermined probability or with a probability of 100% even when the 1G continuous lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, (1) heaven mode only, (2) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning, (3) heaven mode + 1G consecutive winning, (4) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning + 1G consecutive winning, (5) 1G consecutive winning It is possible to suggest various possibilities such as winning only, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, when it is determined that the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) is controlled again within a predetermined period (32 games) after the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) is completed (for example,). In the case of heaven mode), the period can be further shortened, so even if the duration of a series of advantageous sections is limited (for example, when limit processing is executed), the player can do as much as possible. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game by allowing the game to be played in a state of a high degree of advantage.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this detailed example, even when it is not determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the case of the end mode), Since the advantageous state may be started again by granting the right (for example, 1G continuous stock), it is possible to raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the gaming machine of this detailed example, the continuation of a series of advantageous sections is restricted by the continuous gaming period or the amount of gaming value given, so that the gambling property is suppressed from becoming excessively high. However, the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

(Invention 2 according to this detailed example)
Although not shown in FIGS. 103 to 106, in this detailed example, when the “determined combination” is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section (that is, “F_determined cherry” or “F_reach eye” is determined. If it is decided as an internal winning combination) and it is decided to shift to heaven C mode as a result of the mode transition lottery described above, there is a 1/2 probability (this probability is arbitrary). A special freeze effect can be performed. In addition, even when the sub-flag "middle check" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined (that is, when "F_middle cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination), the player also has a "fixed combination" as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Since it is possible to receive the same benefits as when "" is determined, when the sub-flag "Middle Che" is determined when the advantageous section is won, and when "fixed combination" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous section is won. Similarly, a special freeze effect may be made feasible.

Here, since the "fixed role" is a role that also confirms the pseudo-bonus transition (see (c) in FIG. 105), the player shifts to the pseudo-bonus and shifts to the heaven C mode when the special freeze effect is executed. It has become possible to recognize that there was a problem, and it has become very interesting for players. The special freeze effect is configured as, for example, an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is invalidated for about 20 seconds at the start of the game. During this period, a special reel effect such that each reel vibrates or rotates in the reverse direction may be performed, or a special image or the like that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the display device 11. May be good. Further, a special music that is not normally output may be output. Of course, it is also possible to produce by combining these. Further, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be performed until the player performs the next game operation (that is, the effects are executed to the end or canceled halfway. It is also possible to leave it to the player to decide whether to proceed with the game).

However, in this detailed example, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 114, for example, even if the user stays in the heaven C mode, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated by executing the limit process. In some cases, it may not be desirable to perform the special freeze effect described above many times.

Therefore, in this detailed example, the special freeze effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous sections. Specifically, when it is first decided to execute the special freeze effect within a series of advantageous sections, the special freeze effect is executed, but the same conditions are subsequently applied within the same series of advantageous sections. Is controlled so that the special freeze effect is not executed even when is satisfied. As a method, once a special freeze effect is executed, information indicating that fact is stored, and if the information is stored within the same series of advantageous sections thereafter, it is special in the first place. The decision as to whether or not to execute the freeze effect may not be made, or the decision is made, but if the information is stored, the decision result indicates that the decision is executed. However, it may be rewritten to indicate that it will not be executed. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous section ends.

The mode in which the execution of the special freeze effect is restricted is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit of the number of times that the execution of the special freeze effect is restricted may be set as "2 times" or "3 times" instead of "1 time". That is, the execution of the special freeze effect is restricted, but the upper limit may be set as a plurality of times. This can be appropriately set according to the expected value of the ball output per special freeze effect.

Further, the conditions for determining whether or not the special freeze effect is executed are not limited to those described above. That is, in the above, the mode transition is performed with the winning of the "fixed role" as an opportunity, and it is determined whether or not the special freeze effect is executed on the condition that the mode is the heaven C mode. However, for example, since the mode may shift to heaven C mode due to an opportunity other than the winning of the "fixed role" (see (f) in FIG. 106), a special freeze effect is also executed in these cases. It is assumed that a decision is made as to whether or not the game is played, and the special freeze effect is executed with a predetermined probability (the probability may be the same as or different from the case where the winning of the "fixed role" is triggered). It may be decided that it will be done.

In addition, for example, it is assumed that whether or not the special freeze effect is executed is first determined by the winning of the "fixed role", and when it is decided that the special freeze effect is executed, heaven You may shift to C mode. That is, the special freeze effect may be executed according to the decision to shift to the heaven C mode, or the heaven C mode may be executed according to the decision to execute the special freeze effect. You may want to move to.

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game in the advantageous section may be adopted as a condition for determining whether or not the special freeze effect is executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter or the control payout number counter described later is less than "1201". , As described above, it is determined whether or not the special freeze effect is executed, and the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later becomes "750" or more, or the advantageous section described later. When the value of the section payout counter or the control payout counter becomes "1201" or more, it is not determined whether or not the special freeze effect is executed in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. You can also do it.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the duration of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period (see FIG. 114 described later). Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information having a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, heaven C mode) is set a plurality of times, a special effect (for example, a special freeze effect) is provided each time. Is controlled so that is never done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the duration of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period (see FIG. 114 described later). Further, within a series of advantageous sections, it is determined that the control is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) triggered by the winning of a specific combination (for example, "fixed combination"), and the degree of advantage for the player is determined. High control information (eg, heaven C mode) may be set. Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs a plurality of times, it is controlled so that a special effect (for example, a special freeze effect) is not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

(Invention 3 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in this detailed example, the secondary information (for example, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section) can be determined according to the determined internal winning combination, and the secondary information is determined according to the combination of the displayed symbols. Whether or not to make it possible to determine (for example, a sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section) and to give an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified according to the determined secondary information. Can be determined.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation regarding the granting of an advantageous state not only when the internal winning combination is determined but also when the combination of symbols is displayed, so that the advantageous state It is possible to diversify the playability related to the granting of.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the combination of the displayed symbols are both managed as common secondary information, which is advantageous. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of the information.

Further, as described above or as described later, in this detailed example, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is played. While it is possible to win, the second special role (for example, "F_2BB") is not allowed to win. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special combination can be won, but the first special combination cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "upward right lip") is displayed in the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). In the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags), a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") can be displayed. Then, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, it is possible to determine different secondary information depending on whether the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed or the combination of specific symbols is displayed.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is set. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of the advantageous state.

(Invention 4 according to this detailed example)
As described above or as described later, in this detailed example, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") can be won. On the other hand, the second special role (for example, "F_2BB") cannot be won. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special combination can be won, but the first special combination cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "upward right lip") is displayed in the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). In the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags), a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") can be displayed. In addition, at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state (pseudo-bonus).

Here, in this detailed example, since the combination of the predetermined symbol (for example, "right-up lip") and the combination of the specific symbol (for example, "parallel lip") are both combinations of symbols related to the replay game. Regardless of which one is displayed, the same privilege of operating the re-game will be given.

The mode of granting the same privilege is not limited to the above. For example, a specific role is configured as a specific small role related to the addition of game value. Then, when winning a specific small winning combination, for example, in the first special permission state, one card (this value is arbitrary and may be another value equal to or less than the bet game value, or bet. A combination of predetermined symbols to which the game value of (which may exceed the value of the game value) (a combination of symbols related to the addition of the game value corresponding to the "upward-sloping lip") is displayed, and the second special permission is given. If it is in a state, the combination of specific symbols to which the same number of game values as the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed (the combination of symbols related to the addition of game value corresponding to "parallel lip") is displayed. You may.

In addition, the combination of the predetermined symbol and the combination of the specific symbol are both "off" symbol combinations (although it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state, so the symbol is different from the pure "off" case. It may be configured as a combination of identifiable symbols). Even in this case, the value remains the same.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is set. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of the advantageous state. In addition, in a game in which a specific role is determined, the same privilege is given regardless of the special permission state, so even if the game playability is changed, the player directly disadvantages. It is possible to prevent it from being covered.

(Invention 5 according to this detailed example)
As described above or as described later, in this detailed example, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") can be won. On the other hand, the second special role (for example, "F_2BB") cannot be won. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special combination can be won, but the first special combination cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a combination of specific symbols is performed when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode in the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) (for example, a combination of specific symbols (for example, between 2BB flags). For example, it is possible to display "parallel lip"), and it may not be possible to display a combination of specific symbols when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode.

Then, at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, it may be possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus).

Alternatively, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state is different depending on whether the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed. It may be possible.

In addition, when a specific combination is won, in the case of the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags), a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, "upward right rip") is displayed, and the second special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags) is displayed. For example, in the case of (between 2BB flags), when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode, a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") is displayed, and when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, a predetermined symbol is displayed. The combination of may be displayed.

In this case, the specific combination displays a combination of specific symbols when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate on at least one reel (hereinafter, this may be described as "pressing position ○"), and the stop operation is performed. When the timing of is not appropriate (hereinafter, this may be described as “pressing position ×”), it can be configured that a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. As a result, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed due to the player's stop operation (timing), so that the player can concentrate more on the game and improve the interest of the game. it can.

Further, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above. In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (when the pressing position is ○), the specific combination is used. The combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game values are given, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressing position is ×), the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are given. can do. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, the predetermined number may be given more game value than the specific number. Further, the predetermined number may be given a game value less than the specific number. Further, at least one of a combination of specific symbols and a combination of predetermined symbols may be used as a combination of symbols when an omission occurs. That is, either a predetermined number or a specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state be changed due to (timing) the player's stop operation, but also the content of the direct privilege can be changed, so that the player can change. It is possible to concentrate more on the game, further diversify the game playability, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one type of specific combination, the timing at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is also limited. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations at different timings at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. For example, in one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing, the stop operation is appropriate and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed. When the first specific combination and the stop operation timing are the second timing different from the first timing, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation. And when the timing is other than the second timing, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed because the stop operation is not appropriate. The second specific combination and the timing of the stop operation are the first timing and the second timing. When the third timing is different, the specific symbol combination is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the specific symbol combination is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation. A third specific combination is provided, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Further, in this case, the specific combination is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct answer pressing order), and when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of the incorrect answer pressing order), the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed due to the player's stop operation (procedure), so that the player can concentrate more on the game and improve the interest of the game. it can.

In addition, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above. In this case, when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct answer pressing order), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of games are played. When the value is given and the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect batting order), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values can be given. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, the predetermined number may be given more game value than the specific number. Further, the predetermined number may be given a game value less than the specific number. Further, at least one of a combination of specific symbols and a combination of predetermined symbols may be used as a combination of symbols when a dropout occurs. That is, either a predetermined number or a specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state be changed due to the player's stop operation (procedure), but also the content of the direct privilege can be changed, so that the player can change. It is possible to concentrate more on the game, further diversify the game playability, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one type of specific combination, the appropriate batting order is also limited. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations having different appropriate batting orders. For example, when the left first stop is performed, the specific symbol combination is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the middle / right first stop is performed, the specific symbol combination is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation. When the first specific combination and the middle first stop are performed, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the left / right first stop is performed, the specific symbol is not performed as an appropriate stop operation. The combination is not displayed. When the second specific combination and the right first stop are displayed, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the left / middle first stop is performed, the appropriate stop operation is not performed. A third specific combination in which the combination of specific symbols is not displayed is provided, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

(Penalty affecting the next game and beyond)
Up to this point, in the unit game in which the specific combination is won, the transition determination process to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing and batting order of the stop operation) and the advantageous section It was stated that the judgment process regarding the granting of the advantageous state in (including the pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the mode transition lottery, and other processes for changing the advantage of the gaming situation in the advantageous section) is changed. , It may affect the unit game after the unit game that wins the specific role. For example, the internal winning is the (appropriate) stop operation mode in which it is recommended that the first specific combination described above (the stop operation is performed at the first timing or the stop operation is performed in the batting order of the left first stop). In the unit game that wins the winning combination, if the stop operation is not performed in an appropriate stop operation mode, the above-mentioned advantageous section is related to the above-mentioned advantageous section between the game and a predetermined game (for example, between 5 games) after the next game. It may be possible to set a disadvantageous state (penalty state) such as lowering the winning probability in the determination process or not performing the determination process related to the advantageous section described above. If it is not appropriate, the game may not be affected and the disadvantageous state may be set only between predetermined games after the next game.

(Termination condition of penalty state)
Further, the disadvantageous state is not limited to the one that ends when the predetermined game is digested, and may be the one that ends when the predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied. Here, the predetermined release conditions are, for example, consumption of a predetermined number of game values, winning of a predetermined number of times such as a re-game combination, and stopping of a combination of specific symbols more than a predetermined number of times (stop operation in the order of pressing the correct answer). The number of games played has exceeded a predetermined number of times). Also, in this case, if the disadvantageous state is extremely prolonged, the player who created the cause of the transition to the disadvantageous state will stop the game there, and as a result, the loss will be passed on to another player who will play the game later. In some cases, for example, it is desirable that the predetermined number of sheets is about 10 and the predetermined number of times is 1 to 3 times, which can be achieved relatively easily. Further, a plurality of cancellation conditions may be provided, and the disadvantageous state may end when any of the conditions can be achieved.

(Premium role during penalty)
In addition, for internal winning roles (premium roles), such as "fixed role" and "middle che", which have a low probability of winning but have a large benefit to the player, even if they win during a disadvantageous state, they are not in a disadvantageous state. It may be treated in the same way as when winning in a situation to prevent loss. However, it is possible to prevent the benefits from being given as a disadvantage. Further, in any case, if the premium combination is won during the disadvantageous state, the special notification described later can be performed.

(Warning about penalty transition)
In addition, when the stop operation is performed in a stop operation mode in which a transition to a disadvantageous state may occur, or when a predetermined combination of symbols causing the transition to a disadvantageous state is stopped and displayed, the image, sound, and lamp are emitted. -The configuration may be such that an arbitrary effect (warning notification) for calling attention, such as an extinguishing pattern or a lock that temporarily invalidates the game operation, can be generated.

(Penalty other than lottery cold treatment)
In addition, when a disadvantageous state occurs, not only is the judgment process regarding the advantageous section disadvantageous (cold treatment) as described above, but also the digestion time per unit game is prolonged, which is disadvantageous in the time efficiency of the game. You may do so. For example, in a disadvantageous state, a lock for a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds) may occur every game in the period from the start operation to the start of rotation of the reel. Further, in the disadvantageous state, only such a time disadvantage may be given, or such a time disadvantage and the above-mentioned ball-out disadvantage may be given.

(Disadvantageous conditions are treated as part of the advantageous section)
Further, for example, in the non-advantageous section, since it is not possible to have a plurality of states (for example, non-advantageous section A, non-advantageous section B, etc.) regarding the transition to the advantageous section, the disadvantageous state is the advantageous section (directing section). It may be controlled as one of the states in. For example, in addition to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104, a unique mode corresponding to the disadvantageous state (disadvantageous state mode) is provided, and when the disadvantageous state is entered, the disadvantageous state is reached until the disadvantaged state ends. The mode may be set. For example, when the transition condition of the disadvantageous state is satisfied in the non-advantageous section, the transition to the advantageous section (effect section) and the disadvantageous state mode is performed. Here, the transition destination when the disadvantageous state ends is arbitrary, but from the viewpoint of providing a temporary cold treatment state (disadvantageous state), it is desirable to return to the state before the transition of the disadvantageous state. Although one type of disadvantageous state may be provided, a plurality of types may be provided to shift to one of the disadvantageous states according to the type of the disadvantageous state transition opportunity, for example, the player displays a predetermined combination of symbols. If the profit given at the time of making the game (for example, the number of game values given or the destination of the transition to the RT state) is large, it is assumed that the game is moved to a state in which the degree of disadvantage is relatively high even in the disadvantaged state. , It is desirable from the viewpoint of game balance.

(Penalty during increase section)
Further, even if the transition condition of the disadvantageous state is satisfied during the increase section (during the pseudo bonus), the disadvantageous state may be shifted. In this case, in the unfavorable state, the judgment process regarding the advantageous state may be treated coldly while giving the instruction regarding the addition of the game value (such as the navigation of the correct answer pushing order when the push order bell is won). It may be possible not to temporarily generate an instruction regarding the addition of game value. It should be noted that the disadvantageous state may be notified by a change in the lighting pattern of the advantageous section lamp described later. For example, the advantageous section lamp emits white light during the normal increase section, but when the disadvantageous state shifts to the disadvantageous state during the increase section, the advantageous section lamp may emit red light during the disadvantageous section.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, an advantageous state is given even when the same specific combination is determined according to which special permission state is in and the mode of the player's stop operation. Since it is possible to change the content of the decision regarding the game, it is possible to diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the granting of an advantageous state.

(Invention 6 according to this detailed example)
Further, as described above or as described later, in this detailed example, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is played. While it is possible to win, the second special role (for example, "F_2BB") is not allowed to win. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special combination can be won, but the first special combination cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "upward right lip") is displayed in the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). In the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags), a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") can be displayed.

Further, in this detailed example, when a specific combination is won, it is more likely that an advantageous state will be given when the combination of specific symbols is displayed than when the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. There is. That is, on the premise of betting three cards, the second special permission state (between the 2BB flags) is a state in which the granting of an advantageous state is given preferential treatment over the first special permission state (for example, between the 3BB flags). ..

Further, in this detailed example, when a predetermined combination (for example, "pushing order bell B" shown in FIG. 98 and “pushing order bell B” shown in the explanation of FIG. 113 described later) is won, the first special permission state (for example, the first special permission state ( For example, in the case of (between 3BB flags), a combination of assigned symbols (for example, a combination of 9 or 8 symbols to which a game value is assigned) is displayed regardless of the batting order, while a second special permission state (for example, 2BB) is displayed. In the case of (between flags), if the batting order is the predetermined correct answer pressing order, the combination of the assigned symbols is displayed, but if the batting order is not the predefined correct answer pressing order, the assigned symbol is displayed. The combination is not displayed and the game value is not given. Either the combination of the symbols is missed, or the combination of the given symbols is given a smaller amount of the game value than when the combination of the given symbols is displayed (for example, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the one-card combination). Combination) will be displayed. That is, if the operation of the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state (for example, between the 3BB flags) is in a state in which the granting of the game value is given preferential treatment over the second special permission state (for example, between the 2BB flags). is there.

That is, if the player wins 3BB with a 3-card bet and then carries over the 3BB (between the 3BB flags and the first special permission state) and plays the game with a 3-card bet, the probability of granting an advantageous state is Although it is not given preferential treatment, the probability of granting the game medium when the advantageous state is not operating is given preferential treatment, so the difference in the inclination value between when the advantageous state is operating and when it is not operating is relatively small. You can proceed with the game with. In this way, a state in which the player is less likely to be able to rapidly increase the game value but the player's game value is less likely to decrease can be defined as, for example, a "stable state".

On the other hand, if the player wins 2BB with a 2-card bet and then carries over the 2BB (between the 2BB flags and the second special permission state) and plays the game with a 3-card bet, the probability of granting an advantageous state is Although it is given preferential treatment, the probability of granting the game medium when the advantageous state is not operating is not given preferential treatment, so the difference in the inclination value between when the advantageous state is operating and when it is not operating is relatively large. You can proceed with the game with. In this way, a state in which the player is likely to be able to rapidly increase the game value but the player's game value is likely to decrease can be defined as, for example, a "rough wave state".

Here, the method for creating the two states of the stable state and the rough wave state is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus is higher than in the "rough wave state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of the heaven mode is higher than in the "rough wave state". Lower. Further, in the "rough wave state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus is lower than that in the "stable state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of the heaven mode is set higher than in the "stable state". Increase. In this way, in the "stable state", it is easy to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but it is difficult to make a series of villas. In the "rough wave state", it is difficult to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but it is easy to make a series of villas. Can be created. As described above, the stop control of the predetermined combination may be changed between the 2BB flags and the 3BB flags, or may be different from this (that is, no preferential treatment is given between the 3BB flags). ..

When such a method is applied to this detailed example, for example, a "stable state" and a "rough wave state" are further provided as a control state (which may be paraphrased as a game state or a mode) in a normal state. Then, when a predetermined symbol combination (“right-up lip”) is displayed without any control state being set, a “stable state” is set and a specific symbol combination (“parallel lip”). If is displayed, set "Rough wave condition". Then, each set control state may be maintained until the pseudo-bonus transition is determined (that is, it ends when the pseudo-bonus transition is determined). If a combination of specific symbols ("parallel lip") is displayed while the "stable state" is set, the control state is updated to the "rough wave state" and the "rough wave state" is set. When a predetermined combination of symbols (“right-up lip”) is displayed in the present state, the control state may be updated to the “stable state”. That is, every time a combination of predetermined symbols or a combination of specific symbols is displayed, the control state may be updated to the corresponding control state.

Then, when the "stable state" is set, for example, in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the lottery is performed by using the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table in which the lottery value for which the winning is determined is set high. Therefore, in the mode transition lottery described above, the mode transition lottery table in which the lottery value determined to shift to the heaven mode is set to be low may be used so that the lottery is performed. Further, when the "rough wave state" is set, for example, in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the lottery is performed by using the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table in which the lottery value for which the winning is determined is set low. Therefore, in the mode transition lottery described above, the mode transition lottery table in which the lottery value determined to shift to the heaven mode is set to be high may be used so that the lottery is performed.

That is, in this detailed example, when a predetermined symbol combination (“right rising lip”) is displayed, it is controlled to the first grant state (“stable state”) and the specific symbol combination (“parallel lip”) is displayed. If so, it is controlled to the second grant state (“rough wave state”), the controlled grant state is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and an advantageous state (pseudo bonus) is given according to the controlled grant state. It may be possible to decide whether or not to grant.

The condition for ending the set "stable state" or "rough wave state" (predetermined end condition) is not limited to the determination of the pseudo bonus transition. For example, it may have shifted to a non-advantageous section, a limit process may have been executed, a setting change operation may have been performed, or the power has been turned on again due to a power failure. It may be that a predetermined time (for example, 12 hours after the power is turned on, 2 hours for the non-gaming state to continue, etc.) has elapsed. In addition to these, various conditions can be adopted.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the stop display mode can be different even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in the state. Since it is possible to change the giving state of the advantageous state, it is possible to diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the giving of the advantageous state.

[Design layout configuration of this detailed example]
Subsequently, the symbol arrangement configuration of this detailed example will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of this detailed example. Since the description of the symbol arrangement table and the symbol code table itself has already been described with reference to FIG. 15, the description here will be omitted.

In this detailed example, the symbols are "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", "white blank 1" and "white blank 1". 10 kinds of symbols of "white blank 2" are used. Further, in this detailed example, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[Internal winning combination configuration of this detailed example]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 113, the internal winning combination configuration of this detailed example will be described. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of this detailed example. Since the description of the internal lottery table itself has already been described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18 or 99, the description thereof is omitted here. Further, FIGS. 109 to 112 are diagrams showing an example of the symbol combination table of this detailed example. Since the description of the symbol combination table itself has already been described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, the description here will be omitted. Further, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode (for example, the stop operation order and the stop operation timing), the display combination, and the like in this detailed example. That is, in this section, any combination of symbols (display combination, winning combination, stop display) according to the type of the internal winning combination drawn in this detailed example and the stop operation mode when each internal winning combination is won. It can be rephrased as an aspect, a display result, etc.).

First, in this detailed example, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 64), each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 108 wins with the probability (lottery value / probability denominator: 65536) shown in FIG. 108. The combinations of symbols that are permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. 108. Further, in FIGS. 109 to 112, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols related to the small combination. Is shown.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a two-card bet in a non-bonus state (more specifically, a non-flag state), while a game is played with a three-card bet. In that case, it is configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. The basic role is the same as that of "F_2BB" described with reference to FIG. 99. In a game in which "F_2BB" is won in a two-card bet state, or in a game in which "off" occurs between the 2BB flags, "BB01" is displayed if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, and the 2BB state (based on 2BB) is displayed. Move to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 2BB flags, "BB01" may not be displayed in the 3-card bet state.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a 3-card bet in a non-bonus state (more specifically, a non-flag state), while a game is played with a 2-card bet. In that case, it is configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. The basic role is the same as that of "F_3BB" described with reference to FIG. 99. In a game in which "F_3BB" is won in a 3-card bet state, or in a game in which "missing" is made between the 3BB flags, "BB02" is displayed if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, and the 3BB state (based on 3BB). Move to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 3BB flags, "BB02" may not be displayed in the two-card bet state.

In the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the column of "bonus state" in FIG. 108 is referred to, and the internal winning combination is determined (the number of playable cards is only 3 bets). During the 2BB state and the 3BB state, it is always controlled to the state in which the RB, which is a first-class special accessory, is operating (RB state). In the RB state, control is repeated such that when two prizes are generated or two games are played after the operation, the RB state is once terminated and then activated again. In this detailed example, the end condition of the 2BB state is defined as that more than one game value is given in the 2BB state, and the end condition of the 3BB state gives more than 176 game values in the 3BB state. It is stipulated that it was done.

Here, when the 2BB state or the 3BB state ends, the special mode transition process is performed. For example, if the mode is changed to the bonus state (the mode is not changed during the bonus state, which is synonymous with the end of the bonus state), that is, if the current mode is "start mode", the transition destination Mode is "start mode". If the current mode is any of "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "heaven preparation mode", and "chance mode", the transition destination mode is "normal A mode". If the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the transition destination mode is "end A mode". If the current mode is any of "guaranteed mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", and "heaven C mode", the transition destination mode is "guaranteed mode".

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. The basic role is the same as that of "F_lip B" described with reference to FIG. 99. When determined as an internal winning combination, between the non-flags and the 2BB flags, regardless of the stop operation mode, either "REP64" to "REP72" (these make the "replay" symbol a lower straight line or a middle straight line. Since they are to be displayed, they can be collectively referred to as "parallel rip". Further, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively referred to as "lower rip", and "REP72" is "middle rip". (Can be called "rip") is displayed, and a replay is given. On the other hand, between the 3BB flags, "REP73" (this can be referred to as "right-up lip" because the "replay" symbol is displayed upward to the right) regardless of the stop operation mode. It is displayed and a replay is given.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, "parallel lip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in any state, and a replay is given.

"F_cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the "middle rip" is displayed and the replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, either "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" (these are for displaying the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L at the bottom. Because of this, these can be collectively referred to as "cherry rips"), and replays are granted. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, other rips (for example, “REP57” to “REP59”) are displayed, and a replay is given.

"F_confirmed cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the "middle rip" is displayed and the replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and if the pressing position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are). The "cherry" symbol is displayed in the lower row on the left reel 3L, and a symbol such as "REP42" that can raise the expectations of the player in other symbol display areas is also displayed. These can be collectively referred to as "confirmed cherry lip"), and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position x, other rips (for example, the above-mentioned "cherry rip" and "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed, and a replay is given. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

"F_middle cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the "middle rip" is displayed and the replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and if the pressing position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are). Since the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the middle stage on the left reel 3L, these can be collectively referred to as "middle stage cherry lip"), and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, other rips (for example, or “REP20” to “REP27”) are displayed, and a replay is given. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

The "F_reach" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the "middle rip" is displayed and the replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, when the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", any one of "REP01" to "REP14" regardless of the stop operation mode (these are customarily a player). It is configured as a combination of symbols that can definitely notify (or suggest) the transition to a state that is advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eye lip"), and the replay is displayed. Granted. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

"F_watermelon" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, any one of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (since these are for displaying "watermelon" symbols side by side, these are displayed. "Watermelon") is displayed, and if it is in a 3-card bet state, 3 game values are given, and if it is a 2-card bet state, 2 game values are given. On the other hand, if the pressing position x, either "FRU08" or "FRU09" (since these are not displayed side by side with "watermelon" symbols, these can be collectively referred to as "watermelon spills"). Is displayed and one game value is given. In addition, in the case of the pressing position ×, it can be configured so that the game value given by causing the omission is 0.

"F_Bell 123A1", "F_Bell 123A2", "F_Bell 132A1", "F_Bell 132A2", "F_Bell 213A1", "F_Bell 213A2", "F_Bell 231A1", "F_Bell 231A2", "F_Bell 231A2" "Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determinable as internal winnings regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. The basic role is the same as that of "F_left middle right bell A01" to "F_right middle left bell A12" described with reference to FIG. Also in this detailed example, they are collectively referred to as "pushing order bell A".

As shown in FIG. 113, the "pushing order bell A" serves as a small batting order of 6 choices (the batting order of any one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 6" is the correct batting order). If the internal winning combination is determined and the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct batting order, the "downward bell" ("FRU03"), "upper bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02") ), "Middle bell" ("FRU04"), "Right-up bell" ("FRU05"), "Koyama bell" ("FRU06"), and "Lower bell" ("FRU07"). Is displayed, 8 game values are given in the 3-card bet state, and 2 game values are given in the 2-card bet state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operations have a 1/2 probability of being pressed at the pressing position ○, and at the pressing position ○. If there is, any of the winning "one-card combination" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") is displayed, and one piece of game value is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the game value is not given due to omission. In addition, if the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 chance that the pressing position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations, and if the pressing position is ○, any of the winning “single cards” will be displayed. One game value is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the game value is not given due to omission.

"F_Bell 123B1", "F_Bell 123B2", "F_Bell 132B1", "F_Bell 132B2", "F_Bell 213B1", "F_Bell 213B2", "F_Bell 231B1", "F_Bell 231B2", "F_Bell 231B2" "Bell 312B1", "F_Bell 312B2", "F_Bell 321B1", and "F_Bell 321B2" are configured to be determinable as internal winnings regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. The basic roles are the same as those of "F_left middle right bell B01" to "F_right middle left bell B12" described with reference to FIG. Also in this detailed example, they are collectively referred to as "pushing order bell B".

As shown in FIG. 113, the "push order bell B" does not have a push order small combination between the 3BB flags in the two-card bet state and the three-card bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if it is in a 3-card bet state, 8 game values are given, and if it is a 2-card bet state, it is given. Two game values are given.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, the “pushing order bell B” is a pushing order small winning combination in a state other than between the 3BB flags in the three-card bet state (between non-flags and between 2BB flags), and is an internal winning combination. When it is decided as a winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed, and if it is in a 3-card bet state, 8 game values are given. If the player is in a two-card bet state, two game values are given. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operations have a 1/2 probability of being pressed at the pressing position ○, and at the pressing position ○. If there is, any of the winning "one-card combination" is displayed, and one piece of game value is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the game value is not given due to omission. In addition, if the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 chance that the pressing position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations, and if the pressing position is ○, any of the winning “single cards” will be displayed. One game value is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the game value is not given due to omission.

"8 F_RB combinations" are configured to be determinable as internal winning combinations in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and eight game values are given.

"One F_RB combination" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When it is determined as the internal winning combination, any of the above-mentioned "one-card combination" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one piece is displayed. The game value of is given.

The correspondence between the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 108, the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, and the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 113, the stop operation mode, the display combination, and the like is merely an example. The invention according to the above is not limited to this.

For example, in this detailed example, in a pure "off" state, in a 2-bet state in which "BB01" can be displayed, when "BB01" is missed and becomes "off", a 3-bet in which "BB02" can be displayed can be displayed. In the state, when "BB02" is missed and becomes "missing", when it becomes "missing" due to being in a 3-bet state between the 2BB flags, it means that it is in a 2-bet state between the 3BB flags. As a result, "off" may occur in various situations, such as when "off" occurs, when "pushing order small combination" is missed and "out" occurs, so some of these or In order to make the combination of symbols displayed as "off" different in all cases, the combination of these different symbols is specified in advance in the symbol combination table, and these also "correspond" according to the determined internal winning combination. By allowing the display as a "combination of symbols", it is possible to make the combination of symbols related to "off" displayed different depending on the state or the like.

[Limit processing configuration of this detailed example]
Subsequently, the limit processing configuration of this detailed example will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining each limit process in this detailed example. As shown in FIG. 114, in this detailed example, normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), and quasi-limit processing (number of games). ) And quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) are to be executed. Note that this is an example of executable limit processing, and it is possible to execute limit processing other than each of these limit processing, and some of these limit processing are executed. You can also prevent it from being done.

The normal limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are continuously played 1500 times). The advantageous section game number counter starts counting the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (including the production section), and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing). The counting is completed and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section game number counter counts the number of bets regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. Further, the advantageous section game number counter also counts in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of whether it is in the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section is executed. Migrate to. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the duration of the pseudo bonus, information on the presence or absence of ceiling shortening, 1G ream All stock counter values, etc.) are also cleared (initialized).

The normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the payout number counter in the advantageous section becomes "2401" or more (that is, when the game value given during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). The advantageous section payout counter starts counting the number of game values given (here, for example, "net increase number (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the production section) is started, and the advantageous section is paid out. Is finished (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing), the counting is finished and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section payout number counter counts the number of bets regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter counts even in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. In addition, the advantageous section payout counter counts appropriately according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-2" or "-3") when "missing" or "missing" occurs during the advantageous section. The value to be subtracted. Therefore, if the game value does not increase but decreases after the advantageous section starts, it may become a negative value. That is, the advantageous section payout counter can count from the lowest point of the number of added game values in the advantageous section to the defined maximum point (difference number: 2400) (see FIG. 101). ).

When the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of whether it is in the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section is executed. Migrate to. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the duration of the pseudo bonus, information on the presence or absence of ceiling shortening, 1G ream All stock counter values, etc.) are also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are continuously played 1445 times). The control game number counter starts counting the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (including the effect section), and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The counting is completed and cleared (initialized). Further, the control game number counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Further, the control game number counter counts the number when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count it when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. However, the control game number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section game number counter.

When the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle. When is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the duration of the pseudo bonus, information on the presence or absence of ceiling shortening, 1G ream All stock counter values, etc.) are also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo-bonus (that is, in the production section), first, it is forcibly shifted to the pseudo-bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the pseudo-bonus is transferred by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the transferred pseudo-bonus is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the duration of the pseudo bonus, information on the presence or absence of ceiling shortening, 1G ream All stock counter values, etc.) are also cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section game number counter where the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates) is "1500", the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "1445", in this detailed example, the maximum number of games (sustainable period) in the pseudo bonus is "55 games" (see FIG. 103). ), This difference takes into account the playable period during the pseudo-bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when the game is played for a predetermined regulation period in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of games) is executed immediately after the start of the pseudo-bonus or in the middle of the pseudo-bonus, the player feels distrust or loss, and the interest of the game is lowered. In some cases. Therefore, in this detailed example, the special limit processing (number of games) is executed in the game before the sustainable period (55 games) per increase section, compared to the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. This prevents the player from feeling distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus ending in the middle.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, a special limit process (number of games) is executed in a game that is one minute before the sustainable period (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) per two additional sections than the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. It may be done. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the sustainable period (55 games) + grace period (2 games) per increase section is before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game of. Further, for example, in the case of a specification such as passing through a precursor state before shifting to a pseudo bonus, and if the maximum number of games in this precursor state is "4 games", normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game that is equal to the sustainable period (55 games) + maximum precursor period (4 games) per increase section. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operated) may be any timing as long as it is before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed, and is individual. It shall be possible to set as appropriate according to the game specifications of.

The special limit process (payout number) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "2126" or more (that is, when the game value given during the advantageous section exceeds 2125). The control payout counter starts counting the number of game values given (here, for example, "net increase number (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the effect section) is started, and the advantageous section Is finished (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing), the counting is finished and cleared (initialized). Further, the control payout number counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Further, the control payout counter counts the number when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count it when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

Further, in the control payout number counter, when a "missing" occurs during the advantageous section, a value to be appropriately counted is subtracted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-3 sheets"). However, when the control payout counter is "missed" during the advantageous section (at least when there is a difference from the maximum number of game values given), "missed" (or difference) occurs. Assuming that there was no game value, the number of game values given is counted. Specifically, for example, in a game in which "pushing order bell A" is won with a 3-card bet, if the batting order is appropriate, the number of game values given (maximum value) is "8" (as the difference). On the other hand, if the batting order is not appropriate, the number of game value added will be "1" (the difference is "-2") if the pressing position is appropriate, and the pressing position is appropriate. If not, the game value will be "0" (the difference is "-3") due to omission, but the control payout counter can be used in any case of the game. Count the difference number "+5".

Further, for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout counter due to the operation of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, the value of the control payout counter is advantageous. It is corrected to the value of the section payout counter. The control payout counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section payout counter.

When the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (actuated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle. When is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the duration of the pseudo bonus, information on the presence or absence of ceiling shortening, 1G ream All stock counter values, etc.) are also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo-bonus (that is, in the production section), first, it is forcibly shifted to the pseudo-bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the pseudo-bonus is transferred by executing this special limit process (number of payouts). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the transferred pseudo-bonus is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the duration of the pseudo bonus, information on the presence or absence of ceiling shortening, 1G ream All stock counter values, etc.) are also cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section payout number counter that normally executes (operates) the limit process (number of payouts) is "2401", the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "2126", in this detailed example, the maximum number of acquired games (amount of game value that can be granted) in the pseudo bonus is "275" (Fig.). (See 103), this difference takes into account the amount of game value that can be granted during the pseudo-bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed when the game value corresponding to the predetermined regulated game value amount is given in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed immediately after the start of the pseudo bonus or during the pseudo bonus, the player feels distrust or loss, and the interest of the game is reduced. It may end up. Therefore, in this detailed example, when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount that can be granted per increase section (275 sheets) is given, which is smaller than the game value amount that is normally executed (the number of payouts). By executing the special limit processing (number of payouts), it is prevented that the pseudo bonus ends in the middle and the player feels distrust or loss.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount that can be granted per two increase sections (275 sheets x 2 sets = 550 sheets) is given compared to the game value amount that is normally executed by the limit process (number of payouts). Special limit processing (number of payouts) may be executed. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the amount of game value that can be granted per increase section (275 sheets) + the grace period is equivalent to the amount of game value that is normally executed by the limit process (number of payouts). The special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount smaller than the game value amount (8 sheets) to be played is given. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operated) may be any timing as long as it is before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed, and is individual. It shall be possible to set as appropriate according to the game specifications of.

In the quasi-limit processing (number of games), the value of the 1G continuous counter (when the ceiling shortening lottery is won and "with ceiling shortening" is added, "1" is further added to the value of the control game number counter. ) Multiplied by "55" (that is, the duration of the pseudo-bonus), and is executed when the addition result is "1390" or more. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110", so the value of the control game number counter is "1280". , The quasi-limit process (number of games) will be executed (operated).

In the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts), the value of the 1G continuous counter (when the ceiling shortening lottery is won and "with ceiling shortening" is added, "1" is further added to the value of the control payout counter. ) Is multiplied by "275" (that is, the amount of game value that can be given a pseudo bonus), and this is executed when the addition result is "1851" or more. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "275 x 2 = 550", so the value of the control payout counter is "1301". , The quasi-limit process (number of payouts) will be executed (operated). Since the quasi-limit processing (number of games) and the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) both regulate the same contents, after one operating condition is satisfied and the other operating condition is activated, the other operating condition is applied. Even if is established, it is not necessary to operate in duplicate.

When the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the preparation limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates), the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are executed during the pseudo bonus in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. Will not be done. That is, the extension of the game period in the increasing section is suppressed. The method of suppressing the extension of the game period in the increasing section is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the winning probability of the 1G consecutive lottery may be lower than usual, or in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of the ceiling shortening may be lower than usual. .. That is, although the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery itself are executed, it may be difficult to win these lottery. Further, for example, in the production section after the execution of the quasi-limit processing (number of games), the lottery value that is the winning in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to shift to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, in the mode transition lottery, the lottery value at which the mode transition that is advantageous to the player is determined may be lowered to make it difficult for the pseudo-bonus to stay in a row.

Further, when the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates), in a series of advantageous sections thereafter, a "fixed combination" ((FIG. 105) Special processing is performed at the time of winning a)). Hereinafter, this special process will be described by taking as an example a case where the “fixed combination” is “F_fixed cherry” (hereinafter, simply referred to as “fixed cherry”).

When neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, if the "confirmed cherry" is won during the production section (may be during the increase section), a pseudo bonus transition lottery is drawn. "Winning (next game)" is determined in (see (c) of FIG. 105). Further, in this detailed example, since the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol with high expectations for the player, in the game in which the stop operation information is not notified, the player stops first on the left. The general procedure is to aim at the "cherry" symbol (aiming at the "BAR" symbol as a guide) and perform the stop operation. Therefore, when the game is played according to a general procedure, when the "confirmed cherry" is won, the "cherry" symbol is first stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 3L at the first left stop. If neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating and the "fixed cherry" is won, the left first stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2"). ") May be notified to the effect that it should be done. Further, the "winning (next game)" is not limited to the one in which the pseudo bonus is started from the next game, and the pseudo bonus may be started from the game after the next game.

Here, the skilled player stops aiming at the "BAR" symbol also in the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, for example, in order to further determine whether the player is "weak che" or "confirmed cherry". Perform the operation. As a result, it is recognized that the "BAR" symbols are aligned in the middle of each reel and the "confirmed cherry" is won (for example, see "REP42" in FIG. 109). On the other hand, the player without skill does not perform the stop operation aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, or cannot perform the stop operation, so that the stop display mode is "weak check". It may not be possible to determine whether it is a "confirmed cherry" (see, for example, "REP28" in FIG. 109).

In this detailed example, when neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, the case where the "confirmed cherry" is won and the symbol of the "confirmed cherry lip" is obtained. When the combination of is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, in the case of winning the "confirmed cherry", the combination of the "confirmed cherry lip" symbols was not displayed, but the special winning sound was also displayed when the combination of the "cherry lip" symbols was displayed. It is designed to be output. The output of the special winning sound may be performed with a probability of 100% or may be performed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, if neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, and if you win the "confirmed cherry", "7 reds will be aligned" at the start of the next game. It is notified that the production is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

On the other hand, if either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated and then the "fixed cherry" is won during the production section (which may be during the increase section), a pseudo bonus shift is made. Although the "win (next game)" is once determined in the lottery (see (c) of FIG. 105), this determination result is rewritten to "win (current game)" by executing the special process. Then, at the start of the game this time, it is notified that the "red 7 matching" effect is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

At this time, in this game, the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "confirmed cherry lip" (including the combination of the symbols of the "cherry lip") and the combination of the symbols of the "middle stage lip" is performed. Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in this detailed example, a special notification is performed to the effect that the first right stop (“batting order 5” and “batting order 6”) should be performed (see FIG. 113). As a result, when neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, the flow of the game is that "confirmed cherry lip" is displayed → the pseudo bonus starts from the next game. After either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the game is called "middle rip" display by starting the pseudo bonus from this game → stopping according to the special notification. It is changed to the flow of. The special notification may be performed by the control of the main (main control board 71) side, and as a result, the player does not suffer any disadvantage regardless of the shift to the pseudo bonus. It may be performed by the control only on the sub (sub-control board 72) side.

In addition, after either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the "confirmed cherry" is won, and even though the special notification is given, the "confirmed" When the combination of "Cherry Lip" symbols is displayed, the special winning sound is not output.

Further, in this detailed example, when "F_replay A" or "F_replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, basically the procedure of the stop operation is not notified. Therefore, assuming that the procedure of the stop operation is notified and the "middle stage lip" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, if such a state occurs, one of them is performed. There is a possibility that the player clearly recognizes that the quasi-limit process has been activated, and as a result, the interest of the game is reduced. Therefore, in the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not any of the quasi-limit processes is activated (or even after the operation of any of the quasi-limit processes), "F_Replay A" or When "F_replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification may be performed with a predetermined probability. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the special notification being performed. Further, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification is performed even when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won. Further, in this case, in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery when "F_replay A" or "F_replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, even if the "winning (current game)" can be determined with a predetermined probability. Good.

Here, the cherry winning sound determination process performed in this detailed example will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the cherry winning sound determination process executed by the sub CPU 201.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning is a confirmed cherry (S2001). That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the "confirmed cherry lip" is displayed.

In S2001, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning is a confirmed cherry (when the determination in S2001 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S2005 described later. On the other hand, in S2001, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning is not a confirmed cherry (when the determination in S2001 is NO), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning is a cherry (S2002). That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the combination of the "cherry lip" symbols is displayed.

In S2002, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning is not a cherry (when the determination in S2002 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the cherry winning sound determination process. On the other hand, in S2002, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning is a cherry (when the determination in S2002 is YES), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning flag is a confirmed cherry (S2003). That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the sub-flag (or non-advantageous section sub-flag) at the time of winning the advantageous section is a “determined combination”. In S2003, the sub CPU 201 may determine whether or not the internal winning combination is "F_determined cherry".

In S2003, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning flag is a confirmed cherry (when the determination in S2003 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S2005 described later. On the other hand, in S2003, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning flag is not a confirmed cherry (when the determination in S2003 is NO), the sub CPU 201 sets the sound number to "cherry" (S2004). That is, the sub CPU 201 sets data for outputting a normal winning sound different from the special winning sound. The sub CPU 201 ends the cherry winning sound determination process after the process of S2004.

If S2001 is a YES determination, or S2003 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 201 sets the sound number to "confirmed cherry" (S2005). That is, the sub CPU 201 sets the data for outputting the special winning sound. Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a navigation error has occurred (S2006). That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the stop operation according to the special notification has not been performed even though the special notification has been performed. In S2006, the sub CPU 201 may determine whether or not the quasi-limit processing has been performed.

When the sub CPU 201 determines in S2006 that no navigation error has occurred (when the determination in S2006 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the cherry winning sound determination process. That is, the sub CPU 201 can output a special winning sound when the sub-flag (or non-advantageous section sub-flag) at the time of winning the advantageous section is the "determined combination" and the special notification is not performed. In S2006, the sub CPU 201 has a sub-flag (or non-advantageous section sub-flag) at the time of winning the advantageous section as a "fixed combination", no special notification is performed, and a combination of symbols of the "fixed cherry lip" is displayed. If this is the case, S2006 may be determined as NO. That is, if the sub-flag (or non-advantageous section sub-flag) at the time of winning the advantageous section is the "fixed combination" and the special notification is not performed, or if the combination of the symbols of the "fixed cherry lip" is displayed, it is special. While the winning sound can be output, the special winning sound may not be output when the combination of the "confirmed cherry lip" symbols is not displayed.

On the other hand, in S2006, when the sub CPU 201 determines that a navigation error has occurred (when the determination in S2006 is YES), the sub CPU 201 clears the sound number (S2007). The sub CPU 201 ends the cherry winning sound determination process after the process of S2007. That is, in the sub CPU 201, the sub flag (or the non-advantageous section sub flag) at the time of winning the advantageous section is a "fixed combination", but when the special notification is performed and the stop operation according to the special notification is not performed, the sub CPU 201 is special. The winning sound cannot be output.

As described above, the advantageous section winning sub-flag (or non-advantageous section sub-flag) "fixed combination" (more specifically, "F_fixed cherry") and the advantageous section winning sub-flag (or non-advantageous section sub-flag). ) With "Middle Che", the "Cherry" pattern is displayed on the left reel, and the benefits received by the player are the same. Therefore, in the cherry winning sound determination process, the "confirmed cherry" part is replaced with "middle cherry". It can be read as and the same processing can be performed. Therefore, when the sub-flag "middle check" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined after the operation of each of the above-mentioned quasi-limit processes, the special notification can be performed.

In addition, the above-mentioned cherry winning sound determination process is a process for determining the type of winning sound (or whether or not to output a specific winning sound) when the internal winning combination related to "cherry" is determined. This is an example. Then, in the cherry winning sound determination process described above, the elements of the type of the internal winning combination, the type of the combination of the displayed symbols, and whether or not the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop operation procedure are combined. It is possible to determine the type of winning sound (or whether or not to output a specific winning sound), but for internal winning roles other than the internal winning role related to "cherry", such elements are combined to make the winning sound. It is also possible to determine the type (or whether or not to output a specific winning sound).

Up to this point, in order to operate the normal limit processing, the special limit processing, and the quasi-limit processing, monitoring the duration of the advantageous section using the "number of games" and the "number of payouts" has been described as an example. The conditions under which each limit process is executed are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, and the value of the 1G continuous counter, assuming that each limit process is executed. And whether or not the ceiling is shortened (that is, a variable for operating the quasi-limit processing) can be appropriately changed according to the game specifications, market trends, and the like.

Further, the method for monitoring the duration of the advantageous section is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, if "navigation count" is used to monitor the duration of an advantageous section, normal limit processing (navigation count), special limit processing (navigation count), or quasi-limit processing (navigation count) is performed in the same manner as above. The number of times) can also be executed. That is, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be adopted in order to monitor the duration of the advantageous interval, and the value for which the normal limit processing is normally executed for the adopted element. By defining the value at which the special limit processing is executed and the value at which the quasi-limit processing is executed, it is possible to assume that each limit processing is executed in the same manner as described above.

(Invention 7 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in this detailed example, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, the effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example, for example). When the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more), or the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). When becomes, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but the game period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more. ), Or when the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout counter is "2126" or more), which is advantageous. In the case of a state, a series of advantageous sections are terminated when shifting to a specific state.

That is, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, a series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and a series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the sustainable period of the advantageous state (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be granted (for example, "275 cards"). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely regulated while giving consideration to the emotions of the player.

(Invention 8 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in this detailed example, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, the effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example, for example). When the value of the advantageous section game counter becomes "1500" or more), or the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout counter is "2401" or more). When becomes, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but the game period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more. ), Or when the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout counter is "2126" or more), which is advantageous. When it is not in a state, it shifts to an advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state, a series of advantageous sections is terminated.

That is, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, a series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and a series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it. Further, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if it is not in an advantageous state, it is shifted to an advantageous state and then ended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the sustainable period of the advantageous state (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be granted (for example, "275 cards"). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely regulated while giving consideration to the emotions of the player.

(Invention 9 according to this detailed example)
Further, in the gaming machine of the detailed example, in addition to those described in the invention 7 according to the detailed example or the invention 8 according to the detailed example, the advantageous state is granted the right (for example, "1G continuous stock" and "1G continuous stock" and " Although it may be extended by "ceiling shortening"), the game period in a series of advantageous sections is shorter than a specific period, and a special period set according to the number of rights granted (for example, a control game number counter) When the value becomes the value at which the quasi-limit processing (number of games) is executed), or the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous sections is less than the specific amount, and is set according to the number of rights granted. When the special amount (for example, the value of the control payout counter is the value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed) is reached, the granting of the right is suppressed in the subsequent advantageous section. It has become. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

(Invention 10 according to this detailed example)
Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in addition to those described in the inventions 7 to 9 according to the above detailed example, at least a second amount (the above-mentioned "specific amount") and a third amount (the above-mentioned "special amount"). In counting the amount "), for example, between the game value amount that was originally supposed to be given and the game value amount that was actually given due to the player's operation error or ignoring the instruction. Even if a difference occurs, the counting is performed based on the game value amount that should have been originally given without considering the difference. As a result, a series of advantageous sections may be extended more than necessary due to the actions of such a player, and unfairness may occur between the player who has performed such an action and the player who has not performed such an action. Since it is possible to prevent it from being stored, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

(Invention 11 according to this detailed example)
Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in addition to those described in the inventions 7 to 10 according to the above detailed example, an advantageous state is obtained in a state in which the granting of rights is suppressed (for example, a state after the quasi-limit processing operation). When a definite combination (for example, "confirmed cherry") whose transition to is confirmed is won, a special combination of special symbols (for example, "confirmed cherry lip") that can clearly recognize the winning of this definite combination is not displayed. Notifications are being made. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this detailed example, when the special notification is performed, the advantageous state that was originally supposed to be started from the next game is started from this game. As a result, the player can be made to perform the stop operation according to the special notification in a natural flow, so that even when such a special notification is performed, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable. it can.

The means for performing the special notification may be any means. For example, the above-mentioned instruction monitor or other effect device controlled on the main side, the above-mentioned display device 11, speaker group, LED group 85, or other effect device controlled on the sub side, or a combination thereof, etc., as required. Various effect devices (notification means) can be adopted.

(Invention 12 according to this detailed example)
Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in addition to those described in the inventions 7 to 11 according to the above detailed example, an advantageous state is obtained in a state in which the granting of rights is suppressed (for example, a state after the quasi-limit processing operation). When a definite combination (for example, "confirmed cherry") whose transition to is confirmed is won, a special combination of special symbols (for example, "confirmed cherry lip") that can clearly recognize the winning of this definite combination is not displayed. Notifications are being made. In addition, when the granting of rights is not suppressed and a combination of special symbols is displayed by winning a fixed combination, it is possible to perform special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound). It is not possible to give a special notification when a combination of special symbols is displayed by winning a fixed combination in a state where the grant of rights is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person.

In addition, according to the gaming machine of this detailed example, whether or not the special notification is given depending on whether or not the winning combination is won, whether or not the combination of special symbols is displayed, and whether or not the special notification is performed. I try to decide whether or not. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately manage the situation in which the special notification is performed.

Any means may be used to perform the special notification. For example, the above-mentioned instruction monitor or other effect device controlled on the main side, the above-mentioned display device 11, speaker group, LED group 85, or other effect device controlled on the sub side, or a combination thereof, etc., as required. Various effect devices (notification means) can be adopted.

(Invention 13 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in this detailed example, the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter count regardless of the amount of game value bet, and as a result, not only in the 3-card bet state but also in the 2-card bet state. , Normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts) can be executed.

Further, as described above, in this detailed example, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter count in the 3-card bet state, but do not count in the 2-card bet state. Therefore, in the 3-card bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts) can be executed, but in the 2-card bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit It does not allow processing (number of payouts) to be performed. Therefore, in the two-card bet state, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated even during the pseudo bonus by executing the normal limit processing (number of games) or the normal limit processing (number of payouts).

In this detailed example, for example, the winning probability of the small winning combination and the number of game values given are different between the 3-card bet state and the 2-card bet state (see FIGS. 108 to 113). It is more disadvantageous for the player to play the game with two bets than to play the game. However, in this way, the method that is more disadvantageous to the player when playing the game in the state of two bets is not limited to this. For example, when a game is played in a two-card bet state during a pseudo-bonus, the player may be disadvantaged by not notifying the procedure of the stop operation.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present detail, when the gaming value of the first amount (for example, "3 cards") is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections are in the middle of the advantageous state. Is not forcibly terminated, and it is possible to terminate a series of advantageous sections within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the termination of the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said. On the other hand, when a second amount (for example, "2 cards") of the game value is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player aware that the game was not performed by the intended game method, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game by the intended game method.

In a series of advantageous sections, it is more disadvantageous for the player when the game is played with the second amount of game value bet than when the game is played with the first amount of game value bet. Therefore, by enabling such a warning, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous state, and to play the game in a game method that the player does not intend. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the above.

[Mode suggestion effect of this detailed example (1)]
Subsequently, the mode suggestion effect (No. 1) that can be executed in this detailed example will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining an effect example of the mode suggestion effect (No. 1).

In the present embodiment, the state indicator composed of the 7-segment LED is determined to shift to the advantageous section at a predetermined timing during the game (for example, any timing from the start of the game to the end of the game). The lighting starts at, and the lighting continues while the advantageous section continues, and when the advantageous section ends, the lighting ends, so that the advantageous section starts and the advantageous section is in progress. , And an example in which it is possible to notify all players of the end of the advantageous section has been described. Since such a status indicator is also referred to as, for example, an "advantageous section lamp", it is simply referred to as a "lamp" in this section.

In this detailed example, this lamp does not light only when it is decided to shift from the non-advantageous section to the production section, but when it is decided to shift from the production section to the increase section (pseudo-bonus) for the first time, The lighting is started at a predetermined timing before the game in the increasing section is started (or the stop operation is permitted). Then, the lighting is continued during the increase section. When the increase section ends, the process returns to the effect section except when the limit process is executed, but the lighting continues in the returned effect section. In both the effect section and the increase section, when a series of advantageous sections ends due to the execution of the limit process, the lighting ends with the end.

Here, when returning from the increase section to the effect section, the returned effect section can be roughly divided into three patterns. First, for example, as in the above-mentioned heaven mode, it is the first pattern in which it is confirmed that the transition to the increasing section is performed again within 32 games. In this case, the lamp that has been continuously lit in the returned production section remains lit until it shifts to the increasing section at a predetermined time within at least 32 games.

Next, for example, as in the above-mentioned end mode, if it is not confirmed that the section shifts to the increasing section again within 32 games and the section does not shift to the increasing section again within 32 games, the series of advantageous sections ends. This is the second pattern of shifting to a non-advantageous section. In this case, the lamp that has been continuously lit in the returned production section will be turned off at the end of a series of advantageous sections when 32 games are exhausted.

At the end, for example, as in the above-mentioned heaven preparation mode, it is not certain that the section will shift to the increasing section again within 32 games, but even if the section does not shift to the increasing section again within 32 games, a series of advantages This is the third pattern in which the section does not end. The third pattern, the heaven preparation mode, is more advantageous to the player than the second pattern, the end mode (see FIG. 104).

Here, in FIG. 116, (a) shows the lighting mode of the lamp of the second pattern (in the case of the end mode), and (b) shows the lamp of the third pattern (in the case of the heaven preparation mode). Indicates the lighting mode of.

As shown in FIG. 116 (a), first, when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus first in the production section (“pseudo bonus (first time) start” in FIG. 116), the lamp starts lighting. .. During the pseudo bonus, the lamp will continue to light. Next, when the pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus end” in FIG. 116), even if the pseudo-bonus shifts to the production section (end mode), the lighting of the lamp does not end and continues. As a result, even when the pseudo bonus ends and the mode shifts to the end mode, the player does not recognize it at this point, so that the player's expectation is not lost. Even in the end mode, the pseudo-bonus may actually shift to the pseudo-bonus again within 32 games (see (c) in FIG. 105). Next, when 32 games are digested within 32 games in the end mode without shifting to the pseudo bonus (“32G after the end of the pseudo bonus” in FIG. 116), the ramp is shifted to the non-advantageous section. Lighting ends. At this point, the player can recognize that the end mode has been set. When the mode is not changed to the heaven mode, the lighting mode is almost the same.

As shown in FIG. 116 (b), when it is first decided to shift to the pseudo bonus in the production section (“pseudo bonus (first time) start” in FIG. 116), the lamp starts lighting. .. During the pseudo bonus, the lamp will continue to light. Next, when the pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus end” in FIG. 116), even if the pseudo-bonus shifts to the production section (heaven preparation mode), the lighting of the lamp does not end and continues. As a result, even if the pseudo bonus ends and the player shifts to the heaven preparation mode, the player does not recognize it at this point. Next, when 32 games are digested within 32 games in the heaven preparation mode without shifting to the pseudo bonus (“32G after the end of the pseudo bonus” in FIG. 116), heaven preparation without shifting to the non-advantageous section. Since the mode continues, the lighting of the lamp does not end and continues. At this point, the player can recognize that he was not in the end mode.

That is, as for the lighting mode of the lamp, it is not recognized which mode is stayed within 32 games after the pseudo bonus ends, and when 32 games are exhausted after the pseudo bonus ends, the lamp lights up. When it ends, it is recognized that it was in the end mode, and when it continues to light, it is recognized that it is in heaven preparation mode.

The means for performing such notification is not limited to the "advantageous section lamp", and any means may be used. For example, the above-mentioned instruction monitor or other effect device controlled on the main side, the above-mentioned display device 11, speaker group, LED group 85, or other effect device controlled on the sub side, or a combination thereof, etc., as required. Various effect devices (notification means) can be adopted.

In addition, even when the pseudo bonus ends and the mode shifts to the end mode, the lamp may continue to light for more than 32 games, or the pseudo bonus ends and the mode is set to heaven preparation mode. Even in the case of transition, the lighting of the lamp may end when 32 games are exhausted. For example, the number of games in which the lamp continues to light may be determined by lottery according to the current mode. In this case, the probability that the lamp will continue to light beyond 32 games is higher in the transition to heaven preparation mode than in the transition to end mode, and 32 games have been exhausted. Occasionally, the probability that the lamp will end lighting should be lower when transitioning to heaven preparation mode than when transitioning to end mode.

Further, whether or not the lamp continues to be lit for more than 32 games may be determined according to the pseudo-bonus transition probability in the mode shifted after the pseudo-bonus ends. For example, looking at (c) of FIG. 105, if the player shifts to the end A mode after the pseudo bonus ends, the probability of shifting to the pseudo bonus again is the lowest, and if the pseudo bonus ends and then shifts to another mode, the pseudo bonus again. The probability of shifting to is higher than that of shifting to the end A mode. Therefore, when the end A mode has a low pseudo-bonus transition probability, the lamp ends lighting when 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo-bonus, and when the pseudo-bonus transition probability is higher than that, the pseudo-bonus transition probability is pseudo. The lamp may continue to be lit even after 32 games have passed since the end of the bonus. In this detailed example, the end A mode and the end B mode end in 32 games after the end of the pseudo bonus and shift to the non-advantageous section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 32 games after the end of the pseudo bonus. It may not end with and do not shift to the non-advantageous section. Further, in this case, the predetermined period during which the lamp can be continuously lit may not be limited to 32 games, which is the number of ceiling games in the heaven mode. For example, after the end of the pseudo-bonus, it is assumed that the lamp continues to be lit for at least 100 games (or 10 games less than 32 games), and 100 games (10 games in the case of 10 games) are played. When the lapse has elapsed, the lighting of the lamp may be ended in the end A mode, and the lighting of the lamp may be continued in the other modes. That is, a predetermined period during which the lamp can be continuously lit can be set as an arbitrary period. Further, in this detailed example, if the player shifts to the heaven preparation mode after the pseudo-bonus ends, it is determined that the player shifts to the heaven mode after the pseudo-bonus ends when the pseudo-bonus ends. For example, when the pseudo-bonus is controlled from the heaven preparation mode and the pseudo-bonus ends, there is a higher probability than when the pseudo-bonus is controlled from the end mode (or normal mode) and the pseudo-bonus ends. Anything that shifts to heaven mode will do. Also, the benefits of heaven preparation mode are not limited to this. For example, it may be a privilege that the pseudo-bonus transition probability is higher than that of the end mode, or it may be a privilege that the number of ceiling games is smaller than that of the end mode. That is, the content of the privilege suggested to the player by whether or not the lamp continues to light at a predetermined time after the end of the pseudo bonus may be any privilege as long as it is beneficial to the player. ..

(Invention 14 according to this detailed example)
As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present detailed example, when the advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) ends, the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the advantageous state ends. A specific state (for example, heaven mode) that is determined to be, a first predetermined state (for example, end mode) in which it is not determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, and an advantageous state. It is not certain that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state again within a predetermined period after the end of the game, but it can be controlled to any state of the second predetermined state (for example, heaven preparation mode) which is more advantageous than the first predetermined state. ..

Then, from the time when the advantageous state is started, the same notification is performed in any state during the predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, and when the predetermined period elapses, the first predetermined state is reached. If so, the notification is terminated, and if it is in the second predetermined state, the notification may be continued. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this detailed example, if the notification continues even after a predetermined period has passed after the end of the advantageous state, if the next advantageous state is started, it will be in a specific state after the end. Since the possibility of transition is high, even if the transition to a specific state is not made after the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to maintain the motivation and interest in playing the game.

In the gaming machine of this detailed example, when the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) ends, the first predetermined state (for example, end A mode) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state again is a predetermined probability, and again. It is possible to control to any of the second predetermined states (for example, heaven preparation mode) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the predetermined probability, and the advantageous state is started from the time when the advantageous state is started. During the predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the state ends, the same notification is performed in any state, and when the predetermined period elapses, the notification ends if it is the first predetermined state. However, if it is in the second predetermined state, the notification may be continued. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained.

[Mode suggestion effect of this detailed example (Part 2)]
Subsequently, the mode suggestion effect (No. 2) that can be executed in this detailed example will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 shows an example of the bet lamp change lottery table referred to in the mode suggestion effect (No. 2), and FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining an effect example of the mode suggestion effect (No. 2). is there.

In this detailed example, the bet lamp display unit (BL) shown in FIG. 118 is provided in a predetermined area on the display device 11, a predetermined area on the sub display device 18, or another predetermined area near the symbol display area 4. .. The bet lamp display unit (BL) is configured as a part of the display screen when it is provided on the display device 11 or the sub display device 18, for example, when it is provided in the vicinity of the symbol display device 4. Is configured as an LED. The basic function of the bet lamp display unit (BL) is to display the current number of bets. Therefore, for example, in the two-card bet state, BL1 and BL2 are lit, and BL3 is not lit, so that the bet game value is two. Further, for example, in a three-card bet state, BL1 to BL3 are lit to notify that the bet game value is three.

In this detailed example, the bet lamp display unit (BL) is further used to perform a mode suggestion effect capable of suggesting the current mode depending on the display mode of the bet lamp display unit (BL).

First, a display mode of the bet lamp display unit (BL) in the normal state (original bet number display) will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (a).

For example, when the previous game was in a three-card bet state, the bet lamp display unit (BL) is in the display mode of (4). In the display mode of (4), if the re-game is not activated in the previous game, the same display mode is maintained until the player bets the game value in the current game. Then, when the player bets the game value in this game, first, the display mode of (4) changes to the display mode of (1). That is, each of BL1 to BL3 changes from being lit in the basic colors (blue, green, red) to being completely turned off. Here, if the bet game value is one, the display mode of (1) changes to the display mode of (2). Further, if the bet game value is two, the display mode of (1) changes to the display mode of (3). Further, if the bet game value is 3, the display mode of (1) changes to the display mode of (4). That is, the display mode changes according to the number of bets of the player (the number of bets recognized by the gaming machine).

For example, if the bet game value is one, the display mode of (1) changes to the display mode of (2), and if the bet game value is two, the display of (1) is displayed. After changing from the display mode to the display mode of (2), if the display mode is further changed to (3) and the bet game value is 3, the display mode of (1) is changed to the display mode of (2). After the change, the display mode may be changed to (3), and finally the display mode may be changed to (4). That is, even when the re-game is not activated in the previous game, the display modes of BL1 to BL3 may be sequentially changed as in the case where the re-game is activated.

Further, for example, when the previous game was in a three-card bet state, the bet lamp display unit (BL) is in the display mode of (4). In the display mode of (4), when the re-game is activated in the previous game, the same display mode is maintained until the re-game is started in the current game. Then, when the operation of the re-game is started in this game, first, the display mode of (4) changes to the display mode of (1). That is, each of BL1 to BL3 changes from a state in which the basic colors (blue, green, red) are lit to a state in which all are turned off. Then, according to the operation of the re-game, the display mode of (1) is changed to the display mode of (2), then the display mode is changed to (3), and finally the display mode is changed to (4). To do. That is, the display mode changes in sequence according to the operation of the re-game on the gaming machine side.

In this detailed example, for example, "F_Replay A" and "F_Replay B" are displayed side by side, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the replay combination has won a prize. A normal replay combination in which the combination of (normal replay display mode) is displayed, and an appropriate stop operation (for example, a "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L, such as "F_confirmed cherry" or "F_middle cherry". As a result of displaying the "cherry" symbol in the lower or middle row of the left reel 3L, it is possible to recognize that a winning combination other than the replay (for example, a small winning combination) has been won. While the combination of symbols (special re-game display mode) is displayed, it is difficult to recognize which role has won the so-called "separate eyes" (that is, which role has been won) unless an appropriate stop operation is performed. There is a rare replay combination in which a combination (special replay display mode) is displayed. Further, when the rare replay combination is won, the normal replay display mode may be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (first right stop) (see FIG. 113).

Therefore, in this detailed example, at least, different bet effects are performed depending on whether the normal re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated and the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated. I have to. Specifically, when the normal re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated, the display mode on the bet lamp display unit (BL) is described from (1) to (2) and (2) as described above. While the bet effect is sequentially changed as in (3), (3) to (4), when the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated, as described above (1). A bet effect that suddenly changes from) to (4) is performed.

In addition, when the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated, any bet effect may be performed. Alternatively, when the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated, (1) to (4), (4) to (3), (3) to (2), (2) to (1) ), And then the bet effect of changing from (1) to (4) may be performed. That is, there are cases where the normal re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated, cases where the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated, and cases where the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated. In some cases, different betting effects can be made.

Return to the explanation of the mode suggestion effect (Part 2). In this detailed example, in the production section, the bet lamp change lottery table shown in FIG. 117 is referred to, and the bet lamp changes according to the number of games, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, and the current mode. A lottery will be held. In FIG. 117, the “number of games” indicates the number of games after the end of the pseudo bonus. For example, "1 to 500" indicates that the number of games is within 500 games after the end of the pseudo bonus, and "501 to" indicates that the number of games exceeds 500 after the end of the pseudo bonus. Here, in this detailed example, since the number of ceiling games in the heaven preparation mode is set to about 500 games, even if the pseudo bonus is not shifted to the pseudo bonus again within 32 games after the pseudo bonus ends. If you are in heaven preparation mode, it will be confirmed that you will shift to a pseudo bonus within 500 games at the latest. Therefore, in the bet lamp change lottery table shown in FIG. 117, if it is within 500 games after the end of the pseudo bonus, the probability of winning the bet lamp change lottery is increased as compared with the case where it exceeds 500 games after the end of the pseudo bonus. It is possible to maintain the player's motivation and interest in playing.

Further, in the bet lamp change lottery table shown in FIG. 117, when the current mode is the normal B mode and the heaven preparation mode, the probability of winning the bet lamp change lottery is higher than in the other modes. ing. As described above, the heaven preparation mode is an advantageous mode, but since the normal B mode is also at least a more advantageous mode than the normal A mode (see FIG. 104), the number of times the bet lamp change lottery is won is large. In this case, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that a relatively advantageous mode has been determined. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation and interest in playing.

It should be noted that in FIG. 117, the "missing" is caused by a pure "missing" (when the "missing" occurs due to the 3-bet state between the 2BB flags, the "missing" is due to the 2-bet state between the 3BB flags. (Including when it becomes "missing"), and does not include the case where it becomes "missing" as a result of "missing". Even in such a case, the bet lamp change lottery can be performed.

Further, even when a winning combination other than that shown in FIG. 117 is won, the bet lamp lottery can be appropriately performed. In this case, the mode of changing the bet lamp may be different depending on the type of the internal winning combination. For example, when the bet lamp change lottery was won at the time of "off", "white" was used as the special color described later, and the bet lamp change lottery was won at the time of "through lip 1" and "through lip 2". In this case, "blue" is used as the special color described later, "yellow" is used as the special color described later when the bet lamp change lottery is won for "bell", and the bet lamp change lottery is used for the "weak che". If you win the prize, use "red" as the special color described later, and if you win the bet lamp change lottery for "watermelon", use "green" as the special color described later, and use "fixed role" and "middle". If the bet lamp change lottery is won at the time of "Che", "Rainbow" may be used as a special color described later. Further, for example, the mode of changing the bet lamp can be changed depending on the blinking speed or the like.

By the way, as in this detailed example, when a production (bet lamp change production) in which the frequency of occurrence changes with the passage of the number of games is installed, the pachislot 1 is set for the player who started the game immediately after the opening of the game store. There is a risk that it will be detected whether the change has been made or not (that is, the setting has been deferred).

Specifically, for example, when the number of games at the end of the previous day is 300 and 1 to 200 games (that is, 301 to 500 games in the case of deferred setting) are played from the opening of the day, the relevant game is concerned. Since the bet lamp change lottery table of the number of games "1 to 500" shown in FIG. 117 is referred to between the games, the frequency of occurrence of the effect is relatively high. On the other hand, if the game is played after 201 games (that is, after 501 games in the case of deferred setting) from the opening of the store at the time of winning, and if the setting has been changed, FIG. 117 continues. Since the bet lamp change lottery table of the number of games "1 to 500" shown is referred to, the frequency of occurrence of the effect does not change, but in the case of deferring the setting, the number of games "501 to" shown in FIG. 117 Since the bet lamp change lottery table is referred to, the frequency of occurrence of the effect is reduced. That is, when the frequency of occurrence of the effect decreases after a specific number of games, it is highly likely that the setting has not been changed (that is, the setting has been left unchanged), and it is detected immediately after the store opens. There is. Then, if the operation data of the previous day that can be confirmed on the data display in the game store is presumed to have a low set value (low setting), the player "defers the low setting". The impression is that the setting value is high (high setting) and the expectation is lost early.

Therefore, when the setting is deferred and the power is restored (especially when the store is closed and the time that can be presumed to have been restored is elapsed, such as when more than 2 hours have passed after the power was cut) and When the setting is changed, the following specifications may be used so that it is difficult to detect whether or not the setting has been changed depending on the frequency of occurrence of the bet lamp change effect.

For example, in the first specification example, the current mode is referred to after the power failure is restored and the setting is changed, but the bet lamp change of the number of games "501-" shown in FIG. 117 is irrespective of the current number of games. The state at the time of opening when the lottery table is referred to. In this case, the state at the time of opening of the store may be canceled with the first pseudo bonus winning. In this way, even if the game is played immediately after the store opens, the frequency of occurrence of the bet lamp change effect does not change after a specific number of games, so the number of games at the end of the previous day and the number of games on the day are taken into consideration. However, it is possible to prevent it from being detected whether or not the setting has been changed. The first specification example can also be adopted in the reel side lamp effect described later. For example, in the state at the time of opening the store, the reel side lamp effect described later can be performed in the effect mode when the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect is always 0.

Further, for example, in the second specification example, after the power failure is restored and the setting is changed, the bet lamp change lottery is not performed at all until the first pseudo bonus winning. By doing so, it is possible not only to prevent the setting change from being detected, but also to reduce the processing load of the effect control. The second specification example can also be adopted in the reel side lamp effect described later. For example, in the prohibited state, it is possible to prevent the reel side lamp effect described later from being performed.

In addition, it is difficult to see the difference in the production frequency when the setting is changed and when the setting is deferred, and the specific number of games (that is, in the above example, the total of the number of games at the end of the previous day and the number of games on the day is 500 games). Specifications other than the above specification example can be adopted as long as the specifications do not change the production frequency or reduce the degree of change after the passage of time.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 118 (b), a display mode of the bet lamp display unit (BL) in the bet lamp change effect executed when the bet lamp change lottery is won will be described. Note that FIG. 118B shows an example of the bet lamp change effect when the bet lamp change lottery is won and the re-game does not operate in the previous game.

As described above, for example, when the previous game was in a three-card bet state, the bet lamp display unit (BL) is in the display mode of (4). In the display mode of (4), if the re-game is not activated in the previous game, the same display mode is maintained until the player bets the game value in the current game. Then, when the player bets the game value in this game, first, the display mode of (4) changes to the display mode of (1). That is, each of BL1 to BL3 changes from being lit in the basic colors (blue, green, red) to being completely turned off. At this time, if the bet lamp change lottery is won, the display mode of (1) changes to the display mode of (5). That is, BL1 to BL3 suddenly light up in a special color (yellow) different from the basic color. As a result, the player recognizes that the display mode is different from the normal display mode.

As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the mode of the bet lamp display unit when the bet lamp change lottery is won is not limited to this. For example, when the player bets the game value in the game this time, the display mode of (4) suddenly changes to the display mode of (5) without changing from the display mode of (4) to the display mode of (1). You may try to do so. Further, for example, after the third stop of the previous game (when the pressing of the stop button at the time of the third stop is released), the display mode of (4) is changed to the display mode of (1), and then (1). The display mode of (5) may be changed from the display mode of (5). Further, for example, after the third stop of the previous game (when the pressing of the stop button at the time of the third stop is released), the display mode of (4) may be changed to the display mode of (5). .. Further, for example, when the player bets the game value in this game, or after the third stop of the previous game (when the press of the stop button at the third stop is released), from the display mode of (4). After changing to the display mode of (1), it may be changed to the display mode of (4) once, and then changed from the display mode of (4) to the display mode of (5).

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 118 (c), a display mode of the bet lamp display unit (BL) in the bet lamp change effect executed when the bet lamp change lottery is won will be described. Note that FIG. 118 (c) shows an example of the bet lamp change effect when the bet lamp change lottery is won and the re-game is activated in the previous game.

As described above, for example, when the previous game was in a three-card bet state, the bet lamp display unit (BL) is in the display mode of (4). In the display mode of (4), when the re-game is activated in the previous game, the same display mode is maintained until the re-game is started in the current game. Then, when the operation of the re-game is started in this game, first, the display mode of (4) changes to the display mode of (1). That is, each of BL1 to BL3 changes from a state in which the basic colors (blue, green, red) are lit to a state in which all are turned off. At this time, if the bet lamp change lottery is won, the display mode of (1) is changed to the display mode of (6) according to the operation of the re-game, and then the display mode is changed to (7). Finally, the display mode changes to (8). That is, BL1 to BL3 are sequentially lit in a special color (yellow) different from the basic color. As a result, the player recognizes that the display mode is different from the normal display mode.

As shown in FIG. 118 (c), the mode of the bet lamp display unit when the bet lamp change lottery is won is not limited to this. For example, when the operation of the re-game is started in the game this time, the display modes (6) to (8) are displayed from the display mode of (4) without changing from the display mode of (4) to the display mode of (1). The mode may be changed sequentially. Further, for example, when the operation of the re-game is started in the game this time, the display mode of (4) is changed to the display mode of (1), and then the display mode is temporarily changed to (2) to (4). Then, the display mode of (4) may be changed to the display mode of (8).

Further, when the player bets and when the player operates the re-game (automatic insertion), the main CPU 101 transmits a medal insertion command each time the game value is input (see FIGS. 57 and 58). Each time the sub CPU 201 receives this medal insertion command, it makes a lighting request request so that the above-mentioned display mode is changed. When the MAX bet button 15a is operated and a bet is made, or when the re-game operation is performed (automatic insertion), the main CPU 101 gives information indicating that three game values have been inserted once. It may be transmitted to the sub CPU 201 by the input command. In this case, the sub CPU 201 is delayed at each request request timing when, for example, the replay operation is performed (automatic input) and the display mode of FIGS. 118A and 118 is changed. By multiplying by (setting the delay time), control may be performed so that the display mode is sequentially changed.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 sequentially changes the above-mentioned display mode or sequentially changes the above-mentioned display mode, an error (including opening the door) occurs, and an error command is transmitted from the main CPU 101. If this is the case, during the error, the control for sequentially changing the display mode described above is not executed, but the control for displaying the final display mode is performed.

For example, when the display mode shown in FIG. 118 (c) is changed, the sub CPU 201 has (a) a request request for turning on BL1 in yellow, (b) a request for turning on BL2 in yellow, and (c). ) By sequentially performing request requests for turning on BL3 in yellow, control is performed so that the display mode is sequentially changed as shown in (6) to (8), but during an error, (c) By making only the request for turning on the BL3 in yellow, it is controlled so that it is suddenly displayed in the display mode shown in (8).

For example, the sub CPU 201 displays during an error to notify that the error is occurring. Such a display is requested in a dedicated process during an error. On the other hand, the request request for sequentially changing the above-mentioned display mode is requested within the normal processing. Therefore, in order to sequentially change the display mode even during an error, it is necessary to be able to determine the state and make a request request for sequentially changing the display mode even within the process dedicated to the error. The processing becomes complicated, and there is a high possibility that problems such as the display during an important error not being performed or the bet lamp display unit (BL) not lighting at all occur. Therefore, the above-mentioned display mode is not sequentially changed during the error, and the final display mode is displayed so as not to cause a difference in the information obtained by the player.

Return to the explanation of the mode suggestion effect (Part 2). In this detailed example, the bet lamp change effect itself described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 is also an effect suggesting a mode, but in this detailed example, according to the history of the bet lamp change effect. Therefore, it is possible to perform a mode suggestion effect using the reel side lamp display unit (SL) during non-game.

In this detailed example, the reel side lamp display unit (SL) shown in FIG. 118 is provided on the side surface of each reel (3L, 3C, 3R). For example, SL1 is provided on the left side surface of the reel 3L, SL2 is provided between the reel 3L and the reel 3C, SL3 is provided between the reel 3C and the reel 3R, and SL4 is provided on the right side surface of the reel 3R. Is provided. The reel side lamp display unit (SL) is provided, for example, by having a structure in which light from a back lamp (not shown) for illuminating each reel from the back side can be visually recognized from the side surface of each reel. It may be provided by installing a plurality of LEDs on the side surface of each reel, or may be provided by installing a liquid crystal display device or EL on the side surface of each reel. .. Further, for example, when a liquid crystal display device is provided on the front side of each reel, the window frame of the portion of the liquid crystal display device in which the reel display window is formed is used as the reel side lamp display unit (SL). May be good.

In this detailed example, for example, when the state in which the game value is not input or stored and the game operation is not performed continues for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), the game value is input or the game operation is performed next. It is determined to be in a non-gaming state until it is performed. Then, in the non-gaming state, a demonstration effect is performed at regular intervals. Then, in the demonstration effect, the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is referred to, the effect mode of the reel side lamp display unit (SL) is determined according to the number of executions, and the reel side according to the determined effect mode. Lamp production is performed.

For example, when the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is 0, the first effect mode is determined, and the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is 1 to 3 times. The second effect mode is determined, and when the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is 4 or more, the third effect mode is determined. The number of executions of the bet lamp change effect is started when the pseudo-bonus ends, and is cleared when it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus again.

The first production mode is, for example, a production mode in which the reel side lamp display units (SL) blink all at once in the demonstration production, and the second production mode is, for example, in the demonstration production, the reel side lamps. The display unit (SL) blinks sequentially from left to right, and the second production mode is, for example, in the demonstration production, the reel side lamp display unit (SL) is directed from right to left. It is an effect mode such as blinking sequentially. It should be noted that the method for differentiating the first to third production modes is not limited to this. For example, the effect mode may be different depending on the emission color of the reel side lamp display unit (SL), or the effect mode may be different depending on the length of the effect to be executed.

In addition, the first to third production modes may be determined by lottery. In this case, when the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is 0, the probability that the first effect mode is determined is "high", and the probability that the second effect mode is determined is "high". The probability that the third effect mode is determined is "low", and when the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is 1 to 3, the first effect mode is determined. The probability is "low", the probability that the second production mode is determined is "high", the probability that the third production mode is determined is "low", and the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between pseudo bonuses is 4. When it is more than once, the probability that the first production mode is determined is "low", the probability that the second production mode is determined is "low", and the probability that the third production mode is determined is "low". It should be "high".

Further, the effect according to the first to third effect modes may be performed during the game, not in the non-game state. In this case, for example, in the production section, when the result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery is non-winning, the production execution lottery is performed, and when the lottery is won, the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo-bonus is executed according to the number of executions. The production may be performed.

The bet lamp display unit (BL) and the reel side lamp display unit (SL) are examples of the effect device, and other effect devices can be used respectively. For example, a predetermined area in the display device 11 is bet. Each effect may be performed by assuming that it corresponds to the lamp display unit (BL) and that the specific area in the display device 11 corresponds to the reel side lamp display unit (SL). That is, the effect means used in the mode suggestion effect (No. 2) may be any effect means.

(Invention 15 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in the normal state (for example, the effect section), the first effect (for example, the mode) has a different probability depending on the expected degree of grant (for example, the mode) of the advantageous state (for example, the pseudo bonus). , Bet lamp change effect), and further, it is possible to perform the second effect (for example, reel side lamp effect) in a different effect mode depending on the number of times the first effect is executed. That is, for example, even if the game is not performed from the beginning in the normal state, it may be possible to estimate the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state by using the execution frequency of the first effect and the effect mode of the second effect as clues. It has become. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, since the second effect is performed in the non-gaming state, the effect mode of the second effect can be an effective index for the player who is going to play the game from now on. As a result, it is possible to increase the motivation for playing and improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Invention 16 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in the normal state (for example, the effect section), the specific effect (for example, for example) has a different probability depending on the expected degree (for example, mode) of giving an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus). Bet lamp change production) is made possible. That is, there are cases where it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation of granting an advantageous state by using the execution frequency of the specific effect as a clue. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained. Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the specific effect is performed by changing the display mode of the bet number display. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated production device or the like for performing a specific production, and it is possible to perform the specific production in a natural flow during the game. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that enhances the motivation for playing and the interest in the game with a general-purpose configuration.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, a pseudo bet effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 118 (a)) is performed when the re-game is activated, and the specific effect also follows the flow of such a bet effect. It is designed to be performed in various manners. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the motivation for playing and the interest in the game in a more comfortable manner.

(Invention 17 according to this detailed example)
Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in addition to the one described in the invention 16 according to the above detailed example, when the specific effect is performed during the occurrence of an error, the game machine does not follow the flow of the bet effect and is final. Only the displayed contents are displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect and prevent the player from making a difference in the information obtained even when an error occurs.

(Invention 18 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, either of the first stop display mode (for example, the normal re-game display mode) that makes it easy for the player to recognize that the player has won the re-game combination. The player recognizes that the prize is between the third stop display mode (for example, the special re-game display mode) that makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether the prize is a prize or the re-game combination. A first stop display mode that facilitates the game and a second stop display mode that allows the player to recognize that the winning combination is different from the replay combination (for example, a special replay display mode). It is possible to make the effect mode of the bet effect different from that of the third stop display mode, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize which role is won. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused even when the player has a plurality of stop display modes of the re-game combination.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, when a specific re-game combination (for example, "F_confirmed cherry") is won, a first stop display mode, a second stop display mode, and a third stop display mode are used. There is a possibility that any of the above will be displayed. For example, it is possible to change the game playability depending on the difference in the stop display mode, but even in such a case, it is possible to perform an appropriate bet effect. It becomes. Furthermore, the playability can be suggested by the bet effect.

[Music production during the pseudo bonus of this detailed example]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 119, the music production during the pseudo-bonus that can be executed in this detailed example will be described. FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining a production example of the music production during the pseudo-bonus.

First, in this detailed example, when the pseudo-bonus is started, the 1G stock is obtained when the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery is won and the result is "with ceiling shortening", or when the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery is won. When it is 1 or more, the music production is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, it may be a probability of 100% or an arbitrary probability of 1 to 99%). .. As a result, the player is notified that the pseudo bonus is extended.

Further, in this detailed example, when the 1G stock becomes 1 or more by winning the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery during the pseudo bonus, a predetermined probability (for example, 100% probability may be used, or 1 to 99). It is also possible to execute the music production with an arbitrary probability of%).

The mode in which the music production is executed is not limited to this. For example, in order to enhance the interest in the pseudo-bonus, the music production may be executed with a predetermined probability regardless of whether or not it is decided that the pseudo-bonus is extended.

Further, for example, when it is determined that the production section after the end of the pseudo bonus is in the heaven mode (or only the heaven C mode), the music production may be executed with a predetermined probability. Further, the music production may be executed with a predetermined probability depending on whether or not it is decided that the pseudo bonus is extended and the production section after the pseudo bonus ends. Specifically, for example, when it is decided that the pseudo-bonus is extended and the production section after the pseudo-bonus ends is in heaven mode, the music production is executed with a 100% probability, and the pseudo-bonus is extended. Although it has been decided that it will be done, if the production section after the end of the pseudo bonus is not in heaven mode, there is a 50% chance that the music production will be executed and the pseudo bonus will not be extended, but the pseudo bonus When the production section after the end is in the heaven mode, the music production may be executed with a probability of 50%.

The music production data 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a) is a music pattern in which the music production is started at an arbitrary timing after the pseudo bonus is started (for example, when the pseudo bonus is started), and is an intro section. It is a music pattern composed of A (unique part) and a music loop part (common part). The intro part A is a flow-out part in the music production, and may be music data (or data including character lines and sound effects) configured so as not to be repeatedly (looped) reproduced. Hereinafter, the intro part A may be used. B and the intro part C are also the same), and the music loop part is music data configured such that a music having a predetermined length is repeatedly (looped) played until the end of the pseudo bonus after the outflow portion.

The music production data 2 shown in FIG. 119 (b) is obtained at an arbitrary timing after the start of the pseudo-bonus (for example, when a special sound is output at the start of the pseudo-bonus, or after the start of the pseudo-bonus (for example, for example). It is a music pattern in which the music production is started from (when a special sound is output at the start of the next game), and is a music pattern composed of an intro part B (unique part) and a music loop part (common part). is there. The intro part B is a flow-out part in the music production, and is music data configured so as not to be repeatedly (looped) reproduced. The music loop portion is the same as that in the music production data 1.

The music production data 3 shown in FIG. 119 (c) is predetermined to be notified at an arbitrary timing after the start of the pseudo bonus (for example, in the game of the 10th game after the start of the pseudo bonus). When the game of the 10th game is started, or when it is decided to announce that the 1G consecutive stock is 1 or more after the start of the pseudo bonus (for example, when the game winning the 1G consecutive lottery is started) ), Which is a music pattern composed of an intro part C (unique part) and a music loop part (common part). The intro part C is a flow-out part in the music production, and is music data configured so as not to be repeatedly (looped) reproduced. The music loop portion is the same as that in the music production data 1.

Here, in the intro part A, the intro part B, and the intro part C, for example, the music has the same content, but the presence or absence of the character's dialogue is different, the content of the dialogue is different, the presence or absence of the sound effect is different, or It can be configured as different music data in such a manner that the content of the sound effect is different, the music tone is different, or the tempo is different. Further, for example, it can be simply composed as different songs. Further, the time from the start to the end of the output may be the same (or substantially the same) or may be different. In addition, the timing at which the musical composition is started is not limited to the start of the game, but any timing within the unit game (for example, when the start lever is operated, when a specific stop button is operated, when all reels are stopped, etc.). Can be.

In the following, as an example, the intro section A has the longest time from the start to the end of output, the intro section C has the shortest time from the start to the end of output, and the intro section B has the shortest output. It is assumed that the time from the start to the end of is in the middle.

In this detailed example, regardless of which of the music production data 1 to 3 is used to execute the music production during the pseudo-bonus, for example, a power failure occurs, an error occurs, and the door is opened (front door 2b). When an interruption event such as (opening) occurs, the execution of the music production is also interrupted along with the interruption of the pseudo bonus. Then, when such an interruption event is resolved, the execution of the music production is resumed with the resumption of the pseudo bonus, but in this case, the music production is executed by any of the music production data 1 to 3. Even in this case, the music production data 3 is selected, and the music production according to the music production data 3 is controlled to be executed from the beginning.

Here, the music production data 3 is basically a music pattern configured on the assumption that the output of the music is started in the middle of the pseudo-bonus, and the intro portion is the shortest music pattern. Therefore, when the pseudo-bonus is interrupted and then resumed, the music pattern output from the beginning has the least discomfort given to the player. On the other hand, the music production data 1 and the music production data 2 are basically music patterns configured on the assumption that the output of the music is started when the pseudo bonus is started (or immediately after). In addition, the intro part is a music pattern longer than the music production data 3. Therefore, as compared with the music production data 3, when the pseudo-bonus is interrupted and then restarted, the music pattern output from the beginning has a lot of discomfort given to the player.

Further, depending on which of the music production data 1 to 3 is used to execute the music production, when the pseudo bonus is interrupted, the interrupted portion of the music production data is memorized, and when the pseudo bonus is restarted, It is also possible to control the music production to be restarted from the interrupted portion, and even if the music production is executed by any of the music production data 1 to 3, the music production is restarted after the pseudo bonus is interrupted. When it is done, it is possible to control so that only the music loop part (common part) is executed from the beginning, but in the former case, the interruption point must be memorized, and in the latter case. It is necessary to separately specify music production data such as executing only the music loop portion (common), and in either case, the control burden and the amount of information will increase. Therefore, it can be said that the method in this detail is the most efficient.

(Invention 19 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, only the outflow part (for example, intro parts A to C) is different, and a common music piece (for example, a music loop part) is output to a plurality of music productions (for example). , Music production according to music production data 1 to 3), no matter which music production is executed, an interruption event (for example, power failure, error, door opening, etc.) occurs. When resuming afterwards, a specific musical composition (for example, a musical composition according to the musical composition data 3) is restarted from the beginning. That is, the mode is the same when the interruption event occurs and then restarts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort when the music production is restarted after the interruption event occurs.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the musical composition effect is used as an effect of notifying the extension of a specific state (for example, a pseudo bonus). Then, when resuming after the interruption event occurs, the music production (for example, the music production according to the music production data 3) in which the extension of the specific state is always notified in the middle is restarted from the beginning. There is. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the music production and further reduce the discomfort when the production is resumed.

[State suggestion effect of this detailed example]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 120, the state suggestion effect that can be performed in this detailed example will be described. FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining a state suggestion effect.

First, in this detailed example, the stop state notification unit 117 (not shown. For convenience of explanation, provided inside the stop button 17L), which is composed of a full-color LED, is stopped inside each of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. The state notification unit 117L, the one provided inside the stop button 17C is referred to as the stop state notification unit 117C, and the one provided inside the stop button 17R is referred to as the stop state notification unit 117R). The stop state notification unit 117 is basically used to notify whether or not the current state is a state in which a stop operation is possible. The display mode of the stop state notification unit 117 is controlled by the sub CPU 201, but may be controlled by the main CPU 101.

That is, when the rotation of each reel is started, the rotation speed becomes a constant speed, and the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are activated, it is the "stop permission time", and each reel is stopped by the stop operation. Next, the period until the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are activated is "other than when stop is permitted". The stop state notification unit 117 notifies the player whether or not the stop operation is possible by changing the display mode between "when stop is permitted" and "when stop is permitted".

When each reel is rotating and all the stop buttons are enabled, the stop state notification units 117L, 117C, and 117R are all displayed as "when stop is permitted". Here, for example, for example, When the stop operation is performed on the stop button 17L and the left reel 3L is stopped, the stop button 17L is no longer a valid stop button. Therefore, the stop status notification units 117C and 117R remain in the display mode of "when stop is permitted". However, the stop state notification unit 117L has a display mode of "other than when stop is permitted". In this way, the stop state notification units 117L, 117C, and 117R can individually change the display mode.

Here, in this detailed example, as described above, neither "F_2BB" nor "F_3BB" has been won and carried over (between non-flags), and "F_2BB" in the two-card bet state. (2BB winning game), "F_3BB" winning in a 3-card bet state (3BB winning game), "F_2BB" being carried over after winning (between 2BB flags), "BB01" 2BB state (2BB is operating), "F_3BB" is won and then carried over (between 3BB flags), and "BB02" is displayed and transitioned to 3BB state (3BB is operating). It is possible to be controlled to any of the above states (game state).

Therefore, in this detailed example, the stop state notification unit 117 is controlled to which of the above-mentioned states, while maintaining the function of notifying the player whether or not the stop operation is possible. Is also configured so that it can be suggested.

As shown in FIG. 120, the stop state notification unit 117 takes a display mode of "green" color when "other than when stop is permitted" and "blue" color when "when stop is permitted" between the non-flags. Is displayed. Further, in the 2BB winning game, the display mode is "green" if it is "other than when stop is permitted", and the display mode is "white" if it is "when stop is permitted". Further, in the 3BB winning game, the display mode is "green" if it is "other than when stop is permitted", and the display mode is "orange" if it is "when stop is permitted". That is, the stop state notification unit 117 can suggest the type of the internal winning combination (more specifically, the bonus combination) or the type of the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed, depending on the display mode of "when stop is permitted". ..

Further, the stop state notification unit 117 may display a "red" color between the 2BB flags if it is "other than when stop is permitted" and display "BB01" when it is "when stop is permitted". If it is not possible, the display mode is "blue", and if it is possible to display "BB01", the display mode is "white". In addition, between the 3BB flags, if it is "other than when stop is permitted", the display mode is "purple", and if it is "when stop is permitted" and it is impossible to display "BB02", "blue" is displayed. If it is possible to display "BB02", the display mode is "orange". That is, the stop state notification unit 117 can suggest the type of the internal winning combination (more specifically, the bonus combination) or the type of the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed, depending on the display mode of "when stop is permitted". At the same time, it is possible to suggest the current state (game state) by the display mode of "other than when the stop is permitted".

Further, in the 2BB state, the stop state notification unit 117 takes a display mode of "yellow" if it is "other than when stop is permitted" and a display mode of "blue" if it is "when stop is permitted". Further, in the 3BB state, the display mode is "yellow" if it is "other than when stop is permitted", and the display mode is "blue" if it is "when stop is permitted". That is, the stop state notification unit 117 can suggest the current state (game state) by the display mode of "other than when stop is permitted".

Here, as described above, in this detailed example, the game playability varies depending on whether the game is played in the state of three bets between the 2BB flags or the game is played in the state of three bets between the 3BB flags. Therefore, whether the current state is between the 2BB flags or the 3BB flags, or as a premise, it is better to shift to 2BB in a game that can shift to the 2BB state, or not to shift. Whether it is better, or whether it is better to shift to 3BB in a game that can shift to the 3BB state, or whether it is better not to shift is of great concern not only to the player but also to the game store side. Therefore, by making the above-mentioned suggestions, it is possible to substantially select (variate) the playability.

The display mode of the stop state notification unit 117 described above is an example, and is not limited to this. That is, if it is possible to suggest the type of the internal winning combination or the type of the combination of the symbols for which the display is permitted, the display mode of "at the time of permission to stop" may be taken. Further, if it is possible to suggest the current state (game state) by the display mode of "other than when the stop is permitted", another display mode can be adopted.

In addition, various suggestions described above can be made by using a display means (notification means) other than the stop state notification unit 117. For example, the above-mentioned bed lamp display unit (BL) and reel side lamp display unit (SL) can be used, or the above-mentioned other effect device can be used.

Further, for example, it is possible to suggest the type of internal winning combination or the type of combination of symbols for which display is permitted, depending on the display mode of "other than when stop is permitted", and the display mode of "when stop is permitted". It is also possible to suggest the current state (game state).

Further, the information notified by using the stop state notification unit 117 is not limited to the above-mentioned information. For example, as the current state, an internal state other than the gaming state shown in FIG. 120 may be suggested as the gaming state. For example, each of the above-mentioned modes (FIG. 105) can be suggested as a gaming state, or simply suggesting whether the gaming section is a non-advantageous section, an effect section, or an increasing section. Of course, each internal state shown in the present embodiment can also be suggested as a gaming state.

Further, for example, as the type of the internal winning combination or the type of the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed, the combination of the internal winning combination other than the bonus combination or the combination of the symbols that are permitted to be displayed is suggested for the internal winning combination other than the bonus combination. It may be possible. In this case, for example, it may be possible to suggest information on the stop operation during the increasing section.

(Invention 20 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, it is possible to suggest information on game playability by using a notification means (for example, the stop state notification unit 117) for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a notification means for notifying information on game playability. Therefore, information on game playability can be shown in a general-purpose configuration.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, any kind of special symbol combination (for example, "BB01" or 3BB which is a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is used according to the amount of game value (2 or 3) bet. It is determined whether or not to allow the display of "BB02"), which is a combination of symbols according to the above. Further, even if the display of any special symbol combination is already permitted (for example, between the 2BB flags or the 3BB flags), it is bet whether or not the combination of the special symbols is displayed. It is designed to fluctuate according to the amount of game value. In addition, it is possible to change the game playability according to the bet game value amount and which type of special symbol combination is permitted to be displayed. Then, by using a notification means for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted, if there is a combination of special symbols that are permitted to be displayed in this game, that fact is notified and eventually. It is also notified that the display of the combination of special symbols of the type of is permitted. Therefore, even when the game playability is complicated, information on the game playability can be appropriately notified.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the gaming state and the display are permitted by using the notification means (for example, the stop state notification unit 117) for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted. The combination may be suggested. Thereby, the information desired by the player can be appropriately notified in a general-purpose configuration.

[Another control example of stable state and rough wave state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 121, another example in which each of the above-mentioned stable state and rough wave state can be controlled will be described in this detailed example. FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining different control examples of the stable state and the rough wave state.

In this detailed example, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel rip") is displayed (or displayed) in a three-card bet state between the 2BB flags. In the 3-card bet state between the 3BB flags, the combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel rip") is not displayed (or is difficult to be displayed), and the combination of predetermined symbols (for example, "upward rip") is not displayed. ) Is displayed (or is easily displayed).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the 3-bet state itself between the 3BB flags a stable state and to make the 3-bet state itself between the 2BB flags a rough wave state. Alternatively, it is possible to control the stable state according to the display of the combination of predetermined symbols and to control the rough wave state according to the display of the combination of the specific symbols.

However, the variation of which state is set to the stable state or the rough wave state is not limited to this. For example, various specifications shown in FIG. 121 can be adopted. In FIG. 121, the number of bets (ie, the amount of game value bet. “3” or “2”) and the type of bonus carried over (ie, game state. Between non-flags (“none”), 2BB flags. The content of the stop control varies as shown in the figure depending on the interval (“2BB”) or the interval between the 3BB flags (“3BB”)). In FIG. 121, the combination of predetermined symbols is defined as "stable roll" and the combination of specific symbols is defined as "rough wave roll", and while the rough wave roll can be displayed, the stable roll cannot be displayed. "A: Rough wave output derivation" is defined as "A: Rough wave output derivation", which is a state in which control or stop control is performed in which a rough wave output is easily displayed while a stable output is difficult to be displayed. "B: Derivation of stable rolls" is a state in which stop control in which the eyes cannot be displayed or stop control in which stable rolls are easily displayed while stop control in which rough wave rolls are difficult to be displayed is performed.

It should be noted that the stop control of either "A: Rough wave roll derivation" or "B: Stable roll roll derivation" is performed not only when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won. It may be the case that the other role is won. That is, in each state shown in FIG. 121 in which the bet game value amount and the game state are combined, for example, in the state where "A: rough wave roll derivation" is defined, "A: rough wave roll derivation" is relatively ". It is sufficient that the stop control of "B: stable roll derivation" is relatively easy to be performed in the state where "B: stable roll derivation" is defined.

As shown in FIG. 121, the first specification is, for example, a specification in which the stop control is changed according to the number of bets regardless of the type of bonus carried over. This specification makes it easy to switch states.

As shown in FIG. 121, the second specification is, for example, when the game is continued in a three-card bet state from the initial state (between non-flags), after a lottery in a rough wave state is performed for a while, and after a 3BB win. It is a specification that will be in a stable state. In addition, in the case of a game flow in which a bonus is awarded, the game flow returns to the rough wave state again after the bonus state ends, so that a sharp transition of ball output can be expected. On the other hand, in the case of a game flow in which no bonus is awarded, it is possible to control the stable state for a relatively long period of time, so that the gambling property can be made appropriate.

The third to seventh specifications are as shown in FIG. 121, and each has its own characteristics, but detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Here, the game flow for winning a bonus is, for example, a game in which a player can win a ball or is advantageous by winning a bonus when the bonus can be won in the flow of the game. If it is possible to win a bonus, such as being able to shift to a state, it means playability in which it is common to win a bonus.

On the other hand, the game flow in which the bonus is not won means that it is difficult to win the bonus in the flow of the game, or even if the bonus can be won, the bonus is not won, for example, for the player. It means playability in which it is common not to win a bonus, such as not to be disadvantageous in a lottery regarding an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus). In addition, here, "making it difficult to win a bonus" means that a small role or a replay role is preferentially drawn in, and the probability of "missing" is set to zero or an extremely low probability, so that the bonus is given. It means that the probability of winning a prize is zero or extremely low.

In addition, in FIG. 121, in any of the first to seventh specifications, it is stipulated that in the case of a two-card bet state, the state is "B: stable roll derivation" regardless of the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be specified that the state of "A: Rough wave outcome derivation" may be obtained depending on the game state, as in the case of a three-card bet state. Further, in this case, in the predetermined specifications, the specifications corresponding to the game state are the same in the 3-card bet state and the 2-card state, but in the specific specifications, the 3-card bet state and the 2-card state are used. It may be specified that at least a part of the specifications corresponding to the gaming state is different. That is, in the 3-bet state, any of the specifications 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 121 is specified, and in the 2-bet state, the specifications are different from the specifications specified in the 3-bet state. Any of the first to seventh specifications shown may be specified.

In addition, it is possible to play in a one-card bet state, and a bonus combination ("F_1BB") that can be won only in a one-card bet state is provided, and the state in which "F_1BB" is carried over is set between the 1BB flags and bets are made. The above is described according to the number (whether it is a 1-card bet state to a 3-card bet state) and the type of bonus carried over (whether it is between non-flags, 1BB flags, or 3BB flags). The state of the stop control may be changed. In this case, as in the relationship between the 3-bet state and the 2-bet state, in the 1-card state, it may be specified that the state is "B: stable roll derivation" regardless of the game state, or at least. The stop control similar to that of the 3-bet state or the 2-bet state may be performed, or at least the specifications specified in the 3-bet state or the 2-bet state are different from those specified in the first to third bets of FIG. Any of the seventh specification may be specified. In any case, it becomes possible to further diversify the game state and the variation of the game playability.

Further, as a method for creating a stable state and a rough wave state, a method other than the above-mentioned method can be used. For example, the winning probability of a specific replay combination (for example, "F_replay C") in which a lottery regarding an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus lottery) is performed (or the winning probability in the lottery is relatively high) is low. If the first RT state and the second RT state in which the probability of winning a specific replay combination is high are provided and the lottery regarding the advantageous state is won in the first RT state, the benefit of the winning is large (for example, the duration of the pseudo bonus). If you win the lottery related to the advantageous state in the 2nd RT state, the benefit of the winning is small (for example, continuation of pseudo bonus). By making the expected value such as the length of the possible period, the probability of winning the ceiling shortening lottery and the 1G continuous lottery low), the 1st RT state is set to the rough wave state and the 2nd RT state is set to the stable state to create each state. You can also do it. In this case, in the initial state (RT0 state), when "parallel lip" is displayed, it is controlled to the first RT state, and when "right rising lip" is displayed, it is controlled to the second RT state. For example, it may be returned to the initial state when the setting is changed or the bonus ends.

Further, for example, in the case of winning, if the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the first right stop), a "right-up lip" is displayed, and the stop operation is performed in a mode other than the specific mode. The first replay combination (for example, "F_replay D") that will display "parallel rip" when it is broken, and "right-up rip" regardless of the stop operation mode when winning The second replay combination (for example, "F_replay A'") in which is displayed, and the third replay combination in which "parallel rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode when winning. (For example, "F_replay B") and the winning of the first replaying combination are possible, but the winning of the second replaying combination and the third replaying combination is not possible. (RT0 state) and the winning of the third replay combination is possible, but the winning of the second replay combination and the third replay combination is not possible. The winning of the first RT state and the second replay combination is possible. However, a first replay combination and a second RT state in which the winning of the third replay combination is not possible are provided, and in the initial state, the player stops in a specific manner when the first replay combination is won. Depending on whether or not the operation is performed, either a rough wave state or a stable state may be selected. In this case, since the third replay combination is won in the first RT state, the lottery regarding the advantageous section is given preferential treatment, while the lottery regarding the advantageous section is treated coldly because the third replay combination is not won in the second RT state. To. Then, in the first RT state, which is an advantageous section (effect section), for example, since the procedure of the advantageous stop operation is not notified regarding the "push order bell B", the granting of the game medium is treated coldly, while the advantageous section (effect section). In the second RT state, for example, the provision of the game medium can be preferentially configured by notifying the procedure of the advantageous stop operation regarding the “push order bell B”. As a result, each state can be created with the first RT state as the rough wave state and the second RT state as the stable state. As described above, when creating a rough wave state and a stable state using the RT state, a different bonus combination is won according to the number of bets, or a stop is made depending on which bonus flag is between. It is also possible to eliminate the need for different controls. Therefore, the number of games that can be played can be limited to "3".

[Other variants]
As described above, the method of managing the duration of ART (advantageous section) is arbitrary. For example, the duration may be managed by the number of games, the duration may be managed by the number of sets, and the duration may be managed by the number of medals paid out during ART or the difference number. The duration may be managed by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals during the ART, or the continuation may be determined by the continuation judgment performed at an arbitrary timing during the ART. The period may be managed, or the ART may be terminated when a specific symbol combination is displayed during the ART.
In this case, the target of addition is appropriately adjusted according to the management method of the duration of ART such as the number of games, the number of sets, the number of navigations, the number of differences, and the like.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachislot machine 1, the notification (ART) function is operated under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub (sub control board 72) is not limited to this. The notification (ART) function may be operated by the control on the) side.

Further, the set value may be set to only one step. At this time, the setting change process may be left behind or may be eliminated. When the setting change process is left, only the same setting can be retyped, so that the process is substantially for clearing the RAM. Even when the set value is set to only one step, a mode related to lottery (first hit and / or addition, etc.) of an advantageous state (ART state, etc.) is provided, and the number of times a predetermined winning combination is won with a predetermined probability is counted. However, by switching this mode when the number of times reaches a specified value, it is possible to cause undulations in the ball output.

In this case, the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the predetermined probability by the specified value is one wave of balls. If the value is specified to be switched at the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one step, it can be made comparable to a plurality of game machines provided. For example, if the business hours of a day are 11 hours, 11h = 39600 seconds, so if the shortest time required for one game is 4.1 seconds according to the rules, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1 = about 9695 times. Since it is not realistic to have no breaks (meals and toilets), the number of games per day is considered to be about 8000. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32 × 256 = 8192, so that the wave of the ball output can be switched in about one day.

Furthermore, if the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is disadvantageous to the player are switched alternately each time the number of times the predetermined combination is won reaches the specified value, the profit will be stable in a two-day cycle. It can contribute to the business of the store. Although the case where the set value is set to one step has been described, the setting value is not limited to one step and can be diverted. More specifically, if the number of set values is not changed, it is possible to make the wave of balls to be ejected more complicated without increasing the number of set values. Also, by reducing the number of set values, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the set values and the monotony.

Moreover, if the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the set value of 6 steps can be changed to the set value of 1 step, the data can be reduced to 1/6. In addition, the development cost for designing the desired ball output rate at each stage is also reduced to 1/6. Furthermore, since only those that meet the test are permitted to be used for business, the time required for the test can be shortened.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachislot 1, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by the above-mentioned limit processing, a clerk of the amusement store is released (for example, an operation to the reset switch 76, an operation to a door key (not shown)). It may have a stop function that makes it impossible to play until the game is played.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachislot 1, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by the above-mentioned limit processing, the credits are automatically settled (that is, all the credited game values are automatically paid out). It may have an automatic settlement function. If the above-mentioned stop function is ON and the automatic settlement function is also ON, the game may be disabled after the automatic settlement, or if the automatic settlement function is ON, the game may be stopped. Even if the function is not ON, the game may be disabled after automatic settlement.

However, even if the above-mentioned stop function and automatic settlement function are executed when the advantageous state (either the above-mentioned bonus state, the increase section, or the advantageous section (including the production section)) ends. Good. When the above-mentioned incapacitated state occurs during the advantageous section, the area in which the information regarding the advantageous section is stored in the main control board 71 may be initialized according to the inoperable state. .. The player who was playing the game when the game becomes incapable (stopped state) ends the game up to that point, and then opens a favorable platform where another player is stopped. Assuming, for example, if the next player can start the game from the increasing section, the disadvantage on the game store side may become too large. Further, for example, if the clerk must perform an operation (for example, a setting change operation) for initializing an area in which information about an advantageous section is stored before opening to the next player, the game store There is a risk that the operational burden on the side will become too large. Therefore, if the area where the information about the advantageous section is stored is automatically initialized when the stop state is reached, such a problem does not occur, so that the stop function can be easily operated in the amusement store. Become. Regarding the process for initializing the area in which the information about the advantageous section is stored in response to the inability to play, the initialization process when the advantageous section ends is diverted from the program and executed. You can do it like this. In this way, the processing load can be reduced and the program capacity can be saved.

For the above-mentioned ON / OFF switching of the stop function and ON / OFF switching of the automatic settlement function, for example, an existing switch can be used without providing a dedicated switch. For example, as an example, when the setting key type switch 54 is turned on, the stop function is switched ON / OFF each time the stop button 17L is pressed, and the setting key type switch 54 is stopped when the setting key type switch 54 is turned off. The ON / OFF state of the function may be fixed and this state may be stored. Further, for example, when the setting key type switch 54 is turned on, the automatic settlement function is switched ON / OFF each time the stop button 17C is pressed, and the setting key type switch 54 is automatically turned off. The ON / OFF state of the settlement function may be fixed and this state may be stored. It should be noted that the set ON / OFF state of the stop function and the ON / OFF state of the automatic settlement function may not be cleared when the advantageous section ends by executing the limit process. Further, for example, since the stop button and the like are used for playing a game, the above-mentioned stop function can be switched ON / OFF by operating an operating means that is not used for playing a game, and the automatic settlement function can be used. It can also be configured to switch ON / OFF.

It is also possible for the game store to set the number of games and the number of payouts in the advantageous section in which the stop function is executed. In addition, the number of games and the number of payouts in the advantageous section in which the automatic settlement function is executed can be set on the game store side.

Further, when the stop function is executed, it is possible to provide a function of notifying the player to that effect. For example, the display device 11 displays that the advantageous section has ended due to the limit processing, that the operation has been stopped, that it is necessary to call the clerk of the amusement store, that the prize exchange is urged, and the like, or that the speaker group 84 outputs audio. It is possible to have a function to do. Further, when the automatic settlement function is executed, it is possible to provide a function of notifying the player to that effect. For example, the fact that the advantageous section has been completed by the limit processing, that the game can be continued by the game value that is automatically settled but owned, that it is necessary to call the clerk of the game store, or that the prize exchange is urged, etc. It is possible to provide a function of displaying on the display device 11 or outputting audio from the speaker group 84.

[Application to other gaming machines]
Further, in the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied is not limited to this. For example, features other than the features peculiar to pachislot, such as features related to reel stop control based on a stop operation, can be applied to a gaming machine called "pachinko", and the same effect can be obtained. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to any gaming machine capable of playing a game (controlling a game) according to a player's game operation (operation).

[Other expandability of gaming machines according to the present embodiment]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player's medal insertion operation (that is, the operation of inserting a hand-held medal into the medal insertion slot 14 or the credited medal is inserted into the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b. If the game is started and the medal is paid out at the end of the game, the hopper device 51 is driven to pay out the medal from the medal payout outlet 24, or credit. The form to be used has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all forms in which a game medium necessary for a game is input by a player, a game is performed based on the game, and a privilege is given (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the form in which the game medium is input (hanged) and the game medium is paid out by the physical movement of the player, but also the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) itself is the game medium owned by the player. May be electronically managed to enable the game without medals. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player. ..

In this case, the game media management device has a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is bidirectionally communicated with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is connected so that it can be connected, and a prize is awarded for the operation of lending the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the game medium necessary for the player to perform the operation of inserting the game medium) or the role of paying out the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the game medium). When the combination is established), the game medium payout operation (that is, the action of making the player acquire the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium), or the game medium to be used for the game. It suffices that the operation of recording electromagnetically can be performed. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front of the pachislot machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and the player. In addition to the case of direct operation, when the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from mobile terminals, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game media handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game store, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, the player may be stored by setting information such as a one-time password that only the player can know, or by an imaging means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

As described above, the game medium management device may be capable of playing games only without medals, or the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is played. It may be a form in which the game is paid out, a form in which the game is possible without a medal, or a form in which the game is possible in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 66 and the hopper device 51 described above, or these are controlled by the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71). Based on the transmission of the control result, a method is adopted that enables control in which the total number of game media that the player can use for the game is recorded by an electromagnetic method and displayed. You can also.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described. However, in the slot machine and the enclosed game machine using the game ball described above, the game medium management device is also provided and the player It is also possible to manage the game medium of.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors 66, hopper devices 51, etc. inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game. Not only can the cost and manufacturing cost be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the number of devices can be reduced. It also reduces the power consumption of. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

<Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (7)>
Subsequently, another example (No. 7) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 161. In addition, the pachislot of this example has different parts in terms of playability when compared with the detailed examples of other examples (No. 1 to No. 6) and other examples (No. 6), but the parts differ in this playability. Except for the controls involved, the basic configuration and control are common to the pachislot machines described in the detailed examples of other examples (No. 1 to No. 6) and other examples (No. 6). Therefore, in the following, the parts different from the detailed examples of the other examples (No. 1 to No. 6) and the other examples (No. 6) will be mainly described, and the other examples (No. 1 to No. 6) and other examples (No. 6) will be mainly described. The description of the configuration and control common to the detailed example of 6) is omitted. In this example, a line connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the lower region of the right reel 3R is defined as an effective line within the frame of the reel display window 4.

[Gameability of this example]
First, the flow of the game in this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123. Note that FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a transition flow of a gaming state in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section in this example, and FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining each gaming state in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the pachislot of this example is a non-advantageous section (normal game) like the pachislot of the detailed examples of other examples (No. 1 to No. 6) and other examples (No. 6). Or it is roughly divided into advantageous sections. In the advantageous section, an advantageous section (normal game) and an advantageous section such as a pseudo bonus or AT (increased game) are provided in other examples (No. 1 to No. 6) and another example (No. 6). ) Is the same as the pachislot in the detailed example. In the following, the "non-advantageous section (normal game)" is simply referred to as "non-advantageous section", the "advantageous section (increasing game)" is simply referred to as "increasing game", and the "advantageous section (normal game)" is referred to as "advantageous section (normal game)". It is simply called "normal game".

Further, similarly to the pachislot of the detailed example of the other example (No. 1 to No. 6) and the other example (No. 6), the main control board 71 (see, for example, FIG. 6) has an advantageous section using only the game number limiter. The limit processing of the advantageous section may be performed using only the number limiter, or the limit processing of the advantageous section may be performed using both the number of games limiter and the number limiter. Good.

The normal game in the advantageous section is the same as the non-advantageous section in that the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified (non-AT), but the normal game is the chance zone (non-AT) described later. It is different from the non-advantageous section that can be transferred only to the normal game in that it may be transferred to the pseudo bonus or the specialized zone (hereinafter referred to as CZ).

Further, among the advantageous sections, the increased game is a game state (pseudo-bonus, AT) in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is a game state advantageous to the player. That is, the increased game is a game state in which the player can increase the game value according to the progress of the game (so-called ball output rate exceeds 1). Although both the normal game and the increased game are advantageous sections, the game states related to the increased game, which will be described later, may shift to each other, but the increased game does not shift to the normal game, and the increased game ends. If this happens, it will always shift to a non-advantageous section. In the pachislot of this example, as described above, the increase game does not shift to the normal game, but the pachislot may be specified to shift from the increase game to the normal game. For example, there may be a so-called "pull-back" specification in which the pseudo-bonus of the increased game is shifted to the CZ1 or CZ2 of the normal game, and the pseudo-bonus is won again from the CZ1 or CZ2. In such a case, the transition from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is, for example, when the pseudo-bonus which is an increasing game is shifted to CZ1 or CZ2 of the normal game and then the pseudo-bonus is not won (the end of CZ1 or CZ2). At times), a specification is conceivable in which the advantageous section is terminated and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section.

For example, if the "number of games limiter" is used, the advantageous section continues for "1500 games", and if the "number of games limiter" is used, the medal of "2400 cards" is still advantageous in the advantageous section. Even if the number of games, the number of sets, the number of stocks, the number of navigations, the number of differences, etc. in the section remain, the point that the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the limit processing and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section It is the same as the pachislot of the detailed example of the other example (No. 1 to No. 6) and the other example (No. 6).

In FIG. 122, the most common transition modes of the gaming state are indicated by thick arrows. Specifically, in the non-advantageous section, when a winning combination (for example, a rare small role) that shifts to the normal game is won, the advantageous section is started and the game state shifts to the normal game. In a normal game, if you win a predetermined rare small role (watermelon in this example), it shifts to CZ1 or CZ2, if you shift to CZ1 or CZ2, it becomes easier to win a pseudo bonus, and if you win a pseudo bonus, it is an advantageous section. The game shifts to the game state of the increased game, and the pseudo bonus is started. The pseudo-bonus in this example is 24G, and it is drawn whether or not to win the AT described later and whether or not to win the special zone described later during this game. If the AT is won during the pseudo bonus, the zone shifts to the initial difference number determination zone described later, but if the AT is not won during the pseudo bonus, the zone shifts to the non-advantageous section.

When the main CPU 101 shifts to the initial difference number determination zone, the main CPU 101 executes the AT state management process. This AT state management process is a process for managing the continuation or termination of AT. The main CPU 101 determines the game value (number of sheets) that can be acquired in the AT in the initial difference number determination zone (for example, it is determined within 5 games in this example), and the number of games determined in the initial difference number determination zone. (The game value (number of sheets) that can be acquired by AT is set in the remaining acquired number counter. This remaining acquired number counter is one of the functions of the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 is from the initial difference number determination zone. When shifting to AT, AT is continued until the value of the remaining acquired number counter becomes 0, and when the value of the remaining acquired number counter becomes 0, AT ends. In this way, the AT state management process is executed. In this example, the main CPU 101 executes a process of ending the advantageous section and shifting to the non-advantageous section when the AT ends. The above is the most general transition mode of the game state, but in other cases. Will also be described below with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123.

In this example, the main CPU 101 determines the number of game values that can be acquired by the AT (the value of the remaining acquired number counter), and manages the difference number that ends the AT when the remaining acquired number counter becomes 0. Instead of this, the AT execution period (for example, the number of games) is determined, the determined AT execution period is set in the remaining game counter, and the number of games managed to end the AT when the remaining game counter becomes 0. May be done.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy games and ultra-high-accuracy games described later that can be transferred during AT, the number of games is set in the remaining game number counter, which is a function of the main CPU 101, at the time of transition to the high-accuracy games or ultra-high-accuracy games. , It ends when the value of the remaining game count counter becomes 0.

CZ1 or CZ2 are two types of chance zones that are easier to shift to a pseudo bonus as compared with a normal game. CZ1 may shift by winning a predetermined rare small role (watermelon in this example) in a normal game. CZ2 may shift by winning a predetermined rare small role (watermelon in this example) during the game state of CZ1, but does not shift to CZ2 without shifting to CZ1. From the game state of CZ1 or CZ2, in addition to the pseudo bonus, there is a possibility of shifting to the AT confirmed pseudo bonus described later.

The AT confirmed pseudo-bonus is a pseudo-bonus that is confirmed to shift to AT, and in this example, 40G is continued. The AT confirmed pseudo-bonus may be transferred from the above-mentioned CZ1 or CZ2, or may be transferred by winning the pseudo-bonus during the pseudo-bonus or AT. The number of games to be continued differs between the pseudo-bonus and the AT-confirmed pseudo-bonus, but the pseudo-bonus and the AT-confirmed pseudo-bonus may be different in terms of production to enhance the player's interest, or the 24G pseudo-bonus By performing the same effect as the bonus, the player's expectation may be fueled by making it difficult to know whether or not the game will shift to AT until the end.

The bonus during AT is a gaming state that shifts when a pseudo bonus is won during AT, and in this example, 24G is continued. If the pseudo bonus is won during AT, it will shift to AT after the end of the pseudo bonus 24G, but there is a possibility that it will shift to the special zone described later before shifting to AT.

The chances of winning the bonus during AT are a lottery by the role of rare and a lottery by the ceiling of the number of bells. For example, when the number of bell ceilings is set to 10 times, the ceiling is reached 10 times when the bell is established from the start of AT, and a bonus is drawn during AT. The main CPU 101 performs an AT transition lottery and a pseudo bonus lottery when the internal winning combination during AT is a rare combination.

The special zone is a game state in which the game value (number of sheets) that can be acquired by AT is added, and in this example, there are three types of special zones (special zone 1, special zone 2, and special zone 3). .. The expected value to be added is Specialized Zone 1 <Specialized Zone 2 <Specialized Zone 3, specifically, about 200 sheets when moving to Specialized Zone 1 and about about 200 when moving to Specialized Zone 2. It can be expected to obtain a difference in game value of about 300, and about 500 when moving to the special zone 3. The special zone may shift after the end of AT, as described above, when the pseudo bonus is won during AT, when the AT confirmed pseudo bonus is won, and when the predetermined number of games are exhausted in the normal game. There is a possibility of migration.

The special zone 1 and the special zone 3 are additional zones for the game value (number of sheets) to be transferred by lottery, and the special zone 2 is to be transferred when the point called "causal value" reaches the upper limit. This is an additional zone for the game value (number of sheets). The "causal value" is a value to be added when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, when a normal game exceeds a predetermined number of games, when a pseudo-bonus lottery in CZ is lost, or during a pseudo-bonus. It is a value to be added when an unlucky situation occurs for the player, such as when the player loses the AT lottery. The "causal value" is added as the unlucky situation for the player occurs, and the more it is added, the closer to the upper limit value. That is, the more the "causal value" is added, the higher the possibility of shifting to the specialized zone 2, so that the player can maintain his interest even when he / she encounters an unlucky situation.

In addition, when the "causal value" is added, an effect suggesting the added causal value may be performed. For example, you may perform an effect that suggests or informs the current "causal value" during a normal game, or suggests that if you continue the game, you may be able to benefit from the "causal value", and you are unlucky. It may increase the motivation of the player to play in such a situation. The causal value counter that counts the causal value is initialized at the end of the advantageous section due to the arrival of the specified end condition, at the end of the advantageous section due to the limiter, and at the time of setting change. Furthermore, in this example, when shifting from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, the initial value of the "causal value" is determined by lottery, and in the lottery, the upper limit value or a value close to the upper limit value may be determined. The "causal value" is set so that it will not be disadvantageous after the setting is changed, and consideration is given so that the operation immediately after the opening of the hall does not decrease.

The limiter arrival confirmation state is a game state that shifts when it is confirmed that a game value of, for example, a difference number (net increase) of 2000 or more is acquired in an advantageous section (increase game). When the limiter arrival confirmed state is entered, the game value (number of sheets) obtained in the AT is not added to the lottery, but the AT state continues until the difference number reaches 2400. Then, when the limiter arrival confirmed state of 2400 sheets is reached, the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing, and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section. Although the arrow leading to the limiter arrival confirmed state is not shown in FIG. 122, this may satisfy the condition of the limiter arrival confirmed state in all the gaming states of the advantageous section (increasing game). In the case, it means that it is possible to shift from any game state to the limiter arrival confirmed state.

Further, in this example, "1500 times" (1500 games), which is the upper limit of the number of continuous games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period, is set in both the advantageous section (normal game) and the advantageous section (increased game). If it exceeds, the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing, and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section. Specifically, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section reaches 1491 games, the display device 11 displays "The advantageous section ends with the remaining 9G", and when it reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing. Move to a non-advantageous section.

[Symbol arrangement configuration of this example]
Subsequently, the symbol arrangement configuration of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol arrangement table of this example. Since the description of the symbol arrangement table and the symbol code table itself has already been described with reference to FIG. 15, the description here will be omitted.

In this example, the symbols are "red 7", "black 7", "white BAR", "black BAR", "replay", "bell 1", "bell 2", "watermelon", "cherry" and "cherry". Ten kinds of "blank" symbols are used. Further, in this example, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[Internal winning combination configuration of this example]
Subsequently, the internal winning combination configuration of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 135. FIGS. 125 to 127 are diagrams showing an example of the internal lottery table of this example. Since the description of the internal lottery table itself has already been described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18 or 99 (another example (No. 6)), the description thereof is omitted here. 128 to 131 are diagrams showing a condition device that is established corresponding to the internal winning combination. Further, FIGS. 132 to 135 are diagrams showing an example of the symbol combination table of this example. Since the description of the symbol combination table itself has already been described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, the description here will be omitted. In this example, the type of internal winning combination to be drawn, and when each internal winning combination is won, any combination of symbols (display combination, winning combination, stop display mode, etc.) depending on, for example, the pressing order as the stop operation mode, It can be rephrased as the display result etc.) will be displayed later.

First, in this example, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 64), the probabilities (lottery value / probability) of each internal winning combination shown in FIGS. 125 to 127 according to the set value as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127. Win with the denominator: 65536).

With reference to FIGS. 125 to 127, the main CPU 101 has "(1) general game (2BET)", "(2) general game (3BET)", and "(3) BB_2BET" according to the bonus winning state and the number of cards to be multiplied. Between flags (2BET) "," (4) Between BB_2BET flags (3BET) "," (5) Between BB_3BET flags (2BET) "," (6) Between BB_3BET flags (3BET) "and" (7) During bonus operation The internal lottery is executed using one of the internal lottery tables.

The internal lottery table (see FIG. 125) shown in "(1) General game (2BET)" is 2 in the general game state (hereinafter referred to as "non-flag state") in which no bonus combination is won. This is an example of an internal lottery table when a sheet-hanging game (two-card bet game) is performed. For example, "F_BB_2BET" of "No. 2" is a 2BET bonus, and "F_common 1-card role" of "No. 3" is a role that can acquire one game value regardless of the push order, "No. 4" "F_common 7-card role" is a role that can acquire the game value of 7 cards regardless of the push order, and "common lip" of "No. 6" is a replay regardless of the push order. Since the internal lottery table of "(1) general game (2BET)" is an internal lottery table when a two-card game is played, the main CPU 101 is used when a three-card game is played. , Do not execute the internal lottery using the internal lottery table of "(1) General game (2BET)".

The internal lottery table (see FIG. 125) shown in "(2) General game (3BET)" is an example of an internal lottery table when a three-card game (three-card bet game) is performed in a non-flag state. Is. For example, "F_BB_3BET" of "No. 2" is an abbreviation for 3BET bonus, and "F_Middle Che" of "No. 3" is an abbreviation for middle cherry, and the cherry is displayed in the middle of the reel. "F_Middle Che" of "No. 3", "F_Special Role" of "No. 4", "Chance Eye B" of "No. 5", "Chance Eye A2" of "No. 6", "No. "Chance eye A1" of ".7", "F_strong che" (strong cherry) of "No.8", "F_weak che" (weak cherry) of "No.9" and "F_" of "No.10" "Watermelon" is referred to as a "rare role" in this example, and is a role related to the winning of CZ, the winning of pseudo bonus, the winning of AT, and the winning of special zone, respectively. Further, "No. 12 to 23" are so-called push order bells. For example, "F_321 bell B" of "No. 12" must be stopped in the order of 3 → 2 → 1 when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R in FIG. 2 are replaced with 1, 2, and 3, respectively. It is a role that does not hold.

In explaining the "pushing order" in this specification, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R shall be replaced with 1, 2, and 3, respectively. For example, when the pushing order is "17C-> 17L-> 17R", it is described as "2-> 1-> 3", and when the pushing order is "17R-> 17C-> 17L", it is described as "3-> 2-> 1".

The internal lottery table (see FIG. 126) shown in "(3) Between BB_2BET flags (2BET)" is in the state of winning "F_BB_2BET" ("F_BB_2BET" permitted state in which "F_BB_2BET" is carried over). This is an internal lottery table when a two-card bet game is played. The internal lottery is performed with reference to the internal lottery table of "between the BB_2BET flags (2BET) of (3)" because it is in the state of winning "F_BB_2BET", so that "No. 2" to "No. 2" to "No. The role of "5" is written as "F_BB_2BET" before the name of the role.

The internal lottery table (see FIG. 126) shown in "(4) Between BB_2BET flags (3BET)" is 3 in the state of winning "F_BB_2BET" ("F_BB_2BET" permitted state in which "F_BB_2BET is carried over"). This is an internal lottery table when a bet game is played. Even between the BB_2BET flags, the symbol combination corresponding to "F_BB_2BET" may not be displayed in the 3-card bet game. Further, as a modification, the symbol combination corresponding to "F_BB_2BET" may be displayed in the 3-card bet game. In this case, since "F_BB_2BET" is a role dedicated to 2-card betting, even if a symbol combination corresponding to "F_BB_2BET" is displayed between the BB_2BET flags, the bonus corresponding to "F_BB_2BET" does not work. , The internal winning flag of "F_BB_2BET" will be carried over to the next game. In this way, even if the bonus symbol combination that does not correspond to the number of bets in the game is displayed, it is treated as a loss, so that the variation of the outcome that can be displayed at the time of the loss can be increased.

The internal lottery table (see FIG. 127) shown in "(5) Between BB_3BET flags (2BET)" is in the state of winning "F_BB_3BET" (in the "F_BB_3BET" permission state in which "F_BB_3BET" is carried over, 2 It is an internal lottery table when a sheet bet game is performed. Even between the BB_3BET flags, the symbol combination corresponding to "F_BB_3BET" may not be displayed in the two-sheet bet game. Also, as a modification. It may be possible to display the symbol combination corresponding to "F_BB_3BET" in the 2-card game. In this case, since "F_BB_3BET" is a role dedicated to 3-card betting, it corresponds to "F_BB_3BET" in the 2-card game between the BB_3BET flags. Even if the symbol combination to be played is displayed, the bonus corresponding to "F_BB_3BET" does not operate, and the internal winning flag of "F_BB_3BET" is carried over to the next game. In this way, it does not correspond to the number of bets in the game. Even if the bonus symbol combination is displayed, it can be treated as a loss to increase the variation of the outcome that can be displayed at the time of the loss.

The internal lottery table (see FIG. 127) shown in "(6) Between BB_3BET flags (3BET)" is in the state of winning "F_BB_3BET" ("F_BB_3BET" permitted state in which "F_BB_3BET" is carried over). This is an internal lottery table when a three-card bet game is played. The internal lottery is performed with reference to the internal lottery table of "(6) Between BB_3BET flags (3BET)" when the "F_BB_3BET" flag is established (the 3BET bonus flag is established). Therefore, in the roles of "No. 2" to "No. 24", "F_BB_3BET" is written before the name of the role.

The internal lottery table (see FIG. 127) shown in "(7) Bonus operation" is an internal lottery table during bonus operation.

It should be noted that "F_BB_2BET" and "F_BB_3BET" do not overlap and win the prize. Therefore, for example, in a game in which the internal lottery is performed with reference to the internal lottery table (see FIG. 126) of "(4) Between BB_2BET flags (3BET)", not only the "F_BB_3BET" is not won, but also as described above. Since the symbol combination corresponding to "F_BB_2BET" is not displayed, neither the symbol combination corresponding to "F_BB_2BET" nor the symbol combination corresponding to "F_BB_3BET" is displayed.

FIGS. 128 to 131 are diagrams showing an example of a condition device that is established corresponding to the internal winning combination as a result of the internal lottery. For example, when the internal winning combination is "normal lip", "C_black BER lip_01", "C_black BER lip_02", "C_black BER lip_03", "C_black BER lip_04", "C_black BER" Lip_05 "," C_Black BER Lip_06 "," C_Black BER Lip_07 "," C_Black BER Lip_08 "," C_Middle Lip "," C_CU Lip_01 "," C_CU Lip_02 "," C_CU Lip_03 " , "C_CU Lip_04", "C_CU Lip_05", "C_CU Lip_06", "C_CU Lip_07", "C_CU Lip_08", "C_Lower Lip_01", "C_Lower Lip_02", "C_Lower Lip" Twenty-five conditional devices of "_03", "C_lower rip_04", "C_CD rip_01", "C_CD rip_02", "C_CD rip_03" and "C_CD rip_04" are simultaneously established. In other words, when the internal winning combination is a "normal lip", the above 25 conditional devices are established. In addition, "CU rip" means a cross-up replay (right-up replay), and "CD rip" means a cross-down replay (right-down replay).

Also, for example, when the internal winning combination is a "special combination", "C_special A_01", "C_special A_02", "C_special A2_01", "C_special A2_02", "C_special A2_03", "C_special A2_04" , "C_Special A3", "C_Special A4", "C_Special B_01", "C_Special B_02", "C_Special B_03", "C_Special B_04", "C_Special C_01", "C_Special C_02", " C_Special C_03 "," C_Special C_04 "," C_Special C_05 "," C_Special C_06 "," C_Special C_07 "," C_Special C_08 "," C_Special D_01 "," C_Special D_02 "," C_Special D_03 "," C_Special D_04 "," C_Special E_01 "," C_Special E_02 "," C_Special E_03 "," C_Special E_04 "," C_Special E_05 "," C_Special E_06 "," C_Special E_07 " , "C_Special E_08", "C_Special F_01", "C_Black BER Lip_01", "C_Black BER Lip_02", "C_Black BER Lip_03", "C_Black BER Lip_04", "C_Black BER Lip_04" 39 conditional devices of "_05", "C_312 bell" and "C_321 bell" are satisfied at the same time.

When the reel stop operation is performed, the main CPU 101 has a symbol combination that is finally aligned according to the condition device established corresponding to the internal winning combination, the pressing order, and the operation timing of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R. Perform stop control.

In FIGS. 132 to 135, it is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table. The description of the symbol combination table itself has already been described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, and 109.

Next, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the pushing order, the display combination, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137. FIGS. 136 and 137 are diagrams showing an example of a correspondence table between the internal winning combination, the pushing order, the display combination, and the like.

“(1) Between non-flags (at the time of 3BET)” in FIG. 136 is an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the pushing order, the display combination, etc. when the 3-card bet game is performed in the non-flagged state. It is a figure which shows.

“(2) Between BB_2BET flags (at the time of 3BET)” in FIG. 136 indicates an internal winning combination, a pushing order, a display combination, etc. when a three-card bet game is performed while winning “F_BB_2BET”. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence relation.

“(3) Between BB3BET flags (at the time of 3BET)” in FIG. 137 is a combination of an internal winning combination, a pushing order, a display combination, etc. when a 3-card bet game is performed while winning “F_BB_3BET”. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence relation.

“(2) Between non-flags (at the time of 2BET)” in FIG. 137 is an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the pushing order, the display combination, etc. when a two-card bet game is performed in the non-flagged state. It is a figure which shows.

“(3) Between BB_2BET flags & BB3_3BET flags (at the time of 2BET)” in FIG. 137 is when a two-card bet game is performed in a state where “F_BB_2BET” is won or when “F_BB_3BET” is won. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence relation between the internal winning combination, push order, display combination, etc. when a three-card bet game is performed.

“(4) RB1 in operation (at the time of 3BET)” in FIG. 137 is an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the pushing order, the display combination, etc. when the game is played with three bets during the bonus operation. It is a figure which shows.

Next, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the pushing order, the display combination, and the like shown in FIGS. 136 and 137 will be described with reference to “(1) Non-flag inter-flag state (at the time of 3BET)” in FIG. 136. In the non-flag bonus state (at the time of 3BET), when the internal winning combination is "F_123 Bell A" and each reel stops by pressing forward "1 → 2 → 3", 7 games are played. It is possible to gain value. In addition, other than forward pressing, that is, "1 → 3 → 2", "2 → 1 → 3", "2 → 3 → 1", "3 → 1 → 2" and "3 → 2 →" which are not in the correct pressing order. When the stop operation is performed in any of the pressing orders of "1", the game value of one card can be obtained with a probability of 1/2, and the game value cannot be obtained with a probability of 1/2. That is, even though the internal winning combination is "F_123 Bell A", if the stop operation is performed by so-called irregular striking that is not in the correct answer pressing order, the game value of 7 cards cannot be obtained and 1 You either get or miss the game value (you can't get any game value).

Next, the sub-flags used for various lottery described later (for example, stone level promotion lottery described later) will be described.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of a subflag table. The sub-flag is secondary information set according to the type of internal winning combination, and as shown in FIG. 138, 26 types of internal winning combination such as a small combination are classified into, for example, 11 types of sub-flags. is there. The main CPU 101 is, for example, "missing" of the small winning combination number "0", "7 out of F_RB" of the small winning combination number "23", "3 out of F_RB" of the small winning combination number "24", and small. All the "one-card combination in F_RB" of the combination number "25" are classified into the "missing" sub-flags. Further, the main CPU 101 is, for example, "F_123 bell A" of the small winning combination number "2", "F_123 bell B" of the small winning combination number "3", "F_132 bell A" of the small winning combination number "4", and the small winning combination number. "F_132 bell B" of "5", "F_213 bell A" of small winning combination number "6", "F_213 bell B" of small winning combination number "7", "F_231 bell A" of small winning combination number "8", small "F_231 Bell B" with role number "9", "F_312 Bell A" with small role number "10", "F_312 Bell B" with small role number "11", "F_321 Bell A" with small role number "12" , And "F_321 bell B" of the small winning combination number "13" are all classified into the sub-flags of the "pushing order bell".

In the following, "sub-flags classified according to the result of internal lottery" may be simply referred to as "internal winning combination".

[Various lottery performed during the pseudo bonus]
Next, various lottery performed during the pseudo bonus will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 149. The various lottery performed during the pseudo bonus is equivalent to the lottery related to the reward (privilege) grant after the pseudo bonus ends, and the lottery to determine the reward level to be granted when the reward is granted after the pseudo bonus ends. To do. The reward level is a level of advantage for the player. For example, the reward level differs depending on whether only the AT is given as a reward or both the AT and the specialized zone are given. ..

In this example, the display device 11 displays an image of a stone indicating the size of the expected value, which is advantageous to the player in various lottery performed during the pseudo bonus, so that the player can grasp it. .. The above expected value has five stages of Lv1 to Lv5, the expected value of Lv1 is the lowest, the expected value becomes higher as the level becomes higher, and the expected value of Lv5 is the highest.

In addition, three expected values of the above five stages (Lv1 to Lv5) are prepared, and these three expected values are individually and gradually leveled up during the pseudo bonus. Then, the expected value of the reward level given after the end of the pseudo-bonus will differ depending on how far the total of these three expected values is finally raised. These three expected values are hereinafter referred to as a first expected value, a second expected value, and a third expected value. Further, the display device 11 displays images of three stones corresponding to each of the first expected value, the second expected value, and the third expected value.

Since the images of the three stones displayed on the display device 11 are displayed in a form corresponding to the levels of the first expected value, the second expected value, and the third expected value, each expectation can be seen by looking at the stone image. You can also grasp the level of value. In the following, the magnitude of the expected value will be referred to as "stone level".

FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game during the pseudo bonus. As shown in FIG. 139, the various lottery performed during the pseudo bonus includes a game mode lottery, a stone level initial value lottery, a stone level promotion lottery, a stone point lottery, and a reward judge lottery.

When the main CPU 101 wins the pseudo-bonus in the advantageous section (normal game or increased game), the pseudo-bonus is started, for example, through a precursor game, and the various lottery described above is executed in each section during the pseudo-bonus. First, the main CPU 101 executes a game mode lottery and a stone level initial value lottery at the start of the pseudo bonus (see "A" in FIG. 139). Then, in a section within a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games) after the pseudo bonus is started, a stone level promotion lottery is executed according to the internal winning combination (see “B” in FIG. 139). After that, in several games at the end of the pseudo-bonus (for example, 3 games of 21 to 23 games), stone point lottery is executed according to the expected value (stone level) (see "C" in FIG. 139). After that, in the final game of the pseudo-bonus (for example, the 24th game), the reward judge lottery is executed according to the result of the stone point lottery (see "D" in FIG. 139).

The game mode lottery, stone level initial value lottery, stone level promotion lottery, stone point lottery, and reward judge lottery will be described in detail below.

(Game mode lottery, stone level initial value lottery)
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a game mode lottery table, and FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of a stone level initial value lottery table. At the start of the pseudo-bonus, the main CPU 101 first executes a game mode lottery, and determines one of three game modes, a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode. The distribution of each mode is as shown in the game mode lottery table (see FIG. 140).

After that, the main CPU 101 shifts to the determined mode and executes the stone level initial value lottery. The stone level initial value lottery is a lottery that determines the initial value (start level) of each stone level. The stone level initial value is determined by the probability shown in the stone level initial value lottery table (see FIG. 141). Stone level initial value As you can see by referring to the lottery table, the stone level initial value is expected to be higher in the second mode than in the first mode, and the third mode is higher than the second mode. Has a higher expected value to be determined at a higher level. Stone level initial value The 1st stone, 2nd stone and 3rd stone shown in the lottery table will be described later.

The main CPU 101 does not necessarily have to execute the game mode lottery at the start of the pseudo bonus, and before the stone level initial value lottery is executed, the main CPU 101 is determined to be a pseudo bonus as a result of the internal lottery and then pseudo. It may be executed at any time until the bonus is started.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of stones displayed in the display area of the display device 11 under the control of the sub CPU 201.

When the initial value of the stone level is determined, the main CPU 101 commands and transmits the result of the stone level initial value lottery to the sub CPU 201. The sub CPU 201 that has received the result of the stone level initial value lottery displays the stone image in the form corresponding to the stone level initial value in the display area of the display device 11.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 142, three stones are displayed side by side in a horizontal row in the display area of the display device 11. The stone displayed on the leftmost side indicates the first expected value and is referred to as "1st stone". The stone displayed second from the left (middle) indicates the second expected value, and is referred to as "2nd stone". The stone displayed on the far right side indicates the third expected value and is referred to as "3rd stone".

In FIG. 142, the initial stone level values of "1st stone", "2nd stone", and "3rd stone" are all displayed as Lv1, and it is understood that the stone level becomes higher when the form of these stones changes. Yes, the expected value for the stone point lottery and eventually the reward judge lottery will increase.

As shown in the stone level initial value lottery table (see FIG. 141), in the third mode, all of the 1st stone, the 2nd stone, and the 3rd stone are set to Lv5. Further, in the first mode and the second mode, the initial value of the stone level is not determined to Lv5.

By the way, as a pattern in which all the initial stone level values start from Lv5, when the pseudo bonus is won during the pseudo bonus, or when the AT confirmed pseudo bonus is won (the pseudo bonus win during the ultra-high accuracy described later (special). (Including the case of rewriting to the conversion zone)) and the like. When the stone level of all stones reaches Lv5 (including the case where the initial value is Lv5 and the case where it becomes Lv5 through the promotion lottery), 3 points can be obtained by the stone point lottery (Fig. 147) described later. Is confirmed, and further, in the reward judge lottery (Fig. 148) described later, the transition to AT + special zone 3 is confirmed. If the stone levels of all the stones are Lv5 by default, the stone level promotion lottery will not be performed in the subsequent games, but the additional lottery will be performed in the special zone (see FIG. 144).

Further, as shown in FIG. 142, the stone levels (Lv1 to Lv5) are designed to be visually easy to understand and the degree of gorgeousness increases as the level increases. As shown in (1) of FIG. 142, the stone level is unknown immediately after the pseudo bonus is started. Then, when the stone level initial value lottery is performed based on the stone level initial value lottery table, as shown in (2) of FIG. 142, the mode of the determined initial value of the stone is displayed on the display device 11. FIG. 142 (2) shows an example in which all three stones are Lv1 as a result of the stone level initial value lottery. In this example, an illustration of a stone (gemstone-like ore) is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the length of the lit candle may indicate the difference in expectation, or the value of money may indicate the difference in expectation, such as a large-sized oban.

(Stone level promotion lottery processing)
The stone level promotion lottery process will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. Here, FIGS. 143 and 144 are flowcharts showing an example of the stone level promotion lottery process executed by the main CPU 101. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of a stone level promotion lottery table. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode related to the stone level promotion lottery process displayed in the display area of the display device 11 by the sub CPU 201. The result of the stone level promotion lottery process is command-transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 201.

After the pseudo-bonus is started, the main CPU 101 performs a stone level promotion lottery process for each stone in each game from the 1st to the 20th games. That is, by raising each stone stepwise over a plurality of games, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and improve the game interest.

As shown in FIG. 143, the main CPU 101 first determines in S1000 whether or not the level of all three stones is 5 (Lv5). If it is determined that the level of all three stones is Lv5 (Yes in S1000), the game value (number of sheets) obtained in AT (performed after the end of the pseudo bonus) is added to the lottery in S1005, and the stone level promotion lottery process is performed. To finish. When the level of all three stones reaches Lv5, the stone level promotion lottery process is not performed in the subsequent games, and the additional lottery in AT is executed until the stone point lottery is executed (up to the 20th pseudo-bonus game). Therefore, the player will proceed with the game while wishing that the level of all three stones is Lv5 at the beginning of the pseudo bonus as much as possible.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the levels of all three stones are not Lv5 (No in S1000), the main CPU 101 determines in S1010 whether or not the internal winning combination is a definite combination. Here, the fixed combination is a combination in which it is determined that all stone levels are raised to the highest level by winning, and in this example, the special combination shown in FIG. 138 is applicable. When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination is a definite combination (Yes in S1010), it adds 4 to all stone levels (S1015). As a result, the levels of all three stones are promoted to Lv5. If 4 is added to all stone levels, the stone level may exceed Lv5, but if the stone level is greater than Lv5, it shall be rewritten to Lv5.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination is not a definite combination (No in S1010), the main CPU 101 performs a stone level promotion lottery process for the 1st stone (first stone) in S1020. In the stone level promotion lottery process for the 1st stone (1st stone), first determine the current stone level of the 1st stone, select a table (see Fig. 145) according to the current stone level, and use it as the winning role this time. Determine the promotion level accordingly. In this example, the stone level promotion lottery process is always performed in the order of 1st stone → 2nd stone → 3rd stone. Further, in this example, when the 1st stone is promoted, the 2nd stone and the 3rd stone are not drawn, so that there is a high possibility that only the stone level of the 1st stone is inevitably promoted. As a general rule, only one stone will be ranked up in one game, except when winning a fixed role. In addition, for stones that have already been promoted to the highest rank (Lv5) (including the case where the initial value is Lv5), the stone level promotion lottery process is not executed, and the stone level promotion lottery for the next stone is performed.

As described above, in this example, when the 1st stone is promoted, the 2nd stone level promotion lottery process and the 3rd stone level promotion lottery process are not performed, and when the 2nd stone is promoted, the 3rd stone level promotion lottery process is performed. However, it is not limited to this aspect. For example, as a modification, the execution order of the 1st stone level promotion lottery process, the 2nd stone level promotion lottery process, and the 3rd stone level promotion lottery process may be determined by, for example, lottery, or among the 1st stone, the 2nd stone, and the 3rd stone. Which stone level to promote may be determined, for example, by lottery. Furthermore, which stone to be promoted most may be decided by lottery.

In the 1st stone level promotion lottery process of S1020, when the main CPU 101 determines that the 1st stone has been promoted (Yes in S1030), the process ends without performing the promotion lottery process of the 2nd stone and the 3rd stone. On the other hand, if it is determined that the 1st stone has not been promoted (No in S1030), the stone level promotion lottery process for the 2nd stone is performed in S1040. The stone level promotion lottery process for the 2nd stone (2nd stone) is the same as the stone level promotion lottery process for the 1st stone. First, the current 2nd stone level is determined, and a table according to the current stone level (see Fig. 145). Select to determine the promotion level according to the winning role this time.

In the 2nd stone level promotion lottery process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the 2nd stone has been promoted (Yes in S1050), the process ends without performing the stone level promotion lottery process of the 3rd stone. On the other hand, if it is determined that the 2nd stone has not been promoted (No in S1050), the stone level promotion lottery process for the 3rd stone is performed in S1060. The stone level promotion lottery process for the 3rd stone (3rd stone) is the same as the stone level promotion lottery process for the 1st stone and the 2nd stone. First, the current 3rd stone level is determined, and a table according to the current stone level (Fig. 145). (See) is selected, and the promotion level is determined according to the winning role this time.

In the present embodiment, in the stone level promotion lottery processing (S1020, S1040 and S1060) of the 1st stone, the 2nd stone and the 3rd stone, the table of FIG. 145 was commonly referred to in order to reduce the capacity of the lottery data. As a modification, a stone level promotion lottery table having a different coefficient may be prepared and referred to in the stone level promotion lottery process of each stone. For example, in the stone level promotion lottery table for the 1st stone, it is easy to level up with the role of "other", and in the stone level promotion lottery table for the 2nd stone, the role of "other" is compared with the table for the 1st stone. It is difficult to level up, but it is easy to level up with "watermelon or weak cherry", so the tendency of promotion lottery at each table may be different depending on the internal winning combination, or the winning of each promotion lottery The coefficient of each stone level promotion lottery table may be set so that the ease is for 1st stone> 2nd stone> 3rd stone, so that the stone level is more likely to be biased. This makes it possible to make the game playful.

In the 3rd stone level promotion lottery, when the main CPU 101 determines that the 3rd stone has been promoted (Yes in S1070), the stone level promotion lottery process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the 3rd stone has not been promoted (No in S1070), it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination is a rare role. Here, as shown in FIG. 145, the rare role includes a weak rare role (watermelon, weak cherry) and a strong rare role described later in this example. If it is determined that the internal winning combination is not a rare combination (No in S1080), the main CPU 101 ends the process, but if it is determined that the internal winning combination is a rare combination (Yes in S1080), the process proceeds to step S1110 in FIG. 144. ..

In step S1110 of FIG. 144, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the 1st stone level is Lv5 (S1110). If it is determined that the 1st stone level is not Lv5 (No in S1110), it is determined in S1112 whether or not the internal winning combination is a strong rare role. Here, the strong rare role means a strong cherry or a chance eye in this example as shown in FIG. 145. If it is determined that the internal winning combination is not a strong rare role (No in S1112), the 1st stone level is incremented by +1 (S1113). On the other hand, if it is determined that the internal winning combination is a strong rare role (Yes in S1112), then it is determined whether or not the 1st stone level is Lv4 (S1114).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S1114 that the 1st stone level is Lv4 (Yes in S1114), the 1st stone level is incremented by 1 in S1115 to end the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the 1st stone level is not Lv4 (No in S1114), the 1st stone level is increased by +2 (S1116), and the stone level promotion lottery process is completed.

In S1110, the main CPU 101 determines that the 1st stone level is Lv5 (Yes in S1110), and then determines whether or not the 2nd stone level is Lv5 (S1120). When it is determined that the 2nd stone level is not Lv5 (No in S1120), it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination is a strong rare role (S1122). If it is determined that the internal winning combination is not a strong rare role (No in S1122), the 2nd stone level is incremented by +1 (S1123). On the other hand, if it is determined that the internal winning combination is a strong rare role (Yes in S1122), then it is determined whether or not the 2nd stone level is Lv4 (S1124).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S1124 that the 2nd stone level is Lv4 (Yes in S1124), the 2nd stone level is incremented by +1 (S1125), and the stone level promotion lottery process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the 2nd stone level is not Lv4 (No in S1124), the 2nd stone level is increased by +2 (S1126), and the stone level promotion lottery process is completed.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S1120 that the 2nd stone level is Lv5 (Yes in S1120), the main CPU 101 determines in S1130 whether or not the internal winning combination is a strong rare combination (S1130). If it is determined that the internal winning combination is not a strong rare combination (No in S1130), the main CPU 101 increments the 3rd stone level by +1 in S1132 and ends the stone level promotion lottery process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the internal winning combination is a strong rare role (Yes in S1130), it is determined whether or not the 3rd stone level is Lv4 (S1140).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S1140 that the 3rd stone level is Lv4 (Yes in S1140), the 3rd stone level is incremented by +1 (S1150), and the stone level promotion lottery process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the 3rd stone level is not Lv4 (No in S1140), the 3rd stone level is increased by +2 (S1160), and the stone level promotion lottery process is completed.

Next, an effect mode when the promotion lottery process of each stone is performed will be described with reference to FIG. 146. (1) to (3) of FIG. 146 show a mode in which the morphology of the stone changes with time series. For example, FIG. 146 (1) is an effect image displayed when the stone levels of all the stones are set to Lv1 by the stone level initial value lottery. Further, for example, FIG. 146 (2) is an effect image displayed when only the 3rd stone is promoted from Lv1 to Lv2. From this image, the 1st stone level was not promoted in S1020 of FIG. 143 (No in S1030), the 2nd stone level was not promoted in S1040 (No in S1050), and the 3rd stone level was promoted in S1060 (No in S1070). Yes) You can see that. In FIG. 146 (3), the stone level of the 1st stone is promoted to Lv3, the stone level of the 2nd stone is not promoted, and the stone level of the 3rd stone is promoted to Lv2 during the pseudo bonus of 20 games. It is an image showing that it was not promoted.

In addition to the processing of steps S1000 to S1070, if the stone level of all three stones is not promoted even though the internal winning combination is a weak rare role, the stone level of the 1st stone is increased. Promote one step. At this time, if the stone level of the 1st stone is already Lv5, the stone level of the 2nd stone is promoted by one level. If the stone level of the 2nd stone is already Lv5, the stone level of the 3rd stone is promoted by one level. If the winning role is chance A, B or strong cherry, but the stone level of all three stones is not promoted, the stone level of the 1st stone is promoted by two levels. At this time, if the stone level of the 1st stone is already Lv5, the stone level of the 2nd stone is promoted by two levels. If the stone level of the 2nd stone is already Lv5, the stone level of the 3rd stone is promoted by 2 levels. In addition, if you win with a fixed role or middle cherry, the stone level of all stones will be promoted by 4 levels.

In this example, the immediate player is notified that the stone level is promoted, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, even if each stone level is promoted, the stone does not notify the immediate player, but the stone gives a suggestion effect regarding the promotion over several games in a continuous production, and the promotion level is notified at the end of the continuous production. It may be an embodiment. In addition, even if the player presses a button or holds his / her hand over the display device 11 during the continuous production, the player himself / herself makes a notification as if he / she voluntarily promoted the stone level. Alternatively, the promotion suggestion effect is performed with the display device 11 covered with some kind of accessory (for example, a bamboo blind) installed on the display device 11, and the cover is removed and the result is notified only when the stone level is Lv5. Such an aspect may be used. It should be noted that it may be decided by lottery whether or not to notify the promotion status of the stone level.

(Stone point lottery)
A stone point lottery for each stone level will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 and 149. Here, FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a stone point lottery table. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the stone level lottery and the reward judge lottery. In addition, "watermelon or weak che", "strong che or chance eye" and "special role or medium che" shown in FIG. 147 are the above-mentioned sub-flags.

As shown in FIG. 147, the table selected by the stone point lottery differs depending on to what level each stone has been promoted by the stone level promotion lottery process. For example, when the 1st stone is promoted to Lv3 by the stone level promotion lottery process, the main CPU 101 executes the stone point lottery with reference to the table of Lv3 (see FIG. 147).

The main CPU 101 executes the stone point lottery in the 21st game, the 22nd game, and the 23rd game in the pseudo bonus. More specifically, the stone point lottery of the 1st stone is executed in the 21st game, the stone point lottery of the 2nd stone is executed in the 22nd game, and the stone point lottery of the 3rd stone is executed in the 23rd game. In this stone point lottery, as shown in the stone point lottery table (see FIG. 147), points are given according to the sub-flags classified according to the result of the internal lottery in each game of the 21st to 23rd games. different. The Lv5 table (the table referred to when the stone level is Lv5) is given any of 1 to 3 points regardless of the sub-flags classified according to the result of the internal lottery. Will be done.

Next, the effect mode of the stone point lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 149. The effect image shown in FIG. 149 is an example in the case where the 1st stone level is Lv3, the 2nd stone level is Lv1, and the 3rd stone level is Lv2 in the 20th game (see FIG. 146 (3)).

(1) and (2) of FIG. 149 are production modes in the stone point lottery of the 1st stone executed in the 21st game of the pseudo bonus. As described above, the 1st stone has been promoted to Lv3 by the stone level promotion lottery process. Characters having different facial expressions are displayed on the display device 11 according to the stone level. However, it is not essential to change the facial expression of the character according to the stone level, and the character itself may be changed according to the stone level, or the image other than the character may be changed according to the stone level. .. This makes it possible to grasp the stone level just by looking at the image. In particular, when an image that is likely to be given 3 points is displayed, it is possible to give the player a high sense of expectation.

In (2) of FIG. 149, as a result of the stone point lottery of FIG. 146, "GET reward points 2" is displayed at the upper part of the display device 11 together with the characters "Success!" It is a mode to notify. On the display device 11, 2P is displayed as the accumulation of the obtained points.

(3) and (4) of FIG. 149 are the production modes of the stone point lottery for the 2nd stone that was not promoted as Lv1 in the stone level promotion lottery process in the 22nd game of the pseudo bonus. In FIG. 149 (3), the facial expression of the character corresponding to Lv1 of the stone is displayed on the display device 11. In (4) of FIG. 149, as a result of the stone point lottery of FIG. 146, the display device 11 is notified to the player that the points could not be obtained together with the characters "Failure!". 2P is displayed on the display device 11 as a cumulative total of the obtained points.

(5) and (6) of FIG. 149 are the production modes of the stone point lottery for the 3rd stone promoted to Lv2 by the stone level promotion lottery process in the 23rd game of the pseudo bonus. In FIG. 149 (5), the facial expression of the character corresponding to the stone level 2 is displayed on the display device 11. In (6) of FIG. 149, as a result of the stone point lottery of FIG. 146, "GET reward point 1" is displayed on the display device 11 together with the characters "Success!", And the player is notified of the acquisition of 1 point. doing. On the display device 11, 3P is displayed as the accumulation of the obtained points.

In this way, in the 21st to 23rd games of the pseudo bonus, the result of the point lottery of each stone is displayed as an effect, which makes it possible for the player to grasp the result of the point lottery of each stone. As a modification, only the success or failure of the effect (challenge effect in FIG. 149) in the stone level lottery is displayed without clearly indicating the value of the stone points given in the stone point lottery of each stone, and the number of points is a predetermined number (the challenge effect in FIG. 149). For example, if 1 point or more is given, the challenge is successful, and if no points are given, the challenge may be unsuccessful. In this specification, the specific points and accumulated points given in each lottery are unclear, and even if the points are relatively small, the expectation for the reward judge, which will be described later, is expected. It has the effect of being easy to maintain.

Further, the point lottery of each stone may be determined separately, and the lottery timing and the like are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be performed in the same game.

Further, referring to the stone level of each stone, the point lottery of the stone is performed at a predetermined timing (when the start lever 16 is turned on or when the third stop (stop buttons 17L, 17C,) of the final game of the specific game (for example, the 20th game). When the stop button that was last stopped in 17R is released), the point lottery of stones by each stone may be performed without depending on the internal winning combination. In this case, for example, the effect is produced after the third stop. The points acquired by the production accompanied by the operation of the operation means may be notified.

Further, the lottery of stone points may be performed three times in one game instead of different games for each of the 1st stone, the 2nd stone, and the 3rd stone. In this case, after the start lever 16 is turned on, the stone point lottery of each stone is performed, and at the time of the first stop in the one game (when the stop button that has been stopped first among the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is released). , At the time of the second stop (when the stop button operated to stop the second of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is released), at the time of the third stop, the result of the lottery may be notified, or the start lever 16 may be used. The result may be notified by performing an operation by the effect operating means at a predetermined timing from immediately after the on to the third stop. Further, the point lottery of stones may be performed after the third stop, and the result may be notified after that.

The lottery order of each stone is not necessarily the order of the 1st stone, the 2nd stone, and the 3rd stone, and the lottery order may be determined by a predetermined determination. Further, a stone having a low stone level, that is, a stone having a low expected value may be first drawn for stone points and the result of the lottery may be notified. For example, when the 1st stone is Lv4, the 2nd stone is Lv2, and the 3rd stone is Lv1, the points of the 3rd stone (Lv1) are drawn in the 21st game of FIG. 149, and the points of the 2nd stone (Lv2) are drawn in the 22nd game. A lottery will be performed, and a point lottery for the 1st stone (lv4) will be performed in the 23rd game.

In addition, the point lottery of stones may refer only to the stone level without depending on the internal winning combination in the game in which the lottery is performed, or refer to the set value, AT lottery state, etc. on the premise of the stone level. You may go.

In addition, the notification effect of the stone point lottery result may be performed across a plurality of games. For example, the number of multiple games such as two games each in the three lottery sections of the 21st game, the 22nd game, and the 23rd game in FIG. 149, such as the 21st to 22nd games, the 23rd to 24th games, and the 25th to 26th games. If points are given as a continuous effect over the section, it may be shown as a success of the continuous effect, and if no points are given, it may be shown as a failure of the continuous effect. In this case, the stone point lottery may be determined by referring to the internal winning combination of only the first game in each section, or by referring to the internal winning combination of all games, or the point lottery is performed in advance. , Each section may have only a role as a result notification section.

Further, when the obtained points are displayed, less points than the points actually given by the stone point lottery may be notified. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the unexpected development that a privilege larger than the privilege expected from the notified points or the accumulated points appears as a result of the reward judge.

(Reward judge lottery)
The reward judge lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149. Here, FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example of a reward judge lottery table.

In the reward judge lottery, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to give a reward after the end of the pseudo bonus, and if the reward is given after the end of the pseudo bonus, the reward level to be given. In this reward judge lottery, the table selected in the reward judge lottery differs depending on the total value of the points given by the stone point lottery performed in the 21st to 23rd games. For example, if the total value of the points given by the stone point lottery is 1, the main CPU 101 executes the stone point lottery with reference to the table of points 1 (see FIG. 148).

Further, in the reward judge lottery, as shown in the reward judge lottery table (see FIG. 148), the reward given according to the sub-flags classified according to the result of the internal lottery of the final game (24th game), for example. Levels can be different. For example, in the 21st to 23rd games in the pseudo bonus, when the reward judge lottery is performed with the stone points of 3P points in total, AT and the special zone 3 are always given as rewards. In addition, in the 21st to 23rd games during the pseudo-bonus, if the reward judge lottery is performed without stone points being given, the reward judge lottery is given according to the result of the internal lottery in the final game (24th game). The reward is determined to be one of "non-winning", "AT", "AT + pseudo bonus", "AT + special zone 1" and "AT + special zone 3".

By the way, if all the stone levels remain at Lv1 and are not promoted at all in the stone level promotion lottery process, it is unlikely that stone points can be obtained in the stone point lottery (see FIG. 147). Further, if the stone points cannot be obtained in the stone point lottery, it is unlikely that the reward will be given in the reward judge lottery (see FIG. 148). That is, if all stone levels are not promoted at Lv1 in the stone level promotion lottery process, the player's expectation for the reward judge lottery will be lost when the stone point lottery is not even performed. It could be. Therefore, if all stone levels remain at Lv1 in the stone level promotion lottery process and are not promoted at all, and stone points cannot be obtained in the stone point lottery, the main CPU 101 is set to "stone point 0 and stone level". Is executing the reward judge lottery (relief) by referring to the reward judge lottery table of "All Lv1 (relief)". As shown in FIG. 148, this "stone point 0 and stone level all Lv1 (relief)" table is displayed in the stone point lottery even though one of the stone levels has been promoted by the stone level promotion lottery process. Compared to the "point 0" table (the table most disadvantageous to the player), which is referred to when stone points cannot be obtained, it is advantageous to the player. As a result, even if all stone levels remain at Lv1 and are not promoted at all in the stone level promotion lottery process, and even if stone points cannot be obtained in the stone point lottery, the player is rescued as described above. By doing so, it is possible to avoid losing the player's expectation for the reward judge lottery when the stone point lottery is not even performed. In the reward judge lottery (relief), it is assumed that the result of the sub flag is a rare role or higher (either "watermelon or weak che", "strong che or chance eye", "special role" or "medium che"). It is decided that it will shift to AT after the end of the bonus, but even if the result of the sub flag is other than the rare role, it will be possible to shift to AT and a lottery will be done so that it will be a so-called revival hit. Further, the AT may be forcibly granted without being limited to the one by lottery.

In addition, the reward obtained by the reward judge lottery will shift to AT after the end of the pseudo bonus, 2) shift to the pseudo bonus for which the AT transition has been confirmed, and 3) AT, depending on the result of the reward judge lottery. After the transition, there are five types: 4) transition to the specialized zone 1, 4) transition to the specialized zone 2 after the transition to the AT, and 5) transition to the specialized zone 3 after the transition to the AT. In the case of 0) non-winning, after the end of the pseudo-bonus, the game does not shift to any of the pseudo-bonus, AT and special zone. In the case of 0) non-winning, an additional relief determination is made with reference to the value of the causal value counter described above. Here, when the value of the causal value counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, 10 or more), a transition process of 4) shifting to the AT and then shifting to the specialized zone 2 is performed, and the predetermined value counter is used to perform the predetermined value counter. The value (eg 10) is subtracted. Here, if the transition process is not performed in the additional relief determination, the advantageous section (increasing game) ends, the value of the causal value counter is initialized, and the transition to the non-advantageous section occurs.

“D” in FIG. 149 shows an example of the effect mode of the reward judge lottery. In FIG. 149 (7), the display device 11 is displayed as if judging the result of the stone point lottery so far. The main CPU 101 draws a reward judge based on the points 3P obtained up to (6). As a result, in FIG. 149 (8), as a result of the reward judge lottery, the display device 11 indicates that the transition to AT and the transition to the specialized zone 3 have been confirmed.

The main CPU 101 does not necessarily have to perform the reward judge lottery for the 24th game, which is performed according to the result of the stone point lottery, and determines the reward to be given according to the result of the stone point lottery. You may do it.

[High accuracy transition mode lottery during AT]
In this example, the main CPU 101 has a special feature called "high probability" or a gaming state with a high probability of winning a pseudo bonus called "high probability" when the internal winning combination at the start of AT and during AT is a rare role or the like. It is possible to shift to a gaming state where the probability of winning the conversion zone is high. First, at the start of AT, the main CPU 101 performs a high-accuracy transition mode lottery (not shown) to shift to one of a plurality of modes. There are at least modes in which these modes are easy to shift to high accuracy or ultra-high accuracy and modes in which it is difficult to shift, and these modes are sorted according to the settings. The high-probability transition mode lottery is performed not only during the AT of this example, but also at the time of the next game when the number of bells is ceiling, at the time of winning the pseudo bonus, and at the time of winning the special zone 2 of the final game of the AT.

[High accuracy transition lottery during AT]
The conditions for transition to "high accuracy" are when the high accuracy transition is decided by the high accuracy transition lottery performed in response to the internal winning role being a rare role, and when the pseudo bonus is won during AT. is there.

By the way, the winning opportunity to win the pseudo bonus during AT is when the internal winning role is a rare role and the lottery by the number of bells ceiling. When the internal winning combination is a rare role, a high-probability transition lottery and a pseudo-bonus lottery are performed, and the lottery by the number-of-bell ceiling is, for example, when the number-of-bell ceiling is set to 10 times, the bell is established from the start of AT. It becomes the ceiling in 10 times, and a pseudo bonus lottery (during AT) is performed. The number of bells in this example is 10 to 90 times, and this is determined by lottery. The lottery conditions for the number of bells ceiling are the start of AT, the next game when the number of bells is ceiling, the time when the pseudo bonus is won, and the time when the special zone 2 is won in the final game of AT. In addition, there is no problem even if the specification is to win a pseudo bonus when the number of bells reaches the ceiling.

By the way, as described above, the transition to high accuracy may be simply a transition to high accuracy, for example, when winning a high accuracy transition lottery, or a transition may be triggered by the winning of a pseudo bonus during AT. In some cases. Therefore, in high accuracy, the state of high accuracy without winning the pseudo bonus, the state of high accuracy with winning the pseudo bonus, and the high accuracy of winning the pseudo bonus and winning any of the special zones 1 to 3 There is a certain state. The state of high probability of winning a pseudo-bonus is, in other words, the state of chance of winning a pseudo-bonus, and the state of high-probability of winning a pseudo-bonus functions as a chance of upgrading a special zone and a state of precursor of a pseudo-bonus.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a high-accuracy transition lottery table. As shown in FIG. 150, the high probability transition lottery executed by the main CPU 101 is determined to be a winning or non-winning depending on the internal winning combination. For example, if the internal winning combination is a weak cherry, the high probability transition lottery is won only with a probability of, for example, 6/256. On the other hand, when the internal winning combination is a strong cherry, a special winning combination, or a middle-tier cherry, for example, there is a 100% probability of winning the high-probability transition lottery. In addition, if the internal winning combination is the chance, for example, the probability of winning the high probability transition lottery is 1/2.

FIG. 151 is a high-accuracy game number lottery table. When the high-accuracy transition lottery is won, the main CPU 101 determines the number of high-accuracy games by referring to the high-accuracy game number lottery table, executes the high-accuracy game until the determined high-accuracy game number is exhausted, and determines. When the number of high-accuracy games played is exhausted, the high-accuracy game ends. According to FIG. 151, the number of games is determined to be 13 to 16 at the time of high probability winning. On the other hand, if you win more than the bonus during high certainty AT, the probability of winning 13 to 16 games is the highest, but the number of games is 5 to 8, 9 to 12 and 17 to 20. There is a possibility of winning. In addition, instead of determining the number of high-accuracy games by lottery as described above, the number of high-accuracy games may be set in advance, for example, fixed at 10 games. In addition, "5-8G" of FIG. 151 means that the number of precursor games is determined in any one of 5 games, 6 games, 7 games and 8 games. The final number of precursor games will be determined to a value of 1 in the subsequent lottery. For example, in the lottery using the high-accuracy game number lottery table shown in FIG. 151, when it is determined to be "5 to 8G", the number of precursor games is determined to be 7 games or the like in the subsequent lottery. Further, in the lottery of FIG. 151, four kinds of values 5, 9, 13, and 17 are first determined, and any value 0 to 3 is added to the values by lottery to simplify the process. , The number of precursor games may be varied.

(Precursor production during AT)
During the AT of this example, if the internal winning combination is a rare combination, the main CPU 101 performs a high-probability transition lottery and a pseudo-bonus lottery. Pseudo-bonus lottery is played every game during AT, but not in the final game of AT.

By the way, when the internal winning combination during AT is a rare combination, the main CPU 101 performs a high probability transition lottery and a pseudo bonus lottery. If you win the high-accuracy transition lottery, you will be transferred from the next game with high accuracy. In addition, if the pseudo bonus lottery is won, the pseudo bonus is executed after the end of AT. The result of the high probability transition lottery and the result of the pseudo bonus lottery are command-transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 201. However, even if the high-probability transition lottery or the pseudo-bonus lottery is won, the sub CPU 201 may immediately display an effect image indicating that the high-probability transition lottery or the pseudo-bonus lottery has been won in the display area of the display device 11. It is possible to display a precursory effect without any.

In addition, the precursor effect is executed when the precursor effect lottery, which is executed according to the internal winning combination being a rare role, is won. In this precursor effect lottery, when it is decided to execute the precursor effect, the number of precursor effect games is also determined.

The precursory effect lottery is executed not only when the high-probability transition lottery or the pseudo-bonus lottery is won, but also when the lottery is lost. The precursory effect that is executed when the player is defeated is the so-called precursory effect of Gase. Therefore, when the precursory effect is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the transition is highly accurate and a pseudo-bonus is executed, but the transition to the high-accuracy or pseudo-bonus is confirmed by the display of the precursory effect. I don't do it. However, it is preferable that the probability of winning the precursory effect execution lottery is higher when the probability is won than when the high probability transition lottery or the pseudo bonus lottery is lost.

It should be noted that the precursory effect execution lottery does not necessarily have to be executed by the main CPU 101, and may be executed by the sub CPU 201.

Further, in the pseudo-bonus lottery based on the small winning combination, as shown in FIG. 152, the expected value of winning the pseudo-bonus differs depending on whether the gaming state is normal (low accuracy) or high accuracy. For example, in both normal (low accuracy) and high accuracy, the internal winning role is a rare role ("watermelon", "weak cherry", "strong cherry", "chance eye", "special role", " Depending on the fact that it is a "middle cherry"), a lottery will be held with the winning of the prize, but the higher accuracy will shift to the pseudo bonus, special zone 1 or special zone 3 than normal (low accuracy). Cheap.

Further, if the first chance 1 or the second chance is established without winning the pseudo bonus during AT, the main CPU 101 performs a freeze lottery. In the freeze lottery, it is decided whether or not to shift to the special zones 1 to 3, and at the time of winning, the subsequent lottery is not performed, and the game shifts to the special zone won by the freeze lottery.

In addition, during AT, in addition to the case of winning a high accuracy or pseudo bonus triggered by the winning of a rare role as described above, there is a case of shifting to a gaming state called super high accuracy, which makes it easy to shift to a specialized zone. is there. The main CPU 101 performs the ultra-high probability transition lottery at the time of winning the pseudo bonus during AT, but does not perform it in the final game of AT. Even if the game is won with ultra-high accuracy, several precursor games are played, and the next game in which the number of high-accuracy games becomes 0 is shifted to ultra-high accuracy. In this example, the ultra-high accuracy is 10 games, but the number of ultra-high accuracy games is not limited to this, and the number of ultra-high accuracy games may be determined by lottery.

As shown in FIG. 153, in the bonus lottery during ultra-high accuracy, the bonus lottery is triggered by winning the "missing", "normal replay", "pushing order bell or common bell", and "watermelon or weak cherry". Do. When this bonus is won, unlike the case of normal (low accuracy) and high accuracy, in addition to the pseudo bonus that is confirmed to shift to AT, it shifts to the special zone after the pseudo bonus. FIG. 154 is an ultra-high probability transition lottery table, and although the coefficient distribution differs depending on the setting, it is common to all the settings that it is easy to win when the watermelon wins.

During the AT of this example, the main CPU 101 draws an additional number of game values that can be acquired by the AT. The additional lottery is performed every game during AT. The number of additional sheets is determined by lottery from 10 to 500.

(Behavior when transitioning with high accuracy during AT)
As described above, the AT in this example is managed by the remaining acquired number counter, which is a function of the main CPU 101, and ends when the game value of a predetermined difference is acquired. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy games and the ultra-high-accuracy games, which are in the "high-accuracy" or "ultra-high-accuracy" gaming state, the number of games is managed as described above, and the predetermined number of games is exhausted (the number of games (not shown)). By adding a predetermined number of games to the counter), those gaming states are terminated (returning from high accuracy to normal gaming state). In this example, if the accuracy becomes high during the AT, the AT is continued if the number of highly accurate games remains even if the end condition of the AT is satisfied. The number of high-accuracy games and ultra-high-accuracy games may be determined by lottery. In FIGS. 155 and 157, a case where the number of high-accuracy games in the case of high-accuracy transition during AT is 10 is described as an example.

When the AT is the difference number management and the high-accuracy game is the game number management, the problems shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 occur. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an outline of the flow of games during AT, and FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example in which the flow of games during AT is displayed on the display device 11, and the contents of FIG. 155 are specifically displayed on the display device 11. It is the one displayed in 11.

As already described in FIG. 152, if a rare role or the like is won during AT, the gaming state during AT may shift from normal (low accuracy) to high accuracy. It may be to notify the player immediately when the transition is highly accurate, but it is to notify the player that the transition has been highly accurate after the suggestion production (tilt production, precursor production) of several games. There may be. The suggestive effect when the transition is highly accurate will be described later. By the way, since the AT in this example manages the difference number as described above, when the remaining difference number of the game value that can be acquired by the AT is small, the game shifts to the high accuracy (high accuracy game) that manages the number of games. There can be cases.

FIG. 156 (1) shows an example of the display device 11 in a state in which one game of the high-accuracy game is completed by winning the high-accuracy (10 games continued) when the difference number that can be acquired by the AT is three. Then, when a 7-bell is won in this game, the net increase in the game value in the case of a 3-card game is 4, so that the 7-bell is won in (2) of FIG. 156. Is notified to the player, and the difference number that can be obtained by AT has changed from 3 to 0, and the remaining number of high-accuracy games is notified. Here, the AT is usually terminated by acquiring a predetermined number of game values, which is the termination condition of the AT, but in this example, the AT is continued when the number of high-accuracy games remains. Therefore, AT does not end at this point.

FIG. 156 (3) shows a state in which the right to obtain a game value of 10 different sheets is obtained as an addition. The sub CPU 201 indicates that the display device 11 has an additional number of different game values (wins the additional lottery), and that the difference number that can be obtained by AT has increased from 0 to 10 in the high-accuracy game. The display of the effect image indicating that the number of remaining games is 8 is executed. Then, when 7 bells were won in the next game, in (4) of Fig. 156, the difference number that can be obtained by AT increased from 10 to 6, and the number of remaining games of the high-accuracy game became 7 games. Is shown.

Furthermore, in FIG. 156 (5), if a 7-bell is won, the difference in the number of ATs that can be obtained is changed from 6 to 2, and the remaining number of high-accuracy games is 6 games. ), By winning the 7-card bell, the difference number that can be obtained by AT is changed from 2 to 0, and the number of remaining games of the high-accuracy game is 5 games. Although the number is 0, the AT has shown that it will continue because the number of high-accuracy games has not been exhausted. In FIG. 156 (7), 5 games are digested from (6), and the number of remaining games of the high-accuracy game becomes 0, indicating that the AT and the high-accuracy game are completed at the same timing. .. In this way, even if the AT continues until the number of high-accuracy games is exhausted, in a situation where the added difference number is immediately added, the high-accuracy game is for the player. Despite the benefit of continuing AT inside, the game is played while reducing the game value acquired by the addition, so not only the improvement of the interest that should be originally obtained by the addition cannot be obtained, but also the interest is rather May decrease.

Therefore, in this example, the interest is improved by performing the control as shown in FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an outline of the flow of games during AT in this example, and FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example in which the flow of games during AT is displayed on the display device 11, and the contents of FIG. 157 are concretely shown. It is displayed on the display device 11.

FIG. 158 (1) shows an example of the display device 11 in a state in which one game of the high-accuracy game is completed by winning the high-accuracy (10 games continued) when the difference number that can be acquired by the AT is three. Then, when a 7-bell is won in this game, the net increase in the game value in the case of a 3-card game is 4, so that the 7-bell is won in (2) of FIG. 158. Is notified to the player, and the difference number that can be obtained by AT has changed from 3 to 0, and the remaining number of high-accuracy games is notified. The procedure up to this point is the same as in FIG. 156.

FIG. 158 (3) is the same as in the case of FIG. 156 in that the right to obtain the game value of the difference number of 10 sheets is obtained as an addition, but unlike the case of FIG. 156, the addition is added. Although the player is notified that the addition has been made (immediately) at the same time as the winning, the right to acquire 10 cards is not immediately granted and is put on hold at this point (not added to the difference number counter). The display device 11 is notified that the difference number of game values has been added (the additional lottery has been won), but the difference number that can be obtained by AT remains 0, and the rest of the high-accuracy game. It indicates that the number of games has reached eight.

Then, when 7 bells are won in the next game, as shown in (4) of Fig. 158, the number of games is increased with the notation of 0 difference number that can be obtained by AT although the game value of 4 net increase is acquired. It is displayed that 1 has been reduced to 7 games. Further, the fact that "addition" has been made in the previous game is displayed by an icon (at the lower left in this example) at an arbitrary position on the display device 11. In (5) and (6) of FIG. 158, as in the case of (4), the difference number that can be obtained by AT remains 0, and by winning 7 bells each, a net increase of 4 (8 in total). Acquire the game value of. That is, at this point, as compared with the case of FIG. 155, a total of 12 game values can be obtained while maintaining the right to add the difference number.

In FIG. 158 (7), five games from (6) are digested, and at the same time as the end of the high-accuracy game, the right to add the difference number reserved in FIG. 158 (3) is granted. The display device 11 has been held and granted the right to add at this point, indicating that the difference number that can be obtained by AT has changed from 0 to 10 and the number of remaining games of the high-accuracy game has become 0. Is shown. As a result, as shown in (8) and (9) of FIG. 158, the player enjoys the merit of the high-accuracy game (it is easy to win a pseudo bonus), and the high-accuracy game is continued during the high-accuracy game. While enjoying the merit of continuing AT until the end of the game (notifying the player to obtain the game value), the difference in the number of cards acquired during the continuation of the high-accuracy game is surely added after the end of the high-accuracy game. Can be earned in. Up to this point, taking the high-accuracy game during AT as an example, in the so-called AT continuation guarantee state, by suspending (postponing) the addition of the difference number until the end of the AT continuation guarantee state, the benefit of the guarantee state is given. I explained the specifications that enhance the interest of the player by enjoying the benefits of both without reducing the value. The same effect can be obtained even if the predetermined game state other than the high-accuracy game is set as the AT continuation guarantee state and the addition of the difference number is suspended until the end of the predetermined game state in the predetermined game state.

By the way, in this example, since the limiter arrival confirmation state is entered long before the limiter activation condition is satisfied, the specification is such that the limiter is not activated while the addition is pending, and the "addition" icon described later is displayed. Nevertheless, the "additional" right reserved by the limiter will not be extinguished, and care is taken not to cause discomfort to the player. As a modification, when the limiter activation condition is satisfied and the advantageous section ends in the state where the addition is suspended, the reserved addition disappears without being added.

[Production behavior during high-accuracy games]
As mentioned above, if you shift to high accuracy (a game state with a high probability of winning a pseudo bonus) during AT, AT will continue for the number of games of the high accuracy game regardless of the remaining number of ATs. Stated. Therefore, the effect method when the player wins the prize with high accuracy during AT and the effect behavior when the player wins the lottery by adding the difference number of game values during the high accuracy suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 159. The high-accuracy or ultra-high-accuracy transition lottery and the high-accuracy game number lottery have already been described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 154.

FIG. 159 (1) is a diagram showing an example of a basic pattern when a high-accuracy transition is performed during AT and a suggestion effect (also referred to as a high-accuracy transition tilting effect or a precursory effect) indicating the transition is performed. In the AT lottery process, the main CPU 101 does not have the number of so-called precursor games, which suggests whether or not the game has been transferred with high accuracy, as a parameter in order to reduce the data capacity. It is a control that suggests whether or not the transition has been made with high accuracy while the transition has already been made with high accuracy. For example, in (1) of FIG. 159, when the total number of high-accuracy games won was 15 games, 5 of them were used for suggestion production, and it was determined that 5 games were digested and then the high-accuracy game was transferred. An example of notifying the player and playing a high-accuracy game of the remaining 10 games is shown.

By the way, in this example, when the winning number is won in the lottery for adding the game value of the difference number in the high-accuracy game during AT, the winning number is not added to the difference number counter, and only the indication that the winning number is "added" is displayed. Displaying in 11 is as described above. That is, when the "addition" icon is displayed on the display device 11, the player knows that the current gaming state is highly accurate. Then, for example, if we were planning to perform 5 games of high-accuracy transition suggestion effects, but if we win the lottery in addition to the 3rd game, we are in the middle of suggestion effects of whether or not to make high-accuracy transitions. Regardless, when the "addition" icon is framed in, the player will notice that the current game state is internally highly accurate, and there is no point in performing highly accurate suggestion effects in subsequent games. There is a problem that it ends up.

In view of such a problem, in this example, as shown in (2) of FIG. 159, when the additional lottery is won in the middle of the suggestion effect of the high probability transition of the predetermined number of games, the "addition" icon is displayed. At the same time as the display, the suggestion effect is finished, the player is notified that the game has entered the high-accuracy game state, and the high-accuracy game is started. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the annoyance of having to see the suggestion effect of whether or not the transition is highly accurate even though it has already been revealed that the accuracy is high internally. ..

(Additional notification icon effect)
FIG. 160 shows an example of an additional icon effect lottery table. In the high-accuracy game during AT, when the additional lottery of the game value is won, the mode of the icon displayed on the display device 11 is changed according to the number of additional numbers won. For example, in a high-accuracy game during AT, if the game value addition lottery has never been won, the current effect is "0 (none)", and within this range, depending on the total number of winning additions. The notification effect is drawn. If the total number of winning cards is, for example, "20", "0 (white)" is most likely to be selected as the notification effect, and "3 (red)" or "4 (rainbow)" is selected. There is no possibility of being done.

Furthermore, in addition to the above, if the additional lottery of the game value is won and the total number of additional cards is 100, the total number of additional cards won is 120 within the range of the current effect "1 (white)". The notification effect is drawn according to the above. When the total number of additional sheets is 100 to 299, the probability that "3 (red)" is selected as the notification effect is the highest. From the player's point of view, it is notified that the white effect was "added" when the game value was added to the lottery for the first time, and it was white when the game value was added to the lottery for the second time. Since the effect of the "additional" notification changes as if the effect is repainted with a red effect, it is possible to have the joy of the additional notification and the expectation for the cumulative number of additional sheets, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The notification effect "4 (rainbow)" may be used as a premium effect. For example, when the current effect is "3 (green)", 300 cards are won by the additional lottery of the game value, and the total number of cards is 300. Even if the above conditions are met (the condition for the rainbow effect to occur is satisfied), it is not necessary to increase the probability that the notification effect "4 (rainbow)" will be selected. 3 (green) ”may be selected as the notification effect.

[Ending effect in the limiter arrival confirmed state]
The ending effect that can be performed in the limiter arrival confirmed state in this example will be described. Since the ending effect-related matters are described in detail in FIGS. 43 and 44, duplicated descriptions will be omitted, and the contents related to this example will be mainly described.

The pachislot machine of this example, like the pachislot machines of the other examples (No. 1 to No. 6) and the other example (No. 6), for example, if it is a "number limiter", it won "2400" medals in an advantageous section. In the case of the "game number limiter", when the advantageous section continues for "1500 games", the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section.

Further, the pachislot of this example is similar to the pachislots of the other examples (No. 1 to No. 6) and the other example (No. 6), and when the main CPU 101 approaches the end of the advantageous section due to the "number limiter", FIG. 122 And as shown in FIG. 123, the transition control to the limiter arrival confirmation state is performed. That is, the transition to the limiter arrival confirmed state is, for example, the game value (number of sheets) acquired in the advantageous section (increased game) such as AT and the game value that can be acquired in the advantageous section (increased game) currently held. This is performed when the total value with the number (remaining difference number) is a predetermined number (for example, 2000 sheets) or more. When the state shifts to the limiter arrival confirmation state, the main CPU 101 does not execute the high-probability transition lottery, the pseudo-bonus lottery, and the additional lottery of the number of game values that can be acquired by the AT. This is to prevent the shift to a non-advantageous section due to the limit processing before the profit of the winning is fully enjoyed despite winning these lottery. In the limiter arrival confirmed state, the main CPU 101 does not execute the high probability transition lottery, the pseudo bonus lottery, and the additional lottery, but is controlled by the AT before the transition to the limiter arrival confirmed state. The winning probability may be low.

Further, when the main CPU 101 shifts to the limiter arrival confirmation state, the sub CPU 201 that receives such a command from the main CPU 101 refers to, for example, a sub_ending transition lottery table (not shown) and controls the ending standby state or the ending effect state. To do. The ending effect state includes the ending effect state A and the ending effect state B.

In this example, the game period from the transition to the limiter arrival confirmed state to the end of the limiter arrival confirmed state (end of the advantageous section) is defined as, for example, the limiter arrival confirmed state 1, the limiter arrival confirmed state 2, and the limiter arrival confirmed state. It is divided into three limiter arrival confirmed states such as 3. Then, in each limiter arrival confirmation state, the sub CPU 201 controls the ending standby state, the ending effect state A, or the ending effect state B.

In this example, the limiter arrival confirmation state 1 is the game value (number of sheets) acquired in the advantageous section (increased game) such as AT and the number of game values (increased game) that can be acquired in the currently held advantageous section (increased game). It is confirmed that the total value with the remaining difference number) is 2000 or more (≧ 2000), and the number of game values (difference number) acquired so far in the advantageous section (increased game) is less than 2000 (<2000). ) State. In the limiter arrival confirmation state 1, the sub CPU 201 controls the ending standby state. That is, even if the limiter arrival is confirmed by the control of the main CPU 7101, the number of game values (difference number) acquired so far in the advantageous section (increased game) is 2000 instead of immediately setting the ending effect state. If it is less than, the ending standby state is set. In this example, the end condition of the limiter arrival confirmation state 1 is when the number of game values (difference number) acquired so far in the advantageous section (increased game) becomes 2000 or more (≧ 2000). ..

In this example, in the limiter arrival confirmed state 2, the end condition of the limiter arrival confirmed state 1 is satisfied (that is, the number of game values (difference number) acquired in the advantageous section (increased game) is 2000 or more (≧ 2000)). It is a state from the next game to the game in which the end condition of the limiter arrival confirmation state 2 is satisfied. The end condition of the limiter arrival confirmation state 2 is when the number of game values (difference number) acquired so far in the advantageous section (increased game) becomes 2350 or more (≧ 2350). In the limiter arrival confirmation state 2, the screen of the ending effect state A (ending movie related to the ending effect state A) is displayed on the display device 11 by the sub CPU 201.

In the limiter arrival confirmed state 3, the end condition of the limiter arrival confirmed state 2 is satisfied (that is, the number of game values (difference number) acquired in the advantageous section (increased game) is 2350 or more (≧ 2350)). It is a state from the next game until the end condition of the limiter arrival confirmation state 3 (that is, the end condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied. In the limiter arrival confirmation state 3, the screen of the ending effect state B (ending movie related to the ending effect state B) is displayed on the display device 11 by the sub CPU 201.

Then, when the end condition of the limiter arrival confirmation state 3 (that is, the number of game values (difference number) acquired in the advantageous section (increased game) is 2400 or more (≧ 2400)) is satisfied, the main CPU 7101 performs limit processing. Will be. When the limit processing is performed, the operation invalidation period is set, and the main CPU 7101 is in a locked state in which the game (BET operation, start lever 16 operation, stop button 17L, 17C, 17R operation, etc.) cannot be performed for a predetermined period. .. Then, the display device 11 displays the number of acquired sheets and displays "prevention of digging in". When the operation invalidation period ends, the game can be played, and the game in the non-advantageous section is started. The display device 11 displays a screen in a normal state by the sub CPU 201.

In addition, for example, when the transition condition of the limiter arrival confirmation state 1 is satisfied in the special zone 1, the special zone 2 or the special zone 3 (that is, the state in which the AT is added (the difference number is added)). However, the special zone is terminated in the game that satisfies the transition condition of the limiter arrival confirmation state 1, and the sub CPU 201 controls the ending standby state. However, in order to reduce the discomfort that the special zone ends in the middle, the special zone is continued under the control of the main CPU 7101 until the original end condition of the special zone is satisfied, and the special zone ends in a natural flow. After that, the screen may be shifted to the ending standby state screen by the control of the sub CPU 201.

By the way, as described above, in the limiter arrival confirmed state, even if the internal winning combination is a rare role or the like, the additional lottery is not executed. Therefore, when the limiter arrival is controlled, that is, when the screen of the ending standby state, the ending effect state A or the ending effect state B is displayed, if the player wins a rare role or the like, the player is disappointed. Giving, there is a risk of diminishing interest. Therefore, in this example, when a rare combination or the like is won while the main CPU 7101 controls the limiter arrival confirmation state, the player uses the touch sensor 19 on the display surface of the sub display device 18 to perform the touch sensor. By contacting 19, the internal setting information is suggested. Specifically, when the internal winning combination is a rare combination, the sub CPU 201 outputs a preset character line from the speaker 84 when contact with the touch sensor 19 is detected, and the internal setting is made by the line. The setting suggestion effect that suggests information is performed. As a result, when it is suggested that the internal setting is high, it is possible to urge the player to continue playing the game even if the game state is reset to the non-advantageous state by the end of the ending.

In this example, the mode of suggesting the internal setting information using the touch sensor 19 has been described, but the mode is not limited to this mode. For example, an operating means such as a button may be used instead of the touch sensor 19. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be performed on the condition that the rare combination is simply established without intervening the operation means. In addition, the setting suggestion effect is not limited to the mode in which the setting suggestion effect is performed by winning the rare role, etc., and the setting suggestion effect is not performed when the rare role is not won even though the rare role is won (when the rare role is missed). You may do so. Furthermore, the benefits given by winning or winning a rare role are not limited to setting suggestion effects, and benefits that may be advantageous to the player (excluding the addition of AT) can be separately given in various ways, etc. Variations are possible.

Further, in this example, when the limiter arrival confirmed state, that is, the screen of the ending standby state, the ending effect state A or the ending effect state B is displayed, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the rare role or the like is won. However, it is not limited to this. For example, even if a rare small role is won while the screen in the ending standby state is displayed, the setting suggestion effect is not performed, and the rare small role is displayed when the screen in the ending effect state A or the ending effect state B is displayed. When a role or the like is won, a setting suggestion effect may be performed.

By the way, in this example, as described above, when the screen of the ending standby state, the ending effect state A or the ending effect state B is displayed (that is, in the limiter arrival confirmed state), when the rare role or the like is won, it is added. The specification is to suggest the internal setting information in order to suppress the disappointment of the player due to not executing the lottery, but in the first place, the player may not be aware that the player has won the role of rare or the like. For example, in this example, as shown in FIG. 131, when a special role or a middle-tier cherry is won, the game value (for example, the number of medals) paid out as a prize is the same "C_312 bell" and / and "C_312 bell". When the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the setting suggestion effect is not performed), the push order navigation is performed so that the "C_312 bell" or / and the "C_312 bell" are awarded. You may do so. As a result, it is possible to conceal the winning of the rare role or the like so that the winning of the special role or the middle cherry is not detected.

When the screen of the ending standby state, the ending effect state A or the ending effect state B is displayed (that is, during the limiter arrival confirmation state), the following specifications 1) to 3), that is, 1) setting suggestion effect Specifications that do not have a function but have a function that the player does not detect that the player has won the rare role, etc. 2) Specifications that do not have the function that the player does not detect that the player has won the rare role, etc., but have a setting suggestion effect function. 3) It has both a setting effect function and a function that the player does not detect that he has won a rare role, etc., and when the first condition is satisfied, a setting suggestion effect is performed, and when the second condition is satisfied. May adopt any of the specifications that prevent the player from detecting that he has hit a rare role or the like.

Further, in this example, the so-called "hiki loss feeling" (the first hit of the AT if it is in a different gaming state) when the additional target role such as the rare small role is internally won in the limiter arrival confirmed state in which the addition is not performed. I explained a method to reduce the situation where the privilege grant judgment is not performed, that is, the feeling of loss that I pulled it at a bad timing), but the same method is used. , It may be adopted in a state other than the state where the addition or the first hit of the AT is not performed at all. For example, when a "additional low probability AT state" is provided in which the winning probability of the AT additional lottery is lower than that of the normal AT, and the additional target combination (rare role) is internally won in the additional low probability AT state, the setting suggestion effect is produced. It may be used to avoid the rare role stop type by the occurrence or batting order navigation.

In addition, in the non-increasing section, that is, in the non-advantageous section and in the advantageous section (normal game), when the winning combination of AT, CZ, etc. is internally won in the disadvantageous state where the winning expectation of AT, CZ, etc. is low. As a configuration capable of generating a setting suggestion effect, a so-called squeaky feeling may be reduced.

[Suggestion of return procedure]
In the pachislot of this example, a three-card bet game is performed in a state where the "F_BB_2BET" is won (a "F_BB_2BET" permitted state in which the "F_BB_2BET" is carried over). However, a situation may occur in which a two-card bet game is performed in a situation intended or unintended by the player, and a symbol combination corresponding to "F_BB_2BET" is displayed. A countermeasure in such a case will be described with reference to FIG. 161. In this example, when the total number of stored credits and the number bet at the present time is 2 or less, the credited medals are not bet even if the MAX bet button 15a is pressed. As a result, for example, even if the MAX bet button 15a is pressed while there are only two credits, the two-card bet state is not established, so that it is possible to prevent an unintentional two-card bet game. In addition, when the first operation of the start lever 16 is detected when the number of bets is two, the game is not started immediately, but "It is a two-card hang, is it okay to start? If so, press the start lever again. It may be possible to call attention by displaying a display image of "Please operate. It can be changed to a three-card hanging by inserting a medal or betting." Or outputting a voice. When the operation of the start lever is detected again, the game is started for the first time, and the reel rotation is started, so that it is difficult for an unintended two-card game to be performed.

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example of suggestion of a return procedure. As described above, in the state of winning the "F_BB_2BET" (the "F_BB_2BET" permitted state in which the "F_BB_2BET" is carried over), the player plays the two-card game where the three-card game should be played. When the symbol combination corresponding to "F_BB_2BET" is displayed, it is necessary to set the winning state to "F_BB_2BET" again. In this case, a hall clerk or the like will intervene and handle the process.

For example, if the corresponding gaming machine is on standby (not playing) or if the gaming state is general, the sub CPU 201 displays "two cards can be hung" on the display device 11. .. When the gaming state is between the two BB flags, the display on the display device 11 inherits the state during the game. If the game state is between the three BB flags, the display device 11 displays "3 cards can be hung". If the gaming state is in the bonus operation, the display device 11 displays "waiting". If the flag of the 2-sheet BB is cleared by clearing the RAM or the like, the display device 11 is displayed as "2 sheets can be hung".

On the other hand, if the corresponding gaming machine is playing, the gaming state is general, and the game in which the two-card bet game is executed is not a win for "F_BB_2BET", the sub CPU 201 displays " When "waiting" is displayed and "F_BB_2BET" is won, the sub CPU 201 displays "!" On the display device 11. In addition, "!" Is a display indicating that F_BB_2BET may win a prize. At this time, the hall clerk or the like needs to perform a stop operation so that F_BB_2BET does not win a prize. Further, when the corresponding gaming machine is playing, the gaming state is general, and the 3-card bet game is executed, the display device 11 indicates that "F_BB_3BET" is not won in the game and "stands by". ", And when" F_BB_3BET "is won," Aim "is displayed on the display device 11. When the game state is between the two BB flags and the two-card bet game is executed, "!" Is displayed on the display device 11, and when the three-card bet game is executed, the display device 11 is displayed. Perform the effect displayed in. When the game state is between the three BB flags and it is not possible to win the BB prize, the display device 11 shows "waiting" regardless of whether the game is executed in the two-card game or the three-card game. Is displayed. If it is possible to win a BB prize, "Aim" is displayed on the display device 11. If the gaming state is in the bonus operation, the display device 11 displays "waiting". It should be noted that the bonus during operation may be reset by the setting change work, and the bonus may not be carried over after the setting is changed. In this case, among the return means of aiming for the winning of F_BB_2BET by playing a two-card game after digesting the operating bonus, the first bonus digestion can be omitted, so the work time of the clerk required for return can be shortened. it can.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 at the time of the test firing test as the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, the differences from the first embodiment of the present invention will be described.

<Control system provided by pachislot>
FIG. 162 shows the configuration of the control system of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 162, the speaker group 84, the LED group 85, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63, the touch sensor 19, the display unit 212, and the sub-control board 72 connected to the sub-relay board 61 are not shown with respect to FIG. ing.

Further, in FIG. 162, with respect to FIG. 6, the ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 connected to the sub control board 72, the projector mechanism 211 and the sub display device 18 connected to the liquid crystal relay board 87, and the main control board are shown. The reset switch 76 connected to the 71 is not shown.

Further, in FIG. 162, with respect to FIG. 6, the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, the BET switch 77, the settlement switch 78, the start switch 79, the stop switch board 80, the game operation display board 81, the information display 6 and the LED 82 Are collectively illustrated as an input / output device 401.

Further, in FIG. 6, the hopper device 51 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 were connected to the cabinet side relay board 44, but in FIG. 162, the hopper device 51 is mainly controlled in addition to the cabinet side relay board 44. It is also connected to the board 71, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is connected to the main control board 71 instead of the cabinet side relay board 44.

Further, in FIG. 162, with respect to FIG. 6, the reel relay terminal plate 74 is shown separately as a first reel relay terminal plate 403L, a second reel relay terminal plate 403C, and a third reel relay terminal plate 403R.

In FIG. 6, the reel relay terminal board 74 was connected to the main control board 71, but in FIG. 162, the first reel relay terminal board 403L, the second reel relay terminal board 403C, and the third reel relay terminal board 403R Is connected to the cabinet-side relay board 44.

In FIG. 162, the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, which are not shown in FIG. 6, are shown as the first stepping motor 404L, the second stepping motor 404C, and the third stepping motor 404R.

Further, in FIG. 162, the sensors for detecting the reel indexes of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, which are not shown in FIG. 6, are the first index sensor 405L, the second index sensor 405C, and the third index sensor. It is illustrated as 405R.

Further, in FIG. 6, the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine connected to the door relay terminal plate 68 are shown, but the first interface for the testing machine in the present embodiment is shown. Since the board 301 and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine are connected to various boards as described in detail below, they are not shown in FIG. 162.

In FIG. 162, the first reel relay terminal plate 403L, the second reel relay terminal plate 403C, and the third reel relay terminal plate 403R each have connectors CN1 to CN3. The cabinet-side relay board 44 has connectors CN1 to CN5 and CN7 to CN8. The sub-relay board 61 has connectors CN2 and CN4. The door relay terminal plate 68 has connectors CN1, CN2, and CN12. The main control board 71 has connectors CN1 to CN4 and CN6.

Each connector CN1 of the first reel relay terminal board 403L, the second reel relay terminal board 403C, and the third reel relay terminal board 403R is connected to the connector CN7 of the cabinet side relay board 44 by a harness.

The connectors CN2 of the first reel relay terminal plate 403L, the second reel relay terminal plate 403C, and the third reel relay terminal plate 403R are harnesses for the first stepping motor 404L, the second stepping motor 404C, and the third stepping motor 404R, respectively. Connected by.

The connectors CN3 of the first reel relay terminal plate 403L, the second reel relay terminal plate 403C, and the third reel relay terminal plate 403R are harnessed to the first index sensor 405L, the second index sensor 405C, and the third index sensor 405R, respectively. Connected by.

The connector CN1 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 is connected to the connector CN3 of the main control board 71 by a harness. The connector CN2 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 is connected to the connector CN1 of the door relay terminal plate 68 by an optical fiber. The connector CN3 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 is connected to the hopper device 51 by a harness.

The connector CN4 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 is connected to the power supply device 53 by a power cable. The connector CN5 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 is connected to the connector CN1 of the door relay terminal plate 68 by a harness.

The connector CN8 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 is connected to the external centralized terminal board 47 by a harness. The connector CN7 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 is connected to each connector CN1 of the first reel relay terminal board 403L, the second reel relay terminal board 403C, and the third reel relay terminal board 403R by a harness.

The connector CN2 of the sub-relay board 61 is connected to the power supply device 53 by a power cable. The connector CN4 of the sub-relay board 61 is connected to the connector CN1 of the main control board 71 by an optical fiber.

The connector CN1 of the door relay terminal board 68 is connected to the connector CN5 of the cabinet side relay board 44 by a harness, and is connected to the connector CN2 of the cabinet side relay board 44 by an optical fiber. The connector CN2 of the door relay terminal plate 68 is connected to the connector CN2 of the main control board 71 by an optical fiber. The connector CN12 of the door relay terminal plate 68 is connected to the input / output device 401 by a harness.

The connector CN1 of the main control board 71 is connected to the connector CN4 of the sub-relay board 61 by an optical fiber. The connector CN2 of the main control board 71 is connected to the connector CN2 of the door relay terminal plate 68 by an optical fiber.

The connector CN3 of the main control board 71 is connected to the connector CN1 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 by a harness. The connector CN4 of the main control board 71 is connected to the setting key type switch 54 by a harness. The connector CN6 of the main control board 71 is connected to the hopper device 51 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 by a harness.

In the present embodiment, for example, the CN2 of the main control board 71 and the CN2 of the door relay board 68 are connected by using an optical fiber, but instead of the optical fiber, they are connected by using a harness or a coaxial cable. Is also possible.

In the present embodiment, the cabinet-side relay board 44 constitutes an equipment relay unit and a first relay board. The external centralized terminal board 47 constitutes an external output board and a first output device. The door relay terminal plate 68 constitutes an equipment relay unit, a second relay board, and a third relay board. The main control board 71 constitutes a main control unit. The reel relay terminal plate 74 constitutes an equipment relay unit and a second relay board. The input / output device 401 constitutes a second input device. The first to third stepping motors 404L, 404C, and 404R constitute an input / output device and a second output device. The first to third index sensors 405L, 405C, and 405R constitute an input / output device and a first input device.

<Connection during pachislot test>
As shown in FIG. 163, at the time of testing, the pachislot machine 1 has a first interface board 301 for a testing machine (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “IF1”) and a second interface board 302 for a testing machine (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “IF2”). ) Is connected to the testing machine 410.

The main control board 71 has a connector CN100 for connecting to IF1 and a connector CN101 for connecting to IF2. The connector CN100 and the connector 101 are not mounted on the release product for sale. The wiring patterns and through holes provided on the main control board 71 for mounting the connector CN100 and the connector 101 are left in the release product for sale.

IF1 has connectors CN1 to CN3 for connecting to connectors CN1 to CN3 of the testing machine 402, respectively. The IF2 has a connector CN1 for connecting to the connector CN4 of the testing machine 402. As described in detail below, the IF1 is connected to the door relay terminal board 68, the cabinet side relay board 44, the external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the reel relay terminal board 74, and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 164, IF1 has CN4 to CN14 in addition to connectors CN1 to CN3. The connector CN4 of IF1 is connected to the connector CN1 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 by a harness. The harness connecting the connector CN1 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 and the connector CN3 of the main control board 71 is removed.

The connector CN5 of IF1 is connected to the connector CN3 of the main control board 71 by a harness. The connector CN4 of IF1 and the connector CN5 are connected in IF1. Therefore, the IF1 is formed with a connection path between the connector CN1 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 and the connector CN3 of the main control board 71.

The connector CN6 of the IF1 is connected to the connector CN1 of the door relay terminal plate 68 by an optical fiber. The optical fiber connecting the connector CN1 of the door relay terminal plate 68 and the connector CN2 of the main control board 71 is removed.

The connector CN7 of IF1 is connected to the connector CN2 of the main control board 71 by an optical fiber. The connector CN6 and the connector CN7 of IF1 are connected in IF1. Therefore, the IF1 is formed with a connection path between the connector CN1 of the door relay terminal plate 68 and the connector CN2 of the main control board 71.

The connector CN8 of IF1 is connected to the hopper device 51 by a harness. The harness connecting the hopper device 51 and the connector CN3 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 is removed.

The connector CN9 of IF1 is connected to the connector CN3 of the cabinet side relay board 44 by a harness. The connector CN8 and the connector CN9 of IF1 are connected in IF1. Therefore, the IF1 is formed with a connection path between the hopper device 51 and the connector CN3 of the cabinet-side relay board 44.

The connector CN10 of IF1 is connected to the reel relay terminal plate 74 (each connector CN1 of the first reel relay terminal plate 403L, the second reel relay terminal plate 403C, and the third reel relay terminal plate 403R) by a harness. The harness connecting the reel relay terminal plate 74 and the connector CN7 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 is removed.

The connector CN11 of IF1 is connected to the connector CN7 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 by a harness. The connector CN10 and the connector CN11 of IF1 are connected in IF1. Therefore, the IF1 is formed with a connection path between the reel relay terminal plate 74 and the connector CN7 of the cabinet-side relay board 44.

The connector CN12 of IF1 is connected to the hopper device 51 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 by a harness. The harness connecting the hopper device 51, the medal auxiliary storage switch 75, and the connector CN6 of the main control board 71 is removed.

The connector CN13 of IF1 is connected to the connector CN6 of the main control board 71 by a harness. The connector CN12 and the connector CN13 of IF1 are connected in IF1. Therefore, the IF1 is formed with a connection path between the hopper device 51 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 and the connector CN6 of the main control board 71. The connector CN14 of IF1 is connected to the connector CN100 of the main control board 71 by a harness.

The harness of the selector 66, the BET switch 77, the start switch 79, and the stop switch board 80 is removed from the pachislot machine 1, and the testing machine 402 replaces the functions. Specifically, the signal output by the selector 66 is an on-switch signal, the signal output by the start switch 79 is a reel start switch signal, and the signal output by the stop switch board 80 is the first to third reels. It is a stop switch signal (see FIGS. 178 and 183).

In the present embodiment, IF1 constitutes a connection relay unit and a first connection relay unit. IF2 constitutes a connection relay unit and a second connection relay unit. The testing machine 402 constitutes a testing device.

<Signals input / output from each IF1 connector>
<< Signal connected to IF1 and Pachislot 1 >>
Hereinafter, signals input / output from each connector of IF1 will be described. In the following description, signals having the same name represent the same signal. Further, the description of the power supply terminal (DC + 5V, DC + 12V, etc.), the ground ground terminal (GND), the spare terminal, and the unused terminal (NC) will be omitted.

(IF1 connector CN6)
FIG. 165 shows a signal input to each terminal of the connector CN6 of IF1. An optical serial signal 3 (door relay board optical connector) is input to PIN1 of the connector CN6.

(IF1 connector CN7)
FIG. 166 shows signals output from each terminal of the connector CN7 of IF1. An optical serial signal 3 (main control board optical connector) is output from PIN1 of the connector CN7.

(IF1 connector CN5)
FIG. 167 shows a signal input to each terminal of the connector CN5 of IF1. A + Vram (backup power supply) for backing up the main RAM 103 is connected to PIN3 of the connector CN5. A serial signal 1 described later is input to PIN4 of the connector CN5. A medal payout device drive 1 signal and a medal payout device drive 2 signal for driving the hopper device 51 are input to PIN5 to PIN6 of the connector CN5, respectively.

The medal insertion signal indicating the insertion of medals output from the external centralized terminal plate 47, the medal payout signal indicating the withdrawal of medals, and the external signals 1 to 5 are input to PIN10 to PIN15 of the connector CN5, respectively.

(IF1 connector CN4)
FIG. 168 shows a signal output from each terminal of the connector CN4 of IF1. The serial signal 1 is output from PIN4 of the connector CN4. The medal payout device drive 1 signal and the medal payout device drive 2 signal are output from PIN5 to PIN6 of the connector CN4, respectively.

The PIN10 to PIN15 of the connector CN4 have a medal insertion signal (outer end game medal insertion signal), a medal payout signal (outer end game medal payout signal), and external signals 1 to external signals 5 output from the external centralized terminal plate 47. Are output respectively.

(IF1 connector CN9)
FIG. 169 shows a signal input to each terminal of the connector CN9 of IF1. A medal payout device drive 1 signal (payout request signal) and a medal payout device drive 2 signal are input to PIN1 and PIN2 of the connector CN9, respectively.

(IF1 connector CN8)
FIG. 170 shows a signal output from each terminal of the connector CN8 of IF1. The medal payout device drive 1 signal (payout request signal) and the medal payout device drive 2 signal are output from PIN1 and PIN2 of the connector CN8, respectively.

(IF1 connector CN11)
FIG. 171 shows signals input / output from each terminal of the connector CN11 of IF1. Motor signals 0-1 and motor signals 0-2, motor signals 0-3, and motor signals 0-4 for driving the first stepping motor 404L are input to PIN1 to PIN4 of the connector CN11, respectively. A motor index 0 signal (first reel index signal) indicating the state of the first index sensor 405L is output from PIN 7 of the connector CN11.

Motor signals 1-1, motor signals 1-2, motor signals 1-3, and motor signals 1-4 for driving the second stepping motor 404C are input to PIN9 to PIN12 of the connector CN11, respectively. A motor index 1 signal (second reel index signal) indicating the state of the second index sensor 405C is output from PIN 15 of the connector CN11.

Motor signals 2-1 and motor signals 2-2, motor signals 2-3, and motor signals 2-4 for driving the third stepping motor 404R are input to PIN17 to PIN20 of the connector CN11, respectively. A motor index 2 signal (third reel index signal) indicating the state of the third index sensor 405R is output from PIN23 of the connector CN11.

(IF1 connector CN10)
FIG. 172 shows signals input / output from each terminal of the connector CN10 of IF1. Motor signal 0-1 and motor signal 0-2, motor signal 0-3, and motor signal 0-4 are output from PIN1 to PIN4 of the connector CN10, respectively. A motor index 0 signal (first reel index signal) is input to PIN 7 of the connector CN10.

Motor signals 1-1, motor signals 1-2, motor signals 1-3, and motor signals 1-4 are input from PIN9 to PIN12 of the connector CN10, respectively. A motor index 1 signal (second reel index signal) is input to PIN15 of the connector CN10.

Motor signals 2-1 and motor signals 2-2, motor signals 2-3, and motor signals 2-4 are output from PIN17 to PIN20 of the connector CN10, respectively. A motor index 2 signal (third reel index signal) is input to PIN23 of the connector CN10.

The "motor signal 0-1 to motor signal 2-4" input / output by the connector CN9 of IF1 and the connector CN10 may be referred to as "excitation data 0-1 to excitation data 2-4".

(IF1 connector CN12)
FIG. 173 shows a signal input to each terminal of the connector CN12 of IF1. A medal auxiliary storage switch signal indicating the state of the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 for detecting the medal storage full state of the medal auxiliary storage 52 is input to PIN2 of the connector CN10. A medal payout count switch signal (payout count signal) indicating a state of a medal payout count switch (not shown) for detecting medals paid out from the hopper device 51 is input to PIN4 of the connector CN10.

(IF1 connector CN13)
FIG. 174 shows a signal output from each terminal of the connector CN13 of IF1. A medal auxiliary storage switch signal is output from PIN2 of the connector CN13. A medal payout count switch signal (payout count signal) is output from PIN4 of the connector CN13.

(IF1 connector CN14)
FIG. 175 shows a signal input to each terminal of the connector CN14 of IF1. Conditional devices (that is, internal winning combinations, etc.) or conditional devices 1 to 8 signals indicating the state of replay or replay state identification signals 1 to 8 are input to the PINs 1 to 8 of the connector CN14, respectively.

In the PIN12 of the connector CN14, a signal in the accessory continuous operation device related to the first-class special accessory indicating the operating state of the accessory continuous operation device (that is, the above-mentioned “BB”) related to the first-class special accessory is transmitted. Entered. A signal in the first-class special accessory indicating the operating state of the first-class special accessory (that is, the above-mentioned “RB”) is input to the PIN 13 of the connector CN14.

In the PIN14 of the connector CN14, a signal in the accessory continuous operation device related to the second type special accessory indicating the operating state of the accessory continuous operation device (that is, the above-mentioned “MB”) related to the second type special accessory is transmitted. Entered. A signal in the second type special accessory indicating the operating state of the second type special accessory (that is, the above-mentioned “CB”) is input to the PIN 15 of the connector CN14. A signal in the ordinary accessory indicating the operating state of the ordinary accessory (that is, the above-mentioned "SB") is input to the PIN 16 of the connector CN14.

Stop button signals (first to third reel stoptable lamp signals) indicating whether or not effective stop operation by the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are possible are input to PIN17 to PIN19 of the connector CN14, respectively. To. A charging request lamp signal indicating a driving state of a charging request lamp that is driven in a state in which medals can be inserted is input to PIN 21 of the connector CN14.

A startable lamp signal indicating a driving state of a startable lamp that is driven in a state in which an effective start operation of the game can be performed is input to PIN 22 of the connector CN14. A replaying signal indicating that the replaying is in progress is input to the PIN 21 of the connector CN14. A signal during the advantageous section indicating that the connector is in the advantageous section is input to the PIN 21 of the connector CN14.

The signal input to the connector CN14 of IF1 is a test-dedicated signal to be output to the testing machine generated in the test firing test signal control process (see FIG. 79) executed by the main CPU 101.

(IF1 connector CN1)
FIG. 176 shows a signal output from each terminal of the connector CN1 of IF1. A turn-on request lamp signal is output from PIN2 of the connector CN1. From PIN3 of the connector CN1, a signal in the accessory continuous operation device related to the first-class special accessory is output.

From PIN4 of the connector CN1, a signal in the accessory continuous operation device related to the second type special accessory is output. A normal accessory signal is output from PIN5 of the connector CN1. A signal during the advantageous section is output from PIN6 of the connector CN1.

A second reel stoptable lamp signal is output from PIN8 of the connector CN1. A payout request signal requesting the payout of medals is output from PIN 13 of the connector CN1. A stop release request signal is output from the PIN 14 of the connector CN1, but in the present embodiment, the PIN 14 of the connector CN1 is an unused terminal.

The second reel index signal is output from PIN15 of the connector CN1. A fourth reel index signal is output from the PIN 16 of the connector CN1, but in the present embodiment, the PIN 16 of the connector CN1 is an unused terminal.

An outer end game medal insertion signal is output from PIN17 of the connector CN1. An outer end game medal payout signal is output from PIN18 of the connector CN1. The condition devices 1, 3, 5, and 7 signals or the replay state identification signals 1, 3, 5, and 7 are output from PIN23 to PIN26 of the connector CN1, respectively.

A startable lamp signal is output from PIN36 of the connector CN1. A signal in the first-class special accessory is output from PIN37 of the connector CN1. From the PIN 38 of the connector CN1, a signal in the second type special accessory is output.

A signal during replay is output from PIN39 of the connector CN1. The first reel stoptable lamp signal is output from PIN41 of the connector CN1. A third reel stoptable lamp signal is output from PIN42 of the connector CN1.

A fifth reel stoptable lamp signal is output from the PIN43 of the connector CN1, but in the present embodiment, the PIN43 of the connector CN1 is an unused terminal. A payout count signal is output from PIN47 of the connector CN1.

The first reel index signal is output from PIN48 of the connector CN1. A third reel index signal is output from PIN49 of the connector CN1. A fifth reel index signal is output from the PIN50 of the connector CN1, but in the present embodiment, the PIN50 of the connector CN1 is an unused terminal. The condition devices 2, 4, 6, and 8 signals or the replay state identification signals 2, 4, 6, and 8 are output from PIN57 to PIN60 of the connector CN1, respectively.

(IF1 connector CN2)
FIG. 177 shows a signal output from each terminal of the connector CN2 of IF1. From PIN2 to PIN7 of the connector CN2, the first reel stepping motor phase A signal corresponding to the motor signals 0-1 and 0-2, 1-1, 1-2, 2-1 and 2-2, and the first reel stepping. The motor phase A inversion signal, the second reel stepping motor phase A signal, the second reel stepping motor phase A inversion signal, the third reel stepping motor phase A signal, and the third reel stepping motor phase A inversion signal are output, respectively.

From PIN8, PIN9, PIN13, and PIN14 of the connector CN2, the 4th reel stepping motor phase A signal, the 4th reel stepping motor phase A inversion signal, the 5th reel stepping motor phase A signal, and the 5th reel stepping motor phase A inversion signal. Is output, respectively, but in the present embodiment, PIN8, PIN9, PIN13, and PIN14 of the connector CN2 are unused terminals.

From PIN36 to PIN41 of the connector CN2, the first reel stepping motor phase B signal corresponding to the motor signals 0-3, 0-4, 1-3, 1-4, 2-3, 2-4, and the first reel stepping. The motor phase B inversion signal, the second reel stepping motor phase B signal, the second reel stepping motor phase B inversion signal, the third reel stepping motor phase B signal, and the third reel stepping motor phase B inversion signal are output, respectively.

From PIN42, PIN43, PIN47, and PIN48 of the connector CN2, the 4th reel stepping motor phase B signal, the 4th reel stepping motor phase B inversion signal, the 5th reel stepping motor phase B signal, and the 5th reel stepping motor phase B inversion signal. Is output, respectively, but in the present embodiment, PIN42, PIN43, PIN47, and PIN48 of the connector CN2 are unused terminals.

(IF1 connector CN3)
FIG. 178 shows a signal input to each terminal of the connector CN3 of IF1. The signal input to each terminal of the connector CN3 of IF1 is a signal generated by the testing machine 410 for testing the pachislot machine 1 without using a medal (game medium).

An input switch signal indicating that a medal is inserted is input to PIN3 of the connector CN3. A first reel stop switch signal indicating a stop operation for the reel 3L is input to PIN 14 of the connector CN3.

A third reel stop switch signal indicating a stop operation for the reel 3R is input to PIN15 of the connector CN3. A fifth reel stop switch signal indicating a stop operation for the fifth reel is input to the PIN 16 of the connector CN3, but in the present embodiment, the PIN 16 of the connector CN3 is an unused terminal.

A stop release switch signal indicating the release of the stop is input to PIN 17 of the connector CN3. A reel start switch signal indicating a game start operation is input to PIN47 of the connector CN3.

A second reel stop switch signal indicating a stop operation for the reel 3C is input to PIN48 of the connector CN3. A fourth reel stop switch signal indicating a stop operation for the fourth reel is input to the PIN 49 of the connector CN3, but in the present embodiment, the PIN 49 of the connector CN3 is an unused terminal.

A payout switch signal representing the payout of medals is input to PIN50 of the connector CN3. A insertion start switch signal indicating the start of insertion of medals is input to PIN 52 of the connector CN3.

<Signal output from connector CN1 of IF2>
FIG. 179 shows a signal output from each terminal of the connector CN1 of IF2. Each bit of the stop execution position signal indicating the stop position of the reel on which the stop operation has been performed is output from PIN2 to PIN6 and PIN36 to PIN40 of the connector CN1.

Each bit of the reel number signal representing the reel is output from PIN7, PIN8, and PIN41 of the connector CN1. A symbol stop signal STB (strobe) signal is output from PIN9 of the connector CN1. Each bit of the game control signal is output from PIN15, PIN16, PIN49, and PIN50 of the connector CN1. A game control signal selection signal (always OFF) is output from PIN17 of the connector CN1.

<First configuration of main control board and IF1>
As shown in FIG. 180, the main control board 71 has a gate circuit (hereinafter, GATE 1) for holding signals output from the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7 of the microprocessor 91 in addition to the microprocessor 91. ~ 3) and the connector CN100 are provided.

The GATE 1 to 3 and the connector CN100 are not mounted on the release product for sale, but the wiring pattern and the through hole provided on the main control board 71 for mounting the GATE 1 to 3 and the connector CN100 are for sale. Left in the release product. In the present embodiment, the GATEs 1 to 3 and the connector CN100 constitute a main control test signal output circuit.

The microprocessor 91 has data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7, port output / chip select terminals PO1 / XSC1 to PO3 / XSC3, and a reset terminal XRSTO. Each GATE 1 to 3 has a data input terminal D1 to D8, a signal output terminal Q1 to Q8, a clock terminal CK, and a reset terminal CLR. The GATEs 1 to 3 are composed of an integrated circuit (IC: Integrated Circuit) containing eight D flip-flops.

The data input terminals D1 to D8 of the GATEs 1 to 3 are connected to the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7 of the microprocessor 91, respectively. The clock terminal CK of GATE1 is connected to the port output / chip select terminal PO1 / XSC1 of the microprocessor 91, and the clock terminal CK of GATE2 is connected to the port output / chip select terminal PO2 / XSC2 of the microprocessor 91.

The clock terminal CK of the GATE 3 is connected to the port output / chip select terminal PO3 / XSC3 of the microprocessor 91. The reset terminal CLR of each GATE 1 to 3 is connected to the reset terminal XRSTO of the microprocessor 91.

Each GATE 1 to 3 converts the data input to the data input terminals D1 to D8 into a signal for output from the output terminals Q1 to Q8 by the enable signal input to the clock terminals CK, and signals output terminals Q1 to Q8. Output from. Each GATE 1 to 3 is reset by the reset signal output from the reset terminal XRSTO of the microprocessor 91.

The signal output terminals Q1 to Q8 of each GATE 1 to 3 are connected to the connector CN100. The microprocessor 91 selects GATE 1 at the port output / chip select terminal PO1 / XSC1 of the microprocessor 91, and from the signal output terminals Q1 to Q8 of GATE 1, the condition device 1 signal or the replay state identification signal 1, the condition device 2 signal, or Re-game state identification signal 2, condition device 3 signal or re-game state identification signal 3, condition device 4 signal or re-game state identification signal 4, condition device 5 signal or re-game state identification signal 5, condition device 6 signal or re-game The state identification signal 6, the condition device 7 signal or the replay state identification signal 7, the condition device 8 signal or the replay state identification signal 8 are output, respectively.

The microprocessor 91 selects GATE2 at the port output / chip select terminal PO2 / XSC2 of the microprocessor 91, and signals in the accessory continuous operation device related to the first-class special accessory from the signal output terminals Q4 to Q8 of GATE2. It outputs a type 1 special accessory medium signal, a type 2 special accessory medium signal, a type 2 special accessory medium signal, and a normal accessory medium signal, respectively.

The microprocessor 91 selects GATE3 at the port output / chip select terminal PO3 / XSC3 of the microprocessor 91, and stops button 1 signal, stop button 2 signal, and stop button 3 from the signal output terminals Q1 to Q3 and Q5 to Q8 of GATE3. A signal, an input request lamp signal, a startable lamp signal, a replaying signal, and an advantageous section signal are output respectively.

As described above, the connector CN100 of the main control board 71 is connected to the connector CN14 of IF1. The IF1 has a buffer circuit (hereinafter, BUF1 to 3) for buffering a signal input from the connector CN14. The BUFs 1 to 3 are composed of integrated circuits incorporating eight circuits of three-state buffers.

Each BUF1 to 3 has input terminals A1 to A8 and output terminals Y1 to Y8. Each input terminal A1 to A8 of each BUF1 to 3 is connected to the connector CN14 in a state of being individually pulled down via a resistor RL (resistor array).

Each BUF 1 to 3 waveform-shapes the signals input from the input terminals A1 to A8, and outputs the waveform-shaped signals from the output terminals Y1 to Y8. The output terminals Y1 to Y8 of the BUF1 to 3 are connected to the connector CN1.

The BUF 1 is a condition device 1 signal or a replay state identification signal 1, a condition device 2 signal or a replay state identification signal 2, a condition device 3 signal or a replay state identification signal 3, a condition device 4 signal, or a condition device 4 signal from the output terminals Y1 to Y8. Re-game state identification signal 4, condition device 5 signal or re-game state identification signal 5, condition device 6 signal or re-game state identification signal 6, condition device 7 signal or re-game state identification signal 7, condition device 8 signal or re-game The state identification signals 8 are output respectively.

The BUF2 is a signal from the output terminals Y4 to Y8 in the accessory continuous operation device related to the first-class special accessory, a signal in the first-class special accessory, a signal in the accessory continuous operation device related to the second-class special accessory, It outputs a type 2 special character medium signal and a normal character medium signal, respectively.

The BUF3 outputs a stop button 1 signal, a stop button 2 signal, a stop button 3 signal, a turn-on request lamp signal, a startable lamp signal, a replaying signal, and an advantageous section signal from the output terminals Y1 to Y3 and Y5 to Y8, respectively. To do.

<Second configuration of main control board and IF1>
As shown in FIG. 181, the main control board 71 has, in addition to the microprocessor 91, a port input / output IC 411 and a buffer (hereinafter, BUF1) for buffering signals output from the port input / output IC 411.

The microprocessor 91 has an address bus I / F terminals A0 to A7, a data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7, and a backup power supply terminal VBB. The backup power supply terminal VBB is connected to the connector CN3 and supplies backup power to the main RAM 103.

The port input / output IC 411 is composed of, for example, an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit) or the like, and includes input / output terminals IO0 to IO31, serial output terminals SCO, serial input terminals SCI, and address bus I / F terminals A0 to A7. , Data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7.

The unused input / output terminal IO of the port input / output IC 411 is not shown. However, since the input / output terminals IO8 and IO9 are shown in FIG. 183, they are not unused terminals.

Further, in the figure, the reference numerals attached to the input / output terminals of the port input / output IC 411 in parentheses indicate whether each terminal is an input terminal or an output terminal, and if it is an input terminal, "I" is added. If it is an output terminal, "O" is attached.

The address bus I / F terminals A0 to A7 of the port input / output IC 411 are connected to the address bus I / F terminals A0 to A7 of the microprocessor 91, respectively. The data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7 of the port input / output IC 411 are connected to the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7 of the microprocessor 91, respectively.

The input terminals A1 to A7 of the BUF1 are connected to the input / output terminals IO0 to IO6 of the port input / output IC 411, respectively. The gate terminal G2 of the BUF1 is connected to the input / output terminal IO7 of the port input / output IC 411 via the Schmitt trigger inverter S.

The port input / output IC 411 has a data storage area (not shown) that is accessed by the microprocessor 91 as an XCS decoding area (see FIG. 11A) and is output to each output device controlled by the microprocessor 91. The port input / output IC 411 writes the data set in the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7 in the area indicated by the address specified in the address bus I / F terminals A0 to A7 in the data storage area.

The port input / output IC 411 has, for example, a master circuit of a serial bus interface such as I2C. The port input / output IC 411 generates a serial signal 1 including the data stored in the data storage area and the address of the slave circuit for transmitting and receiving each data, and outputs the generated serial signal 1 from the serial output terminal SCO. The serial output terminal SCO of the port input / output IC 411 is connected to the connector CN3 via the Schmitt trigger inverter S.

Further, the port input / output IC 411 outputs the data stored in the area indicated by the address specified in the address bus I / F terminals A0 to A7 from the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7 in the data storage area.

The port input / output IC 411 outputs a signal representing the data to be output from the connector CN3 from the data stored in the data storage area from the input / output terminals IO0 to IO6 to BUF1, and outputs the gate signal of BUF1 from the input / output terminal IO7. To do.

The BUF1 has input terminals A1 to A8, output terminals Y1 to Y8, and a gate terminal G2. The BUF1 waveform-shapes the signals input to the input terminals A1 to A8 according to the gate signal input from the gate terminals G2, and outputs the waveform-shaped signals from the output terminals Y1 to Y8.

Each output terminal Y1 to Y7 of the BUF1 is connected to the connector CN3 via a low-side drive switch TR for connecting to a relay arranged on the external centralized terminal plate 47. The BUF1 outputs a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, an external signal 1, an external signal 2, an external signal 3, an external signal 4, and an external signal 5 (security signal) from the output terminals Y1 to Y7, respectively.

As described above, the connector CN3 of the main control board 71 is connected to the connector CN5 of IF1. The IF1 outputs the serial signal 1 input from the connector CN5 to the connector CN4 via the Schmitt trigger S.

The IF1 outputs a signal other than the serial signal 1 input from the connector CN5 to the connector CN4. The IF1 outputs a part of signals (medal insertion signal and medal payout signal) other than the serial signal 1 input from the connector CN5 to the connector CN1 via the Schmitt trigger S.

Specifically, each output device controlled by the microprocessor 91 corresponds to, for example, reels 3L to 3R, an external centralized terminal board 47, a game operation display board 81, a selector 66, a hopper device 51, and the like. The microprocessor 91 outputs the output data of each output device to the port input / output IC 411 via the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7, and the port input / output IC 411 stores the output data in the data storage area and then serializes it. Outputs the output data stored in the data storage area via the output terminal SCO.

<Cabinet side relay board, IF1 and reel relay terminal board>
As shown in FIG. 182, the cabinet-side relay board 44 has a port input / output IC 412 and a driver circuit (hereinafter, DRIVER 1 to 4) that generates a drive circuit from a signal output from the port input / output IC 412. The terminals to which the external signals 1 to 5 of the connector CN1 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 are input are connected to the connector CN8 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 (external centralized terminal board 47).

The port input / output IC 412 is configured by an ASIC or the like like the port input / output IC 411 of the main control board 71, and has a serial input terminal SCI, a serial output terminal SCO, and input / output terminals IO0 to IO31. The unused input / output terminal IO of the port input / output IC 412 is not shown.

In the figure, the reference numerals attached to the input / output terminals of the port input / output IC 412 in parentheses indicate whether each terminal is an input terminal or an output terminal, and if it is an input terminal, "I" is added. If it is an output terminal, "O" is attached.

The serial input terminal SCI of the port input / output IC 412 is connected to the connector CN1 of the cabinet-side relay board 44. The port input / output IC 412 has a slave circuit of a serial bus interface.

The port input / output IC 412 acquires a control signal for the first stepping motor 404L from the serial signal 1 input from the serial input terminal SCI, and outputs the acquired control signal from the input / output terminals IO0 to IO3.

The port input / output IC 412 acquires a control signal for the second stepping motor 404C from the serial signal 1 input from the serial input terminal SCI, and outputs the acquired control signal from the input / output terminals IO8 to IO11.

The port input / output IC 412 acquires a control signal for the third stepping motor 404R from the serial signal 1 input from the serial input terminal SCI, and outputs the acquired control signal from the input / output terminals IO16 to IO19.

The port input / output IC 412 acquires a control signal for the hopper device 51 from the serial signal 1 input from the serial input terminal SCI, and outputs the acquired control signal from the input / output terminals IO27 and IO28.

The input / output terminals IO24 to IO26 of the port input / output IC412 have a motor index 0 signal indicating the state of the first index sensor 405L, a motor index 1 signal indicating the state of the second index sensor 405C, and a state of the third index sensor 405R. The represented motor index 2 signal is input from the connector CN7 of the cabinet side relay board 44, respectively.

The port input / output IC 412 outputs a serial signal 2 from the serial output terminal SCO, which is obtained by adding the data represented by the signals input from the input / output terminals IO24 to IO26 to the data represented by the serial signal 1 input from the serial input terminal SCI. The serial output terminal SCO of the port input / output IC 412 is connected to the connector CN2 of the cabinet-side relay board 44.

Each DRIVER1 to 4 has input terminals INA1, INA2, INB1, INB2, and output terminals OUTA +, OUTA−, OUTB +, and OUTB−.

The input terminals INA1, INA2, INB1 and INB2 of DRIVER1 are connected to the input / output terminals IO0 to IO3 of the port input / output IC412. The DRIVER1 is a drive signal for driving the first stepping motor 404L based on the drive data represented by the control signals input from the input terminals INA1, INA2, INB1 and INB2 (motor signals 0-1 to motor signals 0-4). Is generated, and the generated drive signal is output from the output terminals OUTA +, OUTA−, OUTB +, and OUTB−. The input / output terminals OUTA +, OUTA−, OUTB +, and OUTB− of the DRIVER1 are connected to the connector CN7 of the cabinet-side relay board 44.

The input terminals INA1, INA2, INB1 and INB2 of the DRIVER2 are connected to the input / output terminals IO8 to IO11 of the port input / output IC412. The DRIVER2 is a drive signal for driving the second stepping motor 404C based on the drive data represented by the control signals input from the input terminals INA1, INA2, INB1 and INB2 (motor signals 1-1 to motor signals 1-4). Is generated, and the generated drive signal is output from the output terminals OUTA +, OUTA−, OUTB +, and OUTB−. The output terminals OUTA +, OUTA−, OUTB +, and OUTB− of the DRIVER2 are connected to the connector CN7 of the cabinet-side relay board 44.

The input terminals INA1, INA2, INB1 and INB2 of the DRIVER3 are connected to the input / output terminals IO16 to IO19 of the port input / output IC412. The DRIVER3 is a drive signal for driving the third stepping motor 404R based on the drive data represented by the control signals input from the input terminals INA1, INA2, INB1, and INB2 (motor signals 2-1 to motor signals 2-4). Is generated, and the generated drive signal is output from the output terminals OUTA +, OUTA−, OUTB +, and OUTB−. The output terminals OUTA +, OUTA−, OUTB +, and OUTB− of the DRIVER 3 are connected to the connector CN7 of the cabinet-side relay board 44.

The input terminals INA1 and INA2 of the DRIVER4 are connected to the input / output terminals IO27 to IO28 of the port input / output IC412. The DRIVER 4 generates and generates drive signals (hopper device drive signal 1, hopper device drive signal 2) for driving the hopper device 51 based on the drive data represented by the control signals input from the input terminals INA1 and INA2. The drive signal is output from the output terminals OUTA +, OUTA−, OUTB +, and OUTB−. The output terminals OUTA +, OUTA−, OUTB +, and OUTB− of the DRIVER4 are connected to the connector CN3 of the cabinet-side relay board 44.

As described above, the connector CN7 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 is connected to the connector CN11 of IF1, and the connector CN3 of the cabinet-side relay board 44 is connected to the connector CN9 of IF1. The IF1 has a buffer (hereinafter, BUF4) for buffering a signal output to the connector CN1.

Each terminal of the IF1 connector CN11 to which a drive signal for driving the first stepping motor 404L, the second stepping motor 404C, and the third stepping motor 404R is input is connected to the IF1 connector CN10.

Each terminal of the IF1 connector CN10 to which the motor index 0 signal, the motor index 1 signal, and the motor index 3 signal are input is connected to the connector CN11 of the IF1. Each terminal of the connector CN9 of IF1 to which a drive signal for driving the hopper device 51 is input is connected to the connector CN8 of IF1.

The BUF4 has input terminals A1 to A8 and output terminals Y1 to Y8. The input terminals A1 to A3 of the BUF4 are connected to each terminal of the connector CN10 of IF1 to which the motor index 0 signal, the motor index 1 signal, and the motor index 3 signal are input.

The input terminal A4 of the BUF4 is connected to one of the terminals of the connector CN9 of the IF1 (the input terminal of the hopper device drive signal 1) to which the drive signal for driving the hopper device 51 is input.

The BUF4 waveform-shapes the signals input to the input terminals A1 to A4, and outputs the waveform-shaped signals from the output terminals Y1 to Y4. The BUF4 outputs the first reel index signal, the second reel index signal, the third reel index signal, and the payout request signal from the output terminals Y1 to Y4, respectively. The output terminals Y1 to Y4 of the BUF4 are connected to the connector CN1 of the IF1.

As described above, the connector CN10 of IF1 is connected to each connector CN1 of the first reel relay terminal plate 403L, the second reel relay terminal plate 403C, and the third reel relay terminal plate 403R.

A drive signal for driving the first stepping motor 404L is input to the connector CN1 of the first reel relay terminal plate 403L from the connector CN10 of the IF1 to the connector CN1 of the first reel relay terminal plate 403L to the connector CN of the IF1. Is input with a motor index 0 signal.

A drive signal for driving the second stepping motor 404C is input from the connector CN10 of the IF1 to the connector CN1 of the second reel relay terminal plate 403C, and from the connector CN1 of the second reel relay terminal plate 403C to the connector CN of the IF1. Is input with a motor index 1 signal.

A drive signal for driving the third stepping motor 404R is input from the connector CN10 of the IF1 to the connector CN1 of the third reel relay terminal plate 403R, and from the connector CN1 of the third reel relay terminal plate 403R to the connector CN of the IF1. Is input with a motor index 2 signal.

<Structure of door relay terminal board, IF1 and main control board>
As shown in FIG. 183, the door relay terminal plate 68 has a port input / output IC 413. Like the port input / output IC 413 and the port input / output IC 411 of the main control board 71, it is composed of an ASIC or the like, and has a serial input terminal SCI, a serial output terminal SCO, and input / output terminals IO0 to IO31. The unused input / output terminal IO of the port input / output IC 413 is not shown.

The serial input terminal SCI of the port input / output IC 413 is connected to the connector CN1 of the door relay terminal plate 68. The port input / output IC 413 has a slave circuit of the serial bus interface.

The port input / output IC 413 includes an input switch signal, a 1st to 3rd reel stop switch signal, a stop release switch signal, etc. input from an input / output terminal (not shown) to the data represented by the serial signal 2 input from the serial input terminal SCI. The serial signal 3 to which the data represented by is added is output from the serial output terminal SCO.

However, at the time of testing the pachi-slot machine 1, as described above, the on-off switch signal, the first to third reel stop switch signals, the stop release switch signal, and the like are generated by the testing machine 410 for testing the pachi-slot machine 1. Therefore, during the pachislot 1 test, the port input / output IC 413 outputs the serial signal 2 input from the serial input terminal SCI from the serial output terminal SCO. The serial output terminal SCO of the port input / output IC 413 is connected to the connector CN2 of the door relay terminal plate 68.

As described above, the connector CN2 of the door relay terminal plate 68 is connected to the connector CN6 of the IF1. IF1 has a port input / output IC 414, a port input / output IC 415, and a buffer (hereinafter, BUF 5 to 7).

The port input / output IC 414 is composed of an ASIC or the like like the port input / output IC 411 of the main control board 71, and includes a serial input terminal SCI, a serial output terminal SCO, input / output terminals IO0 to IO31, and a pulse generation circuit 416. Has. The unused input / output terminal IO of the port input / output IC 414 is not shown.

The port input / output IC 415 is composed of an ASIC or the like, like the port input / output IC 411 of the main control board 71, and has a serial input terminal SCI, a serial output terminal SCO, and input / output terminals IO0 to IO31. The unused input / output terminal IO of the port input / output IC 415 is not shown.

In the figure, the reference numerals attached to the input / output terminals of the port input / output IC 414 and the port input / output IC 415 in parentheses indicate whether each terminal is an input terminal or an output terminal, and when it is an input terminal. Is attached with "I", and "O" is attached when it is an output terminal.

The serial input terminal SCI of the port input / output IC 414 is connected to the connector CN6 of IF1. The port input / output IC 414 has a slave circuit of a serial bus interface.

The port input / output IC 414 is a serial signal 1 to a first stepping motor 404L, a second stepping motor 404C, and a third stepping motor 404R drive signal (first reel stepping motor phase A signal, first reel) input from the serial input terminal SCI. Stepping motor phase A inversion signal, 1st reel stepping motor phase B signal, 1st reel stepping motor phase B inversion signal, 2nd reel stepping motor phase A signal, 2nd reel stepping motor phase A inversion signal, 2nd reel stepping motor Phase B signal, 2nd reel stepping motor phase B inversion signal, 3rd reel stepping motor phase A signal, 3rd reel stepping motor phase A inversion signal, 3rd reel stepping motor phase B signal, 3rd reel stepping motor phase B inversion (Signal) is acquired, and the acquired drive signal is output from the input / output terminals IO0 to IO11, respectively.

Therefore, each input / output terminal IO0 to IO3 of the port input / output IC412 and each input / output terminal IO0 to IO3 of the port input / output IC 414 output each drive (excitation) signal of the same stepping motor. The input / output terminals IO8 to IO11 of the port input / output IC412 and the input / output terminals IO4 to IO7 of the port input / output IC 414 output each drive (excitation) signal of the same stepping motor. The input / output terminals IO16 to IO19 of the port input / output IC412 and the input / output terminals IO8 to IO1 of the port input / output IC 414 output each drive (excitation) signal of the same stepping motor.

The serial input terminal SCI of the port input / output IC 415 is connected to the serial output terminal SCO of the port input / output IC 414. The port input / output IC 415 has a slave circuit of the serial bus interface.

The input / output terminals IO0 to IO8 of the port input / output IC415 have a medal insertion switch 1 signal, a medal insertion switch 2 signal, a medal passage switch 2 signal, a start lever signal (reel start switch signal), and a stop button input 1st reel signal ( 1st reel stop switch signal), stop button input 2nd reel signal (2nd reel stop switch signal), stop button input 3rd reel signal (3rd reel stop switch signal), error release switch signal (stop release switch signal) , The payout count signal (payout switch signal) is input from BUF5, respectively.

The port input / output IC 415 outputs a serial signal 3 from the serial output terminal SCO, which is obtained by adding the data represented by the signals input from the input / output terminals IO0 to IO8 to the data represented by the serial signal 2 input from the serial input terminal SCI. The serial output terminal SCO of the port input / output IC 415 is connected to the connector CN7 of IF1.

Each BUF 5-7 has input terminals A1 to A8 and output terminals Y1 to Y8. Each BUF 5 to 7 waveform-shapes the signal input to each input terminal A1 to A8, and outputs the waveform-shaped signal from each output terminal Y1 to Y8.

The input terminals A1 to A8 of the BUF5 are connected to the input / output terminals IO0 to IO7 of the port input / output IC 414. Each output terminal Y1 to Y8 of the BUF5 is connected to the connector CN2 of the IF1.

The input terminals A1 to A4 of the BUF 6 are connected to the input / output terminals IO8 to IO11 of the port input / output IC 414. Each output terminal Y1 to Y4 of the BUF 6 is connected to the connector CN2 of the IF1.

Each input terminal A1 to A7 of BUF7 is connected to the connector CN3 of IF1. Input terminals A1 to A7 of BUF7 have an on switch signal, a reel start switch signal, a first reel stop switch signal, a second reel stop switch signal, a third reel stop switch signal, a stop release switch signal, and a payout switch signal, respectively. Entered.

The output terminal Y1 of the BUF 7 is connected to the input side of the pulse generation circuit 416. The output terminals Y2 to Y7 of the BUF 7 are connected to the input / output terminals IO2 to IO8 of the port input / output IC 415.

The pulse generation circuit 416 uses the input switch signal output from the output terminal Y1 of the BUF 7 to replace the selector 66 with the medal insertion switch 1 signal (upstream medal sensor 806) and the medal insertion switch 2 signal (downstream medal sensor 807). ), Medal pass switch 2 signal (not shown) is generated. The output side of the pulse generation circuit 416 is connected to the input / output terminals IO0 to IO2 of the port input / output IC 415.

That is, the pulse generation circuit 416 is not merely a circuit for generating a pulse, but a circuit for reproducing a state in which a medal is actually inserted from the medal insertion port 14 from an input switch signal output by the testing machine. The pulse generation circuit 416 makes it possible to perform the test without actually inserting medals.

The terminal to which the medal payout count switch signal and the medal auxiliary storage switch signal of the IF1 connector CN12 are input is connected to the IF1 connector CN13. The terminal to which the medal payout count switch signal of the connector CN12 of IF1 is input and the payout of the connector CN3 of IF1 so that the signal input to the input terminal A7 of BUF7 can be used as the medal payout count switch signal. The terminal to which the switch signal is input is connected.

As described above, the connector CN7 of IF1 is connected to the connector CN2 of the main control board 71, and the connector CN13 of IF1 is connected to the connector CN6 of the main control board 71. Further, as described above, the main control board 71 has a port input / output IC 411.

The serial input terminal SCI of the port input / output IC 411 is connected to the connector CN3. Each input / output terminal IO8 to IO9 is connected to the connector CN6.

The port input / output IC 411 stores the above-mentioned data with the serial signal 3 input from the serial input terminal SCI, the medal payout count switch signal input from each input / output terminal IO8 to IO9, and the data represented by the medal auxiliary storage switch signal. Update the corresponding area of the area.

The microprocessor 91 (see FIG. 181) transfers the data updated from the data storage area to the data bus I / F of the port input / output IC 411 by designating the address to the address bus I / F terminals A0 to A7 of the port input / output IC 411. The game is advanced by acquiring from terminals D0 to D7.

<Configuration of main control board and IF2>
As shown in FIG. 184, the microprocessor 91 has a serial output terminal TX2 for testing. The serial output terminal TX2 is connected to the connector CN101. The connector CN101 is not mounted on the release product for sale, but the wiring pattern and through holes provided on the main control board 71 for mounting the connector CN101 are left on the release product for sale. In this embodiment, the connector CN101 constitutes a main control test signal output circuit.

The microprocessor 91 generates a serial signal representing a signal output from each terminal of the connector CN1 of the IF2 described with reference to FIG. 179, and outputs the generated serial signal from the serial output terminal TX2.

For example, in the microprocessor 91, a test program stored in the non-standard ROM area (see FIG. 11B) of the main ROM 102 executes processing using the non-standard RAM area (see FIG. 11C) of the main RAM 103. Generates a serial signal to be output from the output terminal TX2.

In the present embodiment, the microprocessor 91 is described as outputting a serial signal conforming to a serial communication standard such as I2C from the output terminal TX2, but a plurality of signals output from the output terminal TX2 of the microprocessor 91 are described. If the information is a coded signal, it is a serial signal compliant with other serial communication standards such as SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), serial ATA (Advanced Technology Attachment), and PCI Express (Peripheral Component Interconnect Express). It does not have to be a serial signal.

As described above, the connector CN101 of the main control board 71 is connected to the connector CN2 of the IF2. IF2 includes a host controller 417, chip selector circuits (hereinafter, CS1, 2), and gate circuits (hereinafter, GATE 1 to 5).

The host controller 417 includes a serial input terminal SCI, data bus I / F terminals D0 to D15, address bus I / F terminals A0 to A15 (A3 to A15 are not shown), a chip select terminal CS, and a write terminal. It has WR0 and WR1. The serial input terminal SCI of the host controller 417 is connected to the connector CN2.

The host controller 417 outputs a signal from the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D15 based on the serial signal input to the serial input terminal SCI. Here, the host controller 417 outputs the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D15 according to the signals output from the address bus I / F terminals A0 to A2, the chip select terminal CS, and the write terminals WR0 and WR1. Is selected from GATE 1-5.

When the host controller 417 outputs 1-byte data acquired from the serial signal input to the serial input terminal SCI to GATE 1, the host controller 417 is turned on level (for example, Low level) from each address bus I / F terminals A0 to A2. Is output, the enable level (for example, Low level) signal is output from the write terminal WR0, and the disable level (for example, High level) signal is output from the write terminal WR1. It outputs from the bus I / F output terminals D8 to D15, and outputs an enable level signal from the chip select terminal CS.

When the host controller 417 outputs 1-byte data acquired from the serial signal input to the serial input terminal SCI to GATE2, the host controller 417 outputs an on-level signal from each address bus I / F terminals A0 to A2. With the disable level signal output from the write terminal WR0 and the enable level signal output from the write terminal WR1, the acquired data is output from the data bus I / F output terminals D8 to D15, and from the chip select terminal CS. Outputs an enable level signal.

When the host controller 417 outputs 1-byte data acquired from the serial signal input to the serial input terminal SCI to GATE 3, the host controller 417 outputs an off-level (for example, High level) signal from the address bus I / F terminal A0. Output, output the on-level from the address bus I / F terminals A1 to A2, output the disable level signal from the write terminal WR1, and output the acquired data from the data bus I / F output terminals D8 to D15. Then, the enable level signal is output from the chip select terminal CS.

When the host controller 417 outputs 1-byte data acquired from the serial signal input to the serial input terminal SCI to GATE 4, it outputs an off-level signal from the address bus I / F terminal A0 and outputs the off-level signal to the address bus I. The acquired data is output to the data bus I / F with the on-level output from the / F terminals A1 and A2, the disable level signal output from the write terminal WR0, and the enable level signal output from the write terminal WR1. Output is output from terminals D8 to D15, and an enable level signal is output from the chip select terminal CS.

When the host controller 417 outputs 1-byte data acquired from the serial signal input to the serial input terminal SCI to the GATE 5, it outputs an off-level signal from the address bus I / F terminal A1 and outputs the off-level signal to the address bus I. With the on-level output from the / F terminals A0 and A2 and the disable level signal output from the write terminal WR1, the acquired data is output from the data bus I / F output terminals D8 to D15, and the chip select terminal CS Outputs the enable level signal from.

Each CS1, 2 has select terminals A, B, C, gate terminals G2A, G2B, and output terminals Y0 to Y2. The select terminals A, B, C and the gate terminal G2A of the CS1 and 2 are connected to the address bus I / F terminals A0 to A2 and the chip select terminal CS of the host controller 417, respectively.

The gate terminal G2B of CS1 is connected to the write terminal WR0 of the host controller 417. The gate terminal G2B of CS2 is connected to the write terminal WR1 of the host controller 417.

Each CS1 and 2 is one of the output terminals Y0 to Y2 according to the selection signal input to the select terminals A, B, and C if the signals input to the gate terminals G2A and G2B are both at the enable level. The valid signal is output from the output terminal, and the invalid signal is output from the other output terminals. Each CS1 and 2 outputs an invalid signal from all the terminals of the output terminals Y0 to Y2 if any of the signals input to the gate terminals G2A and G2B is disabled level.

Each GATE 1 to 5 has a data input terminal D1 to D8, a signal output terminal Q1 to Q8, a clock terminal CK, and a reset terminal CLR. The GATEs 1 to 5 are composed of an integrated circuit (IC: Integrated Circuit) containing eight D flip-flops.

The data input terminals D1 to D8 of GATE1 are connected to the data bus I / F terminals D15, D14, D13, D12, D11, D10, D9, and D8 of the host controller 417, respectively. The clock terminal CK of GATE1 is connected to the output terminal Y0 of CS1.

The data input terminals D1 to D8 of the GATE 2 are connected to the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7 of the host controller 417, respectively. The clock terminal CK of GATE2 is connected to the output terminal Y0 of CS2.

The data input terminals D1 to D8 of the GATE 3 are connected to the data bus I / F terminals D15, D14, D13, D12, D11, D10, D9, and D8 of the host controller 417, respectively. The clock terminal CK of GATE 3 is connected to the output terminal Y1 of CS1.

The data input terminals D1 to D8 of the GATE 4 are connected to the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7 of the host controller 417, respectively. The clock terminal CK of GATE 4 is connected to the output terminal Y1 of CS2.

The data input terminals D1 to D8 of the GATE 5 are connected to the data bus I / F terminals D15, D14, D13, D12, D11, D10, D9, and D8 of the host controller 417, respectively. The clock terminal CK of GATE 5 is connected to the output terminal Y2 of CS0.

Each GATE 1 to 5 converts the data input to the data input terminals D1 to D8 into a signal to be output from the signal output terminals Q1 to Q8 by the enable signal input to the clock terminals CK, and from the signal output terminals Q1 to Q8. Output. Further, each GATE 1 to 5 is reset by a reset signal input to the reset terminal CLR. The signal output terminals Q1 to Q8 of the GATEs 1 to 5 are connected to the PINs (see FIG. 179) of the connector CN1 so as to be associated with the numbers 1 to 68 in the figure.

The GATE 1 has a stop execution position signal bit 0, a stop execution position signal bit 2, a stop execution position signal bit 4, a stop execution position signal bit 6, a stop execution position signal bit 8, and a rotation number signal bit from the signal output terminals Q1 to Q8. 0, the rotation number signal bit 2, and the symbol stop signal STB signal are output respectively.

GATE2 has a stop execution position signal bit 1, a stop execution position signal bit 3, a stop execution position signal bit 5, a stop execution position signal bit 7, a stop execution position signal bit 9, and a rotation number signal bit from the signal output terminals Q1 to Q7. 1. The symbol stop signal error detection signal is output, and the other signal output terminals are spares, so that signals can be output as needed.

The GATE 3 outputs the game control signal bit 0, the game control signal bit 2, and the game control signal selection signal from the signal output terminals Q3 to Q5, respectively, and the other signal output terminals are spares and can output signals as needed. It has become.

The GATE 4 outputs the game control signal bit 1, the game control signal bit 3, and the game control signal STB signal from the signal output terminals Q3 to Q5, respectively, and the other signal output terminals are spares. The GATE 5 also has each signal output terminal. Is a spare and can output signals as needed.

<Circuit dedicated to testing>
In this embodiment, although not shown, a broken line is printed by silk printing on the component mounting surface of the actual main control board 71 in order to identify that the GATE 1-3, the connectors CN100, the CN101, etc. are circuits dedicated to the test. Has been done. The printed dashed line surrounds the test-dedicated circuit, or if the test-dedicated circuit is mounted on either the top, bottom, left, or right side of the main control board 71, it should be surrounded by a U-shape. It is printed.

The broken line printed on the component mounting surface of the main control board 71 may be a broken line surrounding the GATEs 1 to 3 and the connectors CN100 and CN101, or may be a broken line surrounding the GATEs 1 to 3 and the connectors CN100 and the CN101 separately.

Specifically, a wiring pattern of a circuit dedicated to the test in which the GATEs 1 to 3 and the connectors CN100 and CN101 are arranged is provided on the right side of the main control board 71, and a broken line is printed so as to be surrounded by a square or U shape. Also, the wiring pattern of the circuit dedicated to the test of GATE 1 to 3 and the connector CN100 is provided on the right side of the main control board 71, and the wiring pattern of the circuit dedicated to the test of the connector CN101 is provided on the left side of the main control board 71. A broken line may be printed so as to be surrounded by a square or U shape.

The electronic components (CPU, lC, resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc.) mounted on the main control board 71 constituting the main control circuit 90 are all electronic components for through-hole mounting, but are dedicated to testing. Since the circuit can use electronic components for surface mounting, the wiring pattern of the circuit dedicated to the test can be a wiring pattern for through-hole mounting and / or surface mounting.

<Signal output from IF1 to the testing machine>
FIGS. 185 to 195 are timing charts showing illogical timings controlled in the ON state or OFF state of some of the control signals input / output from CN1 to CN3 of IF1. In each timing chart, the OFF state of each signal is shown on the upper side, and the ON state is shown on the lower side.

(1) ON timing of the input request lamp signal As shown in FIG. 185, the input request lamp signal output from the connector CN1 of IF1 to the testing machine 402 is when the payout request signal or the replaying signal is ON. It is controlled by the microprocessor 91 so that the payout request signal or the replaying signal is turned on after being turned off.

(2) OFF Timing of Turn-on Request Lamp Signal As shown in FIG. 186, the number of turn-on request lamp signals output from the connector CN1 of IF1 to the testing machine 402 has reached a specified number by the turn-on switch signal (connector 3 of IF1). It is controlled by the microprocessor 91 so that it is turned off after the time (t1) and before the on-switch signal is turned off (t2).

Further, as shown in FIG. 187, the input request lamp signal output from the connector CN1 of IF1 to the testing machine 402 is when the reel start switch signal (connector 3 of IF1) is turned ON and the game medium cannot be input ( t3), it is controlled by the microprocessor 91 so that it is turned off.

(3) ON timing of the signal in the continuous operation device of the first-class special accessory As shown in FIG. 188, the accessory related to the first-class special accessory output from the connector CN1 of IF1 to the testing machine 402. The signal during the continuous operation device is turned on by the timing (t5) when the input request lamp signal for the game in which the accessory continuous operation device for the first-class special accessory is activated is turned ON after all reels are stopped (t4). As controlled by the microprocessor 91.

(4) OFF timing of the signal in the continuous operation device of the first-class special accessory As shown in FIG. 189, the accessory related to the first-class special accessory output from the connector CN1 of IF1 to the testing machine 402. As for the signal during the continuous operation device, the input request lamp signal for the next game is turned on from the timing (t6) when the payout request signal for the game in which the accessory continuous operation device related to the first-class special accessory is finished is turned off. It is controlled by the microprocessor 91 so that it is turned off by the timing (t7).

(5) ON timing of the signal in the continuous operation device of the second-class special accessory As shown in FIG. 190, the accessory related to the second-class special accessory output from the connector CN1 of IF1 to the testing machine 402. The signal during the continuous operation device is turned on after all reels are stopped (t8) and by the timing (t9) when the input request lamp signal for the game in which the accessory continuous operation device for the second type special accessory is activated is turned ON. As controlled by the microprocessor 91. Further, during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device related to the type 2 special accessory, the microprocessor 91 is controlled so that the signal in the accessory continuous operation device related to the type 2 special accessory is always ON.

(6) OFF timing of the signal in the continuous operation device for the second-class special accessory As shown in FIG. 191, the accessory related to the second-class special accessory output from the connector CN1 of IF1 to the testing machine 402. The signal during the continuous operation device is the timing when the payout request signal for the game in which the accessory continuous operation device related to the second type special accessory is finished is turned off (t10), and the timing when the input request lamp signal for the next game is turned on. It is controlled by the microprocessor 91 so that it is turned off by (t11).

(7) ON timing of the signal in the normal accessory As shown in FIG. 192, the signal in the normal accessory output from the connector CN1 of IF1 to the testing machine 402 is activated after all reels are stopped (t12). It is controlled by the microprocessor 91 so that it is turned on by the timing (t13) when the input request lamp signal for the game is turned on.

(8) OFF timing of the signal in the normal character As shown in FIG. 193, the signal in the normal character output from the connector CN1 of IF1 to the testing machine 402 turns off the payout request signal for the game in which the normal character has ended. It is controlled by the microprocessor 91 so that it is turned off from the timing of turning on (t14) to the timing of turning on the input request lamp signal for the next game (t15).

(9) ON timing of the first-class / second-class special accessory signal As shown in FIG. 194, the first-class / second-class special bonus signal output from the connector CN1 of IF1 to the testing machine 402 is , After all reels are stopped (t16), it is controlled by the microprocessor 91 so that it is turned on by the timing (t17) when the input request lamp signal of the game in which the first-class / second-class special accessory is operated is turned on. .. Further, in the first-class / second-class special accessory, the microprocessor 91 controls the signal in the first-class / second-class special accessory so that the signal is always ON.

(10) OFF timing of the first-class / second-class special accessory signal As shown in FIG. 195, the first-class / second-class special accessory signal output from the connector CN1 of IF1 to the testing machine 402 is , From the timing (t18) of turning off the payout request signal for the game in which the accessory continuous operating device related to the type 1 / type 2 special accessory medium signal is finished, the timing of turning on the input request lamp signal of the next game. It is controlled by the microprocessor 91 so that it is turned off by (t19).

<Action and effect of this embodiment>
As described above, the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment includes signals input / output between the input / output device connected to the main control board 71 and the main control board 71, and a cabinet-side relay board 44. Signals input / output between the input / output device connected to the door relay terminal plate 68 and the reel relay terminal plate 74 and the main control board 71 can be connected to the testing machine 402 via IF1 and IF2.

Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is from the input / output device connected to the main control board 71 and the input / output device connected to the cabinet side relay board 44, the door relay terminal board 68, and the reel relay terminal board 74. By connecting the input / output signals to IF1 and IF2 in a connection mode according to the specifications of the pachislot 1, even if the specifications of the pachislot 1 change, the IF1 and IF2 are not changed, and the minimum changes are made. Can be connected to the testing machine 402.

Further, since the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment relays the code signal encoded by the IF2, even if the specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1 are changed, the information encoded by the code signal to be relayed by the IF2 is changed. , IF2 can be connected to the testing machine 402 without modification and with minimal modification.

Further, since the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment converts the code signal into the signal that can be input by the testing machine 402 to the IF2, even if the specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1 are changed, the information represented by the code signal relayed to the IF2 is changed. By doing so, it is possible to connect to the testing machine 402 without changing the IF2 and with a minimum of changes.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first connection path connecting the main control board 71 and the cabinet side relay board 44 and the second connection path connecting the main control board 71 and the door relay terminal board 68 are IF1. In order to input and output a test signal based on the signals flowing through the first connection path and the second connection path between the IF1 and the testing machine 402 according to the specifications of the pachislot machine 1, the specifications of the gaming machine. Even if the specifications of the pachislot machine 1 are changed, the IF1 can be connected to the testing machine 402 without changing the IF1 and with the minimum change.

Further, the first connection path can connect the door relay terminal plate 68 and the external centralized terminal plate 47, and the second connection path connects the main control board 71 and the second relay board via IF1. Since it is possible, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can output the output signal output from the input / output device and the external signal output from the external centralized terminal plate 47 to the testing machine 402 via the IF1. it can.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a first connection in which an output signal output from the main control board 71 flows from the main control board 71 to each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reels 3L first to third stepping motors 404L to 404R. By passing the path through the cabinet-side relay board 44, the IF1 outputs the test signal based on the output signal output from the main control board 71 to the first to third stepping motors 404L to 404R to the testing machine 402. Therefore, even if the specifications of the pachislot machine 1 are changed, the IF1 can be connected to the testing machine 402 without changing the IF1 and with the minimum change.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reels 3L and 3C have a second connection path through which a signal output from the first to third index sensors 405L to 405R flows to the main control board 71 passes through IF1. , 3R Since the test signal based on the output signals of the 1st to 3rd index sensors 405L to 405R is output from the IF1 to the testing machine 402, even if the specifications of the pachislot machine 1 are changed, the IF1 is not changed. In addition, it can be connected to the testing machine 402 with a minimum of changes.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first connection path through which the output signal output from the main control board 71 to the external centralized terminal board 47 flows passes through IF1, and the main control board 71 to the first to first. Since the second connection path through which the output signal output to the three stepping motors 404L to 404R flows passes through IF1, the main control board 71 connects to the external centralized terminal board 47 and the first to third stepping motors 404L to 404R. A test signal based on the output signal output can be output from IF1 to the testing machine 402.

Further, in the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment, the second connection path through which the input signal input to the main control board 71 flows from the first to third index sensors 405L to 405R of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R passes through IF1. Therefore, the input signal input from the first to third index sensors 405L to 405R to the main control board 71 can be input to the testing machine 402 via IF1.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be connected to the testing machine 402 without changing the IF1 and with a minimum change even if the specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1 are changed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the third connection path through which the input signal input to the main control board 71 from the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, the BET switch 77, etc. flows passes through the IF1, the selector 66 , The input signal input to the main control board 71 from the door open / close monitoring switch 67, the BET switch 77, etc. can be input to the testing machine 402 via the IF1.

[Expandability of gaming machines according to other second embodiments]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are not paid out during the period from the pressing of the start lever 16 until the fluctuation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches the constant speed rotation (during acceleration). It is possible to perform an effect (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-game") that makes the player appear to be temporarily stopped by the stop operation of the player.

However, since this pseudo-game is a function that is not involved in the payout of the game medium, it is a function irrelevant to the testing machine 402, and when the pseudo-game is performed on IF1, the testing machine 402 is made to recognize the pseudo-game. Instead, we need a function to continue the test.

For that purpose, it is possible to output a "pseudo-game signal" from the main control board 71 to IF1, and to input a third reel stop switch signal from the first reel stop switch signal for stopping the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. There is a need to.

Specifically, for example, the unused PIN20 (see FIG. 180) of the connector CN100 of the main control board 71 is assigned to the pseudo-game signal so that it can be output from the microprocessor 91 and connected to the connector CN14 (see FIG. 175) of IF1. A pseudo game changeover switch connected to the output terminal Y4 of the BUF3 and a pseudo game circuit that enables output of the first to third reel stop switch signals, the on-switch signal, and the reel start switch signal during the pseudo game. Provide.

In the pseudo game circuit, when the pseudo game changeover switch is ON (or OFF) and the pseudo game in-game signal is in the ON state, the first to third reel stop switch signals for stopping the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are transmitted. It is output in the ON state for about 4 msec to 10 msec at intervals of about 1 to 10 seconds.

When the first to third reel stop switch signals are input while the pseudo-game signal is ON, the microprocessor 91 pseudo-stops any of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R according to the input, and the reels 3L, 3C, After all of the 3Rs are pseudo-stopped, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R perform a random delay and return to the normal reel control.

The pseudo stop is not a state in which the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are completely stopped, but a state in which the reels 3L, 3C, 3R vibrate slightly. It shows a state in which rotation and reverse rotation are alternately performed.

Random delay means that a delay time is provided for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and the rotation of the reel is restarted after the delay. The delay time is about 100 msec to about 3 seconds, and each delay time is determined based on a random number.

The timing at which the pseudo-game signal changes from the ON state to the OFF state is the timing at which all the pseudo stops of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are completed. Further, when the pseudo game changeover switch is OFF (or ON), the pseudo game circuit outputs the third reel stop switch signal from the first reel stop switch signal even if the pseudo game in-game signal is in the ON state. There is no such thing.

Further, the pseudo game circuit may output an on switch signal and / or a reel start switch signal instead of the first to third reel stop switch signals, and may be simulated to the player during the pseudo game. A pseudo-playing lamp may be provided so that the game can be recognized.

(Third Embodiment)
Next, the configuration and various operations of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is a gaming machine of a method (simultaneous variation type) capable of simultaneously varying a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol).

<Function flow>
First, with reference to FIG. 196, the function of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 196, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is launched by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, the payout control process of the game ball is performed. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol. When it becomes a "big hit" in a special symbol game or when it becomes a "hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is easily performed. Become.

In addition, various prizes include a special symbol start prize, which is one condition for variable display of a special symbol in a special symbol game, and one condition for variable display of a normal symbol in a normal symbol game. A certain ordinary symbol start prize is also included.

The term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that is displayed in a variable manner. For example, a "variable display" that is actually displayed in a variable manner and a "stop display" that is actually stopped and displayed. , Etc. are possible. Further, in the "variable display", for example, a "derivative display" in which a special symbol (identification information) is displayed as a result of a special symbol game can be performed. That is, in the present specification, the operation from the start of the "variable display" to the "derivative display" is referred to as one "variable display". Further, in the present specification, the "identification information" refers to "designs" used in pachinko games such as special symbols, ordinary symbols, decorative symbols, and identification symbols, and identification symbols and decorations used in pachislot or slot games. It means that a symbol used when displaying or suggesting the result of the game can be included in the player playing the game, such as a symbol.

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game will be described below.

[Special design game]
When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, random numbers (big hit determination random value and symbol determination random value) are extracted from the jackpot judgment counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively, and each of the extracted random numbers is extracted. The numerical value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process during the special symbol game shown in FIG. 196).

In the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, as shown in FIG. 196, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is memorized by the special symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is memorized, and the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. It is judged.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "big hit" is performed with reference to the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter. After that, the stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the jackpot determination described above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above. To.

Next, the effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. The effect pattern to be executed is determined according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol by referring to the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variable display of the special symbol, In addition, an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that the "big hit" has been achieved, the big hit game control process for performing the big hit game is executed. In the jackpot game, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, the big hit game control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or when the big hit game control process is completed, the game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, the game state at the normal time, which is different from the jackpot game state, is managed. As the normal gaming state, for example, in the above-mentioned jackpot determination, a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a "big hit" increases (hereinafter, referred to as a "probability variable gaming state") and a special symbol start winning prize can be easily obtained. A game state (hereinafter referred to as a "short-time game state") and the like can be mentioned. After that, the determination process of whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and then various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball starts winning a prize during the variable display of the special symbol, various data (random value for jackpot determination, random value for determining symbol, etc.) acquired at the time of the starting prize are obtained. ) Is put on hold. That is, if the game ball wins a start prize during the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize is suspended, and after the currently executed variable display of the special symbol ends. The variable display of the reserved special symbol is started. In the following, the variable display of the special symbol on hold is also referred to as a "holding ball".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start opening prize and second start opening prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. You can get the reserved ball. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of eight reserved balls can be acquired.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 196, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the reserved ball has been won (whether or not the "big hit" has been won) based on the above-mentioned information on the reserved ball, and further, the determination result is used. It also has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on that, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described below, the variation pattern of the special symbol is divided into the variation patterns of the first half and the latter half, and each variation pattern is determined separately. Here, a method for determining the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern of the special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern table that defines a first half fluctuation pattern, a second half fluctuation pattern, and a fluctuation pattern in which these are stored in the main ROM 6102 of the main control circuit 6100, which will be described later.

These tables are referred to for determining the variation pattern type and the first half and second half variation patterns based on the winning type at the time of winning, the symbol designation command, and the like. Further, the main CPU 6101 transmits a combination of commands corresponding to the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns to the sub-control circuit 6200 as fluctuation pattern designation commands. In the following description, a combination of the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns is simply referred to as a “fluctuation pattern”.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines the type of fluctuation pattern (for example, one of nine types of out-of-order fluctuation patterns and nine types of hit fluctuation patterns) based on the winning type at the time of winning, the symbol designation command, and the like, and further responds. Determine the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern. For example, when the "normal fluctuation" of the out-of-range fluctuation pattern is determined as the fluctuation pattern, "none" of the command "00H" is determined as the first half fluctuation pattern, and the "low accuracy" of the command "00H" is determined as the second half fluctuation pattern. Either "Variation 1 (4.0 seconds)" or "Low probability variation 2 (8.0 seconds)" of the command "01H" is determined. The fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to such "normal fluctuation" is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 as "0000H" or "0001H" in which the commands of the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns are combined. The variation pattern designation command may be described as, for example, "00H00H" or "00H01H".

The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is the total time of the fluctuation times of the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns. For example, the fluctuation pattern specification command "0000H" is the sum of the fluctuation time (0 ms) of the first half fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (4000 ms) of the second half fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "0102H" is the first half. The time (21000 ms) is the sum of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern (11000 ms) and the fluctuation time of the latter half fluctuation pattern (10000 ms). In this way, with regard to the fluctuation pattern, after the rough type is determined, the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns are determined in stages, so that the combination of fluctuation patterns is diversified, and as a result, the variation of the production pattern can be obtained. It can be easily increased.

Note that, for convenience, FIG. 197 shows only 18 types of fluctuation patterns, including hits and misses, but of course, it may be more than that shown in the figure. "Pseudo 1 to 4" and "special pseudo 1 to 3" are fluctuation patterns corresponding to so-called pseudo series. "Pseudo 1 to 4" are provided as a variation pattern for executing a pseudo-ream such as a normal pseudo-ream or a high-speed pseudo-ream. For example, "pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 hits" is, for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a big hit is obtained via normal reach or SP reach after pseudo-continuous execution. "Low probability", "chance time", and "small hit rush" mean "probability change and non-time saving game state", "probability change and time saving game state", and "probability change and non-time saving game state", respectively. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern related to "premier" is set only to the hit fluctuation pattern, but the variation pattern is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, and is "hit" and "small hit rush" or "hit". It may be a fluctuation pattern indicating that there is a richness (high expectation of hitting).

The small hit rush is a game state in which small hits occur more frequently than in the normal game state, and when electric support (support by electric tulips: a state in which the ordinary electric accessory 6046 described later is easier to open than in normal times) is not performed ( It is a gaming state when the fluctuation time of one special symbol (the second special symbol described later in the present embodiment) is short with a normal symbol low probability). In addition, in the chance time (for example, 20 times of time reduction), when the time reduction is completed, a small hit rush may be entered. Although not shown, in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, a 10-minute fluctuation (relatively long fluctuation time) may occur in the normal gaming state (low probability of the special symbol, low probability of the normal symbol). is there.

[Normal design game]
When there is a normal symbol start winning prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the hit determination counter and the random value value is stored (flow of the normal symbol start winning process in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 196). reference).

In the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, as shown in FIG. 196, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. It is judged.

Next, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the hit determination of whether or not to make a "hit" is performed with reference to the random number value extracted from the hit determination counter. After that, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined with reference to the result of the hit determination.

Next, a variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed with reference to the determined hit determination result and the variation pattern of the normal symbol.

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the result is a "hit". In this determination process, if it is determined to be a "hit", a hit game control process for performing a hit game is executed. In the winning game control process, the possibility of various winnings described above, in particular, the possibility of winning a special symbol start of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not "hit", the hit game control process is not executed. After that, the determination process of whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball is determined by the conditions such as whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit", the transition status of the game state, and whether or not the normal symbol game is a "hit". The ease with which processing is performed changes.

In this embodiment, as various random number value extraction methods, a soft random number method that generates random number values by executing a program is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko game machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, a random number value is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the above-mentioned various random number values may be adopted as the above-mentioned extraction method for various random number values. When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

<Structure of pachinko game machine>
Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 to 200. Note that FIG. 198 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front side. FIG. 199 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 200 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine as seen from the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 198 to 200, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 includes a main body 6002, a base door 6003 that is openable and closable to the main body 6002, and a glass door that is openable and closable to the base door 6003. It is equipped with 6004.

[Main body]
The main body 6002 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 6002a (see FIG. 199). The main body 6002 is made of a material such as wood.

[Base door]
The base door 6003 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a rectangular outer shape substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 6002. The base door 6003 is arranged in front of the main body 6002 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 6001), and by rotating the base door 6003 around one side end of the main body 6002, the main body 6002 The opening 6002a is opened and closed. As shown in FIG. 199, the base door 6003 is provided with a square opening 6003a. The opening 6003a is formed from a substantially central portion of the base door 6003 to an upper region, and is formed in a size that occupies most of the region.

Further, a speaker 6011, a game board 6012, a display device 6013, a dish unit 6014, a launching device 6015, a payout device 6016, and a board unit 6017 are attached to the base door 6003.

The speaker 6011 is arranged at the upper part (near the upper end portion) of the base door 6003. The game board 6012 is arranged in front of the base door 6003 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 6001) and is arranged so as to cover the opening 6003a of the base door 6003.

The game board 6012 is composed of a plate-shaped resin member having light transmission. As the light-transmitting resin, for example, an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a methacrylic resin, or the like can be used.

Further, on the front surface of the game board 6012 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 6001), a game area 6012a on which the game balls launched from the launching device 6015 roll is formed. The game area 6012a is an area surrounded by a guide rail 6041 (specifically, an outer rail 6041a shown in FIG. 201, which will be described later), and its outer peripheral shape is substantially circular. Further, a plurality of game nails (see FIG. 201 described later) are driven into the game area 6012a. The configuration of the game board 6012 (game area 6012a) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 201 described later. Although not shown, the game board 6012 is provided with various sensors such as a magnetic sensor and a vibration sensor for detecting an abnormality.

The display device 6013 is attached to the back side of the game board 6012 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 6001). The display device 6013 has a display area 6013a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 6013a is set so as to occupy all or a part of the surface of the game board 6012. In the display area 6013a of the display device 6013, various images such as an identification symbol for effect, an effect image, and a decorative image (decorative pattern) are displayed. The player can visually recognize various images displayed in the display area 6013a of the display device 6013 via the game board 6012.

In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the display device 6013. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a display device such as a plasma display, a rear projection display, or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display may be applied as the display device 6013.

Further, a spacer 6019 is provided on the back side of the game board 6012 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko game machine 6001). The spacer 6019 is provided between the back surface of the gaming board 6012 (the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 6001) and the front surface of the display device 6013 (the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 6001). It forms a space that serves as a flow path for a gaming ball that rolls in the region 6012a. The spacer 6019 is made of a light-transmitting material. The present invention is not limited to this, and the spacer 6019 may be, for example, partially formed of a light-transmitting material or a non-light-transmitting material. ..

The plate unit 6014 is arranged below the game board 6012. The dish unit 6014 has an upper dish 6021 and a lower dish 6022 arranged below the upper dish 6021. As shown in FIG. 198, the upper plate 6021 and the lower plate 6022 are formed with a payout outlet 6021a and a payout outlet 6022a for lending a game ball and paying out a game ball (prize ball), respectively. When the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout port 6021a and the payout port 6022a, and are stored in the upper plate 6021 and the lower plate 6022, respectively. Further, the game ball stored in the upper plate 6021 is launched into the game area 6012a by the launching device 6015.

Further, the plate unit 6014 is provided with an effect button 6023. The effect button 6023 is mounted on the upper plate 6021. Further, a dial operation unit (jog dial) 6024 is rotatably attached to the peripheral edge of the effect button 6023 with respect to the effect button 6023. The pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment has a predetermined effect function performed by using the effect button 6023 and / or the dial operation unit 6024, and when performing a predetermined effect, the display area 6013a of the display device 6013 is displayed. An image prompting the operation of the effect button 6023 and / or the dial operation unit 6024 is displayed.

The launcher 6015 is arranged in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) in front of the base door 6003. The launcher 6015 includes a launch handle 6025 that can be operated by the player and a panel body 6026 that engages the lower right corner of the dish unit 6014. The launch handle 6025 is arranged on the front side of the panel body 6026 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 6026.

Although not shown in FIGS. 198 to 200, a solenoid actuator (driving device) for controlling the firing operation of the game ball (game medium) is provided on the back side of the panel body 6026. Further, although not shown in FIGS. 198 to 200, a touch sensor is provided on the peripheral edge of the launch handle 6025, and a launch volume is provided inside the launch handle 6025. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 6025, and changes the electric power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

In the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, when the player's hand comes into contact with the touch sensor of the firing handle 6025, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. As a result, it is detected that the player holds the launch handle 6025, and the game ball can be launched by the solenoid actuator. Then, when the player grasps the launch handle 6025 and rotates it clockwise (clockwise when viewed from the player side), the resistance value of the launch volume changes according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 6025. , The power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 6021 are sequentially launched, and the launched game balls are guided by the guide rail 6041 (see FIG. 201 described later) and discharged to the game area 6012a of the game board 6012.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 198 to 200, a launch stop button is provided on the side portion of the launch handle 6025. The launch stop button is a button provided to stop the launch of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. When the player presses the launch stop button, the launch of the game ball is stopped even in the state where the launch handle 6025 is grasped and rotated.

The payout device 6016 is arranged on the back side of the base door 6003. A game ball is supplied to the payout device 6016 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout device 6016 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage unit to the upper plate 6021 or the lower plate 6022 based on the establishment of the payout condition. Further, as shown in FIG. 200, a power switch 6035 is provided on the back side of the payout device 6016.

The board unit 6017 is arranged on the back side of the base door 6003. Various control boards, various units, various switches, and the like are arranged on the board unit 6017. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 200, a main control board 6030 and a sub-control circuit 6200 (see FIGS. 202 and 203 described later) on which the main control circuit 6100 (see FIG. 202 described later) are mounted are mounted. A sub-control board 6040, a payout / launch control board 6050 on which a payout / launch control circuit 6300 (see FIG. 202 described later) for controlling payout / launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply circuit 6033 (described later) for supplying power. A power supply unit 6060 or the like having (see FIG. 202) is provided on the board unit 6017.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control board 6040 is configured as a one-board board (a board in which one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs are provided on one board), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-control is not limited to this. The board 6040 may be composed of a plurality of boards (for example, the host control circuit 6210, the audio / LED control circuit 6220, the display control circuit 6230, etc., which will be described later, may be formed of separate boards).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, a plurality of set values (six stages of "1" to "6" in the present embodiment) having different various data (for example, jackpot probability) related to the degree of advantage of the pachinko game are set. It is provided. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player (for example, the jackpot probability is the highest), and as the set value becomes smaller, the advantage to the player gradually decreases.

Then, although not shown in FIG. 200, in the main board case accommodating the main control board 6030, the setting key 6080 and the setting value operated when the player changes or confirms the set value are changed. A setting switch 6081, a performance display monitor 6070, and an error notification monitor 6071 (all of which are described later with reference to FIG. 202) are accommodated. For example, the performance display data and set values described later are displayed on the performance display monitor 6070. For example, an error code or the like is displayed on the error notification monitor 6071.

The reason why the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081 are housed in the main board case is that, in consideration of security, the manager of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 (hereinafter referred to as "game machine manager"). This is to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than the player from easily accessing the setting key 6080 and / or the setting switch 6081. However, the "inside the main board case" referred to in the present specification includes not only the setting key 6080 and / or the setting switch 6081 that cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, but also the setting key of the main board case. Notches are provided only at the corresponding installation locations of the 6080 and the setting switch 6081, and the pachinko game machine 6001 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 6001 is installed using the key managed by the game machine manager. It also includes those configured so that the pachinko / pachislot machine manager can access the setting key 6080 and / or the setting switch 6081 when the back surface is exposed.

[Glass door]
The glass door 6004 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially square surface. Further, the glass door 6004 is arranged on the front side of the game board 6012 and has a size of covering the game board 6012. On the front surface of the glass door 6004, a speaker cover 6029 is provided in an upper region facing the speaker 6011.

Further, in the central portion of the glass door 6004, an opening 6004a having a size that exposes at least the game area 6012a is formed in the area of the game board 6012 facing the game area 6012a. Then, a protective glass 6028 having light transmission is attached to the opening 6004a of the glass door 6004, whereby the opening 6004a is closed. Therefore, when the glass door 6004 is closed with respect to the base door 6003, the protective glass 6028 is arranged so as to face at least the game area 6012a of the game board 6012.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 6012 will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 6012.

On the front surface of the game board 6012, as shown in FIG. 201, a guide rail 6041, a ball passage detector 6043, a first starting port 6044 (starting area), a second starting port 6045 (starting area), and ordinary An electric accessory 6046 is provided. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6012, there are a plurality of general winning openings 6051 and 6052, a first large winning opening 6053 (variable winning device), a second large winning opening 6054 (variable winning device), and an out opening 6055. The game nail 6056 is provided. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6012, a first special symbol display device 6061, a second special symbol display device 6062, and a normal symbol display device are located above the display area 6013a of the display device 6013 arranged substantially in the center thereof. A 6063, a first special symbol hold display device 6064, a second special symbol hold display device 6065, and a normal symbol hold display device 6066 are provided.

Although not shown in FIG. 201, a 7-segment counter for directing is also provided on the front surface of the game board 6012. The 7-segment counter for production is composed of a display counter capable of displaying two-digit numbers and two alphabetic characters. Further, in the present embodiment, a notification LED (Light Emitting Diode) that lights up when the result of the stop display of the special symbol is "big hit", a round number display LED that displays the number of rounds during the big hit game, and the like are provided. May be good.

[Various components of the game area]
The guide rail 6041 is composed of an outer rail 6041a extending in an arc shape for partitioning the game area 6012a, and an inner rail 6041b extending in an arc shape arranged inside (inner peripheral side) of the outer rail 6041a. Will be done. The game area 6012a is formed inside the outer rail 6041a. The outer rail 6041a and the inner rail 6041b are arranged so as to face each other near the left end portion of the game area 6012a when viewed from the player side, whereby the launcher is placed between the outer rail 6041a and the inner rail 6041b. A guide path 6041c is formed to guide the game ball launched by the 6015 to the upper part of the game area 6012a.

Further, at the tip of the inner rail 6041b located on the upper left side of the game area 6012a, a ball discharge port 6041d is formed by the tip of the inner rail 6041b and a part of the outer rail 6041a facing the tip of the inner rail 6041b. Then, at the tip of the inner rail 6041b, a ball return prevention piece 6042 is provided so as to close the ball discharge port 6041d. The ball return prevention piece 6042 prevents the game ball discharged from the ball discharge port 6041d into the game area 6012a from passing through the ball discharge port 6041d again and entering the guide path 6041c.

The game ball released from the ball discharge port 6041d flows down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 6012a. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 6012a such as the plurality of game nails 6056, the first start port 6044, and the second start port 6045, and changes the traveling direction of the game area 6012a. It flows down from the top to the bottom.

A display area 6013a of the display device 6013 is provided at substantially the center of the game area 6012a. An obstacle 6013b is provided at the upper end of the display area 6013a. By providing the obstacle 6013b, the game ball does not pass over the area overlapping the display area 6013a in the game area 6012a.

The ball passage detector 6043 is arranged near the right end portion of the display area 6013a when viewed from the player side. The ball passing detector 6043 is provided with a passing ball switch 6043a (see FIG. 202 described later) for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passing detector 6043. Further, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 6043, a lottery for whether or not it is a "hit" is performed, and the variation display of the normal symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

The first starting port 6044 is arranged below the display area 6013a, and the second starting port 6045 is arranged below the first starting port 6044. The first starting port 6044 and the second starting port 6045 are composed of members capable of accepting game balls. Hereinafter, the entry or passage of the game ball into or passing through the first starting port 6044 or the second starting port 6045 is referred to as "winning". Then, when the game balls win the first start port 6044 or the second start port 6045, the first predetermined number (three in the present embodiment) of the game balls are paid out. Further, when the game ball enters the first starting port 6044, a lottery for whether or not it is a "big hit" is performed, and the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the result of the lottery. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6045, a lottery is performed as to whether or not it is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and the special symbol is changed based on the result of the lottery. The display starts.

The first starting port 6044 is provided with a first starting port winning ball switch 6044a (see FIG. 202 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 6044. Further, the second starting port 6045 is provided with a second starting port winning ball switch 6045a (see FIG. 202 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 6045. The game balls that have won the first start port 6044 and the second start port 6045 are conveyed to the game ball collection unit (not shown) through the collection port (not shown) provided on the game board 6012. ..

The ordinary electric accessory 6046 is provided at the second starting port 6045. The ordinary electric accessory 6046 is a pair of blade members rotatably attached to both sides of the second starting port 6045, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 6046a (starting port solenoid, which will be described later in FIG. 202) for driving the pair of blade members. See) and. The ordinary electric accessory 6046 is driven by the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 6046a, and is in an open state in which a pair of blade members are expanded to facilitate winning a game ball in the second starting port 6045, and the pair of blade members are closed. One of the closed states that makes it impossible to win the game ball is generated at the second starting port 6045. Then, in the time-saving game state, the normal electric accessory 6046 is likely to be in the open state. When the ordinary electric accessory 6046 is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade members is not a form that makes it impossible to win a prize as in the present embodiment, but a form that makes it difficult to win a game ball. It may be.

The general winning opening 6051 is arranged near the lower left portion of the game area 6012a when viewed from the player side. Further, the general winning opening 6052 is arranged below the ball passage detector 6043, and is arranged near the lower right portion of the game area 6012a when viewed from the player side. The general winning opening 6051 and the general winning opening 6052 are made of members capable of accepting a game ball. In the following, the entry or passage of a game ball into or passing through the general winning opening 6051 or the general winning opening 6052 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 6051 or the general winning opening 6052, a second predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls is paid out.

The general winning opening 6051 is provided with a general winning ball switch 6051a (see FIG. 202 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 6051. Further, the general winning opening 6052 is provided with a general winning ball switch 6052a (see FIG. 202 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 6052.

The first special winning opening 6053 and the second special winning opening 6054 (special electric accessory) are arranged below the ball passage detector 6043 and between the first starting opening 6044 and the general winning opening 6052. The first large winning opening 6053 and the second large winning opening 6054 are arranged in the vertical direction along the flow path of the game ball, and the first large winning opening 6053 is arranged above the second large winning opening 6054. To. Both the first prize opening 6053 and the second prize opening 6054 are so-called attacker type opening / closing devices, and the opening / closing shutters 6053a and 6054a and the solenoid actuator for driving the shutter (the first in FIG. 202 described later). It has a large winning opening solenoid 6053b and a second winning opening solenoid 6054b).

Each of the first prize opening 6053 and the second prize opening 6054 accepts a game ball when the corresponding shutter is open (open state), and when the shutter is closed (closed state), the game is played. Do not accept the ball. In the following, the entry or passage of a game ball into or passing through the first prize opening 6053 or the second prize opening 6054 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins in the first large winning opening 6053, a third predetermined number of balls (10 in this embodiment) are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the second large winning opening 6054, a fourth predetermined number of balls (15 in the present embodiment) are paid out.

Further, the first large winning opening 6053 is provided with a count switch 6053c (see FIG. 202 described later) for counting the game balls that have won the first large winning opening 6053. Further, the second large winning opening 6054 is provided with a count switch 6054c (see FIG. 202 described later) for counting the game balls that have won the second large winning opening 6054.

The out port 6055 is provided at the bottom of the game area 6012a. This out port 6055 is a game in which none of the first start port 6044, the second start port 6045, the general winning opening 6051, the general winning opening 6052, the first major winning opening 6053, and the second major winning opening 6054 is won. Accept the ball.

When the arrangement of the various constituent members in the game area 6012a of the present embodiment is as shown in FIG. 201, when the game ball is driven into the area on the right side of the game area 6012a by the player (when the game ball is hit right). The game ball is guided to the second starting port 6045 by the game nail 6056 or the like. In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first starting port 6044. In the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the player who wins the second starting port 6045 is more likely to receive the lottery of "big hit" which is advantageous for the player than the case where the first starting port 6044 is won. It has become. Therefore, in a time-saving game state in which winning a prize in the second starting port 6045 is relatively easy, there is a possibility of winning a prize in the first starting port 6044 by hitting right (a gaming state disadvantageous to the player). Possibility) can be lowered.

[Special symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 201, the first special symbol display device 6061 and the second special symbol display device 6062 are arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 6013a of the display device 6013.

The first special symbol display device 6061 and the second special symbol display device 6062 each variably display the corresponding special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol described later) in the special symbol game (variable display and stop display). It is a display device. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 201, each special symbol display device is configured by a device that displays a special symbol as a symbol composed of numbers, symbols, or the like. The present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display device may be configured by, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The first special symbol display device 6061 displays the special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner when the game ball wins the first start port 6044 (special symbol start prize). Then, the first special symbol display device 6061 displays the special symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and then displays the stop of the special symbol. In the following, when the game ball wins the first starting port 6044, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display device 6061 is referred to as a "first special symbol".

Then, in the first special symbol display device 6061, when the first special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (a mode of "big hit"), the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to a state advantageous to the player. It shifts to the big hit game state. That is, in the first special symbol display device 6061, it is a "big hit" that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode (big hit symbol) in which the first special symbol shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

The second special symbol display device 6062 displays the special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner when the game ball wins the second start opening 6045 (special symbol start prize). Then, the second special symbol display device 6062 displays the special symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and then displays the stop of the special symbol. In the following, when the game ball wins the second starting port 6045, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display device 6062 is referred to as a "second special symbol".

Then, in the second special symbol display device 6062, when the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (a mode of "big hit"), the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to a state advantageous to the player. It shifts to the big hit game state. That is, in the second special symbol display device 6062, it is "big hit" that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode (big hit symbol) in which the second special symbol shifts to the jackpot gaming state. Further, in the second special symbol display device 6062, when the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specified mode (a mode of "small hit"), the gaming state is a big prize for the player from the normal gaming state. It shifts to a small hit game state where the ball cannot be expected. That is, in the second special symbol display device 6062, it is "small hit" that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode (small hit symbol) in which the second special symbol shifts to the small hit game state.

The pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine of a method (simultaneous fluctuation type) capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, while one of the first special symbol display device 6061 and the second special symbol display device 6062 is performing variable display of the special symbol, the other special symbol display is performed. The device can start the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol start prize.

In the big hit game state, the first big winning opening 6053 or the second big winning opening 6054 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 6044 and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the first special symbol display device 6061 (at the time of a big hit). , The first big winning opening 6053 is opened. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting port 6045 and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode or a specified mode on the second special symbol display device 6062 (at the time of a big hit or a small hit). , The second big winning opening 6054 is opened.

The open state of each large winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or a certain period (for example, 30 sec) elapses. Then, when the elapsed period of the open state of each large winning opening satisfies any of these conditions, the large winning opening that was in the open state is closed.

In the following, a game in which the first prize opening 6053 or the second prize opening 6054 is in a state (open state) in which it is easy to accept a game ball is referred to as a “round game”. During the round game, the big prize opening will be closed. In addition, the round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

In addition, when the first special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display device 6061 is a mode other than a specific mode (a mode of "loss"), or in the second special symbol display device 6062, the stop display is displayed. If the second special symbol is in a mode other than the specified and specified modes (the mode of "loss"), the player wins the fall lottery (not performed in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment). The game state does not change except for. That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the special symbol display device, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game state is shifted or maintained depending on the result.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 6044 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is made. Is put on hold. Then, when the first special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the pending display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called "holding number (number of holding balls)") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 6045 during the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning is reserved. Then, when the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the pending display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays (number of hold) of the second special symbol to be held is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of pending special symbols for variable display is eight in total.

Since the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment is a simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, when the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol are mixed, it is based on the holding ball of one of the special symbols. During the variable display of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol based on the reserved ball of the other special symbol may be started.

[Ordinary symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 201, the ordinary symbol display device 6063 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 6013a of the display device 6013. Then, in the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol display device 6063 is arranged on the right side of the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 6061 and second special symbol display device 6062) when viewed from the player side.

The ordinary symbol display device 6063 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) ordinary symbols in a normal symbol game. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 201, the ordinary symbol display device 6063 is composed of two LEDs (ordinary symbol display LEDs) arranged in the vertical direction. Then, in the ordinary symbol display device 6063, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of each ordinary symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

The normal symbol display device 6063 turns on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs alternately when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 6043, and displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Then, the normal symbol display device 6063 performs a variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the normal symbol.

In the ordinary symbol display device 6063, when the stopped-displayed ordinary symbol is in a predetermined mode (“hit” mode), the ordinary electric accessory 6046 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol displayed as stopped is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of "loss"), the normal electric accessory 6046 maintains the closed state. That is, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the ordinary symbol display device 6063, then the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric accessory 6046 operates according to the result.

If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 6043 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved normal symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of ordinary symbols to be held (that is, the "number of holds") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[1st special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 201, the first special symbol holding display device 6064 is arranged on the upper side of the display area 6013a of the display device 6013 and on the left side of the first special symbol display device 6061 when viewed from the player side.

The first special symbol hold display device 6064 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol (holding ball of the first special symbol) that is being held. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 201, the first special symbol hold display device 6064 is composed of a first special symbol hold quantity display unit 6064a and a first special symbol hold information display unit 6064b. The first special symbol reservation information display unit 6064b is arranged on the left side of the first special symbol display device 6061, and the first special symbol reservation number display unit 6064a is arranged on the left side of the first special symbol reservation information display unit 6064b. Will be done.

The first special symbol reservation number display unit 6064a has four LEDs (first special symbol reservation display LED) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the first special symbol hold display device 6064 displays the number of holds for the variable display of the first special symbol by turning on / off each of the first special symbol hold display LEDs.

Specifically, when the number of the variable display of the first special symbol held is one, the first special symbol holding display LED located on the leftmost side when viewed from the player side (the first first from the left). The special symbol hold display LED) lights up, and the other first special symbol hold display LEDs turn off. When the number of the variable display hold of the first special symbol is two, the first and second first special symbol hold display LEDs from the left are lit, and the other first special symbol hold display LEDs are extinguished. To do. When the number of the variable display of the first special symbol is three, the first to third first special symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other first special symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. .. Then, when the number of the variable display hold of the first special symbol is 4, all the 1st special symbol hold display LEDs are turned on.

The first special symbol hold information display unit 6064b displays information about the hold ball of the first special symbol. For example, the first special symbol holding information display unit 6064b displays information (identification information) regarding the holding ball of the first special symbol to be variablely displayed next by a symbol including numbers and symbols. The configuration of the first special symbol holding display device 6064 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 201, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of holdings of the variable display of the first special symbol. ..

[Second special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 201, the second special symbol holding display device 6065 is arranged on the upper side of the display area 6013a of the display device 6013, on the right side of the normal symbol display device 6063 when viewed from the player side.

The second special symbol hold display device 6065 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol (holding ball of the second special symbol) that is being held. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 201, the second special symbol hold display device 6065 is composed of a second special symbol hold quantity display unit 6065a and a second special symbol hold information display unit 6065b. The second special symbol reservation information display unit 6065b is arranged on the right side of the normal symbol display device 6063, and the second special symbol reservation quantity display unit 6065a is arranged on the right side of the second special symbol reservation information display unit 6065b. ..

The second special symbol reservation number display unit 6065a has four LEDs (second special symbol reservation display LED) arranged in the left-right direction. The display mode of the second special symbol reservation quantity display unit 6065a is the same as the display mode of the first special symbol reservation quantity display unit 6064a. That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is held, the second special symbol hold display LED from the second special symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side to the number of holds is displayed on the leftmost side when viewed from the player side. Lights up.

The second special symbol hold information display unit 6065b displays information about the hold ball of the second special symbol. For example, the second special symbol holding information display unit 6065b displays information (identification information) regarding the holding ball of the second special symbol to be variablely displayed next by a symbol including numbers and symbols. The configuration of the second special symbol holding display device 6065 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 201, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of holdings of the variable display of the second special symbol. ..

[Ordinary symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 201, the ordinary symbol hold display device 6066 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 6013a of the display device 6013. Then, in the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol holding display device 6066 is arranged below the first special symbol display device 6061, the second special symbol display device 6062, and the ordinary symbol display device 6063.

The ordinary symbol hold display device 6066 is a device that displays the number of pending display of the ordinary symbol in a variable manner. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 201, the ordinary symbol hold display device 6066 is composed of four LEDs (ordinary symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the normal symbol hold display device 6066 displays the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol by turning on / off each of the normal symbol hold display LEDs.

The display mode of the normal symbol hold display device 6066 is the same as the display mode of the first special symbol hold quantity display unit 6064a. That is, when the variable display of the normal symbol is held, the normal symbol hold display LEDs located on the leftmost side when viewed from the player side to the number of held normal symbols are turned on.

[Display device]
The display device 6013 is composed of a liquid crystal display device as described above, and performs various image display effects in the display area 6013a. Specifically, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 6061 and the effect image related to the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display device 6062 are displayed in the display area 6013a.

For example, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 6061, except for specific cases, for example, a plurality of production identification symbols consisting of numbers 1 to 8 and various characters ( The decorative pattern) is variablely displayed in the display area 6013a. Next, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 6061, a plurality of decorative symbols (big hit symbols and the like) corresponding to the first special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 6013a.

Then, when the first special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 6061 has a specific mode (the result of the stop display is a "big hit"), the player is informed that it is a "big hit". An effect image for grasping is displayed in the display area 6013a. As an effect for making the player understand that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of decorative symbols stopped and displayed are arranged in a specific mode (for example, the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction). ), And then an effect such as displaying an image notifying the "big hit" can be mentioned.

Further, for example, when the second special symbol is being variablely displayed on the second special symbol display device 6062, a plurality of effect identification symbols (decorative symbols) are variablely displayed in the display area 6013a except in a specific case. .. Next, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 6062, a plurality of decorative symbols (big hit symbols and the like) corresponding to the second special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 6013a. Then, when the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 6062 has a specific mode (the result of the stop display is a "big hit"), the player is informed that it is a "big hit". An effect image for grasping is displayed in the display area 6013a.

Further, for example, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in variable display, it corresponds to the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Both of the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols are performed in the display area 6013a.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the display area 6013a of the display device 6013, an effect image related to the display contents of the first special symbol hold display device 6064 and the second special symbol hold display device 6065 is displayed. For example, in the display area 6013a, hold information (for example, the same number of hold symbols as the hold number) for notifying the hold number of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed based on the information of the reserved ball of the special symbol, and the advance notice at this time is also displayed in the display area 6013a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is in the standby state, an effect image (demo image) for making the player know that the game state is in the standby state is displayed in the display area 6013a. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 6063 is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for causing the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area 6013a of the display device 6013. Further functions may be provided.

<Circuit configuration of pachinko machine>
Next, with reference to FIG. 202, the configurations of various circuits included in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 202 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 6001.

As shown in FIG. 202, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 mainly includes a main control circuit 6100 that controls game movements, a sub-control circuit 6200 that controls production movements according to the progress of the game, and payout / launch control. It has a circuit 6300 and a power supply circuit 6033.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 6100 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 6101, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 6102, a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 6103, an initial reset circuit 6104, an I / O port 6105, and commands. It includes an output port 6106 and a backup capacitor 6107. The main ROM 6102, the main RAM 6103, and the initial reset circuit 6104 are connected to the main CPU 6101.

In the present embodiment, a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is performed at the time of winning the first start port 6044 or the second start port 6045, and this lottery process is controlled by the main control circuit 6100. That is, the main control circuit 6100 also serves as a means (determining means) for performing a lottery process as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 6101, the main ROM 6102, the main RAM 6103, the I / O port 6105, and the command output port 6106 may be provided separately. Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration example in which the main ROM 6102 is built in the substrate of the main control circuit 6100 will be described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a ROM board on which the main ROM 6102 is mounted may be connected to the board of the main control circuit 6100. Further, in the present embodiment, the various circuits (various means) in the main control circuit 6100 may be integrally formed or may be formed as separate bodies. Further, the main ROM 6102 does not have to be installed in the gaming machine, and may be configured to be able to communicate with the gaming machine.

The main CPU 6101 executes various processes according to the program stored in the main ROM 6102. The main ROM 6102 stores various programs for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 by the main CPU 6101, various data tables, and the like.

The main RAM 6103 acts as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 6101 executes various processes, and stores various random number values, lottery results, various flags and variable values required for the main CPU 6101 for various processes. The memory maps of the main ROM 6102 and the main RAM 6103, and specific examples of various information stored in the main RAM 6103 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 205 and 207 to 210 described later. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 6103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 6101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium can be used as the temporary storage medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium. ..

The initial reset circuit 6104 is a circuit that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. The I / O port 6105 is an interface (input / output port) for signals input / output between the main control circuit 6100 and various devices connected to the main control circuit 6100. The command output port 6106 is an output port used when command data is transmitted from the main CPU 6101 to the sub control circuit 6200. The backup capacitor 6107 is a capacitor for promptly supplying power to, for example, the main RAM 6103 when the power is cut off (power off). By supplying power from this capacitor, various types of capacitors stored in the main RAM 6103 even when the power is cut off. Data can be retained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202, various devices that operate in response to the signal output from the main control circuit 6100 are connected to the main control circuit 6100.

Specifically, the main control circuit 6100 includes a first special symbol display device 6061, a second special symbol display device 6062, a normal symbol display device 6063, a first special symbol hold display device 6064, and a second special symbol hold display device. The 6065 and the normal symbol hold display device 6066 are connected. Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the signal output from the main control circuit 6100. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 6100 to the first special symbol display device 6061, the first special symbol display device 6061 determines the first special symbol in the special symbol game based on the output signal. Controls the operation of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202, the main control circuit 6100 is connected to various switches (sensors) and receives output signals of the various switches. Specifically, the main control circuit 6100 includes count switches 6053c, 6054c, general winning ball switches 6051a, 6052a, passing ball switches 6043a, first starting port winning ball switch 6044a, second starting port winning ball switch 6045a, and the like. Be connected.

The count switch 6053c counts the game balls that have won in the first large winning opening 6053, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 6100. The count switch 6054c counts the game balls that have won in the second large winning opening 6054, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 6100. The general winning ball switch 6051a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6100 when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 6051, and the general winning ball switch 6052a wins the game ball in the general winning opening 6052. In this case, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 6100.

The passing ball switch 6043a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6100 when the game ball passes through the ball passing detector 6043. The first starting port winning ball switch 6044a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6100 when the game ball wins the first starting port 6044. Further, the second starting port winning ball switch 6045a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6100 when the game ball wins the second starting port 6045.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202, the main control circuit 6100 is connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 6046a, the first special winning opening solenoid 6053b, and the second special winning opening solenoid 6054b. Then, the main control circuit 6100 drives and controls the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 6046a to bring the pair of blade members of the ordinary electric accessory 6046 into an open state or a closed state. Further, the main control circuit 6100 drives and controls the first special winning opening solenoid 6053b and the second special winning opening solenoid 6054b, respectively, to open or close the first special winning opening 6053 and the second special winning opening 6054. (Controls the opening and closing of special electric accessories (shutters 6053a, 6054a)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 202, a performance display monitor 6070 and an error notification monitor 6071 are connected to the main control circuit 6100.

Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 6070 under the control of the main CPU 6101. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value. The display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 6070 will be described in detail later.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 6071. Further, in addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 6071 displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing described later, a setting checking code indicating that the setting confirmation process described later is in progress, and the like. You can also do it. As the setting changing code, a symbol (setting changing symbol) that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202, a setting key 6080, a setting switch 6081, and a RAM clear switch 6121 are connected to the main control circuit 6100.

The setting key 6080 is similar to a key or a key that serves as an opportunity to execute a setting change process or a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 6081 can be pressed, and is pressed when the set setting value is changed during the setting change processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the setting key 6080 and the setting are set so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the game machine management manager cannot easily access the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081. The switch 6081 is housed in a main board case.

In the present embodiment, the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081 are connected to the main control circuit 6100, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081 are power supply circuits described later. It may be configured to be connected to 6033. Also in this case, in order to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than the game machine management manager from easily accessing the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081, the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081 are predetermined cases. It is preferably housed inside. It should be noted that the “inside the predetermined case” referred to here is not only a configuration in which the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081 cannot be accessed unless the case is opened, but also the correspondence between the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081 in the case. When the pachinko game machine 6001 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 6001 is installed using the key managed by the game machine manager, and the back surface is exposed. Also includes those configured to allow the pachinko / pachislot machine manager to access the setting key 6080 and / or the setting switch 6081.

The RAM clear switch 6121 is connected not only to the main control circuit 6100 but also to the payout / emission control circuit 6300, and is a switch that can be operated when the main RAM 6103 is initialized (cleared). When the backup data is cleared in response to the operation of the RAM clear switch 6121 by the manager of the game store, etc. at the time of power failure, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 6100 and the payout / launch control circuit 6300. To.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202, the payout / launch control circuit 6300 is connected to the main control circuit 6100. A launching device 6015 for launching a game ball, a payout device 6016 for paying out a game ball, and a card unit 6150 are connected to the payout / launch control circuit 6300, and a rental operation unit 6151 is connected to the card unit 6150. Will be done.

When the payout / launch control circuit 6300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 6100 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 6150, the payout / launch control circuit 6300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 6016. The payout device 6016 controls the payout operation of the game ball.

Further, in the payout / launch control circuit 6300, when the launch handle 6025 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, the solenoid of the launch device 6015 is operated according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to the actuator (not shown), and the launching device 6015 controls the launching motion of the game ball. As the driving means of the launching device 6015, a motor may be used instead of the solenoid actuator.

When operated by the player, the rental operation unit 6151 outputs a signal requesting the card unit 6150 to rent the game ball. The card unit 6150 determines the number of game balls to be paid out (the number of balls to be rented) based on the signal for requesting the rental of the game balls output from the rental operation unit 6151. Then, when the card unit 6150 receives a signal requesting the rental of the game ball from the rental operation unit 6151, the card unit 6150 transmits a rental ball control signal including information on the determined number of rental balls to the payout / launch control circuit 6300.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202, a power supply circuit 6033 is connected to the main control circuit 6100. The power supply circuit 6033 is connected not only to the main control circuit 6100 but also to the sub control circuit 6200, the payout / emission control circuit 6300, and the like. The power supply circuit 6033 generates a power supply voltage necessary for playing a game in the pachinko gaming machine 6001, and supplies the generated power supply voltage to the main control circuit 6100, the sub control circuit 6200, the payout / launch control circuit 6300, and the like.

Further, a power switch 6035 (see also FIG. 200) and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 6033. The power switch 6035 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 6001.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202, the main control circuit 6100 includes an external terminal plate 6140 used for transmitting data to the hall computer 6700 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall, a function of calling a hall clerk, and the number of big hits. A calling device (not shown) having a function of displaying is connected.

[Performance display monitor]
Here, the contents of the data displayed on the performance display monitor 6070 will be described. The payout / launch control circuit 6300 aggregates the base values based on the past game history, and stores the aggregated results in a specific work area in the work area of the main RAM 6103. This specific work area is an area in which data is not cleared even if RAM clear processing (backup clear processing) is performed. It should be noted that the aggregation of the base values may be performed based on the performance of a predetermined operation, or the aggregation may be performed at all times so that the base values are always displayed on the performance display monitor 6070. ..

Although not shown, the payout / launch control circuit 6300 aggregates all base values based on the entire game history from the initial power-on (the first power-on after the pachinko gaming machine 6001 is manufactured) to the present. It includes a history aggregation means and a history aggregation means for each set value that aggregates the base value for each set value based on the past game history for each set value.

For example, when the display operation of all the base values is performed by the game machine management manager or the like, the all history totaling means executes the totalization of all the base values described above. Then, all the base values aggregated by the all history aggregation means are displayed on the performance display monitor 6070 under the control of the main CPU 6101. Further, when the display operation of the base value for each set value is performed, the history totaling means for each set value executes the total for the base value for each set value. Then, the base value for each set value aggregated by the history aggregation means for each set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 6070 under the control of the main CPU 6101.

The history aggregation means for each set value can also aggregate only the base value for any set value in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base value for the currently set setting value but also the base value for other setting values that are not currently set can be aggregated. Therefore, the main CPU 6101 can display the base values for other set values on the performance display monitor 6070 without executing the setting change process.

Further, the main CPU 6101 has both the total base value aggregated by the total history aggregation means and the set value-specific base value aggregated by the set value-specific history aggregation means, for example, in response to an operation by the game machine management manager or the like. Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 6070, and only one of the two can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 6070.

The main CPU 6101 may display only the base values of specific set values on the performance display monitor 6070, or may display the base values of all the set values on the performance display monitor 6070. Further, the main CPU 6101 may display both the total base value and the base value for each set value on the performance display monitor 6070. Further, the main CPU 6101 uses both the performance display monitor 6070 and other display means when displaying the base values of all the set values or when displaying both the base values of all the set values and the base values of each set value. You may use it to display these base values.

Further, as described above, the payout / launch control circuit 6300 includes all history totaling means and set value-based history totaling means, but in addition to these, or in place of the set value-based history totaling means, setting change processing The post-setting history totaling means for totaling the base value after the setting change based on the game history from the time when is executed to the present may be provided. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 6070 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

In this way, all or part of all the base values and the base value for each set value and / or the base value for each set value after the setting change (base value after the setting change) is displayed on the performance display monitor 6070. By doing so, for example, information based on the past game history of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 can be easily confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 6070 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a special electric accessory (large winning opening) with respect to the total number of game balls to be paid out is described. ), The ratio of the number of game balls (paid out by the accessory) paid out by entering the ordinary electric accessory may be displayed. Further, for example, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the accessory to the total number of game balls fired may be displayed, and further, for example, the game paid out by the special electric accessory (large winning opening). It may display the ratio of the number of balls. Further, these ratios may be displayed for each set value.

[Sub-control circuit]
As shown in FIG. 202, the sub control circuit 6200 is connected to the command output port 6106 of the main control circuit 6100. The sub-control circuit 6200 (host control circuit 6210 described later) controls the entire sub-control circuit 6200 according to various commands (information regarding the progress of the game) transmitted from the main control circuit 6100.

Specifically, the sub-control circuit 6200 controls the voice reproduction operation by the speaker 6011, controls the image display operation by the display device 6013, and lamps including LEDs, based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 6100. The 6018 controls the lamp lighting / extinguishing operation, and the accessory 6020 (decorative member) controls the effect operation. That is, the sub control circuit 6200 controls various effect devices based on the command from the main control circuit 6100, and executes various effects according to the progress of the game. In the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 6200 cannot supply a signal to the main control circuit 6100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-control circuit 6200 can transmit a signal to the main control circuit 6100. It may have various configurations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202, the accessory detection sensor 6090 is connected to the sub-control circuit 6200. The accessory detection sensor 6090 is a sensor that detects that the accessory 6020 (movable accessory) is in the initial position. When the accessory 6020 is composed of a plurality of movable parts (when a plurality of motors are included), the accessory detection sensor 6090 is provided for each motor.

Although illustration and description are omitted, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the sub-control circuit 6200 includes a volume switch 108, an effect button switch 621, and a main button switch. Various effect switches such as 6621 and select button switches 6641a to 6641d are connected, and various effect functions for operating these switches based on the on / off state are also provided.

Next, the internal configuration of the sub-control circuit 6200 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a block diagram showing the circuit configuration inside the sub-control circuit 6200 and the connection relationship between the sub-control circuit 6200 and various peripheral devices thereof. In FIG. 203, the accessory detection sensor 6090 is not shown for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 203, the sub-control circuit 6200 includes a relay board 6201, a sub-board 6202, a control ROM board 6203, and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) board 6204. Then, the sub-board 6202 is connected to the relay board 6201, the control ROM board 6203, and the CG ROM board 6204. In the sub-control circuit 6200, the sub-board 6202 and various ROM boards (control ROM board 6203 and CG ROM board 6204) are connected via a board-to-board connector (not shown).

The relay board 6201 is a relay board for receiving a command transmitted from the main control circuit 6100 and transmitting the received command to the sub board 6202.

The sub-board 6202 is provided with a host control circuit 6210, an audio / LED control circuit 6220, a display control circuit 6230, an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM) 6250, and a built-in relay board 6260.

The host control circuit 6210 is a circuit that controls the operation of the entire sub control circuit 6200 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 6100, and is composed of a CPU processor. The host control circuit 6210 is connected to the voice / LED control circuit 6220, the display control circuit 6230, and the built-in relay board 6260 in the sub-board 6202. Further, the host control circuit 6210 is connected to the control ROM board 6203.

Further, the host control circuit 6210 has a subwork RAM 6210a and a SRAM (StaticRAM) 6210b. The subwork RAM 6210a is a storage device that acts as a temporary storage area for work when the host control circuit 6210 executes various processes, and various flags and variables required when the host control circuit 6210 executes various processes. Memorize the value of. The SRAM 6210b is a storage device that backs up predetermined data in the subwork RAM 6210a. In the present embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the host control circuit 6210, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium. ..

The voice / LED control circuit 6220 is connected to the speaker 6011 and the lamp group 6018 via the built-in relay board 6260, and the voice by the speaker 6011 is based on the control signals (sound request and lamp request) input from the host control circuit 6210. This is a circuit that controls the reproduction operation and the light emission operation by the lamp group 6018. Therefore, functionally, the voice / LED control circuit 6220 has a voice controller 6220a and a lamp controller 6220b. The voice controller 6220a and the lamp controller 6220b are substantially included in the sound lamp control module 6226 described later.

In the present embodiment, when the control signal and data (for example, LED data described later) output from the voice / LED control circuit 6220 are transmitted to the lamp group 6018 via the built-in relay board 6260, the voice / LED Communication between the control circuit 6220 and the lamp group 6018 is performed by a communication method (a kind of serial communication method) of SPI (Serial Periperal Interface). Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp group 6018 includes one or more LEDs and one or more LED drivers for controlling each LED.

The display control circuit 6230 is connected to the display device 6013, and displays an image (decorative pattern image, background image, effect image, etc.) related to the effect based on the control signal (drawing request) input from the host control circuit 6210. It is a circuit for controlling various processing operations when displaying with. The display control circuit 6230 includes a display controller (first display controller 6238 and second display controller 6239) and a built-in VRAM (Video RAM) 6237.

Further, the display control circuit 6230 is connected to the SDRAM 6250 in the sub-board 6202. Further, the display control circuit 6230 is connected to the CGROM board 6204. Further, the display controller in the display control circuit 6230 is directly connected to the display device 6013 without going through the relay board.

The SDRAM 6250 is composed of a DDR2 (Double-Date Rate2) SDRAM. Further, the SDRAM 6250 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing various image data in the drawing process of the image (moving image and still image) displayed by the display device 6013. For example, the SDRAM 6250 is provided with a texture buffer, a movie buffer, a blend buffer, two frame buffers (first frame buffer and second frame buffer), a motion buffer, and the like.

The built-in relay board 6260 receives various signals and various data output from the host control circuit 6210 and the audio / LED control circuit 6220, and transmits the received various signals and various data to the speaker 6011, the lamp group 6018, and the accessory 6020. It is a relay board for transmission.

Further, the built-in relay board 6260 includes an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) controller 6261, a digital audio power amplifier 6262 (voice amplification means), and a voltage conversion circuit unit 6269.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the I2C controller 6261, the digital audio power amplifier 6262, and the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 are mounted on the same relay board is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the relay on which the I2C controller 6261 is mounted is shown. A board, a relay board on which the digital audio power amplifier 6262 is mounted, and a relay board on which the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 is mounted may be provided separately. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which a relay board on which the I2C controller 6261, the digital audio power amplifier 6262, and the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 are mounted is provided in the sub-board 6202 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. A relay board on which the I2C controller 6261, the digital audio power amplifier 6262, and the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 are mounted may be provided separately from the sub board 6202, and both boards may be electrically connected by wiring or the like.

The I2C controller 6261 is connected to the host control circuit 6210 and the motor controller 6270 of the accessory 6020. That is, the host control circuit 6210 is connected to the accessory 6020 via the I2C controller 6261 and the motor controller 6270. Then, the control signal and data (for example, excitation data) output from the host control circuit 6210 are input to the accessory 6020 via the I2C controller 6261 and the motor controller 6270.

In the present embodiment, the communication between the I2C controller 6261 and the motor controller 6270 is performed by the I2C communication method (a type of serial communication method). Further, although not shown, the accessory 6020 includes one or more motors, and the motor controller 6270 includes one or more motor drivers for driving each motor. Further, FIG. 203 shows an example in which only one accessory 6020 is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of accessory 6020s may be provided.

Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 6210 may directly drive the motor of the accessory 6020 without using the motor controller 6270, or a control circuit for motor control may be separately provided. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of motor drivers (motors) are controlled by one control circuit, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, one or more (one or more) control circuits may be used to control one or more (one or more) motors (motor drivers), or one or more (one or more) control circuits may be used to control one or more motors (motor drivers). It may be configured to control one motor (motor driver), or it may be configured to control one motor (motor driver) by one control circuit.

Further, the digital audio power amplifier 6262 is connected to the voice / LED control circuit 6220 and the speaker 6011. That is, the voice / LED control circuit 6220 is connected to the speaker 6011 via the digital audio power amplifier 6262. Therefore, the audio signal or the like output from the audio / LED control circuit 6220 is input to the speaker 6011 via the digital audio power amplifier 6262.

Although not shown, the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 is connected to the power supply circuit 6033, the speaker 6011, the lamp group 6018, and the motor controller 6270 (accessory 6020). The voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 is a circuit unit (DC / DC conversion circuit unit) that converts an input DC voltage into a lower DC voltage and outputs it. In the present embodiment, the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 converts the + 12V power supply voltage (DC voltage) input from the power supply circuit 6033 into the + 5V drive voltage (DC voltage). Then, the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 supplies the converted + 5V drive voltage to the speaker 6011, the lamp group 6018, and the motor controller 6270 (accessory 6020).

A sub-main ROM 6205 is provided on the control ROM board 6203. The sub-main ROM 6205 stores various programs and various data tables for controlling the production operation of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 by the host control circuit 6210. Then, the host control circuit 6210 executes various processes according to the program stored in the sub-main ROM 6205.

In the present embodiment, the sub-main ROM 6205 is applied as a storage means for storing programs, various tables, and the like used in the host control circuit 6210, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a storage medium that can be read by a computer provided with a control means. For example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, or the like. Storage medium may be applied. Moreover, each of the programs may be recorded in a separate storage medium. Further, the program may be recorded in a recording medium in advance, or may be downloaded from the outside or the like after the power is turned on and recorded in the sub-main ROM 6205.

The CGROM board 6204 is provided with the CGROM 6206. The CGROM 6206 is composed of a NOR type or NAND type flash memory. Further, the CGROM 6206 stores, for example, image data displayed on the display device 6013, audio data (access data) reproduced by the speaker 6011, and the like. At this time, various data are compressed (encoded) and stored in the CGROM 6206, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various data may be stored in the CGROM 6206 without being compressed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which various ROM boards (control ROM board 6203 and CGROM board 6204) and the sub board 6202 are connected by a board-to-board connector in the sub control circuit 6200 has been described. The invention is not limited to this. For example, various ROMs may be directly inserted into a port such as a socket provided on the sub-board 6202 to form the sub-board 6202 with a single board having a ROM function or the ROM itself. That is, the sub-board 6202 and various ROMs may be integrally configured. Further, when the sub-board 6202 is composed of a single board having a ROM function or the ROM itself, the sub-control circuit 6200 uses a sub board according to the type of memory used as the CG ROM. A switching means for physically or electrically switching the circuit on the board, or a switching means for switching the information of the circuit on the sub-board to be used depending on the type of memory may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the magnitude relationship of the data communication speed between each of the various storage means (sub-main ROM 6205, CGROM 6206, built-in VRAM 6237, SDRAM 6250) and the corresponding control circuit is determined by the built-in VRAM 6237> SDRAM 6250> sub-main. ROM6205≈CGROM6206. That is, in the present embodiment, the communication speed between the built-in VRAM 6237 and various circuits in the display control circuit 6230 is the fastest, followed by the communication speed between the SDRAM 6250 and the display control circuit 6230. Then, the communication speed between the sub-main ROM 6205 and the host control circuit 6210 and the communication speed between the CG ROM 6206 and the display control circuit 6230 are the slowest. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit can be arbitrarily set. For example, the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit may be different from that of the present embodiment, and the communication speed between each storage means and the corresponding control circuit may be different. May all be the same.

Here, possible configurations of the various storage means (information storage means) described above will be described. In the present embodiment, information about transparency data that can be used when the storage means (first storage means) of information about image data (compressed (encoded) image data) sets transparency for image data. The configuration is physically the same as that of the storage means (second storage means) of the (alpha table) (CGROM 6206), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first storage means (first information storage means) may be composed of a storage means (storage medium) physically different from the second storage means (second information storage means). ..

Further, the "information storage means" referred to in the present specification means not only a storage means such as CGROM 6206, but also a table stored in the storage means, a data storage area in the storage means, and the like. Good. Therefore, for example, the first information storage means and the second information storage means described above may be different data storage areas or different tables in the same storage means. Further, the mode may be stored in different register addresses. That is, the "information storage means" referred to in the present specification is different not only when the storage means (storage medium) are physically different, but also when they are physically the same storage means (for example, ROM, RAM, etc.). However, it also includes the case where the data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) are different in the storage means.

The above-mentioned meaning of "information storage means" in the present specification is also applicable to the above-mentioned SDRAM 6250 (third information storage means) and built-in VRAM 6237 (fourth information storage means). Therefore, for example, the above-mentioned first information storage means to the fourth information storage means may be composed of physically different storage means (storage media), or the first information storage means to the first information storage means to the first. The information storage means 4 may be composed of different data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) in one storage means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first information storage means and the second information storage means are configured by different data areas in one storage means (CGROM 6206), and the third information storage means is used. The fourth information storage means is composed of a storage means (SDRAM6250) physically different from the storage means (CGROM6206) including the first information storage means and the second information storage means, and the fourth information storage means is the first information. An example of configuring the storage means (CGROM 6206) including the storage means and the second information storage means and the storage means (built-in VRAM 6237) physically different from the third information storage means (SDRAM 6250) has been described. The invention is not limited to this. Whether the "information storage means" is composed of a data area or a storage means, and how the combination of the "information storage means" defined as the data area and the "information storage means" defined as the storage means is used. It can be appropriately set according to, for example, the configuration (number, type, etc.) of the storage means provided in the gaming machine. For example, in the present embodiment, the first information storage means to the third information storage means are configured by different data areas in one storage means, and the fourth information storage means is the first. The information storage means 1 to the storage means including the third information storage means may be physically different from the storage means.

<Various registers of the main CPU>
Next, various registers included in the main CPU 6101 will be described with reference to FIG. 204. Note that FIG. 204 is a schematic configuration diagram of various registers included in the main CPU 6101.

The main CPU 6101 has an accumulator A (hereinafter referred to as "A register"), a flag register F, a general-purpose register B (hereinafter referred to as "B register"), and a general-purpose register C (hereinafter referred to as "C register") as main registers. ), General-purpose register D (hereinafter referred to as "D register"), general-purpose register E (hereinafter referred to as "E register"), general-purpose register H (hereinafter referred to as "H register") and general-purpose register L (hereinafter referred to as "L register"). "). Further, the main CPU 6101 has accumulator A', flag register F', general-purpose register B', general-purpose register C', general-purpose register D', general-purpose register E', general-purpose register H'and general-purpose register L'as sub-registers. As a general-purpose register. Each register is composed of 1-byte registers.

Further, in the present embodiment, the B register and the C register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as “BC register”), and the D register and the E register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as “DE register”). Further, in the present embodiment, the H register and the L register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as “HL register”).

As shown in FIG. 204, predetermined flag information indicating the result of arithmetic processing and the like is set in each bit of the flag registers F and F'. For example, bit 6 (D6) is set with data (zero flag) indicating whether or not the calculation result is "0" in the calculation result determination process. Specifically, when the calculation result is "0", the data "1" is set in the bit 6, and when the calculation result is not "0", the data "0" is set in the bit 6. Then, in the calculation result determination process, the main CPU 6101 makes a determination with reference to the bit 6 data "0" / "1".

Further, the main CPU 6101 has an expansion register Q (hereinafter, referred to as “Q register”). The Q register is composed of a 1-byte register. In this embodiment, various main CPU 6101 dedicated instruction codes that can specify an address using this Q register are provided on the source program of various processes described later, and by using this instruction code, The processing efficiency has been improved and the capacity of the main ROM 6102 has been reduced. In various main CPU 6101 dedicated instruction codes that specify an address using the Q register, the address data (address value) on the upper side of the address is stored in the Q register. Further, "F0H" is set as an initial value in the Q register immediately after the reset of the main CPU 6101.

Further, the main CPU 6101 is composed of an interrupt page address register I (hereinafter referred to as "I register") and a memory refresh register R, which are composed of 1-byte registers, and a 2-byte register. It has an index register IX (hereinafter referred to as "IX register"), an index register IY (hereinafter referred to as "IY register"), a stack pointer SP, and a program counter PC as dedicated registers.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as “memory maps”) of the main ROM 6102 and the main RAM 6103 included in the main control circuit 6100 (microprocessor) will be described with reference to FIGS. 205A to 205C. Note that FIG. 205A is a diagram showing a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 205B is a diagram showing a memory map of the main ROM 6102, and FIG. 205C is a diagram showing a memory map of the main RAM 6103.

In the memory map of the entire memory included in the main control circuit 6100, as shown in FIG. 205A, the memory area of the main ROM 6102, the memory area of the main RAM 6103, the built-in register area, and the XCS decoding area are arranged from the head (0000H) side of the address. The unused areas are sandwiched between them, and they are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order.

In the memory map of the main ROM 6102, as shown in FIG. 205B, the program area, the data area, the out-of-area area, the trademark recording area, the program management area, and the security setting area are displayed from the head (0000H) side of the address of the main ROM 6102. In order, they are arranged at predetermined addresses.

In the program area, control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 6101 in various control processes related to the progress of the game and the playability are stored. In the data area, various data used by the main CPU 6101 in various control processes related to the progress of the game and the game playability (for example, a data table such as a jackpot lottery data table, various control commands to the sub control circuit 6200 (for example, various control commands (for example). Data for sending the command), etc.) is stored. That is, in the game ROM area (game storage area) composed of the program area and the data area, various programs required for the control processing (process related to game playability) related to the game actually performed by the player at the game store and Various data are stored.

Further, in the area outside the area, control programs and data of various processes (processes that do not affect the game playability) that are not directly related to the game (game progress and game playability) performed by the player are stored. For example, the program and data used in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachinko gaming machine 6001, the checksum generation process at the time of power failure, and the control program used at the thumb check process at the time of power recovery (power recovery). And data, as well as the anti-fraud program and the data required for it are stored in the out-of-area area.

In the memory map of the main RAM 6103, as shown in FIG. 205C, the game RAM area (game temporary storage area) and the out-of-area RAM area (out-of-area temporary storage area) are formed from the head (F000H) side of the address of the main RAM 6103. , In this order, they are arranged at predetermined addresses.

In the game RAM area, for example, various data (various random values, jackpot determination results, etc.) determined by execution of a control program related to the game (game progress and game playability) performed by the player are temporarily stored. A work area and a stack area for storing are provided. Then, each of the various data is stored in the work area of a predetermined address in the game RAM area.

Further, the out-of-area RAM area is provided with an out-of-area work area that is a work area for various processes that are not directly related to the game (game progress and game playability) performed by the player, and an out-of-area stack. In the present embodiment, the out-of-area RAM area is used to perform various processes that are not directly related to the game performed by the player, such as a thumb check process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, in the main ROM 6102, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes not directly related to the game performed by the player are stored in the gaming ROM. It is stored in the out-of-area ROM area (out-of-area storage area) arranged at an address different from the area. In addition, various processes that are not directly related to the game performed by such a player are performed in the main RAM 6103 using an out-of-area RAM area arranged at an address different from the game RAM area.

In such a configuration of the main ROM 6102, programs and data unnecessary for the game itself actually played by the player can be arranged in the ROM area outside the area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the gaming ROM area.

[Modification example of the configuration of the work area in the main RAM]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 205, an example is shown in which the work area of the game RAM area is used as one area in the main RAM 6103 arranged in the area within a predetermined range from the address “F000H” in the memory map. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment has a simultaneous fluctuation function, various control processes related to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and various control processes related to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol It is desirable to be able to efficiently switch between. In order to solve this problem, for example, the work area of the game RAM area in the main RAM 6103 is divided into a first work area starting from the address "F000H" and a second work area starting from the address "F100H". 1 Various control processes related to the variation display of the special symbol may be executed using the first work area, and various control processes related to the variation display of the second special symbol may be executed using the second work area.

In this case, for example, an identifier indicating whether to use the first work area or the second work area is added to various data used in various control processes related to the variable display of the special symbol. Then, based on the identifier added to the data to be processed, if the identifier corresponds to the use of the first work area (various control processes for variable display of the first special symbol), the first operation The upper level (“F0H”) of the start address of the area is loaded, and various control processes are performed on the data to be processed in the first work area. On the other hand, if the identifier added to the data to be processed corresponds to the use of the second work area (various control processes for variable display of the second special symbol), it is higher than the start address of the second work area. ("F1H") is loaded, and various control processing predetermineds are performed for the data to be processed in the second work area.

When such a configuration of the work area is adopted for the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, between various control processes related to the variation display of the first special symbol and various control processes related to the variation display of the second special symbol. Can be switched efficiently. That is, when the configuration of the work area of the game RAM area of this example is used, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently in the pachinko game machine 6001 having the simultaneous fluctuation function. , The processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 having the simultaneous fluctuation function is shown, but the game is not limited to such playability, and the processing related to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is efficient. You can do it well.

In this example, various control processes related to the variation display of the first special symbol are executed using the first work area, and various control processes related to the variation display of the second special symbol are performed using the second work area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the type of special symbol, which of the first work area and the second work area is used in each processing unit performed in the progress control of the game is defined by the identifier added to the data to be processed. However, the work area to be used in the process may be selected based on the identifier. In such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently select the work area to be used according to the identifier attached to the data to be processed in the processing unit and perform a predetermined process. As a result, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

<Type of game state>
Next, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101 will be described.

First, as the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101, there are a "big hit game state" and a "small hit game state" in which the expectations of prize balls are different from each other.

The jackpot gaming state is a gaming state in which a round game occurs in which the shutter 6053a of the first winning opening 6053 or the shutter 6054a of the second winning opening 6054 has a long opening period (that is, a period of one round) (for example, 30 seconds). Therefore, it is a game state in which a player can expect a big prize ball. That is, in the big hit game state, the repeated mode of the open state and the closed state of the shutter of the big winning opening becomes advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, the small hit game state is a game state in which a round game occurs in which the period of one round is shorter (for example, 1.8 seconds) than the big hit game state, and the player cannot expect a large prize ball. is there. That is, in the small hit game state, the repeated mode of the open state and the closed state of the shutter of the big winning opening is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the big hit game state. In the present embodiment, the small hit game state is when the "small hit" is won in the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 6045. Only, it is a game state to shift.

In the big hit game state, it is possible to perform a round game, while in the small hit game state, basically, the round game is not provided, and the big winning opening where the accessory continuous operation device does not operate is opened and closed. May be possible. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player, but after the end of the small hit game, the game state shifts to a more advantageous game state than before the transition to the small hit game state. It may not be allowed. However, if the large winning opening with a specific area opens during the small hit game state, the condition device operates when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the accessory continuous operation device operates, the small hit After the end of the gaming state, the game may shift to the big hit gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, and the number of rounds may be counted even in the small hit gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which a small hit is provided for the first special symbol and a small hit is provided for the second special symbol has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the present invention, when a small hit is provided for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a small hit is provided for the first special symbol, and a small hit is not provided for the second special symbol. , And, the same applies to any case where a small hit is not provided for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, as the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101, there are "probability variation game state" (high probability game state) and "normal game state" (low probability game state) in which the winning probabilities of "big hits" are different from each other. is there. The probabilistic gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the "big hit" is high, and the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the "big hit" is lower than that in the probabilistic gaming state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the "big hit" in the normal gaming state is, for example, 1/199 (at the time of setting "6") to 1/259 (setting "6") depending on the set value. It changes in the range of 1 ”). On the other hand, the winning probability of the "big hit" in the probabilistic game state changes, for example, in the range of 1 / 39.9 (at the time of setting "6") to 1 / 51.8 (at the time of setting "1").

Further, as the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101, there are "short-time game state" (high winning game state) in which the winning probability of the normal symbol (probability that the normal symbol becomes the "hit" mode) is different from each other. There is a "non-time saving game state" (low winning game state).

The "time saving game state" referred to in the present specification is a game state in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is high. That is, the time-saving game state is a game state in which the ordinary electric accessory 6046 (blade member) provided in the second start port 6045 is likely to be in an open state (a game state in which a second start port winning is likely to occur). It is a game state that is advantageous for the person. The time-saving game state ends when the "big hit" is determined, or when the variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined number of time-saving times (for example, 100 times) is executed.

On the other hand, the "non-time-saving game state" is a game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is lower than that in the "time-saving game state". Therefore, the non-time saving game state is a game state in which the normal electric accessory 6046 (blade member) is unlikely to be opened (a game state in which the second start opening winning is unlikely to occur), which is disadvantageous to the player. is there.

Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the combination of the above-mentioned gaming states other than the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state changes. The combination of game states changes according to, for example, an effect mode managed and transition-controlled by the sub-control circuit 6200.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, a gaming state in which a probabilistic gaming state and a time-saving gaming state occur at the same time (a state in which there is a high-probability time-saving), and a probabilistic gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state occur at the same time. A game state (a state of "high accuracy no time reduction") is provided. In addition, in the state of "high accuracy no time reduction", it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, so it is also called "latent gaming state". Further, in the present embodiment, a gaming state in which a normal gaming state and a time-saving gaming state occur at the same time (a state in which there is a "low probability time saving") and a gaming state in which a normal gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state occur at the same time (a gaming state in which a normal gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state occur at the same time A state of "no low accuracy time reduction") is also provided.

<Simultaneous fluctuation function of special symbols>
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine of a type in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. Then, when the simultaneous fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the following various processes are performed.

If one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is already changing to become a big hit at the start of the change, the change display of one special symbol is a loss or a small hit. It is controlled so that it becomes a variable display. That is, if the other special symbol is already undergoing a big hit at the start of the change of one special symbol, the lottery result of one special symbol will not be a big hit, and internally, one of them will be a big hit. For the variable display of the special symbol, a lottery of the variable display (missing symbol or small hit symbol) is performed so that the symbol determination process of the loss or the small hit is forcibly performed.

Further, when the symbol of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is confirmed (stop display), one special symbol is a jackpot symbol (specific mode) and the other special symbol is changing. In this case, the symbol determination process is performed so that the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly changed to the variable display of loss (missing symbol).

Further, in the case of shifting to the jackpot operation when the symbol of one special symbol is confirmed, a process is performed to prevent the other special symbol from starting to fluctuate. Specifically, when shifting to the jackpot operation when the symbol of one special symbol is confirmed, the special symbol pause flag provided for the other special symbol is set to the ON state, and the other special symbol does not start to fluctuate. Then, after the jackpot game performed by confirming the jackpot of one special symbol is completed, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set (cleared) to the off state.

Further, in the case of shifting to the small hit operation when the symbol of one special symbol (second special symbol in the present embodiment) is determined, the processing for interrupting the variable display of the other special symbol is performed. Specifically, when shifting to the small hit operation when the symbol of one special symbol is confirmed, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set to the on state to interrupt the variable display of the other special symbol, and one of them. After the end of the small hit game performed by confirming the small hit of the special symbol of, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set (cleared) to the off state. In addition, when the variation display of the special symbol is interrupted, the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol is interrupted and the special symbol is kept changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the fluctuation display time of one special symbol (waiting time for a special symbol described later) has elapsed and the confirmed symbol of one special symbol is a jackpot symbol (at the time of finalizing the jackpot symbol), When the other special symbol shifts from the demo waiting state to the start of fluctuation (the other special symbol wins a prize), that is, when the fluctuation display of one special symbol ends in the jackpot symbol (specific mode). When the other special symbol starts to change (at the time of winning), the following processing is performed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 206A, an example of processing in a case where the variation display of one special symbol ends at the jackpot symbol and the variation start of the other special symbol overlaps will be described. FIG. 206A shows the processing contents for each special symbol when the variation display of one special symbol ends in the jackpot symbol (specific mode) and the variation start of the other special symbol (at the time of winning) overlaps. It is a time chart for explaining.

In this case, first, when the symbol of one special symbol is confirmed (when the jackpot is confirmed: t1 in FIG. 206A), the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set to the ON state, and the other special symbol starts to fluctuate. Try not to. Next, after the end of the jackpot game performed by confirming the jackpot of one special symbol (t2 in FIG. 206A), the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set (cleared) to the off state. As a result, the variable display of the other special symbol is started. In addition, in the case of having the game property that the electric support is attached in the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set to the off state after the end of the game period of the electric support, and the other special symbol is set. Fluctuation display of is started. If the electric support is not attached after the jackpot game ends, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set to the off state at the end of the jackpot game, and the variation display of the other special symbol is started.

However, in this case, the other special symbol is not forcibly displayed as a variable display in which the stopped symbol is lost or a small hit, and the lottery result of the other special symbol (result of the big hit lottery, etc.) is maintained. , On the other hand, the variable display of the special symbol is not started. Therefore, by performing such a process, it is possible to prevent wastefully digesting one reserved ball of the other special symbol. Further, in this case, when the lottery result of the other special symbol is a big hit, the other special symbol is not forcibly stopped by the lost symbol immediately after the big hit game of one special symbol is completed, so that the other special symbol is not forcibly stopped to change at the same time. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game with respect to the variable function.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display of one special symbol ends with the jackpot symbol and the fluctuation start of the other special symbol (at the time of winning) overlaps, the other special symbol does not start to fluctuate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Not only when the variation display of one special symbol ends with the jackpot symbol and when the variation of the other special symbol starts (at the time of winning), but also as shown in FIG. 206B, the other special symbol The timing of the fluctuation start may be the timing during the period from when the fluctuation display of one special symbol ends with the jackpot symbol (t1 in FIG. 206B) to a predetermined time before (Δt = t1-t0 in FIG. 206B). For example, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol may be set to the on state internally so that the other special symbol does not start to fluctuate. In this case as well, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained. The period (Δt = t1-t0) from when the variation display of one of the special symbols ends with the jackpot symbol to a predetermined time before can be appropriately set.

<Structure of special symbol work area table and special symbol related definition data table>
Next, the configuration of each special symbol work area table and each special symbol related definition data table provided in the main RAM 6103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 210. Note that FIG. 207 is a configuration diagram of the first special symbol work area table, and FIG. 208 is a configuration diagram of the first special symbol-related definition data table. Further, FIG. 209 is a configuration diagram of the second special symbol work area table, and FIG. 210 is a configuration diagram of the second special symbol-related definition data table.

[1st special symbol work area table]
The first special symbol work area table stores various information used in various control processes (various modules) for variable display of the first special symbol.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 207, in the first special symbol work area table, as a storage area, a first special symbol control state number area, a first special symbol per flag area, and a first special symbol hold number area , 1st special symbol game state number area, 1st special symbol number area, 1st special symbol demo display state flag area, 1st special symbol game state transition offset area, 1st special symbol waiting time management timer area, 1st special A symbol pause flag area, a first special symbol game state designation parameter area, a first special symbol effect effect variation table parameter area, and a first special symbol stop symbol management number parameter area are provided, and these storage areas are used for the first special symbol work. They are arranged in this order from the start address ("W_T1_YY00") side of the area table. In the first special symbol work area table, as shown in FIG. 207, the address of each storage area is defined by an offset value (relative value) from the start address of the first special symbol work area table.

In the first special symbol work area table, the first special symbol waiting time management timer area is composed of a 4-byte area, and each other storage area is composed of a 1-byte area.

In the first special symbol hit flag area in the first special symbol work area table, information indicating the result (big hit or loss) of the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) performed at the time of winning the first start opening is stored. Stored. Further, in the first special symbol pause flag area, the value (on value / off value) of the special symbol pause flag of the first special symbol used in the processing control at the time of simultaneous fluctuation is stored.

Further, in the first special symbol waiting time management timer area, one timer is configured in the 2-byte area on the upper side (first address side) on the address, and one timer is configured in the 2-byte area on the lower side. In the present specification, the former is referred to as a high-order 2-byte timer, and the latter is referred to as a low-order 2-byte timer. Each 2-byte timer is managed separately, and the count value of the timer is stored in each 2-byte area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the variation display time (special symbol waiting time) of the special symbols (first and second special symbols) is divided into the variation display time of the first half and the variation display time of the second half, and each variation. The display time is managed separately by a 2-byte timer. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the variable display time (special symbol waiting time) in the first half of the special symbol is managed by the upper 2-byte timer, and the variable display time (special symbol waiting time) in the latter half of the special symbol is managed by the lower 2 It is managed by a byte timer. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display time of the first half of the special symbol may be managed by the lower 2-byte timer, and the variable display time of the latter half of the special symbol may be managed by the upper 2-byte timer.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the control process of the first special symbol, various monitoring times other than the fluctuation display time (special symbol waiting time) of the first special symbol are set in the upper 2-byte timer of the first special symbol. To. For example, as will be described later, the interval time until the big hit game starts (the special symbol hit start display time described later), the interval time until the big hit game ends (the special symbol hit end display time described later), the fixed waiting time of the specific symbol, The display time between rounds is set in the upper 2-byte timer. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be configured in which these monitoring times other than the variable display time (special symbol waiting time) are set in the lower 2-byte timer.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which two timers (upper 2-byte timer and lower 2-byte timer) are both configured by 2 bytes has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, production specifications and games. The configuration of the two timers can be arbitrarily set according to the nature and the like. For example, each timer may be configured with a number of bytes other than 2 bytes, or the number of bytes of the two timers may be different from each other.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the variable display time of the special symbol is divided into the variable display time of the first half and the latter half and each time is managed by the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer has been described. Not limited to. The period managed by each of the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer may be different from each other. For example, the period from the start of the variable display time of the special symbol to the time that can be counted by the 2-byte timer is managed by the upper 2-byte timer, and after the counting of the upper 2-byte timer is completed, the remaining period is the lower 2-byte timer. You may manage it with.

Further, in the present embodiment, even for a predetermined monitoring time other than the fluctuation display time of the special symbol, if the time is long (a period that cannot be counted by the 2-byte timer), the monitoring time is concerned. May be divided into two, and the divided monitoring time may be managed by the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer, respectively.

By providing the timer having the above-described configuration, for example, the following effects can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the system cycle time (processing cycle related to game control) is 6 msec, so the period that can be monitored by the 2-byte timer is 65536 × 6 msec, and 4 when monitoring a longer time. A byte timer is needed. For example, when the entire variation display time (special symbol waiting time) of the special symbol is a long time of about 10 minutes, a 4-byte timer is required. However, if the time that can be monitored by the 2-byte timer, such as the short-time fluctuation display time of the entire special symbol or the interval time until the start of the big hit game, is monitored by the 4-byte timer, it is equivalent to 4 bytes. Of the timer areas of, the timer area for the upper 2 bytes is unused, which is not efficient.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the 4-byte timer is composed of two separate 2-byte timers, and the fluctuation display time of the first half and the fluctuation display time of the second half of the special symbol are set separately (independently). ) When the configuration is managed by a 2-byte timer, both of the two 2-byte timers are used even if the entire fluctuation display time of the special symbol is short, so there are no unused timers. .. Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, a short time such as an interval time until the start of the big hit game is monitored by using one of the 2-byte timers. Therefore, in the timer configuration of the present embodiment, various monitoring times can be efficiently managed by using the timer area. That is, in the timer configuration of the present embodiment, various processes performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be efficiently executed, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

Further, for example, when two 2-byte timers are provided and one of the 2-byte timers is used to monitor the fluctuation display time of a special symbol for a short time or the interval time until the start of the big hit game, a long time is used. When monitoring the fluctuation display time of a special symbol, a method of monitoring by adding up the count value of the upper 2-byte timer and the count value of the lower 2-byte timer can be considered. However, as in the present embodiment, the 4-byte timer is composed of two separate 2-byte timers, and the fluctuation display time of the first half and the fluctuation display time of the second half of the special symbol are separately (independently) 2 bytes. In the case of the configuration managed by the timer of, it is not necessary to add up the count value of the upper 2-byte timer and the count value of the lower 2-byte timer. In this case, since the total processing of the count values of the timers can be omitted, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced. In the present embodiment, an example in which various times are managed by two timers has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which various times are managed by one timer may be used.

[1st special symbol related definition data table]
In the first special symbol-related definition data table (index table), various information (storage area, storage area,) required when reading information used in various control processes (various modules) of the variation display of the first special symbol from the main RAM 6103 is performed. Data area, address of constant definition value) is stored. Therefore, in various control processes for variable display of the first special symbol, desired information can be read directly from the main RAM 6103 by referring to various addresses defined in the first special symbol-related definition data table. .. The index table referred to here may be a storage body of information in which reference information is stored, or may be a set of structures or variables.

As shown in FIG. 208, the first special symbol-related definition data table includes a storage area for the first special symbol selection value (“0” in the present embodiment) and a second special symbol in the second special symbol work area table. Storage area for the address of the hit flag area (lower address), storage area for the address of the second special symbol pause flag area in the second special symbol work area table, start address of the first special symbol hold storage area (lower address) ) Storage area, storage area for the address (lower side address) of the first special symbol hold storage read pointer area, storage area for the address (lower side address) of the first special symbol hold storage write pointer area, first special symbol work Storage area for the start address of the first special symbol waiting time management timer area in the area table, storage area for the address of the first special symbol game state specification parameter area in the first special symbol work area table, second special symbol work area Storage area of the start address of the table, storage area of the start address of the first special symbol fluctuation start setting data table, storage area of the start address of the first special symbol confirmation setting data table 1, storage area of the first special symbol confirmation setting data table 2 A storage area for the start address, a storage area for the start address of the first special symbol game end setting data table, and a storage area for the start address of the second special symbol-related definition data table are provided, and these storage areas are the first. The data are arranged in this order from the start address ("D_T1_XX00") side of the special symbol-related definition data table. Further, in the first special symbol-related definition data table, as shown in FIG. 208, the address of each storage area is defined by an offset value (relative value) from the start address of the first special symbol-related definition data table. There is.

In the first special symbol-related definition data table, the storage area of the first special symbol selection value (0) and the address (lower address) of the second special symbol per flag area in the second special symbol work area table are stored. Area, storage area for the start address (lower address) of the first special symbol hold storage area, storage area for the address (lower address) of the first special symbol hold storage read pointer area, and first special symbol hold storage write The storage area of the address (lower address) of the pointer area is composed of a 1-byte area, and each other storage area is composed of a 2-byte area.

As described above, the address information of various information required for the control process of the variable display of the first special symbol is collectively stored in the first special symbol-related definition data table. For example, in the first special symbol-related definition data table, as shown in FIG. 208, the addresses of the first special symbol waiting time management timer area and the first special symbol game state specification parameter area in the first special symbol work area table. Is stored. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the various control processes of the variation display of the first special symbol, the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table is set in the IX register or the like in advance, so that the first special symbol-related definition data table is set. The information stored in each storage area in the room can be directly called from the work area of the main RAM 6103.

That is, by providing the first special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration, when reading necessary information from the work area of the main RAM 6103, the reference processing of the address data of the information stored in the work area is omitted. be able to. In this case, in various control processes for variable display of the first special symbol, an instruction code for referring to the address data of the necessary information is not required when reading the necessary information. Therefore, when the first special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration is provided, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208, the first special symbol-related definition data table includes the start address of the second special symbol work area table, the second special symbol per flag area in the second special symbol work area table, and the second. The address of the special symbol pause flag area is stored. When such a configuration is provided, information on the second special symbol hit flag and the second special symbol pause flag in the second special symbol work area table is required in various control processes of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, the special symbol-related definition data table switching process (the process of switching the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table preset in the IX register or the like to the address of the second special symbol-related definition data table) is performed. Information on the second special symbol hit flag and the second special symbol pause flag can be directly read from the second special symbol work area table using the first special symbol related definition data table.

In this case, in various control processes of the variable display of the first special symbol, an instruction code for executing the switching process of the special symbol-related definition data table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, when the first special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration is provided, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

Further, in the storage area (last storage area) of the last 2 bytes (final address and the address immediately before it) of the first special symbol-related definition data table, the head of the second special symbol-related definition data table is set. The address is stored. Further, as will be described later, the start address of the first special symbol-related definition data table is stored in the storage area for the last two bytes of the second special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 210 described later). When such a configuration is provided, mutual access is possible between the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table, and processing at the time of simultaneous fluctuation can be executed more efficiently. , The processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

[2nd special symbol work area table]
The second special symbol work area table stores various information used in various control processes (various modules) for variable display of the second special symbol.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 209, in the second special symbol work area table, the second special symbol control state number area, the second special symbol per flag area, and the second special symbol hold number area are stored as storage areas. , 2nd special symbol game state number area, 2nd special symbol number area, 2nd special symbol demo display state flag area, 2nd special symbol game state transition offset area, 2nd special symbol waiting time management timer area, 2nd special A symbol pause flag area, a second special symbol game state designation parameter area, a second special symbol effect effect variation table parameter area, and a second special symbol stop symbol management number parameter area are provided, and these storage areas are used for the second special symbol work. They are arranged in this order from the start address (“W_T2_YY00”) side of the area table. In FIG. 209, for convenience of explanation, the offset value from the start address of each storage area in the second special symbol work area table is omitted, but each storage in the second special symbol work area table is omitted. The address of the area is defined by an offset value (relative value) from the start address of the second special symbol work area table.

Further, in the second special symbol work area table, the second special symbol waiting time management timer area is composed of a 4-byte area, and each other storage area is composed of a 1-byte area. That is, the configuration of the second special symbol work area table (type of stored information, storage order, size of each storage area) is the same as that of the first special symbol work area table.

In the second special symbol hit flag area in the second special symbol work area table, the result (big hit, small hit or loss) of the big hit lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) performed at the time of winning the second start opening is displayed. The information to be shown is stored. Further, in the second special symbol pause flag area, the value (on value / off value) of the special symbol pause flag of the second special symbol used in the processing control at the time of simultaneous fluctuation is stored.

Further, the second special symbol waiting time management timer area (4-byte area) is composed of an upper 2-byte timer and a lower 2-byte timer, similarly to the first special symbol management timer area.

Then, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time of the first half of the second special symbol is managed by the upper two-byte timer, and the fluctuation display time of the latter half of the second special symbol is managed by the lower two-byte timer. Further, in the present embodiment, in the control process of the second special symbol, the monitoring time other than the fluctuation display time (special symbol waiting time) of the second special symbol (for example, the interval time until the start of the big hit game and the end of the big hit game). The interval time, the fixed waiting time of the specific symbol, the display time between rounds, etc.) are managed by the upper 2-byte timer of the second special symbol, but these monitoring times may be managed by the lower 2-byte timer.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timer configuration and the monitoring time management method of the second special symbol are the same as those of the first special symbol. Therefore, by adopting the timer configuration and monitoring time management method of the second special symbol, the same effects as the above-mentioned various effects obtained by the timer configuration and monitoring time management method of the first special symbol can be obtained. Be done.

[Second special symbol related definition data table]
In the second special symbol-related definition data table, various information (storage area, data area, constants) required when reading information used in various control processes (various modules) of the variation display of the second special symbol from the main RAM 6103 is performed. Defined value address) is stored. Therefore, in the various control processes of the variation display of the second special symbol, desired information can be read directly from the main RAM 6103 by referring to the various addresses defined in the second special symbol related definition data table. ..

As shown in FIG. 210, the second special symbol-related definition data table includes a storage area for the second special symbol selection value (“1” in the present embodiment) and a first special symbol in the first special symbol work area table. Storage area for the address of the hit flag area (lower address), storage area for the address of the first special symbol pause flag area in the first special symbol work area table, start address of the second special symbol hold storage area (lower address) ) Storage area, storage area for the address (lower side address) of the second special symbol hold storage read pointer area, storage area for the address (lower side address) of the second special symbol hold storage write pointer area, second special symbol work Storage area for the start address of the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in the area table, storage area for the address of the second special symbol game state specification parameter area in the second special symbol work area table, first special symbol work area Storage area for the start address of the table, storage area for the start address of the second special symbol fluctuation start setting data table, storage area for the start address of the second special symbol confirmation setting data table 1, and storage area for the second special symbol confirmation setting data table 2. A storage area for the start address, a storage area for the start address of the second special symbol game end setting data table, and a storage area for the start address of the first special symbol-related definition data table are provided, and these storage areas are the second. The data are arranged in this order from the start address ("D_T2_XX00") side of the special symbol-related definition data table. In FIG. 210, for convenience of explanation, the offset value from the start address of each storage area in the second special symbol-related definition data table is omitted, but in the second special symbol-related definition data table, the offset value is omitted. The address of each storage area is defined by an offset value (relative value) from the start address of the second special symbol-related definition data table.

Further, in the second special symbol-related definition data table, the storage area of the second special symbol selection value, the storage area of the address (lower address) of the first special symbol per flag area in the first special symbol work area table, and the first 2 The storage area of the start address (lower address) of the special symbol hold storage area, the storage area of the address (lower address) of the second special symbol hold storage read pointer area, and the second special symbol hold storage write pointer area. Each storage area of the address (lower address) is composed of a 1-byte area, and each other storage area is composed of a 2-byte area. That is, the configuration of the second special symbol-related definition data table (type of stored information, storage order, size of each storage area) is the same as that of the first special symbol-related definition data table.

As described above, the address information of various information required for the control process of the variation display of the second special symbol is collectively stored in the second special symbol-related definition data table. For example, in the second special symbol-related definition data table, as shown in FIG. 210, the addresses of the second special symbol waiting time management timer area and the second special symbol game state specification parameter area in the second special symbol work area table. Is stored. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the various control processes of the variation display of the second special symbol, the address of the second special symbol-related definition data table is set in the IX register or the like in advance, so that the second special symbol-related definition data table is set. The information stored in each storage area in the room can be directly called from the work area of the main RAM 6103.

That is, by providing the second special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration, when reading necessary information from the work area of the main RAM 6103, the reference processing of the address data of the information stored in the work area is omitted. be able to. In this case, in various control processes for variable display of the second special symbol, an instruction code for referring to the address data of the necessary information is not required when reading the necessary information. Therefore, when the second special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration is provided, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

Further, in the second special symbol-related definition data table, as shown in FIG. 210, the start address of the first special symbol work area table, the first special symbol per flag area in the first special symbol work area table, and the first The address of the special symbol pause flag area is stored. When such a configuration is provided, information on the first special symbol hit flag and the first special symbol pause flag in the first special symbol work area table is required in various control processes of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, the special symbol-related definition data table switching process (the process of switching the address of the second special symbol-related definition data table preset in the IX register or the like to the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table) is performed. Without using the second special symbol related definition data table, it is possible to directly read the information of the first special symbol hit flag and the first special symbol pause flag from the first special symbol work area table.

In this case, in various control processes of the variation display of the second special symbol, an instruction code for executing the switching process of the special symbol-related definition data table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, when the second special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration is provided, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

Further, in the storage area (last storage area) of the last 2 bytes (final address and the address immediately before it) of the second special symbol-related definition data table, the head of the first special symbol-related definition data table is set. The address is stored. Further, as described above, the start address of the second special symbol-related definition data table is stored in the storage area for the last two bytes of the first special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 208). When such a configuration is provided, mutual access is possible between the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table, and processing at the time of simultaneous fluctuation can be executed more efficiently. , The processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

[Various variations of the special symbol work area table]
(1) Modification 1
As described above, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the first special symbol work area table (type of stored information, storage order, size of each storage area) and the configuration of the second special symbol work area table are mutually exclusive. Although the same example has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the configuration of the first special symbol work area table and the configuration of the second special symbol work area table may be different from each other.

When the configuration of the first special symbol work area table and the configuration of the second special symbol work area table are the same as in the present embodiment, the start address of the first special symbol work area table is used. The offset value of the address to the storage area of the information of the predetermined item is the same as the offset value of the address from the start address of the second special symbol work area table to the storage area of the information of the predetermined item. In this case, the offset value setting process when reading the information of the predetermined item from each special symbol work table can be shared, and the capacity of the process program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

However, for example, when the number of information items (types) stored in each special symbol work area table is different from each other, the address from the start address of the first special symbol work area table to the information storage area of a predetermined item. There is a possibility that the offset value of is different from the offset value of the address from the start address of the second special symbol work area table to the information storage area of the predetermined item. In this case, the offset value setting process when reading the information of the predetermined item from the first special symbol work area table and the offset value setting process when reading the information of the predetermined item from the second special symbol work area table. Need to be provided separately, which may increase the capacity of the processing program.

FIG. 211 shows a modified example of the special symbol work area table for solving such a problem. FIG. 211 is a diagram showing the configuration of the first special symbol work area table in the first modification.

The items (types), arrangement order, and sizes of the storage areas provided in the first special symbol work area table in this example are the same as the configurations of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 207. Further, although not shown, in this example, the configuration after the first special symbol game state specification parameter area (final address side) in the first special symbol work area table and the second special in the second special symbol work area table. The configuration after the symbol game state specification parameter area is the same, and the configuration on the start address side of the first special symbol game state specification parameter area in the first special symbol work area table is the first in the second special symbol work area table. 2 The configuration on the start address side of the special symbol game state specification parameter area shall be different.

In this example, in the first special symbol work area table, the start address (“W_T1_YY0A”) of the first special symbol work area table is defined as the first start address (start address A), and the first special symbol game The address (“W_T1_YY0B”) immediately before (upper side) of the state specification parameter area is defined as the second start address (start address B). Then, as shown in FIG. 211, the respective addresses are set to the start address for the first special symbol game state designation parameter area, the first special symbol effect effect variation table parameter area, and the first special symbol stop symbol management number parameter area. It is specified by two types, an offset value from A and an offset value from the start address B.

Further, although not shown, in this example, the start address (“W_T2_YY0C”) of the second special symbol work area table is defined as the first start address (start address C) also in the second special symbol work area table. In both cases, the address (“W_T2_YY0D”) immediately before (upper side) of the second special symbol game state designation parameter area is defined as the second start address (start address D). Then, for the second special symbol game state designation parameter area, the second special symbol effect effect variation table parameter area, and the second special symbol stop symbol management number parameter area, the respective addresses are set to the offset value from the start address C and the start. It is specified by two types of offset values from the address D.

When the configuration of this example is adopted as the configuration of the first special symbol work area table and the second special symbol work area table, each item after the first special symbol game state specification parameter area in the first special symbol work area table The offset value from the start address B of the storage area is the same as the offset value from the start address D of the storage area of each item after the second special symbol game state specification parameter area in the second special symbol work area table. In this case, by using the start address B and the start address D as the reference of the offset value, the offset value setting process when reading the information after the first special symbol game state specification parameter area from the first special symbol work area table is performed. , The offset value setting process when reading the information after the second special symbol game state specification parameter area from the second special symbol work area table can be shared. Further, in this case, the information reading process after the first special symbol game state designation parameter area and the information reading process after the second special symbol game state designation parameter area can be shared. Therefore, when the above configurations of the first special symbol work area table and the second special symbol work area table in this example are adopted, a processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 even if both table configurations are different from each other. Capacity can be reduced.

(2) Modification example 2
In the present embodiment, the configuration has been described in which only the information related to the first special symbol is specified in the first special symbol work area table, and only the information related to the second special symbol is specified in the second special symbol work area table. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least a part of the information about the other special symbol is specified in one special symbol work area table, and the storage position of the information about the other special symbol stored in one special symbol work area table is set to one of the same items. It may be set to a position (next storage address) one lower than the storage position (storage address) of information related to the special symbol.

For example, a second special symbol per flag area is provided at an address next to (one lower side) the first special symbol per flag area in the first special symbol work area table shown in FIG. 207, and the second special is shown in FIG. 209. The first special symbol hit flag area may be provided at the address next to (one lower side) the second special symbol hit flag area in the symbol work area table.

In this case, in the control process of the variation display of the first special symbol, when the first special symbol hit flag (own information) is referred to, the first special symbol work area table is displayed without correcting the address. When the 1 special symbol per flag is read and the 2nd special symbol per flag (other party's information) is referred to, the address is corrected by 1 addition (+1), and the 2nd special is added from the 1st special symbol work area table. Read the symbol hit flag. On the other hand, in the control process of the variation display of the second special symbol, when the second special symbol hit flag (own information) is referred to, the second special symbol work area table is displayed as the second from the second special symbol work area table without correcting the address. When the special symbol hit flag is read and the first special symbol hit flag (other party's information) is referred to, the address is corrected by 1 addition (+1), and the first special symbol is added from the second special symbol work area table. Read the hit flag.

That is, in this example, in the control process of the variable display of the first special symbol, the information about the first special symbol (own information) or the information about the second special symbol (information of the other party) is obtained from the first special symbol work area table. Information about the second special symbol (own information) or information about the first special symbol from the second special symbol work area table in the process of reading (address set process) and the control process of the variable display of the second special symbol. Since the process (address set process) when reading (other party's information) is the same, both processes can be shared. Therefore, when the configuration of the special symbol work area table of this example is adopted, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

(3) Modification 3
In the present embodiment, the configuration has been described in which only the information related to the first special symbol is specified in the first special symbol work area table, and only the information related to the second special symbol is specified in the second special symbol work area table. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, like the first special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 208) and the second special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 210) of the present embodiment, the last two bytes of the first special symbol work area table. The start address of the second special symbol work area table is stored in the storage area (last storage area) of (the last address and the address immediately before it), and the last two bytes of the second special symbol work area table are stored. The start address of the first special symbol work area table may be stored in the storage area. When such a configuration is provided, mutual entry is possible between the first special symbol work area table and the second special symbol work area table, and processing at the time of simultaneous fluctuation can be executed more efficiently. , The processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

In the present invention, for example, the configuration of the first special symbol work area table and the second special symbol work area table may be a combination of the above-mentioned modification 2 and the above-mentioned modification 3. Also in this case, the same effect as that obtained in the above-mentioned modified examples 2 and 3 can be obtained.

[Modification example of special symbol related definition data table]
As described above, in the present embodiment, an example in which the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table are separately provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table may be configured by one special symbol-related definition data table (index table). Even in such a configuration, the address of each storage area can be specified by the offset value (relative value) from the start address of the special symbol-related definition data table in the special symbol-related definition data table.

In this case, the data for mutual entry (counterpart side) stored in the storage area (last storage area) of the last 2 bytes (last address and the address immediately before it) of each special symbol-related definition data table. The start address of the special symbol-related definition data table) is no longer required, and the amount of data managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

Further, as described later, in the control process of the variable display of the special symbol, when the process for the first special symbol is performed, the start address of the first special symbol related definition data table is set in the IX register and the second special symbol is set. When processing the symbol, the start address of the second special symbol-related definition data table is set in the IX register. That is, in the control process of the variable display of the special symbol, the set process of the start address of the special symbol-related definition data table is switched to the IX register according to the type of the special symbol to be processed. However, when the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table are configured as one special symbol-related definition data table, the special symbol-related definition data is used in the control process of the variable display of the special symbol. It is not necessary to switch the set processing of the start address of the table to the IX register, and the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 6101 of the main control circuit 6100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 245.

[External masqueradable interrupt processing]
First, the external masqueradable interrupt processing executed under the control of the main CPU 6101 will be described with reference to FIG. 212. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when a power is cut off. Note that FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external masqueradable interrupt processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 saves the protection register (S6001). The protection registers to be saved in this process are accumulators A and A', flag registers F and F', pair registers BC and B'C', pair registers DE and D'E', and pair registers HL and H. 'L', IX register and IY register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 reads out the state of the input port 2 (S6002).

The main control circuit 6100 is provided with three types of input ports: input port 0, input port 1, and input port 2. At input port 0, on / off states such as each start port winning ball switch, setting key 6080, and out ball count switch (not shown) are set. In the input port 1, the on / off states of the count switches 6053c and 6054c, the general winning ball switches 6051a and 6052a, the large winning port switch, the discharge port switch, the passing ball switch 6043a and the like are set. Further, in the input port 2, an on / off state of a power failure signal, a RAM clear switch 6121, a sensor abnormality detection signal, a frame radio wave sensor, an open signal, a magnetic sensor, a vibration sensor, a solenoid monitoring sensor and the like is set.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the power interruption signal is being detected (S6003).

When the main CPU 6101 determines in S6003 that the power interruption signal is not being detected (NO in S6003), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6005 described later. On the other hand, in S6003, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the power interruption signal is being detected (YES in S6003), the main CPU 6101 sets the XINT detection flag to the ON state (ON value) (S6004). .. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating whether or not the power is cut off, and its value is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 6103.

After the processing of S6004 or when the determination of S6003 is NO, the main CPU 6101 performs the restoration processing of the protection register saved in S6001 (S6005). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6006) and ends the external masqueradable interrupt processing.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 213, a system timer interrupt process executed in a cycle of 2 msec (interrupt cycle) under the control of the main CPU 6101 will be described. Note that FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the system timer interrupt processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 saves the protection register (S6011). The protection registers to be saved in this process are accumulators A and A', flag registers F and F', pair registers BC and B'C', pair registers DE and D'E', and pair registers HL and H. 'L', IX register and IY register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is in the ON state (S6012).

In S6012, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the XINT detection flag is in the ON state (at the time of power failure detection) (when the determination in S6012 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6026 described later. On the other hand, in S6012, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the XINT detection flag is not in the ON state (NO in S6012), the main CPU 6101 performs an interrupt enable process (S6013).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of reading the state of the input port (S6014).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the game is permitted (S6015). In this process, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the value of the activation control flag (activation state).

The start control flag is a flag for determining the type of start state such as power recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, and RAM clear, and is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 6103. The value of the start control flag is the state information (on value (Low) or off value (High): operation information) of the RAM clear switch 6121 when the power is turned on, and the state information (on value (High)) of the setting key 6080. Off value (Low): Operation information). Then, in the present embodiment, the type of the current start state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) is determined by the combination of both state information (value of the start control flag).

Specifically, when the RAM clear switch 6121 is an off value (High) and the setting key 6080 is an off value (Low) (for example, the value of the start control flag = "10B"), the power is cut off. It is determined that it is time to return. When the RAM clear switch 6121 is the ON value (Low) and the setting key 6080 is the ON value (High) (for example, the value of the start control flag = "01B"), it is determined that the setting is being changed. When the RAM clear switch 6121 is an off value (High) and the setting key 6080 is an ON value (High) (for example, the value of the start control flag = "11B"), it is determined that the setting is being confirmed. .. Further, when the RAM clear switch 6121 is an on value (Low) and the setting key 6080 is an off value (Low) (for example, the value of the start control flag = "00B"), it is determined that the RAM is cleared. Will be done. Then, in the determination process of S6015, if the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating other than setting change and setting confirmation, a YES determination (game permission state) is obtained. In the present embodiment, an example in which the ON value of the RAM clear switch 6121 is set to the Low level and the off value is set to the High level has been described. However, the ON value of the RAM clear switch 6121 is set to the High level and the off value is set to the Low level. May be good. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the on value of the setting key 6080 is set to the High level and the off value is set to the Low level has been described, but the on value of the setting key 6080 may be set to the Low level and the off value may be set to the High level. ..

In S6015, when it is determined that the main CPU 6101 is not in the game permission state (NO in S6015), the main CPU 6101 performs the setting control process (S6016). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a setting change process or a setting confirmation process. That is, in the present embodiment, the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing are performed in the system timer interrupt processing performed in the cycle of 2 msec, and are performed in the case where the game is not permitted. The details of the setting control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 214 described later. Then, after the processing of S6016, the main CPU 6101 performs the processing of S6026 described later.

On the other hand, in S6015, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is permitted (YES in S6015), the main CPU 6101 adds 1 to the value of the interrupt counter (S6017). The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process (see FIGS. 223 to 226 described later) described later, and the count value of the interrupt counter is the work of the main RAM 6103. It is stored in the interrupt counter area in the area.

Next, the main CPU 6101 updates the interrupt cycle timer (S6018). The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 updates various random value values (S6019). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the switch input detection process (S6020). The details of the switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 219 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a winning information command setting process (S6021). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the effect control command (winning information command).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the effect control command transmission process (S6022). In this process, the main CPU 6101 transmits a command reserved for transmission from the main control circuit 6100 to the sub control circuit 6200.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a register save process (S6023). The registers to be saved in this process are the accumulators A and A'and the flag registers F and F'.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs control processing of the performance display monitor 6070 (S6024). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 6070, and the like. Further, this process is performed using the out-of-area work area in the main RAM 6103. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a restore process of the register saved in S6023 (S6025).

After the processing of S6025 or S6016, or when the determination of S6012 is YES, the main CPU 6101 performs the restoration processing of the protection register saved in S6011 (S6026), and ends the system timer interrupt processing.

As described above, in the system timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, when the current activation state is the game disallowed state (when S6015 is NO determination), the setting control processing (setting change processing or setting confirmation processing) is performed. It does not perform various processes (for example, interrupt cycle timer update process (S6018), random number value update process (S6019), performance display monitor 6070 control process (S6024), etc.) that are executed when the game is permitted. In this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being performed when the game is not permitted, and the processing can be simplified. Therefore, by performing the above-described processing in the system timer interrupt processing, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the type of the current start state is used by using the start control flag composed of the combination of the state information of the RAM clear switch 6121 and the state information of the setting key 6080 at the time of turning on the power. (Recovery from power failure / Change setting / Confirm setting / Clear RAM) can be determined. That is, the type of the startup state (return to power failure / change of setting / confirmation of setting / clear RAM) can be discriminated by using a common flag (there is no need to set a discrimination flag for each type of the startup state). In the embodiment, the amount of data managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

[Setting control processing]
Next, the setting control process performed in S6016 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 213) will be described with reference to FIG. 214. Note that FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting control process.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S6031).

In S6031, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating the setting change (when the determination in S6031 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the setting change process (S6032). The details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215 described later.

On the other hand, in S6031, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating the setting change (when the determination in S6031 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the setting confirmation process (S6033). The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 216, which will be described later.

After the processing of S6032 or S6033, the main CPU 6101 performs the setting operation display processing (S6034). In this process, the currently set setting value is displayed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the effect control command transmission process (S6035). In this process, the main CPU 6101 transmits a command (initialization command or power failure recovery command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S6032) or the setting confirmation process (S6033) to the sub-control circuit 6200.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs output processing of the WDT (watchdog timer) (S6036). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs the WDT clear register address reading process, the built-in WDT clear process, and the built-in WDT restart process in this order. Then, after the processing of S6036, the main CPU 6101 ends the setting control processing and returns the processing to the processing of S6026 of the system timer interrupt processing (FIG. 213).

[Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the setting change process performed in S6032 during the setting control process (see FIG. 214) will be described. Note that FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting change process.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 6121 is pressed (S6041). This determination process is performed based on the information on the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear switch 6121 included in the information of the various input ports read.

In S6041, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the RAM clear switch 6121 is not pressed (NO in S6041), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6043 described later. On the other hand, in S6041 when the main CPU 6101 determines that the RAM clear switch 6121 is pressed (YES in S6041), the main CPU 6101 performs the update process within the set value range (S6042).

After the processing of S6042, or when the determination in S6041 is NO, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the setting key 6080 has been turned off (S6043). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the setting key 6080 on / off information included in the input port information read in the system timer interrupt process this time and the input port information read in the previous system timer interrupt process. The on / off information of the setting key 6080 included is compared (masked by the exclusive logical sum operation), and based on the comparison result, whether or not the state of the setting key 6080 has changed from the on state to the off state, that is, , It is determined whether or not the off-edge of the setting key 6080 is detected.

The setting control process is executed by detecting the on-edge of the setting key 6080 (when the state of the setting key 6080 changes from the off state to the on state). At this time as well, the system timer interrupt process of this time is executed. The on / off information of the setting key 6080 read in is compared with the on / off information of the setting key 6080 read in the previous system timer interrupt processing (masked by the exclusive OR operation), and the comparison result is obtained. Based on this, the on-edge of the setting key 6080 is detected. That is, in the present embodiment, in the off-edge and on-edge detection of the setting key 6080, the on / off information of the setting key 6080 read in the current system timer interrupt processing and the setting key read in the previous system timer interrupt processing. By using the comparison result (result of exclusive-OR operation) with the on / off information of 6080 as a common flag, the start and end of the setting control process are determined.

In S6043, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the setting key 6080 is not turned off (when the determination in S6043 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the setting change process and performs the process in the setting control process (FIG. 214). Return to the processing of S6034.

On the other hand, in S6043, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the setting key 6080 has been turned off (when the determination in S6043 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the first normal pre-game processing (S6044). In this process, various setting processes at the time of clearing the RAM are performed. The details of the first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 217 described later. Then, after the process of S6044, the main CPU 6101 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the process of S6034 of the setting control process (FIG. 214).

[Setting confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the setting confirmation process performed in S6033 during the setting control process (see FIG. 214) will be described. Note that FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting confirmation process.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the setting key 6080 has been turned off (S6051). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S6043 in the setting change process (see FIG. 215) described above.

In S6051, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the setting key 6080 is not turned off (when the determination in S6051 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the setting confirmation process and performs the process in the setting control process (FIG. 214). Return to the processing of S6034.

On the other hand, in S6051, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the setting key 6080 has been turned off (when the determination in S6051 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the second normal pre-game processing (S6052). In this process, various setting processes are performed when the power is restored. The details of the second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 218 described later. Then, after the process of S6052, the main CPU 6101 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the process of S6034 of the setting control process (FIG. 214).

[1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the first normal pre-game processing performed in S6044 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 215) will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first normal game pre-processing. As will be described later, the first normal game pre-processing performed in S6044 during the setting change process (see FIG. 215) is a game control-related process during the main control main process (see FIGS. 223 to 226 described later). In the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 228 described later), which is performed before the above, it is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of clearing the RAM.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs the RAM setting process at the time of clearing the backup (S6061). In this process, the main CPU 6101 loads the RAM setting data table at the time of clearing the backup (when the RAM clear switch 6121 is pressed), and stores the data in this data table in a predetermined area in the main RAM 6103. By this RAM setting process, the game is permitted.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the first special symbol address setting process (S6062). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 208) in the main RAM 6103 in the IX register, and sets the address of the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 207) to IY. Set in the register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S6063). In this process, the main CPU 6101 generates various data (parameters) for designating the game state, and stores the generated data in a predetermined area in the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 207). Specifically, the main CPU 6101 is stored in each of the first special symbol game state number area, the first special symbol game state designation parameter, and the first special symbol effect variation table parameter area in the first special symbol work area table. Data (parameter) is generated and the generated data is stored in the corresponding area.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the initialization command (S6064). When the first normal game pre-processing is called in the setting change processing, the transmission of the initialization command reserved in the processing of S6064 to the sub-control circuit 6200 is the setting control processing (FIG. 214). It is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6035) in (see). If the first normal game pre-processing is called in the startup initialization process (see FIG. 228 described later) during the main control main process, the initialization command reserved in the process of S6064 is used. Is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213). That is, in the present embodiment, the process of transmitting the initialization command to the sub-control circuit 6200, which is performed when the RAM is cleared, is also performed when the setting change process is executed.

Then, after the process of S6064, the main CPU 6101 ends the first normal game pre-process and also ends the setting change process (FIG. 215).

[Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S6052 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 216) will be described. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second normal game pre-processing. As will be described later, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S6052 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 216) is a game control-related process during the main control main process (see FIGS. 223 to 226 described later). In the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 228 described later), which is performed before the above, it is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of recovery from power failure.

First, the main CPU 6101 reads the RAM setting data table at the time of recovery from power failure (S6071). Further, in this process, the read data is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 6103. By this RAM setting process, the game is permitted.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state) (S6072). This determination process is performed based on the data (special symbol probability change state flag value) stored in the special symbol probability change state flag area provided in the main RAM 6103. The special symbol probability change state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is the probability change game state, and is set to the on state when the current game state is the probability change game state.

In S6072, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the gaming state is not the probabilistic gaming state (low probability gaming state) (when the determination in S6072 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6074 described later. On the other hand, in S6072, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state (YES in S6072), the main CPU 6101 sets the special symbol probabilistic state notification flag value to the on state (on value). (S6073).

The special symbol probability change state notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not to notify that the current game state is the probability change game state, and is set to the on state when the current game state is the probability change game state. The flag. Further, the special symbol probability change state notification flag value is stored in the special symbol probability change state notification flag area provided in the main RAM 6103. In the present embodiment, a so-called probabilistic lamp for notifying that the gaming state is in the probabilistic gaming state is provided. When the special symbol probability change state notification flag is turned on at the time of recovery, the lamp lights up, but in other cases, the probability change lamp does not light even if the special symbol probability change state notification flag is on. In the present embodiment, a time-saving lamp for notifying that the game state is the time-saving game state is also provided, and the time-saving lamp lights up during the time-saving game state.

After the processing of S6073, or when the determination of S6072 is NO, the main CPU 6101 performs the transmission reservation processing of the power failure recovery command (S6074). When the second normal game pre-processing is called in the setting change processing, the transmission of the power interruption recovery command reserved in the processing of S6074 to the sub-control circuit 6200 is the setting control processing (FIG. 6). It is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6035) in (see 214). Further, when the second normal game pre-processing is called in the startup initial setting processing (see FIG. 228 described later) during the main control main processing, the interrupt recovery command reserved in the processing of S6074 is performed. Is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213). That is, in the present embodiment, the transmission process of the power failure recovery command to the sub-control circuit 6200, which is performed at the time of power failure recovery, is also performed when the setting change process is executed.

Then, after the process of S6074, the main CPU 6101 ends the second normal game pre-process and also ends the setting confirmation process (FIG. 216).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the setting control processing (setting change processing and setting confirmation processing) is performed in the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Further, when the setting control processing is performed, the normal game pre-processing (first or second normal game pre-processing) is performed according to the control type (setting change or setting confirmation) as described above. Then, the normal game pre-processing (first and second normal game pre-processing) performed in this setting control process is performed before the game control-related process in the main control main process (see FIGS. 223 to 226 described later). The process is the same as the normal pre-game process (initial setting process) performed in. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the normal game pre-processing (first and second normal game pre-processing) performed in the setting control processing and the normal game performed before the game control-related processing during the main control main processing. The pre-processing (initial setting processing) can be shared, and the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

[Switch input detection processing]
Next, the switch input detection process performed in S6020 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 213) will be described with reference to FIG. 219. Note that FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch input detection process.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs an abnormal state monitoring process (S6081). The details of the abnormal state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 220 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a normal symbol-related check process (S6082). In this process, the main CPU 6101 checks the first starting port winning ball switch 6044a, the passing ball switch 6043a, and the second starting port winning ball switch 6045a (ordinary electric accessory 6046). When the on-edge of the first starting port winning ball switch 6044a or the on-edge of the passing ball switch 6043a is detected in this check process, a random number acquisition process, a random number transfer process, and the like are performed. Further, when the on-edge of the second starting port winning ball switch 6045a is detected in this check processing, the ordinary electric accessory winning counter is updated, the winning invalidation processing, and the like are performed depending on the situation.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol-related check process (S6083). In this process, the main CPU 6101 checks the count switches 6053c and 6054c, the first start opening winning ball switch 6044a, and the second starting opening winning ball switch 6045a. When the on-edge of the count switches 6053c and 6054c is detected in this check process, the special electric accessory winning counter is updated, the winning invalidation process, and the like are performed depending on the situation. Further, in this check process, when the on-edge of each start port winning ball switch is detected (the number of reserved special symbols is updated) and the look-ahead effect is performed, the transmission reservation process of the specific hold addition command is performed. Will be done. On the other hand, in this check process, if the on-edge of each start port winning ball switch is detected (the number of reserved special symbols is updated) and the look-ahead effect is not performed, the transmission reservation process of the hold addition command is performed. ..

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a prize ball-related switch check process (S6084). In this process, the main CPU 6101 updates the data (prize ball management pointer value) stored in the payout management table at the time of the prize ball. Then, after the processing of S6084, the main CPU 6101 ends the switch input detection processing and returns the processing to the processing of S6021 of the system timer interrupt processing (FIG. 213).

[Abnormal condition monitoring process]
Next, the abnormal state monitoring process performed in S6081 during the switch input detection process (see FIG. 219) will be described with reference to FIG. 220. Note that FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the abnormal state monitoring process.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs an abnormal state monitoring pre-processing (S6091). In this process, the main CPU 6101 updates the abnormality detection information (information of various sensor bits of the input port 2). The details of the abnormal state monitoring preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 221 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing (S6092). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an abnormality in each monitoring target (each abnormality item). The details of the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 222 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs an induced magnetic field monitoring process (S6093). In this process, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the induced magnetic field is being detected, and sets the induced magnetic field detection information bit to the ON state (ON value) if the induced magnetic field is not detected. Then, after the processing of S6093, the main CPU 6101 ends the abnormal state monitoring processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6082 of the switch input detection processing (FIG. 219).

[Abnormal condition monitoring pre-processing]
Next, the abnormal state monitoring pre-processing performed in S6091 during the abnormal state monitoring process (see FIG. 220) will be described with reference to FIG. 221. Note that FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the abnormal state monitoring preprocessing.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of reading abnormality detection information (information of various sensor bits of the input port 2) (S6101). Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the door / frame is open (whether or not the base door 6003 and / or the glass door 6004 is open) (S6102).

In S6102, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the door / frame is not open (NO in S6102), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6104 described later. On the other hand, in S6102, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the door / frame is open (YES in S6102), the main CPU 6101 clears the magnetic sensor bit of the input port 2 (S6103). As a result, the detection level of the magnetic sensor is turned off, and the magnetic sensor does not detect an abnormality.

After the processing of S6103 or when the determination of S6102 is NO, the main CPU 6101 updates the abnormality detection information (S6104). Then, after the processing of S6104, the main CPU 6101 ends the abnormal state monitoring pre-processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6092 of the abnormal state monitoring processing (FIG. 220).

In the abnormal state monitoring preprocessing of the present embodiment, as described above, while the door / frame is open (when the determination in S6102 is YES), the magnetic sensor bit of the input port 2 is cleared (S6103) to perform magnetism. Although an example of setting the detection level of the sensor to the off state (non-detection level) has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection level of the magnetic sensor may be lowered while the door / frame is open. At this time, the detection level of the magnetic sensor may be gradually lowered for each system timer interrupt process (2 msec cycle), and finally the detection level of the magnetic sensor may be turned off. May be lowered to a low level that is not affected by magnetic disturbance when the door / frame is opened, and then control is performed to maintain the detection level. Further, in the present embodiment, an example of clearing the magnetic sensor bit of the input port 2 (S6103) while the door / frame is open (when the determination in S6102 is YES) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the vibration sensor is provided, not only the magnetic sensor bit of the input port 2 but also the vibration sensor bit may be cleared while the door / frame is open.

As described above, in the present embodiment, during the opening of the door / frame, the detection level of various sensors for abnormality detection (for example, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor, etc.) is lowered or turned off in the abnormality state monitoring preprocessing. To do. Therefore, when such a configuration is provided, even if magnetic disturbance or vibration occurs when the door / frame (base door 6003 and / or glass door 6004) of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 is opened, the gaming machine can be used. It is possible to suppress adverse effects on various provided sensors (for example, magnetic sensors, vibration sensors, etc.).

[General-purpose anomaly detection judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process performed in S6092 during the abnormality state monitoring process (see FIG. 220) will be described. Note that FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process.

First, the main CPU 6101 acquires the number of abnormality monitoring targets (the number of abnormal items to be monitored) (S6111). In this process, the main CPU 6101 refers to the address immediately before the start address of the abnormality monitoring table and reads out the number of monitoring targets (the number of monitoring checks) stored in the address. In the present embodiment, the monitoring targets (abnormal items) are, for example, sensor abnormality monitoring, magnetic monitoring, door / frame opening / closing monitoring, saucer full tank monitoring, payout abnormality monitoring, touch state monitoring, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the monitoring target (abnormal item) currently being processed (S6112).

Here, the content of the determination process of S6112 will be described in detail. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a logical product operation of the information stored in the monitored area of the monitored target, which is currently the processing target, and the mask value for detecting an abnormal state (monitoring specific information). The information stored in the monitoring target area of the monitoring target is information indicating the presence or absence of an abnormality in the monitoring target, and the mask value for detecting an abnormality indicates whether or not the monitoring target is a check target for abnormality detection. This is the information to be shown.

The mask value for abnormality detection is composed of, for example, 1-byte data, and it is specified whether or not the corresponding monitoring target abnormality detection check processing is performed on the data of each bit (“0” or “1”). Will be done. Then, "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the monitoring target that performs the abnormality detection check processing, and "0" is stored in the bit corresponding to the monitoring target that does not perform the abnormality detection check processing.

Therefore, if the monitoring target currently being processed is the check target and an error has occurred in the monitoring target, the information stored in the monitoring target area of the monitoring target and the abnormal state detection The result of the logical product operation with the mask value is "1", and it is determined that there is an abnormality in S6112. In other cases, the result of the logical product operation is "0", and it is determined that there is no abnormality in S6112. .. That is, when the monitoring target currently being processed is not the target of the abnormality detection check processing, it is determined that there is no abnormality even if an abnormality occurs in the monitoring target. In this case, various processes (processing at the time of abnormality detection) related to the abnormal state flag described later are not performed.

For example, when the number of monitoring targets is "8" and the abnormal state detection mask value is "00111100B", the processing of S6112 to S6119 (abnormality detection check processing) in the general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing shown in FIG. 222. Is repeated 8 times, of which the abnormality detection check process is actually performed only for the monitoring target that is the target in the 3rd to 6th processes from the start of the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process, and the 1st and 2nd times. For the monitoring targets targeted by the 7th and 8th processes, it is determined that there is no abnormality, and the abnormality detection check process is not performed.

Here, returning to the description of FIG. 222 again, when the main CPU 6101 determines in S6112 that there is no abnormality in the monitoring target (when the determination in S6112 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6114 described later. .. On the other hand, in S6112, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the monitoring target has an abnormality (YES in S6112), the main CPU 6101 sets the abnormal state flag of the monitoring target (S6113).

After the processing of S6113 or when the determination of S6112 is NO, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not there is a change in the abnormal state flag of the monitoring target (S6114).

In S6114, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is no change in the abnormal state flag (when the determination in S6114 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6116 described later. On the other hand, in S6114, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the abnormal state flag has changed (YES in S6114), the main CPU 6101 sets the monitoring timer (S6115).

After the processing of S6115 or when the determination in S6114 is NO, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the monitoring timer has elapsed (S6116).

In S6116, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the monitoring timer has not elapsed (NO in S6116), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6119 described later. On the other hand, in S6116, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the monitoring timer has elapsed (YES in S6116), the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not there is a change in the abnormal state flag (S6117).

In S6117, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is no change in the abnormal state flag (when the determination in S6117 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6119 described later. On the other hand, in S6117, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the abnormal state flag has changed (YES in S6117), the main CPU 6101 updates the abnormal state flag (S6118).

After the processing of S6118, or when S6116 or S6117 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the number of monitoring targets and updates, and determines whether or not the updated monitoring target number is "0" ( S6119).

In S6119, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of monitoring targets after the update is not "0" (when the determination in S6119 is NO), the main CPU 6101 sets the monitoring target to the monitoring target corresponding to the number of monitoring targets after the update. Instead, the processing after S6112 is performed. On the other hand, in S6119, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of monitoring targets after the update is "0" (when the determination in S6119 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process and performs the process. Return to the process of S6093 of the abnormal state monitoring process (FIG. 220).

As described above, in the general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing of the present embodiment, the abnormality detection check processing is performed only on the monitoring target defined as the check target (“1”) by the mask value for abnormality detection. For the monitoring target specified as the non-check target (“0”) by the mask value for abnormality detection, it is determined that there is no abnormality, and the abnormality detection check process is not substantially performed. When such a process is performed, the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process can be further simplified. Therefore, in this case, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the main process (main control main process) controlled by the main CPU 6101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 226. It should be noted that FIGS. 223 to 226 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main control main process.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a stack pointer setting process (S6201). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the process of setting the address of the interrupt vector table (S6202). In this process, the address of the interrupt vector table is stored in the I register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the power interruption signal is at the High level (S6203). In S6203, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the power interruption signal is not at the High level (NO in S6203), the main CPU 6101 repeats the determination process of S6203.

On the other hand, in S6203, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when the determination in S6203 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the flag management process of the RAM clear switch 6121 and the setting key 6080. (S6204). In this process, the main CPU 6101 saves the state information of the RAM clear switch 6121 and the state information of the setting key 6080.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a wait process (S6205). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a start-waiting process on the sub-control circuit 6200 side. The start-up waiting time (wait period) is 1200.07 msec. Further, in this start-up waiting time, the main CPU 6101 performs an interrupt request signal check process, a WDT output process when an interrupt request signal is generated, and a magnetic sensor initialization signal output process at a predetermined timing. The details of the weight processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 227 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the power failure before the startup is a normal power failure (S6206). In this process, the main RAM 6103 compares the value stored in the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 6103 with the value of the power failure detection flag (“0A5H”) determined in advance, and if both are the same, It is determined that the power failure was normal (YES determination), but if the two are different, it is determined that the power failure was abnormal (NO determination).

In S6206, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the power failure is not normal (NO in S6206), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6210 described later.

On the other hand, in S6206, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the power failure was normal (YES in S6206), the main CPU 6101 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 6103 (S6207). .. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a checksum value collation process in the work area (S6208).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the collation result is normal (S6209).

In S6209, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the collation result is normal (YES in S6209), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6217 described later. On the other hand, in S6209, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the collation result is not normal (when the determination in S6209 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6210 described later.

When the determination in S6206 or S6209 is NO, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the setting key 6080 and the RAM clear switch 6121 are in the ON state (S6210). This determination process is performed with reference to the value (on / off value) of the setting key switch bit of the input port 0 and the value of the RAM clear bit of the input port 2.

In S6210, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the setting key 6080 and the RAM clear switch 6121 are in the ON state (when the determination in S6210 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6216 described later. On the other hand, in S6210, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the setting key 6080 and the RAM clear switch 6121 are not in the ON state (when the determination in S6210 is NO), the main CPU 6101 is the security signal of the external terminal (security bit of the output port). Is set to the on state (S6211).

Next, the main CPU 6101 displays an error on the performance display monitor 6070 (S6212). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets bit data for error display in the output port to the performance display monitor 6070. As a result, the predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 6070 lights up, and an error occurrence is displayed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the setting process of the WDT clear register address (S6213). Next, the main CPU 6101 clears the built-in WDT (S6214). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the built-in WDT clear value. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a restart process of the built-in WDT (S6215). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the built-in WDT restart value. Then, after the processing of S6215, the main CPU 6101 repeats the processing of S6213 to S6215 (WDT output processing) until the power is turned off (permanent loop processing is performed).

Here, returning to the process of S6210 again, when the determination in S6210 is YES, the main CPU 6101 stores the setting change state value in the start control flag area in the main RAM 6103 (S6216). By this process, the setting change status value is stored as the value of the start control flag.

After the processing of S6216, or when the determination of S6209 is YES, the main CPU 6101 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 6103 (S6217).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a startup state determination process (S6218). In this process, the main CPU 6101 determines the current startup state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) based on the value (value of the startup control flag) stored in the startup control flag area.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a RAM clear process at startup (S6219). In this process, the main CPU 6101 clears the designated area at startup in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the initial setting process at startup (S6220). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs initial setting processing according to the current startup state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear). The details of the initial setting process at startup will be described later with reference to FIG. 228 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6221). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a power failure process (S6222). The details of the power cutting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 230, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 updates the initial value random number (S6223). In this process, the main CPU 6101 updates the initial value random number for special symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the game is playable (S6224). Note that this determination process is performed based on the value of the activation control flag, and when the value of the activation control flag (current activation state) is a value corresponding to the power failure recovery, S6224 is determined to be YES and activation is performed. If the value of the control flag is a value other than the value corresponding to the power failure recovery, S6224 is determined as NO.

In S6224, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is not possible (NO in S6224), the main CPU 6101 performs an interrupt enable process (S6225). Then, after the processing of S6225, the main CPU 6101 returns the processing to the processing of S6221 and performs the processing after S6221.

On the other hand, in S6224, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is playable (YES in S6224), the main CPU 6101 performs a register save process (S6226). In this process, the main CPU 6101 saves the accumulator A and the flag register F.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the performance display monitor aggregation / subtraction process (S6227). In this process, the main CPU 6101 calculates and updates various base values. Further, this process is performed using the out-of-area work area in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a restore process of the register saved in S6226 (S6228). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6229).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the system cycle time (6 msec: three times the interrupt cycle (2 mses)) has elapsed (S6230). Specifically, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area (current interrupt counter count value) in the main RAM 6103 is "0". The value of the interrupt counter is incremented by 1 for each system timer interrupt process (see S6017 in FIG. 213), and becomes "3" when the system cycle time elapses. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value of the interrupt counter is "0", S6230 is judged as YES, and if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value of the interrupt counter is not "0", S6230 is judged as NO. It becomes.

In S6230, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S6230), the main CPU 6101 returns the processing to the processing of S6221 and performs the processing after S6221.

On the other hand, in S6230, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S6230), the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area (interrupt counter value). The process is performed three times (S6231). By this process, the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt disabled section in the main control main process is reset (becomes "0").

As described above, in the present embodiment, an interrupt prohibition section of 6 msec (process section of S6221 to S6230) is provided in the main control main process before executing various processes related to game control described later. Therefore, in the present embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle). In the present embodiment, an example in which the interrupt disabled section is set to three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interrupt disabled section is twice or more and other than three times the interrupt cycle. It may be the value of.

Next, the main CPU 6101 updates the system timer (S6232). The system timer is a timer for managing the system cycle (6 msec), and the value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a main control command transmission / reception process (S6233). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs a command transmission / reception process for payout control.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol control process (S6234). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a control process for the special symbol game. The details of the special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 231 and 232 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 normally performs a symbol control process (S6235). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a control process for the normal symbol game. The details of the ordinary symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 245 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game operation display unit control process (S6236). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of setting display data to be output to the first special symbol display LED, the second special symbol display LED, the normal symbol display LED, the hold display LED, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game information data generation process (S6237). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs an external terminal plate pulse signal control process, an output data setting process, a test firing test signal generation process, and the like. The test firing test signal generation process is performed using the out-of-area work area in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs port output processing (S6238). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs an output data set (transfer) process to the output port and a WDT output process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a state monitoring process (S6239). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs launch position determination processing (if there is a change in the launch position, performs transmission reservation processing of the launch position command), game abnormality detection determination processing (if there is an abnormality, transmission reservation of the game abnormality detection command). Performs processing) and payout abnormality detection judgment processing (if there is an abnormality, performs transmission reservation processing of the payout abnormality detection command).

Then, after the processing of S6239, the main CPU 6101 returns the processing to the processing of S6221 and performs the processing after S6221.

As described above, in the main control main process of the present embodiment, the state information of the RAM clear switch 6121 and the setting key 6080 are performed after the start and before the execution of the wait process (S6205) (before the checksum verification is completed). The status information of S6204 is saved (flag management process of S6204). When such a process is provided, for example, even if an operation is performed on the setting key 6080 during the wait period (even if it is turned on / off), the value of the start control flag at the time of turning on the power (state information at the time of start). ) Can be secured. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operating status of the setting key 6080 and the operating status of the RAM clear switch 6121 at the time of activation can be more reliably grasped, and the activation state of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 can be accurately identified.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, an interrupt prohibition section of 6 msec (process section of S6221 to S6230) is provided before execution of various processes related to game control (processes after S6231) in the main control main process. , Power interruption processing (S6222), initial value random number update processing (S6223), performance display monitor aggregation / subtraction processing (S6227), etc. are performed within the interrupt prohibition section. That is, in the present embodiment, the interrupt-prohibited section is used to manage the values that affect the ball ejection performance of the game and the values that are aggregated throughout the game. Therefore, by providing such an interrupt prohibition section, the management of the game becomes simple, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 is reduced. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance display monitor aggregation / subtraction process (S6227) is performed only when the game is playable in the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. That is, in the present embodiment, the performance display monitor 6070 is updated only when the game is possible, so that the process becomes simpler. Therefore, in such a processing configuration, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

[Wait processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 227, the weight processing performed in S6205 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 223 to 226) will be described. Note that FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the procedure of weight processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 sets, for example, "60" to the number of first loops (S6301). Next, the main CPU 6101 sets, for example, "47761" in the number of second loops (S6302). The number of first loops and the number of second loops are parameters for managing the passage of the wait period, the number of first loops is set in the B register, and the number of second loops is set in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the current timing is a timing other than the output timing of the magnetic sensor initialization signal (S6303). In the present embodiment, when the number of first loops is, for example, 10, the bit data of the magnetic sensor initialization signal is output to the corresponding output port (output port 1). Therefore, in the determination process of S6303, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the number of first loops is, for example, a number other than 10, and if the number of first loops is, for example, a number other than 10. The determination result of S6303 is YES, and when the number of first loops is, for example, 10, the determination result of S6303 is NO.

In S6303, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the current timing is a timing other than the output timing of the magnetic sensor initialization signal (when the determination in S6303 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6305 described later. On the other hand, in S6303, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the current timing is not a timing other than the output timing of the magnetic sensor initialization signal (when the determination in S6303 is NO), the main CPU 6101 inputs the bit data of the magnetic sensor initialization signal. Output to the address of the corresponding output port (output port 1) (S6304).

After the processing of S6304, or when S6303 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 6101 acquires the address information of the interrupt waiting monitor register (S6305). Next, the main CPU 6101 checks the data stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register (S6306).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not an interrupt request signal has been generated (S6307). In this determination process, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not an interrupt request signal is generated according to the on / off information of the specific bit in the interrupt waiting monitor register, and if the specific bit is in the ON state, S6307 The determination result is YES, and if the specific bit is off, the determination result of S6307 is NO.

In S6307, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the interrupt request signal has not been generated (NO in S6307), the main CPU 6101 returns the processing to the processing of S6306 and performs the processing after S6306.

On the other hand, in S6307, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the interrupt request signal is generated (YES in S6307), the main CPU 6101 performs the WDT clear register address setting process (S6308). Next, the main CPU 6101 clears the built-in WDT (S6309). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a restart process of the built-in WDT (S6310).

Next, the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the number of second loops and sets (updates) the subtraction result as a new number of second loops (S6311). Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the number of second loops is "0" (S6312).

In S6312, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of second loops is not "0" (when the determination in S6312 is YES), the main CPU 6101 returns the process to the process of S6305 and performs the processes after S6305.

On the other hand, in S6312, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of second loops is "0" (when the determination in S6312 is NO), the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the number of first loops and obtains a new subtraction result. It is set (updated) as the first loop count, and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result (first loop count after update) is not "0" (S6313).

In S6313, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of first loops after the update is not "0" (when the determination in S6313 is YES), the main CPU 6101 returns the processing to the processing of S6302 and performs the processing after S6302. ..

On the other hand, in S6313, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of first loops after the update is "0" (when the determination in S6313 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the wait process and controls the process. The process returns to the process of S6206 of the main process (FIGS. 223 to 226).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the magnetic sensor initialization signal output process (S6304) is performed at a predetermined timing during the wait process (the number of first loops is, for example, 10 times), and the magnetometer is magnetic. The sensor is initialized. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if magnetic disturbance occurs when the door / frame (base door 6003 and / or glass door 6004) of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 is opened, the magnetic sensor is reset by this process. , The adverse effect on the magnetic sensor due to the magnetic disturbance can be suppressed.

Note that "initializing (clearing) the magnetic sensor" here may include "initializing the magnetic sensor", and "initializing the settings (driver, etc.) of the magnetic sensor itself". , "Initialize the detection state of the magnetic sensor (for example, forcibly turn off the detection, or when the detection signal = 0, if magnetism is detected, the detection signal is set to a value other than 0." To do) is possible. Further, as the magnetic sensor initialization signal, when the detection signal = 0 in order to change the detection state of the magnetic sensor, if it is assumed that magnetism is detected, a value other than 0 is transmitted as the magnetic sensor initialization signal. Or, a predetermined signal (1 or 0, etc.) is transmitted to a predetermined input terminal (port, etc.) of the magnetic sensor so that the setting (driver, etc.) of the magnetic sensor itself can be initialized. It is also possible to do.

[Initial setting process at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 228, the startup initial setting process performed in S6220 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 223 to 226) will be described. Note that FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial setting process at startup.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of reading the start control flag (S6321).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the startup state is a power failure recovery (S6322). Note that this determination process is performed based on the value of the activation control flag.

In S6322, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the startup state is the power failure recovery (YES judgment in S6322), the main CPU 6101 performs the second normal game preprocessing (power failure recovery) described with reference to FIG. 218. Various initial setting processes for time) are performed (S6323). Then, after the processing of S6323, the main CPU 6101 ends the initial setting processing at startup, and returns the processing to the processing of S6221 of the main control main processing (FIGS. 223 to 226).

On the other hand, in S6322, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the startup state is not a power failure recovery (NO determination in S6322), the main CPU 6101 determines whether the startup state is a setting change or a setting confirmation (when the startup state is a setting change or a setting confirmation) S6324). Note that this determination process is performed based on the value of the activation control flag.

In S6324, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the startup state is a setting change or a setting confirmation (when the determination in S6324 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs a pre-setting operation process (S6325). The details of the pre-setting operation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 229 described later. Then, after the process of S6325, the main CPU 6101 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the process of S6221 of the main control main process (FIGS. 223 to 226).

On the other hand, in S6324, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the startup state is neither a setting change nor a setting confirmation (when the determination in S6324 is NO), the main CPU 6101 is the first normal game described with reference to FIG. 217. Pre-processing (various setting processing at the time of clearing RAM) is performed (S6326). Then, after the process of S6326, the main CPU 6101 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the process of S6221 of the main control main process (FIGS. 223 to 226).

[Pre-setting operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the pre-setting operation process performed in S6325 during the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 228) will be described. Note that FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pre-setting operation process.

In the setting operation pre-processing, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the setting operation command (S6331). The setting operation command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213).

Then, after the processing of S6331, the main CPU 6101 ends the pre-setting operation processing, and also ends the initial setting processing at startup (FIG. 228).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting change process (see FIG. 215) or the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 216) is performed in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 213), but the setting change or setting confirmation is performed. The transmission reservation process of the setting operation command transmitted from the main control circuit 6100 to the sub control circuit 6200 when performed is performed in the main control main process.

If the transmission reservation processing of the setting operation command is performed in the system timer interrupt processing, the transmission reservation processing of the setting operation command is performed for each interrupt processing for the executed setting operation, so that there are multiple transmission reservation processes of the setting operation command. May be executed several times. On the other hand, when the transmission reservation process of the setting operation command is performed in the main control main process as in the present embodiment, the transmission reservation process of the setting operation command is only executed once for the executed setting operation. I'm done. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the transmission reservation process of the extra setting operation command. As a result, in the present embodiment, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

[Power disconnection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the power interruption process performed in S6222 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 223 to 226) will be described. Note that FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the power failure processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is in the ON state (S6341).

In S6341, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the XINT detection flag is not in the ON state (NO in S6341), the main CPU 6101 ends the power interruption process and performs the process as the main control main process (FIGS. 223 to 223). Return to the process of S6223 of 226). On the other hand, in S6341, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the XINT detection flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S6341 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs a checksum value calculation process (S6342).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the checksum value calculation process is completed (S6343).

In S6343, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the checksum value calculation process is not completed (NO in S6343), the main CPU 6101 returns the process to S6342 and performs the process after S6342. On the other hand, in S6343, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the checksum value calculation process is completed (YES in S6343), the main CPU 6101 sets the checksum value and the power failure detection flag value (“0A5H”). Each is stored in a corresponding predetermined storage area in the main RAM 6103 (S6344).

Next, the main CPU 6101 clears the XINT detection flag (S6345). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S6346). Then, after the processing of S6346, the main CPU 6101 repeats the CPU reset waiting processing (S6347).

[Special symbol control processing]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S6234 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 223 to 226) will be described with reference to FIGS. 231 and 232. Note that FIGS. 231 and 232 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special symbol control process.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs the first special symbol address setting process (S6401). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 208) in the main RAM 6103 in the IX register, and sets the address of the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 207) to IY. Set in the register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol-related timer update process (S6402). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly updates (subtracts) the variation display time (first special symbol waiting time) of the first special symbol, and determines whether or not the variation display time of the first special symbol has elapsed. Perform processing, etc. The details of the special symbol-related timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 described later. In the variable display time management process of the special symbols (first and second special symbols) of the present embodiment, as described above, the first half variable display time and the second half variable display time are the upper two-byte timer and the latter half, respectively. It is managed separately by the lower 2-byte timer.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the second special symbol address setting process (S6403). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the address of the second special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 210) in the main RAM 6103 in the IX register, and sets the address of the second special symbol work area table (see FIG. 209) to IY. Set in the register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol-related timer update process (S6404). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly updates (subtracts) the variation display time (second special symbol waiting time) of the second special symbol, and determines whether or not the variation display time of the second special symbol has elapsed. Perform processing, etc. The details of the special symbol-related timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol-related timer update process called in S6404 is the same as that called in S6402, and in both processes, a common process is called and executed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 refers to the second special symbol work area table (see FIG. 209) in the main RAM 6103, and reads out the control status number of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol control status number area. (S6405). The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating a transition destination (transition destination) of the state (control state) of the control process related to the variation display (special symbol game) of the special symbol (in the present embodiment, as described later, " Any of "0" to "6").

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state of the second special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (S6406). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not the control state number of the second special symbol read in S6405 is the special symbol fluctuation start value (“0”).

In S6406, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the second special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the determination in S6406 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6409 described later.

On the other hand, in S6406, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the second special symbol is not the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the determination in S6406 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the second special symbol address setting process. Do (S6407). In this process, the same process as that performed in S6403 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol management process (S6408). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs the control process corresponding to the control state number of the second special symbol read in S6405. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 234 described later.

After the processing of S6408 or when S6406 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the first special symbol control state number area with reference to the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 207) in the main RAM 6103. The control state number of the first special symbol is read out (S6409).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state of the first special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (S6410). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not the control state number of the first special symbol read in S6409 is the special symbol fluctuation start value (“0”).

In S6410, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the first special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the determination in S6410 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6413 described later.

On the other hand, in S6410, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the first special symbol is not the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the determination in S6410 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the first special symbol address setting process. Do (S6411). In this process, the same process as the process performed in S6401 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol management process (S6412). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs the control process corresponding to the control state number of the first special symbol read in S6409. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 234 described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol management process called in S6412 is the same as that called in S6408, and in both processes, a common process is called and executed.

After the processing of S6412 or when the determination of S6410 is YES, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the second special symbol control state number area with reference to the second special symbol work area table (see FIG. 209) in the main RAM 6103. The control state number of the second special symbol is read out (S6413).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state of the second special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (S6414). In this process, the same process as the determination process performed in S6406 is performed.

In S6414, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the second special symbol is not the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the determination in S6414 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6417 described later.

On the other hand, in S6414, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the second special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the determination in S6414 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the second special symbol address setting process. (S6415). In this process, the same process as that performed in S6403 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol management process (S6416). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs the control process corresponding to the control state number of the second special symbol read in S6413. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 234 described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol management process called in S6416 is the same as that called in each of S6408 and S6412, and in these processes, a common process is called and executed.

After the processing of S6416 or when the determination in S6414 is NO, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the first special symbol control state number area with reference to the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 207) in the main RAM 6103. The control state number of the first special symbol is read out (S6417).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state of the first special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (S6418). In this process, the same process as the determination process performed in S6410 is performed.

In S6418, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the first special symbol is not the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the determination in S6418 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol control process and performs the process. , Return to the process of S6235 of the main control main process (FIGS. 223 to 226).

On the other hand, in S6418, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the first special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the determination in S6418 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the first special symbol address setting process. (S6419). In this process, the same process as the process performed in S6401 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol management process (S6420). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs the control process corresponding to the control state number of the first special symbol read in S6417. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 234 described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol management process called in S6420 is the same as that called in each of S6408, S6412 and S6416, and in these processes, a common process is called and executed. Then, after the processing of S6420, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol control processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6235 of the main control main processing (FIGS. 223 to 226).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol address setting process is performed before each of the special symbol-related timer process and the special symbol management process is executed, and the special symbol (first special symbol or first special symbol) to be processed is performed. 2 Set the address of the special symbol work area table of (2 special symbol) in the IY register. In this case, when reading (acquiring) various data used in the special symbol-related timer processing and the special symbol management processing from the work area table, directly from the special symbol work area table based on the address set in the IY register. , The necessary data can be read (acquired). That is, in the present embodiment, when reading (acquiring) various data used in the special symbol-related timer processing and the special symbol management processing from the work area table, it is necessary to perform the reference processing of the address of the special symbol work area table. It disappears. Therefore, when such a special symbol address setting process is provided, the address reference process of the special symbol work area table can be omitted, so that the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 is reduced. be able to.

[Special symbol related timer update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the special symbol-related timer update process performed in S6402 and S6404 in the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 231 and 232) will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol-related timer update process.

In the special symbol-related timer update process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed corresponds to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol-related timer update process. It is a special design to be done. For example, when the special symbol-related timer update process is called and executed in S6402 during the special symbol control process, the "special symbol" to be processed in the following description becomes the first special symbol. On the other hand, for example, when the special symbol-related timer update process is called and executed in S6404 during the special symbol control process, the "special symbol" to be processed in the following description becomes the second special symbol.

First, the main CPU 6101 reads out the control state number of the special symbol (in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "6" as described later) (S6431). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol control state number area (first special symbol control state in FIG. 207) in the special symbol work area table. The control state number of the special symbol is read out from the number area or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 209). In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the control state number of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol is changing (S6432). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not the control state number of the special symbol read in S6431 is the special symbol variation end value (“1”), and the control status number of the special symbol is the special symbol variation end value (“1”). If it is not "1"), it is determined that the special symbol is changing (YES determination).

In S6432, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol is not changing (NO in S6432), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6435 described later.

On the other hand, in S6432, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol is changing (YES in S6432), the main CPU 6101 reads the value of the special symbol pause flag of the special symbol (S6433). In this process, similarly to the process of S6431, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol pause flag area in the special symbol work area table (in FIG. 207). The value of the special symbol pause flag is read from the first special symbol pause flag area or the second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 209). In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the special symbol pause flag from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table. The special symbol pause flag is a flag for setting the stop or suspension of the fluctuation of the later special symbol when the first special symbol and the second special symbol change at the same time, that is, the variation display of the later special symbol. This is a flag for determining the control mode of the above, and is provided separately for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is set for the special symbol to be processed (S6434). In this process, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is on (whether or not the change start stop or fluctuation interruption of the special symbol is set), and the special symbol pause flag is turned on. If it is in the state, S6434 is determined to be YES, and if the special symbol pause flag is off, S6434 is determined to be NO.

In S6434, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol pause flag is set for the special symbol to be processed (when the determination in S6434 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol-related timer update process. , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 231 and 232). At this time, if the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6402 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6403, and the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6404 during the special symbol control process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S6405.

On the other hand, in S6434, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed (when S6434 determines NO), or when S6432 determines NO, the main CPU 6101 Reads the value (value of the upper 2-byte timer) stored in the address of the special symbol waiting time management timer area of the special symbol (S6435). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to wait for the special symbol waiting time management timer area in the special symbol work area table (waiting for the first special symbol in FIG. 207). The value of the upper 2-byte timer stored in the time management timer area or the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 209) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the upper 2-byte timer of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a word counter subtraction process (S6436). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a subtraction process (update process) of the upper 2-byte timer (special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol) read in S6435.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol has elapsed based on the value of the upper 2-byte timer after subtraction (S6437).

In S6437, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol has not elapsed (NO in S6437), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol-related timer update process and performs the process. , Return to the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 231 and 232). At this time, if the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6402 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6403, and the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6404 during the special symbol control process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S6405.

On the other hand, in S6437, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol has elapsed (when the determination in S6437 is YES), the main CPU 6101 has the current timing of the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is the timing when (the value of the upper 2-byte timer) becomes "0" (S6438). Specifically, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time (value of the upper 2-byte timer) in the first half of the special symbol has just become "0" by the subtraction process of S6436 this time.

When the determination process of whether or not the value of the upper 2-byte timer has just become "0" is not performed, that is, when the progress determination process of the upper 2-byte timer is limited to the process of S6437, Even at the timing when the value of the upper 2-byte timer becomes "0" (at the end of counting the special symbol waiting time in the first half), the processing of S6440 described later (lower 2-byte timer (special symbol waiting time in the second half of the special symbol)). Subtraction process) will be performed. In this case, the subtraction process of the lower 2-byte timer is 1 at the timing when the subtraction (update) process of the lower 2-byte timer should not be performed (the timing before the first subtraction process of the special symbol waiting time in the latter half). Since it will be performed once, it will not be possible to accurately count the special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol. However, when the process of S6438 is provided as in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the lower 2-byte timer is not performed at the timing when the value of the upper 2-byte timer becomes exactly "0". It is possible to prevent a malfunction of the counting process of the lower 2-byte timer and accurately count the waiting time of the special symbol in the latter half of the special symbol.

In S6438, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol becomes "0" (when the determination in S6438 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the special symbol-related timer update process. It ends and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 231 and 232). At this time, if the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6402 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6403, and the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6404 during the special symbol control process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S6405.

On the other hand, in S6438, the main CPU 6101 is not at the timing when the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol becomes "0" (before the subtraction process of S6436 this time, the special symbol waiting time in the first half has already become "0". If it is determined, the main CPU 6101 determines the value of the lower 2-byte timer (special) stored in the address (address 2 bytes ahead) added by 2 to the start address of the special symbol waiting time management timer area of the special symbol. The special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the symbol) is read (S6439).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a word counter subtraction process (S6440). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a subtraction process (update process) of the lower 2-byte timer (special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol) read in S6439.

Then, after the processing of S6440, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol-related timer update processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIGS. 231 and 232). At this time, if the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6402 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6403, and the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6404 during the special symbol control process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S6405.

[Special symbol management process]
Next, the special symbol management processing performed in S6408, S6412, S6416 and S6420 in the special symbol control processing (see FIGS. 231 and 232) will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol management process.

In the special symbol management process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol management process. is there. For example, when the special symbol management process is called and executed in S6408 or S6416 during the special symbol control process, the "special symbol" to be processed in the following description becomes the second special symbol, and the special symbol management process. Is called and executed in S6412 or S6420 during the special symbol control process, the "special symbol" to be processed in the following description is the first special symbol.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “6”) in parentheses written in parallel with the code of each processing step shown in FIG. 234 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed, and are in the special symbol work area table. It is stored in the special symbol control state number area (the first special symbol control state number area in FIG. 207 or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 209). Then, the main CPU 6101 advances the special symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 6101 reads the value of the upper 2-byte timer and determines whether or not there is a special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol (the special symbol waiting time management timer value in the first half is ≠ 0) (S6451). .. In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol waiting time management timer area (first special symbol in FIG. 207) in the special symbol work area table. The value of the upper 2-byte timer stored in the waiting time management timer area or the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 209) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the upper 2-byte timer of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

In S6451, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is a special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6451 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol management process and performs the process in the special symbol control process. (See FIG. 231 and FIG. 232). At this time, when the special symbol management process is called in S6408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6409, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6412 during the special symbol control process. Returns the process to the process of S6413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S6416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6420 during the special symbol control process. , The special symbol control process is also completed.

On the other hand, in S6451, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is no special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6451 is NO), the main CPU 6101 reads the value of the lower 2-byte timer and the latter half of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol waiting time (the special symbol waiting time management timer value in the latter half is ≠ 0) (S6452). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol waiting time management timer area (first special symbol in FIG. 207) in the special symbol work area table. The value of the lower 2-byte timer stored in the waiting time management timer area or the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 209) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the lower 2-byte timer of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

In S6452, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is a special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6452 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol management process and performs the process in the special symbol control process. (See FIG. 231 and FIG. 232). At this time, when the special symbol management process is called in S6408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6409, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6412 during the special symbol control process. Returns the process to the process of S6413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S6416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6420 during the special symbol control process. , The special symbol control process is also completed.

On the other hand, in S6452, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is no special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6452 is NO), the main CPU 6101 reads out the control status number of the special symbol (S6453). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to control the special symbol control status number area (first special symbol control in FIG. 207) in the special symbol work area table. The control state number of the special symbol stored in the state number area or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 209 is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the control state number of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs reference processing of the special symbol control branch table (S6454). In the special symbol control branch table, the correspondence between each control state number (“0” to “6”) of the special symbol and the storage address of the corresponding processing program is defined.

Then, the main CPU 6101 performs the processing after S6455 according to the control state number of the special symbol read in S6453. The processing contents after S6455 include, for example, updating the control status number (any of "0" to "6") of the special symbol read in S6453 and the control status number of the special symbol in each processing step. It changes according to the presence or absence of the game, that is, the game situation of the special symbol game.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation start process (S6455). However, the processing of S6455 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (special symbol fluctuation start value) at the start time of the processing. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes for starting the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). The details of the special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 235 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "0" at the start of the processing of S6455, the processing of S6455 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation end process (S6456). However, the process of S6456 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (special symbol variation end value) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes when ending the variable display of the special symbol. The details of the special symbol variation end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 237 and 238, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "1" at the start of the processing of S6456, the processing of S6456 is not performed internally and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol game determination process (S6457). However, the process of S6457 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (special symbol game determination value) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a determination process of the derivation result (big hit / small hit / loss) of the special symbol. The details of the special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 239 and 240 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "2" at the start of the processing of S6457, the processing of S6457 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process (S6458). However, the process of S6458 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (large winning opening opening start value) at the start time of the process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs, for example, a selection process of a type of a large winning opening (special electric accessory), an opening pattern of the large winning opening, a process of generating open / close control data of the special electric accessory, and the like. The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 242 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "3" at the start of the processing of S6458, the processing of S6458 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a large winning opening opening control process (S6459). However, the process of S6459 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (large winning opening opening control value) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs, for example, an opening / closing control process for a special electric accessory (large winning opening). The details of the large winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 243 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "4" at the start of the processing of S6459, the processing of S6459 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process (S6460). However, the process of S6460 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (preparation value for opening the large winning opening) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs, for example, a selection process of a type of a large winning opening, an opening pattern of a large winning opening, a process of generating open / close control data of a special electric accessory, and the like. The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 242 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "5" at the start of the processing of S6460, the processing of S6460 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol hitting end process (S6461). However, the processing of S6461 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (end value per special symbol) at the start of the processing. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes when ending the game (special symbol game) at the time of hitting the special symbol. The details of the special symbol hitting end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 244 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "6" at the start of the processing of S6461, the processing of S6461 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Then, after the processing of S6461, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIGS. 231 and 232). At this time, when the special symbol management process is called in S6408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6409, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6412 during the special symbol control process. Returns the process to the process of S6413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S6416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6420 during the special symbol control process. , The special symbol control process is also completed.

[Special symbol change start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the special symbol variation start processing performed in S6455 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 234) will be described. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol variation start processing. In the special symbol variation start processing described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol variation start processing. Is.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S6471).

In S6471, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S6471 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation start process and manages the process. The process returns to the process of S6456 of the process (FIG. 234).

On the other hand, in S6471, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S6471 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the special symbol game standby process (S6472). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs a game state (“game start” or “game standby”) check process. The details of the special symbol game standby process will be described later with reference to FIG. 236 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the game state is "game standby" (S6473).

In S6473, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game state is "game standby" (when the determination in S6473 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation start process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process (when the game is determined to be YES). Return to the process of S6456 in FIG. 234).

On the other hand, in S6473, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game state is not "game standby" ("game start") (when S6473 is NO determination), the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol memory transfer process (when the game state is determined to be NO). S6474). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a subtraction process of the number of special symbol reservations, a transfer process of a random number value (lottery result), a transmission reservation process of the hold subtraction command, and the like. In the random number value (lottery result) transfer process, the random number value stored in the random number storage area at the time of winning the special symbol that starts to fluctuate is transferred to the random number work area of the special symbol. At this time, a process of moving the random number value acquired at the time of winning the special symbol of the next fluctuation to the random number storage area (process of shifting the holding ball) is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol hit determination process (S6475). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a lottery result (big hit / small hit / loss) determination process. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the special symbol hit is not a big hit, a determination process of whether or not it is a small hit is performed. If it is determined in the process that it is not a small hit, the determination result is determined to be a loss. The contents of the special symbol hit determination process (S6475) will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol determination process (S6476). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of determining a stop symbol of a special symbol corresponding to a lottery determination result (big hit / small hit / loss).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation pattern setting process (S6477). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs lottery processing for the first half variation display pattern and the second half variation display pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery determination result (big hit / small hit / loss), and sets each variation display pattern. .. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation display time setting process (S6478). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the fluctuation display time of the first half of the special symbol (special symbol waiting time of the first half) and the fluctuation display time of the second half (special symbol waiting time of the second half) into the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer, respectively. set.

Next, the main CPU 6101 clears the designated storage area (S6479). In this process, the random number work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 6103 is cleared, and the random number value acquired at the time of winning the special symbol whose fluctuation is started is cleared.

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "1" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6480). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the special symbol variation end process (S6456) is performed after the end of the special symbol variation start process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S6481). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 207 or 209), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6482).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state management process (S6483). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly updates various flags related to the management of the game state. As other processes, the main CPU 6101 performs, for example, a game state offset value generation process, a special symbol effect mode management process, and the like.

Then, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command (S6484). The special symbol effect start command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6485). Then, after the processing of S6485, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation start processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6456 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 234).

(Details of special symbol hit judgment processing)
Here, the content of the special symbol hit determination process performed in S6475 will be described in more detail. First, the content of the special symbol hit determination process when the simultaneous fluctuation function is operating will be described.

In the special symbol hit determination process, if the special symbol that is not the processing target (the other special symbol) is already changing, the special symbol that is the processing target (one special symbol) is hit. Whether or not it is determined is not performed, but a small hit or loss determination process is performed. At this time, if the random number value (lottery result) of one special symbol is a random value corresponding to a small hit or a loss, the judgment result will be a small hit or a loss, respectively, but the random value of one special symbol When is a random number value corresponding to a big hit, the random number value is determined to be a random number value other than a small hit (a random number value corresponding to a loss), and the determination result is forcibly lost. That is, if the other special symbol that is not the processing target is already changing at the start of the fluctuation of one special symbol that is the processing target in the special symbol hit determination processing, the random value of one special symbol. Even if is a random value corresponding to a big hit (even if the lottery result is a big hit), the variable display of one of the special symbols is controlled so as to be a variable display corresponding to the loss.

Next, the specific contents of the lottery determination process of big hit / small hit / loss performed in the special symbol hit determination process (S6475) will be described in more detail.

First, the main CPU 6101 reads out the address of the jackpot determination value data table (not shown) of the special symbol to be processed. In the jackpot determination value data table of the special symbol, the range (lottery value) of the random value that becomes the jackpot set for each set value ("1" to "6") is defined. In addition, in the jackpot judgment value data table of the special symbol, the range of random numbers that are jackpots in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) and the probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state) is defined for each set value. ing. Then, in the jackpot determination value data table of the special symbol, the range of random numbers that are jackpots is defined from the start address side in ascending order of the set value. Specifically, in the jackpot judgment value data table of the special symbol, from the start address side, the range of random value that becomes a jackpot when the setting is "1" and the normal game state is set, and the setting is "1" and the probability variation game state. The range of random numbers that will be a big hit if the setting is "2", the range of random values that will be a big hit if the setting is "2" and the normal gaming state, and the random that will be a big hit if the setting is "2" and the probabilistic gaming state The range of numerical values, ..., the range of random numbers that will be a big hit when the setting is "6" and in the normal gaming state, and the range of the random numbers that will be the big hit when the setting is "6" and the game is in the probabilistic game state. , Stored in this order.

Next, the main CPU 6101 reads the set value (loads the contents of the set value area in the main RAM 6103). Next, the main CPU 6101 doubles the read set value, and further sets the special symbol probability variation state flag value (“0” in the normal gaming state, “1” in the probability variation game state) to the doubled value. to add. As a result, the address offset value (offset value from the start address) of the storage area in which the range (lottery value) of the random number value to be referred to in the jackpot determination value data table of the special symbol is stored is calculated. Then, by adding the address offset value to the start address of the jackpot judgment value data table of the special symbol, the storage area of the reference random number value range (lottery value) in the jackpot judgment value data table is specified, and the randomness is concerned. A range of numerical values (lottery value) can be obtained.

Next, the main CPU 6101 calls the lottery determination process, executes the lottery determination process with reference to the random number value and the lottery value, and acquires the big hit lottery determination result. At this time, if the special symbol is a big hit, the lottery judgment result will be a value other than "0 (00H)" (for example, "FFH"), and if the special symbol is not a big hit, the lottery judgment result will be "0". .. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a logical product operation of the lottery determination result and a preset jackpot flag value (for example, a value other than "0" such as "001H"). Then, the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol to be processed is a big hit if the result of the logical product operation is "1", and if the result of the logical product operation is "0", the special symbol is a special symbol. Is not a big hit.

Next, when the result of the logical product operation described above is "0" and it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit, the main CPU 6101 reads out the special symbol selection value. In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol-related definition data table set in the IX register to store the special symbol selection value in the special symbol-related definition data table to be processed. The special symbol selection value stored in (the storage area of the first special symbol selection value in FIG. 208 or the storage area of the second special symbol selection value in FIG. 210) is read out. The special symbol selection value is a value indicating the type of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), and is "0" when the special symbol to be processed is the first special symbol, and is the processing target. When the special symbol of is the second special symbol, it is "1".

Next, the main CPU 6101 reads out the address of the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table (not shown). In the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table, the address of the special symbol small hit determination value data table (not shown) is defined for each type of special symbol. However, for the type of special symbol for which a small hit is not provided as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the address of the small hit judgment value data table of the special symbol is specified in the special symbol small hit judgment value data selection table. Absent. That is, in the present embodiment, the address of the small hit determination value data table for the first special symbol is not defined in the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 refers to the special symbol selection value (type of special symbol) and the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table, and provides a small hit in the lottery result of the special symbol to be processed. It is determined whether or not (whether or not the address of the small hit judgment value data table of the special symbol is specified in the special symbol small hit judgment value data selection table).

When it is determined in this determination process that a small hit is provided in the lottery result of the special symbol to be processed, the main CPU 6101 refers to the randomness in the small hit determination value data table of the special symbol. Calculate the address of the numerical range (lottery value). If it is determined in this determination process that no small hit is provided in the lottery result of the special symbol to be processed, the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol is lost.

Next, when a small hit is provided in the lottery result of the special symbol, the main CPU 6101 calls the lottery determination process, executes the lottery determination process with reference to the random number value and the lottery value, and draws the small hit. Acquire the judgment result. At this time, if the special symbol is a small hit, the lottery determination result will be a value other than "0", and if the special symbol is not a small hit, the lottery determination result will be "0". The lottery determination process read by the small hit determination process is the same as the lottery determination process read by the large hit determination process described above. That is, in the present embodiment, a common process (module) is used for the lottery determination process of big hit / small hit / loss.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a logical product calculation of the small hit lottery determination result and a preset small hit flag value (for example, a value other than "0" such as "002H"). Then, the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol to be processed is a small hit if the result of the logical product operation is "1", and if the result of the logical product operation is "0", it is special. It is determined that the design is lost.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a common process (module) is used for the lottery determination process of big hit / small hit / loss performed in the special symbol hit determination process (S6475). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as described above, the small hit determination value data selection table for the special symbol is referred to, and only when the small hit is provided in the lottery result of the special symbol to be processed, the small hit is provided. Although an example of performing a winning lottery determination process has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the read special symbol selection value is used as an argument (identifier indicating the type of the special symbol) of the lottery determination process, and the lottery determination process is executed with reference to the random number value and the lottery value corresponding to this argument. The winning lottery determination result may be acquired. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the above-mentioned special symbol small hit determination value data selection table, and the amount of data managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced. Further, in this case, since various processes executed by referring to the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table can be omitted, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can also be reduced. ..

[Special symbol game standby processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the special symbol game standby process performed in S6472 during the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 235) will be described. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game standby process. In the special symbol game standby process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol game standby process. Is.

First, the main CPU 6101 reads the value of the special symbol pause flag (S6491). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol pause flag area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 207). Alternatively, the value of the special symbol pause flag stored in the second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 209) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the special symbol pause flag from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is set (whether it is in the ON state) (S6492).

In S6492, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol pause flag is set (when the determination in S6492 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6503 described later.

On the other hand, in S6492, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol pause flag is not set (NO in S6492), the main CPU 6101 reads out the number of reserved special symbols (S6493). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol hold number area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol hold number area in FIG. 207). Alternatively, the number of reserved special symbols stored in the second special symbol reserved number area in FIG. 209) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the number of reserved special symbols from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the number of reserved special symbols is "0" (S6494).

In S6494, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of reserved special symbols is not "0" (when the determination in S6494 is NO), the main CPU 6101 sets "game start" in the game state (S6495). Then, after the processing of S6495, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game standby processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6473 of the special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 235).

On the other hand, in S6494, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of reserved special symbols is "0" (when the determination in S6494 is YES), the main CPU 6101 reads out the special symbol demo flag value (S6496). The special symbol demo flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is demonstrating (waiting), and if the current gaming state is the standby state, the special symbol demo flag is turned on. In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to display the special symbol demo display state flag area in the special symbol work area table (first special symbol demo in FIG. 207). The special symbol demo flag value stored in the display state flag area or the second special symbol demo display state flag area in FIG. 209) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the special symbol demo flag value from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the demo based on the value of the special symbol demo flag read in S6496 (S6497).

In S6497, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the current gaming state is being demoed (when the determination in S6497 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6503 described later.

On the other hand, in S6497, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the current gaming state is not in the demo (NO in S6497), the main CPU 6101 sets the demo display command transmitted flag (S6498). In this process, the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the value of the special symbol demo display state flag area in the special symbol work area table by using the data (address of the special symbol work area table) set in the IY register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6499). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S6500). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 207 or 209), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the demo display command (S6501). The demo display command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6502).

After the processing of S6502, or when S6492 or S6497 determines YES, the main CPU 6101 sets "game standby" in the game state (S6503). Then, after the process of S6503, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game standby process, and returns the process to the process of S6473 of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 235).

As described above, in the special symbol game standby process of the present embodiment, when the special symbol pause flag is set (on state) for the special symbol to be processed, the special symbol is held. The series of processes of S6493 to S6502 including various processes related to numbers and various processes related to demo display are not executed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game standby process can be simplified. In this case, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced, and the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently to reduce the processing load of the main control circuit 6100. ..

[Special symbol change end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 and 238, the special symbol variation end processing performed in S6456 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 234) will be described. 237 and 238 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special symbol variation end processing. In the special symbol variation end processing described below, the "one special symbol" to be processed corresponds to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol variation end processing. It is a special symbol, and the "other special symbol" is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table that is not set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol variation end processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of one of the special symbols is "1" (S6511).

In S6511, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of one of the special symbols is not "1" (when the determination in S6511 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end process and specializes the process. Return to the process of S6457 of the symbol management process (FIG. 234).

On the other hand, in S6511, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of one special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S6511 is YES), the main CPU 6101 has a special symbol pause flag value of one special symbol. Is read out (S6512). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of one special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol pause flag area (first special in FIG. 207) in one special symbol work area table. The special symbol pause flag value stored in the symbol pause flag area or the second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 209) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the special symbol pause flag value of one special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the one special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag of one of the special symbols is set (whether it is in the ON state) (S6513).

In S6513, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol pause flag of one of the special symbols is set (when the determination in S6513 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end processing and performs the processing. Return to the process of S6457 of the special symbol management process (FIG. 234).

On the other hand, in S6513, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol pause flag of one special symbol is not set (when the determination in S6513 is NO), the main CPU 6101 sets the control status number of one special symbol to ". 2 ”is set (S6514). By the update process of the control state number of the one special symbol, the special symbol game determination process (S6457) is performed on the one special symbol after the end process of the end of the change of the special symbol is completed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol effect stop command for one of the special symbols (S6515). The transmission of the special symbol effect stop command of one of the special symbols reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 6200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) during the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213). It is said.

Next, the main CPU 6101 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter (S6516). The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of times of variable display of the special symbol), and the counted value is stored in the symbol fixed number counter area in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 reads out the address of the storage area of the special symbol pause flag value of the other special symbol (S6517). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of one special symbol-related definition data table set in the IX register to use the special symbol of the other special symbol stored in one special symbol-related definition data table. The address of the pause flag storage area (the storage area of the address of the second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 208 or the storage area of the address of the first special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 210) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 does not perform the address reference processing (reading processing) of the other special symbol-related definition data table and the address switching processing of the special symbol-related definition data table set in the IX register, and the main RAM 6103 The address of the storage area for the special symbol pause flag value of the other special symbol can be read directly from the work area (one special symbol related definition data table).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a small hit confirmation process (S6518). In this process, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the special symbol hit flag area (first special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 207 or second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 209) in one of the special symbol work area tables. Based on the value, it is confirmed whether or not the variation display of one of the special symbols corresponds to the small hit.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the variation display of one special symbol is a small hit (S6519).

In S6519, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the variation display of one of the special symbols is not a small hit (when the determination in S6519 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6521 described later. On the other hand, in S6519, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the variation display of one special symbol is a small hit (when the determination in S6519 is YES), the main CPU 6101 has a special symbol pause flag in the other special symbol pause flag area. Set the value (on value) (S6520).

After the processing of S6520, or when the determination of S6519 is NO, the main CPU 6101 performs the jackpot confirmation processing (S6521). In this process, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the special symbol hit flag area (first special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 207 or second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 209) in one of the special symbol work area tables. Based on the value, it is confirmed whether or not the variation display of one of the special symbols corresponds to the big hit.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the variation display of one of the special symbols is a big hit (S6522).

In S6522, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the variation display of one of the special symbols is not a big hit (when the determination in S6522 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to the process of S6457 in FIG. 234.

On the other hand, in S6522, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the variation display of one special symbol is a big hit (when the determination in S6522 is YES), the main CPU 6101 has a special symbol pause flag value in the other special symbol pause flag area. (On value) is set (S6523).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the address of the other special symbol-related definition data table in the main RAM 6103 in the IX register, and sets the address of the other special symbol work area table in the IY register (S6524).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S6525). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the other special symbol control state number area in the other special symbol work area table (the first special symbol control state number area in FIG. 207 or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 209). It is determined whether or not the control state number of the other special symbol stored in is "1", and if the control state number of the other special symbol is "1", the determination process of S6525 is a YES determination. If the control state number of the other special symbol is not "1", the determination process of S6525 is a NO determination.

In S6525, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the other special symbol is not in the variable display (NO in S6525), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end process and performs the process in the special symbol management process (when the special symbol management process is performed. Return to the process of S6457 in FIG. 234).

On the other hand, in S6525, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (when the determination in S6525 is YES), the main CPU 6101 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter (S6526).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a fluctuation stop flag setting process (S6527). By this process, the test firing test signal is output to the outside.

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets a loss in the hit flag of the other special symbol (S6528). Specifically, the main CPU 6101 loses to the special symbol hit flag area (first special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 207 or second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 209) in the other special symbol work area table. Set the value corresponding to.

Next, the main CPU 6101 clears the work area related to the variation display of the other special symbol (S6529). Next, the main CPU 6101 sets a predetermined fixed waiting time in the upper 2-byte timer for managing the special symbol waiting time of the other special symbol (S6530).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol (S6531). Due to the update processing of the control state number of the other special symbol, the special symbol variation end processing is not performed for the other special symbol.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the other special symbol (S6532). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the other special symbol work area table (see FIG. 207 or 209), and the game state. Performs transfer processing of specified parameters.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command of the other special symbol (S6533). The transmission of the special symbol effect stop command of the other special symbol reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 6200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) during the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213). It is said. Then, after the processing of S6533, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6457 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 234).

As described above, in the special symbol variation end processing of the present embodiment, when the special symbol pause flag is set (on state) for one special symbol, the small hit confirmation of one special symbol is confirmed. The processing after S6514 including the processing and the jackpot confirmation processing is not performed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the special symbol variation end processing can be simplified. In this case, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced, and the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently to reduce the processing load of the main control circuit 6100. ..

Further, as described above, in the special symbol variation end processing of the present embodiment, in the series of processing of S6518 to S6524, if the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit or a small hit, in any case. , Set the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol (turn it on). That is, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the cancellation or interruption of the fluctuation start of the other special symbol can be controlled by a common flag (special symbol pause flag). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the special symbol variation end processing can be simplified, and the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the special symbol variation end processing of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for one special symbol, the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, and When the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, a control process (loss confirmation process) for confirming the change in the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly performed. Specifically, in the loss confirmation process, the special symbol hit flag of the other special symbol is set to the loss (S6528), and the control state number of the other special symbol is set to "2" (S6531: the other special symbol). The special symbol change end processing of) is performed. When such a loss confirmation process is provided, the special symbol pause flag is not set for one special symbol, the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, and the other special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. When it is in the middle, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is forcibly lost and the control state number of the other special symbol is advanced, so that unnecessary processing such as confirmation processing of a big hit or a small hit for the other special symbol is performed. (Special symbol change end processing) can be omitted. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine provided with the simultaneous fluctuation function as in the present embodiment, when the above processing of S6531 is provided, the processing at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol is usually performed when the variation display time of the special symbol has elapsed. In the present embodiment, when the stop mode of the variation display of the identification information is to shift to the special gaming state, the processing at the end of the variation of the other special symbol can be simplified. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special symbol change end processing can be simplified by providing the above-mentioned loss confirmation processing. As a result, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

[Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, the special symbol game determination process performed in S6457 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 234) will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 and 240. 239 and 240 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special symbol game determination process. In the special symbol game determination process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol game determination process. Is.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S6541).

In S6541, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S6541 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game determination process and manages the process. Return to the process of S6458 of the process (FIG. 234). On the other hand, in S6541 when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S6541 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6542).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a jackpot confirmation process (S6543). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the data (address of the special symbol work area table) set in the IY register to set the special symbol per flag area (first special symbol in FIG. 207) in the special symbol work area table. The hit flag value of the special symbol is directly read from the hit flag area or the second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 209, and based on this hit flag value, a confirmation process of whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is performed. Do.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not it is a big hit (S6544).

In S6544, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is a big hit (YES in S6544), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6549 described later.

On the other hand, in S6544, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is not a big hit (NO in S6544), the main CPU 6101 performs a small hit confirmation process (S6545). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the data (address of the special symbol work area table) set in the IY register to set the special symbol per flag area (first special symbol in FIG. 207) in the special symbol work area table. The hit flag value of the special symbol is directly read from the hit flag area or the second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 209, and based on this hit flag value, a confirmation process of whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is performed. I do.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not it is a small hit (S6546).

In S6546, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is a small hit (YES in S6546), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6549 described later.

On the other hand, in S6546, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is not a small hit (NO in S6546), the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol game end process (S6547). The details of the special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 241 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6548). Then, after the processing of S6548, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6458 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 234).

Here, returning to the processing of S6544 and S6546 again, when S6544 or S6546 is a YES determination, the main CPU 6101 performs the start setting processing of the variation display of the special symbol at the time of a big hit or a small hit (S6549). In this process, the main CPU 6101 generates and updates a special symbol hit signal (big hit signal or small hit signal) output via the external terminal plate 6140 according to the designated special symbol (special symbol selection value). I do.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a round display LED data set process according to the designated special symbol (S6550). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a set process of the upper limit value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened according to the designated special symbol (S6551).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a setting process of the large winning opening operation selection offset value according to the designated special symbol (S6552). The large winning opening operation selection offset value is a relative address value from the start address of the selection table when the large winning opening opening / closing operation pattern is determined from the selection table. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a jackpot signal setting process according to the designated special symbol (S6553).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the start display time per special symbol (S6554). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the start display time per special symbol to the special symbol waiting time management timer area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 207 or the first in FIG. 209. 2 Set to the upper 2-byte timer of the special symbol waiting time management timer area).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "3" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6555). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S6458) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6556). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 207 or 209), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol hit start display command (S6557). The transmission of the special symbol hit start display command reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 6200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6558). Then, after the processing of S6558, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6458 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 234).

[Special symbol game end processing]
Next, the special symbol game end process performed in S6547 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 239 and 240) will be described with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game end processing. In the special symbol game end processing described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol game end process. Is.

First, the main CPU 6101 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6561). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6562). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 207 or 209), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol game end command (S6563). The special symbol game end command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213). Then, after the processing of S6563, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6548 of the special symbol game determination processing (FIGS. 239 and 240).

[Preparation for opening the big prize opening]
Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the large winning opening opening preparation process performed in S6458 and S6460 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 234) will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the large winning opening opening preparation process. In the large winning opening opening preparation process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed corresponds to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the large winning opening opening preparation process. It is a special design.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" or "5" (S6571).

In S6571, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is neither "3" nor "5" (when the determination in S6571 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process. Then, the process is returned to the special symbol management process (FIG. 234). At this time, if the large winning opening preparatory process was called in S6458 during the special symbol management process, the process was returned to the process of S6459, and the large winning opening preparatory process was called in S6460 during the special symbol management process. In the case, the process is returned to the process of S6461.

On the other hand, in S6571, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" or "5" (when the determination in S6571 is YES), the main CPU 6101 sets the counter value for the number of times the large winning opening is opened. Read (S6572). The large winning opening opening counter is a counter that counts the number of opening of the large winning opening, and the counted value (the large winning opening opening counter value) is stored in the large winning opening opening counter area in the main RAM 6103. ..

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the large winning opening opening number counter value is the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number (S6573).

In S6573, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the large winning opening opening number counter value is not the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number (when S6573 is NO determination), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6578 described later.

On the other hand, in S6573, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the large winning opening opening number counter value is the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number (when S6573 is YES determination), the main CPU 6101 has the end display time per special symbol. Is set (S6574). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the end display time per special symbol to the special symbol waiting time management timer area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 207 or the first in FIG. 209. 2 Set in the upper 2-byte timer of the special symbol waiting time management timer area).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "6" in the control state number of the special symbol (S6575). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the special symbol per end process (S6461) is performed after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6576). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 207 or 209), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol per end display command (S6577). The transmission of the special symbol per end display command reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 6200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213). Then, after the processing of S6577, the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 234). At this time, if the large winning opening preparatory process is called in S6458 during the special symbol management process, the process is returned to the process of S6459, and the large winning opening preparatory process is called in S6460 during the special symbol management process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S6461.

Here, returning to the process of S6573 again, when the determination in S6573 is NO, the main CPU 6101 adds 1 to the counter value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (S6578). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of an opening pattern of the large winning opening (S6579). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of the large winning opening (S6580).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of an opening pattern in the round of the selected large winning opening (S6581). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of setting data (table) for opening control of the selected large winning opening (S6582).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs an opening / closing control process of the special electric accessory (S6583). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs an opening / closing control data generation process for the special electric accessory (shutters 6053a, 6054a).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "4" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6584). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the large winning opening opening control process (S6459) is performed after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6585). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 207 or 209), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the large winning opening opening display command (S6586). The transmission of the large winning opening open display command reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 6200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213). Then, after the processing of S6586, the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 234). At this time, if the large winning opening preparatory process is called in S6458 during the special symbol management process, the process is returned to the process of S6459, and the large winning opening preparatory process is called in S6460 during the special symbol management process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S6461.

[Large winning opening opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the large winning opening opening control process performed in S6459 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 234) will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the large winning opening opening control process. In the large winning opening opening control process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed corresponds to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the large winning opening opening control process. It is a special design.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S6951).

In S6951, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S6951 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process. Return to the process of S6460 in the management process (FIG. 234).

On the other hand, in S6591, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S6951 is YES), the main CPU 6101 reads out the large winning opening winning counter value (S6952). The large winning opening winning counter is a counter that counts the number of winnings (the number of rounds) of the large winning opening, and the counted value (the large winning opening winning counter value) is stored in the large winning opening winning counter area in the main RAM 6103. To.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not a predetermined number of prizes have been won in the large winning opening (S6953). In S6953, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the specified number of prizes have been won in the large winning opening (when the determination in S6953 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6597 described later.

On the other hand, in S6953, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the specified number of prizes have not been won in the large winning opening (when the determination in S6953 is NO), the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the time of the special electric accessory operation management timer has elapsed. Is determined (S6594).

In S6594, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the time of the special electric accessory operation management timer has not elapsed (NO in S6594), the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening control process and performs the process. , Return to the process of S6460 of the special symbol management process (FIG. 234).

On the other hand, in S6594, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the time of the special electric accessory operation management timer has elapsed (when the determination in S6594 is YES), the main CPU 6101 opens and closes the special electric accessory (shutters 6053a, 6054a). Control processing is performed (S6595). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the continuation or termination of the operating state of the special electric accessory, and at the time of continuation, generates the opening / closing control data of the special electric accessory. The opening / closing control process of the special electric accessory called in S6595 is the same process as the opening / closing control process of the special electric accessory called in S6583 during the large winning opening opening preparation process (see FIG. 242), and is between the two processes. Then, a common process is used.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not to continue the operating state of the special electric accessory (shutters 6053a, 6054a) (S6596).

In S6596, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the operating state of the special electric accessory continues (when the determination in S6596 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to the process of S6460 in FIG. 234. On the other hand, in S6596, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the operating state of the special electric accessory does not continue (when the determination in S6596 is NO) or when the determination in S6953 is YES, the main CPU 6101 closes the large winning opening. Perform the setting process (S6597).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the display time between rounds (S6598). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the display time between rounds to the special symbol waiting time management timer area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 207 or the second special in FIG. 209. Set in the upper 2-byte timer of the symbol waiting time management timer area).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "5" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6599). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S6460) is performed after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6600). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 207 or 209), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command (S6601). The inter-round display command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213). Then, after the processing of S6601, the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening control processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6460 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 234).

[End processing per special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the special symbol per end processing performed in S6461 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 234) will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the end processing per special symbol. In the special symbol per-end processing described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol-per-end processing. Is.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S6611).

In S6611, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (when the determination in S6611 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol hit end process and also performs the special symbol management process (when the special symbol hit end process is completed). FIG. 234) also ends. On the other hand, in S6611, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when the determination in S6611 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6612).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a set process of end common data per special symbol (S6613). Next, the main CPU 6101 resets (offs) the special symbol pause flag of the special symbol (S6614). In this process, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the special symbol pause flag area (first special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 207 or second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 209) in the special symbol work area table. Set the special symbol pause flag value to the off value.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of end setting data per special symbol (S6615). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the end setting process of the special symbol game (S6616).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 241 (S6617). By this process, the control state number of the special symbol is updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6618). Then, after the processing of S6618, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol hitting end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (FIG. 234).

[Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the normal symbol control process performed in S6235 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 223 to 226) will be described. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol control process.

The numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses in parallel with the processing name of each processing step shown in FIG. 245 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols, and the control state numbers are the normal in the main RAM 6103. It is stored in the symbol control status number area. The main CPU 6101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not there is a normal symbol waiting time (the remaining variable display time of the normal symbol) (whether or not the normal symbol waiting time management timer value ≠ 0) (S6701).

In S6701, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is a normal symbol waiting time (YES in S6701), the main CPU 6101 ends the normal symbol control process and performs the process as the main control main process (FIGS. 223 to 223). Return to the process of S6236 of 226). When the main CPU 6101 determines in S6701 that there is no normal symbol waiting time (NO in S6701), the main CPU 6101 reads out the control status number of the normal symbol (S6702).

Then, the main CPU 6101 performs the processing after S6703 according to the control state number of the read normal symbol. The processing contents after S6703 include, for example, updating the control status number (any of "0" to "4") of the normal symbol read in S6702 and the control status number of the normal symbol in each processing step. It changes according to the presence or absence of, that is, the game situation of the normal symbol game.

First, the main CPU 6101 normally performs a symbol variation start process (S6703). However, the process of S6703 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 updates, for example, the transfer process of the normal symbol information, the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the normal symbol determination process, the setting process of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". Perform various processes such as processing to be performed as appropriate. If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "0" at the start of the processing of S6703, the processing of S6703 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a normal symbol variation end process (S6704). However, the process of S6704 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 appropriately performs various processes for ending the variation display of the normal symbol, such as a process of selecting the waiting time after the normal symbol is confirmed and a process of updating the control state number of the normal symbol to "2". Do. If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "1" at the start of the processing of S6704, the processing of S6704 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a normal symbol game determination process (S6705). However, the process of S6705 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2" at the start of this process. In this process, for example, if the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of updating the control state number of the normal symbol to "3", and if the lottery result of the normal symbol is lost, it is normal. The process of updating the control status number of the symbol to "0" is performed. If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "2" at the start of the processing of S6705, the processing of S6705 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 normally performs an electric accessory opening process (S6706). However, the process of S6706 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3" at the start of this process. In this process, for example, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of updating the control state number of the ordinary symbol to "4" when the number of winnings of the ordinary electric accessory 6046 reaches the winning specified number. Further, in this process, for example, if the operating time of the ordinary electric accessory 6046 has not elapsed for a predetermined time, the main CPU 6101 ends the process of S6706 without updating the control state number of the ordinary symbol. Further, in this process, for example, when the operating time of the ordinary electric accessory 6046 elapses for a predetermined time and the operating state of the ordinary symbol is not continued, the main CPU 6101 updates the control state number of the ordinary symbol to "4". Perform the processing to be performed. If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "3" at the start of the processing of S6706, the processing of S6706 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a normal symbol hitting end process (S6707). However, the process of S6707 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes for ending the normal symbol game (including, for example, a process of updating the control state number of the normal symbol to "0"). If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "4" at the start of the processing of S6707, the processing of S6707 is not performed internally.

Then, after the processing of S6707, the main CPU 6101 ends the normal symbol control processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6236 of the main control main processing (FIGS. 223 to 226).

(Fourth Embodiment)
Next, the configuration and various operations of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the configurations and various processing operations other than the configurations and various processing operations described below are the same as those of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the third embodiment. Therefore, in the following description, the same configuration (process) as the configuration (process) of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the third embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals (step numbers). Further, although the description will be omitted below, in the present embodiment, by providing the same configuration and various processing operations as the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the third embodiment, the same as the various effects described in the third embodiment. The effect of is obtained.

<Outline of pachinko game machine configuration, playability, control, etc.>
In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a big hit gaming state is provided as a type of gaming state controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101, but a small hit gaming state is not provided. Therefore, in the present embodiment, "small hit" is not provided as a winning type in any of the lottery (big hit lottery) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101, as in the third embodiment, the probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state), the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), and the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state). A time-saving game state (high-winning game state) and a non-time-saving game state (low-winning game state) are provided. In each of the probabilistic gaming state and the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the "big hit" changes according to the set value, as in the third embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the type of the gaming state controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101, the state of "high probability time reduction" (probability variation game state and time reduction game state occur at the same time) as in the third embodiment. ), "With low probability time reduction" (normal game state and time reduction game state occur at the same time) and "No low probability time reduction" (normal game state and non-time reduction game state occur at the same time) are provided. However, the state of "no high probability time reduction" (probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state occur at the same time), that is, the latent probability game state is not provided.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment does not have a simultaneous change function of a special symbol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if a prize of the other special symbol occurs during the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol is not started and is held. Treated as a sphere. Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is given priority over the variable display of the other special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of the special symbols is executed in the reserved order. You may.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a fall lottery function from a probabilistic gaming state to a normal gaming state. The fall lottery and its determination processing are performed before the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the probabilistic game state, and when the fall lottery is won (when the fall is confirmed), the game state shifts from the probabilistic game state to the normal game state at that time. (Fall).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a predetermined external signal (hereinafter, referred to as "first jackpot signal": during the jackpot game consecutive villas) via the external terminal plate 6140 during the time saving game state or the jackpot gaming state. There is an output port that keeps outputting (the signal that is output to). This signal is output to a data display or the like provided externally.

However, when the fall lottery function from the probabilistic game state is provided as in the present embodiment, the fall lottery and its determination are performed before the start of the change of the special symbol in the probabilistic game state, and the fall is confirmed at that time. When the time-saving game state also ends, at that point, the first jackpot signal is interrupted, which is notified via a data display or the like before the start of fluctuation, recognizing that the player has fallen from the probabilistic game state. There is a possibility that it will end up.

In order to solve such a problem, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the fall is confirmed by the fall lottery performed before the start of the change of the special symbol, the first big hit signal is not interrupted. 1 A process of extending the output of the jackpot signal until the end of the game when the fall is confirmed (the end of the variation display of the special symbol) is performed.

In the present embodiment, a control flag (hereinafter referred to as “first jackpot signal extension flag”) for realizing the output extension processing of the first jackpot signal is provided, and the first jackpot signal extension flag is turned on / off. Therefore, the extension control of the output of the first jackpot signal is performed so that the first jackpot signal is not interrupted when the fall is confirmed. Specifically, when the fall from the probabilistic game state is confirmed by the fall lottery performed before the start of the change of the special symbol, and at that time, the time-saving game state also ends, the first jackpot signal extension flag is set to the on state. Then, the output of the first jackpot signal is extended, and then the output extension process of the first jackpot signal is terminated by setting the first jackpot signal extension flag to the off state at the end of the game when the fall is confirmed.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first jackpot signal is transmitted to the external terminal plate 6140 not only during the time-saving gaming state and the jackpot gaming state, but also when the first jackpot signal extension flag is on. You can continue to output via. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the fall confirmation via the data display or the like (the problem at the time of winning the fall lottery described above can be solved). Therefore, when the output extension processing of the first big hit signal described above is provided, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game at the time of winning the fall lottery.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a time-saving lamp (notification lamp) that lights up during the time-saving game state, and the fall from the probability-changing game state is confirmed before the start of the change of the special symbol. When the time-saving game state is also completed, the time-saving lamp is turned off at the start of the fluctuation, so that the player may recognize that he / she has fallen.

Therefore, in order to solve such a problem, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a "big hit" is determined during the probabilistic gaming state (at the time of the probabilistic mid-big hit), and even when the time-saving gaming state ends at that time. A configuration is provided in which the output extension process of the first jackpot signal described above is executed, and the output of the first jackpot signal is extended until the end of the game at the time of the probability variation middle jackpot. When such a configuration is provided, the time saving lamp is turned off even at the time of the probability change medium big hit and when the time saving game state ends, but since the first big hit signal continues to be output, the time saving lamp is turned off due to the fall confirmation. It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a thing or a big hit through a data display or the like.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the output extension processing of the first jackpot signal described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the fall lottery is won, and also improve the interest of the game when the time saving lamp is turned off. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main RAM 6103 is a table similar to the special symbol work area table and the special symbol related definition data table of each special symbol shown in FIGS. 207 to 210 (third embodiment). It is provided inside. Since the simultaneous fluctuation function is not provided in the present embodiment, the storage area for the information regarding the simultaneous fluctuation (for example, the storage area for the special symbol pause flag of each special symbol) is the special symbol of the present embodiment. It is not provided in the special symbol work area table and the special symbol related definition data table.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 246 to 258, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 6101 of the main control circuit 6100 will be described. In the various processes executed by the main CPU 6101 in the present embodiment, the processing contents of the special symbol management processing are different from those executed by the main CPU 6101 in the third embodiment, and the other processing contents are the third. It is the same as the processing content described in the embodiment. Therefore, in the following, only the processing contents of the special symbol management processing in the present embodiment will be described, and the description of other various processing will be omitted.

[Special symbol management process]
First, the special symbol management process performed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol management process. The special symbol management process of the present embodiment is performed in S6408, S6412, S6416 and S6420 in the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 231 and 232) described in the third embodiment.

Further, in the special symbol management process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol management process. .. Therefore, when the data set in the IY register is the address of the first special symbol work area table at the start of the special symbol management process, the "special symbol" to be processed becomes the first special symbol and IY. When the data set in the register is the address of the second special symbol work area table, the "special symbol" to be processed becomes the second special symbol.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “6”) in parentheses written in parallel with the code of each processing step shown in FIG. 246 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed, and are in the special symbol work area table. It is stored in the special symbol control state number area (the first special symbol control state number area in FIG. 207 or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 209). Then, the main CPU 6101 advances the special symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the control state number.

As is clear from comparing the flowchart of the special symbol management process of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 234 with the flowchart of the special symbol management process of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 246, the special symbol management of the present embodiment is shown. The processing flow of the processing is the same as that of the third embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, each of the special symbol variation start process (S6805), the special symbol variation end process (S6806), the special symbol game determination process (S6807), and the special symbol per-end process (S6811). The processing content is different from the corresponding processing content of the third embodiment.

First, the main CPU 6101 reads the value of the upper 2-byte timer, and whether or not there is a special symbol waiting time (variable display time) in the first half of the special symbol (the special symbol waiting time management timer value ≠ 0 in the first half). Is determined (S6801). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol waiting time management timer area (first special symbol in FIG. 207) in the special symbol work area table. The value of the upper 2-byte timer stored in the waiting time management timer area or the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 209) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the upper 2-byte timer from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

In S6801, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is a special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6801 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol management process and performs the process in the special symbol control process. (See FIG. 231 and FIG. 232). At this time, if the special symbol management process is called in S6408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6409, and if the special symbol management process is called in S6412 during the special symbol control process, the process is processed. Is returned to the processing of S6413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S6416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6420 during the special symbol control process, it is special. The symbol control process also ends.

On the other hand, in S6801, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is no special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6801 is NO), the main CPU 6101 reads the value of the lower 2-byte timer to read the value of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol waiting time in the latter half (the special symbol waiting time management timer value in the latter half is ≠ 0) (S6802). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol waiting time management timer area (first special symbol in FIG. 207) in the special symbol work area table. The value of the lower 2-byte timer stored in the waiting time management timer area or the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 209) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the lower 2-byte timer from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

In S6802, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is a special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6802 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol management process and performs the process in the special symbol control process. (See FIG. 231 and FIG. 232). At this time, if the special symbol management process is called in S6408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6409, and if the special symbol management process is called in S6412 during the special symbol control process, the process is processed. Is returned to the processing of S6413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S6416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6420 during the special symbol control process, it is special. The symbol control process also ends.

On the other hand, in S6802, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is no special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6802 is NO), the main CPU 6101 reads out the control status number of the special symbol (S6803). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to control the special symbol control status number area (first special symbol control in FIG. 207) in the special symbol work area table. The control state number of the special symbol stored in the state number area or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 209 is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the control state number of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs reference processing of the special symbol control branch table (S6804). Also in the present embodiment, in the special symbol control branch table, the correspondence relationship between each control state number (“0” to “6”) of the special symbol and the storage address of the corresponding processing program is defined.

Then, the main CPU 6101 performs the processing after S6805 according to the control state number of the read special symbol. The processing contents after S6805 include, for example, updating the control status number (any of "0" to "6") of the special symbol read in S6803 and the control status number of the special symbol in each processing step. It changes according to the presence or absence of the game, that is, the game situation of the special symbol game.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation start process (S6805). However, the process of S6805 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes for starting the special symbol game. The details of the special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 247 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "0" at the start of the processing of S6805, the processing of S6805 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation end process (S6806). However, the process of S6806 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes when ending the variable display of the special symbol. The details of the special symbol variation end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 253, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "1" at the start of the processing of S6806, the processing of S6806 is not performed internally and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol game determination process (S6807). However, the process of S6807 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs a determination process of a lottery result (big hit / loss) of a special symbol and various processes according to the determination result. The details of the special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "2" at the start of the processing of S6807, the processing of S6807 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the large winning opening opening preparation process described with reference to FIG. 242 (S6808). However, the process of S6808 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3" at the start of this process. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "3" at the start of the processing of S6808, the processing of S6808 is not performed internally and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the large winning opening opening control process described with reference to FIG. 243 (S6809). However, the process of S6809 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4" at the start of this process. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "4" at the start of the processing of S6809, the processing of S6809 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the large winning opening opening preparation process described with reference to FIG. 242 (S6810). However, the process of S6810 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5" at the start of this process. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "5" at the start of the processing of S6810, the processing of S6810 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol hitting end process (S6811). However, the process of S6811 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes when ending the game at the time of hitting a special symbol. The details of the special symbol hitting end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 258, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "6" at the start of the processing of S6811, the processing of S6811 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Then, after the processing of S6811, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIGS. 231 and 232). At this time, if the special symbol management process is called in S6408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6409, and if the special symbol management process is called in S6412 during the special symbol control process, the process is processed. Is returned to the processing of S6413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S6416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6420 during the special symbol control process, it is special. The symbol control process also ends.

[Special symbol change start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the special symbol variation start processing performed in S6805 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 246) will be described. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol variation start processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S6821).

In S6821, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S6821 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation start process and manages the process. The process returns to the process of S6806 of the process (FIG. 246).

On the other hand, in S6821, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S6821 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the special symbol game standby process (S6822). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs a game state (“game start” or “game standby”) check process. The details of the special symbol game standby process will be described later with reference to FIG. 248 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the game state is "game standby" (S6823).

In S6823, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game state is "game standby" (when the determination in S6823 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation start process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process (when the game is determined to be YES). Return to the process of S6806 in FIG. 246).

On the other hand, in S6823, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game state is not "game standby" ("game start") (when S6823 is NO determination), the main CPU 6101 performs special symbol memory transfer processing ( S6824). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs subtraction processing of the number of special symbol reservations, transfer processing of lottery results, transmission reservation processing of hold subtraction commands, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol fall determination process (S6825). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a fall lottery process if it is in a probabilistic game state, and if it wins a fall lottery, it performs various flag setting processes for falling the game state. The details of the special symbol fall determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 249 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol hit determination process (S6826). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a determination process of a lottery result (big hit / loss) of a special symbol. In this process, the same process as the special symbol hit determination process (S6475) described in the third embodiment is performed. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol determination process (S6827). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of determining the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result (big hit / loss) of the special symbol.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation pattern setting process (S6828). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs lottery processing of the first half variable display pattern and the latter half variable display pattern corresponding to the lottery result (big hit / loss) of the special symbol, and sets each variable display pattern. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation display time setting process (S6829). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the fluctuation display time of the first half of the special symbol (special symbol waiting time of the first half) and the fluctuation display time of the second half (special symbol waiting time of the second half) into the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer, respectively. set.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol game state setting process (S6830). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state (various game state flags) setting process at the time of a big hit. The details of the special symbol game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 252 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 clears the designated storage area (S6831). Specifically, the main CPU 6101 clears the random number work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "1" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6832). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the special symbol variation end process (S6806) is performed after the end of the special symbol variation start process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S6833). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs setting (update) processing of the control number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table, and transfer processing of the game state specification parameter. Further, in this process, the main CPU 6101 also performs a command parameter setting process for external output.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6834).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command (S6835). The special symbol effect start command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6836). Then, after the processing of S6836, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation start processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6806 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 246).

[Special symbol game standby processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 248, the special symbol game standby process performed in S6822 during the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game standby process.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the number of reserved special symbols is "0" (S6841). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol hold number area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol hold number area in FIG. 207). Alternatively, the number of reserved special symbols stored in the second special symbol reserved number area in FIG. 209) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the number of reserved special symbols from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

In S6841, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of reserved special symbols is not "0" (when the determination in S6841 is NO), the main CPU 6101 sets "game start" in the game state (S6842). Then, after the process of S6482, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game standby process, and returns the process to the process of S6823 of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 247).

On the other hand, in S6841, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of reserved special symbols is "0" (when the determination in S6841 is YES), the main CPU 6101 is in the demo (standby state) in the current gaming state. It is determined whether or not there is (S6843). In this determination process, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the demo display command has been transmitted (whether or not the demo display command transmitted flag is on). If the demo display command has already been transmitted, the determination result of S6843 is a YES determination, and if the demo display command has not been transmitted, the determination result of S6843 is a NO determination.

In S6843, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the current gaming state is being demoed (when the determination in S6843 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6849 described later.

On the other hand, in S6843, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the current gaming state is not in the demo (NO in S6843), the main CPU 6101 sets the demo display command transmitted flag to the on state (S6844). .. The value of the demo display command transmitted flag is the special symbol demo display state flag area (first special symbol in FIG. 207) in the special symbol work area table provided in the main RAM 6103, as in the third embodiment. It is stored in the demo display state flag area or the second special symbol demo display state flag area in FIG. 209).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6485). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S6846). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs setting (update) processing of the control number area, the game state designation parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table, and transfer processing of the game state designation parameter.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the demo display command (S6847). The demo display command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6848).

After the processing of S6848 or when S6843 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 6101 sets "game standby" in the game state (S6849). Then, after the process of S6849, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game standby process, and returns the process to the process of S6823 of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 247).

[Special symbol fall judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the special symbol fall determination process performed in S6825 during the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol fall determination process.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not it is in the probabilistic gaming state (S6851).

In S6851, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is not in the probabilistic game state (normal game state) (when the determination in S6851 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol fall determination process, and the process is changed to the special symbol. The process returns to the process of S6826 of the start process (FIG. 247).

On the other hand, in S6851 when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is in the probabilistic game state (YES in S6851), the main CPU 6101 performs a fall lottery process (S6852).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the fall lottery has been won (S6853).

In S6853, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the fall lottery has not been won (NO in S6853), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol fall determination process, and performs the process as a special symbol variation start process (FIG. It returns to the process of S6826 of 247).

On the other hand, in S6853, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the fall lottery has been won (YES in S6853), the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol probability change state flag (S6854). By this process, the gaming state falls (shifts) from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol probability change state notification flag (S6855).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the remaining number of time reductions is "0" (number of time reductions = 0) (S6856).

In S6856, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of remaining time reductions is not "0" (when the determination in S6856 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6860 described later.

On the other hand, in S6856, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the remaining number of time reductions is "0" (when the determination in S6856 is YES), the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol time reduction state flag (S6857). .. By this process, the time saving game state ends. The special symbol time saving state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state, and is set to the on state when the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state. The value of the special symbol time saving state flag is stored in the special symbol time saving state flag area provided in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol time saving state notification flag (S6858). The special symbol time saving state notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not to notify that the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state, and is turned on when notifying that the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state. Set to state. That is, the special symbol time saving state notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not to turn on the time saving lamp. If the special symbol time saving state flag is on, the time saving lamp is turned on, and if it is off, the time saving lamp is turned off. To do. Therefore, the processing of S6858 turns off the time saving lamp. The value of the special symbol time saving state notification flag is stored in the special symbol time saving state notification flag area provided in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the setting process of the first jackpot signal extension flag (S6859). By this process, the first jackpot signal extension flag is set to the ON state, and the output of the first jackpot signal (external signal) is extended. That is, if the fall is confirmed by the fall lottery performed before the start of the change of the special symbol and the time-saving game state ends at that time, the output of the first jackpot signal extension is extended. Since the first jackpot signal extension flag is reset (off) at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol when the fall is confirmed, the output of the first jackpot signal is extended until the end of the fluctuation display.

After the processing of S6859 or when S6856 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 6101 sets the offset addition value "2" to the data selection offset addition value (S6860). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol effect mode management process (S6861). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of the variation pattern table (effect variation pattern) of the special symbol based on the set data selection offset addition value. The details of the special symbol effect mode management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 250 described later.

Then, after the processing of S6861, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol fall determination processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6826 of the special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 247).

[Special symbol production mode management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the special symbol effect mode management process performed in S6861 during the special symbol fall determination process (see FIG. 249) will be described. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol effect mode management process.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a determination process of a combination of special symbol variation pattern selection tables (variation pattern table described later) (S6781). In this process, the main CPU 6101 determines the combination of the special symbol variation pattern selection table (not shown) from the special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table (not shown) based on the set data selection offset addition value. ..

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the determined combination of the symbol variation pattern selection tables as the effect variation table (S6782). Then, after the process of S6782, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol effect mode management process and also ends the special symbol fall determination process (FIG. 249).

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern table groups used for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game are provided. In addition, each group is provided with a variation pattern table (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation during variation pattern table") used when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol during the probability variation game state, and a variation pattern of the special symbol during the fall. The fluctuation pattern table used when determining the fluctuation pattern table (hereinafter referred to as "falling fluctuation pattern table"), and the fluctuation pattern table used when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol after the fall (during the normal gaming state). (Hereinafter, referred to as "normal medium fluctuation pattern table") is provided.

Then, except at the time of falling (normal time), at the end of the fluctuation display of the specific symbol, the probability changing fluctuation pattern table or the normal middle fluctuation pattern table is selected as the fluctuation pattern table according to the game situation, and the selected fluctuation pattern table is selected. The fluctuation pattern of the next special symbol is determined from. Further, in the present embodiment, when the fall is determined by the fall lottery performed before the start of the change of the special symbol (at the start of the game) in the probabilistic game state, the change pattern at the time of the fall is used as the change pattern table at the time of the fall decision. A table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is determined from the selected fall fluctuation pattern table.

Each variation pattern table is composed of a combination of a plurality of special symbol variation pattern selection tables set as an effect variation table in S6782. Further, each special symbol variation pattern selection table constituting the variation pattern table is associated with the number of variations (variation number period) of the special symbol in which the special symbol variation pattern selection table is used. When the variation pattern table having such a configuration is set, the special symbol variation pattern selection table used changes according to the variation number (variation number period) of the special symbol.

For example, one variation pattern tail is now composed of a combination of three special symbol variation pattern selection tables (special symbol variation pattern selection tables A, B, C), and the special symbol variation pattern selection table A is the first to 100th times. The number of fluctuations (variation number period) up to is associated, the number of fluctuations (variation number period) from the 101st to the 300th is associated with the special symbol variation pattern selection table B, and the special symbol variation pattern selection table C is 301. Consider the case where the number of fluctuations (variation number period) after the first time is associated. In this case, when the variation pattern tail is set as the effect variation table, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined using the special symbol variation pattern selection table A in the period of the number of variations from the first to the 100th. In the period of the number of fluctuations from the 101st to the 300th time, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined using the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection table B, and in the period of the number of fluctuations after the 301st time, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is special. It is determined using the symbol variation pattern selection table C.

In the present embodiment, the selection and change processing of the variation pattern table (combination of special symbol variation pattern selection tables (effect group)) is performed based on the data selection offset addition value as described above, and the data selection offset addition value. When is "0", the normal medium fluctuation pattern table is selected, and when the data selection offset addition value is "1", the probability variation medium fluctuation pattern table is selected and the data selection offset addition value is "1". If it is 2 ”, the fall variation pattern table is selected. The data selection offset addition value is set to "2" when the fall lottery is won at the start of the game in the probabilistic game state. In this case, the data selection set before the fall lottery is selected. The offset addition value "1" is changed to "2", and the fluctuation pattern table is changed to the fall fluctuation pattern table based on the changed data selection offset addition value "2".

When such a correspondence configuration between the data selection offset addition value and the fluctuation pattern table (combination of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection table) is provided, the fluctuation used in the determination process of the fluctuation pattern table (effect fluctuation table) of the special symbol is provided. After setting the pattern table group (the above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table), the game is simply moved by the offset value (data selection offset addition value) according to the game situation in the group. You can select a variation pattern table according to the situation. In this case, the selection process of the variation pattern table can be simplified (the address acquisition process of each variation pattern table becomes unnecessary). As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced. It can be mitigated.

(Modification example of selection method of production fluctuation table)
The method of selecting the variation pattern table (combination of the special symbol variation pattern selection table) according to the game situation after the jackpot game is completed (hereinafter referred to as "selection method of the effect variation table") is limited to the example of the present embodiment. Not done. Here, another example of the method of selecting the effect variation table (variation pattern table) according to the game situation will be described with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table, a special symbol variation pattern selection table group, and a special symbol variation pattern selection offset table used in the selection process of the effect variation table of this example. is there.

In the special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table, data relating to the storage addresses of a plurality of selectable special symbol variation pattern selection table groups (in the example of FIG. 251, special symbol variation pattern selection table groups 0 to 3) (Special symbol variation pattern selection table relative address from the start address of the selection data table) is specified. Although detailed description is omitted for the special symbol variation pattern selection table group, the number of fluctuations and the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table to be referred to when selecting the effect variation table from the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table are mainly used. The relationship with the reference (head) address in is specified. Further, in the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table, data relating to the storage addresses of a plurality of types of effect variation tables (offset value: in the example of FIG. 251, the effect variation table 0 to 12 values) are defined.

In this example, first, the special symbol variation pattern selection table group to be used after the big hit game is selected with reference to the special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data pattern. In this selection process, the special symbol variation pattern selection table group may be determined according to, for example, a jackpot symbol, a game state, a random number value when the jackpot is won, and the like. Further, when selecting the special symbol variation pattern selection table group, a new lottery may be performed to select the table group. In this case, the special symbol variation pattern selection table group can be randomly determined.

Next, from the data (offset value) regarding the storage addresses of the plurality of types of effect variation tables specified in the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table according to the selected special symbol variation pattern selection table group and the current number of variations. , Determines the data (reference address, reference offset value) related to the storage address of the effect variation table which is the reference (head) of the effect variation table which is a candidate for use. This determination process is a process of determining which address from the start address of the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table is to be used as a reference according to the number of fluctuations since the end of the jackpot game. For example, when the number of fluctuations is the 20th, the data stored in the 6th address from the start address of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection offset table is used as a reference, and when the number of fluctuations is the 30th, it is special. In this determination process, it is determined that the data stored in the ninth address from the start address of the symbol variation pattern selection offset table is used as a reference.

Then, the data selection offset addition value (any of "0" to "2") according to the game state is added to the data (reference address) related to the storage address of the effect variation table which is the reference determined by the determination process. Then, the storage address of the effect variation table to be used is determined.

For example, when the number of fluctuations since the end of the jackpot game is the 20th, the data stored in the 6th address from the start address of the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table by the second selection process is used as a reference. Consider the case where it is decided to do.

In this case, for example, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is in the normal gaming state (after falling), the data selection offset addition value is "0", so that the data related to the storage address of the reference effect variation table ( The offset value obtained by adding the data selection offset addition value "0" to the reference address = 6) is "6", and the data (relative address value) stored in the sixth address from the start address of the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table. : In the example shown in FIG. 251, the effect variation table stored in the “effect variation table 10 values”) is used (selected) as the normal medium variation pattern table.

Further, in this case, for example, when the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is the probabilistic gaming state, the data selection offset addition value is "1", so that the data related to the storage address of the reference effect variation table (reference address =). The offset value obtained by adding the data selection offset addition value "1" to 6) is "7", and the data stored at the 7th address from the start address of the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table (relative address value: FIG. 251). In the example shown in (1), the effect variation table stored in the “effect variation table 7 values”) is used (selected) as the probability variation during variation pattern table.

Further, in this case, for example, when the game state after the jackpot game ends is when the fall is confirmed, the data selection offset addition value is "2", so that the data related to the storage address of the reference effect variation table (reference address =). The offset value obtained by adding the data selection offset addition value "2" to 6) is "8", and the data stored at the eighth address from the start address of the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table (relative address value: FIG. 251). In the example shown in (1), the effect variation table stored in the “effect variation table binary value”) is used (selected) as the fall variation pattern table.

As described above, in the above-mentioned modification of the effect variation table selection method, a plurality of types of candidates for use after the jackpot game is completed, depending on the type of the selected special symbol variation pattern selection table group and the current number of variations. The selection criteria (start address) of the effect variation table group is determined, and a plurality of effect variation tables to be used after the end of the jackpot game are used according to the selection criteria and the game state (data selection offset addition value) after the end of the jackpot game. It is decided from the production fluctuation table group of the species.

In the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table, as described above, data (offset values) relating to the storage addresses of a plurality of effect variation tables that are candidates for use according to the number of variations are continuously arranged on the address. Therefore, the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table is a table group in which the range (address range in the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table) of the effect variation table to be used is specified according to the number of fluctuations. It can also be expressed as.

[Special symbol game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the special symbol game state setting process performed in S6830 during the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game state setting process.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a jackpot confirmation process (S6881). In this process, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the special symbol hit flag area (first special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 207 or second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 209) in the special symbol work area table. The value (flag value per special symbol) is read out, and based on the flag value per special symbol, a process of confirming whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol corresponds to the big hit is performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not it is a big hit (S6882).

In S6882, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is not a big hit (NO in S6882), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game state setting process, and performs the process in S6831 of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 247). Return to the processing of. On the other hand, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is a big hit (YES in S6882), the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not it is in the probabilistic gaming state (S6883).

In S6883, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is not in the probabilistic game state (NO in S6883), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game state setting process, and performs the process in the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 247). Return to the processing of S6831.

On the other hand, in S6883, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is in the probabilistic game state (YES in S6883), the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol probabilistic state flag (S6884). Next, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol probability change state notification flag (S6885).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the remaining number of time reductions is not "0" (number of time reductions ≠ 0) (S6886).

In S6886, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of remaining time reductions is not "0" (when the determination in S6886 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game state setting process and starts the process of changing the special symbol. The process returns to the process of S6831 of the process (FIG. 247).

On the other hand, in S6886, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the remaining number of time reductions is "0" (when the determination in S6886 is NO), the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol time reduction state flag (S6887). .. Next, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol time saving state notification flag (S6888). By this process, the time saving lamp is turned off.

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets (on) the first jackpot signal extension flag (S6889). By this processing, the output port of the first jackpot signal (external signal) is set to the ON state, and the output processing of the first jackpot signal is extended. Then, after the process of S6889, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game state setting process, and returns the process to the process of S6831 of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 247).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the processes (S6884 to S6889) performed at the time of the probability change medium jackpot in the special symbol game state setting process are the processes (S6854) performed at the time of the fall confirmation in the special symbol fall determination process (see FIG. 249). The process is the same as that of ~ S6859). Therefore, in both processes, the time saving lamp is turned off at the end of the time saving game state (time saving number of times = 0), but it is not possible to recognize whether it is due to the fall confirmation or the big hit. Can be. Further, in this case, since the output of the first jackpot signal is extended in both processes, whether the time saving lamp is turned off due to the fall confirmation or the jackpot even through the data display or the like. Cannot be recognized. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the time saving lamp is turned off.

[Special symbol change end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the special symbol variation end processing performed in S6806 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 246) will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol variation end processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S6891).

In S6891, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S6891 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end processing and manages the processing. Return to the process of S6807 of the process (FIG. 246).

On the other hand, in S6891 when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S6891 is YES), the main CPU 6101 sets the fixed waiting time of the special symbol (S6892). .. In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the fixed waiting time of the special symbol in the upper 2-byte timer in the special symbol waiting time management timer area (4 bytes) in the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "2" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6893). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the special symbol game determination process (S6807) is performed after the end process of the special symbol variation end process is completed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command of the special symbol (S6894). The special symbol effect stop command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) during the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213). Then, after the processing of S6894, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6807 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 246).

[Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, the special symbol game determination process performed in S6807 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 246) will be described with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255. 254 and 255 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special symbol game determination process.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S6901).

In S6901, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S6901 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game determination process and manages the process. Return to the process of S6808 of the process (FIG. 246).

On the other hand, in S6901, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S6901 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6902).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a jackpot confirmation process (S6903). In this process, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the special symbol hit flag area (first special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 207 or second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 209) in the special symbol work area table. The value (flag value per special symbol) is read out, and based on the flag value per special symbol, a process of confirming whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol corresponds to the big hit is performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not it is a big hit (S6904).

In S6904, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is a big hit (YES in S6904), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6908 described later.

On the other hand, in S6904, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is not a big hit (NO in S6904), the main CPU 6101 performs a game state management process (S6905). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly updates various flags and counters related to the management of the game state. The details of the game state management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 256 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol game end process (S6906). The details of the special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 257 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6907). Then, after the processing of S6907, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6808 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 246).

Here, returning to the process of S6904 again, if S6904 is a YES determination, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the first jackpot signal extension flag (S6908). By this process, the output of the first big hit signal is stopped. Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the start of the variable display at the time of a big hit (S6909). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a set process of a special symbol hit signal (big hit signal) output via the external terminal plate.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a round display LED data set process according to the designated special symbol (S6910). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a set process of the upper limit value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened according to the designated special symbol (S6911).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a setting process of the large winning opening operation selection offset value according to the designated special symbol (S6912). The large winning opening operation selection offset value is a relative address from the start address of the selection table when the large winning opening opening / closing operation pattern is determined from the selection table. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a set process of a jackpot signal (external signal) according to the designated special symbol (S6913).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the start display time per special symbol (S6914). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the start display time per special symbol in the upper 2-byte timer in the special symbol waiting time management timer area (4 bytes) in the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "3" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6915). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S6808) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6916). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs setting (update) processing of the control number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table, and transfer processing of the game state specification parameter.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol hit start display command (S6917). The transmission of the special symbol hit start display command reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 6200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6918). Then, after the processing of S6918, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6808 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 246).

[Game status management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the game state management process performed in S6905 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 254 and 255) will be described. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game state management process.

First, the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter (S6921). The time saving state fluctuation number counter is a counter for counting the remaining time saving number of times, and the counted value is stored in the time saving state fluctuation number counter area in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the remaining number of time reductions is not "0" (number of time reductions ≠ 0) (S6922). In S6922, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of remaining time reductions is not "0" (when the determination in S6922 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6926 described later.

On the other hand, in S6922, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the remaining number of time reductions is "0" (when the determination in S6922 is NO), the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the value of the special symbol probability change state flag is "0". (S6923). In S6923, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the value of the special symbol probability change state flag is not "0" (when the determination in S6923 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6926 described later.

On the other hand, in S6923, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the value of the special symbol probability change state flag is "0" (when the determination in S6923 is NO), the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol time saving state flag. (S6924). Next, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol time saving state notification flag (S6925). By this process, the time saving lamp is turned off.

After the processing of S6925, or when S6922 or S6923 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect fluctuation number counter (S6926). The effect fluctuation count counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations in which the currently set special symbol variation pattern selection table is used, and the counted value is used in the effect variation counter in the main RAM 6103. Stored. As in the present embodiment, the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is composed of a combination of the special symbol variation pattern selection tables, and the special symbol variation pattern selection table is added to each special symbol variation pattern selection table. When the number of fluctuations (variation count period) of the special symbol in which is used is associated, it is set in the effect fluctuation count counter each time the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection table to be used is switched according to the number of fluctuations. The number of remaining fluctuations (initial value) is also reset.

Then, after the process of S6926, the main CPU 6101 ends the game state management process, and returns the process to the process of S6906 of the special symbol game determination process (FIGS. 254 and 255).

[Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the special symbol game end process performed in S6906 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 254 and 255) will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game end processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the first jackpot signal extension flag (S6931). As a result, the output of the first jackpot signal is stopped. Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6932).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the value stored in the special symbol probability variation state flag area in the main RAM 6103 (“0” in the normal gaming state and “1” in the probability variation game state) as the data selection offset of the input register. It is set as an additional value (S6933).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the special symbol effect mode management process described with reference to FIG. 250 (S6934). In this process, when the data selection offset addition value set in S6933 is "0", the normal medium fluctuation pattern table is selected as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the fluctuation pattern table is set in S6933. When the data selection offset addition value is "1", the probability variation mid-variation pattern table is selected as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6935). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs setting (update) processing of the game state number area, the game state designation parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table, and transfer processing of the game state designation parameter.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol game end command (S6936). The special symbol game end command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control side in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 213). Then, after the processing of S6936, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6907 of the special symbol game determination processing (FIGS. 254 and 255).

[End processing per special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the special symbol per end processing performed in S6811 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 246) will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the end processing per special symbol.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S6941).

In S6941, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (when the determination in S6941 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol hit end process and the special symbol management process (when the special symbol control state number is NO). FIG. 246) also ends.

On the other hand, in S6941, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when the determination in S6941 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6942).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a set process of end common data per special symbol (S6943). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of end setting data per special symbol (S6944).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the end setting process of the special symbol game (S6945). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 257 (S6946). By this process, the control state number of the special symbol is updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6947). Then, after the processing of S6947, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol hitting end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (FIG. 246).

<Application example>
In the third and fourth embodiments, the operations and functions controlled by the main control circuit 6100 have been mainly described, but these operations and functions can also be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. Is. That is, the various functions (effect functions) controlled on the sub-control circuit 200 side described in the first embodiment can also be applied to the pachinko gaming machines of the third and fourth embodiments, and in this case, Similarly, various effects based on the various functions described in the first embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the description of the above various embodiments, the configurations of various modifications have been described, but in the present invention, the configurations of these various embodiments and various modifications are appropriately combined and used as long as no particular inconsistency occurs. be able to. Further, in the above-mentioned various embodiments and the above-mentioned various modifications, the pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be appropriately applied to other gaming machines, for example, to various gaming machines such as ball gaming machines, gaming machines, enclosed gaming machines, slot machines and pachislot gaming machines. It can also be applied.

<Expandability of other gaming machines according to the above embodiment>
Next, various expandability of the gaming machine according to the above-mentioned various embodiments and the above-mentioned various modifications will be described.

(1) Extensibility 1
The gaming machine of the above embodiment may be configured so that, for example, set values in six stages of "1" to "6" can be set by, for example, a person involved in the hall. When the set value is changed, for example, the jackpot probability (internal winning probability) in the internal lottery is changed.

The game machine of the above-described embodiment can apply the present invention to all game machines in which a game is played using a game medium and a privilege is given based on the result of the game. That is, the gaming machine of the above embodiment is not limited to a form in which a gaming medium is launched or thrown in by a physical movement of a player to play a game, and the gaming medium is paid out based on the result of the game. The main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player, and enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game machine or a game performed without a medal. Further, the game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game medium.

When managed by a game media management device connected to the main control circuit, the game media management device has a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is an external game medium (not shown). It is connected to the bidirectional communication function via a handling device and a predetermined interface, and is an operation of lending a game medium (that is, an operation of providing a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium loading operation. ) Or, when a winning combination related to the payout of the game medium is won (the winning combination is established), the game medium payout operation (that is, the player is made to acquire the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium). Operation), or an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium used for a game may be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front of the game machine based on, for example, the management result of the number of game media. A number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In this case, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate, but the game media management device uses a dedicated unit or the like. When transmitting and receiving signals to and from the game machine via the game machine, it is also possible to receive game information and the like via a dedicated unit or board for transmitting and receiving signals.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on game media handling device side (Neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko game machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachislot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of internal points inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it is also possible to prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot for the game medium and the slot for the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, the enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside and the data regarding the increase / decrease of the game medium due to the consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium are communicated to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via a cable, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. In this way, since the gaming ball as the gaming medium is launched from above with respect to the gaming area, the enclosed gaming machine can avoid the so-called return ball (foul ball). Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed type gaming machine, the game ball is not in the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, by being launched from the game ball from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the possessed ball decreases. In addition, as the game balls pass through each winning opening provided in the game area, the number of balls to be paid out is increased according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase due to lending from the game media management device. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and withdrawal. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine may have a payout control circuit and operating means (for example, a touch panel type liquid crystal display device, which may be provided separately or integrally with the gaming machine). However, the gaming medium management device may have an operating means (for example, a touch panel type liquid crystal display device, which may be provided separately or integrally with the gaming machine). The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of each winning opening of the game ball. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. The liquid crystal display device (or touch panel, etc.) is not particularly limited in its installation position, but is mainly located at the lower part of the game machine, and the game value managed by the game medium management device is converted into a ball. Accepts requests for (ball lending) and counting (returning) balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game medium management device. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In the above embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening detection by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine or the like.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is used as a transmission source and the other is used as a transmission destination, and the transmission source transmits a transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. You can confirm that it has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device.

Further, in the game system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set in addition to the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the source.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is confirmed not only that the normal signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the normal signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities.

(2) Extensibility 2
In the gaming machine of the present invention, opening the door is a condition for changing the setting on the software. The setting can be changed only after the door opening is monitored (detected) by turning on the setting key + RWM (RAM) clear switch when the power is turned on. When the set value is not set, "E" is displayed in all 4 digits of the performance display monitor. At this time, although a predetermined sound is also generated, not only the predetermined sound but also the voice "RWM abnormality error" may be generated. When the setting is changed, a specific sound is generated (the voice "The setting is being changed" may also be generated), and all the lamps are lit. On the back side of the gaming machine, the set value changes each time the RWM clear switch is pressed, and when the setting key is returned (pulled out), it returns to the normal state. If you open the door and turn on the power with the key turned, you can check the set value on the back side in the setting confirmation state, and the message "Settings are being changed" is displayed on the screen.

In addition, a maintenance mode may be installed. In the maintenance history, the time when the power is turned on, the time when the setting is confirmed, the time when the RWM (RAM) abnormality occurs, the error related to the setting, and the like are recorded. In this case, for example, a maximum of about 200 maintenance histories may be recorded. In the setting history, the history of setting change and setting confirmation and the setting value can be confirmed. This history cannot be viewed without the setting key.

Further, the display of the setting change may be performed only by the control on the sub side, but the special figure-related display may be fully lit by the control on the main side. When the setting change is displayed by all lighting of the special figure-related display, the all lighting pattern is not provided in the display pattern of the special symbol. Further, the setting change history can be recorded up to, for example, about 100 cases, and the maintenance mode can be operated only during the setting confirmation. In addition, the history cannot be deleted in the hall (game hall).

Further, since the power supply board is provided with a backup function, an RWM abnormality occurs when the board is switched, and the performance display monitor is also cleared. There is no delay at the final confirmation of setting the set value. The setting is changed during the delay.

(3) Extensibility 3
In pachinko gaming machines, a first sensor that detects the opening of the front door and a second sensor that detects that the main body (holding frame of the board) has moved (opening operation, etc.) from the outer frame (machine frame, etc.). A sensor is provided.

The setting may not be changed when the opening is detected by the first sensor, and the setting may be changed when the opening is detected by the second sensor. In this case, the switch that is pressed to change the setting is provided on the board or the like on the back side of the gaming machine, and the worker in the gaming field moves the main body to move the front of the gaming machine (outer frame of the gaming machine). It is possible to change the settings while it is guaranteed to work from the front). The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be configured in which the setting can be changed when the opening is detected by both the first sensor and the second sensor, or the opening is detected by the first sensor. It may be configured so that the setting can be changed when it is set.

(Fifth Embodiment)
In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third and fourth embodiments of the present invention at the time of the test firing test will be described.

<Connection during testing of pachinko game machines>
As shown in FIG. 259, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 is connected to the testing machine 7002 via the test relay terminal plate 7001 at the time of testing. The testing machine 7002 has a testing device 7003 for testing a pachinko gaming machine. The test apparatus 7003 is connected to the test relay terminal board 7001 via a plurality of buffer boards 7004a to 7004f.

The main control circuit 6100 has a connector CN100 for connecting to the test relay terminal plate 7001. The connector CN100 is not mounted on a release product for sale. Wiring patterns and through holes provided on the main control board 6030 (see FIG. 200) for mounting the connector CN100 are left in the release product for sale.

The payout / launch control circuit 6300 has a connector CN12 for connecting to the test relay terminal plate 7001. The connector CN12 is not mounted on the release product for sale. The wiring pattern and through holes provided on the payout / launch control board 6050 (see FIG. 200) for mounting the connector CN12 are left in the release product for sale.

The test relay terminal plate 7001 is connected to the connector CN1 connected to the connector CN100 of the main control circuit 6100 by a harness, the connector CN5 connected to the connector CN12 of the payout / launch control circuit 6300 by a harness, and the tester 7002 by a harness. It has connectors CN2 to CN4 to be formed.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 6100 constitutes a main control unit. The payout / launch control circuit 6300 constitutes a payout control unit. The test relay terminal plate 7001 constitutes a connection relay unit. Each of the buffer boards 7004a to 7004f constitutes a buffer unit.

<Signals input / output from each connector on the test relay terminal board>
Hereinafter, signals input / output from each connector of the test relay terminal board 7001 will be described. In the following description, signals having the same name represent the same signal. Further, the description of the power supply terminal (DC + 5V), the ground ground terminal (GND), the spare terminal, and the unused terminal (NC) will be omitted.

(Test relay terminal board connector CN1)
FIG. 260 shows a signal input to each terminal of the connector CN1 of the test relay terminal plate 7001. A test signal 1 (SW1: start port 1 switch) indicating the detection result of the first start port winning ball switch 6044a is input to PIN4 of the connector CN1.

A test signal 2 (SW2: start port 2 switch) indicating the detection result of the second start port winning ball switch 6045a is input to PIN 5 of the connector CN1. A test signal 3 (SW3: gate 1 switch) indicating the detection result of the passing ball switch 6043a is input to PIN 6 of the connector CN1.

A test signal 4 (SW4: count 1 switch) indicating the detection result of the count switch 6053c is input to PIN 7 of the connector CN1. A test signal 5 (SW5: count 2 switch) indicating the detection result of the count switch 6054c is input to PIN 8 of the connector CN1.

A test signal 6 (SW6: winning opening 1 switch) indicating the detection result of the general winning ball switch 6051a is input to PIN9 of the connector CN1. A test signal 7 (SW7: winning opening 2 switch) indicating the detection result of the general winning ball switch 6052a is input to the PIN 10 of the connector CN1.

Test signals 8, 9 and 11 (SW8, SW9, SW11) are input to PIN11, PIN12 and PIN14 of the connector CN1, respectively. In this embodiment, none of the signals are input, but the pachinko gaming machine 6001 It is configured so that it can be input according to the game specifications of.

A test signal 10 (SW10: operating port 1 switch) indicating the detection result of the detection switch for detecting the game ball that has passed through the continuous accessory operating port is input to the PIN 13 of the connector CN1, but in the present embodiment, the test signal 10 (SW10: operating port 1 switch) is input. Is not provided with a continuous accessory actuating port, so no signal is input. The ground level is input to PIN15, 21-23, 37-38 of the connector CN1 as test signals 12, 18-21, 34-35.

A test signal 13 (SOL1: ordinary electric accessory solenoid) indicating a control state for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 6046a is input to PIN 16 of the connector CN1. A test signal 14 (SOL2: large winning opening 1 solenoid) indicating a control state for the first large winning opening 1 solenoid 6053b is input to PIN 17 of the connector CN1. A test signal 15 (SOL3: large winning opening 2 solenoid) indicating a control state for the second large winning opening 1 solenoid 6054b is input to PIN 18 of the connector CN1.

A test signal 16 (SOL4: paitullo lamp LED1) indicating a control state for the first pilot lamp (not shown) is input to PIN19 of the connector CN1. A test signal 17 (SOL5: paitullo lamp LED2) indicating a control state for the second pilot lamp (not shown) is input to the PIN 20 of the connector CN1.

Signals output from the terminals (D0 to D7, XCSE0, A0 to A3) described later of the main CPU 6101 are input to PIN24 to PIN36 of the connector CN1 as test signals 24 to 33. + 5V DC power is supplied to PINs 39 to 40 of the connector CN1.

(Test relay terminal board connector CN5)
FIG. 261 shows signals input to each terminal of the connector CN5 of the test relay terminal plate 7001. A prize ball signal 1 output every time a game ball is prized by the payout / launch control circuit 6300 is input to PIN1 of the connector CN5.

(Test relay terminal board connector CN2)
Since the connector CN2 of the test relay terminal plate 7001 has two connectors integrally formed, in the following description, when distinguishing between the connector CN2 (1/2) and the connector CN2 (2/2). There is. The same applies to the connectors CN3 and 4 of the test relay terminal plate 7001.

As for the connector shape of CN2-4, for example, the connector CN2 (1/2) is arranged in the upper stage and the connector CN2 (2/2) is arranged in the lower stage (stage assembly) to form one connector.

Further, in FIGS. 262 to 264, regarding the signal output in response to the chip select signal described later, "C" is added to the column of "CS", and the signal is output regardless of the chip select signal. In the figure, "C" is not added to the "CS" column.

FIG. 262 shows signals output from each terminal of the connector CN2 of the test relay terminal plate 7001. The launch ball signals 1 and 2 representing the detection signals of the launch ball are output from PIN1 to PIN2 of the connector CN2 (1/2), respectively. In the present embodiment, PIN1 to PIN2 of the connector CN2 (1/2) are output. Is an unused terminal.

The prize ball signal 1 is output from PIN3 of the connector CN2 (1/2). Prize ball signals 2 and 3 are output from PINs 4 and 5 of the connector CN2 (1/2), respectively, but in the present embodiment, PINs 4 and 5 of the connector CN2 (1/2) are unused terminals. ..

From PIN6 of the connector CN2 (1/2), a launch position designation signal 1 that specifies the launch position of the launch handle 6025 is output. The firing position designation signals 2 and 3 are output from the PINs 7 and 8 of the connector CN2 (1/2), respectively. However, in the present embodiment, the PINs 7 and 8 of the connector CN2 (1/2) are unused terminals. is there.

A game machine error status signal indicating an error status is output from the PIN10 of the connector CN2 (1/2), but in the present embodiment, the PIN10 of the connector CN2 (1/2) is connected to the test relay terminal plate 7001. The signal set on the provided test pin TP100 is output.

From the PIN12 of the connector CN2 (1/2), a normal winning opening 1 winning signal (SW6: winning opening 1 switch) is output. From the PIN 13 of the connector CN2 (1/2), a normal winning opening 2 winning signal (SW7: winning opening 2 switch) is output.

The normal winning opening 3 winning signal is output from the PIN 14 of the connector CN2 (1/2), but in the present embodiment, the PIN 14 of the connector CN2 (1/2) is grounded to the ground.

The PINs 15 and 16 of the connector CN2 (1/2) output the normal winning opening 4 winning signal and the normal winning opening 5 winning signal, respectively. In the present embodiment, the PINs 15 and 16 of the connector CN2 (1/2) are output. Is an unused terminal.

From PIN19 of the connector CN2 (1/2), a signal during operation of the condition device indicating that the condition device is operating is output. From the PIN 20 of the connector CN2 (1/2), a condition device operating area 1 passing signal 1 (SW8) indicating that the game ball has passed through the area for operating the condition device is output. Does not output any signal.

The PINs 21 and 22 of the connector CN2 (1/2) output the condition device operating region 1 passing signal 2 and the condition device operating region 1 passing signal 3, respectively. In the present embodiment, the connector CN2 (1/2) PINs 21 and 22 are unused terminals.

The PIN23 of the connector CN2 (1/2) outputs a conditional device operating region 1 valid signal indicating that the region for operating the conditional device is valid, but in the present embodiment, any signal is used. Not output. From the PIN 25 of the connector CN2 (1/2), a signal indicating that the accessory continuous operating device is operating (that is, a jackpot gaming state) is output.

From PINs 26 to 28 of the connector CN2 (1/2), the accessory continuous actuating device operating region 1 passing signal 1 indicating that the game ball has passed through the region for operating the accessory continuous actuating device, the accessory continuous operating device The device operating area 1 passing signal 2 and the accessory continuous operating device operating area 1 passing signal 3 are output, respectively. In the present embodiment, the PINs 26 to 28 of the connector CN2 (1/2) are unused terminals.

From PIN29 of the connector CN2 (1/2), an effective signal for operating the accessory continuous actuating device 1 indicating that the region for operating the accessory continuous actuating device is effective is output. , PIN29 of the connector CN2 (1/2) is an unused terminal.

The gate passage or winning signal 1 (SW10: operation port 1 switch) related to the normal symbol 1 is output from the PIN1 of the connector CN2 (2/2), but in the present embodiment, the detection result of the passing ball switch 6043a. Is output.

From the PIN2 of the connector CN2 (2/2), the gate passage or winning signal 2 (SW11) related to the normal symbol 1 is output, but in the present embodiment, neither signal is output. From PIN3 and 4 of the connector CN2 (2/2), the gate passing or winning signal 1 related to the ordinary electric accessory 1 and the gate passing or winning signal 2 related to the ordinary electric accessory 1 are output, respectively. In the embodiment, PINs 3 and 4 of the connector CN2 (2/2) are unused terminals.

From PIN5 of the connector CN2 (2/2), a normal symbol 1 hit signal indicating that the normal symbol has been hit is output. From PIN6 of the connector CN2 (2/2), a normal symbol 1 high probability state signal indicating that the normal symbol is in the high probability state is output.

From PIN7 of the connector CN2 (2/2), a normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal indicating that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened is output. From PIN8 of the connector CN2 (2/2), the ordinary electric accessory 1 winning signal 1 (SW2: start port 2 switch) indicating that the ordinary electric accessory 6046 has won a prize is output.

The PIN9 of the connector CN2 (2/2) normally outputs the electric accessory 1 winning signal 2, but in the present embodiment, the PIN9 of the connector CN2 (2/2) is an unused terminal. From the PIN 10 of the connector CN2 (2/2), a signal indicating that the normal electric accessory 6046 is in operation is output.

A normal electric accessory 1 release signal (SOL1: ordinary electric accessory solenoid) is output from PIN11 of the connector CN2 (2/2). From the PIN 12 of the connector CN2 (2/2), an open extension state signal of the ordinary electric accessory 1 indicating that the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 6046 is extended is output.

A start port 1 winning signal (SW1: start port 1 switch) is output from the PIN 13 of the connector CN2 (2/2). The PIN14 of the connector CN2 (2/2) outputs a start port 1 valid signal indicating that the first start port 6044 is valid, but in the present embodiment, the PIN 14 of the connector CN2 (2/2) is , It is an unused terminal.

A start port 2 winning signal (SW5: count 2 switch) is output from PIN15 of the connector CN2 (2/2). A start port 2 valid signal indicating that the second start port 6045 is valid is output from the PIN 16 of the connector CN2 (2/2), but in the present embodiment, the PIN 16 of the connector CN2 (2/2) is , It is an unused terminal.

A starting port 3 winning signal (SW3: gate 1 switch) is output from PIN17 of the connector CN2 (2/2). A start port 3 valid signal indicating that the passing ball switch 6043a is valid is output from the PIN 18 of the connector CN2 (2/2), but in the present embodiment, the PIN 18 of the connector CN2 (2/2) is It is an unused terminal.

From PIN19 of the connector CN2 (2/2), a special symbol 1 small hit signal indicating that the first special symbol has been stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the small hit game state is output. From the PIN 20 of the connector CN2 (2/2), a special symbol 1 hit signal indicating that the first special symbol has been stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the jackpot gaming state is output.

From the PIN 21 of the connector CN2 (2/2), a special symbol 1 high probability state signal indicating that the first special symbol is in the high probability state (that is, the probability variation game state) is output. From the PIN 22 of the connector CN2 (2/2), a special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal indicating that the variation time of the first special symbol is in the shortened state (that is, the time saving game state) is output.

The special electric accessory 1 winning signal 1 (SW4: count 1 switch) is output from the PIN 23 of the connector CN2 (2/2). The PINs 24 and 25 of the connector CN2 (2/2) output the special electric accessory 1 winning signal 2 and the special electric accessory 1 winning signal 3, but in the present embodiment, the connector CN2 (2/2) PINs 24 and 25 are unused terminals.

The special electric accessory 1 discharge port passage signal 1 (SW9) is output from the PIN 26 of the connector CN2 (2/2). The special electric accessory 1 discharge port passage signal 2 (SW8) is output from the PIN 27 of the connector CN2 (2/2).

The special electric accessory 1 discharge port passage signal 3 is output from the PIN 28 of the connector CN2 (2/2), but in the present embodiment, the PIN 28 of the connector CN2 (2/2) is an unused terminal.

From the PIN29 of the connector CN2 (2/2), a signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 indicating that the shutter 6053a is in the operating state is output. A special electric accessory 1 opening signal (SOL2: large winning opening 1 solenoid) is output from the PIN30 of the connector CN2 (2/2).

(Test relay terminal board connector CN3)
FIG. 263 shows signals output from each terminal of the connector CN3 of the test relay terminal plate 7001. The condition device operating region 2 pass signals 1 to 3 are output from PIN1 to PIN3 of the connector CN3 (1/2), respectively, but in the present embodiment, PIN1 to PIN3 of the connector CN3 (1/2) are not yet output. This is the terminal used.

The condition device operating region 2 valid signal is output from the PIN4 of the connector CN3 (1/2), but in the present embodiment, the PIN4 of the connector CN3 (1/2) is an unused terminal.

PIN6 to PIN8 of the connector CN3 (1/2) output signals 1 to 3 passing through the accessory continuous operation device operating region 2, respectively. In the present embodiment, PIN6 to PIN8 of the connector CN3 (1/2) are output. Is an unused terminal.

The PIN9 of the connector CN3 (1/2) outputs an effective signal of the accessory continuous operation device operating region 2, but in the present embodiment, the PIN9 of the connector CN3 (1/2) is an unused terminal.

From the PIN 11 of the connector CN3 (1/2), a special symbol 2 small hit signal indicating that the second special symbol has been stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the small hit game state is output. From the PIN 12 of the connector CN3 (1/2), a special symbol 2 hit signal indicating that the second special symbol has been stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the jackpot gaming state is output.

From the PIN 13 of the connector CN3 (1/2), a special symbol 2 high probability state signal indicating that the second special symbol is in the high probability state (that is, the probability variation game state) is output. From the PIN 14 of the connector CN3 (1/2), a special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal indicating that the variation time of the second special symbol is in the shortened state (that is, the time saving game state) is output.

The special electric accessory 2 winning signal 1 (SW5: count 2 switch) is output from the PIN 15 of the connector CN3 (1/2). The special electric accessory 2 winning signals 2 and 3 are output from the PINs 16 and 17 of the connector CN3 (1/2), respectively, but in the present embodiment, the PINs 16 and 17 of the connector CN3 (1/2) are not yet output. This is the terminal used.

The special electric accessory 2 discharge port passage signal 1 (SW9) is output from the PIN 18 of the connector CN3 (1/2). The special electric accessory 2 discharge port passage signals 2 and 3 are output from the PINs 19 and 20 of the connector CN3 (1/2), respectively. In the present embodiment, the PINs 19 and 20 of the connector CN3 (1/2) are output. , It is an unused terminal.

From the PIN 21 of the connector CN3 (1/2), a signal indicating that the shutter 6054a is in the operating state is output as a signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2. A special electric accessory 2 opening signal (SOL3: large winning opening 2 solenoid) is output from PIN22 of the connector CN3 (1/2).

From PINs 25 to 28 of the connector CN3 (1/2), winning easy-to-win status signals 1 to 4 indicating that winning is easy is output to each winning opening, respectively. From the PIN29 of the connector CN3 (1/2), a winning easy state confirmation signal indicating that the winning easy state is confirmed is output. Signals set to test pins TP1 to 20 provided on the test relay terminal plate 7001 are output from PINs 1 to 20 of the connector CN3 (2/2), respectively.

(Test relay terminal board connector CN4)
FIG. 264 shows signals output from each terminal of the connector CN4 of the test relay terminal plate 7001.

From PIN1 of the connector CN4 (1/2), a signal during fluctuation of the normal symbol 1 indicating that the normal symbol is changing is output. Normally, signals during fluctuation of symbols 2 to 4 are output from PINs 2 to 4 of connector CN4 (1/2), but in this embodiment, PINs 2 to 4 of connector CN4 (1/2) are unused terminals. Is.

From PIN9 of the connector CN4 (1/2), a special symbol 1 changing signal indicating that the first special symbol is changing is output. From the PIN 10 of the connector CN4 (1/2), a special symbol 2 changing signal indicating that the second special symbol is changing is output.

Each bit of the symbol 1 data representing the stopped-displayed normal symbol is output from PINs 1 to 8 of the connector CN4 (2/2), but in the present embodiment, PINs 5 to 8 of the connector CN4 (2/2) are output. Is an unused terminal. Note that each bit of the symbol 1 data representing the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been stopped and displayed may be output from PINs 1 to 8 of the connector CN4 (2/2).

From PIN9 to 16 of the connector CN4 (2/2), each bit of the symbol 2 data representing the first special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is output. It should be noted that, from PIN9 to 16 of the connector CN4 (2/2), each bit of the symbol 2 data representing the stop-displayed normal symbol or the second special symbol may be output.

From the PINs 17 to 24 of the connector CN4 (2/2), each bit of the symbol 3 data representing the second special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is output. It should be noted that the PINs 17 to 24 of the connector CN4 (2/2) may output each bit of the symbol 3 data representing the stop-displayed normal symbol or the first special symbol.

Each bit of the symbol 4 data is output from the PINs 25 to 32 of the connector CN4 (2/2), but in the present embodiment, the PINs 25 to 32 of the connector CN4 (2/2) are unused terminals.

<Outline configuration of test relay terminal board>
As shown in FIG. 265, the test relay terminal board 7001 has a first system circuit including a buffer circuit (BUF3 to 5) and a switch circuit (SSW7 to 9).

In the circuit of the first system, each test signal input from the connector CN1 and the connector CN5 is input to the BUF3 to 5, and the test signals output from the BUF3 to 5 are the test signals of the connectors CN2 to 4 via SSW7 to 9, respectively. Is output to.

Further, the test relay terminal plate 7001 has a second system circuit including a buffer circuit (BUF1 to 2), a chip selector CS, a gate circuit (GATE1 to 6), and a switch circuit (SSW1 to 6).

In the circuit of the second system, the chip select signal input from the connector CN1 and the connector CN5 is input to the BUF2, and the signal output from the BUF2 is converted into a chip select signal by the chip selector CS.

The test signal input from the connector CN1 and the connector CN5 is input to the BUF1, and the test signal output from the BUF1 is input to any of GATE 1 to 6 according to the chip select signal. The test signals output from GATEs 1 to 6 are output to connectors CN2 to 4 via SSWs 1 to 6, respectively.

<Structure of main control circuit, payout / launch control circuit, and test relay terminal board>
As shown in FIG. 266, the main control circuit 6100 has a buffer circuit (hereinafter, S-BUF1, 2), a gate circuit (hereinafter, GATE), and connectors CN3 to 6 in addition to the main CPU 6101. A buffer circuit (hereinafter, BUF9, 10) and a connector CN100 are provided for testing.

Although the BUF9, 10 and the connector CN100 are not mounted on the release product for sale, the wiring pattern and the through hole provided on the main control board 6030 (see FIG. 200) for mounting the BUF9, 10 and the connector CN100. Is left in the release product for sale. In this embodiment, the BUF 9, 10 and the connector CN100 constitute a main control test signal output circuit.

Each S-BUF1 and 2 has input terminals D1 to D6 and output terminals Y1 to Y6. The input terminals D1 to D3 of the S-BUF1 are connected to the connectors CN4 to 6. A start port 1 switch signal, a start port 2 switch signal, and a gate 1 switch signal are input to the input terminals D1 to D3 of the S-BUF1, respectively.

The input terminals D4 to D6 of the S-BUF1 are connected to the connector CN3. A count 1 switch signal, a count 2 switch signal, and a winning opening 1 switch signal are input to the input terminals D1 to D3 of the S-BUF1, respectively.

The input terminals D1 to D5 of S-BUF2 are connected to the connector CN3. The winning port 2 switch signal and the operating port 2 switch signal are input to the input terminals D1 and D4 of the S-BUF1, respectively.

The S-BUF1 and 2 shape the signals input from the input terminals D1 to D6, and output the waveform-shaped signals from the output terminals Y1 to Y6. The signals output from the output terminals Y1 to Y6 of the S-BUF1 and 2 are not only output to the BUF9 to 10 but also input to the main CPU 6101 through the data buses (D0 to D7). ..

The main CPU 6101 has data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7, a chip select terminal XCS1, and a reset signal output terminal XRST0. The GATE has data input terminals D1 to D8, signal output terminals Q1 to Q8, a clock terminal CK, and a reset terminal CLR. The GATE is composed of an integrated circuit (IC) containing eight D flip-flops.

The data input terminals D1 to D8 of the GATE are connected to the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7 of the main CPU 6101. The GATE clock terminal CK is connected to the chip select terminal XCS1 of the main CPU 6101. The GATE reset terminal CLR is connected to the main CPU 6101 reset signal output terminal XRST0.

GATE converts the enable signal input to the clock terminal CK into a signal for outputting the data input to the data input terminals D1 to D8 from the signal output terminals Q1 to Q8, and outputs the data from the signal output terminals Q1 to Q8. To do. Further, the GATE is reset by the reset signal input to the reset terminal CLR.

Each BUF 9 and 10 has input terminals A1 to A8 and output terminals Y1 to Y8. The input terminals A1 to A6 of the BUF9 are connected to the output terminals Y1 to Y6 of the S-BUF1, and the input terminals A7 to A8 of the BUF9 are connected to the output terminals Y1 to Y2 of the S-BUF2.

The input terminals A1 to A3 of the BUF10 are connected to the output terminals Y3 to Y5 of the S-BUF2, and the input terminals A4 to A8 of the BUF10 are connected to the signal output terminals Q1 to Q5 of the GATE.

Each of the BUFs 9 and 10 waveform-shapes the signals input from the input terminals A1 to A8, and outputs the waveform-shaped signals from the output terminals Y1 to Y8. The output terminals Y1 to Y8 of the BUF9 and 10 are connected to the connector CN100.

Test signals 1 to 8 (SW1 to SW8) are output from the output terminals Y1 to Y8 of the BUF9, respectively. Test signals 9 to 11 (SW9 to SW11) are output from the output terminals Y1 to Y3 of the BUF10, and test signals 13 to 17 (SOL1 to SOL5) are output from the output terminals Y4 to Y8 of the BUF10, respectively. ..

The payout / launch control circuit 6300 has a payout / launch control CPU 7010, a waveform shaping circuit 7011, a test signal output circuit 7012, and a connector CN4, and the test signal output circuit 7012 and the connector CN12 are tested. It is provided for.

Although the test signal output circuit 7012 and the connector CN12 are not mounted on the release product for sale, they are provided on the main control board 6030 (see FIG. 200) in order to mount the test signal output circuit 7012 and the connector CN12. Wiring patterns and through holes are left in the release product for sale.

The waveform shaping circuit 7011 shapes the waveform of the prize ball signal input from the payout device 6016 (see FIG. 202) via the connector CN4. The test signal output circuit 7012 outputs a prize ball signal (prize ball signal 1) to the connector CN12 in response to control by the payout / firing control CPU 7010. In the present embodiment, the test signal output circuit 7012 constitutes a payout control test signal output circuit.

Although not shown, a wiring pattern is provided so that the payout / emission control CPU 7010 can input the prize ball signal shaped by the waveform shaping circuit 7011 in addition to the test signal output circuit 7012.

As described above, the connector CN100 of the main control circuit 6100 is connected to the connector CN1 of the test relay terminal plate 7001, and the connector CN12 of the payout / launch control circuit 6300 is connected to the connector CN5 of the test relay terminal plate 7001. The test relay terminal plate 7001 has a buffer circuit (hereinafter, BUF3 to 5) and a switch circuit (hereinafter, SSW7 to 9).

Each BUF3 to 5 has input terminals A1 to A8 and output terminals Y1 to Y8. Each of the input terminals A1 to A6 of the BUF3 is connected to the connector CN1 via a filter RC (see FIG. 267). Each of the input terminals A1 to A8 of the BUF4 is connected to the connector CN1 via the filter RC.

Each of the input terminals A1 to A6 of the BUF5 is connected to the connector CN1 via the filter RC. The input terminal A7 of the BUF5 is connected to the connector CN5 via the filter RC.

The input terminal A8 of the BUF5 is connected to a power-on reset signal generation circuit 7013 that generates a power-on reset signal. The power-on reset signal generation circuit 7013 includes a resistor R, an electrolytic capacitor C, and a rectifying element (diode) D, and outputs a reset signal for a time corresponding to the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor C when the power is turned on.

Each of the BUFs 3 to 5 waveform-shapes the signal input from the input terminals A1 to A8, and outputs the waveform-shaped signal from the output terminals Y1 to Y8. The output terminal Y8 of the BUF5 is connected to the reset terminal CLR of each GATE 1 to 6 (see FIG. 269) of the test relay terminal plate 7001.

Each SSW7 to 9 has input terminals I1 to I8 and output terminals O1 to O8. The input terminals I1 to I6 of the SSW7 are connected to the output terminals Y1 to Y6 of the BUF3, and the input terminals I7 to I8 of the SSW7 are connected to the output terminals Y2 to Y3 of the BUF3. The input terminals I1 to I8 of the SSW8 are connected to the output terminals Y1 to Y8 of the BUF4.

The input terminals I1 to I7 of the SSW9 are connected to the output terminals Y1 to Y7 of the BUF5. Each SSW7 to 9 is composed of a slide switch or a DIP switch, and can individually connect and disconnect (ground ground) between each input terminal I1 to I8 and each output terminal Y1 to Y8.

The output terminals O1 to O8 of the SSW7, the output terminals O1 to O8 of the SSW8, and the output terminals O1 to O2 and O7 of the SSW9 are connected to the connectors 2 to 3 of the test relay terminal plate 7001. From each output terminal O1 to O8 of SSW7, the normal winning opening 1 winning signal, the normal winning opening 2 winning signal, the normal winning opening 3 winning signal, the condition device operating area 1 passing signal 1, the gate passing or winning related to the normal symbol 1 The signal 1, the gate passage or winning signal 2 related to the ordinary symbol 1, the ordinary electric accessory 1 winning signal 1, and the ordinary electric accessory 1 opening signal are output, respectively.

From each output terminal O1 to O8 of SSW8, start port 1 winning signal, starting port 2 winning signal, starting port 3 winning signal, special electric accessory 1 winning signal 1, special electric accessory 1 discharge port passing signal 1, special The electric accessory 1 discharge port passage signal 2, the special electric accessory 1 open signal, and the special electric accessory 2 winning signal 1 are output, respectively. From the output terminals O1 to O2 and O7 of the SSW9, the special electric accessory 2 discharge port passage signal 1, the special electric accessory 2 open signal, and the prize ball signal 1 are output, respectively.

<Structure of filter RC>
As shown in FIG. 267, the filter RC provided in each part of the test relay terminal plate 7001 constitutes a low-pass filter composed of a resistor Rf and a 3-terminal capacitor Cf. The 3-terminal capacitor Cf has inductors on the input side and the output side, and the inductors are connected to the ground terminal by a capacitor to remove noise to each signal in order to prevent malfunction.

The reason for providing the low-pass filter is that each signal output from the output terminals of SSW7 to SSW9 to the tester 7002 is a signal related to the pass / fail of the test result, and each signal is actually output from the main control circuit 6100 due to noise. If the signal is different from the signal, the testing machine 7002 may output a nonconformity result due to the signal, so it is necessary to remove noise.

<Structure of main control circuit and test relay terminal board>
As shown in FIG. 268, in the main control circuit 6100, in addition to the main CPU 6101, a buffer circuit (hereinafter, BUF7, 8) and a connector CN100 are provided for testing. Although the BUF7, 8 and the connector CN100 are not mounted on the release product for sale, the wiring pattern and the through hole provided on the main control board 6030 (see FIG. 200) for mounting the BUF7, 8 and the connector CN100. Is left in the release product for sale. In the present embodiment, the BUFs 7 and 8 form a main control test signal output circuit like the connector CN100.

The main CPU 6101 has an address bus I / F terminals A0 to A15 and a chip select terminal XCSE0 in addition to the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7 (see FIG. 266). As described above, the main CPU 6101 has a chip select terminal XCS1 (see FIG. 266), but the chip select signal output from the chip select terminal XCSE0 and the chip select output from the chip select terminal XCS1. The signal is exclusively controlled.

For example, the main CPU 6101 outputs an invalid signal from the chip select terminal XCS1 and outputs an valid signal from the XCSE0 terminal by executing the test program stored in the ROM area outside the area of the main ROM 6102 (see FIG. 205B). As a result, the signal selectively output to the BUF 7 is controlled to be output to the testing machine 7002.

Further, the main CPU 6101 outputs an valid signal from the chip select terminal XCS1 by executing a test program, and outputs an invalid signal from the XCSE0 terminal, so that the signal output to the BUF 10 (see FIG. 266) is a testing machine. It is controlled so that it is output to 7002.

In the present embodiment, the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7 of the main CPU 6101 are connected to the data line of the external bus interface, and the address bus I / F terminals A0 to A15 and the chip select terminals XCSE0 and XCS1 are external to each other. Connected to the address line of the bus interface.

Each of the BUFs 7 and 8 has input terminals A1 to A8 and output terminals Y1 to Y8. The input terminals A1 to A8 of the BUF7 are individually pulled up via the resistor RL and connected to the data bus I / F terminals D0 to D7 of the main CPU 6101. The input terminals A1 to A5 of the BUF8 are connected to the address bus I / F terminals A0 to A3 and the chip select terminal XCSE0 of the main CPU 6101.

The BUs 7 and 8 shape the waveforms of the signals input from the input terminals A1 to A8, and output the waveform-shaped signals from the output terminals Y1 to Y8. Each output terminal Y1 to Y8 of the BUF 7 is connected to the connector 100. The output terminals Y1 to Y8 of the BUF 8 are individually pulled up via the resistor RL and connected to the connector 100.

The resistors RL used to pull up the output terminals Y1 to Y8 of the BUF8 are not mounted on the release product for sale, but the main control board 6030 (see FIG. 200) is used to mount these resistors RL. The wiring patterns and through holes provided in the are left in the release product for sale.

As described above, the connector CN100 of the main control circuit 6100 is connected to the connector CN1 of the test relay terminal plate 7001. The test relay terminal plate 7001 has a buffer circuit (hereinafter, BUF1 and 2) and a chip selector CS.

Each BUF1 and 2 has input terminals A1 to A8 and output terminals Y1 to Y8. Each of the input terminals A1 to A8 of the BUF1 is connected to the connector CN1 of the test relay terminal plate 7001 via the filter RC (see FIG. 267). Each of the input terminals A1 to A8 of the BUF2 is connected to the connector CN1 of the test relay terminal plate 7001.

Each BUF1 and 2 shape the waveform of the signal input from the input terminals A1 to A8, and output the waveform-shaped signal from the output terminals Y1 to Y8. The output terminals Y1 to Y8 of the BUF1 are connected to the input terminals D1 to D8 (see FIG. 269) of the GATEs 1 to 6.

The chip selector CS has address terminals A to C, enable terminals G2A and G2B, and output terminals Y0 to Y7. The address terminals A to C of the chip selector CS and the enable terminals G2A and G2B are connected to the output terminals Y1 to Y5 of the BUF8 via the filter RC (see FIG. 267), respectively.

If the signals input to the gate terminals G2A and G2B are both at the enable level, the chip selector CS outputs one of the output terminals Y0 to Y7 according to the selection signals input to the select terminals A, B, and C. The valid signal is output from the terminal, and the invalid signal is output from the other output terminals.

If any of the signals input to the gate terminals G2A and G2B is disabled level, the chip selector CS outputs an invalid signal from all the terminals of the output terminals Y0 to Y7. Each output terminal Y0 to Y5 of the chip selector CS is connected to the clock terminal CK (see FIG. 269) of each GATE 1 to 6.

<Structure of test relay terminal board>
As shown in FIG. 269, the test relay terminal plate 7001 has a gate circuit (hereinafter, GATE 1 to 6) and a switch circuit (hereinafter, SSW 1 to 6).

Each GATE 1 to 6 has a data input terminal D1 to D8, a signal output terminal Q1 to Q8, a clock terminal CK, and a reset terminal CLR. The GATEs 1 to 3 are composed of an integrated circuit (IC: Integrated Circuit) containing eight D flip-flops.

The data input terminals D1 to D8 of the GATEs 1 to 6 are connected to the output terminals Y1 to Y8 (see FIG. 267) of the BUF1. The clock terminals CK of each GATE 1 to 6 are connected to the output terminals Y0 to Y5 of CS (see FIG. 267). The reset terminal CLR of each GATE 1 to 6 is connected to the output terminal Y5 (see FIG. 266) of the BUF5.

Each GATE 1 to 6 converts the data input to the data input terminals D1 to D8 into a signal to be output from the signal output terminals Q1 to Q8 by the enable signal input to the clock terminals CK, and from the signal output terminals Q1 to Q8. Output. Further, each GATE 1 to 6 is reset by a reset signal input to the reset terminal CLR.

Each SSW1 to 6 has input terminals I1 to I8 and output terminals O1 to O8. The input terminals I1 to I8 of the SSWs 1 to 6 are connected to the output terminals Y1 to Y8 of the GATEs 1 to 6, respectively. Each SSW1 to 6 is composed of a slide switch or a DIP switch, and can individually connect and disconnect (ground ground) between each input terminal I1 to I8 and each output terminal Y1 to Y8.

The output terminals O1 to O8 of the SSW1 are connected to the connector CN2 (1/2, 2/2) of the test relay terminal plate 7001. The output terminals O1 to O8 of the SSW2 are connected to the connectors CN2 (2/2) and CN3 (1/2) of the test relay terminal plate 7001.

The output terminals O1 to O8 of the SSW3 are connected to the connector CN3 (1/2) of the test relay terminal plate 7001. The output terminals O1 to O8 of the SSW4 are connected to the connector CN4 (1/2, 2/2) of the test relay terminal plate 7001.

The output terminals O1 to O8 of the SSW5 are connected to the connector CN4 (2/2) of the test relay terminal plate 7001. The output terminals O1 to O8 of the SSW6 are connected to the connector CN4 (2/2) of the test relay terminal plate 7001.

From each output terminal O1 to O8 of SSW1, the launch position designation signal 1, the condition device operating signal, the condition device operating area 1 effective signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the normal symbol 1 hit signal, and the normal symbol 1 height A probability state signal, a normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a normal electric accessory 1 operating signal are output, respectively.

From each output terminal O1 to O8 of SSW2, a normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal, a special symbol 1 small hit signal, a special symbol 1 hit signal, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal. , The special electric accessory 1 operating signal, the special symbol 2 small hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are output, respectively.

From each output terminal O1 to O8 of SSW3, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, special electric accessory 2 operating signal, winning easy state signal 1, winning easy state signal 2, winning The easy-to-win state signal 3, the easy-to-win state signal 4, and the easy-to-win state confirmation signal are output, respectively.

From each output terminal O1 to O7 of SSW4, normal symbol 1 changing signal, special symbol 1 changing signal, special symbol 2 changing signal, symbol 1 data bit0, symbol 1 data bit1, symbol 1 data bit2, symbol 1 data bit3 is output respectively.

From each output terminal O1 to O8 of SSW5, symbol 2 data bit0, symbol 2 data bit1, symbol 2 data bit2, symbol 2 data bit3, symbol 2 data bit4, symbol 2 data bit5, symbol 2 data bit6, symbol 2 data bit7 Are output respectively.

From each output terminal O1 to O8 of SSW6, symbol 3 data bit0, symbol 3 data bit1, symbol 3 data bit2, symbol 3 data bit3, symbol 3 data bit4, symbol 3 data bit5, symbol 3 data bit6, symbol 3 data bit7 Are output respectively.

<Circuit dedicated to testing>
In the present embodiment, although not shown, a broken line is printed by silk printing on the component mounting surface of the actual main control board 6030 in order to identify that the BUF 7 to 10 and the connector 100 and the like are circuits dedicated to the test. There is. The printed dashed line should enclose the test-dedicated circuit, or if the test-dedicated circuit is mounted on either the top, bottom, left, or right side of the main control board 6030, enclose it in a U shape. It is printed.

The electronic components (CPU, lC, resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc.) mounted on the main control board 6030 constituting the main control circuit 6100 are all electronic components for through-hole mounting, but are dedicated to testing. Since the circuit can use electronic components for surface mounting, the wiring pattern of the circuit dedicated to the test can be a wiring pattern for through-hole mounting and / or surface mounting.

<Signal output from the test relay terminal board to the testing machine>
FIGS. 270 to 276 are timing charts showing the timing by positive logic controlled to the ON state or OFF state of some of the control signals output from CN2 to CN4 of the test relay terminal board 7001. In each timing chart, the OFF state of each signal is shown on the lower side and the ON state is shown on the upper side.

(1) Various signals when the special electric accessory is operated by the first special symbol As shown in FIG. 270, when the special electric accessory is operated by the first special symbol, various signals are controlled by the main CPU 6101. ..

First, after the time for displaying the combination of the first special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "symbol display time") has elapsed after the special symbol 1 changing signal is turned from ON to OFF, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned ON. Become.

After the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on, and the special electric accessory 1 release signal repeats ON and OFF a predetermined number of times. Special electric accessory 1 After the time to display (execute) the effect at the end of opening the special electric accessory (hereinafter referred to as "post-closed effect display time") after the release signal of the special electric accessory 1 is finally turned off, the special electric accessory 1 The operating signal turns off.

Special symbol 1 After the time to display (execute) the effect at the end of operation of the special electric accessory (hereinafter referred to as "operation end effect display time") has elapsed since the operating signal was turned off, the special symbol 1 The small hit signal is turned off.

(2) Various signals when the special electric accessory is operated by the start port As shown in FIG. 271, various signals are controlled by the main CPU 6101 when the special electric accessory is operated by the start port.

First, when the start port 1 winning signal changes from OFF to ON, the start port 1 valid signal changes from ON to OFF, and the time for displaying (executing) the effect at the start of opening the special electric accessory (hereinafter, "operation release effect display"). After the elapse of time), the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on, and the special electric accessory 1 release signal repeats ON and OFF a predetermined number of times. After the special electric accessory 1 opening signal is finally turned off and the effect display time elapses after closing, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off and the start port 1 effective signal is turned on.

(3) Various signals when the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are operated by the special symbol As shown in FIG. 272, when the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are operated by the first special symbol, various signals are displayed. It is controlled by the main CPU 6101.

First, after the symbol display time elapses after the special symbol 1 changing signal is turned from ON to OFF, the special symbol 1 hit signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the condition device operating signal are turned ON.

After that, when the special electric accessory 1 release signal is turned on, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on, and when the special electric accessory 1 open signal is turned off, the effect at the end of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is produced. After the time for displaying (execution) has elapsed, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is turned off.

After the operation end effect display time elapses after the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is finally turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the condition device operating signal are turned off.

(4) Various signals when the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are operated by passing through a specific area (condition device operating area 1) in the large winning opening. As shown in FIG. 273, the specific area in the large winning opening is specified. When the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are operated by passing through the area (condition device operation area 1), various signals are controlled by the main CPU 6101.

When the special electric accessory 1 release signal is turned ON, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned ON. When the special electric accessory 1 open signal is turned off, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is turned off after the effect display time elapses after closing.

When the condition device operating region 1 passing signal 1 is changed from OFF to ON, the condition device operating signal and the accessory continuous operating device operating signal are turned ON. After the operation end effect display time elapses after the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is finally turned off, the condition device operating signal and the accessory continuous operating device operating signal are turned off.

(5) Various signals when the condition device is activated by a special symbol and the accessory continuous actuation device is activated by winning or passing through a winning opening other than the grand winning opening or a specific gate (accessory continuous operating device operating area). As shown in FIG. 274, the condition device is activated by a special symbol, and the accessory continuous operation device is activated by winning or passing through a winning opening other than the large winning opening or a specific gate (accessory continuous operating device operating area). In this case, various signals are controlled by the main CPU 6101.

First, after the symbol display time elapses after the special symbol 1 changing signal is turned from ON to OFF, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the condition device operating signal are turned ON. After that, when the accessory continuous operating device operating area passing signal is turned ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned ON.

After that, when the special electric accessory 1 release signal is turned ON, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned ON. When the special electric accessory 1 open signal is turned off, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is turned off after the effect display time elapses after closing. After the operation end effect display time elapses after the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is finally turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal, the condition device operating signal, and the accessory continuous operating device operating signal are turned off.

(6) The condition device is activated by passing through a specific area (condition device operating area 1) in the large winning opening, and a prize is given to a winning opening other than the large winning opening or a specific gate (accessory continuous operating device operating area). Or various signals when the accessory continuous operation device is operated by passing. As shown in FIG. 275, the condition device is activated by passing through a specific area (condition device operation area 1) in the large winning opening, and other than the large winning opening. When the accessory continuous operation device is operated by winning or passing through the winning opening or a specific gate (accessory continuous operation device operating area), various signals are controlled by the main CPU 6101.

When the special electric accessory 1 release signal is turned ON, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned ON. When the special electric accessory 1 open signal is turned off, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is turned off after the effect display time elapses after closing.

When the condition device operating region 1 passing signal 1 is changed from OFF to ON, the condition device operating region 1 signal is turned ON. After that, when the accessory continuous operating device operating area passing signal is turned ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned ON. After the operation end effect display time elapses after the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is finally turned off, the condition device operating signal and the accessory continuous operating device operating signal are turned off.

(7) Various signals when the ordinary electric accessory is operated by the ordinary symbol As shown in FIG. 276, when the ordinary electric accessory is operated by the ordinary symbol, various signals are controlled by the main CPU 6101.

First, after the time for displaying (executing) the combination of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol display time") elapses after the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned from ON to OFF, the signal per normal symbol is turned ON. become.

After the normal symbol 1 hit signal is turned on, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on, and the normal electric accessory 1 release signal repeats ON and OFF a predetermined number of times. Ordinary electric accessory 1 After the time to display (execute) the effect at the end of opening the ordinary electric accessory (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary closing effect display time") after the opening signal is finally turned off, the ordinary electric accessory 1 1 The operating signal turns off.

After the time for displaying (executing) the effect at the end of the normal electric accessory operation has elapsed after the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 hit signal is turned off.

(8) Various signals when the ordinary electric accessory operates by passing through the winning opening or gate related to the ordinary electric accessory As shown in FIG. 277, the ordinary electric accessory is operated by passing through the winning opening or gate related to the ordinary electric accessory. When an object operates, various signals are controlled by the main CPU 6101.

First, after the normal symbol display time elapses after the gate passage or winning signal related to the ordinary electric accessory is turned from ON to OFF, the signal during operation of the ordinary electric accessory 1 is turned ON, and the signal for opening the ordinary electric accessory 1 is turned on. Repeats ON and OFF a predetermined number of times. After the normal electric accessory 1 open signal is finally turned off and after the normal closing effect display time, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off.

<Action and effect of this embodiment>
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the present embodiment, the connection mode of the BUF 9 and 10 of the main control circuit 6100 and the test signal output circuit 7012 of the payout / firing control circuit 6300 is the specification of the pachinko gaming machine 6001. Even if the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 are changed, the test relay terminal plate 7001 can be connected to the test apparatus 7003 without changing the test relay terminal plate 7001.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the present embodiment aggregates the test signals output from the main control circuit 6100 and the payout / firing control circuit 6300 to the test relay terminal plate 7001 according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 and relays the test. Since the output can be output to the terminal plate 7001 and the test signal can be expanded by the test relay terminal plate 7001 and output to the test device 7003, the test relay terminal plate 7001 is changed even if the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 change. It can be connected to the test device 7003 without any modification and with minimal modification.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the present embodiment tests a test signal according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 by controlling GATEs 1 to 6 of the test relay terminal plate 7001 according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 6001. Since the output can be output to the relay terminal board 7001, even if the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 change, the test relay terminal board 7001 can be connected to the test device 7003 without changing the test relay terminal board 7001. it can.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the present embodiment, the test signal output to the connectors CN2 to 4 via the SSW1 to SSW6 of the test relay terminal plate 7001 is turned off by turning off the switch of the SSW1 to SSW6. Since the test signal can be turned off at all times in this unit, signals unnecessary for the test can be turned off.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 has a gate circuit for inputting a test signal output from the main control circuit 6100 and the payout / firing control circuit 6300 from among the GATEs 1 to 6 of the test relay terminal board 7001. By selecting from the chip select line according to the specifications of the machine 6001, the test signal according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 6001 can be output to the test relay terminal board 7001, so that the specifications of the pachinko game machine 6001 have changed. Even so, the test relay terminal plate 7001 can be connected to the test apparatus 7003 without any change and with a minimum of change.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the present embodiment selects a gate circuit for inputting a test signal output from the main control circuit 6100 from the address line of the external bus interface according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 6001. Since the test signal according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 can be output to the test relay terminal plate 7001, even if the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 change, the test relay terminal plate 7001 is not changed and the test relay terminal plate 7001 is not changed. It can be connected to the test device 7003 with minimal changes.

<Supplementary note (summary of the present invention)>
<Appendix 1>
Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of connecting a main control board to a test device via a relay board has been proposed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-210996.

When connecting a gaming machine and a test device like the conventional gaming machine as described above, it is common to connect via a relay board, but a relay board according to the specifications of the gaming machine such as game playability is used. You need to prepare.

The present invention can provide a gaming machine that can be connected to a test device without changing the relay board and with a minimum of changes even if the specifications of the gaming machine change.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control unit (main control circuit 6100) and
The payout control unit (payout / launch control circuit 6300) connected to the main control unit and
A plurality of input / output devices (various switches, various solenoids, etc.) connected to the main control unit or the payout control unit are provided.
The main control unit and the payout control unit can be connected to the test device (7003) via the connection relay unit (test relay terminal plate 7001).
The test signal from the connection relay unit is input to the input circuits of a plurality of buffer units (buffer boards 7004a to 7004f) provided on the test apparatus side.
The main control board (6030) constituting the main control unit can mount a main control test signal output circuit (BUF7 to 10 of the main control circuit 6100, etc.) in order to output a test signal to the connection relay unit.
The payout control board constituting the payout control unit has a configuration in which a payout control test signal output circuit (test signal output circuit 7012) can be mounted in order to output a test signal to the connection relay unit.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, even if the specifications of the gaming machine are changed by changing the connection mode of the main control test signal output circuit and the payout control test signal output circuit according to the specifications of the gaming machine. , Connection It is possible to connect to the test equipment without changing the relay unit (relay board) and with the minimum change.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The total number of test signals output from the connection relay unit to the test apparatus may be larger than the total number of test signals output from the main control unit and the payout control unit to the connection relay unit.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention aggregates the test signals output from the main control unit and the payout control unit to the connection relay unit according to the specifications of the gaming machine and outputs the test signals to the connection relay unit. Since the test signal can be expanded and output to the test device, even if the specifications of the gaming machine change, it can be connected to the test device without changing the connection relay unit (relay board) and with the minimum change. can do.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control board may be configured to include a mounting pattern in which the main control test signal output circuit is arranged at a position surrounded by a broken line on one side of the main control board.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for mounting through holes.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for surface mounting.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for through-hole mounting and surface mounting.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay unit
A special symbol changing signal indicating that the special symbol is changing, and a special symbol changing signal,
A special symbol small hit signal indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the small hit gaming state can be output to the test device as the test signal.
The main control unit
When the special electric accessory is operated by the special symbol,
The special symbol small hit signal may be turned on after the time for displaying the special symbol combination has elapsed after the special symbol changing signal is turned from on to off.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay unit
A special electric accessory operating signal indicating that the special electric accessory is in operation, and a signal indicating that the special electric accessory is in operation,
The special electric accessory release signal indicating that the special electric accessory is in the open state can be output to the test apparatus as the test signal.
The main control unit
After the special symbol small hit signal is turned on, the special electric accessory operating signal may be turned on and the special electric accessory release signal may be turned on a predetermined number of times.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control unit
The special electric accessory operating signal may be turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special electric accessory operating signal was finally turned off.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control unit
The special symbol small hit signal may be turned off after a specific time has elapsed after the special electric accessory operating signal is turned off.

The present invention can provide a gaming machine that can be connected to a test device without changing the relay board and with a minimum of changes even if the specifications of the gaming machine change.

(2) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control unit (main control circuit 6100) and
The payout control unit (payout / launch control circuit 6300) connected to the main control unit and
A plurality of input / output devices (various switches, various solenoids, etc.) connected to the main control unit or the payout control unit are provided.
The main control unit and the payout control unit can be connected to the test device via the connection relay unit (test relay terminal plate 7001).
The connection relay unit
A part of the test signal output from the main control unit is input to the buffer circuit (BUF1 and 2 of the test relay terminal plate 7001) via the data line and the chip select line.
The gate circuit selected from a plurality of gate circuits (GATEs 1 to 6 of the test relay terminal plate 7001) by the test signal input to the buffer circuit (BUF2 of the test relay terminal plate 7001) by the chip select line. It has a configuration in which a test signal input to the buffer circuit (BUF1 of the test relay terminal plate 7001) is input via a data line, and the test signal can be output from the gate circuit to the test apparatus.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can select a gate circuit for inputting test signals output from the main control unit and the payout control unit by a chip select line according to the specifications of the gaming machine. Since the test signal according to the specifications can be output to the connection relay unit, even if the specifications of the gaming machine change, the test equipment is tested without changing the connection relay unit (relay board) and with the minimum change. Can be connected with.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The data line and the chip select line are connected to an external bus interface of the main control unit.
The data line is connected to the data line of the external bus interface.
The chip select line may be configured so that it can be connected to the address line of the external bus interface.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention has specifications of the gaming machine by selecting a gate circuit for inputting a test signal output from the main control unit from the address line of the external bus interface according to the specifications of the gaming machine. Since the test signal can be output to the connection relay unit according to the above, even if the specifications of the gaming machine change, the connection relay unit (relay board) does not need to be changed, and the test device can be changed with the minimum change. You can connect.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The buffer circuit of the connection relay unit has a plurality of input terminals, and has a plurality of input terminals.
A filter circuit may be connected to the input terminal of the buffer circuit.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The filter circuit connected to the input terminal of the buffer circuit may be configured to include a resistance element and a three-terminal capacitor.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The buffer circuit of the connection relay unit has a plurality of output terminals, and has a plurality of output terminals.
A filter circuit may be connected to the output terminal of the buffer circuit.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The filter circuit connected to the output terminal of the buffer circuit may be configured to include a resistance element and a three-terminal capacitor.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay unit
A start port winning signal indicating the detection result of the winning detection switch that detects the game medium that has won the starting port, and
The special electric accessory operating signal indicating that the special electric accessory is in operation and the special electric accessory operating signal can be output to the test apparatus as the test signal.
The main control unit
When the special electric accessory is operated by the starting port,
When the start port winning signal is turned from off to on, the special electric accessory operating signal may be turned on after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay unit
The special electric accessory release signal indicating that the special electric accessory is in the open state can be output to the test apparatus as the test signal.
The main control unit
When the special electric accessory operating signal is turned on, the special electric accessory release signal may be turned on a predetermined number of times.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control unit
The special electric accessory opening signal may be turned off after a specific time has elapsed since the special electric accessory release signal was finally turned off.

The present invention can provide a gaming machine that can be connected to a test device without changing the relay board and with a minimum of changes even if the specifications of the gaming machine change.

(3) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control unit (main control circuit 6100) and
The payout control unit (payout / launch control circuit 6300) connected to the main control unit and
A plurality of input / output devices (various switches, various solenoids, etc.) connected to the main control unit or the payout control unit are provided.
The main control unit and the payout control unit can be connected to the test device via the connection relay unit (test relay terminal plate 7001).
The connection relay unit
A buffer circuit (BUF1 of the test relay terminal plate 7001) into which a test signal output from the main control unit is input, and
It has a gate circuit (GATE 1 to 6 of the test relay terminal plate 7001) into which a test signal output from the buffer circuit is input.
The test signal output from the gate circuit passes through the switch circuit (SSW1 to SSW6 of the test relay terminal plate 7001) and is connected to the test apparatus from the connector (connectors CN2 to 4 of the test relay terminal plate 7001). It has a configuration that can be output.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can output a test signal according to the specifications of the gaming machine to the connecting relay unit by controlling the gate circuit of the connection relay unit according to the specifications of the gaming machine. Therefore, even if the specifications of the gaming machine change, it is possible to connect to the test device without changing the connection relay unit (relay board) and with the minimum change.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The test signal output to the connector via the switch circuit may be configured so that the test signal can always be turned off in units of one by turning off the switch of the switch circuit.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can turn off signals unnecessary for the test.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The buffer circuit of the connection relay unit has a plurality of input terminals, and has a plurality of input terminals.
A filter circuit may be connected to the input terminal of the buffer circuit.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The filter circuit connected to the input terminal of the buffer circuit may be configured to include a resistance element and a three-terminal capacitor.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control unit has a CPU, RAM, and a microprocessor with a built-in ROM.
The wiring connected to the plurality of data bus terminals provided in the microprocessor may be connected to the input terminal of the gate circuit via a connector different from the connector.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The buffer circuit has a plurality of output terminals and has a plurality of output terminals.
The data bus terminal of the microprocessor is connected to the input terminal of the buffer circuit before being connected to the input terminal of the gate circuit.
The test signal input from the input terminal of the buffer circuit is waveform-shaped in the buffer circuit and output from the output terminal of the buffer circuit, and the output test signal is input to the gate circuit. May be good.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay unit
A special symbol changing signal indicating that the special symbol is changing, and a special symbol changing signal,
A special symbol hit signal indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the jackpot gaming state, and
A signal indicating that the condition device is operating and a signal indicating that the condition device is operating can be output to the test device as the test signal.
The main control unit
When the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are operated by the special symbol,
The special symbol hit signal and the condition device operating signal may be turned on after the time for displaying the combination of the special symbols has elapsed after the special symbol changing signal is turned from off to on.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay unit
A signal indicating that the accessory continuous operation device is in operation and an operation signal of the accessory continuous operation device,
The special electric accessory operating signal indicating that the special electric accessory is in operation and the special electric accessory operating signal can be output to the test apparatus as the test signal.
The main control unit
After turning on the special symbol hit signal and the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal and the special electric accessory operating signal may be turned on a predetermined number of times.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control unit
The special electric accessory operating signal may be turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed after the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned off.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control unit
The special symbol hit signal and the condition device operating signal may be turned off after a specific time has elapsed since the special electric accessory operating signal was last turned off.

The present invention can provide a gaming machine that can be connected to a test device without changing the relay board and with a minimum of changes even if the specifications of the gaming machine change.

(4) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control unit (main control board 71) and
A plurality of device relay units (cabinet side relay board 44, door relay terminal plate 68, reel relay terminal plate 74) connected to the main control unit, and
A plurality of input / output devices (input / output devices 401, etc.) connected to the main control unit or the device relay unit are provided.
The main control unit can be connected to the test device (testing machine 402) via the connection relay unit (IF1, IF2).
Of the plurality of input / output devices, the input / output device (for example, the hopper device 51 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75) connected to the main control unit can be connected to the main control unit via the connection relay unit. Yes,
Of the plurality of input / output devices, the input / output device (selector 66, door open / close monitoring switch 67, BET switch 77, etc.) connected to the device relay unit can be connected to the main control unit via the connection relay unit. It has a configuration that is.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes signals input / output between the input / output device connected to the main control unit and the main control unit, and the input / output device and the main input / output device connected to the device relay unit. Signals input and output to and from the control unit can be connected to the test device via the connection relay unit.

Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention connects and relays signals input / output from the input / output device connected to the main control unit and the input / output device connected to the device relay unit in a connection mode according to the specifications of the gaming machine. By connecting to the unit, even if the specifications of the gaming machine change, it is possible to connect to the test device without changing the connection relay unit (relay board) and with the minimum change.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay unit is composed of a first connection relay board (IF1) and a second connection relay board (IF2).
The first connection relay board receives an output signal from the main control unit to the first connection relay board, and outputs an input signal from the first connection relay board to the main control unit.
The second connection relay board may be configured such that an output signal from the main control unit to the second connection relay board is input.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control board constituting the main control unit has a main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted to output a test signal to the connection relay unit at a position surrounded by a broken line on one side of the main control board. The configuration may include a mounting pattern for placement.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for mounting through holes.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for surface mounting.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for through-hole mounting and surface mounting.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The first connection relay board is
An input request lamp signal indicating the drive state of the input request lamp that is driven in a state where the game medium can be input, and an input request lamp signal.
A payout request signal requesting the payout of the game medium and
It is possible to output a replaying signal indicating that the replaying is in progress to the test device.
The main control unit
When the payout request signal or the replaying signal is on, the payout request signal or the replaying signal may be turned off before the closing request lamp signal is turned on.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The first connection relay board is
An on-switch signal indicating that the game medium is on can be output to the test device.
The main control unit
The on-off request lamp signal may be turned off after the number of the game media has reached the specified number by the on-switch signal and before the on-switch signal is turned off.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The first connection relay board is
A reel start switch signal indicating a game start operation can be output to the test device.
The main control unit
When the reel start switch signal is turned on and the game medium cannot be turned on, the throwing request lamp signal may be turned off.

The present invention can provide a gaming machine that can be connected to a test device without changing the relay board and with a minimum of changes even if the specifications of the gaming machine change.

(5) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control unit (main control board 71) and
A plurality of device relay units (cabinet side relay board 44, door relay terminal plate 68, reel relay terminal plate 74) connected to the main control unit, and
A plurality of input / output devices (input / output devices 401, etc.) connected to the main control unit or the device relay unit are provided.
The main control unit can be connected to the test device (testing machine 402) via the connection relay unit.
The connection relay unit is composed of a first connection relay board (IF1) and a second connection relay board (IF2).
The first connection relay board relays the level signal and relays the level signal.
The second connection relay board has a configuration capable of relaying a code signal (serial signal) in which a plurality of pieces of information are encoded.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention relays the coded signal to the second connection relay board, so that even if the specifications of the gaming machine change, the code signal to be relayed to the second connection relay board can be used. By changing the information to be encoded, it is possible to connect to the test device without changing the connection relay unit (relay board) and with the minimum change.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay unit
The signal from the first connection relay board is output to the test apparatus without being changed.
The code signal from the second connection relay board may be converted into a signal that can be input by the test apparatus and output.

With this configuration, the game machine according to the present invention converts the code signal into a signal that can be input to the test device on the second connection relay board. Therefore, even if the specifications of the game machine change, the game machine is relayed to the second connection relay board. By changing the information represented by the code signal to be made, it is possible to connect to the test device without changing the connection relay unit (relay board) and with the minimum change.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay unit
The code signal from the second connection relay board may be converted into a level signal and output to the test apparatus.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The signal input from the main control unit to the first connection relay board may be a control signal output from the main control unit to control the plurality of input / output devices.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The signal input from the main control unit to the second connection relay board is a test signal output from the main control unit to be output to the test device, and the main control unit is the plurality of input / output devices. The configuration may not include a control signal for controlling the above.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control board constituting the main control unit has a main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted to output a test signal to the connection relay unit at a position surrounded by a broken line on one side of the main control board. The configuration may include a mounting pattern for placement.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for mounting through holes.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for surface mounting.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for through-hole mounting and surface mounting.

The present invention can provide a gaming machine that can be connected to a test device without changing the relay board and with a minimum of changes even if the specifications of the gaming machine change.

(6) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control unit (main control board 71) and
A plurality of device relay units (cabinet side relay board 44, door relay terminal plate 68, reel relay terminal plate 74) connected to the main control unit, and
A plurality of input / output devices (input / output devices 401, etc.) connected to the main control unit or the device relay unit are provided.
The main control unit can be connected to the test device (testing machine 402) via the connection relay unit (IF1).
The plurality of device relay units include at least a first relay board (cabinet side relay board 44) and a second relay board (door relay terminal board 68).
The connection relay unit
A first connection path connecting the main control unit and the first relay board,
It has a second connection path for connecting the main control unit and the second relay board.
The main control unit can output an output signal to the output devices included in the plurality of input / output devices via the first connection path, and the plurality of input / outputs can be output via the second connection path. It is possible to input the input signal from the input device included in the device,
The connection relay unit is configured so that the output signal and the test signal based on the input signal can be input / output from the test device.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first connection path and the second connection path pass through the connection relay unit, so that the first connection path and the second connection path flow according to the specifications of the gaming machine. Since the test signal based on the signal is input / output between the connection relay unit and the test device, even if the specifications of the gaming machine change, the connection relay unit (relay board) is not changed and the minimum is possible. The modification can be connected to the test equipment.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
An external output board (external centralized terminal board 47) that outputs an external signal to the outside of the gaming machine other than the test device is provided.
The first connection path can connect the first relay board and the external output board.
The second connection path may be configured so that the main control unit and the second relay board can be connected via the first relay board.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can output the output signal output from the output device and the external signal output from the external output board to the test device via the connection relay unit.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control board constituting the main control unit has a main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted to output a test signal to the connection relay unit at a position surrounded by a broken line on one side of the main control board. The configuration may include a mounting pattern for placement.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for mounting through holes.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for surface mounting.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for through-hole mounting and surface mounting.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay board
The signal in the accessory continuous operation device related to the special accessory, which indicates the operating state of the accessory continuous operation device related to the special accessory,
It is possible to output to the test apparatus a closing request lamp signal indicating the driving state of the closing request lamp that is driven in a state where the gaming medium can be thrown.
The main control unit
After the game is completed, the signal in the accessory continuous operation device related to the special accessory is turned on by the timing when the input request lamp signal for the game in which the accessory continuous operation device related to the special accessory is activated is turned on. May be.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay board
A payout request signal requesting payout of the game medium can be output to the test device.
The main control unit
The signal in the accessory continuous operation device related to the special accessory may be turned off after the timing at which the payout request signal for the game in which the accessory continuous operation device related to the special accessory has ended is turned off.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control unit
For the next game of the game in which the bonus continuous actuating device related to the special bonus is finished, the signal in the bonus continuous actuating device related to the special bonus is sent before the timing of turning on the input request lamp signal. It may be configured to be turned off.

The present invention can provide a gaming machine that can be connected to a test device without changing the relay board and with a minimum of changes even if the specifications of the gaming machine change.

(7) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control unit (main control board 71) and
A plurality of device relay units (cabinet side relay board 44, door relay terminal plate 68, reel relay terminal plate 74) connected to the main control unit, and
A plurality of input / output devices (input / output devices 401, etc.) connected to the main control unit or the device relay unit are provided.
The main control unit can be connected to the test device (testing machine 402) via the connection relay unit (IF1).
The plurality of device relay units include at least a first relay board (cabinet side relay board 44) and a second relay board (reel relay terminal board 74).
The connection relay unit
A first connection path connecting the main control unit and the first relay board,
It has a second connection path for connecting the first relay board and the second relay board.
The main control unit can output an output signal via the first connection path.
The first relay board is a specific input / output device (each 1st to 3rd stepping motors 404L to 404R of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and each 1st to 3rd index sensor) included in the plurality of input / output devices. It is possible to output a drive signal based on the output signal output from the main control unit to the 405L to 405R) via the second connection path.
The connection relay unit is configured so that a test signal based on the output signal can be input / output from the test device.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention is specified from the main control unit by passing the first connection path through which the output signal output from the main control unit to the specific input / output device flows through the connection relay unit. Since the test signal based on the output signal output to the input / output device of is output from the connection relay section to the test device, the connection relay section (relay board) should be changed even if the specifications of the gaming machine change. It can be connected to the test equipment with minimal changes.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The plurality of device relay units further have a third relay board (door relay terminal plate 68).
The main control unit and the third relay board are connected by a third connection path.
Output signals (first to third reel index signals) of the specific input / output device are input to the first relay board via the second connection path.
The output signal of the specific input / output device input to the first relay board is output from the first relay board to the third relay board, and from the third relay board via the third connection path. Output to the main control unit
The connection relay unit may be configured to be able to output a test signal to the test device based on the output signal of the specific input / output device.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the output signal of the specific input / output device is obtained by passing the second connection path through which the signal output from the specific input / output device to the main control unit flows through the connection relay unit. Since the test signal based on the above is output from the connection relay unit to the test equipment, even if the specifications of the gaming machine change, the connection relay unit (relay board) is not changed, and the test equipment can be changed with the minimum change. You can connect.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control board constituting the main control unit has a main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted to output a test signal to the connection relay unit at a position surrounded by a broken line on one side of the main control board. The configuration may include a mounting pattern for placement.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for mounting through holes.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for surface mounting.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for through-hole mounting and surface mounting.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay board
A signal in the special character that indicates the operating state of the special character, and
It is possible to output to the test apparatus a closing request lamp signal indicating the driving state of the closing request lamp that is driven in a state where the gaming medium can be thrown.
The main control unit
After the game is completed, the signal in the special accessory may be turned on by the timing when the input request lamp signal for the game in which the accessory continuous operation device for the second type special accessory is activated is turned on.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay board
A payout request signal requesting payout of the game medium can be output to the test device.
The main control unit
The signal in the special bonus may be turned off after the timing of turning off the payout request signal for the game in which the bonus continuous operation device related to the second type special bonus has ended.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control unit
A configuration in which the signal in the special bonus is turned off before the timing of turning on the input request lamp signal for the next game of the game in which the bonus continuous operation device related to the second type special bonus is finished. May be.

The present invention can provide a gaming machine that can be connected to a test device without changing the relay board and with a minimum of changes even if the specifications of the gaming machine change.

(8) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control unit (main control board 71) and
A plurality of device relay units (cabinet side relay board 44, door relay terminal plate 68, reel relay terminal plate 74) connected to the main control unit, and
A plurality of input / output devices (input / output devices 401, etc.) connected to the main control unit or the device relay unit are provided.
The main control unit can be connected to the test device (testing machine 402) via the connection relay unit (IF1).
The plurality of device relay units include at least a first relay board (cabinet side relay board 44) and a second relay board (reel relay terminal board 74).
The connection relay unit
A first connection path connecting the main control unit and the first relay board,
It has a second connection path for connecting the main control unit and the second relay board.
The main control unit
An output signal is output to the first output device (external centralized terminal plate 47) included in the plurality of input / output devices via the first connection path.
An output signal is output to the second output devices (first to third stepping motors 404L to 404R) included in the plurality of input / output devices via the second connection path, and is included in the plurality of input / output devices. An input signal is input from the first input device (first to third index sensors 405L to 405R), and the input signal is input.
The connection relay unit is configured so that the output signal and the test signal based on the input signal can be input / output from the test device.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first connection path through which the output signal output from the main control unit to the first output device flows passes through the connection relay unit, and the main control unit to the second output device. Since the second connection path through which the output signal output to the output signal flows passes through the connection relay unit, a test signal based on the output signal output from the main control unit to the first output device and the second output device is used. It can be output to the test device from the connection relay unit.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the second connection path through which the input signal input from the first input device to the main control unit flows passes through the connection relay unit, the input signal is input from the first input device to the main control unit. The input signal can be input to the test device via the connection relay unit.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be connected to the test apparatus without changing the connection relay unit (relay board) and with the minimum change, even if the specifications of the gaming machine change. ..

In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The plurality of device relay units further have a third relay board (door relay terminal plate 68).
The connection relay unit further has a third connection path for connecting the main control unit and the third relay board.
The main control unit has a configuration in which input signals from second input devices (selector 66, door open / close monitoring switch 67, BET switch 77, etc.) included in the plurality of input / output devices are input via the third connection path. May be.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the output signal of the specific input / output device is obtained by passing the second connection path through which the signal output from the specific input / output device to the main control unit flows through the connection relay unit. Since the test signal based on the above is output from the connection relay unit to the test equipment, even if the specifications of the gaming machine change, the connection relay unit (relay board) is not changed, and the test equipment can be changed with the minimum change. You can connect.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control board constituting the main control unit has a main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted to output a test signal to the connection relay unit at a position surrounded by a broken line on one side of the main control board. The configuration may include a mounting pattern for placement.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for mounting through holes.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for surface mounting.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The mounting pattern of the main control test signal output circuit that can be mounted on the main control board may be a wiring pattern for through-hole mounting and surface mounting.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay board
A signal in the normal character that indicates the operating state of the normal character, and
It is possible to output to the test apparatus a closing request lamp signal indicating the driving state of the closing request lamp that is driven in a state where the gaming medium can be thrown.
The main control unit
After the end of the game, the signal in the normal accessory may be turned on by the timing when the input request lamp signal for the game in which the normal accessory is activated is turned on.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The connection relay board
A payout request signal requesting payout of the game medium can be output to the test device.
The main control unit
The signal in the normal bonus may be turned off after the timing of turning off the payout request signal for the game in which the normal bonus has ended.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The main control unit
The signal in the normal bonus may be turned off before the timing of turning on the input request lamp signal for the next game of the game in which the normal bonus is finished.

The present invention can provide a gaming machine that can be connected to a test device without changing the relay board and with a minimum of changes even if the specifications of the gaming machine change.
<Appendix 2>
[Game machines with the first to fourth configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, if it is not in an advantageous state (for example, ART state) that is advantageous to the player, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and if it is in the advantageous state, the advantageous state is determined. It is known that it is possible to perform a lottery as to whether or not to continue (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-240017).

However, in the gaming machines shown above, there are few variations in determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and it is required to devise ways to further enhance the interest.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in continuing a state advantageous to a player.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following first configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns and a plurality of effective lines are set, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with check and medal payout processing).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, main) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Determining the type of ally by CPU101) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol display area (for example, a symbol display area 4) in which a predetermined area is visible for the symbol display means and one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area.
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with check and medal payout processing).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
A special line setting means capable of setting one or a plurality of special lines formed by connecting straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area. When,
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the special lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. (Determining the type of ally) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.

The continuation degree determining means changes the continuation degree to a degree disadvantageous to the player when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means in the advantageous state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following second configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns and a plurality of effective lines are set, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
Specific when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied in the advantageous state (for example, when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state and the right acquisition state transition lottery is won in the right acquisition lottery state). A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control a specific state (for example, a right acquisition state) that is advantageous to the player for a period of time, and
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, main) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Determining the type of ally by CPU101) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.
The specific state is a state in which it is possible to determine whether or not a specific right (for example, a permanent right or a limited right) is granted.
The determination line determining means is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination line is determined based on the given specific right.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol display area (for example, a symbol display area 4) in which a predetermined area is visible for the symbol display means and one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area.
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with check and medal payout processing).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
Specific when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied in the advantageous state (for example, when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state and the right acquisition state transition lottery is won in the right acquisition lottery state). A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control a specific state (for example, a right acquisition state) that is advantageous to the player for a period of time, and
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
A special line setting means capable of setting one or a plurality of special lines formed by connecting straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area. When,
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the special lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. (Determining the type of ally) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.
The specific state is a state in which it is possible to determine whether or not a specific right (for example, a permanent right or a limited right) is granted.
The determination line determining means is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination line is determined based on the given specific right.

The specific state is a state in which the specific right can be granted in a number exceeding the upper limit number (for example, 2) that can be determined as the determination line by the determination line determining means.
When the specific right equal to or greater than the upper limit that can be determined as the determination line is granted, the determination line determining means determines the determination line for the upper limit using the specific right for the upper limit.
In the advantageous state, the continuation degree determining means is the continuation degree if the specific right does not remain when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means. The above-described gaming machine, characterized in that it is possible to change the degree of continuation to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player and not to change the degree of continuation to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player if the specific right remains. ..

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following third configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns and a plurality of effective lines are set, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, main) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Determining the type of ally by CPU101) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.
Further special rights granting means (eg, main CPU 101) that can determine to grant special rights (eg, permanent rights) when special favorable conditions are met (eg, winning a permanent right acquisition lottery). Prepare,
The determination line determining means
When the special right is granted by the special right granting means, any one of the plurality of effective lines is always determined as the determination line among the plurality of effective lines.
When the special right is not granted by the special right granting means, when determining the determination line, one or more of the effective lines is referred to as the determination line. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to decide whether or not to play.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol display area (for example, a symbol display area 4) in which a predetermined area is visible for the symbol display means and one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area.
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with check and medal payout processing).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
A special line setting means capable of setting one or a plurality of special lines formed by connecting straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area. When,
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the special lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. (Determining the type of ally) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.
Further special rights granting means (eg, main CPU 101) that can determine to grant special rights (eg, permanent rights) when special favorable conditions are met (eg, winning a permanent right acquisition lottery). Prepare,
The determination line determining means
When the special right is granted by the special right granting means, one of the plurality of the special lines is always determined as the determination line.
When the special right is not granted by the special right granting means, when determining the determination line, one or more of the special lines is referred to as the determination line. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to decide whether or not to do so.

The continuation degree determining means changes the continuation degree to a degree disadvantageous to the player when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means in the advantageous state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and
Based on the establishment of the predetermined advantageous condition, it is possible to shift the gaming state in the advantageous state to the first gaming state (for example, RT2 state), and a combination of special symbols in the advantageous state (for example, a combination of symbols in the advantageous state (RT2 state). For example, when the RT3 transition (RT3 transition) is displayed, the gaming state transition control means (for example, RT check by the main CPU 101) that can shift the gaming state in the advantageous state to the second gaming state (for example, RT3 state) is displayed. Processing), equipped with,
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
When a specific combination of symbols is displayed in the advantageous state, the continuity degree determining means capable of changing the continuation degree of the advantageous state to a degree advantageous to the player (for example, determination of the enemy status by the main CPU 101). ) Including
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the internal winning combination determining means determines a specific internal winning combination in which a combination of the specific symbols can be displayed is higher in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. ..

The continuation degree determining means can change the continuation degree to a degree disadvantageous to the player when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in the advantageous state.
The internal winning combination determining means can determine a predetermined internal winning combination in which the combination of the predetermined symbols can be displayed in the first gaming state, and can determine the predetermined internal winning combination in the second gaming state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it does not.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state in an advantageous section), one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether they are effective lines) are related to a change in the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. It is possible to decide whether to use the judgment line, and in the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols (for example, "replay" or "bell" symbol alignment) is displayed on the determined judgment line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Can be changed to a degree that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the determined degree of continuation.

As a result, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state can be changed according to the determination result of the determination line, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the continuation of the advantageous state for the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols of "hit lip") is displayed on the determined determination line in the advantageous state, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state Can be changed to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, the tension in the advantageous state can be increased, the game in the advantageous state does not become monotonous, and the interest in continuing the advantageous state for the player can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the determination result regarding the determination line regarding the change in the continuation degree of the advantageous state changes depending on whether or not the right is granted in the specific state (for example, the right acquisition state). ing. That is, it is possible to determine the determination line based on the rights granted in the specific state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the right of the upper limit number or more of the determination line is granted in the specific state, first, the determination line of the upper limit number is determined by using the right of the upper limit number. Then, in the advantageous state, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols of the "shot lip") is displayed on the determined determination line, if the granted right does not remain, the advantageous state If the degree of continuation of the above is changed to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player and the granted right remains, it is possible not to change the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special right (for example, a permanent right) is granted, a plurality of determination lines are always determined, and when the special right is not granted, the determination line is determined. When determining, one or more lines are determined as the determination line.

As a result, the role of each gaming state in the advantageous state can be diversified, and the degree of continuation of the favorable state can be varied in various ways. be able to.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to shift the gaming state in the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state in the advantageous section) to the first gaming state (for example, RT2 state), and a special symbol. When the combination of (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, it is possible to shift the gaming state in the advantageous state to the second gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Specific internal winning combinations (eg, "F_middle rip 1" and "F_middle rip 1") in which a specific combination of symbols (for example, a combination of "middle rip" symbols) can be displayed. The probability of determining any of 2) is higher in the RT3 state than in the RT2 state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the first gaming state, a predetermined combination of symbols that changes the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to a degree that is advantageous to the player (for example, a combination of symbols of the "shot lip"). It is possible to determine a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, "F_shot lip") in which is possible to be displayed, and in the second gaming state, it is not possible to determine this predetermined internal winning combination.

As a result, in the advantageous state, the degree of the player's advantage further varies depending on which game state the player is in, so that the games in the advantageous state can be made more diverse and more advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in the continuation of the state.

[Game machine with a fifth configuration]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a player wins a predetermined internal winning combination in which the degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the game control circuit is advantageous in notifying the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player. In the state, the broadcastable information that enables the notification of the stop operation procedure is transmitted to the effect control circuit, and in the normal state in which the stop operation procedure advantageous to the player is not notified, the stop operation is performed. It is known that information that makes it impossible to notify the procedure according to the above procedure can be transmitted to the effect control circuit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144568).

However, in the gaming machine shown above, for example, a predetermined internal winning combination may have a plurality of internal winning combinations such that the combination of displayed symbols is different even if the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is the same. In the case of including, there is a problem that although the effect of notifying the procedure of the stop operation can be performed, the effect related to the combination of the displayed symbols cannot be performed.

Here, it is conceivable that the game control circuit transmits the type of the internal winning combination to the effect control circuit in detail, but in this case, there arises a problem that the control load of the game control circuit increases. Become.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a more appropriate effect without increasing the control load.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fifth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. Winning check / medal payout processing) and
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means (for example, a display device 11 controlled by a sub CPU 201) for executing the effect.
With an information transmission means (for example, communication data transmission processing by the main CPU 101) capable of transmitting predetermined information (for example, a winning combination number) regarding the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means to the effect executing means. ,
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), an advantage that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified for a predetermined period. A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When the stop operation is performed in the first stop operation procedure (for example, "batting order 1"), a specific symbol combination is displayed on the first line (for example, the top line) in the symbol display means. The first internal winning combination (for example, "F_upper left bell 1") and
When the stop operation is performed in the procedure of the first stop operation, the second internal winning combination in which the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the second line (for example, the center line) in the symbol display means. The role (for example, "F_middle left bell 1") and
When the stop operation is performed in the second stop operation procedure (for example, "batting order 3"), a third combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the first line in the symbol display means. With the internal winning combination (for example, "F_upper middle bell 1"),
When the stop operation is performed in the procedure of the second stop operation, a fourth internal winning combination (for example, "for example,""a combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the second line in the symbol display means. F_middle middle bell 1 ") and can be determined as an internal winning combination,
The information transmitting means is
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determining means determines the first internal winning combination or the third internal winning combination, the first information (for example, the winning combination number "23" is used as the predetermined information. ”) And send
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determining means determines the second internal winning combination or the fourth internal winning combination, the second information (for example, the winning combination number "24" is used as the predetermined information. ”) And send
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that different effects can be executed when the first information is transmitted and when the second information is transmitted.

In the advantageous state, it is possible to determine whether one or more of the plurality of lines including the first line and the second line is used as a determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Judgment line determination means (for example, determination of ally type by main CPU 101)
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Determining means (for example, determining the enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined period elapses, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, continuous lottery by the main CPU 101) determines whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determining means. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is equipped with.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, when the stop operation is performed in "batting order 1", "F_upper left bell 1" in which the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the top line and "batting order" When the stop operation is performed at "1", the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the center line, "F_middle left bell 1", and when the stop operation is performed at "batting order 3", the top The combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the line. When the stop operation is performed in "F_upper middle bell 1" and "batting order 3", the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the center line. "F_middle middle bell 1" can be determined at least as an internal winning combination, and in an advantageous state, for example, when "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_upper middle bell 1" is determined, the winning "23" is transmitted as the winning combination number, and when "F_middle left bell 1" or "F_middle middle bell 1" is determined, "24" is transmitted as the winning combination number. Then, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute different effects according to the transmitted winning combination number.

As a result, for example, in an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state in an advantageous section), when the player has a game property in which the degree of advantage of the player varies depending on the line on which the symbol is displayed, the displayed symbol Since the effect related to the combination can be performed, a more appropriate effect can be performed without increasing the control load.

[Game machine with the sixth configuration]
In a conventional gaming machine, during a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, a story of story production that is executed according to the number of transitions to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is advanced, that is, advantageous to the player. It is known that the effect content can be changed according to the duration of the state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187467).

Here, in a gaming machine as shown above, for example, when a player's advantageous state continues for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to perform a special effect (for example, an ending effect) that cannot normally be seen. ..

By the way, such a special production is executed as, for example, giving an additional privilege to the player, but a device for further increasing the player's motivation to play and improving the interest of the production is devised. It is considered that there is room for this.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing a player's motivation to play and improving the interest of production.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following sixth configuration.

A gaming machine (for example, pachislot machine 1) that plays a game by variablely displaying a symbol based on a player's start operation and stopping and displaying a symbol based on a player's stop operation.
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), an advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is advantageous to the player, and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The effect executing means is
When the period controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means becomes a special period (for example, the game period of the advantageous section is "1200" times or more), a special effect (for example, the ending effect in the ending 2 state) ) Is feasible,
When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied and the predetermined execution condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state), a part of the special effect is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform a special effect (for example, an ending effect in the ending 1 state).

In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, continuous lottery by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and
When the advantageous state continuation determination means does not determine to continue the advantageous state, the normal termination means for terminating the advantageous state and the normal termination means.
Even when the advantageous state continuation determining means determines to continue the advantageous state, a specific period (for example, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state controlling means exceeds the special period). Further provided with a specific termination means for terminating the advantageous state when the regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times).
The effect executing means is characterized in that the special effect can be executed from the time when the period controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means becomes the special period to the specific period. The gaming machine described above.

Each time the effect executing means is determined by the advantageous state continuation determining means to continue the advantageous state until the period controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state controlling means becomes the specific period. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein a suggestion effect suggesting a guideline for a period of time controlled by the advantageous state control means can be executed.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the period controlled in the advantageous state becomes a special period (for example, when the ending 2 state is reached), the special effect can be executed and the special effect can be executed. When it is decided to be controlled in an advantageous state and a predetermined execution condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state), a part of the special effect is executed. It is possible to perform special effects.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a predetermined execution condition is satisfied for a special effect that is a part of a special effect that can be normally executed at the end of a game in a state advantageous to the player. If so, it can be executed in the early stage of the game in a state advantageous to the player. As a result, the player will play the game while wanting to see all the special effects, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased and the interest of the effects can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, from the time when the period controlled to the advantageous state becomes a special period to the period when the period controlled to the advantageous state becomes a specific period and the advantageous state ends. , It is possible to perform a special production. As a result, even when the acquisition of the game medium is restricted, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, until the period controlled in the advantageous state becomes a special period, each time it is decided to continue the advantageous state, a guideline for the period controlled in the advantageous state is used. It is possible to carry out a suggestion effect that suggests. As a result, the player can generally grasp when the execution of the special effect is started and when the advantageous state ends, so that it is possible to provide the player with appropriate information while enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

[Game machines with 7th to 12th configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, a continuous effect for notifying whether or not a special role (for example, a bonus role) that enables a transition to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a bonus state) has been determined as an internal winning combination. Is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79697).

However, whether or not the special role has been decided as the internal winning role can often be inferred not only from the production content of the continuous production but also from the combination of the displayed symbols, so the situation shifts to an advantageous state. It is considered that there is room for further ingenuity in the notification regarding whether or not to do so and the mode of transition to an advantageous state itself.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in transitioning to a state advantageous to the player.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following seventh configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) which is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous state control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , A normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state) when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). State transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning combination of the special role has not been carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the procedure of the stopping operation advantageous to the player can be notified. When any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the case of the first advantageous state and the second normal gaming state, the stop in favor of the player. A gaming machine characterized in that it executes an effect that can notify the operation procedure.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) which is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous state control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , A normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state) when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). State transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
In the specific combination, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed when the stop operation is in a specific mode, and the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed when the stop operation is not in the specific mode. It ’s a winning role,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning combination of the special role has not been carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the player is asked until the first advantageous state is completed. It is possible to execute an effect capable of notifying the advantageous procedure of the stop operation, and when the first advantageous state is the second normal gaming state, any of the plurality of predetermined combinations is determined as the internal winning combination. If so, it is possible to execute an effect capable of notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player until the first advantageous state is completed.
When any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination when the first advantageous state is not the gaming state of either the first normal gaming state or the second normal gaming state, the predetermined winning combination is determined. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect capable of notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player only for the number of times (for example, once).

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following ninth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, a first advantageous state (for example, a high probability 2 of a normal advantageous section) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period (for example, between 9 games) A second advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won) while being controllable in the state). ), And an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101).
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , A normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state) when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). State transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning combination of the special role has not been carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the procedure of the stopping operation advantageous to the player can be notified. When any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the case where the first advantageous state is the second normal gaming state, the effect is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute an effect that can notify the procedure of the stop operation,
When the special gaming state ends, the advantageous state control means
When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the second advantageous state is controlled.
When the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied, the game is controlled to a third advantageous state (for example, a high accuracy 4 state of a normal advantageous section) for a specific period (for example, between 32 games). Machine.

It is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) for different degrees of advantage of the player.
The special combination includes a first special combination in which the winning probabilities differ among the plurality of set values, and a second special combination in which the winning probabilities are the same among the plurality of set values.
The predetermined advantageous conditions are
When any of the first advantageous state and the third advantageous state is in the advantageous state, which of the first special combination and the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Is also decided,
When neither the first advantageous state nor the third advantageous state is in the advantageous state, it is not determined whether or not the first special combination is established when it is determined as the internal winning combination. The gaming machine described above.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following tenth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) which is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous state control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , A normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state) when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). State transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning combination of the special role has not been carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The advantageous state control means can determine whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state.
The effect executing means is
When any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state, the player is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute an effect that can notify the procedure of the stop operation,
When the special gaming state is controlled in the second advantageous state and any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the special gaming state, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a production that can notify
When the special gaming state is controlled in the first advantageous state and any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the special gaming state, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine characterized in that it does not make it possible to perform an effect that can notify.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control the first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) and a predetermined value. When the advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) can be controlled, and a specific symbol combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed. When this is done, it is possible to change the gaming state to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the gaming state. Can be transferred to the second normal gaming state (for example, RT5 state). In addition, it is possible to determine a specific role and a special role as internal winning roles at the same time. Then, in the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified for the predetermined combination (for example, the push order small combination). It has become so.

As a result, in the first advantageous state, there is a higher possibility that the number of game media to be given will increase as compared with the case in the normal state, and the expectation of whether or not to transition to the special game state will also increase. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition to a favorable state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, an appropriate timing), the specific combination of symbols is displayed and the specific combination is not performed in the specific mode. In this case, it is an internal winning combination in which a specific combination of symbols is not displayed, and in the case of the first advantageous state and the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the player for the predetermined combination until the first advantageous state is completed. When the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player is notified and the player is in the first advantageous state and not in the first normal state and the second normal game state, the player is notified of the predetermined combination only for a predetermined number of times (for example, once). The procedure of the advantageous stop operation is notified.

As a result, when the specific combination is won, the degree of advantage and the content of the first advantageous state vary depending on whether or not the special combination is also determined as the internal winning combination and whether or not the combination of the specific symbols is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the transition of the state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the special gaming state (for example, the bonus state) ends, if the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the second advantageous state, and the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied. If not, the game shifts to a third advantageous state (for example, a high-accuracy 4 state in a normal advantageous section) for a specific period (for example, between 32 games).

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the gaming state is either the first advantageous state or the third advantageous state, the winning probability is the same among the plurality of set values (for example, "F_BB3 + F_watermelon"). 2 ”and“ internal winning combination including bonus combination other than “F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2”), and the first special combination (for example, “F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2”) having different winning probabilities among a plurality of set values. Regardless of which case is won, it is determined whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state, but when neither the first advantageous state nor the third advantageous state is in the gaming state, the first special role is assigned. In the case of winning, it is not decided whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state.

As a result, the transition of the subsequent gaming state (advantageous state) can be made more diverse depending on the gaming state and its type when the special role is won. Can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state of the first advantageous state in which it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state, it is possible to notify the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination. , Even when controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state) in the second advantageous state, it is possible to notify the player of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination, but the special gaming state is set in the first advantageous state. When controlled, it is not possible to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination.

As a result, it is possible to provide a first advantageous state, which is a gaming section in which the expectation of shifting to the second advantageous state is increased and the possibility that the number of game media to be given is increased is also increased, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of the game, and even if such a game section is provided, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessive, and the player's gambling spirit is enhanced. It is also possible to suppress excessive fanning.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eleventh configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
Advantageous state control that can control a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a high probability 2 state of a normal advantageous section) for a predetermined period when the internal winning combination is determined. Means (eg, main CPU 101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , A normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state) when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). State transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning combination of the special role has not been carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, an effect capable of notifying the player of the procedure of the stopping operation which is advantageous to the player. Makes it feasible and
In the case of the advantageous state and the second normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, an effect capable of notifying the player of the procedure of the stopping operation which is advantageous to the player. Makes it feasible and
The normal game state transition control means is a case where the specific combination is not determined as an internal winning combination at the same time as the special combination, and when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, the specific period (for example, 8). (Between games), the game state is changed to the first normal game state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined period is set to a period longer than the specific period (for example, between 9 games).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the high accuracy 2 state of the normal advantageous section). When a specific combination of symbols (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and a special role (for example, RT3 state) can be changed. When the bonus combination) is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to shift the gaming state to the second normal gaming state (for example, RT5 state). In addition, it is possible to determine a specific role and a special role as internal winning roles at the same time. Then, in the advantageous state of the first normal game state and the second normal game state, it is possible to notify the player of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination (for example, the push order small combination). The period during which the advantageous state can be continued (for example, between 9 games) is set to be longer than the period during which the first normal gaming state can be continued (for example, between 8 games).

As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation regardless of whether or not a specific game state (first normal game state) ends, so that the interest in the transition of the state advantageous to the player is It can be improved.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following twelfth configuration.

When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when a bonus combination is won), an advantageous state control means that can control an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) that is advantageous to the player, and
A display means capable of displaying an image (for example, a display device 11) and
A gaming machine provided with a detecting means (for example, a touch sensor 19) capable of detecting a player's operation.
The display means can display a specific image for notifying whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied.
The specific image is a first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) displayed when the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied. Including the displayed second specific image (for example, the same image as the base image),
The first specific image and the second specific image are different in a specific part and are images common to other parts other than the specific part.
When the detection means detects that the player has performed the operation of designating the specific portion when the first specific image is displayed, it notifies that the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") Is displayed on the display means.

The gaming machine described above, wherein the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work used as the motif of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is notified whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition (for example, winning a bonus combination) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) advantageous to the player is satisfied. Therefore, when the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) is displayed, and when the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied, the second specific image is displayed. It is possible to display an image (for example, the same image as the base image), and when the first specific image is displayed, the player performs an operation to specify a part different from the second specific image. In this case, it is possible to display a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") Notifying that the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied by a new production mode in which a predetermined operation of the player is involved, so that the interest in the transition of the advantageous state to the player can be improved. Can be planned.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work used as the motif of the gaming machine. As a result, the player who is attached to the original work can easily recognize whether or not the predetermined advantageous conditions are satisfied, so that the motivation for playing can be increased and the interest in the production can be further enhanced.

[Game machine with thirteenth configuration]
In a conventional gaming machine, the gaming control device side monitors the time when a specific operating means (for example, a stop button) is pressed (the time counted by the on-edge timer), and that time is sent to the effect control circuit side. As a result, it is known that the content of the production can be changed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-233278).

However, since it is necessary to mount many effects in recent gaming machines that require diversification of effects, it is required to devise ways to reduce the control load of the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load related to the effect even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of a specific operation means. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following thirteenth configuration.

Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, stop button),
An operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch) capable of detecting the operation of the operating means, and
A production control means (for example, sub CPU201) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
When the operation detecting means detects an operation (for example, on-edge) of the operating means, the time measurement is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the start of the time measurement, the first effect (for example, 3 seconds) is produced. Control to generate "Direction 1")
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, control is performed to generate a second effect (for example, "effect 2").
A gaming machine characterized in that if the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined time elapses from the start of the timekeeping, the control for generating the first effect is not performed.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation detecting means detects that the operation of the operating means has been completed (for example, when an off-edge is detected).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, timing is started when an operation of a specific operating means (for example, on-edge) is detected, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the timing, the first time is taken. Control to execute one effect (for example, "effect 1"), and control to execute a second effect (for example, "effect 2") when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an off-edge is detected). If the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined time elapses from the start of the timekeeping, it is possible not to control the execution of the first effect.

As a result, even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of the specific operation means, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

[14th configuration gaming machine]
There is known a conventional gaming machine that makes it possible to perform an effect such as notifying an internal winning combination by a light emitting mode of a specific operating means (for example, a stop button) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-82034). See Gazette).

However, it is considered that there is room for further ingenuity in such production.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest in directing and enhancing the interest in gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourteenth configuration.

A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that generates an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
Prior to the occurrence of the advantageous state, a predetermining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to grant the right to allow the occurrence of the advantageous state (for example, winning a bonus combination) and
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means (for example, a game value display unit (VL)) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
When the pre-determining means determines that the right to allow the occurrence of the advantageous state is granted, the effect executing means notifies that the decision has been made (for example, "number of sheets ahead". "Display effect") can be executed, and a predetermined value (for example, the end of the combination as the number of planned acquisitions) regarding the game value that can be acquired in the advantageous state generated based on the right given by the decision in the specific notification effect. A gaming machine characterized by displaying the value of the number counter.

When the effect executing means displays the predetermined value in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and the game value is acquired in the advantageous state. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the display of the predetermined value is updated based on the acquired gaming value value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when it is decided that the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) is granted (for example, winning a bonus combination), the decision is made. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect to be notified (for example, "number of sheets ahead display effect"), and in this specific notification effect, a predetermined game value that can be acquired in an advantageous state generated based on the right decided to be granted. It is possible to display a value (for example, a value of a number counter for the number of consecutive ends as a planned number of acquisitions).

As a result, it is possible to perform a production that specifically informs the value of the right (winning content) obtained by the player, so that the interest related to the production can be enhanced and the interest related to the game can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the predetermined value is displayed in the specific notification effect, the predetermined value is continuously displayed at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is acquired in the advantageous state, the game value is acquired. The display of the predetermined value is updated based on the acquired game value value.

As a result, a series of effects for notifying the value can be appropriately performed before and after the occurrence of the advantageous state, so that the interest in the effects can be further enhanced.

[Game machines with 15th to 18th configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, when it is not in an advantageous state (for example, ART state) which is an advantageous game period (advantageous section) for the player, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and in the advantageous state. In some cases, it is known that a lottery can be performed as to whether or not to continue the advantageous state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-240017).

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming period, which is an advantageous section, varies depending on the setting conditions such as the transition probability of the advantageous state and the high and low of the continuation probability. It has become.

By the way, in such a gaming machine, since the amount of the game value given in the predetermined period is within the range of the predetermined ball output rate, the amount of the game value given per unit game in the advantageous state (the amount of increase in the game value) It is designed so that the indicated slope value) is a constant value.

Therefore, when the amount of game value added per unit game in an advantageous state is set to a relatively high value, if the above setting conditions are also set to be advantageous to the player, the game There is a problem that the gambling of is excessively high.

On the other hand, in order to suppress the gambling of the game, the amount of the game value given per unit game in the advantageous state is set to a relatively low value, and the above setting conditions are disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to set it, but in this case, there is a problem that the interest of the game is significantly reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining the interest of a game while maintaining an appropriate degree of gambling.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fifteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a player's start operation and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a player's stop operation.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) smaller than the first expected value. Main CPU101) and
The advantageous state control means is
An advantageous state start determining means capable of determining whether or not to start the advantageous state when the advantageous state is not present,
Including the advantageous state continuation determining means capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state in the case of the advantageous state.
The first expected value control means controls so that the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value for at least a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started.
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state including the predetermined period is the second expected value for at least a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled in such a manner.

The gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous state continuation determining means does not determine to continue the advantageous state for at least the specific period after the advantageous state is continued.

When the advantageous state continuation determining means decides to continue the advantageous state, the advantageous state started based on the determination by the advantageous state start determining means to start the advantageous state ends. A gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous state is continued after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high for a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started, and a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. Can be played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, it may not be decided to continue the advantageous state for a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately.

Further, even when it is decided to continue the advantageous state during the advantageous state in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state is temporarily terminated and the advantageous state is continued after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed. You may try to (restart). In this way, not only can the ball output rate be managed more appropriately, but also the interest of the game can be improved with respect to whether or not the advantageous state continues.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following 16th configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a player's start operation and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a player's stop operation.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
Predetermining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state to be displayed, and
A specific notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification notifying that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means is provided.
The advantageous state control means is
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started, and the advantageous state is started.
When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated and the condition is terminated.
If the combination of the special symbols is displayed before the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state can be terminated.
The specific notification executing means can display the combination of the special symbols in the game when the advance determination means permits the display of the combination of the special symbols in the advantageous state. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific notification can be executed.

A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) lower than the first expected value. With the main CPU101)
In the first expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Control and
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value from the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled so as to be.

The predetermined end condition is established based on the fact that the game has been played for a predetermined period after the start of the advantageous state, or that the game value given after the start of the advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by playing.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state ends when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, or when the special gaming state is entered before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied. Then, in the advantageous state, when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is executed. Therefore, the player can continue the advantageous state by avoiding the transition to the special gaming state as long as it is within the specified predetermined end condition. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

It should be noted that, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state until the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. From the time when the fluctuation condition of the above is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state, it may be possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. In this way, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or the special game. It is also possible to shift to a state, end the advantageous state, and try to get an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the predetermined termination condition may be terminated when a certain privilege is given to the player (or when it is assumed that the privilege is given). In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following 17th configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a player's start operation and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a player's stop operation.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) lower than the first expected value. Main CPU 101) and
The advantageous state control means is
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started, and the advantageous state is started.
When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated and the condition is terminated.
It is possible to end the advantageous state when a combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state is displayed before the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In the first expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Control and
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value from the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled so as to be.

Predetermining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of the special symbols to be displayed, and
A specific notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification notifying that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means is further provided.
The specific notification execution means is
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermining means between the start of the advantageous state and the establishment of the specific variable condition. , The specific notification can be executed when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied.
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermining means between the time when the specific variable condition is satisfied and the time when the advantageous state is terminated. , A gaming machine characterized in that the specific notification can be executed when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means.

The first expected value control means sets the probability that information about the player's stop operation in the advantageous state is notified as the first probability, and thus the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state. Is controlled so as to be the first expected value,
The second expected value control means sets the probability of being notified of information regarding the player's stop operation in the advantageous state as a second probability lower than the first probability, so that the unit game in the advantageous state A gaming machine characterized in that the expected value of the game value per game is controlled to be the second expected value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state to the establishment of a specific variable condition. From the time when the fluctuation condition of the above is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to play the game with the expected value of the game value being relatively low. Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

In addition, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is sent. It may be executed. In this way, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to further maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the expected value of the game value given in the advantageous state may be adjusted by the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified during the advantageous state. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a player's start operation and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a player's stop operation.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) lower than the first expected value. Main CPU 101) and
The advantageous state control means is
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started, and the advantageous state is started.
When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated and the condition is terminated.
It is possible to end the advantageous state when a combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state is displayed before the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In the first expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Control and
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value from the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state. Control so that
Further provided with a special privilege granting means (for example, sub CPU201) capable of granting a special privilege not related to the granting of the game value when the advantageous state ends in response to the display of the combination of the special symbols. A game machine featuring.

Predetermining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of the special symbols to be displayed, and
A specific notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification notifying that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means is further provided.
The specific notification execution means is
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermining means between the start of the advantageous state and the establishment of the specific variable condition. , The specific notification can be executed when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied.
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermining means between the time when the specific variable condition is satisfied and the time when the advantageous state is terminated. , A gaming machine characterized in that the specific notification can be executed when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means.

The first expected value control means sets the probability that information about the player's stop operation in the advantageous state is notified as the first probability, and thus the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state. Is controlled so as to be the first expected value,
The second expected value control means sets the probability of being notified of information regarding the player's stop operation in the advantageous state as a second probability lower than the first probability, so that the unit game in the advantageous state A gaming machine characterized in that the expected value of the game value per game is controlled to be the second expected value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state to the establishment of a specific variable condition. From the time when the fluctuation condition of the above is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to play the game with the expected value of the game value being relatively low. Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Further, when the advantageous state ends with the transition to the special game state, it is possible to give special benefits not related to the addition of the game value. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. In addition, when the player shifts to the special gaming state and ends the advantageous state, a special privilege that is not granted when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is terminated is given, so that the player is in an advantageous state. Can also be given an incentive to terminate early. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

In addition, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is sent. It may be executed. In this way, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to further maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the expected value of the game value given in the advantageous state may be adjusted by the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified during the advantageous state. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

[Game machine with 19th configuration]
It is known that conventional gaming machines are in a state in which they can shift to an advantageous state (for example, ART state) that is advantageous to the player every predetermined number of games (that is, every predetermined cycle). (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167197).

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the expectation of transition to an advantageous state at predetermined intervals, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the period until the transition to the advantageous state is fixed is constant and the change in game playability is scarce.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and by making the period until the state in which the transition to the advantageous state becomes possible can be changed, the playability can be made rich in variation. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A first special role (eg, BB1 in another example of playability (No. 2)), a second special role (eg, BB2 in another example of playability (No. 2)), and a predetermined role (eg, playability). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the push order small combination in another example (No. 2), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variable display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
When the combination of the first special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 in another example (No. 2) of the game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control to start the BB1 state in the example (No. 2) and end the first special game state when the first special end condition is satisfied. When,
When the combination of the second special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB2 in another example of the game property (No. 2)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The second special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control to start the BB2 state in the example (No. 2) and end the second special game state when the second special end condition is satisfied. When,
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation is provided.
When the first special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The first special permission state (for example, the BB1 permission state in another example of playability (No. 2)) in which is permitted is continued.
When the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state in which is permitted (eg, the BB2 permission state in another example of gameplay (part 2)).
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the first special permission state, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the second special permission state, the first special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In a normal gaming state that is neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state (for example, the general gaming state (CZ state) in another example of gameplay (No. 2)), the first special combination or The second special role can be determined as an internal winning role.
The first special end condition is satisfied when a specified number (for example, more than 285) of game values are given in the first special game state.
In the first special game state, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a predetermined number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, the predetermined number of game values are not given.
At least in the first special gaming state, the period during which the notification means does not notify the operation information regarding the specific aspect functions as a reduction period in which the game value decreases.
The second special gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases.
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the first special gaming state can be set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

A gaming machine characterized in that a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the first special gaming state functions as the increase period.

In the first special game state, when the combination of the first specific symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to RB1 in another example of game playability (No. 2)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first specific game A first specific gaming state that can be controlled to start a state (for example, the RB1 state in another example of game playability (No. 2)) and end the first specific gaming state when the first specific end condition is satisfied. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
In the second special gaming state, when the symbol display means displays a combination of the second specific symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to RB2 in another example of gameplay (No. 2)), the second specific game A second specific gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a state (for example, the RB2 state in another example of game playability (No. 2)) and end the second specific gaming state when the second specific end condition is satisfied. A control means (for example, main CPU 101) is further provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the first special gaming state, the first specific combination (for example, RB1 in another example of game playability (No. 2)) can be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the second special gaming state, the second specific combination (for example, RB2 in another example of game playability (No. 2)) can be determined as the internal winning combination.
When the first specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the first special game state, the first specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The first specific permission state (for example, the RB1 permission state in another example of game playability (No. 2)) in which the combination of is permitted to be displayed is continued.
When the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the second special game state, the second specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The second specific permission state (for example, the RB2 permission state in another example of game playability (No. 2)) in which the combination of is permitted to be displayed is continued.
In the first special gaming state, the period during which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is not notified by the notification means functions as the reduction period regardless of whether or not the first specific permission state is obtained.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second special gaming state, the period of the second specific permission state functions as the increase period.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state, if the second special winning combination is won before the first special winning combination, the second special gaming state is entered and the second special gaming state is the gaming value. Acts as an increasing period of increase. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if the first special role is won before the second special role is won, the process shifts to the first special game state, and the operation information related to the stop operation is not notified in the first special game state. , The first special gaming state functions as a reduction period in which the gaming value decreases.

Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the player can continue the advantageous gaming period by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state without shifting to the first special gaming state, but the first special When the game state is changed, the player cannot continue the advantageous game period unless the first special game state is terminated and the normal game state is changed.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the first special gaming state, operation information regarding a stop operation in which a predetermined number of gaming values are given when a predetermined winning combination is won is provided. It will be notified. Since the first special game state ends when a predetermined number of game values are given, the end time of the first special game state can be accelerated by being notified of such information. That is, depending on whether or not the operation information related to the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state, the period until the normal gaming state in which the transition to the second special gaming state can be achieved can be changed. Therefore, by making the period until the transition to the advantageous state variable, the playability can be made rich in variety.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the period in which the operation information related to the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state may also function as an increasing period. In this way, the interest of the game can be maintained even during the period until the state of transition to the advantageous state is reached.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the first special gaming state, it is possible to further shift to the first specific permission state, and in the second special gaming state, it is possible to further shift to the second specific permission state, and the first special gaming state. Then, regardless of whether or not the first specific permission state is set, the period during which the operation information related to the stop operation is not notified is made to function as the decrease period, and in the second special gaming state, the period during which the second specific permission state is set is the increase period. May function as. In this way, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Game machines with 20th to 22nd configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the player shifts to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, while when a predetermined disadvantage condition is satisfied, the conventional gaming machine has a predetermined state which shifts to a disadvantageous state which is disadvantageous to the player. It is known that by repeating the transition from the predetermined state to the advantageous state without shifting to, the advantageous state for the player can be continued (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167197). ).

However, in such a gaming machine, when the player shifts from the predetermined state to the disadvantageous state, the player does not have an advantageous state until the predetermined state is changed again. There was a problem that it would end up.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving motivation and interest in playing.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a twentieth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Internal winning from a plurality of roles including a special role (for example, BB in another example of playability (No. 3)) and a specific role (for example, a push order small role in another example of playability (No. 3)). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining a combination, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variable display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
The gaming states include a normal gaming state (for example, the RT0 state in another example of gaming (part 3)), a special gaming state (for example, a BB state in another example of gaming (part 3)), and a specific gaming state (for example, a specific gaming state). For example, having another example of playability (RT1 state in Part 3),
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example of game playability (No. 3)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
The specific game state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, a bell spill in another example of game playability (No. 3)) is displayed on the symbol display means, and when the specific end condition is satisfied, the above Specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the specific game state, and
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation is provided.
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continuing the state (eg, the BB allowed state in another example of playability (part 3)),
The specific game state control means starts the specific game state when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means in the normal game state that is not the special permission state.
The specific end condition is satisfied when a specified number of games (for example, 500 games) are played.
The stop control means
In the specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means, and in the specific mode. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
The privilege granting means makes it possible to add a specific number of game values when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to add the above-mentioned specific number of game values.
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state and the specific period in the specific gaming state may be set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized by being possible.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information relating to the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the specific gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special role is won, it is in a special permission state, and in a normal gaming state, it is possible to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. In the case of the specific gaming state, it is not possible to display the combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state until the specific gaming state ends. Further, the specific game state shifts based on the fact that when a specific combination is won in a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a combination of specific symbols is displayed without performing a stop operation in a specific mode. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the normal gaming state and the specific period in the specific gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified, and if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, The combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state is performed without shifting to the specific gaming state. Not only is it possible to repeat (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value given when a specific role is won is increased. In addition, when the operation information related to a specific mode is notified in the specific game state, it is not possible to shift to the special game state until the specific game state is completed, but when the specific combination is won. The game value given to is increased. In addition, even if the operation information regarding a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during a specific period, the transition to the special gaming state may be repeated without shifting to the specific gaming state. ..

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether it is in a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state, whether it is a specific period in which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or whether it is specified in the specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information regarding the above-described aspect is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. By doing so, since the game value may increase even in the specific game state, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even in the specific game state in which the special game state does not occur.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 21st gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Special roles (eg, BB in another example of gameplay (4)), special roles (eg, MB in another example of gameplay (4)) and specific roles (eg, other examples of gameplay (4)) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the push order small combination in 4), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variable display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, the RT0 state in another example of gaming property (4)), a special gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, a BB state in another example of gaming property (4)), It has a first specific gaming state (for example, the RT1 state in another example of gaming (No. 4)) and a second specific gaming state (for example, the RT2 state in another example of gaming (No. 4)).
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to MB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the first specific gaming state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, bell spills in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, and the specific end condition is satisfied. The first specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the termination of the first specific game state, and
A second specific game capable of controlling to start the second specific game state when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination and to end the second specific game state when the special game state is started. State control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation is provided.
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continuing the state (eg, the BB allowed state in another example of playability (4)),
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The state (for example, the MB-permitted state in another example of playability (No. 4)) is continued,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the special permission state, the special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the special permission state, the special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, which are neither the special permission state nor the special permission state, the special combination or the special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination.
The first specific game state control means sets the first specific game state when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means in the special permission state and the normal game state that is not the special permission state. Let's get started
The stop control means
In the second specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is not difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
In the first specific gaming state, which is the special permission state, it is difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means, and in the specific mode. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
The privilege granting means makes it possible to add a specific number of game values when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to add the above-mentioned specific number of game values.
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state is set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the first specific gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the game value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special role is won, it becomes a special permission state and shifts to the second specific gaming state, and it is difficult to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. On the other hand, if you win a special role, you will be in a special permission state, but the game state will not shift, and if it is the first specific game state, the combination of special symbols will be displayed until the end of the first specific game state. This makes it difficult to shift to the special gaming state, and as a result, makes it difficult to shift to the normal gaming state. In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a combination of specific symbols is displayed without performing a stop operation in a specific mode. Migrate based on. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the specific period in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. For example, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special combination or the special combination is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if a special role is won and a special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal game state via the special game state.

Under such playability, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is entered without shifting to the first specific gaming state. Not only will it be possible to repeat the transition (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value that will be given when a specific role is won will increase. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the first specific game state, for example, in the case of the special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although it is difficult, the game value given when winning a specific role will increase. Further, even if the operation information related to the specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during the specific period, the transition to the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is performed without shifting to the first specific gaming state. May be possible to repeat.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether it is in the normal gaming state or the first specific gaming state, in what order the special combination, the special combination or the specific combination wins in the normal gaming state, the first specific game. In what order the special role or special role wins in the state, whether or not the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific mode in the first specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information is notified in a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the first specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In this way, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even in the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made to.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 22nd gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Special roles (eg, BB in another example of gameplay (4)), special roles (eg, MB in another example of gameplay (4)) and specific roles (eg, other examples of gameplay (4)) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the push order small combination in 4), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variable display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, the RT0 state in another example of gaming property (4)), a special gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, a BB state in another example of gaming property (4)), It has a first specific gaming state (for example, the RT1 state in another example of gaming (No. 4)) and a second specific gaming state (for example, the RT2 state in another example of gaming (No. 4)).
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to MB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the first specific gaming state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, bell spills in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, and the specific end condition is satisfied. The first specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the termination of the first specific game state, and
A second specific game capable of controlling to start the second specific game state when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination and to end the second specific game state when the special game state is started. State control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation is provided.
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continuing the state (eg, the BB allowed state in another example of playability (4)),
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The state (for example, the MB-permitted state in another example of playability (No. 4)) is continued,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the special permission state, the special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the special permission state, the special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, which are neither the special permission state nor the special permission state, the special combination or the special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination.
The first specific game state control means sets the first specific game state when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means in the special permission state and the normal game state that is not the special permission state. Let's get started
The specific end condition is satisfied when a specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) are played, and is not satisfied when the special game state is started.
The stop control means
In the second specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is not difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
In the first specific gaming state, which is the special permission state, it is difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means, and in the specific mode. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
The privilege granting means makes it possible to add a specific number of game values when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to add the above-mentioned specific number of game values.
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state is set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the first specific gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the game value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special role is won, it becomes a special permission state and shifts to the second specific gaming state, and it is difficult to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. On the other hand, if a special combination is won, the special permission state is set, but the game state does not shift, and if it is the first specific game state, a specified number of games are played and the first specific game state ends. It is difficult to display the combination of special symbols up to and to shift to the special gaming state, and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal gaming state. In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a combination of specific symbols is displayed without performing a stop operation in a specific mode. Migrate based on. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the specific period in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. For example, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special combination or the special combination is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific gaming state, if a special combination is won and a special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal gaming state until a predetermined number of games are played.

Under such playability, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is entered without shifting to the first specific gaming state. Not only will it be possible to repeat the transition (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value that will be given when a specific role is won will increase. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the first specific game state, for example, in the case of the special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although it is difficult, the game value given when winning a specific role will increase. Further, even if the operation information related to the specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during the specific period, the transition to the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is performed without shifting to the first specific gaming state. May be possible to repeat.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether it is in the normal gaming state or the first specific gaming state, in what order the special combination, the special combination or the specific combination wins in the normal gaming state, the first specific game. In what order the special role or special role wins in the state, whether or not the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific mode in the first specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information is notified in a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the first specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In this way, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even in the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made to.

[Game machines of the 23rd and 24th configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state (for example, ART state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific condition is satisfied during the carry-over state of a special role (for example, a bonus combination). (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-73810).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, the amount of game value given per unit game in an advantageous state (inclination value indicating the amount of increase in game value) is designed to be a constant value. Therefore, there is a problem that the change in playability is scarce.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to make the game playability rich in change by making it possible to change the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 23rd gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
First special role (for example, BB1 in another example of gameplay (No. 5)), second special role (for example, BB3 in another example of playability (No. 5)), first predetermined role (for example, game). Pushing order small winning combination 1, 3, 5 in another example of sex (No. 5) and second predetermined winning combination (for example, pushing order small winning combination 2, 4, 6 in another example of gameplay (No. 5)) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations including
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variable display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
When the combination of the first special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 in another example (No. 5) of the game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB1 state in the example (No. 5), and
When the combination of the second special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB3 in another example of the game property (No. 5)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The second special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB3 state in the example (No. 5), and
It is provided with an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
When the first special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continues the first special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB1 flags in another example of playability (No. 5)).
When the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB3 flags in another example of playability (No. 5)).
When the internal winning combination determining means is neither in the first special permission state nor in the second special permission state, each of the first special combination and the second special combination overlaps with the other internal winning combination. It can be decided as an internal winning role without doing
The stop control means
In a game in which the first special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and in a game in which another internal winning combination is not determined in the first special permission state, when the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate. It is possible to display the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means.
In a game in which the second special winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and in a game in which another internal winning combination is not determined in the second special permission state, when the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate. It is possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means.
In the first special permission state, when the first predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game values are displayed on the symbol display means regardless of the order of the player's stop operations. Display the combination of predetermined symbols to which is given,
In the first special permission state, when the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means does not display the combination of the predetermined symbols regardless of the order of the stop operation of the player.
In the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the order of the stop operations of the player is appropriate, the symbol display means is made to display the combination of the predetermined symbols. On the other hand, if the player's stop operation order is not appropriate, the symbol display means is not displayed with the combination of the predetermined symbols.
In the second special permission state, when the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the order of the stop operations of the player is appropriate, the symbol display means is made to display the combination of the predetermined symbols. On the other hand, if the player's stop operation order is not appropriate, the symbol display means is not displayed with the combination of the predetermined symbols.
When a specific advantageous condition is satisfied, the advantageous state control means can set the advantageous state at least for a specific period in the second special permission state.
In the advantageous state, when either the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the player's stop operation for displaying the combination of the predetermined symbols on the symbol display means is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the order is notified.

The means for determining the internal winning combination is
The first special combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a first probability (for example, 1/100).
The second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a second probability (for example, 1/450) lower than the first probability.
The probability that another internal winning combination is not determined in the first special permission state (for example, 1/4000) is higher than the probability that another internal winning combination is not determined in the second special permission state (for example, 1/65536). A gaming machine characterized by being expensive.

The timing of the stop operation of the player who can display the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means is the timing of the player who can display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized in that it does not overlap with the timing of the stop operation.

In a game in which the first special role or the second special role is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to notify that either the first special role or the second special role has been determined as the internal winning combination. However, a predetermined notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a bonus winning notification) that does not enable the notification of the type, and
In the first special permission state, it is possible to notify the symbol display means that the combination of the first special symbols is permitted to be displayed, and in the second special permission state, the symbol display means is described. Further, a specific notification executing means (for example, display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification (for example, bonus type notification) that enables notification that the combination of the second special symbols is permitted to be displayed. A game machine characterized by being equipped.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first special combination or the second special combination is won, another internal winning combination is determined in the game or in the first special permission state or the second special permission state after the winning. The combination of the first special symbol or the combination of the second special symbol cannot be displayed unless the game is played (so-called lost). Further, in the first special permission state, when the first predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the push order, and when the second predetermined combination is won, the predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the push order. Not granted. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the push order is correct, and a predetermined number of games are given if the push order is incorrect. No value is given. Then, at least in the specific period of the second special permission state, it is possible to control the player to an advantageous state in which the information on the stop operation of the player is notified.

That is, if the first special combination is won and the combination of the first special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the first special permission state ends. The profit does not fluctuate, and while the player can receive a certain amount of profit, the profit does not increase dramatically, so even if it becomes advantageous, the amount of increase in the game value is shown. The slope value is relatively low. On the other hand, if the second special combination is won and the combination of the second special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the second special permission state ends. The profit will fluctuate depending on the situation, and the player may suffer more disadvantages than the first special permission state. On the other hand, if the profit is in an advantageous state, the profit will increase dramatically. The slope value indicating the amount of increase in value is relatively high. Therefore, by making the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in variation.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the winning probability of the first special combination is made higher than the winning probability of the second special combination, and the probability that the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state is the second. In the special permission state, the probability that the combination of the second special symbols can be displayed may be higher than the probability. That is, the first special permission state may be set to a state in which it is easier to shift and end than the second special permission state, and the second special permission state may be set to a state in which it is harder to shift and end than the first special permission state. In this way, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the combination of the first special symbol related to the first special role and the combination of the second special symbol related to the second special role cannot be aimed at the same time when the player pushes the ball. It may be configured to be arranged at intervals. In this way, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first special role or the second special role is won, the fact that one of them is won is notified, but the type is not notified, and the first special permission state and the first special permission state and In the second special permission state, the type may be notified. In this way, it is possible to notify the information desired by the player while making the game playability more varied.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 24th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A first special role (eg, BB1 in another example of playability (No. 6)), a second special role (eg, BB2 in another example of playability (No. 6)), and a specific role (eg, playability). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including "F_lip B" in another example (No. 6), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variable display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
When the combination of the first special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 in another example of the game property (No. 6)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB1 state in the example (No. 6), and
When the combination of the second special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB2 in another example of the game property (No. 6)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The second special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB2 state in the example (No. 6), and
It is provided with an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
When the first special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB1 flags in another example of playability (No. 6)).
When the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB2 flags in another example of playability (No. 6)).
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. It is possible to determine as a combination, and when the bet game value is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
The stop control means
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the case of the first special permission state, the combination of the specific symbols with the symbol display means (for example, the chance eye in another example of game playability (No. 6)). ) Is not displayed, and in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
The advantageous state control means is
The advantage when the bet game value is the first amount, at least when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. It is possible to decide whether or not to give a state,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to impart the advantageous state.

The stop control means
When the bet game value is the first amount, in the case of the first special permission state, it is possible to make the symbol display means display the combination of the first special symbols, and the second In the case of the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the bet game value is the second amount, in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means, and the first A gaming machine characterized in that it is not possible to display the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means in the case of a special permission state.

The internal winning combination determining means further includes a first predetermined combination (for example, push order bell A in another example of playability (No. 6)) and a second predetermined combination (for example, another example of playability (No. 6)). The push order bell B) in can be determined as the internal winning role,
The stop control means
When the first predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, if the player's stop operation mode is appropriate, the symbol display means is displayed with a combination of predetermined symbols to which a predetermined number of game values are given. If the mode of the player's stop operation is not appropriate, the symbol display means is not displayed with the combination of the predetermined symbols.
When the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the bet game value is the first amount and is in the first special permission state, regardless of the mode of the player's stop operation. Instead, when the symbol display means displays the combination of the predetermined symbols and the bet game value is the first amount and is in the second special permission state, and the bet game value is the second. In the case of the amount of, if the mode of the player's stop operation is appropriate, the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed, while if the mode of the player's stop operation is not appropriate, the symbol display means is described. Without displaying the combination of predetermined symbols
In the advantageous state, the gaming machine is characterized in that information indicating the mode of the player's stop operation for displaying the combination of the predetermined symbols on the symbol display means is notified.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the bet game value is the first amount, the first special role can be won, but the second special role cannot be won. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount, the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. Further, when a specific combination is won, the combination of specific symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state, and the combination of specific symbols can be displayed in the second special permission state. Then, when the bet game value is the first amount, whether or not to give an advantageous state when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed. Is decidable, and when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the bet game value is the first amount, the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed, but the combination of the second special symbols cannot be displayed. Further, when the bet game value is the second quantity, the combination of the second special symbols may be displayed, but the combination of the first special symbols may not be displayed.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, as a state in which the game is performed, for example, a state in which the game is played in the first special permission state in which the first amount of the game value is bet, and the second special permission state. A state in which a first amount of game value is bet and a game is played, a state in which a second amount of game value is bet and a game is played in a first special permission state, and a second special permission state. It is possible to create a plurality of states, that is, a state in which a second amount of game value is bet and a game is played.

Then, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, in the second special permission state, the state in which the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played is set as the state in which the granting of the advantageous state is given preferential treatment. The state in which the game value of 2 is bet and the game is played is defined as the state in which the advantageous state is not given. That is, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player depending on which amount of the game value is bet and which special role is won in relation to the granting of the advantageous state. Therefore, by making the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in variation.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the answer is correct, regardless of which state the player is in, and the push order is irregular. If the answer is correct, a predetermined number of game values will not be given, and if the second predetermined combination is won, the game will be played with the first amount of game value bet in the first special permission state. For example, a predetermined number of game values may be given regardless of the push order, while in other states, the same control as in the first predetermined combination may be performed. In this way, it is possible to make the state in which the first special permission state is bet and the game is played in the first amount of the game value a state in which the granting of the game value is given preferential treatment at the time of winning the predetermined combination. Therefore, the playability can be made more varied.

[Game machine of invention 1 according to a detailed example]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the player shifts to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, while when a predetermined disadvantage condition is satisfied, the conventional gaming machine has a predetermined state which shifts to a disadvantageous state which is disadvantageous to the player. It is known that by repeating the transition from the predetermined state to the advantageous state without shifting to, the advantageous state for the player can be continued (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167197). ).

According to such a gaming machine, for example, the predetermined state and the advantageous state function as a series of advantageous sections (gaming period advantageous for the player), and the interest of the game is determined by the degree of continuation of the series of advantageous sections. Is becoming fluctuating.

By the way, in recent years, in such a gaming machine, in order to prevent the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high, when the duration of a series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined upper limit (limit), a series of It has been proposed to install a function (limit function) for forcibly ending the advantageous section.

However, when a gaming machine as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167197 is equipped with such a limit function, the predetermined state is also included in a series of advantageous sections, so that the game in the predetermined state is included. When the period becomes long, the duration of a series of advantageous sections is exhausted in a state where the degree of advantage is lower than that in the above-mentioned advantageous state, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even when the duration of a series of advantageous sections is limited, the player can play the game in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decline in the interest of the game.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, and a specific state (for example, 32 games) in which it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the advantageous state ends. Heaven mode), a predetermined state (for example, end mode) in which it is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state again within the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, the advantageous state, the specific state, and the above. A gaming machine provided with a state control means (for example, a pseudo bonus transition lottery, a mode transition lottery, and a main CPU 101 that performs limit processing) for transition control between an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) different from a predetermined state. And
The state control means shifts to the initial state when a specific limiting condition (for example, an operating condition for limit processing) is satisfied at least in the advantageous state and the specific state.
When it is determined by the state control means that the specific state is controlled after the end of the advantageous state, a period shortening means (for example, a ceiling shortening lottery) capable of determining whether or not to shorten the predetermined period is performed. A gaming machine characterized by having a main CPU 101).

Whether to grant the right to continue the advantageous state (for example, 1G continuous stock) regardless of whether or not the state control means determines that the specific state is controlled after the end of the advantageous state. Further equipped with a right granting means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs 1G continuous lottery) capable of determining whether or not to use it.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the state control means controls the advantageous state again when the right is granted by the right granting means when the advantageous state ends.

The advantageous state, the specific state, and the predetermined state are configured to be controllably configured as a series of advantageous sections.
The specific limiting condition is when the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. ), Or when the amount of game value given in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed. ) Shall be configured to be feasible.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, the period may be further shortened, and thus a series of advantageous states. Even when the duration of the section is limited, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest of the game by allowing the player to play the game in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, even if it is not determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, the advantageous state is started again by granting the right. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, since the continuation of the series of advantageous sections is limited by the continuous gaming period or the amount of the assigned gaming value, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high. However, the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

[Game machine of invention 2 according to a detailed example]
It is known that a conventional gaming machine can execute a so-called freeze effect, and when the freeze effect is executed, it is possible to grant more notification rights than when the freeze effect is not executed (). For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-57735).

According to such a gaming machine, since the duration of an advantageous section (for example, AT) in which advantageous notification can be performed for the player is determined by the notification right, whether or not such a freeze effect is executed. Is a matter of great interest to players.

By the way, in recent years, in such a gaming machine, in order to prevent the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high, when the duration of the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit (limit), the advantageous section is forced. It has been proposed to install a function (limit function) to terminate the game.

However, when such a limit function is installed in a gaming machine as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-57735, for example, the limit function is exhibited after the freeze effect is executed many times, which is an advantageous section. When the game is over, there is a problem that the player feels lost and the interest of the game is lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing a decline in the interest of a game while suppressing an excessively high gambling of the game. The purpose is to do.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) that is advantageous for the player, and
A control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, a mode) for varying the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state, and a control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101).
A normal state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, an effect section) according to control information set by the control information setting means, and
The advantageous state and the normal state are set as a series of advantageous sections, and when a specific limiting condition (for example, an operating condition for limit processing) is satisfied in the series of advantageous sections, the initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) is controlled. A gaming machine provided with a possible initial state control means (for example, main CPU 101).
When specific control information (for example, heaven C mode) having a high degree of advantage for the player is set by the control information setting means, it is possible to determine to execute a special effect (for example, a special freeze effect). Equipped with a production determining means (for example, main CPU 101)
The special effect determining means can determine to execute the special effect when the specific control information is first set in the series of advantageous sections, and thereafter in the same series of advantageous sections. A gaming machine characterized in that it is not possible to determine to execute the special effect even when the specific control information is set in.

An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) that is advantageous for the player, and
A control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, a mode) for varying the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state, and a control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101).
A normal state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, an effect section) according to control information set by the control information setting means, and
The advantageous state and the normal state are set as a series of advantageous sections, and when a specific limiting condition (for example, an operating condition for limit processing) is satisfied in the series of advantageous sections, the initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) is controlled. A gaming machine provided with a possible initial state control means (for example, main CPU 101).
When specific control information (for example, heaven C mode) having a high degree of advantage for the player is set by the control information setting means, it is possible to determine to execute a special effect (for example, a special freeze effect). Equipped with a production determining means (for example, main CPU 101)
The control information setting means can set the specific control information triggered by the winning of the specific combination (for example, "determined combination"), and can also set the specific control information by an opportunity other than the winning of the specific combination. Can be set and
The special effect determining means can determine to execute the special effect when the specific control information is first set in the series of advantageous sections, triggered by the winning of the specific combination. In a series of advantageous sections, it is not possible to decide to execute the special effect even when the specific control information is set after the winning of the specific combination.
The winning of the specific combination is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an opportunity to determine that it is controlled to the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the duration of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period. Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information having a high degree of advantage for the player is set a plurality of times, it is controlled so that the special effect is not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the duration of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period. In addition, within a series of advantageous sections, it is determined that the control is performed in an advantageous state, triggered by the winning of a specific combination, and control information having a high degree of advantage for the player may be set. Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs a plurality of times, it is controlled so that the special effect is not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

[Amusement machine of Inventions 3 to 6 according to a detailed example]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a specific condition is satisfied during a carry-over state of a special combination (for example, a bonus combination), the player shifts to an advantageous state (for example, an ART state), which is advantageous to the player. It is known that the game value can be increased in the above (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-73810).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a device is made to further diversify the mode of giving an advantageous state. However, the more such measures are taken, the greater the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of an advantageous state, and it is necessary to take this point into consideration.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and is a gaming machine capable of diversifying its game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of an advantageous state. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
When the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the main performing the winning check / medal payout process). CPU101) and
A gaming machine including an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
Secondary information (for example, sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section) can be determined according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and two according to the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means. Secondary information determining means capable of determining the next information (for example, sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section),
An advantageous state granting determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a pseudo-bonus transition lottery) that can determine whether or not to grant the advantageous state according to the secondary information determined by the secondary information determining means. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped.

A first special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a first special gaming state (for example, a 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A second special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a second special gaming state (for example, a 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the first special symbol until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state (eg, between the 3BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
When the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the second special symbol until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state (eg, between the 2BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. It is possible to determine as a combination, and when the bet game value is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When the specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control means is a combination of a predetermined symbol with the symbol display means (for example, in the case of the first special permission state). , "Right-up lip"), and in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") on the symbol display means.
The secondary information determining means differs in secondary information (for example, when the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means and when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means). The gaming machine according to the above, wherein "communication lip 1" or "communication lip 2") can be determined.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation regarding the granting of an advantageous state not only when the internal winning combination is determined but also when the combination of symbols is displayed. The playability can be diversified.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the combination of the displayed symbols are both managed as common secondary information, which is advantageous. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of the state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to change the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in the state. It is possible to further diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of an advantageous state.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
When the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the main performing the winning check / medal payout process). CPU101) and
A gaming machine including an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
A first special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a first special gaming state (for example, a 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A second special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a second special gaming state (for example, a 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the first special symbol until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state (eg, between the 3BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
When the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the second special symbol until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state (eg, between the 2BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. It is possible to determine as a combination, and when the bet game value is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When the specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control means is a combination of a predetermined symbol with the symbol display means (for example, in the case of the first special permission state). , "Right-up lip"), and in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") on the symbol display means.
The advantageous state control means determines whether or not to give the advantageous state at least when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination and when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Decidable and
The privilege giving means gives the same privilege (for example, replay) in the case where the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means and the case where the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be granted.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is advantageous because the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in the state. It is possible to further diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of the state. In addition, in a game in which a specific role is determined, the same privilege is given regardless of the special permission state, so even if the game playability is changed, the player directly disadvantages. It is possible to prevent it from being covered.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
When the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the main performing the winning check / medal payout process). CPU101) and
A gaming machine including an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
A first special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a first special gaming state (for example, a 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A second special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a second special gaming state (for example, a 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the first special symbol until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state (eg, between the 3BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
When the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the second special symbol until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state (eg, between the 2BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. It is possible to determine as a combination, and when the bet game value is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
The stop control means is described when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is determined as an internal winning combination and is in the second special permission state, and when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode. It is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") on the symbol display means, and when the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, the symbol display means is made to display the combination of the specific symbols. Without making it possible,
The advantageous state control means determines whether or not to give the advantageous state when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized by making it possible.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
When the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the main performing the winning check / medal payout process). CPU101) and
A gaming machine including an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
A first special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a first special gaming state (for example, a 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A second special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a second special gaming state (for example, a 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the first special symbol until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state (eg, between the 3BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
When the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the second special symbol until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state (eg, between the 2BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. It is possible to determine as a combination, and when the bet game value is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
The stop control means is described when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is determined as an internal winning combination and is in the second special permission state, and when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode. It is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") on the symbol display means, and when the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, the symbol display means is made to display the combination of the specific symbols. Without making it possible,
In the advantageous state control means, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to make the degree of advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state different from that when the advantageous state is not provided.

When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control means provides the symbol display means with a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, "upward right lip") in the case of the first special permission state. In the case of the second special permission state, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, the symbol display means is displayed with the combination of the specific symbols, and the stop operation is performed in the specific mode. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the symbol display means displays a combination of the predetermined symbols when the symbol is not displayed.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state even if the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in and the mode of the player's stop operation. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of an advantageous state.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
When the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the main performing the winning check / medal payout process). CPU101) and
A gaming machine including an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
A first special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a first special gaming state (for example, a 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A second special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a second special gaming state (for example, a 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the first special symbol until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state (eg, between the 3BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
When the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the second special symbol until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state (eg, between the 2BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. It is possible to determine as a combination, and when the bet game value is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When the specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control means is a combination of a predetermined symbol with the symbol display means (for example, in the case of the first special permission state). , "Right-up lip"), and in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") on the symbol display means.
The advantageous state control means is
When the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, it is controlled to the first grant state (for example, "stable state").
When the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, it is controlled to the second grant state (for example, "rough wave state").
Continue the controlled grant state until a predetermined termination condition is met (eg, until a pseudo-bonus transition is determined).
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not to grant the advantageous state according to a controlled granting state.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the predetermined termination condition is satisfied when it is determined to impart the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the stop display mode can be changed even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in, and this is an advantageous state. Since it is possible to change the granting state of the pachinko machine, it is possible to diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of the advantageous state.

[Amusement machines of Inventions 7 to 12 according to a detailed example]
In the conventional gaming machine, a normal section and an advantageous section can be set as a state in which the game is played, the effect state is set to the AT state (advantageous state) in the advantageous section, and the AT state is set at the end of the advantageous section. In some cases, it is known that the AT state can be forcibly terminated by the initialization process even if the predetermined termination condition for the AT state is not satisfied (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185099). See Gazette).

By the way, with such a gaming machine, although it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high, the advantageous state suddenly ends in the middle of the process, so that the player feels distrust or loss. There was a problem that it may reduce the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that takes into consideration the emotions of the player while suppressing excessively high gambling. To do.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the said Regardless of which of the specific states, the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state, and
When the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the special limit processing (game number) is executed). In the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, a second regulating means (for example, a special limit process (number of games)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a main CPU 101).

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific period is set shorter than the predetermined period according to the sustainability period of the advantageous state (for example, "55 games").

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the amount of game value given in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), the said With the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of payouts)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state regardless of the advantageous state or the specific state. ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. In the case of the advantageous state, the second regulating means (for example, special limit processing (payout)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state when shifting to the specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a main CPU 101) that performs a number).

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific amount is set to be smaller than the predetermined amount according to the amount of game value that can be imparted in the advantageous state (for example, "275 sheets").

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game granted when the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period or in the series of advantageous sections. When the value amount reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantageous sections When the amount of game value given in the section becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount, and if it is in an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections is terminated when shifting to the specific state.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the sustainable period of the advantageous state or the amount of game value that can be granted, so that while considering the emotions of the player, It is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely regulated.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the said Regardless of which of the specific states, the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state, and
When the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the special limit processing (game number) is executed). If it is not the advantageous state, the advantageous state is shifted to the advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state is completed and the specific state is shifted, the series of advantageous sections are terminated and the initial state is controlled. A gaming machine provided with two regulatory means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs special limit processing (number of games)).

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific period is set shorter than the predetermined period according to the sustainability period of the advantageous state (for example, "55 games").

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the amount of game value given in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), the said With the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of payouts)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state regardless of the advantageous state or the specific state. ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. When), if it is not the advantageous state, it shifts to the advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to the specific state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated and the initial state is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a second regulating means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs special limit processing (number of payouts)).

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific amount is set to be smaller than the predetermined amount according to the amount of game value that can be imparted in the advantageous state (for example, "275 sheets").

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game granted when the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period or in the series of advantageous sections. When the value amount reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantageous sections When the amount of game value given in the section becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount, if it is not in an advantageous state, it shifts to an advantageous state, and when the transferred advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state. , I am trying to end a series of advantageous sections.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it in. Further, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if it is not in an advantageous state, it is shifted to an advantageous state and then ended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the sustainable period of the advantageous state or the amount of game value that can be granted, so that while considering the emotions of the player, It is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely regulated.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the said Regardless of which of the specific states, the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state, and
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the special limit process (game number) is executed). In the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, a second regulating means (for example, a special limit process (number of games)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state is performed. Main CPU101) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A special period shorter than the specific period can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes the set special period (for example, (When the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the quasi-limit process (number of games) is executed), the third is to suppress the granting of the right by the right granting means in the series of advantageous sections thereafter. A gaming machine provided with a regulating means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs semi-limit processing (number of games)).

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the amount of game value given in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), the said With the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of payouts)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state regardless of the advantageous state or the specific state. ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. In the case of the advantageous state, when the state shifts to the specific state, the second restricting means (for example, special limit processing (game)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state. The main CPU 101) that performs the number) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A special amount smaller than the specific amount can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and the game value granted in the series of advantageous sections becomes the special amount set. When (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the right is granted by the right granting means in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. A gaming machine provided with a third regulating means for suppressing (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs quasi-limit processing (number of payouts)).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game granted when the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period or in the series of advantageous sections. When the value amount reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantageous sections When the amount of game value given in the section becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount, and if it is in an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections is terminated when shifting to the specific state.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights, but the gaming period in a series of advantageous sections is shorter than the specific period, depending on the number of granted rights. When the set special period is reached, or when the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous sections is less than the specific amount and becomes the special amount set according to the number of rights granted, thereafter. Granting of rights is suppressed in a series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes the first amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes the value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed). , The main CPU 101 that performs the first regulating means (for example, the normal limit processing (number of payouts)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state regardless of the advantageous state or the specific state. )When,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a second amount smaller than the first amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is executed as a special limit process (payout number)). When the value is reached), when the advantageous state is reached, the second regulatory means (for example, special) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling to the initial state when shifting to the specific state. Main CPU 101) that performs limit processing (number of games) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A third amount smaller than the second amount can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and the game value amount granted in the series of advantageous sections is set. When the amount reaches 3 (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the right is granted by the right granting means in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. 3rd regulatory means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs quasi-limit processing (number of payouts)) and
A first counting means (for example, an advantageous section payout number counter) for counting the first amount, and
A second counting means (for example, a control payout number counter) for counting the second amount and the third amount is provided.
When a specific combination (for example, "pushing order bell A") is won, a predetermined amount (for example, 8 cards) of game value is given when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the correct pressing order). , The predetermined amount of game value is not given unless the stop operation is performed in the specific mode.
The second counting means is characterized in that when the specific combination is won, counting is performed on the assumption that the predetermined amount of game value is given regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the specific mode. A game machine to play.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and when the game value amount given in this series of advantageous sections becomes the first amount, this series of advantageous sections. Is forcibly terminated, but when the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a second amount less than the first amount, if it is in an advantageous state, it becomes a specific state. At the time of transition, a series of advantageous sections are terminated.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted right, but the game value granted in the series of advantageous sections is smaller than the second amount and is granted. When the third amount is set according to the number of rights, the granting of rights is suppressed in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least in counting the second amount and the third amount, it should be originally given due to, for example, an operation error of the player or ignoring the instruction. Even if there is a difference between the existing game value amount and the actually granted game value amount, the difference is not taken into consideration and the count is based on the game value amount that was originally supposed to be given. Is supposed to be done. As a result, a series of advantageous sections may be extended more than necessary due to the actions of such a player, and unfairness may occur between the player who has performed such an action and the player who has not performed such an action. Since it is possible to prevent it from being stored, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the said Regardless of which of the specific states, the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state, and
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the special limit process (game number) is executed). In the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, a second regulating means (for example, a special limit process (number of games)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state is performed. Main CPU101) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A special period shorter than the specific period can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes the set special period (for example, (When the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the quasi-limit process (number of games) is executed), the third is to suppress the granting of the right by the right granting means in the series of advantageous sections thereafter. It is equipped with a regulating means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs quasi-limit processing (number of games)).
When winning in the specific state, there is a definite role (for example, "confirmed cherry") in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed.
When the winning combination is won, a combination of special symbols (for example, "fixed cherry lip") can be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, other than the first right stop). When the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, the first right stop), the combination of the special symbols is not displayed, and the combination of the predetermined symbols (for example, "middle lip") is displayed. Configured to be displayed,
The combination of the predetermined symbols is a combination of symbols that can be displayed even when a combination other than the fixed combination is won.
When the granting of rights by the rights-granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means, and when the determinant is won, the special notification means (for example, a display device) that notifies the specific mode as a procedure of the stop operation. A gaming machine further provided with a sub CPU 201) for displaying a special notification on the eleven.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the amount of game value given in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), the said With the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of payouts)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state regardless of the advantageous state or the specific state. ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. In the case of the advantageous state, when the state shifts to the specific state, the second restricting means (for example, special limit processing (game)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state. The main CPU 101) that performs the number) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A special amount smaller than the specific amount can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and the game value granted in the series of advantageous sections becomes the special amount set. When (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the right is granted by the right granting means in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. A third regulating means for suppressing (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs quasi-limit processing (number of payouts)) is provided.
When winning in the specific state, there is a definite role (for example, "confirmed cherry") in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed.
When the winning combination is won, a combination of special symbols (for example, "fixed cherry lip") can be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, other than the first right stop). When the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, the first right stop), the combination of the special symbols is not displayed, and the combination of the predetermined symbols (for example, "middle lip") is displayed. Configured to be displayed,
The combination of the predetermined symbols is a combination of symbols that can be displayed even when a combination other than the fixed combination is won.
When the granting of rights by the rights-granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means, and when the determinant is won, the special notification means (for example, a display device) that notifies the specific mode as a procedure of the stop operation. A gaming machine further provided with a sub CPU 201) for displaying a special notification on the eleven.

When the granting of the right by the right granting means is not suppressed by the third regulating means, and the winning combination is won, the advantageous state is started from the next game.
The gaming machine according to the above-described machine, characterized in that, when the granting of rights by the rights-granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means and the winning combination is won, the advantageous state is started from the current game. ..

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game granted when the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period or in the series of advantageous sections. When the value amount reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantageous sections When the amount of game value given in the section becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount, and if it is in an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections is terminated when shifting to the specific state.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights, but the gaming period in a series of advantageous sections is shorter than the specific period, depending on the number of granted rights. When the set special period is reached, or when the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous sections is less than the specific amount and becomes the special amount set according to the number of rights granted, thereafter. Granting of rights is suppressed in a series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a winning combination is won in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed in a state where the granting of the right is suppressed, a combination of special symbols that can clearly recognize the winning of the fixed combination. Special notification is provided to prevent the display of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the special notification is performed, the advantageous state that was originally supposed to be started from the next game is started from this game. As a result, the player can be made to perform the stop operation according to the special notification in a natural flow, so that even when such a special notification is performed, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable. it can.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the said Regardless of which of the specific states, the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state, and
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the special limit process (game number) is executed). In the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, a second regulating means (for example, a special limit process (number of games)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state is performed. Main CPU101) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A special period shorter than the specific period can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes the set special period (for example, (When the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the quasi-limit process (number of games) is executed), the third is to suppress the granting of the right by the right granting means in the series of advantageous sections thereafter. It is equipped with a regulating means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs quasi-limit processing (number of games)).
When winning in the specific state, there is a definite role (for example, "confirmed cherry") in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed.
When the winning combination is won, a combination of special symbols (for example, "fixed cherry lip") can be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, other than the first right stop). When the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, the first right stop), the combination of the special symbols is not displayed, and the combination of the predetermined symbols (for example, "middle lip") is displayed. Configured to be displayed,
The combination of the predetermined symbols is a combination of symbols that can be displayed even when a combination other than the fixed combination is won.
When the granting of the right by the right-granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means, and when the determinant is won, the special notifying means (for example, a display device) that notifies the specific mode as a procedure of the stop operation. Sub CPU 201) that displays special notification on 11 and
When the granting of rights by the rights granting means is not suppressed by the third regulatory means, and when the combination of the special symbols is displayed, it is possible to perform special notification (for example, the popular power of the special winning sound). When the granting of the right by the right-granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means, and the combination of the special symbols is displayed, the special notification means that does not enable the special notification ( For example, a gaming machine further provided with a sub CPU201) that outputs a special winning sound from the speaker group 84.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the amount of game value given in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), the said With the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of payouts)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state regardless of the advantageous state or the specific state. ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. In the case of the advantageous state, when the state shifts to the specific state, the second restricting means (for example, special limit processing (game)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state. The main CPU 101) that performs the number) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A special amount smaller than the specific amount can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and the game value granted in the series of advantageous sections becomes the special amount set. When (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the right is granted by the right granting means in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. A third regulating means for suppressing (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs quasi-limit processing (number of payouts)) is provided.
When winning in the specific state, there is a definite role (for example, "confirmed cherry") in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed.
When the winning combination is won, a combination of special symbols (for example, "fixed cherry lip") can be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, other than the first right stop). When the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, the first right stop), the combination of the special symbols is not displayed, and the combination of the predetermined symbols (for example, "middle lip") is displayed. Configured to be displayed,
The combination of the predetermined symbols is a combination of symbols that can be displayed even when a combination other than the fixed combination is won.
When the granting of the right by the right-granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means, and when the determinant is won, the special notifying means (for example, a display device) that notifies the specific mode as a procedure of the stop operation. Sub CPU 201) that displays special notification on 11 and
When the granting of rights by the rights granting means is not suppressed by the third regulatory means, and when the combination of the special symbols is displayed, it is possible to perform special notification (for example, the popular power of the special winning sound). When the granting of the right by the right-granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means, and the combination of the special symbols is displayed, the special notification means that does not enable the special notification ( For example, a gaming machine further provided with a sub CPU201) that outputs a special winning sound from the speaker group 84.

When the special notification means wins the definite combination, the special notification means does not notify the specific mode, and when the combination of the special symbols is displayed, the special notification means. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the special notification is not performed when the specific mode is notified by the special notification means and the combination of the special symbols is displayed. ..

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game granted when the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period or in the series of advantageous sections. When the value amount reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantageous sections When the amount of game value given in the section becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount, and if it is in an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections is terminated when shifting to the specific state.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights, but the gaming period in a series of advantageous sections is shorter than the specific period, depending on the number of granted rights. When the set special period is reached, or when the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous sections is less than the specific amount and becomes the special amount set according to the number of rights granted, thereafter. Granting of rights is suppressed in a series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a winning combination is won in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed in a state where the granting of the right is suppressed, a combination of special symbols that can clearly recognize the winning of the fixed combination. Special notification is provided to prevent the display of. In addition, in a state where the granting of rights is not suppressed, it is possible to give a special notification when a combination of special symbols is displayed by winning a fixed combination, while the granting of rights is suppressed. Therefore, when a combination of special symbols is displayed in the winning combination, it is not possible to give a special notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether or not to perform special notification depending on whether or not the winning combination is won, whether or not a combination of special symbols is displayed, and whether or not special notification is performed. I try to decide. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately manage the situation in which the special notification is performed.

[Game machine of invention 13 according to a detailed example]
In the conventional gaming machine, a normal section and an advantageous section can be set as a state in which the game is played, the effect state is set to the AT state (advantageous state) in the advantageous section, and the AT state is set at the end of the advantageous section. In some cases, it is known that the AT state can be forcibly terminated by the initialization process even if the predetermined termination condition for the AT state is not satisfied (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185099). See Gazette).

By the way, with such a gaming machine, although it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high, the advantageous state suddenly ends in the middle of the process, so that the player feels distrust or loss. There was a problem that it may reduce the interest of the game.

In such a gaming machine, for example, a game is enabled only when the gaming value of the first amount (for example, three cards) is bet, or not only the first amount but also the second amount. Various specifications can be adopted for the specifications of the amount of game value to be bet, such as those that enable the game even if the amount of game value (for example, two) is bet. In general, it is more advantageous for the player when more game value is bet. Therefore, for example, the degree of advantage of the advantageous state is set assuming the case where the first amount of game value is bet. That is, in such a case, betting the first amount of the game value and playing the game is the intended game method, but the game should be played by such a game method. It is considered necessary to devise ways to encourage the players.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is emotional to a player who plays a game by a intended game method while suppressing excessively high gambling. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of encouraging a player who does not play a game by the planned game method to play the game by the planned game method by taking consideration.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation of shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different from each other. It has an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section), the advantageous state and the specific state can be controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the bet game value is a first amount (for example, three cards). It is a gaming machine capable of playing a game in both the case where the amount is 2 and the case where the amount is a second amount (for example, two pieces) smaller than the first amount.
In both cases where the bet game value is the first amount and the second amount, when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a predetermined period (for example, the advantageous section). When the value of the game number counter reaches the value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed), the series of advantageous sections is terminated regardless of whether the advantageous state or the specific state is reached. The first regulating means for controlling the initial state (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of games)) and
When the bet game value is the first amount, when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is special limit processing. When (the number of games) reaches a value to be executed), in the case of the advantageous state, when the state shifts to the specific state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated and the initial state is controlled. A gaming machine provided with two regulatory means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs special limit processing (number of games)).

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation of shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different from each other. It has an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section), the advantageous state and the specific state can be controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the bet game value is a first amount (for example, three cards). It is a gaming machine capable of playing a game in both the case where the amount is 2 and the case where the amount is a second amount (for example, two pieces) smaller than the first amount.
When the bet game value is the predetermined amount in both the case where the bet game value is the first amount and the case where the bet game value is the second amount (the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a predetermined amount ( For example, when the value of the advantageous section payout counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), the series of advantageous sections may be in either the advantageous state or the specific state. (For example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of payouts)) and the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101) that terminates
When the bet game value is the first amount, when the game value given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control). Is the value at which the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed), and when the state is in the advantageous state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated and the initial state is set when the state shifts to the specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a second regulating means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs special limit processing (number of games)).

At least in the series of advantageous sections, the case where the second amount of game value is bet and the game is played is better than the case where the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played. The gaming machine described above, which is characterized by being disadvantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and regardless of the amount of the game value bet and the game is played, the advantageous state is in the series of advantageous sections. When the gaming period reaches a predetermined period, or when the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated. In addition, when the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played, when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than a predetermined period, or in this series of advantageous sections. When the amount of game value given becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount, and if it is in an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections are terminated when shifting to the specific state. When the game is played with the game value of 2 being bet, such control is not performed.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first amount of gaming value is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state. , It is possible to end a series of advantageous sections within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said. On the other hand, when a second amount of game value is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state. Since it is possible to make the player aware that the game has not been performed by the specified game method, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game by the intended game method.

In a series of advantageous sections, it is more disadvantageous for the player when the game is played with the second amount of game value bet than when the game is played with the first amount of game value bet. Therefore, by enabling such a warning, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous state, and to play the game in a game method that the player does not intend. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the above.

[Amusement machines of Inventions 14 to 17 according to a detailed example]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the player shifts to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, while when a predetermined disadvantage condition is satisfied, the conventional gaming machine has a predetermined state which shifts to a disadvantageous state which is disadvantageous to the player. It is known that by repeating the transition from the predetermined state to the advantageous state without shifting to, the advantageous state for the player can be continued (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167197). ).

According to such a gaming machine, for example, the predetermined state and the advantageous state function as a series of advantageous sections (gaming period advantageous for the player), and the interest of the game is determined by the degree of continuation of the series of advantageous sections. Is becoming fluctuating.

By the way, in such a gaming machine, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by making the probability of transition to the advantageous state in the predetermined state variable.

However, for example, when the probability of transition to the advantageous state is high, the player's motivation and interest in playing are improved, while when the probability of transition to the advantageous state is low, the player's game is played. There was a problem that motivation and interest were reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining a gaming motivation and a hobby even when the transition probability to an advantageous state fluctuates. And.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, and a specific state (for example, 32 games) in which it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the advantageous state ends. Heaven mode), the first predetermined state (for example, the end mode) in which it is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state again within the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, and after the end of the advantageous state. A state control means (for example, a state control means for transition control between a second predetermined state (for example, heaven preparation mode), which is more advantageous than the first predetermined state, although it is not determined that the advantageous state will be controlled again within the predetermined period. For example, a gaming machine equipped with a main CPU 101) that performs a pseudo bonus transition lottery and a mode transition lottery.
The state control means can control any of the specific state, the first predetermined state, and the second predetermined state when the advantageous state ends.
When the advantageous state is started, notification according to a predetermined mode (for example, lighting of the advantageous section lamp) is started, and the notification is started.
At least within the predetermined period, the notification according to the predetermined mode is continued, and the notification is continued.
When the predetermined period elapses, if the control is performed in the first predetermined state, the notification according to the predetermined mode is terminated, and if the control is performed in the second predetermined state, the notification according to the predetermined mode is issued. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a state notification means (for example, an advantageous section lamp) that can be continued.

The state control means is higher when the advantageous state is controlled from the second predetermined state to the advantageous state and ends, than when the advantageous state is controlled from the first predetermined state to the advantageous state and ends. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that it can be controlled to the specific state with a probability.

An advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, and a first predetermined state (for example, end A mode) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state again after the advantageous state ends is a predetermined probability. A state control means for transition control between a second predetermined state (for example, heaven preparation mode) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state again after the end of the advantageous state is a specific probability higher than the predetermined probability. (For example, a gaming machine provided with a pseudo-bonus transition lottery and a main CPU 101 that performs a mode transition lottery).
The state control means can control to either the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state when the advantageous state ends.
When the advantageous state is started, notification according to a predetermined mode (for example, lighting of the advantageous section lamp) is started, and the notification is started.
At least within a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, the notification in the predetermined mode is continued, and the notification is continued.
When the predetermined period elapses, if the control is performed in the first predetermined state, the notification according to the predetermined mode is terminated, and if the control is performed in the second predetermined state, the notification according to the predetermined mode is issued. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a state notification means (for example, an advantageous section lamp) that can be continued.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the advantageous state ends, a specific state in which it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, and a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends. The first predetermined state in which the control to the advantageous state is not determined again within the period, and the control to the advantageous state again within the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state is not determined, but is more advantageous than the first predetermined state. It is possible to control to any of the second predetermined states.

Then, from the time when the advantageous state is started, the same notification is performed in any state during the predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, and when the predetermined period elapses, the first predetermined state is reached. If so, the notification is terminated, and if it is in the second predetermined state, the notification may be continued. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if the notification continues even after a predetermined period has passed after the end of the advantageous state, if the next advantageous state is started, the state shifts to the specific state after the end. Therefore, even if the player does not shift to a specific state after the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to maintain the motivation and interest in playing the game.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the advantageous state ends, the first predetermined state in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state again is a predetermined probability, and the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state again is higher than the predetermined probability. It is possible to control to any state of the second predetermined state which is a probability, and it is the same regardless of the state from the time when the advantageous state is started to the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state. When the notification is performed and the predetermined period elapses, the notification may be terminated if it is in the first predetermined state, and may be continued if it is in the second predetermined state. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) that is advantageous for the player, and
A control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, a mode) for varying the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state, and a control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101).
A gaming machine including a normal state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, an effect section) according to control information set by the control information setting means.
In the normal state, the first effect means (for example, the bet lamp display unit (BL)) capable of executing the first effect (for example, the bet lamp change effect) with different probabilities according to the control information set by the control information setting means. ))When,
A second effect means (for example, a reel side lamp display unit (for example, a reel side lamp display unit)) capable of executing a second effect (for example, a reel side lamp effect) in a different effect mode depending on the number of times the first effect is executed by the first effect means. SL)), a gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the second effect is an effect performed in a non-gaming state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal state, the first effect is performed with a different probability according to the expected degree of granting the advantageous state, and further, the second effect is performed in a different effect mode depending on the number of times the first effect is executed. Allows to be done. That is, for example, even if the game is not performed from the beginning in the normal state, it may be possible to estimate the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state by using the execution frequency of the first effect and the effect mode of the second effect as clues. It has become. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, since the second effect is performed in the non-gaming state, the effect mode of the second effect can be an effective index for the player who is going to play the game from now on. As a result, it is possible to increase the motivation for playing and improve the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) that is advantageous for the player, and
A control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, a mode) for varying the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state, and a control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101).
A gaming machine including a normal state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, an effect section) according to control information set by the control information setting means.
In the normal state, the specific effect means (for example, the bet lamp display unit (BL)) capable of executing the specific effect (for example, the bet lamp change effect) with different probabilities according to the control information set by the control information setting means. With
The specific effect means is a bet number display means for displaying the number of bets of the game value.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed by changing the display mode of the bet number display means to a display mode different from the usual display mode.

The bet number display means has a plurality of display areas (for example, "BL1" to "BL3") corresponding to the number of bets of the game value, and when the re-game is activated, the display contents of the plurality of display areas are displayed. It is possible to perform a bet effect that changes sequentially,
The above-described game, wherein when the specific effect is executed, when the display contents of the plurality of display areas are sequentially changed in the bet effect, each of them has a display mode different from the usual one. Machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal state, it is possible to perform a specific effect with different probabilities depending on the degree of expectation of granting an advantageous state. That is, there are cases where it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation of granting an advantageous state by using the execution frequency of the specific effect as a clue. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained. Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific effect is performed by changing the display mode of the bet number display. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated production device or the like for performing a specific production, and it is possible to perform the specific production in a natural flow during the game. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that enhances the motivation for playing and the interest in the game with a general-purpose configuration.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a pseudo bet effect is performed when the re-game is activated, but the specific effect is also performed in a manner in line with the flow of such a bet effect. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the motivation for playing and the interest in the game in a more comfortable manner.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) that is advantageous for the player, and
A control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, a mode) for varying the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state, and a control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101).
A gaming machine including a normal state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, an effect section) according to control information set by the control information setting means.
In the normal state, the specific effect means (for example, the bet lamp display unit (BL)) capable of executing the specific effect (for example, the bet lamp change effect) with different probabilities according to the control information set by the control information setting means. With
The specific effect means is a bet number display means for displaying the number of bets of the game value.
The bet number display means has a plurality of display areas (for example, "BL1" to "BL3") corresponding to the number of bets of the game value, and when the re-game is activated, the display contents of the plurality of display areas are displayed. It is possible to perform a bet effect that changes sequentially,
When the specific effect is executed, when the display contents of the plurality of display areas are sequentially changed in the bet effect, each of them is set to a display mode different from the usual one.
If an error occurs even when the specific effect is executed, the display contents of the plurality of display areas are not sequentially changed, and the final display content in the bet effect is different from the normal one. A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed as a display mode.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal state, it is possible to perform a specific effect with different probabilities depending on the degree of expectation of granting an advantageous state. That is, there are cases where it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation of granting an advantageous state by using the execution frequency of the specific effect as a clue. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained. Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific effect is performed by changing the display mode of the bet number display. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated production device or the like for performing a specific production, and it is possible to perform the specific production in a natural flow during the game. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that enhances the motivation for playing and the interest in the game with a general-purpose configuration.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a pseudo bet effect is performed when the re-game is activated, but the specific effect is also performed in a manner in line with the flow of such a bet effect. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the motivation for playing and the interest in the game in a more comfortable manner. Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the specific effect is performed while an error occurs, only the final display content is displayed without following the flow of the bet effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect and prevent the player from making a difference in the information obtained even when an error occurs.

[Game machine of invention 18 according to a detailed example]
In a conventional gaming machine, as a replay combination, for example, a combination of a first replay combination that wins a prize by displaying a combination of symbols composed of replay symbols and a combination of symbols composed of small combination symbols is displayed. A second replaying role is known to be provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-124467).

By the way, in some of such gaming machines, when a player wins a re-gaming combination, it is possible to perform a betting effect in the same manner as during a normal betting operation.

However, in a gaming machine as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-124467, when such a bet effect is performed, for example, a winning combination different from the replaying combination, such as the second replaying combination described above, is awarded. When the stop display mode that can be recognized by the player is displayed, the player can easily recognize that the player has won the re-game combination as in the first re-game combination described above. There is a problem that the player may be confused if the bet effect is performed in the same manner as when the stop display mode is displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from being confused even when having a plurality of stop display modes of a replaying combination. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A re-game operating means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of operating the re-game according to the display mode of the re-game combination stop display, and
A gaming machine provided with a bet effect means (for example, a bet lamp display unit (BL)) capable of performing a bet effect when the re-game is activated.
The stop display mode of the re-game combination includes a first stop display mode (for example, a normal re-game display mode) that makes it easy for the player to recognize that the re-game combination is a prize, and a re-game combination. Is to make the player recognize a second stop display mode (for example, a special re-game display mode) that allows the player to recognize that the winning combination is different, and which combination is winning. A third stop display mode (for example, a special replay display mode), which makes it difficult to play, is included.
At least, the bet effect means can perform a bet effect having a different effect mode depending on whether the first stop display mode is displayed or the third stop display mode is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

The bet effect means differs depending on whether the first stop display mode is displayed, the second stop display mode is displayed, or the third stop display mode is displayed. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible to perform a bet effect in an effect mode.

When a specific re-game combination (for example, "F_confirmed cherry") is won, the first stop display mode is displayed when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined procedure (for example, the first right stop). When the stop operation is performed at a procedure different from the predetermined procedure (for example, other than the first right stop) and at a specific timing (for example, the timing at which the pressing position becomes ○), the second stop display mode is described. Is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed at a procedure different from the predetermined procedure (for example, other than the first right stop) and at a timing different from the specific timing (for example, a timing at which the pressing position ×). Is the gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that it is possible to display the third stop display mode.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the player is made to recognize the first stop display mode that makes it easy for the player to recognize that the winning combination is a winning combination, and which combination is winning. Between the third stop display mode, which makes it difficult, or between the first stop display mode, which makes it easy for the player to recognize that the player has won the re-game combination, and the role different from the re-game combination. Between the second stop display mode that allows the player to recognize that the prize is a prize and the third stop display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize which combination is the prize. It is possible to make the production mode of the bet production different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused even when the player has a plurality of stop display modes of the re-game combination.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific re-game combination is won, any of the first stop display mode, the second stop display mode, and the third stop display mode may be displayed. For example, it is possible to change the game playability depending on the difference in the stop display mode, but even in such a case, it is possible to perform an appropriate bet effect. Furthermore, the playability can be suggested by the bet effect.

[Game machine of invention 19 according to a detailed example]
A conventional gaming machine has a plurality of music patterns having different composition contents of music, and makes it possible to output a music by one selected music pattern in a specific state (for example, a special game state). Is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-142693).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, if an event such as a power failure or an error occurs during a specific state, the output of the music is interrupted. Then, when the event that has occurred is resolved, the output of the music can be restarted from the interrupted point, or can be restarted from the beginning.

However, in any of the restart modes, the player often feels uncomfortable. Therefore, in the music production, when the interruption event occurs and then restarts, further ingenuity is required.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from feeling uncomfortable when resuming after an interruption event occurs in a musical composition. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A music output means (for example, speaker group 84) capable of outputting music in a specific state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) and a music pattern capable of selecting a music pattern output by the music output means from a plurality of music patterns. A gaming machine including a selection means (for example, a sub CPU 201).
The plurality of music patterns include at least a first music pattern composed of a first unique part (for example, an intro part A) and a common part (for example, the music production data 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a)). , A second music pattern composed of the second unique part (for example, the intro part C) and the common part (for example, the music production data 3 shown in FIG. 119 (c)) is included.
The music output means
When the first music pattern is selected, it is possible to repeatedly output the music of the common part after outputting the music of the first unique part.
When the second music pattern is selected, it is possible to repeatedly output the music of the common part after outputting the music of the second unique part.
After any music pattern is selected at a specific timing in the specific state by the music pattern selection means, an interruption event (for example, power failure, error, door opening, etc.) occurs during the specific state. When the output of the music by the music output means is interrupted and the output of the music by the music output means is resumed regardless of which music pattern is selected, the music of the second music pattern is output. A game machine characterized by outputting from the beginning.

The plurality of music patterns notify that the extension of the specific state has been determined.
The first music pattern is a pattern in which the output of music is started from the time when the specific state is started.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the second music pattern is a pattern in which the output of music is started in the middle of the specific state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if only the outflow part is different and it is possible to execute a plurality of music productions in which a common music is output, any music production is interrupted. When resuming after an event occurs, a specific musical composition is restarted from the beginning. That is, the mode is the same when the interruption event occurs and then restarts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort when the music production is restarted after the interruption event occurs.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the musical composition effect is used as an effect of notifying the extension of a specific state. Then, when the interruption event occurs and then restarts, the music production in which the extension of the specific state is notified in the middle is always restarted from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the music production and further reduce the discomfort when the production is resumed.

[Game machine of invention 20 according to one detailed example]
In a conventional game machine, if the bet game value is the first amount, it is possible to determine that a predetermined symbol combination is allowed to be displayed, while a specific symbol combination is displayed. It is not possible to determine that a particular symbol combination is allowed to be displayed, but if the bet game value is a second amount, it is possible to determine that a particular symbol combination is allowed to be displayed. It is known that it is possible to change the game playability according to the amount of the bet game value by not making it possible to determine that the combination of symbols of is allowed to be displayed (for example). , JP-A-2006-230776).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, while it is possible to change the playability, it is necessary to accurately grasp information on the playability such as the current state and the types of combinations of symbols that are allowed to be displayed. Because it becomes difficult, the difficulty of the game becomes high. Therefore, it is desirable that such information be shown to the player as much as possible.

However, for example, a gaming machine equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display can display such information, but a gaming machine not equipped with a display device cannot display such information. In some cases. Further, if such information is displayed on a gaming machine equipped with a display device, the display area of the display device may limit the area that can be used for the effect.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of showing information on game playability in a general-purpose configuration.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

It is a gaming machine that can variablely display a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and plays a game by stopping the variable display of the symbols according to the stop operation of the player.
Stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) capable of accepting the stop operation of the player, and
In the stop operation means, a first state (for example, "at the time of permission to stop") that enables the player to accept the stop operation, and a second state (for example, "for example") that does not allow the player to accept the stop operation. It is provided with a stop state notification means (for example, stop state notification units 117L, 117C, 117R) capable of displaying which state (“other than when stop is permitted”).
The stopped state notification means is a gaming machine capable of suggesting information on game playability by the display mode of the first state and the display mode of the second state.

A display determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process and a reel stop control process) capable of determining a combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed according to the bet game value amount.
The game playability can be changed according to the bet game value amount and the determination result by the display determination means (for example, a 3 bet state between 2BB flags and a 3 bet between 3BB flags). With the main CPU101), which can change the playability depending on the state,
The display determining means
When the bet game value amount is the first amount (for example, 3 cards), it is decided to allow the display of the first special symbol combination (for example, "BB02" which is a combination of symbols related to 3BB). Enable and
Even in a state where the display of the combination of the first special symbols is permitted (for example, between the 3BB flags), in the game in which the bet game value amount is the second amount (for example, two cards), the first 1 It is not possible to decide to allow the display of special symbol combinations,
When the bet game value amount is the second amount, it is possible to determine that the display of the second special symbol combination (for example, "BB01" which is a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is permitted.
Even in a state where the display of the combination of the second special symbols is permitted (for example, between the 2BB flags), the combination of the second special symbols is used in the game in which the bet game value amount is the first amount. It is not possible to decide to allow the display of
The game property changing means is at least when the display of the combination of the first special symbols is permitted and the bet game value amount is the first amount, and when the second special symbol It is possible to change the game playability between when the combination display is permitted and the bet game value amount is the first amount.
The stop state notification means is
According to the display mode of the first state, if the combination of the first special symbol or the combination of the second special symbol can be displayed in this game, it is possible to suggest that fact.
Depending on the display mode of the second state, it is possible to suggest that the display of the combination of the first special symbols is permitted or the display of the combination of the second special symbols is permitted. The gaming machine according to the above.

It is a gaming machine that can variablely display a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and plays a game by stopping the variable display of the symbols according to the stop operation of the player.
Stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) capable of accepting the stop operation of the player, and
In the stop operation means, a first state (for example, "at the time of permission to stop") that enables the player to accept the stop operation, and a second state (for example, "for example") that does not allow the player to accept the stop operation. A stop state notification means (for example, stop state notification units 117L, 117C, 117R) capable of displaying which state (“other than when stop permission”) is in the state.
A display determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process and a reel stop control process) that can determine a combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed according to a game state (for example, the game state shown in FIG. 120). Prepare,
The stop state notification means is
The display mode of the first state can suggest the determination result by the display determination means.
A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming state can be suggested by the display mode of the second state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, since it is possible to suggest information on game playability by using a notification means for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted, in order to notify information on game playability. There is no need to provide a means for notifying. Therefore, information on game playability can be shown in a general-purpose configuration.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to allow the display of any kind of special symbol combination according to the bet game value amount. In addition, even if the display of any combination of special symbols is already permitted, whether or not the combination of the special symbols is displayed changes according to the bet game value amount. It has become. In addition, it is possible to change the game playability according to the bet game value amount and which type of special symbol combination is permitted to be displayed. Then, by using a notification means for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted, if there is a combination of special symbols that are permitted to be displayed in this game, that fact is notified and eventually. It is also notified that the display of the combination of special symbols of the type of is permitted. Therefore, even when the game playability is complicated, information on the game playability can be appropriately notified.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it may be possible to suggest a combination of the gaming state and the symbols permitted to be displayed by using the notification means for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted. Thereby, the information desired by the player can be appropriately notified in a general-purpose configuration.

[Game machines of inventions 1 to 4 in this example]
Conventionally, a game in which an AT rank promotion judgment is made based on an internal winning combination in AT (pseudo-bonus), the AT rank is promoted according to the judgment result, and AT is continued until the difference number according to the AT rank is obtained. Machines are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-12127).

In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-12127, when either the first combination or the second combination, which has different information on whether or not to promote the AT rank, is determined as the internal winning combination, completely the same stop control is performed. A gaming machine that makes it impossible to determine whether or not the AT rank is promoted from the combination of displayed symbols is disclosed.

However, in a game-like gaming machine in which the promotion determination of AT rank is performed based on the internal winning combination, such as the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-12127, further improvement is made in order to improve the gaming interest. There is room for.

In recent years, game-type gaming machines that perform promotion judgments with different success rates multiple times have been known, but they are merely that and there is still room for further improvement.

An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following first configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A privilege game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when a privilege (for example, AT) is given, and
The main that executes the determination means (for example, stone point lottery) that can make the determination related to the granting of the privilege by using at least the first information (for example, 1st stone) and the second information (for example, 2nd stone). CPU101) and
Using the first expected value (for example, the level of the 1st stone) or the second information that gives a favorable result (for example, stone point) to the player when the determination is made using the first information. Information control means (for example, step S1100, step S1140) capable of controlling a second expected value (for example, the level of the 2nd stone) in which a result (for example, a stone point) advantageous to the player is obtained when the determination is made. , Step S1200, step S1250, etc., and the main CPU 101) that executes stone-level update processing.
A plurality of games that can be updated in the direction of increasing the first expected value (for example, the level of the 1st stone) or the second expected value (for example, the level of the 2nd stone) by the information control means are a plurality of games (for example, 20 of the pseudo bonus). A specific game state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a stone level promotion lottery process) that can control a specific game state executed over a game), and
With
The determination means
The first determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the stone point lottery of the 1st stone in the 21st game) that makes the first determination related to the granting of the privilege using the first information (for example, the 1st stone), and the above. Having a second determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes a stone point lottery for the 2nd stone in the 22nd game) that makes a second determination related to the granting of the privilege using the second information (for example, the 2nd stone). It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the determination related to the granting of the privilege is performed using at least the first information (for example, the 1st stone) and the second information (for example, the 2nd stone). In the specific game state, the first expected value and the second information, which give a favorable result (for example, stone point) to the player when the judgment is made using the first information over a plurality of games, are used. When the determination is made, the control is executed to update the second expected value in which a favorable result (for example, stone point) is obtained for the player. That is, in the specific game state, control that can be updated in the direction of increasing the first expected value and the second expected value is executed over a plurality of games. In this way, by making it possible to gradually increase the first expected value and the second expected value over a plurality of games, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and improve the game interest. Is possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is provided, and the result display can be derived by stopping the variable display after performing the variable display by the variable display means. It is a gaming machine that can give game value according to the display.
A combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing an internal lottery) is provided.
The information control means
It is characterized in that, in the specific gaming state, it is possible to update in the direction of increasing the first expected value or the second expected value according to the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

The gaming machine of the above (2) is, for example, a pachislot machine, and in a plurality of games in a specific gaming state, the first expected value or the second expected value is increased according to the internal winning combination. Therefore, it is possible to provide an interesting game property in which the first expected value and the second expected value are gradually increased over a plurality of games by a stop operation by the player.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A stop control means for stopping the variable display of the variable display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch board 80). (For example, the main CPU 101 that executes the reel stop control process) and
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and
A privilege game granting means (for example, a pseudo bonus) capable of granting a right to execute a privilege game related to the permission of notification of a stop operation mode by the notification means according to at least the result of the first determination and the result of the second determination. And the main CPU 101) that executes AT
To be equipped.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the right to execute the privilege game related to the permission of the notification of the stop operation mode by the notification means is granted according to the result of the first determination and the result of the second determination. That is, by gradually increasing the first expected value and the second expected value over a plurality of games, the expected value for obtaining a favorable result for the player in the first determination and the second determination is increased, so that the game interest is enhanced. It becomes possible.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following second configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A privilege game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when a privilege (for example, AT) is given, and
The main that executes the determination means (for example, stone point lottery) that can make the determination related to the granting of the privilege by using at least the first information (for example, 1st stone) and the second information (for example, 2nd stone). CPU101) and
Using the first expected value (for example, the level of the 1st stone) or the second information that gives a favorable result (for example, stone point) to the player when the determination is made using the first information. Information control means (for example, step S1100, step S1140) capable of controlling a second expected value (for example, the level of the 2nd stone) in which a result (for example, a stone point) advantageous to the player is obtained when the determination is made. , Step S1200, step S1250, etc., and the main CPU 101) that executes stone-level update processing.
A plurality of games that can be updated in the direction of increasing the first expected value (for example, the level of the 1st stone) or the second expected value (for example, the level of the 2nd stone) by the information control means are a plurality of games (for example, 20 of the pseudo bonus). A specific game state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a stone level promotion lottery process) that can control a specific game state executed over a game), and
With
The determination means
The first determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the stone point lottery of the 1st stone in the 21st game) that makes the first determination related to the granting of the privilege using the first information (for example, the 1st stone), and the above. It has a second determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes a stone point lottery for the 2nd stone in the 22nd game) that makes a second determination related to the granting of the privilege using the second information (for example, the 2nd stone). Ori,
The information control means
In the game in the specific game state, when the first expected value is updated in the direction of increasing (for example, the stone level of the 1st stone is increased), the game is updated in the direction of increasing the second expected value (for example, the 2nd stone). The stone level of the game is not increased), and when the player does not update in the direction of increasing the first expected value, the game can be updated in the direction of increasing the second expected value. A game machine to be.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the determination related to the granting of the privilege is performed using at least the first information (for example, the 1st stone) and the second information (for example, the 2nd stone). In the specific game state, the first expected value and the second information, which give a favorable result (for example, stone point) to the player when the judgment is made using the first information over a plurality of games, are used. When the determination is made, the control is executed to update the second expected value in which a favorable result (for example, stone point) is obtained for the player. That is, in the specific game state, control that can be updated in the direction of increasing the first expected value and the second expected value is executed over a plurality of games. In this way, by making it possible to gradually increase the first expected value and the second expected value over a plurality of games, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and improve the game interest. Is possible. Moreover, even if it is not updated in the direction of increasing the first expected value, it may be updated in the direction of increasing the second expected value. Therefore, it is necessary to maintain the improvement of the game interest without lowering the game interest in the middle. Is possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is provided, and the result display can be derived by stopping the variable display after performing the variable display by the variable display means. It is a gaming machine that can give game value according to the display.
A combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing an internal lottery) is provided.
The information control means
In the specific gaming state, a normal updating means (for example, a step) capable of updating in a direction of increasing the first expected value or the second expected value according to the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means. In the main CPU 101) that executes the processes of S1020, step S1040, and step S1060, and in the specific game state, the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means is a specific combination (for example, a rare combination), and the normal combination. When both the first expected value and the second expected value are to be updated by the updating means, the special updating means (for example, step) that updates the first expected value or the second expected value in a direction of increasing the first expected value or the second expected value. S1150, step S1190, step S1210, step S200, 1250, step S1260, step S1270, step S1180, step S1200, step S1220 main CPU 101 stone level promotion lottery process step S1270, step S1220 and step S1210) Have,
The special update means
Of the first expected value and the second expected value, the first expected value is configured to be updatable in a direction of preferentially increasing.

The gaming machine of the above (2) is, for example, a pachislot machine, and in a plurality of games in a specific gaming state, the first expected value or the second expected value is increased according to the internal winning combination. Further, in the specific game state, when neither the first expected value nor the second expected value is updated even though the internal winning combination is a specific combination, the direction of increasing the first expected value or the second expected value. Since it is updated to, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that can be given to the player. Moreover, since the first expected value is updated with priority over the second expected value, the expected value can be increased stepwise, and the game can be diversified.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following third configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A privilege game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when a privilege (for example, AT) is given, and
The main that executes the determination means (for example, stone point lottery) that can make the determination related to the granting of the privilege by using at least the first information (for example, 1st stone) and the second information (for example, 2nd stone). CPU101) and
Using the first expected value (for example, the level of the 1st stone) or the second information that gives a favorable result (for example, stone point) to the player when the determination is made using the first information. Information control means (for example, step S1100, step S1140) capable of controlling a second expected value (for example, the level of the 2nd stone) in which a result (for example, a stone point) advantageous to the player is obtained when the determination is made. , Step S1200, step S1250, etc., and the main CPU 101) that executes stone-level update processing.
A plurality of games that can be updated in the direction of increasing the first expected value (for example, the level of the 1st stone) or the second expected value (for example, the level of the 2nd stone) by the information control means are a plurality of games (for example, 20 of the pseudo bonus). A specific game state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a stone level promotion lottery process) that can control a specific game state executed over a game), and
With
The determination means
The first determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the stone point lottery of the 1st stone in the 21st game) that makes the first determination related to the granting of the privilege using the first information (for example, the 1st stone), and the above. It has a second determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes a stone point lottery for the 2nd stone in the 22nd game) that makes a second determination related to the granting of the privilege using the second information (for example, the 2nd stone). Ori,
The information control means
In the specific gaming state, when a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied, the first expected value or the second expected value is updated, and when a specific condition different from the predetermined promotion condition is satisfied, the first expected value or the second expected value is increased. It is characterized in that it is configured to be updated in the direction of increasing the 1 expected value and the 2nd expected value.

In the gaming machine of (1) above, the determination related to the granting of the privilege is performed using at least the first information (for example, the 1st stone) and the second information (for example, the 2nd stone). In the specific game state, the first expected value and the second information, which give a favorable result (for example, stone point) to the player when the judgment is made using the first information over a plurality of games, are used. When the determination is made, the control is executed to update the second expected value in which a favorable result (for example, stone point) is obtained for the player. That is, in the specific game state, control that can be updated in the direction of increasing the first expected value and the second expected value is executed over a plurality of games. In this way, by making it possible to gradually increase the first expected value and the second expected value over a plurality of games, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and improve the game interest. Is possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The information control means
In the game in the specific game state, when the update is made in the direction of increasing the first expected value, the update is not performed in the direction of increasing the second expected value in the game, but is updated in the direction of increasing the first expected value. If not, the game can be updated in the direction of increasing the second expected value.

According to the game machine (2) above, the second expected value is not updated in the game in which the first expected value is updated, and the second expected value can be updated in the game in which the first expected value is not updated. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expected value step by step through a plurality of games, and it is possible to diversify the game characteristics.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourth configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A privilege game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when a privilege (for example, AT) is given, and
The main that executes the determination means (for example, stone point lottery) that can make the determination related to the granting of the privilege by using at least the first information (for example, 1st stone) and the second information (for example, 2nd stone). CPU101) and
Using the first expected value (for example, the level of the 1st stone) or the second information that gives a favorable result (for example, stone point) to the player when the determination is made using the first information. Information control means (for example, step S1100, step S1140) capable of controlling a second expected value (for example, the level of the 2nd stone) in which a result (for example, a stone point) advantageous to the player is obtained when the determination is made. , Step S1200, step S1250, etc., and the main CPU 101) that executes stone-level update processing.
A plurality of games that can be updated in the direction of increasing the first expected value (for example, the level of the 1st stone) or the second expected value (for example, the level of the 2nd stone) by the information control means are a plurality of games (for example, 20 of the pseudo bonus). A specific game state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a stone level promotion lottery process) that can control a specific game state executed over a game), and
With
The determination means
The first determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the stone point lottery of the 1st stone in the 21st game) that makes the first determination related to the granting of the privilege using the first information (for example, the 1st stone), and the above. It has a second determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes a stone point lottery for the 2nd stone in the 22nd game) that makes a second determination related to the granting of the privilege using the second information (for example, the 2nd stone). Ori,
The determination means
In the specific gaming state, neither the update in the direction of increasing the first expected value nor the update in the direction of increasing the second expected value is performed, and neither the first determination nor the second determination is made to the player. When the result is not favorable, refer to the reward judge lottery table of the special judgment means (for example, "Stone point 0 and all stone levels are Lv1 (relief)") that makes a special judgment related to the grant of the privilege with a predetermined probability. It is characterized by having a main CPU 101) that executes a reward judge lottery (relief).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the determination related to the granting of the privilege is performed using at least the first information (for example, the 1st stone) and the second information (for example, the 2nd stone). In the specific game state, the first expected value and the second information, which give a favorable result (for example, stone point) to the player when the judgment is made using the first information over a plurality of games, are used. When the determination is made, the control is executed to update the second expected value in which a favorable result (for example, stone point) is obtained for the player. That is, in the specific game state, control that can be updated in the direction of increasing the first expected value and the second expected value is executed over a plurality of games. In this way, by making it possible to gradually increase the first expected value and the second expected value over a plurality of games, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and improve the game interest. Is possible. Further, when neither the first expected value nor the second expected value is updated in the specific gaming state, and the results of the first determination and the second determination are neither favorable to the player, a predetermined probability. Since the special determination related to the granting of the privilege is made in, not only the disappointment that can be given to the player can be reduced, but also the game entertainment can be maintained until it is decided whether or not the privilege is granted.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The predetermined probability in the special determination is
It is advantageous for the player when the determination is made in a state where the first expected value (for example, the level of the 1st stone) or the second expected value (for example, the level of the 2nd stone) is updated by the information control means. It is characterized by a higher probability than the lowest probability of obtaining a good result.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the special determination is performed in a state where the first expected value (for example, the level of the 1st stone) or the second expected value (for example, the level of the 2nd stone) is updated. Since it is performed with a higher probability than the lowest probability of obtaining a favorable result for the player at that time, it is possible to maintain the game interest without discouraging the player on the way.

[Game machine of inventions 5 to 7 in this example]

Conventionally, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the additional zone, a special BB is performed, and in the additional zone and the special BB, the number of each game and the number of ART games are added. A gaming machine that has continuity and also has continuity in terms of production is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-11788).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-11788 considers that if the player's advantageous state is terminated in the middle, the interest of the game is lowered, and even if the termination condition is satisfied during the stay in the advantageous state (addition zone, etc.). , It is intended to be in a state of continuity in terms of playability and production. In this way, there is room for further improvement in the specifications that take into consideration that the advantageous state is not cut off in the middle.

An object of the present invention is to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fifth configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
By inputting the game value (including not only inserting medals but also betting), it becomes possible to execute the game, and variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information. , 3R), the result display can be derived by stopping after performing the variable display by the variable display means, and the game value can be given according to the result display.
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means, and
A combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing an internal lottery process) and
Stop control means (for example, reel stop control process) for stopping the variable display of the variable display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. Main CPU 101) that executes
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and
A specific game state control means (for example, a main CPU that executes AT state management processing) that can be controlled to a specific game state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) in which notification of a stop operation mode is permitted by the notification means, and
A game value management means that manages the value of the game value that can be given in the specific game state according to the value of the game value input in the specific game state and the value of the given game value (for example, the remaining can be acquired). Number counter) and
With
The specific game state control means
When the value of the game value managed by the game value management means satisfies a predetermined end condition (for example, when the remaining number of possible acquisition counters = 0), the specific game state can be ended. ,
In the specific gaming state,
It includes a first specific gaming state (eg, low accuracy) and a second specific gaming state (eg, high accuracy) that is more favorable to the player than the first specific gaming state.
The second specific gaming state is
It is possible to shift from the first specific gaming state, and after shifting from the first specific gaming state, it is possible to continue until a specific end condition is satisfied (for example, until the determined number of high-accuracy games is exhausted). At the same time, the predetermined end condition can be updated in a direction advantageous to the player (for example, the remaining number of acquired cards can be added).
The game value management means
In both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the value of the game value that can be given in the specific game state is managed.
In the second specific game state, even if the value of the game value managed by the game value management means satisfies the predetermined end condition, the specific game state is not terminated until the specific end condition is satisfied. When the second specific gaming state is continued and it is determined in the second specific gaming state that the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player, the update is the second specific gaming state. It is characterized in that it is configured to be performed after the end.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the value of the gaming value that can be given in the specific gaming state is managed according to the value of the gaming value input in the specific gaming state and the value of the given gaming value. It is premised on a gaming machine in which a specific gaming state can be terminated when the value of the gaming value managed in this way satisfies a predetermined termination condition. In such a gaming machine, when the game shifts to the second specific gaming state (for example, high accuracy) during the specific gaming state, even if the managed game value value satisfies a predetermined end condition, the specific gaming value is specified. The specific game state is not terminated until the end condition is satisfied, that is, until the predetermined number of games (number of games) is exhausted. Then, in the second specific game state, when it is determined that the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player (for example, when the remaining number of acquired sheets is added), the second specific game state Instead of updating the inside, it is updated after the end of the second specific game state. As a result, even though the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction favorable to the player, the player benefit (for example, addition) due to the update is performed during the second specific gaming state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of remaining acquisitions is reduced, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(2) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine provided with variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of identification information, and a result display can be derived by stopping after variable display is performed by the variable display means. hand,
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means, and
A combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing an internal lottery process) and
Stop control means (for example, reel stop control process) for stopping the variable display of the variable display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. Main CPU 101) that executes
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and
A specific game state control means (for example, a main CPU that executes AT state management processing) that can control a specific game state in which notification of a stop operation mode is permitted by the notification means,
A specific game period management means (for example, a counter for the number of remaining games) that manages a specific game period controlled by the specific game state, and
With
The specific game state control means
When the specific game period managed by the specific game period management means satisfies a predetermined end condition (for example, when the remaining number of possible acquisition counters = 0), the specific game state can be terminated. Ori,
In the specific gaming state,
It includes a first specific gaming state (eg, low accuracy) and a second specific gaming state (eg, high accuracy) that is more favorable to the player than the first specific gaming state.
The second specific gaming state is
It is possible to shift from the first specific gaming state, and after the transition from the first specific gaming state, it is possible to continue until a specific end condition is satisfied (for example, until the determined number of high-accuracy games is exhausted). At the same time, the predetermined end condition can be updated in a direction advantageous to the player (for example, the number of remaining games is added).
The specific game period management means
In both the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the specific gaming period controlled by the specific gaming state is managed.
The specific game state control means
In the second specific game state, even if the specific game period managed by the specific game period management means satisfies the predetermined end condition, the specific game state is not terminated until the specific end condition is satisfied. When the second specific gaming state is continued and it is determined in the second specific gaming state that the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player, the update is the second specific gaming state. It is characterized by being configured to be performed after the end.

In the gaming machine of the above (2), instead of the gaming value management means of the above (1), the specific gaming period management means manages the specific gaming period controlled to the specific gaming state. That is, it is premised on a gaming machine in which the specific gaming state can be terminated when the specific gaming period managed in this way satisfies a predetermined end condition. In such a gaming machine, when the game shifts to the second specific gaming state (for example, high accuracy) during the specific gaming state, even if the managed specific gaming period satisfies a predetermined end condition, the specific end The specific game state is not terminated until the condition is satisfied, that is, until the predetermined number of games (number of games) is exhausted. Then, in the second specific game state, when it is determined that the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player (for example, when the number of remaining games is added), the second specific game state Instead of updating the inside, it is updated after the end of the second specific game state. As a result, even though the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction favorable to the player, the player benefit (for example, addition) due to the update is performed during the second specific gaming state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of remaining games played) decreases, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following sixth configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
By inputting the game value (including not only inserting medals but also betting), it becomes possible to execute the game, and variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information. , 3R), the result display can be derived by stopping after performing the variable display by the variable display means, and the game value can be given according to the result display.
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means, and
A combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing an internal lottery process) and
Stop control means (for example, reel stop control process) for stopping the variable display of the variable display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. Main CPU 101) that executes
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and
A specific game state control means (for example, a main CPU that executes AT state management processing) that can control a specific game state in which notification of a stop operation mode is permitted by the notification means,
A game value management means that manages the value of the game value that can be given in the specific game state according to the value of the game value input in the specific game state and the value of the given game value (for example, the remaining can be acquired). Number counter) and
An effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
With
The specific game state control means
When the value of the game value managed by the game value management means satisfies a predetermined end condition (for example, when the remaining number of possible acquisition counters = 0), the specific game state can be ended. ,
In the specific gaming state,
It includes a first specific gaming state (eg, low accuracy) and a second specific gaming state (eg, high accuracy) that is more favorable to the player than the first specific gaming state.
The second specific gaming state is
It is possible to shift from the first specific gaming state, and after shifting from the first specific gaming state, it is possible to continue until a specific end condition is satisfied (for example, until the determined number of high-accuracy games is exhausted). At the same time, the predetermined end condition can be updated in a direction advantageous to the player (for example, the remaining number of acquired cards can be added).
The game value management means
In both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the value of the game value that can be given in the specific game state is managed.
In the second specific game state, even if the value of the game value managed by the game value management means satisfies the predetermined end condition, the specific game state is not terminated until the specific end condition is satisfied. When the second specific gaming state is continued and it is determined in the second specific gaming state that the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player, the update is the second specific gaming state. It is configured to be done after the end,
The effect executing means is
It is characterized in that it has an update notification effect executing means capable of executing the update notification effect when the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player in the second specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the value of the gaming value that can be given in the specific gaming state is managed according to the value of the gaming value input in the specific gaming state and the value of the given gaming value. It is premised on a gaming machine in which a specific gaming state can be terminated when the value of the gaming value managed in this way satisfies a predetermined termination condition. In such a gaming machine, when the game shifts to the second specific gaming state (for example, high accuracy) during the specific gaming state, even if the managed game value value satisfies a predetermined end condition, the specific gaming value is specified. The specific game state is not terminated until the end condition is satisfied, that is, until the predetermined number of games (number of games) is exhausted. Then, in the second specific game state, when it is determined that the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player (for example, when the remaining number of acquired sheets is added), the second specific game state Instead of updating the inside, it is updated after the end of the second specific game state. Further, when it is determined that the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player in the second specific game state, an effect of notifying that the update is performed is performed. As a result, even though the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction favorable to the player, the player benefit (for example, addition) due to the update is performed during the second specific gaming state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of remaining acquisitions is reduced, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(2) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine provided with variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of identification information, and a result display can be derived by stopping after variable display is performed by the variable display means. hand,
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means, and
A combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101),
A stop control means (for example, a reel by the main CPU 101) that stops the variable display of the variable display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. Stop control processing) and
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and
A specific game state control means (for example, a main CPU that executes AT state management processing) that can control a specific game state in which notification of a stop operation mode is permitted by the notification means,
A specific game period management means (for example, a counter for the number of remaining acquisitions) that manages a specific game period controlled by the specific game state, and
An effect executing means (for example, a display device 11, speakers 65L, 65R, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
With
The specific game state control means
When the specific game period managed by the specific game period management means satisfies a predetermined end condition (for example, when the remaining number of possible acquisition counters = 0), the specific game state can be terminated. Ori,
In the specific gaming state,
It includes a first specific gaming state (eg, low accuracy) and a second specific gaming state (eg, high accuracy) that is more favorable to the player than the first specific gaming state.
The second specific gaming state is
It is possible to shift from the first specific gaming state, and after shifting from the first specific gaming state, it is possible to continue until a specific end condition is satisfied (for example, until 10 games are executed), and the predetermined end. The conditions can be updated in a direction that is advantageous to the player.
The specific game period management means
In both the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the specific gaming period controlled by the specific gaming state is managed.
In the second specific game state, even if the specific game period controlled by the specific game period management means satisfies the predetermined end condition, the above-mentioned until the specific end condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the second specific game state is continued without ending the specific game state and the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player in the second specific game state, the update is performed. Is configured to be performed after the end of the second specific gaming state.
The effect executing means is
When the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player in the second specific gaming state, the update notification effect executing means (for example, the sub CPU 201) capable of executing the update notification effect indicating that the update is performed. ).

In the gaming machine of the above (2), instead of the gaming value management means of the above (1), the specific gaming period management means manages the specific gaming period controlled to the specific gaming state. That is, it is premised on a gaming machine in which the specific gaming state can be terminated when the specific gaming period managed in this way satisfies a predetermined end condition. In such a gaming machine, when the game shifts to the second specific gaming state (for example, high accuracy) during the specific gaming state, even if the managed specific gaming period satisfies a predetermined end condition, the specific end The specific game state is not terminated until the condition is satisfied, that is, until the predetermined number of games (number of games) is exhausted. Then, in the second specific game state, when it is determined that the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player (for example, when the number of remaining games is added), the second specific game state Instead of updating the inside, it is updated after the end of the second specific game state. Further, when it is determined that the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player in the second specific game state, an effect of notifying that the update is performed is performed. As a result, even though the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction favorable to the player, the player benefit (for example, addition) due to the update is performed during the second specific gaming state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of remaining games played) decreases, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following seventh configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
By inputting the game value (including not only inserting medals but also betting), it becomes possible to execute the game, and variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information. , 3R), the result display can be derived by stopping after performing the variable display by the variable display means, and the game value can be given according to the result display.
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means, and
A combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing an internal lottery process) and
Stop control means (for example, reel stop control process) for stopping the variable display of the variable display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. Main CPU 101) that executes
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and
A specific game state control means (for example, a main CPU that executes AT state management processing) that can control a specific game state in which notification of a stop operation mode is permitted by the notification means,
A game value management means that manages the value of the game value that can be given in the specific game state according to the value of the game value input in the specific game state and the value of the given game value (for example, the remaining can be acquired). Number counter) and
An effect executing means (for example, a display device 11, speakers 65L, 65R, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
With
The specific game state control means
When the value of the game value managed by the game value management means satisfies a predetermined end condition (for example, when the remaining number of possible acquisition counters = 0), the specific game state can be ended. ,
In the specific gaming state,
It includes a first specific gaming state (eg, low accuracy) and a second specific gaming state (eg, high accuracy) that is more favorable to the player than the first specific gaming state.
The second specific gaming state is
It is possible to shift from the first specific gaming state, and after shifting from the first specific gaming state, it is possible to continue until a specific end condition is satisfied (for example, until the determined number of high-accuracy games is exhausted). At the same time, the predetermined end condition can be updated in a direction advantageous to the player (for example, the remaining number of acquired cards can be added).
The game value management means
In both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the value of the game value that can be given in the specific game state is managed.
In the second specific game state, even if the value of the game value managed by the game value management means satisfies the predetermined end condition, the specific game state is not terminated until the specific end condition is satisfied. When the second specific gaming state is continued and it is determined in the second specific gaming state that the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player, the update is the second specific gaming state. It is configured to be done after the end,
The effect executing means is
Even if the state is shifted from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state, there is a possibility that the transition to the second specific gaming state may have occurred without clearly indicating that the transition has been made to the second specific gaming state. An expected effect executing means (for example, sub CPU201) capable of executing an expected effect (for example, a precursor game effect) indicating that there is, and
When the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player in the second specific gaming state, an update notification effect indicating that the update is performed (for example, display of an effect image indicating that the addition has been made). ) With an update notification effect executing means (for example, sub CPU201) capable of executing
The expected production execution means is
When the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player during the execution of the expected effect due to the transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state, the expected effect is terminated. It is characterized by having a second specific game effect execution means for executing an effect indicating that the state has been shifted to the second specific game state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the value of the gaming value that can be given in the specific gaming state is managed according to the value of the gaming value input in the specific gaming state and the value of the given gaming value. It is premised on a gaming machine in which a specific gaming state can be terminated when the value of the gaming value managed in this way satisfies a predetermined termination condition. In such a gaming machine, when the game shifts to the second specific gaming state (for example, high accuracy) during the specific gaming state, even if the managed game value value satisfies a predetermined end condition, the specific gaming value is specified. The specific game state is not terminated until the end condition is satisfied, that is, until the predetermined number of games (number of games) is exhausted. Then, in the second specific game state, when it is determined that the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player (for example, when the remaining number of acquired sheets is added), the second specific game state Instead of updating the inside, it is updated after the end of the second specific game state. As a result, even though the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction favorable to the player, the player benefit (for example, addition) due to the update is performed during the second specific gaming state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of remaining acquisitions is reduced, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, even if the transition from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state is performed, there is a possibility that the transition to the second specific gaming state may have occurred without clearly indicating that the transition to the second specific gaming state has occurred. (For example, a precursory game effect) is executed, and when a predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player in the second specific game state, an update notification effect indicating that the update is performed (for example, an update notification effect) For example, display of an effect image indicating that the addition has been made) is executed. Then, when the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player during the execution of the expected effect due to the transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state, the expected effect is ended and the second An effect indicating that the game has been changed to the specific game state is executed. That is, the expected effect is not an effect that confirms the transition to the second specific gaming state, but merely an effect that indicates that the transition to the second specific gaming state may have occurred, so that the player is uplifted. Can be made to. However, on the other hand, since the update notification effect is an effect indicating that the end condition of the second specific game state has been updated, when the update notification effect is executed, the state shifts to the second specific game state at that time. It is confirmed that there is. Therefore, when the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player during the execution of the expected effect, the expected effect and the update notification effect are preferably performed by ending the expected effect and performing the update notification effect. Is possible.

(2) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine provided with variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of identification information, and a result display can be derived by stopping after variable display is performed by the variable display means. hand,
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means, and
A combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101),
A stop control means (for example, a reel by the main CPU 101) that stops the variable display of the variable display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. Stop control processing) and
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and
A specific game state control means (for example, a main CPU that executes AT state management processing) that can control a specific game state in which notification of a stop operation mode is permitted by the notification means,
A specific game period management means (for example, a counter for the number of remaining acquisitions) that manages a specific game period controlled by the specific game state, and
An effect executing means (for example, a display device 11, speakers 65L, 65R, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
With
The specific game state control means
When the specific game period managed by the specific game period management means satisfies a predetermined end condition (for example, when the remaining number of possible acquisition counters = 0), the specific game state can be terminated. Ori,
In the specific gaming state,
It includes a first specific gaming state (eg, low accuracy) and a second specific gaming state (eg, high accuracy) that is more favorable to the player than the first specific gaming state.
The second specific gaming state is
It is possible to shift from the first specific gaming state, and after shifting from the first specific gaming state, it is possible to continue until a specific end condition is satisfied (for example, until 10 games are executed), and the predetermined end. The conditions can be updated in a direction that is advantageous to the player.
The specific game period management means
In both the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the specific gaming period controlled by the specific gaming state is managed.
In the second specific game state, even if the specific game period controlled by the specific game period management means satisfies the predetermined end condition, the above-mentioned until the specific end condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the second specific game state is continued without ending the specific game state and the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player in the second specific game state, the update is performed. It is configured to be performed after the end of the second specific gaming state.
The effect executing means is
Even if the transition from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state is performed, there is a possibility that the transition to the second specific gaming state may have occurred without clearly indicating that the transition to the second specific gaming state has occurred. An expected effect executing means (for example, sub CPU201) capable of executing an expected effect indicating that there is,
When the predetermined end condition is updated in the direction advantageous to the player in the second specific gaming state, the update notification effect executing means (for example, the sub CPU 201) capable of executing the update notification effect indicating that the update is performed. ) And
The expected production execution means is
When the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player during the execution of the expected effect due to the transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state, the expected effect is terminated. It is characterized by having a second specific game effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes an effect indicating that the state has been shifted to the second specific game state.

In the gaming machine of the above (2), instead of the gaming value management means of the above (1), the specific gaming period management means manages the specific gaming period controlled to the specific gaming state. That is, it is premised on a gaming machine in which the specific gaming state can be terminated when the specific gaming period managed in this way satisfies a predetermined end condition. In such a gaming machine, when the game shifts to the second specific gaming state (for example, high accuracy) during the specific gaming state, even if the managed game value value satisfies a predetermined end condition, the specific gaming value is specified. The specific game state is not terminated until the end condition is satisfied, that is, until the predetermined number of games (number of games) is exhausted. Then, in the second specific game state, when it is determined that the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player (for example, when the remaining number of acquired sheets is added), the second specific game state Instead of updating the inside, it is updated after the end of the second specific game state. As a result, even though the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction favorable to the player, the player benefit (for example, addition) due to the update is performed during the second specific gaming state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of remaining acquisitions is reduced, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, similarly to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the transition from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state is performed, the second specific without clearly indicating that the transition to the second specific gaming state has occurred. When an expected effect (for example, a precursory game effect) indicating that the game state may have been shifted is executed and the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player in the second specific game state, the said. An update notification effect (for example, display of an effect image indicating that an addition has been made) is executed to indicate that the update is performed. Then, when the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player during the execution of the expected effect due to the transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state, the expected effect is ended and the second An effect indicating that the game has been changed to the specific game state is executed. That is, the expected effect is not an effect that confirms the transition to the second specific gaming state, but merely an effect that indicates that the transition to the second specific gaming state may have occurred, so that the player is uplifted. Can be made to. However, on the other hand, since the update notification effect is an effect indicating that the end condition of the second specific game state has been updated, when the update notification effect is executed, the state shifts to the second specific game state at that time. It is confirmed that there is. Therefore, when the predetermined end condition is updated in a direction advantageous to the player during the execution of the expected effect, the expected effect and the update notification effect are preferably performed by ending the expected effect and performing the update notification effect. Is possible.

[Game machine of invention 8 in this example]
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which the ending state is set when the number of remaining AT games until the limiter is activated is small, and the addition process is not executed in the ending state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-122056).

In the ending state in which the addition process is not executed as in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2018-122056, it is difficult for the player to digest with expectation, and the digestion work becomes mere digestion work, which reduces the interest of the game. There was a risk.

The present invention has been considered in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to suppress a decrease in the interest in playing games.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighth configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
By inputting the game value (including not only inserting medals but also betting), it becomes possible to execute the game, and variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information. , 3R), the result display can be derived by stopping after performing the variable display by the variable display means, and the game value can be given according to the result display.
A setting value changing means (for example, a reset switch 76 and a setting key type switch 54) capable of determining one setting value from a plurality of stages of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player.
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means, and
A combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing an internal lottery process) and
Stop control means (for example, reel stop control process) for stopping the variable display of the variable display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. Main CPU 101) that executes
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and
A specific game state control means (for example, a main CPU that executes AT state management processing) that can control a specific game state (for example, AT) that is advantageous to the player, and
An effect executing means (for example, a display device 11, speakers 65L, 65R, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
With
In the specific gaming state,
A first specific gaming state (for example, AT) in which the specific gaming state can be extended according to the determination of the specific combination as the internal winning combination by the combination determining means, and the specific combination being internally won by the combination determining means. Even if it is determined as a combination, a second specific gaming state (for example, a limiter arrival confirmed state) in which the specific gaming state is not extended or the expected value to be extended is smaller than the first specific gaming state is included. ,
The effect executing means is
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the second specific game state, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting the one set value determined by the set value changing means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state (for example, AT) can be extended according to the determination of the specific winning combination as the internal winning combination by the combination determining means. The gaming state and the second specific gaming state in which the specific gaming state is not extended or the expected value to be extended is smaller than that of the first specific gaming state even if the specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination are included. ing. In this case, even if the specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the second specific gaming state, there is a risk that the interest will be reduced. Therefore, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the second specific game state, the deterioration of the interest is suppressed by performing an effect suggesting one setting value determined by the setting value changing means. Is possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
It is possible to control the advantageous section where the notification of the stop operation mode is permitted or the non-advantageous section where the notification of the stop operation mode is not permitted by the notification means, and the value of the game value input in the advantageous section and the given game value. A section control means (for example, a main CPU that controls an advantageous section by a number limiter) for managing the value of the game value that can be given in the advantageous section is further provided.
The section control means
When the value of the game value managed in the advantageous section satisfies the section end condition (for example, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2400) or more), the advantageous section Is configured to terminate
The gaming machine
Control to shift to the second specific gaming state when the difference between the value of the game value given in the advantageous section and the value of the input game value satisfies a predetermined transition condition (for example, when 2000 cards are exceeded). The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a gaming state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing the above.

In the game machine of (2) above, when the difference between the value of the game value given in the advantageous section and the value of the input game value satisfies a predetermined transition condition (for example, when the number of cards exceeds 2000), the second game machine It is designed to shift to a specific gaming state (for example, a limiter arrival confirmed state). Even in such a gaming machine, when a specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the second specific gaming state, an effect suggesting one set value determined by the setting value changing means is performed. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
It is possible to control the advantageous section where the notification of the stop operation mode is permitted by the notification means or the non-advantageous section where the notification of the stop operation mode is not permitted, and the section control means (for example,) for managing the number of games played in the advantageous section , Main CPU that controls the advantageous section by the number of games limiter)
The section control means
When the number of games managed in the advantageous section satisfies a predetermined end condition, the advantageous section can be ended.
The gaming machine
When the total of the number of games played in the advantageous section in the specific game state and the number of games until the predetermined end condition is satisfied in the specific game state satisfies the predetermined end condition (for example, in 1300 games). If there is), it is further provided with a game state transition control means for executing the control to shift to the second specific gaming state.

In the game machine of (3) above, when the total number of games played in the advantageous section (number of games) and the total number of games (number of games) in the specific game state (high accuracy) satisfies a predetermined condition. (For example, when 1300 games are played), the state shifts to the limiter arrival confirmation state, which is the second specific game state. Even in such a gaming machine, when a specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the second specific gaming state, an effect suggesting one set value determined by the setting value changing means is performed. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

<Appendix 3>
[30th and 31st gaming machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and provided with a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, in recent years, pachinko gaming machines having a function of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time are required to enhance the interest of the game for such a function.

The present invention has been made to solve the thirtieth problem, and a thirtieth object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a function of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time. It is to provide a technique capable of enhancing the interest of the game for such a function.

In order to achieve the thirtieth object, the present invention provides the following thirtieth gaming machine.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
A first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first determination means.
A second determination means (for example, main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift the player to the advantageous special gaming state when the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045) is satisfied. )When,
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
The timing of ending the variable display of the one identification information by the one identification information display means and the timing of starting the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means overlap with each other. In a specific case where one of the determination results corresponding to the identification information display means of the above is to shift to the special gaming state, the other identification information based on the other determination result corresponding to the other identification information display means. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display of is not started.

Further, in the thirtieth gaming machine of the present invention, in the specific case, a predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) is turned on so as not to start the variable display of the other identification information. When the special gaming state executed based on the determination result of one of them ends, the predetermined control flag is turned off to start the variable display of the identification information of the other based on the determination result of the other. You may do so.

Further, in the thirtieth gaming machine of the present invention, when one of the identification information is in variable display and the mode of variable display of the one identification information is a mode of shifting to the special gaming state. In addition, even if the start condition of the other identification information is satisfied, the other identification information may be controlled so as not to determine the determination result of shifting to the special gaming state.

In order to achieve the thirtieth object, the present invention provides the thirty-first gaming machine as follows.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
A first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first determination means.
A second determination means (for example, main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift the player to the advantageous special gaming state when the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045) is satisfied. )When,
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
The variation display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is started at the timing when the variation display of the one identification information is finished by the one identification information display means and during the period from the timing to a predetermined time before. In a specific case where the timing of the game is included and one of the determination results corresponding to the one identification information display means shifts to the special gaming state, the other corresponding to the other identification information display means. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display of the other identification information based on the determination result of the above is not started.

Further, in the 31st gaming machine of the present invention, in the specific case, when the special gaming state executed based on the determination result of one of the above is completed, the other is based on the determination result of the other. The variable display of the identification information of the above may be started.

Further, in the thirty-first gaming machine of the present invention, when one of the identification information is in variable display and the mode of variable display of the one identification information is a mode of shifting to the special gaming state. In addition, even if the start condition of the other identification information is satisfied, the other identification information may be controlled so as not to determine the determination result of shifting to the special gaming state.

According to the thirtieth and thirty-first gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, in a gaming machine having a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time, the interest of the game for such a function is enhanced. be able to.

[32nd to 45th gaming machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and provided with a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine usually has a main control board on which a circuit (main control circuit) for controlling a main game operation such as determination of identification information is mounted, and a circuit for controlling an effect operation by displaying an image or the like (main control circuit). A sub-control board on which a sub-control circuit) is mounted is provided. The game operation is controlled by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted on the main control circuit. At this time, under the control of the CPU, the program and various table data stored in the ROM (Read Only Memory) of the main control circuit are expanded in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the main control circuit, and processing related to various game operations is executed. Will be done. In recent years, in such gaming machines, there is a demand for the development of a technique capable of more efficiently executing the processing performed by the main control circuit and reducing the processing load of the main control circuit.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned 31st problem, and the 31st object of the present invention is to execute the processing performed by the main control circuit more efficiently and reduce the processing load of the main control circuit. It is to provide a gaming machine that can be played.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 32nd gaming machine.

An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of a game, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The storage means is provided with two work areas.
Specific information (for example, an identifier) associated with the work area to be used is added to the information to be processed using each work area.
When processing information using one of the two work areas, the arithmetic processing means uses the work area based on the specific information added to the information to be processed. A gaming machine characterized by selecting.

Further, in the 32nd gaming machine of the present invention, the specific information is higher-level address data constituting the address of the corresponding work area.
In the work area selection process by the arithmetic processing means, the arithmetic processing means may specify the address of the work area to be used based on the specific information.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the 33rd gaming machine as follows.

With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol)). 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, a second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, a prize of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The storage means is provided with a first work area and a second work area.
The process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means is performed using the first work area.
The process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means is performed using the second work area.
The first specific information (for example, an identifier) associated with the first work area is added to the information to be processed in the process related to the variable display of the first identification information.
The second specific information associated with the second work area is added to the information to be processed in the process related to the variable display of the second identification information.
The arithmetic processing means
When performing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information, the first work area is selected based on the first specific information added to the information to be processed.
When performing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information, the second work area is selected based on the second specific information added to the information to be processed. A game machine to play.

Further, in the 33rd gaming machine of the present invention, the first specific information is higher-level address data constituting the address of the first work area, and the second specific information is the second specific information. It is the address data on the upper side that constitutes the address of the work area of 2.
In the work area selection process by the arithmetic processing means, the arithmetic processing means may specify the address of the work area to be used based on the specific information.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the 34th gaming machine as follows.

With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol)). 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, a second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, a prize of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A first data table (for example, a first special symbol work area table) in which information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored.
A second data table (for example, a second special symbol work area table) in which information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored is provided.
In the first data table, the second identification of the same type as the predetermined information is stored in the storage area of the address separated by a predetermined offset value from the address of the storage area of the predetermined information regarding the first identification information. Information about the information is stored, and the address of the second data table is stored in the last storage area.
In the second data table, the first item of the same type as the specific information is stored in the storage area of the address separated from the address of the storage area of the specific information related to the second identification information by the predetermined offset value. Information on the identification information is stored, and the address of the first data table is stored in the last storage area.
In the process related to the variable display of the first identification information, when reading out the information related to the second identification information of the same type as the predetermined information stored in the first data table, the calculation process is performed. The means uses the address of the storage area of the predetermined information as a reference address, corrects the address by the predetermined offset value with respect to the reference address, and based on the corrected address, the same type of information as the predetermined information. Read the information about the second identification information,
In the process related to the variable display of the second identification information, when the information on the first identification information of the same type as the specific information stored in the second data table is read out, the arithmetic processing is performed. The means uses the address of the storage area of the specific information as a reference address, corrects the address by the predetermined offset value with respect to the reference address, and based on the corrected address, the same type of information as the specific information. A gaming machine characterized by reading out information related to the first identification information.

Further, in the 34th gaming machine of the present invention, during the variable display of one identification information by one of the identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the other is displayed. It may be possible to start variable display of the other identification information by the identification information display means.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 35th gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
A display means (for example, a performance display monitor 6070) for displaying predetermined information (for example, a base value) regarding the history of the game value given to the player is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means is
Random number updating means (for example, S6019 during system timer interrupt processing) that updates the random number value used in the game control by the game control means, and
A display control means (for example, S6024 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls the display processing of the predetermined information by the display means, and
It has a setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
The setting value change processing or confirmation processing by the setting control means is executed when the game is not permitted, and in this case, the random number value update processing by the random number updating means and the display control. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information display processing by means is not executed.

Further, in the 35th gaming machine of the present invention, the display means may be capable of displaying the set value as well.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 36-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means includes setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
The process of changing or confirming the set value by the setting control means is executed when the game is not permitted, and in this case, the process executed by the interrupt processing executing means is performed when the game is permitted. A game machine that is characterized by not being interrupted.

Further, in order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 36-2 gaming machines.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means is
A startup information acquisition means (for example, S6014 during system timer interrupt processing) for acquiring information on the startup status, and
It has a setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
The setting value change processing or confirmation processing by the setting control means is executed when the game is not permitted, and in this case, the processing executed by the interrupt processing execution means is performed when the game is permitted. Without
A gaming machine characterized in that the determination of game permission or game disapproval is performed based on the information regarding the activation state acquired by the activation information acquisition means.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the 37th gaming machine as follows.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
A display means (for example, a performance display monitor 6070) for displaying predetermined information (for example, a base value) regarding the history of the game value given to the player is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means is
Random number updating means (for example, S6019 during system timer interrupt processing) that updates the random number value used in the game control by the game control means, and
A display control means (for example, S6024 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls the display processing of the predetermined information by the display means, and
Setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
It has a timer update means (for example, S6018 during system timer interrupt processing) that performs timer update processing for managing the predetermined cycle.
The setting value change processing or confirmation processing by the setting control means is executed when the game is not permitted, and in this case, the random number value update processing by the random number updating means and the display control means. A gaming machine characterized in that the display process of the predetermined information and the update process of the timer by the timer update means are not executed.

Further, the 37th gaming machine of the present invention further includes a storage means (for example, a main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for game control by the gaming control means.
The storage means has a first work area (for example, a game RAM area) in which information necessary for executing a process related to the progress of the game is stored, and information necessary for executing a process not related to the progress of the game. Has a second working area (eg, an out-of-area RAM area) in which
The display processing of the predetermined information by the display control means may be executed using the second work area.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 38-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means is
Setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
It has a data transmission means (for example, S6022 during system timer interrupt processing) that transmits data from the game control means to the effect control means according to a game situation.
The game control means has a setting operation data generation means (for example, a setting operation pre-processing) that generates setting operation data indicating that the setting value change processing or confirmation processing has been performed.
The setting operation data generated by the setting operation data generating means is transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means by the data transmitting means in the first interrupt process performed after the setting operation data generation process. A gaming machine characterized by the fact that.

Further, in order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 38-2 gaming machines.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means is
Setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
It has a data transmission means (for example, S6022 during system timer interrupt processing) that transmits data from the game control means to the effect control means according to a game situation.
The game control means has a setting operation data generation means (for example, a setting operation pre-processing) that generates setting operation data indicating that the setting value change processing or confirmation processing has been performed.
The setting operation data generated by the setting operation data generating means is transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means by the data transmitting means in the first interrupt process performed after the setting operation data generation process. ,
A gaming machine characterized in that the reservation processing for transmission of the setting operation data is performed during the control processing by the game control means, but not during the interrupt processing by the interrupt processing execution means.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the 39th gaming machine as follows.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means is
Setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
It has a data transmission means (for example, S6022 during system timer interrupt processing) that transmits data from the game control means to the effect control means according to a game situation.
The game control means has a setting operation data generation means (for example, a setting operation pre-processing) that generates setting operation data indicating that the setting value change processing or confirmation processing has been performed.
The setting operation data generated by the setting operation data generating means is transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means by the data transmitting means in the first interrupt process performed after the setting operation data generation process. ,
In the interrupt process in which the set value is changed by the setting control means, the data transmission means is the same data as specific data (for example, an initialization command) transmitted when the storage means is cleared. Is transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means,
In the interrupt process in which the setting value confirmation process is performed by the setting control means, the data transmission means uses the same data as predetermined data (for example, a power failure recovery command) to be transmitted when the power is restored. A gaming machine characterized by transmitting from a gaming control means to the effect controlling means.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the 40th gaming machine as follows.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing a control process by the game control means is provided.
In the control process by the game control means, a prohibition period (for example, S6221 to S6230 during the main control main process) of execution of the interrupt process by the interrupt process execution means is provided in the progress of the process.
During the prohibition period, the game control means has a predetermined information regarding a response process when a power failure occurs, an update process of an initial random number value used in the game control, and a history of the game value given to the player. Update processing (for example, base value)
The storage means has a first work area (for example, a game RAM area) in which information necessary for executing a process related to the progress of the game is stored, and information necessary for executing a process not related to the progress of the game. Has a second working area (eg, an out-of-area RAM area) in which
A gaming machine characterized in that the update processing of the predetermined information regarding the history of the gaming value given to the player is executed using the second work area.

Further, in the 40th gaming machine of the present invention, the update processing of the predetermined information regarding the history of the gaming value given to the player may be executed only when the gaming is possible.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the 41st gaming machine as follows.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec) during the control process by the game control means is provided.
In the control process by the game control means, a prohibition period (for example, S6221 to S6230: 6 msec during the main control main process) of execution of the interrupt process by the interrupt process execution means is provided in the progress of the process.
During the prohibition period, the game control means determines the response process when a power failure occurs, the update process of the initial random number value used in the game control process, and the history of the game value given to the player. Information (for example, base value) is updated.
A gaming machine characterized in that the prohibited period is a predetermined number of times, which is twice or more than the predetermined period.

Further, in the 41st gaming machine of the present invention, the processing of the prohibited period by the game control means may be performed before the execution of the control processing related to the progress of the game by the game control means.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 42-1 gaming machine.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
A first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first determination means.
With the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045), the second determination means (for example, the main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state, and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variation display time of the other identification information elapses, it is possible to perform end-time processing for the variation display of the other identification information.
When the variable display of the one identification information ends, a predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variable display of the one identification information is not set to the ON state. In the case, it is determined that the control process of the variable display of the one identification information is shifted to the process of determining the result of the stop mode of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, during the special symbol variation end process). S6514),
When the variation display of the one identification information ends, the predetermined control flag is not set to the ON state, and the result of the stop mode of the variation display of the one identification information becomes the special gaming state. In the case of shifting, the end-time processing for the variable display of the other identification information is not performed, and the control process for the variable display of the other identification information is stopped in the variable display of the other identification information. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to shift to a process of determining a result (for example, S6531 during a special symbol variation end process).

Further, in order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 42-2 gaming machines.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
A first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first determination means.
With the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045), the second determination means (for example, the main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state, and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variation display time of the other identification information elapses, it is possible to perform end-time processing for the variation display of the other identification information.
A predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variable display of the identification information is provided.
A control parameter (for example, a special symbol control state number) for controlling the transition of the control process of the variable display of the identification information is provided.
When the variation display of the one identification information ends, if the predetermined control flag of the one identification information is not set to the ON state, the control processing of the variation display of the one identification information is controlled. The parameter is updated to a predetermined value (for example, "2") for transitioning to the control process of the variable display next to the variable display end process (for example, S6514 during the special symbol variable end process), and in that case, When the result of the stop mode of the variable display of the one identification information is to shift to the special gaming state, the control parameter of the control process of the variable display of the other identification information is also updated to the predetermined value (for example). , S6531) during the special symbol change end processing.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 43-1 gaming machine.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
A first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first determination means.
With the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045), the second determination means (for example, the main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state, and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variation display time of the other identification information elapses, it is possible to perform end-time processing for the variation display of the other identification information.
When the variable display of the one identification information ends, a predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variable display of the one identification information is not set to the ON state. In the case, it is determined that the control process of the variable display of the one identification information is shifted to the process of determining the result of the stop mode of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, during the special symbol variation end process). S6514),
When the variation display of the one identification information ends, the predetermined control flag is not set to the ON state, and the result of the stop mode of the variation display of the one identification information shifts to the special gaming state. If the other identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, the processing at the end of the variable display of the other identification information is not performed, and the control processing of the variable display of the other identification information is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined to shift to a process of determining the result of the stop mode of the variation display of the other identification information (for example, S6531 during the special symbol variation end processing).

Further, in order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 43-2 gaming machines.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
A first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first determination means.
With the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045), the second determination means (for example, the main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state, and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variation display time of the other identification information elapses, it is possible to perform end-time processing for the variation display of the other identification information.
A predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variable display of the identification information is provided.
A control parameter (for example, a special symbol control state number) for controlling the transition of the control process of the variable display of the identification information is provided.
When the variation display of the one identification information ends, if the predetermined control flag of the one identification information is not set to the ON state, the control processing of the variation display of the one identification information is controlled. The parameter is updated to a predetermined value for transitioning to the control process of the variable display next to the variable display end process (for example, S6514 during the special symbol variable end process), and in that case, the change of the identification information of one of the above. When the result of the display stop mode shifts to the special gaming state and the other identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, the control parameter of the control process for the variable display of the other identification information is also determined. A gaming machine characterized in that it is updated to a value (for example, S6531 during special symbol variation end processing).

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 44-1 gaming machine.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A time counting means (for example, a special symbol waiting time management timer area) for managing a specific period in the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The time counting means is composed of a first time counting means (for example, a high-order 2-byte timer) and a second time counting means (for example, a low-order 2-byte timer).
When the specific period is a time that can be counted by one of the first time counting means and the second time counting means, the one time counting means manages the specific period. (For example, S6554 during special symbol game determination processing),
When the specific period cannot be counted by one of the first time counting means and the second time counting means, first, a part of the specific period is used by the one time counting means. The game machine is characterized in that the period is managed, and after the management by the one time counting means is completed, the remaining period of the specific period is managed by the other time counting means (for example, special symbol-related timer update processing).

Further, in the gaming machine according to the 44-1 of the present invention, the first time counting means and the second time counting means may each be composed of a 2-byte timer.

Further, in order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 44-2 gaming machine.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A time counting means (for example, a special symbol waiting time management timer area) for managing a specific period in the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The time counting means is composed of a first time counting means (for example, a high-order 2-byte timer) and a second time counting means (for example, a low-order 2-byte timer).
When the specific period is a time that can be counted by one of the first time counting means and the second time counting means, the one time counting means manages the specific period. (For example, S6554 during special symbol game determination processing),
When the specific period cannot be counted by one of the first time counting means and the second time counting means, first, a part of the specific period is used by the one time counting means. After the management by one of the time counting means is completed, the remaining period of the specific period is managed by the other time counting means (for example, special symbol-related timer update processing).
The time that can be counted by the one time counting means and the time that can be counted by the other time counting means are the same as each other, but are a part of the specific period managed by the one time counting means. A gaming machine characterized in that the period is different from the remaining period of the specific period managed by the other time counting means.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 45-1 gaming machine.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A time counting means (for example, a special symbol waiting time management timer area) for managing a specific period in the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The time counting means is composed of a first time counting means (for example, a high-order 2-byte timer) and a second time counting means (for example, a low-order 2-byte timer).
When the specific period is the variation display period of the identification information, first, one of the first time counting means and the second time counting means is used for a part of the variation display period. The gaming machine is characterized in that, after the management by the one time counting means is completed, the remaining period of the fluctuation display period is managed by the other time counting means (for example, special symbol-related timer update processing).

Further, in the game machine according to the 45-1 of the present invention, a part of the fluctuation display period is the first half of the fluctuation display period, and the remaining period of the fluctuation display period is the fluctuation display period. It may be the latter half of the period.

Further, in order to achieve the above d-31st object, the present invention provides the following 45-2 gaming machines.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A time counting means (for example, a special symbol waiting time management timer area) for managing a specific period in the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The time counting means is composed of a first time counting means (for example, a high-order 2-byte timer) and a second time counting means (for example, a low-order 2-byte timer).
When the specific period is the variation display period of the identification information, first, one of the first time counting means and the second time counting means is used for a part of the variation display period. After the management by one of the time counting means is completed, the remaining period of the fluctuation display period is managed by the other time counting means (for example, special symbol-related timer update processing).
A part of the fluctuation display period managed by the one time counting means and the remaining period of the fluctuation display period managed by the other time counting means are different periods from each other, and are a part of the fluctuation display period. A gaming machine characterized in that the period of is sometimes 0.

According to the 32nd to 45th gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to more efficiently execute the processing performed by the main control circuit and reduce the processing load of the main control circuit.

[46th to 56th gaming machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and provided with a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine usually has a main control board on which a circuit (main control circuit) for controlling a main game operation such as determination of identification information is mounted, and a circuit for controlling an effect operation by displaying an image or the like (main control circuit). A sub-control board on which a sub-control circuit) is mounted is provided. The game operation is controlled by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted on the main control circuit. At this time, under the control of the CPU, the program and various table data stored in the ROM (Read Only Memory) of the main control circuit are expanded in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the main control circuit, and processing related to various game operations is executed. Will be done. In recent years, such gaming machines have been required to reduce the capacity of processing programs managed by the main control circuit.

The present invention has been made to solve the 32nd problem, and a 32nd object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the capacity of a processing program managed by a main control circuit. That is.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the 46th gaming machine as follows.

With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol)). 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, a second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, a prize of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A first index table (for example, a first special symbol-related definition data table) in which reference information for calling information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored. )When,
A second index table (for example, a second special symbol-related definition data table) in which reference information for calling information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored. ), And a gaming machine.

Further, in the 46th gaming machine of the present invention, the address of the second index table is stored in the last storage area in the first index table, and the address of the second index table is stored at the last in the second index table. The address of the first index table may be stored in the storage area of.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 47-1 gaming machine.

With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol)). 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, a second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, a prize of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
Information used when executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means, and used when executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means. A gaming machine equipped with an index table in which reference information for calling information is stored.

Further, in the gaming machine of the 47-1 of the present invention, during the variable display of one of the identification information by one of the identification information display means and the second identification information display means, It may be possible to start variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means.

Further, in order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 47-2 gaming machines.

With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol)). 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, a second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, a prize of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
Information used when executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means, and used when executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means. It has an index table that stores reference information for calling information, and
In order to call up the information used when executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information and the information used when executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information in the index table. The gaming machine, wherein the address of each storage area of the reference information of the above is defined by a relative value (for example, an offset value) from the start address of the index table.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the 48th gaming machine as follows.

With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol)). 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, a second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, a prize of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A first data table (for example, a first special symbol work area table) in which information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored.
A second data table (for example, a second special symbol work area table) in which information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored is provided.
In the first data table, the second identification of the same type as the predetermined information is stored in the storage area of the address separated by a predetermined offset value from the address of the storage area of the predetermined information regarding the first identification information. Information about the information is stored,
In the second data table, the first item of the same type as the specific information is stored in the storage area of the address separated from the address of the storage area of the specific information related to the second identification information by the predetermined offset value. Information about the identification information is stored
In the process related to the variable display of the first identification information, when reading out the information related to the second identification information of the same type as the predetermined information stored in the first data table, the calculation process is performed. The means uses the address of the storage area of the predetermined information as a reference address, corrects the address by the predetermined offset value with respect to the reference address, and based on the corrected address, the same type of information as the predetermined information. Read the information about the second identification information,
In the process related to the variable display of the second identification information, when the information on the first identification information of the same type as the specific information stored in the second data table is read out, the arithmetic processing is performed. The means uses the address of the storage area of the specific information as a reference address, corrects the address by the predetermined offset value with respect to the reference address, and based on the corrected address, the same type of information as the specific information. A gaming machine characterized by reading out information related to the first identification information.

Further, in the 48th gaming machine of the present invention, the predetermined offset value may be added to the reference address in the address correction process by the arithmetic processing means.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the 49th gaming machine as follows.

With the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the second starting port 6045), either a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) or a specific gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player A game state transition determining means (for example, main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift to a crab,
The identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the game state transition determination means.
A first determining means for determining whether or not the determination result by the gaming state transition determining means is for shifting to the special gaming state, and
A second determining means for determining whether or not the determination result by the gaming state transition determining means is for shifting to the specific gaming state is provided.
A common process (for example, a special symbol hit determination process) is used in the determination process by the first determination means and the determination process by the second determination means.
A plurality of types of set values having different probabilities of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the gaming state transition determining means are provided.
The gaming state transition determining means uses data stored in a predetermined storage area designated based on a parameter (address offset value) determined according to the set value, and uses the special gaming state and the specific gaming. A gaming machine characterized in determining whether or not to shift to any of the states.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 50th gaming machine.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) in which information necessary for executing the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored, and
A storage means (for example, an IY register) capable of storing specific information when the arithmetic processing is executed by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
When the arithmetic processing means performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, the area in the storage means (for example, special symbol work) in which the information used for the arithmetic processing is stored. A gaming machine characterized in that the address information of a region table) is stored in the storage means, and the information required for the arithmetic processing is read out from the storage means by using the address information stored in the storage means.

Further, in the 50th gaming machine of the present invention, the identification information display means is
With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol)). 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, a second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, a prize of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
The arithmetic processing means
When performing arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the first identification information, the address information of the first area in the storage means in which the information used for the arithmetic processing is stored is used. The information necessary for the arithmetic processing is read from the storage means by storing it in the storage means and using it for the address information of the first area stored in the storage means.
When performing arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the second identification information, the address information of the second area in the storage means in which the information used for the arithmetic processing is stored is used. Information necessary for the arithmetic processing may be read out from the storage means by storing the information in the storage means and using the address information of the second area stored in the storage means.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 51-1 gaming machine.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) in which information necessary for executing the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored, and
A register (for example, an IY register) capable of storing specific information when the arithmetic processing is executed by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
When the arithmetic processing means performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, the area in the storage means (for example, special symbol work) in which the information used for the arithmetic processing is stored. A gaming machine characterized in that the address information of a region table) is stored in the register, and the information required for the arithmetic processing is read out from the storage means by using the address information stored in the register.

Further, in order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 51-2 gaming machines.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) in which information necessary for executing the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored, and
A first register (for example, an IY register) capable of storing specific information when the arithmetic processing means executes the arithmetic processing, and
A second register (for example, an IX register) capable of storing predetermined information when the arithmetic processing is executed by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The arithmetic processing means
When performing arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of the variable display of the identification information
The address information of the first area (for example, the special symbol work area table) in the storage means in which the information used for the arithmetic processing is stored is stored in the first register, and is stored in the first register. Using the stored address information, the information required for the arithmetic processing is read from the storage means, and the information is read.
The address information of the second area (for example, the special symbol-related definition data table) in the storage means in which the reference information for calling the information used at the time of executing the arithmetic processing is stored is stored in the second register. A gaming machine that is stored and used for the address information stored in the second register to read the reference information necessary for the arithmetic processing from the storage means.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the 52nd gaming machine as follows.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
A first initial setting means (for example, a first normal pre-game process) that performs a first initial setting process when the storage means is cleared.
A second initial setting means (for example, a second normal pre-game process) that performs a second initial setting process when the power is restored is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means includes setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
When the setting value is changed by the setting control means, the first initial setting process can be executed by the first initial setting means, and the setting control means confirms the set value. A gaming machine characterized in that the second initial setting process can sometimes be executed by the second initial setting means.

Further, in the 52nd gaming machine of the present invention, the interrupt processing execution means is further set operation means (for example, setting key 6080) that triggers execution of the setting value change processing or confirmation processing by the setting control means. ) Has a setting operation determination means (for example, S6015 during system timer interrupt processing) for determining the operation status.
When the setting control means performs the change processing of the set value and the setting operation determination means determines that the setting operation means is in the off state, the first initial setting process by the first initial setting means is executed. Then, when the setting control means performs the confirmation processing of the set value and the setting operation determination means determines that the setting operation means is in the off state, the second initial setting process by the second initial setting means May be executed.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 53-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
An initial setting means (for example, first normal game pre-processing or second normal game pre-processing) that performs initial setting processing when the power is restored or the storage means is cleared is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means includes setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the setting value is confirmed or changed by the setting control means, the initial setting process by the initial setting means can be executed.

Further, in order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 53-2 gaming machines.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
An initial setting means (for example, first normal game pre-processing or second normal game pre-processing) that performs initial setting processing when the power is restored or the storage means is cleared is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means includes setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
When the setting value confirmation process or change process is performed by the setting control means, the initial setting process by the initial setting means can be executed.
The content of the initial setting process executed by the initial setting means when the setting value is confirmed by the setting control means is that the setting value is changed by the setting control means. A gaming machine characterized in that it differs from the content of the initial setting process executed by the initial setting means.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the 54th gaming machine as follows.

The first determination means (for example, the main) for determining whether or not to shift to the first gaming state which is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first start condition (for example, the winning of the first start opening 6044). CPU6101) and
A first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first determination means.
A second determination means (for example, main) for determining whether or not to shift to a second gaming state advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start opening 6045). CPU6101) and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
The first gaming state and the second gaming state include a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state).
At least one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state further includes a specific gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the special gaming state.
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variable display of one of the identification information ends, in a specific case where the stop mode of the variable display of one of the identification information is a mode of shifting to the special gaming state or the specific gaming state, the other identification information A predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variation display of the
In the case where the stop mode of the variation display of one of the identification information is the mode of shifting to the special gaming state.
When the other identification information is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is controlled so that the variable display of the other identification information is not started.
When the other identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, the mode of stopping the variable display of the other identification information is controlled so as not to be a mode of shifting to the special gaming state or the specific gaming state. Amusement machine.

Further, in the 54th gaming machine of the present invention, an arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information is used.
A first index table (for example, a first special symbol-related definition data table) in which reference information for calling information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored. )When,
A second index table (for example, a second special symbol-related definition data table) in which reference information for calling information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored. ) And may be further provided.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the 55th gaming machine as follows.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
A first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first determination means.
A second determination means (for example, main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state advantageous to the player when the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045) is satisfied. )When,
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
A predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variable display of the first or second identification information is provided.
In a state where the variable display of the first or second identification information can be started, when the predetermined control flag for the first identification information is set to the ON state, the variable display of the first identification information is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the state of the variable display of the first identification information is set to the standby state without starting.

Further, in the 55th gaming machine of the present invention, a start condition is further satisfied for one of the identification information during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. In this case, a determination result storage means (for example, a special symbol holding number area) for storing the determination result by one of the determination means corresponding to the one identification information at the time of establishment is provided within a predetermined upper limit number.
When the predetermined control flag for the one identification information is set to the ON state in the state where the variable display of the one identification information can be started, the determination stored in the determination result storage means is performed. The process of determining the number of results (for example, S6494 during the special symbol standby process) may not be performed.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 56-1 gaming machine.

The first determination means (for example, the main) for determining whether or not to shift to the first gaming state which is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first start condition (for example, the winning of the first start opening 6044). CPU6101) and
A first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first determination means.
A second determination means (for example, main) for determining whether or not to shift to a second gaming state advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start opening 6045). CPU6101) and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
The first gaming state and the second gaming state include a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state).
At least one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state includes a specific gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the special gaming state.
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variable display of the one identification information ends, a predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variable display of the one identification information is set to the ON state. In this case, a process of determining whether or not the mode of stopping the variation display of one of the identification information is the mode of shifting to the special gaming state or the specific gaming state until at least the predetermined control flag is set to the off state. (For example, S6513 during the special symbol change end processing).

Further, in order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 56-2 gaming machines.

The first determination means (for example, the main) for determining whether or not to shift to the first gaming state which is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first start condition (for example, the winning of the first start opening 6044). CPU6101) and
A first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first determination means.
A second determination means (for example, main) for determining whether or not to shift to a second gaming state advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start opening 6045). CPU6101) and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
The first gaming state and the second gaming state include a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state).
At least one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state includes a specific gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the special gaming state.
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variable display of the one identification information ends, a predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variable display of the one identification information is set to the ON state. In this case, a process of determining whether or not the mode of stopping the variation display of one of the identification information is the mode of shifting to the special gaming state or the specific gaming state until at least the predetermined control flag is set to the off state. Is not performed (for example, S6513 during the special symbol change end processing),
When the variation display of one of the identification information ends, the predetermined control flag is set to the ON state, and the mode of stopping the variation display of one of the identification information shifts to the special gaming state. Further, when the other identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, the gaming machine is characterized in that the mode of the variable display of the other identification information is set to a mode that does not shift to the special gaming state or the specific gaming state.

According to the 46th to 56th gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit can be reduced.

[57th to 59th gaming machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and provided with a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine usually has a main control board on which a circuit (main control circuit) for controlling a main game operation such as determination of identification information is mounted, and a circuit for controlling an effect operation by displaying an image or the like (main control circuit). A sub-control board on which a sub-control circuit) is mounted is provided. The game operation is controlled by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted on the main control circuit. At this time, under the control of the CPU, the program and various table data stored in the ROM (Read Only Memory) of the main control circuit are expanded in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the main control circuit, and processing related to various game operations is executed. Will be done. In recent years, such gaming machines have been required to reduce the capacity of data such as tables managed by a main control circuit.

The present invention has been made to solve the 33rd problem, and a 33rd object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the amount of data managed by the main control circuit. Is.

In order to achieve the 33rd object, the present invention provides the 57th gaming machine as follows.

A first game that determines whether or not to shift to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). A state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 6101) and
The first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first game state transition determination means. )When,
Whether to shift to either the special gaming state or the specific gaming state (for example, the small hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the second starting condition (for example, winning of the second starting port 6045). A second game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to use
The second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second game state transition determination means. )When,
Whether or not the determination result by the first game state transition determining means shifts to the special gaming state, or the determination result by the second gaming state transition determining means is the special gaming state and the specific game. It is provided with a determination means (for example, a special symbol hit determination process) for determining whether or not the state is to be transferred to any of the states.
When the determination process is executed by the determination means, information regarding the type of identification information to be determined is used as an argument.
When the argument is the information related to the first identification information, in the determination process, only the determination as to whether or not the determination result is to shift to the special gaming state is performed.
When the argument is information related to the second identification information, in the determination process, it is determined whether or not the determination result is to be transferred to either the special gaming state or the specific gaming state. Made,
A plurality of types of set values having different probabilities of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by each of the first and second gaming state transition determining means are provided.
The first gaming state transition determining means puts the special gaming state into the special gaming state by using the data stored in the predetermined storage area designated based on the parameter (address offset value) determined according to the set value. It is determined whether or not to shift, and the second gaming state transition determining means uses the data stored in the specific storage area designated based on the parameters determined according to the set value. A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined whether or not to shift to either a special gaming state or the specific gaming state.

Further, in the 57th gaming machine of the present invention, during the variable display of one identification information by one of the identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the other is displayed. It may be possible to start variable display of the other identification information by the identification information display means.

In order to achieve the 33rd object, the present invention provides the 58th gaming machine as follows.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
It is provided with a setting operation means (for example, a setting key 6080) that is operated when executing a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
The interrupt processing execution means has a setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls the setting value change processing or confirmation processing.
The determination of the start of execution of the control process by the setting control means is performed based on the detection of a predetermined operation indicating the start of the execution of the setting operation means (for example, ON edge), and the execution of the control process by the setting control means ends. Is determined based on the detection of a specific operation (for example, OFF edge) indicating the end of the execution of the setting operation means.
The presence / absence of detection of the predetermined operation and the presence / absence of detection of the specific operation are determined by the operation information (for example, the activation control flag) indicating the operation status of the setting operation means in the previous interrupt processing and the current interrupt processing. The gaming machine, characterized in that it is performed by comparing with the operation information indicating the operation status of the setting operation means in the above.

In order to achieve the 33rd object, the present invention provides the following 59-1 gaming machines.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
A first operating means (for example, setting key 6080) operated when executing a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
A second operating means (for example, RAM clear switch 6121) that is operated when clearing the storage means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means has a setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls the setting value change processing or confirmation processing.
Whether or not the control process is executed by the setting control means is a combination of the first operation information indicating the operation status of the first operation means and the second operation information indicating the operation status of the second operation means (for example, activation). A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined based on a control flag).

Further, in order to achieve the 33rd object, the present invention provides the following 59-2 gaming machines.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
A first operating means (for example, setting key 6080) operated when executing a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
A second operating means (for example, RAM clear switch 6121) that is operated when clearing the storage means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means has a setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls the setting value change processing or confirmation processing.
Whether or not the control process is executed by the setting control means is a combination of the first operation information indicating the operation status of the first operation means and the second operation information indicating the operation status of the second operation means (for example, activation). Determined based on the control flag)
The combination of the first operation information and the second operation information when the setting value change processing is performed by the setting control means is the first operation when the setting value confirmation processing is performed by the setting control means. A gaming machine characterized in that the combination of one operation information and the second operation information is different.

According to the 57th to 59th gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, the amount of data managed by the main control circuit can be reduced.

[60th and 61st gaming machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and provided with a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the magnetism becomes unstable (disturbance) when the door / frame of the gaming machine is opened, which may adversely affect the magnetic sensor provided in the gaming machine (malfunction, etc.).

The present invention has been made to solve the 34th problem, and the 34th object of the present invention is to provide the gaming machine even if magnetic disturbance occurs when the door / frame of the gaming machine is opened. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an adverse effect on a magnetic sensor.

In order to achieve the 34th object, the present invention provides the following 60th gaming machine.

With the main body of the gaming machine (for example, main body 6002),
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
With a magnetic sensor
It is provided with an arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of the game.
When the door member is open, the arithmetic processing means clears the detection by the magnetic sensor.

Further, in the 60th gaming machine of the present invention, after the power is restored, the initialization signal of the magnetic sensor is sent to a predetermined output port in a predetermined standby process (for example, wait process) performed by the arithmetic processing means. It may be output.

Further, the 60th gaming machine of the present invention includes setting control means exposed on the back surface of the gaming machine main body, which controls a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
When the door member is open, the setting may be changed by the setting control means.

In order to achieve the 34th object, the present invention provides the following 61-1 gaming machine.

With the main body of the gaming machine (for example, main body 6002),
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
With a magnetic sensor
It is provided with an arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of the game.
A gaming machine characterized in that an initialization signal of the magnetic sensor is output to a predetermined output port in a predetermined standby process (for example, wait process) performed by the arithmetic processing means after the power failure is restored.

Further, in order to achieve the 34th object, the present invention provides the following 61-2 gaming machines.

With the main body of the gaming machine (for example, main body 6002),
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
With a magnetic sensor
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of a game, and
It is provided with an effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect according to the progress of the game.
The arithmetic processing means clears the detection by the magnetic sensor at a predetermined timing (for example, when the number of first loops is, for example, 10) within the start-up waiting time on the effect control means side after the power is restored. A featured gaming machine.

Further, in order to achieve the 34th object, the present invention provides the following 61-3 gaming machines.

With the main body of the gaming machine (for example, main body 6002),
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
With a magnetic sensor
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of a game, and
It is provided with an effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect according to the progress of the game.
The arithmetic processing means is updated within the start-up waiting time on the effect control means side after the power is restored, and when a predetermined parameter for counting the start-up waiting time reaches a predetermined value (for example, the first loop). A gaming machine characterized in that the detection by the magnetic sensor is cleared when the number of times is (for example, 10 times).

According to the 60th and 61st gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, even if magnetic disturbance occurs when the door / frame of the gaming machine is opened, the adverse effect on the magnetic sensor provided in the gaming machine is suppressed. be able to.

[62nd and 63rd gaming machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and provided with a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the door / frame of the gaming machine is opened, the magnetism becomes unstable (disturbed) or vibration occurs, and various sensors (for example, magnetic sensor, etc.) provided in the gaming machine are provided. It may have an adverse effect (malfunction, etc.) on the vibration sensor, etc.).

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned 35th problem, and a 35th object of the present invention is to play a gaming machine even if magnetic disturbance or vibration occurs when the door / frame of the gaming machine is opened. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an adverse effect on various sensors (for example, a magnetic sensor, a vibration sensor, etc.) provided in the machine.

In order to achieve the 35th object, the present invention provides the following 62-1 gaming machine.

With the main body of the gaming machine (for example, main body 6002),
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
Anomaly detection sensor that detects anomalies and
It is provided with an arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of the game.
When the door member is open, the arithmetic processing means lowers the abnormality detection level of the abnormality detection sensor.

Further, in the 62-1 gaming machine of the present invention, when the door member is open,
The arithmetic processing means may set the abnormality detection level of the abnormality detection sensor to a non-detection level.

Further, in order to achieve the 35th object, the present invention provides the following 62-2 gaming machines.

With the main body of the gaming machine (for example, main body 6002),
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
Anomaly detection sensor that detects anomalies and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of a game, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during arithmetic processing by the arithmetic control means is provided.
When the door member is open, each time the interrupt processing is executed by the interrupt processing executing means, a process of lowering or maintaining the abnormality detection level of the abnormality detection sensor is performed. ..

In order to achieve the 35th object, the present invention provides the following 63-1 gaming machine.

With the main body of the gaming machine (for example, main body 6002),
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
Anomaly detection sensor that detects anomalies and
It is provided with an arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of the game.
When the door member is open, the arithmetic processing means excludes the abnormality detection by the abnormality detection sensor from the abnormality detection target.

Further, in the 63-1 gaming machine of the present invention, information defining an abnormality detection target (for example, information of the input port 2) is provided.
When the door member is open, the arithmetic processing means may clear data (for example, a magnetic sensor bit) for which the abnormality detection sensor included in the information is an abnormality detection target. ..

Further, in order to achieve the 35th object, the present invention provides the following 63-2 gaming machines.

With the main body of the gaming machine (for example, main body 6002),
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
Anomaly detection sensor that detects anomalies and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of a game, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during arithmetic processing by the arithmetic control means is provided.
When the door member is open, a process of excluding the abnormality detection by the abnormality detection sensor from the abnormality detection target before performing the determination processing of the presence / absence of abnormality detection in the interrupt processing by the interrupt processing execution means. A game machine characterized by being performed.

According to the 62nd and 63rd gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, even if magnetic disturbance or vibration occurs when the door / frame of the gaming machine is opened, various sensors provided in the gaming machine (for example, magnetic) It is possible to suppress adverse effects on sensors, vibration sensors, etc.).

[64th and 65th gaming machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and provided with a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, in recent pachinko gaming machines, a plurality of set values (“1” to “6”) having different game advantages (for example, jackpot winning probability, etc.) are provided, and an operation for changing or confirming the set values is provided. There is a setting key to enable. Then, in such a gaming machine, there is a demand for a technique capable of more reliably grasping the operation status (on / off) of the setting key at the time of activation and accurately identifying the activation state of the gaming machine. ..

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned 36th problem, and the 36th object of the present invention is to more reliably grasp the operation status of the setting key at the time of activation and to determine the activation state of the gaming machine. It is to provide a gaming machine that can be accurately identified.

In order to achieve the 36th object, the present invention provides the following 64-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect according to the progress of the game, and
It is provided with a setting operation means (for example, a setting key 6080) that is operated when executing a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
When the power is restored, the game control means saves operation information indicating the operation status of the setting operation means before performing the activation waiting process (for example, S6205 during the main control main process) on the effect control means side. A gaming machine characterized in that (for example, S6204 during main control main processing) is performed.

Further, the 64-1 gaming machine of the present invention further includes a storage means (for example, a main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing a control process by the gaming control means.
The game control means may perform a check process of the sum value of the storage means after the activation waiting process on the effect control means side.

Further, in order to achieve the 36th object, the present invention provides the following 64-2 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect according to the progress of the game, and
It is provided with a setting operation means (for example, a setting key 6080) that is operated when executing a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
The game control means
When the power is restored, a process of saving operation information indicating the operation status of the setting operation means (for example, the main control main) before performing the activation waiting process on the effect control means side (for example, S6205 during the main control main process). Perform S6204) during processing,
After the activation waiting process on the effect control means side, the activation state determination process is performed based on the operation information indicating the operation status of the setting operation means (for example, S6218 during the main control main process). Amusement machine.

In order to achieve the 36th object, the present invention provides the following 65-1 gaming machines.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect according to the progress of the game, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
A first operating means (for example, setting key 6080) operated when executing a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
A second operating means (for example, RAM clear switch 6121) that is operated when clearing the storage means is provided.
When the power is restored, the game control means has the first operation information indicating the operation status of the first operation means before performing the activation waiting process (for example, S6205 during the main control main process) on the effect control means side. A gaming machine characterized by performing a process of saving a second operation information indicating an operation status of the second operation means (for example, S6204 during a main control main process).

Further, in order to achieve the 36th object, the present invention provides the following 65-2 gaming machines.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect according to the progress of the game, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
A first operating means (for example, setting key 6080) operated when executing a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
A second operating means (for example, RAM clear switch 6121) that is operated when clearing the storage means is provided.
The game control means
When the power is restored, the first operation information indicating the operation status of the first operation means and the second operation are performed before the start-waiting process on the effect control means side (for example, S6205 during the main control main process) is performed. A process for saving the second operation information indicating the operation status of the means (for example, S6204 during the main control main process) is performed.
After the activation waiting process on the effect control means side, the activation state determination process is performed based on the first operation information and the second operation information (for example, S6218 during the main control main process). Amusement machine.

According to the 64th and 65th gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to more reliably grasp the operation status of the setting key at the time of activation and accurately identify the activation state of the gaming machine.

[66th and 67th gaming machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a probability-changing gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as “probability-changing gaming state”) after the jackpot gaming state ends (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-103996). In the probabilistic gaming state, the identification information of a predetermined combination is derived and displayed with a higher probability than in the normal state. Further, the pachinko gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-103996 is provided with a function of performing a lottery (fall lottery) for determining whether or not a fall in the gaming state is won or not during the probabilistic gaming state. If the player wins, the probabilistic game state ends, and the game state shifts to the game state in which the identification information of a predetermined combination is derived and displayed with a probability at the normal time.

By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine usually has a main control board on which a circuit (main control circuit) for controlling a main game operation such as determination of identification information is mounted, and a circuit for controlling an effect operation by displaying an image or the like (main control circuit). A sub-control board on which a sub-control circuit) is mounted is provided. The game operation is controlled by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted on the main control circuit. At this time, under the control of the CPU, the program and various table data stored in the ROM (Read Only Memory) of the main control circuit are expanded in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the main control circuit, and processing related to various game operations is executed. Will be done. In recent years, such gaming machines have been required to reduce the capacity of processing programs managed by the main control circuit.

The present invention has been made to solve the 37th problem, and a 37th object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the capacity of a processing program managed by a main control circuit. It is to be.

In order to achieve the 37th object, the present invention provides the following 66-1 gaming machine.

A determination means (for example, a determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044) is satisfied. Main CPU 6101) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means.
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
In a highly probable gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, before the start of the variable display of the identification information. , A fall determination means (for example, a special symbol fall determination process) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state,
A first data table (for example, a normal medium fluctuation pattern table) used for determining a variation display pattern of the identification information in the first case where the gaming state is the normal gaming state,
A second data table (for example, a variation pattern table during probability variation) used when determining a variation display pattern of the identification information in the second case where the gaming state is the high probability gaming state,
A third data table (for example, at the time of a fall) used when determining a variation display pattern of the identification information in the third case where it is determined by the fall determination means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Fluctuation pattern table), equipped with
The arithmetic processing means
A parameter value (for example, a data selection offset addition value) indicating any of the first, second, and third cases is set according to the current gaming situation.
In the third case, the third data table is selected as the data table for determining the variation display pattern of the identification information based on the value of the parameter corresponding to the third case. A featured gaming machine.

Further, in order to achieve the 37th object, the present invention provides the following 66-2 gaming machines.

A determination means (for example, a determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044) is satisfied. Main CPU 6101) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means.
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
In a highly probable gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, before the start of the variable display of the identification information. , A fall determination means (for example, a special symbol fall determination process) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state,
A first selection table (for example, a special symbol variation pattern selection offset table) in which data relating to a plurality of types of selectable variation display patterns of the identification information (for example, effect variation table values) are defined, and
A plurality of types of second selection tables (for example, for example, in which reference addresses in the first selection table are defined as a reference when data relating to a variation display pattern of a predetermined identification information is selected from the first selection table. Special symbol fluctuation pattern selection table group) and
A third selection table (for example, a special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table) in which data relating to the plurality of types of second selection tables are defined is provided.
The arithmetic processing means
Set the value of the parameter indicating the game status (for example, the data selection offset addition value) to the value corresponding to the current game status, and set it.
Based on predetermined information (for example, jackpot symbol, gaming state, etc.), data relating to a predetermined second selection table is selected from the third selection table, and the selected data relating to the predetermined second selection table is provided. Based on the data, the reference address in the first selection table defined in the predetermined second selection table is acquired, and the reference address is acquired.
When the value of the parameter is a specific value (for example, "2") corresponding to when it is determined by the fall determining means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state, the first selection is made. A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display pattern of the identification information corresponding to the data defined in the address obtained by adding the offset value corresponding to the specific value to the reference address in the table is selected.

In order to achieve the 37th object, the present invention provides the following 67-1 gaming machine.

A determination means (for example, main) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). CPU6101) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means.
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
In a highly probable gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, before the start of the variable display of the identification information. , A fall determination means (for example, a special symbol fall determination process) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state,
In the first case where the gaming state after the end of the variation display of the identification information is the normal gaming state, the first data table (for example, the variation during normal) used when determining the variation display pattern of the identification information. Pattern table) and
A second data table (for example, during probabilistic change) used when determining the variable display pattern of the identification information in the second case where the gaming state after the end of the variable display of the identification information is the high probability gaming state. Fluctuation pattern table) and
A third data table (for example, at the time of a fall) used when determining a variation display pattern of the identification information in the third case where it is determined by the fall determination means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Fluctuation pattern table), equipped with
The arithmetic processing means
A parameter value (for example, a data selection offset addition value) indicating any of the first, second, and third cases is set according to the current gaming situation.
In the first case, the data table is selected as the data table for determining the variation display pattern of the identification information based on the value of the parameter corresponding to the first case.
In the second case, the second data table is selected as the data table for determining the variation display pattern of the identification information based on the value of the parameter corresponding to the second case.
In the third case, the third data table is selected as the data table for determining the variation display pattern of the identification information based on the value of the parameter corresponding to the third case. A featured gaming machine.

Further, in the gaming machine of the 67-1 of the present invention, the value of the parameter corresponding to the second case and the value of the parameter corresponding to the third case correspond to the first case. The offset value may be set with the value of the parameter to be used as a reference value.

Further, in order to achieve the 37th object, the present invention provides the following 67-2 gaming machines.

A determination means (for example, a determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044) is satisfied. Main CPU 6101) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means.
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
In a highly probable gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, before the start of the variable display of the identification information. , A fall determination means (for example, a special symbol fall determination process) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state,
A first selection table (for example, a special symbol variation pattern selection offset table) in which data relating to a plurality of types of selectable variation display patterns of the identification information (for example, effect variation table values) are defined, and
A plurality of types of second selection tables (for example, for example, in which reference addresses in the first selection table are defined as a reference when data relating to a variation display pattern of a predetermined identification information is selected from the first selection table. Special symbol fluctuation pattern selection table group) and
A third selection table (for example, a special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table) in which data relating to the plurality of types of second selection tables are defined is provided.
The arithmetic processing means
Set the value of the parameter indicating the game status (for example, the data selection offset addition value) to the value corresponding to the current game status, and set it.
Based on predetermined information (for example, jackpot symbol, gaming state, etc.), data relating to a predetermined second selection table is selected from the third selection table, and the selected data relating to the predetermined second selection table is provided. Based on the data, the reference address in the first selection table defined in the predetermined second selection table is acquired, and the reference address is acquired.
When the value of the parameter is the first specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the game state after the end of the variation display of the identification information is the normal game state, the first Select the variation display pattern of the identification information corresponding to the data specified in the reference address in the selection table of
When the value of the parameter is the second specific value (for example, "1") corresponding to the case where the gaming state after the end of the variation display of the identification information is the high probability gaming state, the first In the selection table of 1, the variation display pattern of the identification information corresponding to the data defined by the address obtained by adding the offset value corresponding to the second specific value to the reference address is selected.
When the value of the parameter is a third specific value (for example, "2") corresponding to when it is determined by the fall determination means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state, the first A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display pattern of the identification information corresponding to the data defined in the address obtained by adding the offset value corresponding to the third specific value to the reference address in the selection table of 1 is selected. ..

According to the 66th and 67th gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit can be reduced.

[68th and 69th gaming machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a probability-changing gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as “probability-changing gaming state”) after the jackpot gaming state ends (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-103996). In the probabilistic gaming state, the identification information of a predetermined combination is derived and displayed with a higher probability than in the normal state. Further, the pachinko gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-103996 is provided with a function of performing a lottery (fall lottery) for determining whether or not a fall in the gaming state is won or not during the probabilistic gaming state. If the player wins, the probabilistic game state ends, and the game state shifts to the game state in which the identification information of a predetermined combination is derived and displayed with a probability at the normal time.

By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine usually has a main control board on which a circuit (main control circuit) for controlling a main game operation such as determination of identification information is mounted, and a circuit for controlling an effect operation by displaying an image or the like (main control circuit). A sub-control board on which a sub-control circuit) is mounted is provided. The game operation is controlled by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted on the main control circuit. At this time, under the control of the CPU, the program and various table data stored in the ROM (Read Only Memory) of the main control circuit are expanded in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the main control circuit, and processing related to various game operations is executed. Will be done. In recent years, in such gaming machines, there is a demand for the development of a technique capable of more efficiently executing the processing performed by the main control circuit and reducing the processing load of the main control circuit.

The present invention has been made to solve the 38th problem, and the 38th object of the present invention is to more efficiently execute the processing performed by the main control circuit and reduce the processing load of the main control circuit. It is to provide a gaming machine that can be played.

In order to achieve the 38th object, the present invention provides the following 68-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means has an abnormality monitoring means (for example, general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing) capable of monitoring a plurality of types of abnormality items.
The abnormality monitoring means is a gaming machine characterized in that, for an abnormality item that is not to be monitored, the determination result of the presence or absence of the abnormality is no abnormality regardless of the presence or absence of the abnormality of the abnormality item.

Further, in the gaming machine of the 68-1 of the present invention, monitoring specific information that defines whether or not to monitor each of the plurality of types of abnormal items is provided.
The abnormality monitoring means may determine the presence or absence of an abnormality in the abnormality item based on the information indicating the presence or absence of the abnormality in the abnormality item and the monitoring specific information.

Further, in order to achieve the 38th object, the present invention provides the following 68-2 gaming machines.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means has an abnormality monitoring means (for example, general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing) capable of monitoring a plurality of types of abnormality items.
The abnormality monitoring means determines that there is no abnormality in the abnormality item that is not to be monitored, regardless of the presence or absence of the abnormality in the abnormality item.
A gaming machine characterized in that the monitoring process by the abnormality monitoring means is not executed when the game is not permitted.

In order to achieve the 38th object, the present invention provides the following 69-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means has an abnormality monitoring means (for example, general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing) capable of monitoring a plurality of types of abnormality items.
Monitoring specific information that defines whether or not to monitor each of the plurality of types of abnormal items is provided.
The abnormality monitoring means is
Based on the information indicating the presence or absence of abnormality in the abnormal item and the monitoring specific information, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined for the abnormal item, and the determination is repeated for all the abnormal items.
A gaming machine characterized in that in the determination of an abnormal item that is not to be monitored, the determination result of the presence or absence of an abnormality is no abnormality regardless of the presence or absence of the abnormality of the abnormal item.

Further, in the game machine of the 69-1 of the present invention, does the abnormality monitoring means monitor information indicating the presence or absence of abnormality of the abnormality item and the abnormality item specified in the monitoring specific information? A logical product operation with the information of whether or not is performed may be performed, and the presence or absence of an abnormality of the abnormal item may be determined based on the result of the logical product operation.

Further, in order to achieve the 38th object, the present invention provides the following 69-2 gaming machines.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means has an abnormality monitoring means (for example, general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing) capable of monitoring a plurality of types of abnormality items.
Monitoring specific information that defines whether or not to monitor each of the plurality of types of abnormal items is provided.
The abnormality monitoring means is
Based on the information indicating the presence or absence of abnormality in the abnormal item and the monitoring specific information, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined for the abnormal item, and the determination is repeated for all the abnormal items.
In the judgment for an abnormal item that is not to be monitored, the judgment result of the presence or absence of an abnormality is set to no abnormality regardless of the presence or absence of the abnormality of the abnormal item.
A gaming machine characterized in that the monitoring process by the abnormality monitoring means is not executed when the game is not permitted.

According to the 68th and 69th gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to more efficiently execute the processing performed by the main control circuit and reduce the processing load of the main control circuit.

[70th and 71st gaming machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a probability-changing gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as “probability-changing gaming state”) after the jackpot gaming state ends (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-103996). In the probabilistic gaming state, the identification information of a predetermined combination is derived and displayed with a higher probability than in the normal state. Further, the pachinko gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-103996 is provided with a function of performing a lottery (fall lottery) for determining whether or not a fall in the gaming state is won or not during the probabilistic gaming state. If the player wins, the probabilistic game state ends, and the game state shifts to the game state in which the identification information of a predetermined combination is derived and displayed with a probability at the normal time.

By the way, conventionally, in a gaming machine having the above-mentioned fall lottery function, it is required to suppress a decline in the interest of the game even when the fall lottery is won.

The present invention has been made to solve the 39th problem, and the 39th object of the present invention is to reduce the interest of the game at the time of winning the fall lottery in a gaming machine having a fall lottery function. It is to provide a technology capable of suppressing.

In order to achieve the 39th object, the present invention provides the 70th gaming machine as follows.

A determination means (for example, a determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044) is satisfied. Main CPU 6101) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means.
In a highly probable gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, before the start of the variable display of the identification information. , A fall determination means (for example, a special symbol fall determination process) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state,
An external signal output means that continues to output a predetermined external signal (for example, a first big hit signal) during a high winning game state (for example, a time-saving game state) in which the probability that the predetermined start condition is satisfied is high is provided.
When it is determined by the fall determination means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state and the high winning gaming state ends, the external signal output means until the variation display of the identification information ends. A gaming machine characterized in that the output of the predetermined external signal is extended.

Further, in the 70th gaming machine of the present invention, an extension flag (for example, a first jackpot signal extension flag) indicating whether or not to extend the output of the predetermined external signal is provided.
When it is determined by the fall determination means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state and the high winning gaming state ends, the extension flag is turned on before the start of the variation display of the identification information. , The extension flag may be turned off at the end of the variable display of the identification information.

In order to achieve the 39th object, the present invention provides the 71st gaming machine as follows.

A determination means (for example, a determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044) is satisfied. Main CPU 6101) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means.
In a highly probable gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, before the start of the variable display of the identification information. , A fall determination means (for example, a special symbol fall determination process) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state,
An external signal that continues to output a predetermined external signal (for example, a first jackpot signal) during a high-winning gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) in which the probability that the predetermined start condition is satisfied is high, and during the special gaming state. With signal output means,
When it is determined by the fall determining means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state and the high winning gaming state ends, and when the high probability gaming state is in progress, the special gaming is performed by the determining means. When the transition to the state is determined and the high winning gaming state ends, the output of the predetermined external signal by the external signal output means is extended until the variable display of the identification information ends. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Further, the 71st gaming machine of the present invention is further provided with a notification lamp (for example, a time saving lamp) that lights up during the high winning gaming state and turns off when the high winning gaming state ends. You may.

According to the 70th and 71st gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game at the time of winning the fall lottery.

1 Pachislot (game machine)
44 Cabinet side relay board (equipment relay section, first relay board)
47 External centralized terminal board (external output board, first output device)
68 Door relay terminal board (equipment relay unit, second relay board, third relay board)
71 Main control board (main control unit)
74 Reel relay terminal board (equipment relay section, second relay board)
301 IF1 (connection relay unit, first connection relay unit)
302 IF2 (connection relay section, second connection relay section)
401 Input / output device (second input device)
402 Testing machine (testing equipment)
404L 1st stepping motor (input / output device, 2nd output device)
404C 2nd stepping motor (input / output device, 2nd output device)
404R 3rd stepping motor (input / output device, 2nd output device)
405L 1st index sensor (input / output device, 1st input device)
405C 2nd index sensor (input / output device, 1st input device)
405R 3rd index sensor (input / output device, 1st input device)
6001 Pachinko game machine (game machine)
6030 Main control board 6100 Main control circuit (main control unit)
6300 Payout / launch control circuit (payout control unit)
7001 Test relay terminal board (connection relay)
7003 Test equipment 7004a to 7004f Buffer board (buffer part)
7012 test signal output circuit (payout control test signal output circuit)

Claims (1)

With the establishment of the first start condition as an opportunity, the first determination means for determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state advantageous to the player,
Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the first identification information display means for variablely displaying the first identification information, and the first identification information display means.
With the establishment of the second start condition as an opportunity, a second determination means for determining whether or not to shift the player to the advantageous special gaming state, and
A second identification information display means for variablely displaying the second identification information based on the determination result by the second determination means is provided.
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
In the specific case, the predetermined control flag is turned on so as not to start the variable display of the other identification information, and when the special gaming state executed based on the determination result of the one end is completed. , The predetermined control flag is turned off, and the variation display of the other identification information based on the determination result of the other is started.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images